DIRECT DIGITIZER

Installation/Service Manual

Version 1.09

EN 02
 Contents

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.6 Login with a service account . . . . . . . . . . 58

2.6.1 Login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.6.2 Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Disclaimer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.7 Screen transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Trademark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.8 Operating the service tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Option/license. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.8.1 Startup of the service tool . . . . . . . . . . 60
Terms description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.8.2 Exiting from the service tool. . . . . . . . . 61
Structure of pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.8.3 Startup of the setting tool. . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.8.4 Switching to the user tool. . . . . . . . . . . 64
Chapter 1 2.8.5 How to display the intermediate
Safety Precautions & screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.8.6 Functions of the intermediate
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.1 Symbols relating to safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 2.9 Service tool screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.1.1 Safety alert symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.9.1 Structure of the device icon screen . . 67
1.1.2 Warning notice (signal words). . . . . . . 20
2.9.2 Structure of the sub-menu screen . . . 69
1.1.3 Description of graphic symbols . . . . . . 20
2.10 User tool screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1.2 Warning labels/instruction displays . . . . . 21
1.2.1 Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Chapter 3
1.2.2 This device (during the portable X-ray
device operation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Preparation for Installation. . . . 71
1.3 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.1 Preparation of tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
1.3.1 General caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.2 Check of the installation environment . . . 73
1.3.2 Caution during operation. . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.2.1 Check of the power supply
1.3.3 LCD monitor precautions. . . . . . . . . . . 23 condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1.3.4 Precaution when temporarily stopping 3.2.2 Check of the installation location. . . . . 73
use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 3.3 Check of the network environment . . . . . . 74
1.3.5 Precaution when resuming usage. . . . 23 3.3.1 IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1.3.6 Precaution regarding disposal. . . . . . . 23 3.3.2 Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.3.3 Ethernet cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 4
2.1 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Installation Procedure for This
2.1.1 System configuration example. . . . . . . 26 Device and AeroDR SYSTEM
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR
SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
(SRM connection) . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.2.1 Example of connection in the 4.1 Connection example of this device and
exposure room. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection) . . . . 78
2.2.2 Example of connection with the 4.2 The workflow to install this device and
portable X-ray device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection) . . . . 79
2.2.3 Connection example of the AeroDR 4.3 Check of bundled items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Stitching System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 4.4 Check of startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.2.4 Connection example of the Screening 4.4.1 Temporary connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 4.4.2 Check of startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.3 Connection example of REGIUS . . . . . . . 50 4.5 Setting of touch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.3.1 1-to-1 connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 4.5.1 Installation of the driver for the touch
2.3.2 n-to-m connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.4 Connection example of REGIUS SIGMA/ 4.5.2 Adjusting the position of the touch
SIGMA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.5 Component name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 4.6 Registration of license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2.5.1 This device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . 89
2.5.2 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 4.7.1 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM . . . 89
2.5.3 This device (during the portable X-ray 4.7.2 Startup of respective devices. . . . . . . . 89
device operation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 4.8 System setting of this device . . . . . . . . . . 90

3
Contents

4.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related 4.20.4 Consolidation of exposure room

devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . 94 4.20.5 Resetting of device information. . . . . 153
4.10.1 Flow chart for setting up 4.20.6 Synchronization of the RM client
the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting 4.20.7 Restart of RM hybrid machines. . . . . 157
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 4.20.8 Restart of RM client machine. . . . . . . 157
4.10.3 RM setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 4.20.9 Checking the synchronization state
4.10.4 Exposure room setting . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 on the RM client machine . . . . . . . . . 157
4.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting . . . . . . . 97 4.20.10 Power on/off linkage settings. . . . . . . 158
4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data 4.21 Optional installation and data
registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector 4.21.1 Optional installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 4.21.2 Data migration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 102 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this
4.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting . . . . 104 device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 106 4.23 Final operation check and delivery . . . . . 164
4.10.11 AeroDR Generator Interface Unit 4.23.1 Exposure confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . 164
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 4.23.2 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting . . . . . . . . . . 113
4.10.13 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Chapter 5
4.10.14 AeroDR 1012HQ Settings. . . . . . . . . 114
Installation Procedure for This
4.11 Setting of the IP address of
this device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Device and AeroDR SYSTEM
4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync (Aero Sync connection) . . . . . 165
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 5.1 Connection example of this device and
4.13 Restart of this device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 AeroDR SYSTEM
4.14 Change of network of this device/ (Aero Sync connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
addition of AeroDR Detector after 5.2 The workflow to install this device and
completing the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 AeroDR SYSTEM
4.14.1 When changing the network setting
(Aero Sync connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
of this device after completing the
5.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.14.2 When adding an AeroDR Detector. . 124
5.3.1 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM
4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector . . . . . . . . . 126
related devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.15.1 Flow chart of AeroDR Detector
5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 171
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.4.1 Flow chart for setting up
4.15.2 Analysis of AeroDR Detector. . . . . . . 127
the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.15.3 Calibration of AeroDR Detector. . . . . 131
5.4.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
4.16 Deployment to the installation location
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
and connection to the institution 5.4.3 RM setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 5.4.4 Exposure room setting . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.16.1 Deployment of respective devices to 5.4.5 AeroDR Access Point setting . . . . . . 174
the installation locations. . . . . . . . . . . 136 5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
4.16.2 Connecting to institution network. . . . 136 registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
4.17 Peripheral devices setting . . . . . . . . . . . 137 5.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector
4.17.1 Preparation for setting communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
the DRYPRO 832. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 5.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 179
4.18 Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 5.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting . . . . 181
4.19 Confirmation of the version of this 5.4.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 182
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.20 Roaming environment settings . . . . . . . . 146 5.4.12 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
4.20.1 Workflow to set roaming 5.4.13 AeroDR 1012HQ Settings. . . . . . . . . 187
environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 5.5 Change of network of this device/
4.20.2 Advance preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 addition of AeroDR Detector after
4.20.3 RM client machine settings . . . . . . . . 147 completing the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

4
 Contents

5.5.1 When changing the network setting 6.7 Check and setting adjustments of
of this device after completing the REGIUS 170/190/210 images . . . . . . . . 237
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 6.7.1 Check of the image quality of
5.5.2 When adding an AeroDR Detector. . 190 REGIUS 170/190/210 . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector . . . . . . . . . 192 6.7.2 Check of the pixel count and the
5.6.1 Flow chart of AeroDR Detector reading start position of REGIUS
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 170/190/210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.6.2 Analysis of AeroDR Detector. . . . . . . 193 6.7.3 Adjustment of PLL value and the
5.6.3 Calibration of AeroDR Detector. . . . . 197 reading start position of REGIUS
5.7 Roaming environment settings . . . . . . . . 201 170/190/210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5.7.1 Workflow to set roaming 6.8 Connection of this device and REGIUS
environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 to the institution network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.7.2 Advance preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 6.9 Backup of the setting data of
5.7.3 RM client machine settings . . . . . . . . 202 REGIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
5.7.4 Consolidation of exposure room 6.10 REGIUS common environment
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5.7.5 Resetting of device information. . . . . 208
5.7.6 Synchronization of the RM client Chapter 7
machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
5.7.7 Restart of RM hybrid machine. . . . . . 212
The Mixed Installation
5.7.8 Restart of RM client machines. . . . . . 212 Procedure for This Device,
5.7.9 Checking the synchronization state AeroDR SYSTEM and
on the RM client machine . . . . . . . . . 212
5.7.10 Power on/off linkage settings. . . . . . . 213 REGIUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5.8 Final operation check and delivery . . . . . 216 7.1 The workflow to install this device,
5.8.1 Exposure confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . 216 AeroDR SYSTEM and REGIUS . . . . . . . 250
5.8.2 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 7.2 Temporary connections and startup of
devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Chapter 6 7.2.1 Temporary connections of devices. . 252
Installation Procedure for 7.2.2 Startup of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related
This Device and REGIUS . . . . 217 devices and REGIUS icon . . . . . . . . . . . 253
6.1 The workflow to install this device and 7.4 Connection of this device, AeroDR
REGIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 SYSTEM, and REGIUS to the institution
6.2 Temporary connections and startup of network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
6.2.1 Temporary connections of devices. . 219 Chapter 8
6.2.2 Startup of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
6.3 System setting of this device . . . . . . . . . 220
Installation Procedure for
6.4 Activation of REGIUS icon . . . . . . . . . . . 222 This Device and REGIUS
6.5 REGIUS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 SIGMA/SIGMA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
6.5.1 Displaying the CR unit setting
8.1 The workflow to install this device and
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6.5.2 Basic settings of REGIUS . . . . . . . . . 224
8.2 Temporary connections and startup of
6.5.3 JM setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
6.5.4 REGIUS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
6.5.5 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 8.2.1 Temporary connections of devices. . 259
8.2.2 Startup of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6.6 Check and setting adjustments of
8.3 System setting of this device . . . . . . . . . 263
REGIUS 110/110HQ images . . . . . . . . . 229
6.6.1 Check of the image quality of 8.4 Activation of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
REGIUS 110/110HQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
6.6.2 Check of the pixel count and the 8.5 Restart of this device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
reading start position of REGIUS 8.6 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 setting . . . . . . 267
110/110HQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 8.6.1 Displaying the CR unit setting
6.6.3 Adjustment of the settings of the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
image size and position of REGIUS 8.6.2 Basic settings of REGIUS SIGMA/
110/110HQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 SIGMA2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

5
Contents

8.6.3 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 setting . . . 268 10.5.2 Adjusting the position of the touch
8.6.4 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
8.7 Check and setting adjustments of 10.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 images . . . . . 270 Portable RF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
8.7.1 Check of the pixel count and the 10.6.1 Temporary connections of AeroDR
reading start position of REGIUS Portable RF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
SIGMA/SIGMA2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 10.6.2 Startup of respective devices. . . . . . . 296
8.7.2 Adjustment of the settings of the 10.7 System setting of this device . . . . . . . . . 297
image size and position of REGIUS 10.8 Setting of user tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
SIGMA/SIGMA2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 10.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related
8.8 Connection of this device to devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
the institution network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 304
8.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS 10.10.1 Flow chart for setting up
SIGMA/SIGMA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
10.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
Chapter 9 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
The Mixed Installation 10.10.3 RM setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
10.10.4 Exposure room setting . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Procedure for This Device, 10.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting . . . . . . 307
AeroDR SYSTEM and 10.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2. . . . . 281 registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector
310

9.1 The workflow to install this device, communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

AeroDR SYSTEM and 10.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 312
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 . . . . . . . . . . . 282 10.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting . . . . 314
9.2 Temporary connections and startup of 10.10.10 AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting. . . . 315
devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 10.10.11 AeroDR Detector setting . . . . . . . . . . 317
9.2.1 Temporary connections of devices. . 283 10.10.12 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
9.2.2 Startup of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 10.10.13 AeroDR 1012HQ Settings. . . . . . . . . 318
9.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related 10.11 Delay time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
devices and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 10.11.1 Prep-Delay time measurement . . . . . 320
icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 10.12 Analysis of AeroDR Detector . . . . . . . . 323
9.4 Connection of this device, AeroDR 10.13 Deployment to the installation locations
SYSTEM, and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 and connection to the institution
to the institution network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
10.13.1 Deployment of respective devices to
Chapter 10 the installation locations. . . . . . . . . . . 324
Installation Procedure for 10.13.2 Connection to the institution
network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
This Device and AeroDR 10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access
Portable RF Unit Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
(S-SRM connection) . . . . . . . . 289 10.14.1 Preset Channel Setting . . . . . . . . . . . 325
10.14.2 AeroDR Access Point auto setting. . . 327
10.1 Connection example of this device and 10.14.3 AeroDR Access Point manual
AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
(S-SRM connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 10.14.4 Addition of the AeroDR Access Point
10.2 The workflow to install this device and information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
AeroDR Portable RF Unit 10.14.5 Change of the AeroDR Access Point
(S-SRM connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
10.3 Check of bundled items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 10.14.6 Deletion of the AeroDR Access Point
10.4 Check of startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
10.4.1 Attachment of accessories. . . . . . . . . 294 10.15 Network configuration for each area . . . 336
10.4.2 Check of startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 10.15.1 Creating a new area. . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
10.5 Hardware setting of this device . . . . . . . 295 10.15.2 Network configuration for each
10.5.1 Attachment of external CD/DVD area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 10.15.3 Initial area selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
10.15.4 Other settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

6
 Contents

10.16 Final operation check and delivery . . . . . 341 12.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR
10.16.1 Exposure confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
10.16.2 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 12.6.1 Temporary connections of AeroDR
Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Chapter 11 12.6.2 Startup of respective devices. . . . . . . 375
Installation Procedure for 12.7 System setting of this device . . . . . . . . . 376
12.8 Setting of user tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
This Device and AeroDR 12.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related
Portable RF Unit devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
(SRM connection) . . . . . . . . . . 343 12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 382
12.10.1 Flow chart for setting up
11.1 Connection example of this device and
the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
AeroDR Portable RF Unit
12.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
(SRM connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
11.2 The workflow to install this device and 12.10.3 RM setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
AeroDR Portable RF Unit 12.10.4 Exposure room setting . . . . . . . . . . . 384
(SRM connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 12.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting . . . . . . 385
11.3 System setting of this device . . . . . . . . . 347 12.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
11.3.1 System setting for this device . . . . . . 347 registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 350 12.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector
11.4.1 Flow chart for setting up communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 12.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 390
11.4.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting 12.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting . . . . 392
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 12.10.10 AeroDR Detector setting . . . . . . . . . . 393
11.4.3 RM setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 12.10.11 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
11.4.4 Exposure room setting . . . . . . . . . . . 352 12.10.12 AeroDR 1012HQ Settings. . . . . . . . . 395
11.4.5 AeroDR Access Point setting . . . . . . 353 12.11 Setting of the wireless LAN with the
11.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data AeroDR Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . 397
registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 12.11.1 Setting of the IP address of
11.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector the built-in wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . 397
communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 12.11.2 Network setting of the built-in wireless
11.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 358 LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
11.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting . . . . 360 12.12 Removal of temporarily connected
11.4.10 AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting. . . . 361 Ethernet cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
11.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting . . . . . . . . . . 363 12.13 Analysis of AeroDR Detector . . . . . . . . . 403
11.4.12 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
12.14 Deployment to the installation locations
11.4.13 AeroDR 1012HQ Settings. . . . . . . . . 364
and connection to the institution
Chapter 12 network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
12.14.1 Deployment of respective devices to
Installation Procedure for the installation locations. . . . . . . . . . . 404
This Device and AeroDR 12.14.2 Connection to the institution
network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . 367 12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access
12.1 Connection example of this device and Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
AeroDR Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 12.15.1 Preset Channel Setting . . . . . . . . . . . 405
12.2 The workflow to install this device and 12.15.2 AeroDR Access Point auto setting. . . 407
AeroDR Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 12.15.3 AeroDR Access Point manual
12.3 Check of bundled items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
12.4 Check of startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 12.15.4 Addition of the AeroDR Access Point
12.4.1 Attachment of accessories. . . . . . . . . 373 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
12.4.2 Check of startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 12.15.5 Change of the AeroDR Access Point
12.5 Hardware setting of this device . . . . . . . 374 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
12.5.1 Attachment of external CD/DVD 12.15.6 Deletion of the AeroDR Access Point
drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
12.5.2 Adjusting the position of the touch 12.16 Network configuration for each area . . . 416
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 12.16.1 Creating a new area. . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

7
Contents

12.16.2 Network configuration for each 14.1.1 Start and check of the Ethernet-serial
area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
12.16.3 Initial area selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 14.1.2 Ethernet-serial converter network
12.16.4 Other settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
12.17 Final operation check and delivery . . . . . 421 14.1.3 Change of the Ethernet-serial
12.17.1 Exposure confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . 421 converter address and connection of
12.17.2 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 this device and the Ethernet-serial
12.17.3 Chassis registration preparation . . . . 421 converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
14.1.4 Searching for Ethernet-serial
Chapter 13 converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Installation Procedure for 14.1.5 Change of the mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
14.1.6 LAN and serial settings . . . . . . . . . . . 453
This Device and AeroDR 14.1.7 Setting confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Stitching Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 14.1.8 Changing the mode again. . . . . . . . . 454
14.1.9 Closing the TA remote setup. . . . . . . 454
13.1 Connection example of this device and
14.1.10 Other settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
AeroDR Stitching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
14.1.11 New RemoteCOM registration. . . . . . 455
13.2 The workflow to install this device and
14.1.12 Change of RemoteCOM settings. . . . 457
AeroDR Stitching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
14.1.13 Confirmation of the RemoteCOM
13.3 Temporary connection of AeroDR settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Stitching System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 14.1.14 Confirmation of operation. . . . . . . . . 460
13.4 Activation of AeroDR Stitching 14.2 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 (MOXA Nport 5110A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
13.5 AeroDR Stitching System setting . . . . . 428 14.2.1 Temporary connection of this device
13.5.1 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching and the Ethernet-serial converter and
Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 the X-ray device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
13.5.2 Setting the AeroDR UF Cable in the 14.2.2 Ethernet-serial converter setting . . . . 461
AeroDR Stitching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 14.3 Connection of this device and the hub for
13.6 Saving of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 portable X-ray device side . . . . . . . . . . . 466
13.7 Setting of user tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board . . . 467
13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching 14.4.1 Changing of the bracket. . . . . . . . . . . 467
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 14.4.2 Add-in Ethernet board installation. . . 468
13.8.1 Checking the AeroDR Stitching 14.4.3 Add-in Ethernet board connection
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
13.8.2 Adjusting SID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 14.4.4 Network setting of add-in Ethernet
13.8.3 Illumination gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
13.8.4 Threshold magnification settings. . . . 438 14.5 Installing additional memory . . . . . . . . . . 473
13.8.5 Initializing exposure position 14.6 Installation of the USB wired LAN
correction value (when correcting adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
picture top position). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 14.6.1 Driver installation of USB wired LAN
13.8.6 Measuring the picture top position adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
correction value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 14.6.2 Network setting of the USB wired
13.8.7 Measuring the picture center position LAN adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
correction value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
14.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter
13.8.8 Initializing exposure position
(USB type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
correction value (when correcting
14.7.1 The workflow to install the wireless
picture lower position) . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
LAN adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
13.8.9 Measuring the picture lower position
14.7.2 Installation of the wireless LAN
correction value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
adapter driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
13.8.10 Setting the correction values. . . . . . . 447
14.7.3 Connection of the wireless LAN
13.8.11 Correction values confirmation . . . . . 448
adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Chapter 14 14.7.4 Setting of the wireless LAN
adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Installation of Options. . . . . . . 449 14.8 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter
14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (card type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
(SYSMEX RA TA-402X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 14.8.1 Installation of the wireless LAN
adapter driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

8
 Contents

14.8.2 Setting of the wireless LAN 14.16.1 Basic operation of the Bluetooth bar
adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 code reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
14.9 Attaching of a high precision monitor . . 483 14.16.2 Charging of the Bluetooth bar code
14.9.1 Attaching of a high precision reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 14.16.3 Turning on the power of the Bluetooth
14.9.2 High precision monitor setting. . . . . . 484 bar code reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
14.9.3 Setting the multi monitor 14.16.4 Turning off the power of the Bluetooth
environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 bar code reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
14.10 Attaching of the sub monitor . . . . . . . . . . 489 14.16.5 Setting of the HID connection . . . . . . 524
14.10.1 Installation of the Sub Monitor 14.16.6 Setting of the Bluetooth
Adaptor driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
14.10.2 Checking of the bundled items. . . . . 491 14.16.7 Setting of multiple reading of bar
14.10.3 Attachment of the sub monitor . . . . . 491 codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
14.10.4 Setting the Sub Monitor Adaptor . . . . 493 14.16.8 Setting of the data format. . . . . . . . . 527
14.10.5 Modification of the Sub Monitor 14.16.9 Setting of the read time-out time. . . . 528
Adaptor IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 14.16.10 Setting of the NW7 start/stop
14.10.6 Additional Settings for Using an code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Expansion Ethernet Board. . . . . . . . . 496 14.16.11 Setting of the minimum number of
14.11 Attaching of a monitor for checking digits for bar codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 14.16.12 Selection and setting of the bar code
14.11.1 Attaching of a monitor for checking to be used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 14.16.13 Setting of the date of bar code
14.11.2 Setting of a monitor for checking reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 14.16.14 Initialization of bar code reader. . . . . 529
14.12 Installation of the monitor for checking 14.16.15 Memory Data Deletion. . . . . . . . . . . . 530
images (via NetDA-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 14.16.16 Clearing Data Storage Settings. . . . . 530
14.12.1 Installation of the NetDA-1 driver. . . . 501 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1 . . . . . . . . . 531
14.12.2 Checking of the bundled items of the 14.17.1 Basic operation of the PDA Type1. . . 531
NetDA-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 14.17.2 Setting of this device. . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
14.12.3 Attaching of the NetDA-1 and monitor 14.17.3 Setting of maintenance personal
for checking images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
14.12.4 Setting the NetDA-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 14.17.4 Setting of the PDA Type1. . . . . . . . . . 540
14.12.5 Modification of the NetDA-1 IP 14.17.5 Other settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2 . . . . . . . . . 554
14.12.6 Change of the display setting of the 14.18.1 Basic operation of the PDA Type2. . . 554
monitor for checking images . . . . . . . 508 14.18.2 Setting of this device. . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
14.13 Installation of the FPM-5171G 14.18.3 Setting of maintenance personal
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
14.13.1 Installation of the touch panel 14.18.4 Setting of the PDA Type2. . . . . . . . . . 563
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 14.18.5 Other settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
14.13.2 Adjustment of touch sensor. . . . . . . . 511 14.19 UPS installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
14.13.3 Windows setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
14.13.4 Final adjustment of the touch Chapter 15
sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Installation of Function
14.14 Installation of magnetic card reader . . . . 517
14.14.1 Installation of magnetic card
System Options. . . . . . . . . . . . 581
reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 15.1 Setting of the S-SRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
14.14.2 Magnetic card reader connection 15.1.1 S-SRM installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 15.1.2 Exposure room setting. . . . . . . . . . . . 582
14.15 Installation of bar code readers . . . . . . . 521 15.1.3 Prep-Delay time measurement . . . . . 584
14.15.1 Installation of a single bar code 15.1.4 Bucky-Delay time measurement . . . . 586
reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 15.1.5 X-ray exposure sync setting. . . . . . . 587
14.15.2 Installation of a multi-bar code 15.2 X-ray information linkage setting . . . . . . 589
reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 15.2.1 Overview of X-ray information linkage
14.16 Installation of the Bluetooth bar code function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 15.2.2 Workflow for setting X-ray information
linkage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

9
Contents

15.2.3 Confirmation of X-ray information 16.4.4 Creating an Exam. Tag for this
linkage environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
15.2.4 Installation of Ethernet-serial 16.4.5 Reflecting Exam. Tag to this
converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
15.2.5 X-ray device setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 16.5 How to change the network settings
15.2.6 X-ray exposure conditions setting. . . 596 when the RIS/HOST is using the same
15.2.7 Exposure confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . 600 network segment as the AeroDR
15.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 16.5.1 Examples of network environments in
15.3.1 Setting of the IP address of which setting changes are
the built-in wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . 601 necessary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
15.3.2 Network setting of the built-in wireless 16.5.2 Table used for the setting. . . . . . . . . . 647
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 16.5.3 Checking interface information . . . . . 648
15.4 Setting of the remote maintenance . . . . 607 16.5.4 Acquiring an interface number. . . . . . 650
15.5 Web electronic medical records 16.5.5 Confirming the IP address of the
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 AeroDR SYSTEM and RIS/HOST to
15.6 Setting of examination sharing . . . . . . . 611 be used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
15.6.1 System setting of the examination 16.5.6 Setting routing information. . . . . . . . . 655
sharing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 16.5.7 Confirming the setting details. . . . . . 657
15.6.2 Screen setting of the examination 16.5.8 Deleting unnecessary routing
sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
15.7 CR mammogram settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 16.6 Multilingual environment settings . . . . . . 660
15.7.1 The workflow to set the CR 16.6.1 Basic method of language-specific
mammogram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 environment building . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
15.7.2 Registration of the mammogram 16.6.2 Multilingual output setting . . . . . . . . . 661
exposure condition key . . . . . . . . . . . 615 16.6.3 Setting of patient registration screen
and property area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Chapter 16 16.6.4 Visibility setting of input items of the
Other Installation user tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
16.7 Method for adding the AeroDR SYSTEM
Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 not containing the AeroDR Detector
16.1 Aero Sync signal acquisition . . . . . . . . . 620 to the existing AeroDR SYSTEM
16.1.1 Execution procedure for Aero Sync environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
signal acquisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 16.7.1 Configuration example. . . . . . . . . . . . 665
16.2 Setting example for AeroDR UF Cable 16.7.2 Installation procedure (When the
connection position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 device sub ID cannot be entered) . . . 666
16.2.1 When using only one AeroDR UF 16.7.3 Installation procedure (When the
Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 device sub ID can be entered). . . . . . 669
16.2.2 When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables. . . 625 16.8 Installation method when there are fewer
16.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to AeroDR Detectors than units of this
this device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
16.3.1 Installing MSXML 4.0SP3 . . . . . . . . . 628 16.8.1 Configuration example. . . . . . . . . . . . 671
16.3.2 Preparations before converting. . . . . 628 16.8.2 Installation procedure (When the
16.3.3 Converting the Exam. Tag. . . . . . . . . 629 device sub ID cannot be entered) . . . 672
16.3.4 Reflecting the Exam. Tag to this 16.8.3 Installation procedure (When the
device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 device sub ID can be entered). . . . . . 675
16.3.5 Adjustment of the mammogram 16.9 Settings for REGIUS common
exposure condition key . . . . . . . . . . . 633 environment in CS-3/5 and this device
16.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this mixed environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 16.9.1 Settings for REGIUS common
16.4.1 Creating an overlay exposure environment in CS-3/5 and this
deviation information file . . . . . . . . . . 636 device mixed environment. . . . . . . . . 678
16.4.2 Importing an Exam. Tag to an excel 16.9.2 Installation example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 16.10 Method to display Windows taskbar on
16.4.3 Integrating an Exam. Tag file the service tool screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
and overlay exposure deviation 16.11 Access control of external storage
information file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

10
 Contents

16.12 Editing the output-to-media tag . . . . . . . 687 17.6 Device Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
16.12.1 Tag editing method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 17.6.1 Confirmation of the log . . . . . . . . . . . 721
16.12.2 Tag editing format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 17.6.2 Log collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
16.13 Set Display Method for Media Output 17.7 AeroDR Detector Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 17.7.1 Log collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
16.14 Method for not displaying the REGIUS 17.7.2 Confirmation of the log. . . . . . . . . . . . 727
SIGMA/SIGMA2 Progress Information 17.8 Log of AeroDR Access Point . . . . . . . . . 728
dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 17.8.1 Log collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
17.8.2 Confirmation of the log. . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Chapter 17 17.9 Radio wave strength monitoring tool . . . 730
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 693 17.10 Collection of images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
17.11 Analysis of false detection of a panel,
17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector . . 694
etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
17.1.1 AeroDR Detector replacement
17.11.1 Procedure for analyzing false
flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
detection of a panel, etc.. . . . . . . . . . 735
17.1.2 AeroDR Detector replacement in
17.12 Linkage problem between this device
environment with RM hybrid machine
and REGIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
17.12.1 When unable to connect with
17.1.3 AeroDR Detector replacement in
REGIUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
roaming environment for single
17.12.2 If the power control and error
RM hybrid machine with RM client
notification of REGIUS is not
machine turned off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
17.1.4 AeroDR Detector replacement in
17.13 If a fault occurs with the sub monitor . . . 742
roaming environment for RM hybrid
17.13.1 If the screen goes black or freezes
machine with RM client machine
after disconnecting the Ethernet
running. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
17.1.5 Measures in case where deleted
17.13.2 If the screen is displayed
AeroDR Detector correction data is
vertically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
restored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
17.13.3 If the screen is not displayed on the
17.2 Change of roaming environment . . . . . . 711
sub monitor at the time of starting this
17.2.1 Changing the settings of AeroDR
device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
SYSTEM related devices after
17.13.4 To revert the Sub Monitor Adaptor
change of roaming environment . . . . 711
settings to their defaults. . . . . . . . . . . 744
17.2.2 Method for transferring hybrid
17.14 Adjusting the print area of the requested
functions to another unit of this
image dimensions (Using third party
device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
17.2.3 Releasing roaming environment . . . . 713
printers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
17.3 Method for deleting AeroDR Detector 17.15 Acquiring setting values of each
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
17.15.1 Acquiring AeroDR Detector setting
17.4 Measures in case where AeroDR
values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Detector is not properly displayed on this
17.15.2 Acquiring the setting values for the
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
17.4.1 Handling chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
(AeroDR Portable RF Unit) . . . . . . . . 748
17.4.2 FpdManege.csv file confirmation
17.15.3 Acquiring the setting values for the
method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
AeroDR access point. . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
17.4.3 RM debug window confirmation
17.15.4 Acquiring the setting values for the
method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
AeroDR Stitching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
17.5 If the RM setting data is corrupted . . . . 718
17.16 Trouble caused by multiple use of
17.5.1 For 1 unit of this device. . . . . . . . . . . 718
wireless LAN adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
17.5.2 If there are multiple units of this
17.17 How to migrate data when replacing the
device, and the RM setting data of
the RM client machine is
device housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
17.17.1 Operation using replacement
corrupted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
17.5.3 If there are multiple units of this
17.17.2 Operation using replacement
device, and the RM setting data of
destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
the RM hybrid machine is
corrupted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 17.18 Collecting images for analysis . . . . . . . . 755
17.19 How to reset passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

11
Contents

17.20 AeroDR Stitching Unit Version Upgrade 19.11 Adjustment of the position of the touch
Failure Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
17.21 RIS/HOST communication error failure 19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment . . . . . . . . 851
support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758 19.12.1 Work flow of monitor brightness
adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
Chapter 18 19.12.2 Brightness adjustment for
Error Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759 Chroma5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
19.12.3 Display of history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
18.1 Types of error codes and recognition 19.12.4 Application of LUT to the monitor. . . . 857
methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 19.12.5 Setting of environmental
18.1.1 Types of error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
18.1.2 Recognition method for error 19.12.6 Setting to disable display gradation
codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures . . . . . 762 19.13 Deletion of the device information . . . . . 861
18.2.1 Communication errors. . . . . . . . . . . . 762 19.14 Reset/change/deletion of the counter . . . 862
18.2.2 Software errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 19.15 Uninstallation of the touch panel
18.2.3 AeroDR Detector errors. . . . . . . . . . . 773
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
18.2.4 AeroDR Interface Unit2 errors. . . . . . 779
18.2.5 AeroDR Generator Interface Unit Chapter 20
errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
18.2.6 AeroDR Portable RF Unit errors . . . . 785 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
18.2.7 AeroDR Stitching System errors . . . . 788 20.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
18.2.8 REGIUS series errors . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 20.1.1 Software specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 868
20.1.2 Hardware specifications. . . . . . . . . . . 869
Chapter 19 20.1.3 Hardware specifications (during the
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 portable X-ray device operation). . . . 870
20.1.4 Optional products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
19.1 Maintenance and inspection items . . . . . 818
19.1.1 Maintenance and inspection Chapter 21
interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
19.1.2 Confirmation and cleaning. . . . . . . . . 819 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
19.2 Replacement of the hard disk . . . . . . . . . 820 21.1 Using bar code reader for REGIUS to
19.3 Defragmentation of the hard disk . . . . . . 822 register devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
19.4 System information backup and 21.1.1 Procedure to change the bar code
restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 reader settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
19.4.1 System information backup. . . . . . . . 823 21.1.2 Procedure to reset the bar code
19.4.2 System information restoring. . . . . . . 823 reader settings to REGIUS read-only
19.5 Upgrading of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . 826 settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
19.5.1 Upgrading of AeroDR Detector . . . . . 826 21.2 How to add a bar code setting . . . . . . . . 877
19.5.2 Upgrading of AeroDR Generator 21.2.1 Work flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
Interface Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 21.2.2 Added bar code reading operation
19.5.3 Upgrading of AeroDR Portable RF check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 21.2.3 Additional bar code list. . . . . . . . . . . . 879
19.5.4 Upgrading of AeroDR Stitching 21.3 Precautions for network connections . . . 885
System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832 21.3.1 Network connections for this
19.6 Upgrading of REGIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834 device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
19.7 Upgrading of REGIUS 21.3.2 Subnet configuration within the
SIGMA/SIGMA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837 institution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
19.8 Upgrading of Sub Monitor Adaptor 21.4 Study deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 21.5 Exposure conditions transmission setting
19.9 Maintenance of AeroDR Detector . . . . . . 843 during exposure of the stitching unit . . . . 896
19.9.1 Calibration of AeroDR Detector. . . . . 843
19.10 Maintenance of REGIUS and REGIUS Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . 901
SIGMA/SIGMA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844 Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
19.10.1 Unevenness calibration. . . . . . . . . . . 844
19.10.2 Sensitivity calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . 847

12
Introduction

13
 Introduction

This Installation/Service Manual describes the operation precautions and series of procedures, and has
been prepared for service engineers who install, repair, and carry out maintenance inspections for this
device (DIRECT DIGITIZER CS-7).
Please keep this manual on hand so that it can be easily read, even after initial use.

CAUTION
• Before performing installation tasks, read thoroughly "Safety Precautions &
Warnings" of the Operation Manual and acquaint yourself with the described
precautions for the handling of this device.

• Explain the operations based on the Operation Manual to the users after the
completion of the installation according to this document.

• "..." attached to the end of characters or message is omitted.

• If you changed the setting of this device using the service or user tools, a pop-up
window may be shown to prompt you to restart this device. Follow the instructions
to restart this device. The modified setting will not take effect until this device is
restarted.

• For service tool and user tool screens, refer to "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for
Service Tool/User Tool Screen".

• To manually change the setting of this device, stop this device first before editing
the configuration file.

• CS-3/5 screens are used in some parts, but the functions are the same as this
device.

14
 Introduction

Disclaimer

(1) This manual may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of Konica Minolta, Inc.
(2) The contents of this manual may be subject to change without prior notice.
(3) Konica Minolta, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage caused by installation,
relocation, modification, maintenance, and repair made by anyone except Konica Minolta and contractors
designated by Konica Minolta.
(4) Konica Minolta, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage to Konica Minolta
products, caused by third-party products not installed by Konica Minolta.
(5) Konica Minolta, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage caused by maintenance
or repair using maintenance parts other than those specified by Konica Minolta.
(6) Konica Minolta, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage caused by not observing
the precautions and operation methods described in the operation manual.
(7) Konica Minolta, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage caused by the
environment, such as power source and installation environment, that is described in the Installation
Requirement or operation manual, that is not suitable for the installation requirements.
(8) Konica Minolta, Inc. is not responsible for any claims for malfunction or damage caused by acts of nature such
as fires, earthquakes, floods, or lightning strikes.
(9) Konica Minolta, Inc. is not responsible for any claims for malfunction or damage caused by using this device for
any purpose other than that specified for this device.
(10) Diagnostic and treatment action is performed under the responsibility of the physician(s). Konica Minolta, Inc. is
not responsible for any diagnostic/treatment conditions or diagnostic/treatment results.

Trademark

Company names and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of U.S. Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
Windows 7 is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 7 operating system Professional Edition.
Please note that ©, ® and ™ marks are omitted hereafter.

Copyright © 2011 - 2013 Konica Minolta, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Option/license

For certain functions of this device, separate options and licenses are needed.

15
Introduction

Terms description

The meanings of terms used in this manual are as follows:

Terms Description
Collective term indicating AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Interface Unit, AeroDR Interface Unit2,
AeroDR SYSTEM
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit, AeroDR Battery Charger, AeroDR Access Point, etc.
Collective term indicating AeroDR 1417HQ, AeroDR 1417S, AeroDR 1717HQ and AeroDR
AeroDR Detector
1012HQ.
AeroDR Battery Charger Charges the AeroDR Detector. It also has the registration function for the AeroDR Detector.
AeroDR Battery Charger2 Charges the AeroDR Detector. It also has the registration function for the AeroDR Detector.
AeroDR I/F Cable Used for wired connection with the AeroDR Detector.
AeroDR UF Cable Used when the AeroDR Detector is used only for the wall stand or table position.
AeroDR Portable RF Unit Used when this device is operated through the portable X-ray device.
Used when this device is operated through the portable X-ray device for performing expo-
AeroDR Portable UF Unit
sure in Aero Sync mode.
AeroDR Stitching System Used when performing stitching exposures using the AeroDR Detector.
Calibration Processing for calibrating the characteristics of the AeroDR Detector for each pixel
CR An acronym for computed radiography
DR An acronym for digital radiography

JM An acronym for job manager

RM An acronym for roaming manager

Collective term indicating the REGIUS series (Excluding "REGIUS SIGMA" and "REGIUS
SIGMA2").
REGIUS
When indicated individually, they are shown as "REGIUS 110", "REGIUS 110HQ",
"REGIUS 210", "REGIUS 190", and "REGIUS 170".
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 Used as the collective terms for "REGIUS SIGMA" and "REGIUS SIGMA2".
Used as the collective terms for the cassettes in the REGIUS series and REGIUS SIGMA/
CR cassette
SIGMA2.
Abbreviation for Radiology Information System
RIS A system to manage reservation and result of examinations and treatment that use radiol-
ogy equipment
Host A server to save image information
An X-ray exposure device constructed of an X-ray generator device, an operation panel,
X-ray device
and so on
Image processing to reduce noise
HS processing
Used to reduce the noise while maintaining the definition of an image.
Image processing for adjusting the sharpness of an image
F processing
Used to maintain the sharpness of each image depending on the exposure body part.
Image processing for compressing the dynamic range
E processing Depending on the body part, used to provide a suitable diagnostic image even with high
contrast images.
Exposure body part This is the exposure body part, such as head, neck, and chest.
Exposure condition master An exposure condition predefined for each body part for the convenience of setting
Exposure condition key Another name of the exposure condition master
The exposure body part and conditions for layout on the body part selection screen. Single
Set key or multiple Exam. Tags are combined in a unit called the set key, which is positioned on the
body part selection screen.
This is a mode in which exposure is performed without being synchronized with the X-ray
Aero Sync
device. (This is sometimes described as "DXARM" or "DXARM link.")

16
 Introduction

Structure of pages

4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.10.11 AeroDR Generator

2 Press [Upload].
(1) Interface Unit setting
Set up the AeroDR Interface Unit2 or the AeroDR Gen-
erator Interface Unit.
Here, the settings for the AeroDR Generator Interface
Unit are used as an example.

(2) Reference ••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• For the setting of X-ray synchronization, refer to "Set-
ting of X-ray synchronization".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

(3) 1 Set the following items in [XG BOX Set-

ting].

Chapter 4
• Settings will be uploaded to the AeroDR Gen-

(4) erator Interface Unit.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • (6)
• AeroDR Generator Interface Unit setting changes may
take up to a maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
Setting item Settings
• When the IP address with a different segment than
Input the AeroDR Generator Interface this device's IP is set, the "Processing" screen may
[Display
Units name within 10 characters. not disappear although settings are being uploaded to
Name]
Default setting: XG BOX the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit. After waiting for
Input the IP address of the AeroDR 30 seconds or more, press [Cancel] then perform ping
[IP Address] Generator Interface Units. from the Windows command prompt and confirm that
Default setting: 192.168.20.221 there is no response from the IP address before the
Input the address of the default gate- change.
[Default way. •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Gateway] Input is not required, when no gate-
way exists on the network. 3 Read the serial number of the AeroDR Gen-
Input the subnet mask of the selected erator Interface Unit using the barcode.
[Subnet
device.
Mask]
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Select the number of XIF boards used
[WS] from [Use WS1 Only], [Use WS1/
WS2], or [Use WS1/2/3].
[Timer] Select "0" msec for SRM link.

(5) HINT ••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• For S-SRM link, press the first stage exposure switch
to set the delay time that elapses before the exposure • The AeroDR Generator Interface Unit's serial
starts. number is displayed in [Serial Number] under
* Note that S-SRM is not used in Japan. [XG BOX Setting].
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • When manually entering the serial number, en-
ter the product code (4 digits) - product serial
number (5 digits).

109

Number Item Description Icon

(1) Item heading Describes the titles of described content. -

(2) Reference Describes reference items. Refer to these as necessary. Reference

(3) Operation procedure The operating procedure is described in sequential numerical steps. -
(4) Screen display Shows a screen on which operations are performed. -

(5) Hint Describes important information. HINT

(6) Important items Describes the important items for operation. Be sure to read them. IMPORTANT

17
18
 Chapter
1
Safety Precautions & Warnings
This chapter describes precautions and warnings to perform the safe installa-
tion, repair, and the maintenance and inspection of this device.

19
 1.1 Symbols relating to safety

1
1.1.3 Description of graphic
1.1.1 Safety alert symbol
symbols

Indicates the off position for the main

power switch of this device.
This is the "safety alert symbol". This symbol alerts
you to matters and/or operation potentially hazardous
to yourself and other people. Read these messages Indicates the on position for the main
and follow the instructions carefully. power switch of this device.

Indicates the power on or standby posi-

tion.
1.1.2 Warning notice (signal
words) Indicates that AC power is being used.

Signal words indicate the degree of potential hazards

in the use of the product. Indicates that hazardous voltage is being
Signal words include the following 3 types, which are used, and caution is required.
used according to risk of damage caused by danger
and the severity of damage.

DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
It may also be used to indicate a hazardous situation
where only physical damage is likely to occur.

20
 1.2 Warning labels/instruction displays

Various warning labels/instruction displays are attached to this device on the locations shown below. Do not remove these labels

Chapter 1
from this device.
Warning labels are there to make sure that the user recognizes potential hazards when operating this device.

*If a warning label is too dirty or damaged to read, have a new warning label attached, and redisplay by parts replacement.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• These product labels and specifications may change for improvement without prior notice.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1.2.1 Monitor

O
ORear

1.2.2 This device (during the portable X-ray device operation)

O
OBottom O
OBattery pack

21
 1.3 Safety precautions

1 all safety precautions thoroughly before using this device.

Read
Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in CAUTION
this section.
• Stop operation immediately when there is any ab-
normal sound, abnormal odor, or smoke coming out
CAUTION from this device. It may cause electric shock, fire,
• Read the "Safety Precautions and Warnings" of the or damage this device if this device is operated with
Operation Manual thoroughly before installation or abnormality.
• Make sure that all the cables are connected correct-
repair service, and understand the precautions on
ly, anything that needs to be fixed is fixed, and there
handling this device.
is no damage.
• Install all the cables so no one will trip.
• Make sure that the ground terminal is grounded.
• Please use dedicated Ethernet cables and hubs
1.3.1 General caution with this device and the peripheral devices.
• Do not allow the user to remove the outer cover of
Be sure to observe following precautions when per- this device.
forming the installation or repair of this device. Also,
perform appropriate and safe operation following the
description on the warning labels affixed to this device. 1.3.2 Caution during
operation
WARNING
• Make sure that the input voltage specification of CAUTION
this device complies with the power supply voltage
supplied from your institution. • Perform any operation that will subject this device
to vibration by first turning the power off and waiting
at least 30 seconds.
• Check the continuity of this system to all devices
CAUTION such as Radiology Information System (RIS) and
HOST before starting the system operation.
• To prevent danger, only a service representative with • Use the grounding straps when handling electronic
official training should remove the cover or touch the parts such as circuit boards. It may damage elec-
internal parts. tronic parts such as circuit boards if you touch them
• Do not perform work or operation not described in when you are electrically charged.
this manual. It may result in burns or electric shock if • Attach one side of the grounding strap to your wrist,
not operated correctly. and the clip on other side to the metallic part of this
• Work with enough working space. device where you can securely ground.
• Turn off the power supply when working. Major ac-
cidents may occur when you disconnect the circuit
boards inside this device or disconnect the connec-
tors and cables with the power supply turned on.
Perform these work operations with the power sup-
ply circuit breaker turned off.
• When you have to work with the power supply on,
such as measuring the voltage, etc., make sure not
to touch the power supply line.
• It may cause electromagnetic interference, so peo-
ple with cardiac pacemakers should not come near Grounding strap
this device.
• It may interfere with this device, so do not use de- • Do not trip on or step on the power cable.
vices that generate electromagnetic waves, such as • When disconnecting cables, disconnect by holding
mobile phones, etc., near this device. them correctly.
• When installed next to a device that does not have
EMC countermeasures, normal operation may be
affected.

22
 1.3 Safety precautions

CAUTION 1.3.5 Precaution when

resuming usage
• Do not disconnect the power plug by pulling on the

Chapter 1
power cable, because that can break the wire in-
side the power cable, causing overheating or fire.
• Make sure not to lose any fastening screws when CAUTION
removing the covers, etc. Also, make sure to attach • Make sure this device and power cable are not
and tighten all fastening screws when attaching the damaged.
covers, etc. • Make sure that the ground terminal is grounded.
• Do not place any drinks such as juice, etc., or for-
• Make sure that all cables are connected correctly.
eign objects such as clips, pins, etc., on top of this
• Make sure that this device will operate correctly
device. When this device is operated with water or
foreign objects such as metallic pieces, etc., inside and stably.
this device, it may cause fire due to shorting of the
internal circuit.
• To prevent the overheating inside this device, do
not block the air inlet/exhaust outlet.
• It may cause damage so do not put objects on this
1.3.6 Precaution regarding
device or get on top of this device.
disposal
• Be careful not to get injured by part of your body or
clothes getting tangled in the moving parts.
• Parts including glass are used on the protective CAUTION
cover. Be careful not to apply any shocks when
• Please follow the rules and regulations of your rel-
performing maintenance with the protective cover
evant authorities in the disposal of this product, ac-
removed or when discarding the protective cover.
• When cleaning the spring connector of the AeroDR cessories, options, consumables, media and their
Battery Charger or AeroDR UF Cable, be careful packing materials.
not to damage it.

1.3.3 LCD monitor precautions

CAUTION
• If the monitor breaks and the liquid crystal material
leaks out, do not allow contact with your mouth.
If the liquid material gets on your hands, arms, or
clothing, immediately wash the affected area with
soap.
• It is extremely dangerous to continue operation of
the device if the display has broken.

1.3.4 Precaution when tempo-

rarily stopping use

CAUTION
• Organize and bundle into the storage location after
cleaning the accessories and cables.
• Clean this device and storage area so there will be
no problem when using this device next time.

23
24
 Chapter
2
Product Overview
This chapter describes the overview of this device.

25
 2.1 System configuration

2.1.1 System configuration example

A system configuration example is shown below.

X-Ray Device Console

X-Ray Exposure
Electronic Medical information
Records
FTP
DICOM Print

Printer
CS-7

DICOM MWM
DICOM Storage
HIS/RIS

DICOM MPPS
(1) Order Information
(2) Image Information PACS
JPEG (HOST)
(3) Patient Information DICOM PDI

DICOM
Image Data
DICOM G/W

Media

AeroDR
Detector REGIUS
SIGMA/SIGMA2
REGIUS

* This device is intended to be connected to AeroDR Detector or to REGIUS as an input device, and to printer or
PACS as an output device.
* For details on how to use AeroDR Detector and REGIUS, refer to their respective operation manuals.
* 4 AeroDR Detectors can be connected to this device.
* 15 REGIUS series can be connected to this device.
* Only a single REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 unit can be connected to this device.
* A REGIUS series unit and a REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 unit cannot be connected to this device at the same time.

26
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

This section describes the typical operation applications and connection examples of AeroDR SYSTEM. Check them
according to the institution before installation.

2.2.1 Example of connection in the exposure room

Chapter 2
Operation applications
The connection methods and functions for respective operations are described below.
Operation item Type Functions
Stand-alone AeroDR
Can be used in the same manner as the CR cassette.
Detector
Operation of
By connecting the AeroDR UF Cable, the AeroDR Detector is used exclusively in wall
AeroDR Detec- Wall stand only
stand position. In addition, it also performs the setting of portrait and landscape detection.
tor
By connecting the AeroDR UF Cable, the AeroDR Detector is used exclusively in table
Table only
position. In addition, it also performs the setting of portrait and landscape detection.
AeroDR Detec- Wired connection Connecting the AeroDR I/F Cable, used for wired connection.
tor Connection
mode Wireless connection Used for wireless connection with the AeroDR Access Point.

Supplies power to the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and the AeroDR Access Point,
AeroDR Interface
and supplies power to and charges the battery of the AeroDR Detector when an AeroDR
Unit
I/F Cable or AeroDR UF Cable is used. It also has a hub function.
Operation of
AeroDR Inter- Supplies power to the AeroDR Access Point, and supplies power to and charges the bat-
face Unit tery of the AeroDR Detector when an AeroDR I/F Cable or AeroDR UF Cable is used. It
AeroDR Interface
also has a hub function.
Unit2
*Selects the XIF board or XGIF board depending on how the power is supplied from the
X-ray device.
Synchronizes AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and X-ray device to perform exposure
from the X-ray device operation panel.
SRM
*Selects the XIF board or XGIF board depending on how the power is supplied from the
X-ray device.
X-ray device Simply synchronizes AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and X-ray device to perform expo-
connection sure from AeroDR Generator Interface Unit.
mode S-SRM *Not used in Japan.
*Depending on the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit, an ESC board may be installed
instead of an XGIF board.
Performs exposure from the X-ray device operation panel without being synchronized
Aero Sync
with the X-ray device.
Charges the AeroDR Detector. It also has the registration function for the AeroDR Detec-
AeroDR Battery
Operation of tor.
Charger
AeroDR Battery *The AeroDR 1012HQ cannot be charged using the AeroDR Battery Charger.
Charger AeroDR Battery Charges the AeroDR Detector. It also has the registration function for the AeroDR Detec-
Charger2 tor.

27
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

Connection example by connection type

Typical connection examples of AeroDR SYSTEM are as follows.

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
SRM (XIF board)

Exposure room
AeroDR Detector

X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR I/F Cable

XIF
Power Hub ECB
source

AeroDR AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
converter
Serial/hardware connection CS-7
Grounding cable

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit2/
SRM (XGIF board)

Exposure room
AeroDR Detector

X-ray Tube
X-ray device

AeroDR I/F Cable

Hub ECB
Power
source XGIF

AeroDR Interface Unit2

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
converter
Serial/hardware connection
CS-7
Grounding cable

28
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
S-SRM (XGIF board)

Exposure room

AeroDR Detector

X-ray Tube

X-ray device

Chapter 2
AeroDR I/F Cable

Power
source Hub

AeroDR
Interface Unit

Hub XGIF

Power ECB
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable AeroDR Generator Interface Unit operation panel
Ethernet cable(PoE)
Ethernet-serial
Ethernet cable
converter
Serial/hardware connection
Grounding cable
CS-7

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit2/
S-SRM (XGIF board)

Exposure room

AeroDR Detector

X-ray Tube
X-ray device

AeroDR I/F Cable

Hub Hub ECB

Power XGIF
Power source
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable AeroDR Interface Unit2 operation panel
Ethernet cable(PoE)
Ethernet-serial
Ethernet cable
converter
Serial/hardware connection
Grounding cable
CS-7

29
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/SRM
(XIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger

Exposure room
AeroDR Detector

X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR I/F Cable
AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR
Access Point

XIF
Power Hub
source ECB

AeroDR AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
converter
Serial/hardware connection
Grounding cable CS-7

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit2/
SRM (XGIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger2

Exposure room
AeroDR Detector

X-ray Tube
X-ray device

AeroDR I/F Cable

AeroDR Battery Charger2 AeroDR
Access Point

AeroDR Interface Unit2

Hub ECB
Power
source XGIF

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
Serial/hardware connection converter
Grounding cable CS-7

30
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit2/
S-SRM (XGIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger2

Exposure room
AeroDR Detector

X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR I/F Cable

Chapter 2
AeroDR Battery Charger2 AeroDR
Access Point

Hub ECB
Hub
Power XGIF
Power source
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable AeroDR Interface Unit2 operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
Serial/hardware connection converter
Grounding cable CS-7

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/Aero
Sync/AeroDR Battery Charger

Exposure room
AeroDR Detector

X-ray Tube
X-ray device

AeroDR I/F Cable

AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR
Access Point

Power
source Hub

AeroDR
Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
AeroDR UF Cable X-ray device
Ethernet Cable(PoE) operation panel
Ethernet Cable
Serial/hardware connection
Grounding cable CS-7

31
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OWall stand only (without portrait and landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/
AeroDR Interface Unit/SRM (XIF board)

Exposure room AeroDR Detector

X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable

AeroDR I/F Cable

CIF XIF

Power
source Hub ECB

AeroDR AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE) Ethernet-serial
Ethernet cable converter
Serial/hardware connection CS-7
Grounding cable

O
OCombined use of wall stand (table) and stand-alone AeroDR Detector (without portrait and land-
scape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/SRM (XIF board)/
AeroDR Battery Charger

Exposure room AeroDR Detector

Sub monitor
X-ray Tube
X-ray device

AeroDR UF
Cable

Sub monitor AeroDR AeroDR

adaptor Battery Charger Access Point

AeroDR I/F
Cable

XIF XIF
Power Hub
source ECB

AeroDR AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
Serial/hardware connection converter
CS-7
Grounding cable

32
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OCombined use of wall stand (table) and stand-alone AeroDR Detector (without portrait and land-
scape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit2/SRM (XGIF board)/
AeroDR Battery Charger2

Exposure room AeroDR Detector

Sub monitor
X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR
UF Cable

Chapter 2
Sub monitor
adaptor
AeroDR
AeroDR Battery Charger2
AeroDR Access Point
I/F Cable

AeroDR Interface Unit2

Hub ECB

Power
source XGIF XGIF

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
AeroDR UF Cable X-ray device
Ethernet cable (PoE)
operation panel
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
Serial/hardware connection converter
CS-7
Grounding cable

O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector (without portrait and
landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
SRM (XIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector

Sub monitor
AeroDR Detector X-ray Tube
X-ray device

AeroDR UF
Cable

Sub monitor AeroDR UF Cable

AeroDR adaptor AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR
I/F Cable
AeroDR I/F Access Point
Cable

XIF XIF XIF

Power Hub
source ECB

AeroDR AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
converter
Serial/hardware connection CS-7
Grounding cable

33
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector (without portrait and
landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
S-SRM (XGIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector

Sub monitor
AeroDR Detector X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR UF
Cable

Sub monitor AeroDR UF Cable

AeroDR I/F adapter AeroDR
AeroDR Battery Charger
Cable Access Point
AeroDR I/F
Cable

Power Hub
source

AeroDR
Interface Unit

Hub
XGIF
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
AeroDR UF Cable ECB X-ray device
Ethernet cable (PoE) operation panel
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
Ethernet cable
Ethernet-serial
Serial/hardware connection converter
CS-7
Grounding cable

O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector (without portrait and
landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit2/
S-SRM (XGIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector

Sub monitor
AeroDR Detector X-ray Tube
X-ray device

AeroDR UF
Cable

Sub monitor AeroDR UF Cable

AeroDR I/F adapter AeroDR
AeroDR Battery Charger
Cable Access Point

AeroDR I/F Cable

Hub

Power
source

AeroDR
Interface Unit2

Hub
XGIF
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
AeroDR UF Cable ECB X-ray device
Ethernet cable (PoE) operation panel
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
Ethernet cable
Ethernet-serial
Serial/hardware connection converter
CS-7
Grounding cable

34
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector (without portrait and
landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
Aero Sync/AeroDR Battery Charger
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector

Sub monitor
AeroDR Detector X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR
UF Cable

Chapter 2
Sub monitor AeroDR UF Cable
AeroDR adaptor AeroDR
AeroDR Battery Charger
I/F Cable Access Point
AeroDR
I/F Cable

Power Hub
source

AeroDR
Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable operation panel
Ethernet cable(PoE)
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
Serial/hardware connection converter
Grounding cable
CS-7

O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector (with portrait and
landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
SRM (XIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger

Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
AeroDR
UF Cable
Sub monitor AeroDR Detector X-ray Tube
X-ray device

AeroDR AeroDR
Sub monitor
UF Cable Access Point
adaptor
AeroDR
AeroDR Battery Charger
I/F Cable AeroDR
I/F Cable

XIF XIF XIF

Power Hub Power Hub
source source ECB

AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit Interface Unit Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
converter
Serial/hardware connection CS-7
Grounding cable

35
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector (with portrait and
landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit2 +
AeroDR Interface Unit/SRM (XGIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger2

Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
AeroDR
UF Cable
Sub monitor AeroDR Detector X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR AeroDR Access Point
Sub monitor
UF Cable
adaptor
AeroDR Battery Charger2

AeroDR
I/F Cable AeroDR
I/F Cable
XGIF

Hub ECB
Power Hub
source Power XGIF
source XGIF

AeroDR AeroDR Interface Unit2

Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet-serial
Ethernet cable converter
Serial/hardware connection CS-7
Grounding cable

36
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

2.2.2 Example of connection with the portable X-ray device

Operation applications
The connection methods and functions for respective operations are described below.
Operation item Type Functions
Operation of Stand-alone AeroDR

Chapter 2
Can be used in the same manner as a CR cassette.
AeroDR Detector Detector
AeroDR Detector Used for wireless connection with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit/AeroDR Portable
Wireless connection
Connection mode UF Unit.
Operation of Supplies power to the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and the AeroDR Access
AeroDR Interface AeroDR Interface Unit Point, and supplies power to and charges the battery of the AeroDR Detector when
Unit an AeroDR I/F Cable or AeroDR UF Cable is used. It also has a hub function.
Synchronizes the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and portable X-ray device for imparting
AeroDR Portable RF Unit
Portable unit exposure from the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
AeroDR Portable UF Unit Imparts exposure from the portable X-ray diagnostic device in the Aero Sync mode.
Used for wired connection between the AeroDR Portable RF Unit/AeroDR Portable
Wired connection
Connection mode UF Unit and CS-7.
with this device Used for wireless connection between the AeroDR Portable RF Unit/AeroDR Portable
Wireless connection
UF Unit and CS-7.
Simply synchronizes the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and the portable X-ray device to
S-SRM
perform exposure from the AeroDR Portable RF Unit. *Not used in Japan.
X-ray device con-
Synchronizes the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and portable X-ray device for imparting
nection mode SRM
exposure from the portable X-ray device.
Aero Sync Imparts exposure from the portable X-ray device in the Aero Sync mode.
Operation of Charges the AeroDR Detector. It also has the registration function for the AeroDR
AeroDR Battery AeroDR Battery Charger Detector.
Charger *The AeroDR 1012HQ cannot be charged using the AeroDR Battery Charger.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In Japan, the AeroDR Portable Unit Mount Kit is not used other than with certain attachment kits.
• When connecting the AeroDR Interface Unit2 or AeroDR Battery Charger2, refer to "2.2.1 Example of connection in the
exposure room".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

37
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

Connection example by connection type

Typical connection examples are as follows.

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
AeroDR Portable RF Unit/CS-7 Wired connection/S-SRM (XGIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Detector
or

AeroDR Detector registration side (exposure room side hub)

AeroDR Hub AeroDR Detector

I/F Cable

Power Hub
source
AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Interface Unit

Portable X-ray device side

Hub

AeroDR Portable
RF Kit

AeroDR Detector
Access
Power
point
CS-7 Power

XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable
Portable X-ray device
Serial/hardware connection AeroDR Portable RF Unit

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• An exposure switch may be available on the AeroDR Portable RF Kit.
• Depending on the AeroDR Portable RF Unit, an ESC board may be installed instead of an XGIF board.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

38
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
AeroDR Portable RF Unit/CS-7 Wireless connection/S-SRM (XGIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Detector
or

AeroDR Detector registration side (exposure room side hub)

Chapter 2
AeroDR Hub AeroDR Detector
I/F Cable

Power Hub
source
AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Interface Unit

AeroDR Portable
RF Kit

AeroDR Detector

Power Access
point
CS-7 Power

XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable
Portable X-ray device
Serial/hardware connection AeroDR Portable RF Unit

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• An exposure switch may be available on the AeroDR Portable RF Kit.
• Depending on the AeroDR Portable RF Unit, an ESC board may be installed instead of an XGIF board.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

39
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
AeroDR Portable RF Unit/CS-7 Wired connection/S-SRM (XGIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Detector
or

AeroDR Detector registration side (exposure room side hub)

AeroDR Hub AeroDR Detector

I/F Cable

Power
source
Hub AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Interface Unit

Portable X-ray device side

Hub

AeroDR Detector
Access
Power point
CS-7 Power

XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable Portable X-ray device
Serial/hardware connection AeroDR Portable RF Unit

40
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
AeroDR Portable RF Unit/CS-7 Wireless connection/S-SRM (XGIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Detector
or

AeroDR Detector registration side (exposure room side hub)

Chapter 2
AeroDR Hub AeroDR Detector
I/F Cable

Power
source
Hub AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Interface Unit

AeroDR Detector

Power Access
point
CS-7 Power

XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable Portable X-ray device
Serial/hardware connection AeroDR Portable RF Unit

41
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
AeroDR Portable UF Unit/CS-7 Wired connection/Aero Sync/AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Detector
or

AeroDR Detector registration side (exposure room side hub)

AeroDR Hub AeroDR Detector

I/F Cable

Power
source Hub
AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Interface Unit

Portable X-ray device side

Hub

AeroDR Detector

Access
Power
point
CS-7

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable
Serial/hardware connection AeroDR Portable UF Unit

42
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
AeroDR Portable UF Unit/CS-7 Wireless connection/Aero Sync/AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Detector
or

AeroDR Detector registration side

(Hub for exposure room side)

Chapter 2
AeroDR I/F Hub AeroDR Detector
Cable

Power Hub
source AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Interface Unit

Access
Power
Point
AeroDR Detector

CS-7

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable AeroDR Portable UF Unit
Serial/hardware connection

43
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

Examples of wired/wireless connection

O
OWhen operating this device with a portable X-ray device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit

Portable X-ray device

Hub

Connect with
a wired LAN or the
built-in wireless
LAN of this device

Power Access
source point

Power
source
XGIF
ECB

AeroDR Portable RF Unit

CS-7

Connect with
built-in Bluetooth
of this device
Wireless LAN
adapter Access point
USB type of the institution
or
card type

Hub

Bluetooth Connect with a wired LAN or the

bar code reader wireless LAN of the wireless LAN
adapter

Power
Ethernet cable

• This device can be connected with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and the access point of the institution via wireless
connection using the built-in wireless LAN of this device.
• When connecting multiple devices using wireless LAN, connect the first device with the built-in wireless LAN of this
device, and connect the second device with the optional wireless LAN adapter.
• This device can also be connected with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and the access point of the institution via
wired LAN.
• This device and the Bluetooth bar code reader can be connected via the built-in Bluetooth of this device.
• The wireless LAN adapter (card type) cannot be used for connection to the PDA.

44
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OWhen operating this device with a portable X-ray device and AeroDR Portable UF Unit

Portable X-ray device

Hub
Connect with
AeroDR Portable UF Unit a wired LAN or the
built-in wireless Connect with
LAN of this device built-in Bluetooth
of this device
Power Access

Chapter 2
source point

Bluetooth
bar code reader

CS-7
Wireless LAN
adapter Access point
(USB type) of the institution
Wireless LAN
adapter
USB type
or
card type
PDA
Hub

Connect with the wireless LAN of the wireless

LAN adapter or connect wirelessly with the Connect with a wired LAN or the
access point of the AeroDR Portable UF Unit wireless LAN of the wireless LAN adapter

Power

Ethernet cable

• This device can be connected with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit and the access point of the institution via wireless
connection using the built-in wireless LAN of this device.
• When connecting multiple devices using wireless LAN, connect the first device with the built-in wireless LAN of this
device, and connect the second device with the optional wireless LAN adapter.
• This device can also be connected with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit and the access point of the institution via
wired LAN.
• This device cannot be connected with a PDA using the built-in wireless LAN of this device. Prepare the optional
wireless LAN adapter.
• This device and the Bluetooth bar code reader can be connected via the built-in Bluetooth of this device.
• The wireless LAN adapter (card type) cannot be used for connection to the PDA.

45
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

2.2.3 Connection example of the AeroDR Stitching System

Operation applications
The connection methods and functions by operation type are shown below.
Operation item Type Function
Stand-alone AeroDR
Used in the same manner as a CR cassette.
Detector
Connect the AeroDR UF cable to use the AeroDR Detector for a standing
Wall stand only
Operation of AeroDR patient. Also, set portrait and landscape detection.
Detector Connect the AeroDR UF cable to use the AeroDR Detector for a recumbent
Table only
patient. Also, set portrait and landscape detection.
Load the AeroDR Detector into the AeroDR Stitching Unit and connect the
AeroDR Stitching Unit
AeroDR UF cable.
AeroDR Detector Connec- Wired connection Used for a wired connection by connecting the AeroDR I/F cable.
tion mode Wireless connection Used for a wireless connection with the AeroDR Access Point.
Supplies power to the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and the AeroDR
Operation of AeroDR Access Point, and supplies power to and charges the battery of the AeroDR
AeroDR Interface Unit
Interface Unit Detector when an AeroDR I/F Cable or AeroDR UF Cable is used. It also has
a hub function.
Interlock the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and the X-ray device, and con-
X-ray device connection SRM
trol exposure from the operation panel of the X-ray device.
Charges the AeroDR Detector. It also has the registration function for the
Operation of AeroDR Bat- AeroDR Battery Char-
AeroDR Detector.
tery Charger ger
*The AeroDR 1012HQ cannot be charged using the AeroDR Battery Charger.

46
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

Connection example by type of connection

The connection example that the AeroDR I/F Cable is used for the device and cassette shots is as follows.

O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector + combined use
of AeroDR Stitching Unit and AeroDR Detector (IF cable sharing)/AeroDR Detector Wired or
Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/SRM (XIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger
Exposure room
AeroDR
AeroDR
Detector AeroDR
UF Cable
Stitching Unit

Chapter 2
Sub monitor X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR
UF Cable

AeroDR Stitching X-ray

Power Supply Auto Barrier Unit
Sub monitor Unit
adapter AeroDR
AeroDR
I/F Cable Detector
(common)

AeroDR
Access Point
AeroDR
UF Cable AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR
I/F Cable
XIF XIF XIF
Power
source Hub ECB

AeroDR Interface Unit AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet-serial
Ethernet cable converter
Serial/hardware connection CS-7
Grounding cable

47
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector + combined use of
AeroDR Stitching Unit and AeroDR Detector (proprietary IF cable)/AeroDR Detector Wired or
Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/SRM (XIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger
Exposure room
AeroDR AeroDR
Detector AeroDR
UF Cable Stitching Unit
Sub monitor X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR
UF Cable

AeroDR Stitching X-ray

Power Supply Auto Barrier Unit
Unit
Sub monitor
AeroDR
adapter AeroDR
Detector
I/F Cable AeroDR
Access Point

AeroDR
UF Cable AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR
I/F Cable

XIF XIF XIF

Power Power
source Hub source Hub ECB

AeroDR Interface Unit AeroDR Interface Unit AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet-serial
Ethernet cable converter
Serial/hardware connection CS-7
Grounding cable

48
 2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

2.2.4 Connection example of the Screening System

Operation applications
The connection methods and functions by operation type are shown below.
Operation item Type Function
Operation of AeroDR Connect the AeroDR UF cable to use the AeroDR Detector for a standing
Wall stand only

Chapter 2
Detector patient. Also, set portrait and landscape detection.
AeroDR Detector Connec-
Wired connection Used for a wired connection by connecting the AeroDR I/F cable.
tion mode
Interlock the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and the X-ray device, and con-
X-ray device connection SRM
trol exposure from the operation panel of the X-ray device.

Connection example by type of connection

Typical connection examples are as follows.

O
OWall stand only/AeroDR Detector Wired connection/SRM

Portable unit AeroDR Detector

X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR
UF Cable

XIF
Power Hub
source
ECB
AeroDR
Power Interface Unit AeroDR Interface Unit
(power generator) X-ray device
operation panel

Media
CS-7

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
AeroDR UF Cable
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet cable
Serial/hardware connection
Grounding cable

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• A PDA cannot be used with the Screening System.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

49
 2.3 Connection example of REGIUS

Typical connection examples of REGIUS are as follows.

The JM (Job Manager) is required to build the system with this device and REGIUS.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The JM is a database (PostgreSQL) for mediating commands between this device and REGIUS.
• This device registers the "correspondence between the Exam. Tag and the CR cassette" to the JM. When a CR cassette is
inserted into the REGIUS, the REGIUS reads the "correspondence between the Exam. Tag and the CR cassette" from the
JM, and sends the read images to this registered device.
• The JM is built-in in this device.
• The connection example described here does not apply to REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2.3.1 1-to-1 connection

This device reads images from 1 REGIUS.

REGIUS
CS-7 (JM built in)

Hub

Peripheral devices

PACS Printer
(Host)

• Both this device and REGIUS can be connected using the default host name and IP address.
• The JM to be utilized is the one built in this device.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The IP address must be changed in the following cases:
–– Connecting to institution networks
–– Connecting the multiple 1-to-1 connection systems to the same network
• When connecting an existing REGIUS 170 and reading images, the version of REGIUS 170 must be upgraded.
–– SCB_CF software: Ver. 1.00R07 or higher
–– MCB firmware: Ver. 1.00R21 or higher
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

50
 2.3 Connection example of REGIUS

2.3.2 n-to-m connection

The n-to-m connection provides the system with multiple REGIUS devices shared by this device and another unit of
this device. All units of this device can read images from any REGIUS device.

O
OWhen the total number of this device and REGIUS devices is 8 or less
REGIUS #1
CS-7 #1

Chapter 2
Hub

CS-7 #2
REGIUS #6

Peripheral Devices

PACS Printer
(Host)

• This device and another unit of this device and REGIUS devices all require changes of IP addresses.
• The JM to be utilized is the one built in this device or another unit of this device. Both main JM and backup JM can
be configured.
• The association between CR cassette and Exam. Tag is performed using the bar code.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When starting the system, turn on this device with the main JM first. When terminating the system, turn off this device with
the main JM last.
• To mount the JM in this device, select a low-load this device with fewer exposures.
• When connecting an existing REGIUS 170 and reading images, the version of REGIUS 170 must be upgraded.
–– SCB_CF software: Ver. 1.00R07 or higher
–– MCB firmware: Ver. 1.00R21 or higher
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

51
2.3 Connection example of REGIUS

O
OWhen the total number of this device and REGIUS is 9 or more
In this configuration, 1 unit of this device is used as a dedicated JM.
Up to 15 REGIUS devices can be connected (the JM is accessed by 16 devices at a maximum).
REGIUS #1

CS-7 #1

REGIUS #2

CS-7 #2

Hub

REGIUS #12

Dedicated to the JM

Peripheral devices REGIUS #13

PACS Printer
(Host)

• This device and another unit of this device and REGIUS devices all require changes of IP addresses.
• Assign this device dedicated to the JM to the main JM. When this device is dedicated to the JM, it cannot be used
as a console.
• This device for the backup JM can be used as a console.
• The association between CR cassette and Exam. Tag is performed using the bar code.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This device dedicated to the JM should be always on.
• Though the backup JM can be used as a console, assign this device which has less load and exposures not to cause the
obstacle in the backup operation.
• When connecting an existing REGIUS 170 and reading images, the version of REGIUS 170 must be upgraded.
–– SCB_CF software: Ver. 1.00R07 or higher
–– MCB firmware: Ver. 1.00R21 or higher
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

52
 2.4 Connection example of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

The connection examples of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 are as follows.

This device reads images from 1 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.
CS-7(JM built in)

Hub

Chapter 2
USB

REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 Peripheral devices

PACS Printer
(Host)

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Only a single REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 unit can be connected to this device.
• A REGIUS series unit and a REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 unit cannot be connected to this device at the same time.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

53
 2.5 Component name

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The illustrations in this chapter may differ from the actual appearance. Also, the actual appearance may be changed without
notice.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2.5.1 This device

The part names of this device are shown below.

O
OFront

CD/DVD drive

Power switch

USB terminals

O
ORear

PS/2 keyboard
Power connector terminal

VGA monitor terminal

RS-232C terminal
Connector 2

USB terminals

Expansion slot Ethernet terminal

covers

54
 2.5 Component name

O
OInternal

Drive cage

Chapter 2
Power supply device

Latch

2.5.2 Monitor

The part names of the monitor are shown below.

O
OFront

Touch panel

Speakers

VOLUME SIGNAL ENTER

Control buttons Power switch Power lamp

55
2.5 Component name

O
ORear/side

USB terminal

Analog input
terminal

Stand Attachment holes Power connector

for wall mount arm

56
 2.5 Component name

2.5.3 This device (during the portable X-ray device operation)

The part names of this device (during the portable X-ray device operation) are shown below.

O
OFront/right side

Chapter 2
Wireless LAN Antenna

LCD
Wireless WAN Antenna

Keyboard
Touch Pad
Wireless LAN Antenna /
Power Switch / Bluetooth Antenna
Power Indicator

O
OBottom
Battery Indicator
Hand Strap
Battery Latch
NFC Sensor/Rear Camera/
Half Size Smart Card Slot RAM Module Slot

Expansion Bus Connector

Pen Holder

Battery Pack Hard Disk Drive Latch

Hard Disk Drive

O
OLeft side O
ORear side
LAN Port USB2.0 Port Security Lock SIM Card Slot

ExpressCard Smart Card

Slot Slot

Speaker

DC-IN Jack USB3.0 HDMI Port

Ports
Serial Port VGA Port Modem
Port

57
 2.6 Login with a service account

2.6.1 Login screen 2.6.2 Login

If the auto login function is set to off, the login screen Log in as described below.
is displayed at the time this device starts up.
In this case, log in to this device with a service ac-
count. 1 Input user ID and password, then press
[Login].
Login screen

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• User ID: maintenance
• When the auto login function is used, you are auto- • Password: kmmg5678
matically logged in when this device starts up and the
initial screen can be displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• The initial screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If logging in with a service account, make sure that
you log off after completing the operation.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

58
 2.7 Screen transitions

The method of transitioning between each screen is as shown below. For details for each screen, refer to the given
explanation page.

Initial screen System monitor screen

Press [System]. Meanings of arrows

: Screen transition operations

Chapter 2
: This action returns to the
previous screen.
Press [Close].

The initial screen displayed is either the This screen carries out operations such as checking
patient registration screen or the list screen. the status of this device and of connected equipment.

Press [Utility].

[Enter Password] screen

This screen is for entering password at

the time of starting-up the service tools.

Enter "kmmg5678"
and press [OK].

User tool Service tools Intermediate screen

User tool screen Device icon screen System monitor screen

Select the Press [Close].

[User Tool] tab.

Some settings and operations can be Select the The device icons of this device and of
carried out on the user tool screen. [Service Tool] tab. peripheral devices are displayed.
Press [Close].
Press the tool
selection Press a
Press [Close]. Press [Close].
button. device icon.

Setting tool screen Sub-menu screen

Press [OK] on
Carrying out various settings Summary information on each device is displayed. the confirmation
and operations Each setting tool is displayed from this screen. screen.
Press a
setting tool
Press [OK] or
button.
[Cancel].
Intermediate screen

Setting tool screen

Start-up, shutdown, reboot, configuring,

displaying Windows desktop, and other
actions for this device.
Carrying out various settings and operations

59
 2.8 Operating the service tool

2.8.1 Startup of the service

3 Press [Utility].

tool
The procedure to start the service tool is as follows.

1 Turn on the power switch of this device.

• If the auto login function is set to on, it is neces-
sary to enter the password to start the service
tool.
• If you log in this device with the service account
with the auto login function set to off, it is not
necessary to enter the password to start the ser-
vice tool.
• The auto login function can be set on [Login
Setting] under the CS-7 setting screen.

2 Press [System] on the initial screen.

• The [Enter Password] screen is displayed.

• The system monitor screen is displayed.

60
 2.8 Operating the service tool

4 Input the password and press [OK].

2.8.2 Exiting from the service
tool
The procedure to exit from the service tool is as fol-
lows.

1 Press [Close] on the bottom right.

Chapter 2
O
OWhen the device icon screen is displayed

• Password: kmmg5678

O
OWhen the user tool screen is displayed

• The device icon screen of the service tool is dis-

played.

• The system monitor screen is displayed.

61
2.8 Operating the service tool

2 Press [End]. 3 Press [OK].

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

• The intermediate screen is displayed.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the functions of the intermediate screen, refer to
"2.8.6 Functions of the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

62
 2.8 Operating the service tool

4 Press [ShutDown].
2.8.3 Startup of the setting
tool
Perform the settings of the devices with the respective
setting tool screens. The procedure to start the setting
tool is as follows.

1 Press the device icon on the device icon

Chapter 2
screen.

• The shutdown screen is displayed, and shut-

down processing of this device is performed. Af-
ter a short time, the power will be automatically
turned off.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • The sub-menu screen for the device is dis-

• When turning the power of this device off, always fol- played.
low the above procedure. Do not turn it off using the
power switch. Doing so may result in data loss or
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
damage to the system software.
• For the structures of the device icon screen and the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
sub-menu screen, refer to "2.9.1 Structure of the de-
vice icon screen" and "2.9.2 Structure of the sub-menu
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
screen".
• To start this device again, press [CS-7]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

63
2.8 Operating the service tool

2 Press [Setting].
2.8.4 Switching to the user
tool
In some settings, the user tool is used. Switch to the
user tool as follows.

1 Select the [User Tool] tab on the tool

switching tab.

• The setting tool screen for the device is dis-

played.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• A given setting tool is launched by different device
icons, depending on the setting tool. With this type of
setting tool, multiple device setting items are aggre- • The user tool screen is displayed.
gated on a single screen.
• If you click on the background image when using cer-
tain setting tools, the focus moves to the background.
When this happens, press the [TAB] key on the key-
board while pressing and holding the [ALT] key, and
rearrange the window order.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

64
 2.8 Operating the service tool

2.8.5 How to display the inter-

3 Press [End].

mediate screen
The procedure to display the intermediate screen is as
follows.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The intermediate screen can be displayed using the

Chapter 2
following steps, only when logging in the service tool
with the service account.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Log in the service tool with a service ac-

count.

2 Press [Close] on the device icon screen.

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

• The system monitor screen is displayed.

65
2.8 Operating the service tool

4 Press [OK].
2.8.6 Functions of the inter-
mediate screen
The functions of the intermediate screen are as fol-
lows.
Name Functions
[CS-7] Starts this device.
Sets the Wake on LAN, the remote
[Setting]
maintenance, and the language.
[License Import] Displays the license import screen.
[ShutDown] Shuts down this device.
[Reboot] Restarts this device.
[Windows Desktop] Displays the Windows desktop.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the Wake on LAN setting, refer to "4.20.10 Power
on/off linkage settings".
• For remote maintenance settings, refer to "15.4 Set-
ting of the remote maintenance".
• For the language setting, refer to the HINT of "Lan-
guage setting" of "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for
Service Tool/User Tool Screen".
• For importing the license, refer to "4.6 Registration of
license".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The intermediate screen is displayed.

66
 2.9 Service tool screen

2.9.1 Structure of the device icon screen

This is the screen to be displayed when the service tool is started. The device icons of this device and peripheral
devices are displayed.

Chapter 2
(1)

(2)

(3)

Number Name Functions

(1) Tool switching tabs Switches between the service tool and the user tool.
Displays the sub-menu screen.
(2) Device icons
There is an icon for each device configured in the system.
(3) [Close] Returns to the system monitor screen.

67
2.9 Service tool screen

O
OMaximum number of device icons to be displayed
The maximum number of device icons to be displayed on this device is as follows.

Device icon Maximum number to be displayed License

CS-7 1 Required
RM 1 Not required
AeroDR Access Point 1 Required
AeroDR Detector 4 Required
AeroDR I/F Cable 4 Not required
AeroDR Battery Charger 4 Not required
AeroDR UF Cable 4 Not required
AeroDR Interface Unit2 1 Not required
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit 1 Not required
AeroDR Stitching Unit 1 Required
JM 1+1* Not required
REGIUS 15 Required
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 1 Required
HOST 4+1* Required
Printer 2+1* Required
RIS-IN 1+1* Required
RIS-OUT 1+1* Required
X-RAY 2 Required
EMR(Info.) 1 Required
EMR(Image) 1 Required
RIS Built-IN 1 Required
Media 1 Required
* 1 unit is used for backup.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon and AeroDR Access Point icon are displayed instead of the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit icon during the AeroDR Portable RF Unit operation.
• The AeroDR Access Point icon is displayed instead of the AeroDR Portable UF Unit icon during the AeroDR Portable UF
Unit operation.
• A license is required for the AeroDR Portable RF/UF Unit operation.
• When REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 is in operation, the REGIUS icon is not displayed.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

68
 2.9 Service tool screen

2.9.2 Structure of the sub-menu screen

This screen is displayed when the device icon is pressed. Main information of the device is displayed.
Start the setting tool on this screen.
(1)
(2)

(3)

Chapter 2
(4)

(5)

Number Name Functions

(1) Device icon name Name of the device icon to which the sub-menu screen belongs.
(2) Connection check box Sets either connection or non-connection with this device.
Condition/setting dis- Main information, such as connection status, setting description, version, etc., is displayed.
(3)
play field The items displayed will vary depending on the device icon.
Buttons to display the setting tool screen. They are categorized as follows:
[Settings]: Button related to settings

(4) Setting tool buttons [Analyze]: Button related to analysis

[Adjustment]: Button related to adjustment

The buttons to be displayed will vary depending on the device icon.

(5) [Close] Closes the sub-menu screen.

69
 2.10 User tool screen

This screen is displayed with the tool switching tab. Some settings are configured from this screen.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Number Name Functions

(1) Tool switching tabs Switches between the user tool and the service tool.
Tool classification selection Selects the function you wish to execute using the user tool. Toggles between tool classi-
(2)
buttons fication displays.
Tool classification display
(3) Toggles between button displays for each tool classification.
area
(4) Tool selection buttons Starts the tools.
(5) [Close] Returns to the system monitor screen.

70
 Chapter
3
Preparation for Installation
This chapter describes the items to be prepared for
installation of this device and options.

71
 3.1 Preparation of tools

Before the installation work, prepare the following hand

tools and installation tools as needed.

O
OTools
Name Usage
Phillips screw driv-
Prepare as needed.
ers (various types)
Used to install an add-on Ethernet
Wristband
board and additional memory.

O
OInstallation tools
Name Usage
Personal computer
Used for maintenance tasks.
for maintenance
Used for installing the drivers of the
CS-7 DRIVER CD touch panel monitor and optional de-
vices.
Used for connecting a personal com-
Hub and Ethernet puter for maintenance.
cables Used to install the AeroDR Portable
UF Unit.
Used for registering the AeroDR
Bar code reader
SYSTEM.
1 mm thick copper
Used for analyzing AeroDR Detector.
plate
Used for calibrating AeroDR Detector
Dosage meter
and REGIUS.
Brightness meter Used for the monitor brightness ad-
connection cable justment.
External CD/DVD Used for the portable X-ray device
drive operation.

72
 3.2 Check of the installation environment

Check the environment of items such as the power, X-

ray device, and exposure room.
3.2.2 Check of the installation
location
Check that the installation location of this device meets
3.2.1 Check of the power sup- the following conditions:
ply condition • It is a location that does not get wet from water and
floor wax.
Check the institution's power specifications, the po-
• It is a location that is not negatively affected by at-
sitioning of the power socket, the power cable wiring
mospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, ventila-
route, and other items.
tion, sunlight, dust, salt-air or air containing sulfur.
• A site that is stable, allows sufficient ventilation, does
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • not have strong dark-light contrast, does not emit

Chapter 3
• You must check that the earth has been connected. electromagnetic waves, does not vibrate, and is not
• If the power supply voltage is not supplied stably, then affected by shocks.
normal exposure will not be possible due to malfunc- • It is a location where no chemical agent is used or
tion of the internal devices when the voltage drops stored.
more than 10% from the specified voltage. • It is a location where no gas is generated.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • It is a location where there is no nearby noise.
• It is a location where people passing will not trip over
O
OPower specifications of this device any cables by accident.
Item Description • It is a location where the intake and exhaust outlets
Power
are not blocked.
AC 90-264 V (50/60 Hz) • It is a location with a space of more than 150 mm at
requirements
Power both the sides and rear of this device.
46 W
consumption

O
OPower specifications of this device (during
the portable X-ray device operation)
Item Description
Power
AC 100-240 V (50/60 Hz)
requirements
Power
80 W
consumption

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The specifications may differ depending on the deliv-
ery time and the destination.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

73
 3.3 Check of the network environment

Check the institution network environment, and make

sure that the materials and other items are prepared. 3.3.2 Hub

3.3.1 IP address O
OHub for exposure room side
(Hub for AeroDR Detector registration side)
Decide the installation location of the hub by confirm-
Check with the institution that it is possible to obtain IP ing the connection point to the institution network and
address for all devices to be installed. the installation location of this device.
The required installation for an IP address is as follows. The hub must meet the following specifications.
• This device
*2  IP addresses are required if using built-in wireless Item Specification
LAN when operating with a portable X-ray device.
Management functions Not required
• AeroDR Detector (wired connection/ wireless connection)
* 2 IP addresses are required for each panel. Ethernet standard 100BASE-T or better
• AeroDR Interface Unit2 3 channels or more (1: this device,
• AeroDR Generator Interface Unit Number of ports 2: AeroDR Interface Unit or REGIUS,
• AeroDR Access Point 3: maintenance use)
• AeroDR Portable RF Unit
* 2 IP addresses are required for each device. Form of connector RJ-45 8 pin
• AeroDR Portable UF Unit Auto-Negotiation function availabil-
Functions
• AeroDR Stitching Unit ity
• REGIUS Supported Ethernet cable Category 5e or better
• Sub Monitor Adaptor
• Add-in Ethernet board Quantity 1
• USB wired LAN adapter
• Wireless LAN adapter
* Because a fixed IP address is used for connec- IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
tion with PDA, an IP address does not have to be • A
 connection with an STP cable of category 5e or better is
provided. recommended, depending on the AeroDR SYSTEM device.
• Installation of peripherals such as a printer and host Please prepare a hub that supports STP specifications.
• Maintenance usage For hub specifications, refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installa-
• Remote access usage tion/Service Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Also, check that remote connection is possible.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • With AeroDR Portable RF Unit/AeroDR Portable UF
• IP addresses for both wired and wireless connections Unit, AeroDR Detector registration side hub is given
of the AeroDR Detector must be in the same segment. as the exposure room hub.
If the segments are different, switching between the ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Wired and Wireless cannot be carried out accurately.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

74
 3.3 Check of the network environment

O
OHub for portable X-ray device side
Decide the installation location of the hub by confirm- 3.3.3 Ethernet cable
ing the connection point to the portable X-ray device
and the installation location of this device.
Decide the length of the Ethernet cable connecting
The hub must meet the following specifications.
each device based on the wiring route, and check with
Item Specification the institution. Also, check that the Ethernet cable wir-
Management functions Not required ing route does not go through a passageway, and that
Ethernet standard 100BASE-T or better it can be safely laid.
The Ethernet cable must meet the following specifica-
4 channels or more (1: this device,
2: AeroDR Portable RF Unit, tions.
Number of ports
3: AeroDR Portable RF Unit,
4: AeroDR Detector registration use) Item Specification

Form of connector RJ-45 8 pin Cable length 30 m or less

Auto-Negotiation function availabil- Category Category 5e or better

Chapter 3
Functions
ity Ethernet standard 100BASE-TX or better
Supported Ethernet Form of connector RJ-45 8-pin
STP cable of category 5e or better
cable Cable specifications Straight
Quantity 1 Quantity Number of the installed devices
Power source Drive with the USB power supply

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• A connection with an STP cable of category 5e or
better is recommended, depending on the AeroDR
SYSTEM device. Please prepare an Ethernet cable
that supports STP specifications.
For Ethernet cable specifications, refer to "AeroDR
SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

75
76
 Chapter
4
Installation Procedure for
This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM
(SRM connection)
This chapter describes the installation workflow, installation tasks,
and post-installation checks of this device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection).

77
 4.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR SYSTEM
(SRM connection)

This section describes the installation procedure based on the connection example (Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/
AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/SRM (XIF board) + AeroDR UF Cable/AeroDR Battery
Charger) as follows.

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
SRM (XIF board) + AeroDR UF Cable/AeroDR Battery Charger

Exposure room AeroDR Detector

AeroDR UF Cable
X-rayy Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR I/F Cable
AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR
Access Point

XIF
XIF
Power
source Hub ECB
ECB

AeroDR AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable operation panel
Ethernet cable(PoE)
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
Serial/hardware connection converter
Grounding cable CS-7

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When an AeroDR Interface Unit2 is installed instead of an AeroDR Interface Unit and an AeroDR Generator Interface Unit,
load "AeroDR Interface Unit2" instead of "AeroDR Interface Unit" and "AeroDR Generator Interface Unit".
• When installing an AeroDR Battery Chrager2 instead of an AeroDR Battery Chrager, load "AeroDR Battery Charger2" in-
stead of "AeroDR Battery Charger".
• When installing an XGIF board instead of an XIF board, load "XGIF board" instead of "XIF board".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

78
 4.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR SYSTEM
(SRM connection)

The installation process for this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection) is as follows.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there is only 1 exposure room, the task of flow number 18 is unnecessary.
• When there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the tasks from flow number 1 to 17 to set each exposure room, then per-
form the task of flow number 18.
• When the RIS/HOST and AeroDR SYSTEM use the same network segment, refer to "16.5 How to change the network set-
tings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
The workflow to install AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection-1)
1 4.3 Check of bundled items

1 5.3 Bundled items confirmation

2 4.4 Check of startup

3 4.5 Setting of touch panel 2 5.4 Installation of this device

4 4.6 Registration of license

3 5.5 Startup check

Chapter 4
5 4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM

4.8 System setting of this device 4 5.6 Connection and setting of the CS-7
6

7 4.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices 5 5.7 Operation check using the TES

8 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5.8 Confirmation of the connection with the
6 X-ray device (SRM connection check)
9 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

10 4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Setting

11 4.13 Restart of this device 5.9 Charging of the AeroDR Detector and
7 confirmation of its wireless status
4.14 Change of network of this device/addition of
12 AeroDR Detector after completing the settings

13 4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector 8 5.10 Exposure test and AeroDR Detector analysis

4.16 Deployment to the installation location and 5.11 Placement in the installation locations
14 9
connection to the institution network

15 4.17 Peripheral devices setting

16 4.18 Activation

17 4.19 Confirmation of the version of this device

18 4.20 Roaming environment settings

19 4.21 Optional installation and data migration

20 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

21 4.23 Final operation check and delivery 10 5.12 Final operation check and delivery

79
4.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection), refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

80
 4.3 Check of bundled items

This device and monitor are divided into 2 packages.

After unpacking, confirm all components are included.

O
OPackage of this device
Name of product Quantity Remarks
Main body of this 1
device
PS/2 keyboard 1 Cable length: 1.8 m
USB mouse 1 Cable length: 1.8 m
Power cable 1
AC adapter 1 For 3p-2p conversion
Tower stand 1 Stand for a vertical position
Attached documents 1 set

O
OPackage of monitor
Name of product Quantity Remarks

Chapter 4
Main body of monitor 1 FlexScan T1751
Power cable 1
AC adapter 1 For 3P-2P conversion
Signal cable 1 DVI-D (cable length: 2 m)
1 D-sub (cable length: 1.8 m)
USB cable 1 Series A-Series B (cable
length: 1.8 m)
Stereo mini jack cable 1 Cable length: 2.1 m
Stylus 1 TP2
CD-ROM 1 LCD utility disk, etc.
Attached documents 1 set

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The components might be different depending on the
delivery time and the destination.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

81
 4.4 Check of startup

Before the actual connection, make sure that this de- 3 Connect the provided power cables to the
vice starts up properly. power connectors of this device and the
monitor respectively.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Monitor This device (rear)
• When there are multiple units of this device, make a
temporary connection and perform a startup check for
each device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4.4.1 Temporary connection

Connect this device, monitor, keyboard, and mouse.

1 Connect this device and the monitor us-

ing the provided signal cable, USB cable,
and stereo mini jack cable. Power cable Power cable

Monitor This device (rear)

4 Plug in the power cables of this device
Sound input and the monitor respectively.
terminal
USB
terminal
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Analog input
terminal • Do not plug in the power cable before the completion of
all of the connections.
• The specifications of this device and the monitor might
be different depending on the date of delivery and the
destination.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Connect the keyboard cable to the PS/2

keyboard connector and the mouse cable
to the USB connector of this device re-
spectively.

This device (rear)

Keyboard

Mouse

82
 4.4 Check of startup

4.4.2 Check of startup

Start up this device and check that the initial screen is

displayed.

1 Turn on the monitor first before turning on

this device.
• Start up messages are displayed sequentially.
• Internal system initialization is performed while
the system startup screen is displayed.
• Upon completion of initialization, the initial
screen is displayed, and this device is ready for
operation.
The initial screen

Chapter 4
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The software version is displayed on the system
startup screen. Initialization will be completed a few
minutes after turning on the power.
• A progress bar is displayed on the system startup screen,
indicating the status of the system initialization process.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

83
 4.5 Setting of touch panel

Make the setting of touch panel to be connected to this 4 Insert the CS-7 DRIVER CD into the
device. CD/DVD drive.

4.5.1 Installation of the driver 5 Close the auto-play screen and perform
for the touch panel [D: \EIZO LCD Utility\Launcher.exe] stored
in the CS-7 DRIVER CD through Explorer.
When using the monitor connected to this device as a
touch panel, install the driver for the touch panel. 6 Select [Touch Panel], and press [Touch
Panel Driver (Windows 7/Vista)].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The following description is an example. The operation
might be different depending on the device used. For
details, refer to the operation manual of the device used.
• Install the drivers using the distributed "CS-7 DRIVER
CD". Do not use the install CD supplied with a touch
panel monitor.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Make sure that the monitor and this de-

vice are powered on.
7 Press [Install].
2 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8 Confirm that this device and the monitor
3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- are connected with USB cable, and press
diate screen. [OK].

• Installation of the driver will start.

84
 4.5 Setting of touch panel

9 Press [Exit].
4.5.2 Adjusting the position
of the touch panel
Adjust the touch panel coordinates, if it is out of align-
ment.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When you use a monitor not described in "4.5.1 Installa-
tion of the driver for the touch panel", you must calibrate
the touch panel. Select [Custom] in [Touch Panel cali-
bration tool], and set the execution path via [Execution
path of touch panel calibration tool]. For details, refer to
10 When the installation is completed, eject "Monitor Settings" in "CS-7 icon" of "CS-7 Installation/
the CS-7 DRIVER CD from the CD/DVD Service Manual for Service Tool/User Tool Screen".
drive. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

11 If a message prompting to restart is dis-

1 Start the service tool.
played, press [Restart Now].
2 Select the [User Tool] tab.

Chapter 4
• This device will restart.
• Restart manually if the screen is not displayed.

12 Display the optional screen and operate

the touch panel through the monitor.
• Adjust the touch panel coordinates in the follow-
ing steps, when it is out of alignment.
• If touch operation can be performed normally,
driver installation and setting are complete.

• The user tool screen is displayed.

85
4.5 Setting of touch panel

3 Press [Adjustment] and then press [Touch 5 Press [Yes].

Panel].

• Confirm the touch panel operation, again.

• The touch panel adjustment screen is displayed.

4 Following the instructions on the screen,

tap the cross displayed on the screen
with the touch-pen bundled with the touch
panel monitor.

• On the first time tap 16 places, and thereafter

tap 4.
• When the tap operations are completed, a con-
firmation screen is displayed.

86
 4.6 Registration of license

Register the license key to this device. 5 Press [Import].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• This device manages all settings and connected
devices under license. Settings cannot be performed
unless the license is imported.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Check that the monitor and this device are

on.

2 Insert the media containing the license

key data into the CD/DVD drive.

3 Display the intermediate screen.

Chapter 4
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Press [License Import].

• The file selection screen of Windows is dis-

played.

• The license import screen is displayed.

87
4.6 Registration of license

6 Select the media containing the license

key data and press [Open].

• The license key will be imported.

7 Press [Regist].

• The license is registered and the license import

screen is closed.

8 Remove the media from the CD/DVD drive.

9 Turn off this device.

• Turn the monitor and this device off before con-
necting this device to AeroDR SYSTEM or RE-
GIUS.

88
 4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM

4.7.1 Connection with 4.7.2 Startup of respective

AeroDR SYSTEM devices
Connect this device with the AeroDR SYSTEM. Turn on this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Turn on the monitor, and then this device.

• At this stage, do not connect to the institution network.
• If there are multiple AeroDR Detectors, connect them 2 Turn on the AeroDR SYSTEM.
1 by 1.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Battery remaining of the AeroDR Detector may be
1 Connect this device with the Ethernet 0%, so always turn on the power switch of the AeroDR
cable. Detector after connecting the AeroDR I/F Cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 4
• When an optional add-in Ethernet board is installed in
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
this device, connect a hub or a LAN cable to the stan-
• For turning AeroDR SYSTEM power on, refer to
dard port of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Connect the Ethernet cable connected to

the AeroDR Interface Unit to the hub.

3 Connect the Ethernet cable connected to

this device to the hub.

89
 4.8 System setting of this device

Set the system of this device on the CS-7 setting

screen.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

4 Set the following items in [Institution In-

formation Setting].

Setting item Settings

[Institution Input the institution name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.
[Institution Input the institution address.
Address] Input within 1,024 characters.
[Telephone
Input the phone number.
Number]
[Department Input the department name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The sub-menu screen is displayed. • For [Institution Name], [Institution Address], [Telephone
Number] and [Department Name], the values need to
3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. be re-input because restoring [System] by restoring the
settings does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the license import is finished, the content of
license file will appear in [Institution Name], [Institution
Address], and [Telephone Number].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

90
 4.8 System setting of this device

5 Set the following items in [Device Informa- 6 Set the following items in [Monitor Settings].
tion Setting].

Setting item Settings

[Touch panel Select the touch format for the touch
Setting item Settings calibration panel monitor as [For multi touch
Manufacturer name is displayed. tool] monitor] or [Custom].
[Maker Name] Default setting: KONICA MINOLTA
This content cannot be changed.
Model name is displayed. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Model Name] Default setting: CS-7 • When you select [Custom], set the execution path with
This content cannot be changed.
[Execution path of touch panel calibration tool].
[Serial Serial number is displayed.
Number] This content cannot be changed.
[Station AE
Input the station AE title.
Title]

Chapter 4
[Console
Input the console name.
Name]
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Input ID from 1 to 255 to specify this
device on the institution network.
[Unique ID] Change is not necessary when only 1 7 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.
device is installed.
Default setting: 1
Input the exposure room name within
[Exam Room
10 characters.
Name]
Default setting: CS-7 #1
The current version of the application • The settings are stored, and the screen is closed.
of this device is displayed.
Default setting: the version name of
the application installed when manu- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
[Version] factured. • When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
When the application is updated or the
the setting screen remains displayed.
version is upgraded, it is automatically
updated. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
This content cannot be changed.

8 Close the sub-menu screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change the [Unique ID] from "1" here. Change Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
this setting only when multiple exposure rooms are • For the other settings of the CS-7 setting screen, refer
setup and it is necessary to setup the roaming envi- to "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
ronment. For details, refer to "4.20 Roaming environ- User Tool Screen".
ment settings". ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For [Station AE Title], the values need to be re-input
because restoring [System] by restoring the settings
does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

91
 4.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices

Turn on the connection to the AeroDR SYSTEM re- 2 Select the connection check box.
lated devices to perform the settings.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Turn on the connection only for the devices to be in-
stalled.
• The connection may be turned on already depending
on the devices. Turn off the connection for the devices
that will not be installed if it is turned on.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Press the device icon.

3 Press [Close].

• The AeroDR Access Point icon is used as an

example here to explain the procedure.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

• Connection is turned on and display of the device

icon will change.

92
 4.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices

4 Press the icon of the device that will be IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

set using the same procedure, then press • To install multiple AeroDR related devices, turn on the
the connection checkbox of the sub-menu connection of the device icons for the number of the
screen. devices to be installed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• For the AeroDR Detector, set up the connection to this
device on the AeroDR unit setting screen.
• When an AeroDR Interface Unit2 is installed, turn on
the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon connection.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

AeroDR I/F Cable icon

Chapter 4
AeroDR Battery Charger icon

AeroDR UF Cable icon

AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon

93
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.10.1 Flow chart for setting up the network

Follow the following flow chart when setting up the network for this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM.
This example describes the setting procedure to configure all AeroDR SYSTEM related devices. There is no need to
set up devices that will not be installed.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting the network will be made per each exposure room. If there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the same settings
for each exposure room.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

●Device icon screen ●Sub-menu screen

Press the RM icon.

4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting screen

Press [Setting].

●AeroDR unit setting screen

4.10.3 RM setting

4.10.4 Exposure room setting

4.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting

4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration

4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector communication

4.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting

4.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting

4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting

4.10.11 AeroDR Generator Interface Unit setting

4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting

4.10.13 Saving of settings

94
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR

2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

unit setting screen

Display the AeroDR unit setting screen to setup the
AeroDR SYSTEM.

1 Press the RM icon.

Chapter 4
• The AeroDR unit setting screen is displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Press [OK] to save the settings and close the screen.
• The name set up in [Exposure Room Name] of [Expo- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
sure Room Setting] will be used as the display name
for the RM icon.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

95
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.10.3 RM setting 4.10.4 Exposure room setting

Set up the RM (Roaming Manager). Set up the sync mode and shutdown coordination with
the exposure room.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The RM is a system to perform management and 1 Set the following items in [Exposure
roaming of the AeroDR Detector. Room Setting].
• The RM manages the correspondence (registration)
between this device and AeroDR Detector and en-
ables the roaming (the change of the exposure room
to use the AeroDR Detector). It also manages the cor-
rection data of the respective AeroDR Detectors and
delivers it to this device at the roaming destination.
Setting item Settings
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
The exposure room name is dis-
played.
1 Set the following items in [RM setting]. [Exposure
Room Name]
The name set in [Exposure Room
Name] in the CS-7 setting screen is
displayed.
Select the sync mode of this device
and the X-ray device of the exposure
[Sync Mode] room.
Select [SRM].
Default setting: SRM
Setting item Settings Select [ON] or [OFF] of shutdown
Select [Client] or [Hybrid] for the RM coordination.
[Mode] operation mode. When [ON] is selected, the termina-
[Shutdown
Default setting: Hybrid tion of this device causes the AeroDR
Coordination]
Detector assigned to the exposure
Change is not required if the default IP
room to shut down.
address of this device is to be used.
Default setting: [OFF]
If the IP address of this device is to be
[IP Address
changed in "4.11 Setting of the IP ad-
of RM hybrid
dress of this device", enter that value.
machine] IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Default setting: 192.168.20.90
Loop-back address (127.0.0.1) cannot • Do not change [Exposure Room Name].
be used.
• Set up [Shutdown Coordination] in accordance with
[IP Address the operation status of the facility. It is necessary to
of RM client Setting is not performed here.
turn on the power of the AeroDR Detector every time it
machine]
is used since it will not link with startup.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change [Mode] from [Hybrid] here. Change this
setting only when multiple exposure rooms are setup
and it is necessary to setup the roaming environment.
For details, refer to "4.20 Roaming environment set-
tings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

96
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.10.5 AeroDR Access Point

setting
This is a required setting when the AeroDR Detector
is used wireless. Perform the setup of the AeroDR
Access Point first, and then the wireless connection
related setup on this device.
• The setting screen is displayed.
• Pressing an item in the menu tree on the left
1 Press [Moxa] in [Access Point Setting].
side of the screen will display the corresponding
setting item on the right part of the screen.
• When setting each item, press [Submit] on each
setting screen to apply the settings.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To enable the settings, step 19 and 20 need to be per-
formed.
• It will be time out and return to Login screen if there is
no input for 5 minutes in the setting screen, and login

Chapter 4
will be required again. The contents of settings with
[Submit] pressed is stored even if it has timed out.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Press [Network Settings] under [Basic

Settings] and set up the network for the
following items.
• The setting tool will open in the Web browser
and the login screen will be displayed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When a popup message regarding Acrobat is dis-
played, choose [Not enable]. Setting item Settings
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [IP Select [Static].
configuration] Default setting: Static
2 Input the user name and password on the Set according to the institution envi-
login screen, then press [Login]. [IP address] ronment.
• The default user name is "admin", and the pass- Default setting: 192.168.20.241
word is "root". Set according to the institution envi-
[Subnet mask] ronment.
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Set according to the institution envi-
[Gateway] ronment.
Default setting: 0.0.0.0

4 Press [Submit].

97
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Press [Operation Mode] under [Wireless 9 Set the frequency band, channel, and
Settings] and set the wireless operation SSID for the following items.
mode for the following items.

Setting item Settings

[Wireless Select [Enable]. Setting item Settings
enable] Default setting: Disable Select [A].
[Operation Select [AP]. Default setting: A
[RF type]
mode] Default setting: AP Use only IEEE802.11a in the AeroDR
Access Point.
Set the channel following the results
[Available
6 Press [Submit]. channel list
of the preliminary survey.
When the channel is DFS, an asterisk
* indicates
(*) will appear for the channel.
DFS channel]
Default setting: 36-5.18G
7 Press [Basic Wireless Settings] of [WLAN]
Input the unique SSID within 31 alpha-
of [Wireless Settings]. numeric characters according to the
[SSID]
institution environment.
Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
8 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen. [SSID broad- Select [Enable].
cast] Default setting: Enable

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When installing the AeroDR Access Points in mul-
tiple exposure rooms, enter a unique [SSID] for each
exposure room regardless of settings of the roaming
environment.
(Example)
Exposure room 1: KMMG_AeroDR_1
Exposure room 2: KMMG_AeroDR_2
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

10 Press [Submit].

11 Press [WLAN Security Settings] of [WLAN]

of [Wireless Settings].

12 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen.

98
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

13 Set the security for the following items. 17 Press the following message that is dis-
played on the upper right portion of the
Web browser window.

Setting item Settings

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Security Select [WPA2].
mode] Default setting: WPA2 • If you changed the settings, save the settings and
Select [Personal]. restart. The modified settings will not be applied if the
[WPA type] system is not restarted.
Default setting: Personal
[Encryption Select [AES]. • When changes have been made to the settings, a
method] Default setting: AES message will blink on the upper right portion of the
Input a passphrase with 37 or more screen. To save the setting and activate it, press this
alphanumeric characters. message.
[Passphrase]
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt4F9 ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19

18 Press [Save and Restart].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 4
• We recommend that the passphrase be used without
changing the default setting. When changing the pass-
phrase, combine alphanumeric characters that are dif-
ficult to guess.
• When installing AeroDR Access Points in multiple
exposure rooms, enter the same passphrase for each • The settings will be saved and the AeroDR Ac-
AeroDR Access Point. cess Point will restart.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Restart is completed when a "beeping" sound
rings after approximately 15 seconds.
14 Press [Submit].
19 Press [Close] on the browser to close the
15 Press [Advanced Wireless Settings] under browser window.
[WLAN] of [Wireless Settings] and set the
radio output for the following items. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the IP address with a different segment from the
IP address of this device is set, the browser window
may not be displayed correctly. However, the set-
tings will be performed normally. Press [Close] on the
browser.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Setting item Settings

[Transmis- Select [Full].
sion power] Default setting: Full
Select [Enable].
[WMM]
Default setting: Enable

16 Press [Submit].

99
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

20 Go back to the AeroDR unit setting screen

4.10.6 AeroDR Detector cor-
and set the following items in [Access
Point Setting]. rection data registration
Register the AeroDR Detector's correction data in this
device.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Information required for network settings, such as IP
address of the AeroDR Detector, is stored in the cor-
Setting item Settings rection data.
Input the AeroDR Access Point serial ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
number or read the bar code.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number]
the form of product code (4 digits) 1 Insert the media provided with AeroDR
-serial number (5 digits). Detector to the CD/DVD drive.
Input the AeroDR Access Point name
[Display
Name]
within 10 characters.
Default setting: Wireless A
2 Press [Add] in [Correction Data Setting].

Input the same [IP Address] as the

[IP Address] one in step 3.
Default setting: 192.168.20.241
Enter the same [SSID] as the one in
[SSID] step 9 within 32 ASCII characters.
Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
Enter the same [Passphrase] as the
one in step 13 within 64 ASCII charac-
[Pass Phrase] ters.
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt4F9
ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• The [Browse For Folder] screen is displayed.

100
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

3 Select the folder indicating the serial num-

4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR
ber of the AeroDR detector, and press [OK].
Detector communication
Confirm the communication between this device and
AeroDR Detector.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not change the IP address for the AeroDR Detec-
tor here. Change the IP address of AeroDR Detector
in "4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Turn on the AeroDR Detector with the

correction data registered, and connect
to the AeroDR I/F Cable, AeroDR Battery
Charger, or AeroDR UF Cable.
• (Example) A20H-00001
2 Press [Download] in the [AeroDR Detector

Chapter 4
Setting].

• Information of [Wired IP Address], [Wireless IP

Address], [Default Gateway] and [Subnet Mask]
are acquired.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The serial number of AeroDR Detector will be • If the serial numbers of the correction data CD used in
registered and [Serial Number] of [AeroDR De- "4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration"
tector Setting] will be updated. and the AeroDR Detector do not match, the "The se-
rial number of the AeroDR Detector does not match
the serial number of correction data. Please confirm
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • the combination of the AeroDR Detector and a CD re-
• Since the correction data is read from the CD, it may lated to this correction data." message is displayed. In
take a certain amount of time to add the correction this case, download again using the correct correction
data. data CD.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Remove the media provided with the AeroDR 3 Set [Display Name].
Detector from the CD/DVD drive.

• Enter the AeroDR Detector name within 10 char-

acters.
• Change is not required if the default display
name of the AeroDR Detector is to be used.

101
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable
• [Display Name] is also used as the AeroDR Detector
setting
name in the application bar. Since only the first 3 char-
acters will be displayed in the application bar, assign a Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable.
name that is easy to recognize.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Upload]. • AeroDR detector to be used is necessary to set up

the AeroDR I/F Cable.
• When there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables, connect
and set up each cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable is con-

nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit.

2 Confirm that the AeroDR detector to be

used is powered on.

3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-

DR I/F Cable.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data
registered in "4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
• The setting information is uploaded to the Aero-
registration".
DR Detector.
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device
before this operation, sub-ID of the device previously
connected to may be displayed. When you press
[Download] at the next step, the device sub-ID of the
AeroDR I/F Cable to be set up is obtained.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Download] in [I/F Cable Setting].

• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-

played.

102
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used, O

OWhen there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables
and press [OK].
1 Turn on the connection for the device icon
for the second AeroDR I/F Cable.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to "4.9 Activation of AeroDR
SYSTEM related devices".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable with the same

procedure as the first AeroDR I/F Cable.

• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable is

automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed

Chapter 4
in the [Device Sub ID] of [I/F Cable Setting].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
sub-ID by this method.
• For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6 Set the following items in [I/F Cable Set-

ting].

Setting item Settings

Read the bar code and get the Serial
number of the AeroDR I/F Cable.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number]
the form of product code (4 digits)
-serial number (5 digits).
Input the I/F Cable name within 10
[Display
characters.
Name]
Default setting: IF Cable

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The serial number of the AeroDR I/F Cable is de-
scribed on the tag attached to it.
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

103
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger

setting
Set up when using the AeroDR Battery Charger or
the AeroDR Interface Unit2 to register and charge the
AeroDR Detector.
Here, the use of AeroDR Battery Charger is described
as an example. • The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-
played.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• AeroDR Detector to be used is necessary to set up the
4 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used,
and press [OK].
AeroDR Battery Charger for registering.
The AeroDR Detector is not necessary to set up the Aero-
DR Battery Charger just for charging, so steps 1 - 4 are
not necessary.
• When there are multiple AeroDR Battery Chargers for
registering, connect and set up each device.
• Even if the AeroDR Battery Charger is used only for
charging, setting is still necessary for device registration.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR Detector to be

used is powered on.

2 Insert the AeroDR Detector into the Aero-

DR Battery Charger.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data
is automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed
registered referencing "4.10.6 AeroDR Detector cor-
in [Device Sub ID] of [AeroDR Battery Charger].
rection data registration".
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device
before this operation, sub-ID of the device previously HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
connected to may be displayed. When you press • The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or
[Download] at the next step, the device sub-ID of the read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
AeroDR Battery Charger to be set up is obtained. vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
sub-ID by this method.
3 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Battery • For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
Charger]. plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
format.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

104
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Set the following items in [AeroDR Battery OO When there are multiple AeroDR Battery
Charger]. Chargers

1 Turn on the connection for the device icon

for the second AeroDR Battery Charger.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to "4.9 Activation of AeroDR
Setting item Settings SYSTEM related devices".
Read the bar code and get the Serial ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
number of AeroDR Battery Charger.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number] the form of product code (4 digits) 2 Set up the AeroDR Battery Charger with
-serial number (5 digits).
the same procedure as the first AeroDR
Input the Battery Charger name within Battery Charger.
[Display
10 characters.
Name] Default setting: Cradle
Select [For Charging Only] or [For
Registration/Charging] for the Battery
[Type]
Charger type.
Default setting: For Registration/Charging

Chapter 4
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Use the following steps to set [For Charging Only] as
[Type].
–– When using the AeroDR Battery Charger: setup of
the dip switch is required.
–– When using the AeroDR Battery Charger2: close
the connector cover.
For further information, refer to "Installation of the
AeroDR Battery Charger for charging only" or "Installa-
tion of the AeroDR Battery Charger2 for charging only"
in the "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
• The registration of the AeroDR Detector to a exposure
room will not be performed when [For Charging Only]
is selected for [Type] since notification to the RM is not
performed when the AeroDR Detector is mounted on
the AeroDR Battery Charger.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger is de-
scribed on the sticker on side of the main body.
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

105
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used,

4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting and press [OK].

Set the AeroDR UF Cable.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• AeroDR Detector to be used is necessary to set up
the AeroDR UF Cable.
• When there are multiple AeroDR UF Cables, connect
and set up each cable.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR UF Cable is con-

nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit via
AeroDR I/F Cable.

2 Confirm that the AeroDR Detector to be

used is powered on.
• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR UF Cable is
automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed
3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero- in [Device Sub ID] of [UF Cable Setting].
DR UF Cable.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
registered in "4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
registration".
not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device
sub-ID by this method.
before this operation, sub-ID of the device previously
• For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
connected to may be displayed. When you press
plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
[Download] at the next step, the device sub-ID of the
format.
AeroDR UF Cable to be set up is obtained.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Press [Download] in [UF Cable Setting].

• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-

played.

106
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

6 Set the following items in [UF Cable Setting].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The serial number of the AeroDR UF Cable is de-
scribed on the tag attached to the cable.
• When using only 1 AeroDR UF Cable, setup [Image
Orientation] and [Insertion Opening] in accordance
with the status of exposure stage to be used, using
following patterns as a reference.
Setting item Settings Direction of [Image [Insertion
AeroDR Detector Orientation] Opening]
Read the bar code and get the Serial
[Serial number of AeroDR UF Cable.
Match with the
Number] When inputting manually, input it in the form of [Standard] setting for us-
product code (4 digits)-serial number (5 digits).
ing the AeroDR
Input the AeroDR UF Cable name within Detector in
[Display [Upside
10 characters. landscape ori-
Name] down]
Default setting: Modality entation
Select [Wall Stand] or [Bucky Table] for
Match with
[Type] the type of AeroDR UF Cables.
the setting [Right]
Default setting: Wall Stand
for using
When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, select the the AeroDR

Chapter 4
angle information to be set for each of the Detector in
[Orienta- AeroDR UF Cable from [0], [90], [180], or [270]. portrait ori- [Left]
tion] Default setting: 0 entation
Setting is not required when using only 1
AeroDR UF Cable. • When reading the serial number with a bar code read-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
Select the orientation of the image on the
AeroDR Detector from [Standard] or [Up-
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
side down] when exposing the AeroDR
Detector in portrait orientation. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Default setting: Standard
[Image Ori- • For the other setting examples when using only 1
Select [Standard] when the line of white
entation]
projection of the AeroDR Detector is fac- AeroDR UF Cable, refer to "16.2.1 When using only
ing toward up. one AeroDR UF Cable".
Select [Upside down] when the line of ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
white projection of the AeroDR Detector is
facing toward down.
O
OWhen using 2 AeroDR UF Cables
Select the insertion direction of the AeroDR When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables for 1 exposure
Detector from [Right] or [Left] when exposing
the AeroDR Detector in landscape orientation.
stage, the setting procedure is as follows.
[Insertion Default setting: Left
Opening] Select [Right] when the line of white projection
of the AeroDR Detector is facing toward right.
1 Turn on the connection of the device icon
Select [Left] when the line of white projection of of the second AeroDR UF Cable.
the AeroDR Detector is facing toward left.
Select the operation status of the AeroDR Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
UF Cable from [Standard] or [UFC2].
• For the operation, refer to "4.9 Activation of AeroDR
[UFC Type] Default setting: Standard
If using 1 AeroDR UF Cable, select [Standard]. SYSTEM related devices".
If using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, select [UFC2]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Connect the second AeroDR UF Cable to

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• the AeroDR Detector.
• When exposing the AeroDR Detector in landscape ori-
entation, it may affect the result of automatic orienta-
tion determination process if [Insertion Opening] is not
setup correctly.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

107
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

3 Press [Download] in [UF Cable Setting], HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

and acquire the device sub ID for the sec- • Set [Serial Number] and [Display Name] referring to
ond AeroDR UF Cable. the operation of the first AeroDR UF Cable.
• When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, set [Orientation]
and [Image Orientation] according to the status of ex-
posure stage to be used with reference to the follow-
ing patterns.

AeroDR Detector [Image

[Orientation]
orientation Orientation]

First AeroDR UF
First Cable
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [0]
[Standard]
Second AeroDR
• For the operation, refer to steps 4 - 5 of "4.10.10
UF Cable
AeroDR UF Cable setting".
Second [90]
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
First AeroDR UF
4 Set the following items in [UF Cable Set- First Cable
ting] respectively. [0]
Second Second AeroDR [Standard]
UF Cable
[270]

First First AeroDR UF

Cable
[0] [Upside
Second AeroDR down]
UF Cable
Second [90]
Setting item Settings
Select the type of AeroDR UF Cable First First AeroDR UF
from [Wall Stand] or [Bucky Table]. Cable
[Type] Default setting: Wall Stand [0] [Upside
Select the same type for both first and Second Second AeroDR down]
second cables. UF Cable
Select the angle information to be set [270]
for the first and second AeroDR UF
Cables from [0], [90], [180], or [270]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Orientation]
Default setting: 0
Set to match the status of the expo-
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
sure stage to be used.
Select the orientation of the image on • For other setting patterns when using 2 AeroDR UF
AeroDR Detector from [Standard] or Cables, refer to "16.2.2 When using 2 AeroDR UF
[Upside down] when an exposure is Cables".
[Image performed in the portrait orientation of ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Orientation] AeroDR Detector.
Default setting: Standard
Select the same orientation for both
first and second cables.
Select the operation type of AeroDR
UF Cable from [Standard] or [UFC2].
[UFC Type] Default setting: Standard
Select [UFC2] for both first and sec-
ond cables.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The setting of [Insertion Opening] is not necessary
when using 2 AeroDR UF Cables.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

108
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.10.11 AeroDR Generator

2 Press [Upload].

Interface Unit setting

Set up the AeroDR Interface Unit2 or the AeroDR Gen-
erator Interface Unit.
Here, the settings for the AeroDR Generator Interface
Unit are used as an example.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the setting of X-ray synchronization, refer to "Set-
ting of X-ray synchronization".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

1 Set the following items in [XG BOX Set-

ting].

Chapter 4
• Settings will be uploaded to the AeroDR Gen-
erator Interface Unit.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Generator Interface Unit setting changes may
take up to a maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
Setting item Settings
• When the IP address with a different segment than
Input the AeroDR Generator Interface this device's IP is set, the "Processing" screen may
[Display
Units name within 10 characters. not disappear although settings are being uploaded to
Name]
Default setting: XG BOX the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit. After waiting for
Input the IP address of the AeroDR 30 seconds or more, press [Cancel] then perform ping
[IP Address] Generator Interface Units. from the Windows command prompt and confirm that
Default setting: 192.168.20.221 there is no response from the IP address before the
Input the address of the default gate- change.
[Default way. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Gateway] Input is not required, when no gate-
way exists on the network. 3 Read the serial number of the AeroDR Gen-
Input the subnet mask of the selected erator Interface Unit using the barcode.
[Subnet
device.
Mask]
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Select the number of XIF boards used
[WS] from [Use WS1 Only], [Use WS1/
WS2], or [Use WS1/2/3].
[Timer] Select "0" msec for SRM link.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For S-SRM link, press the first stage exposure switch
to set the delay time that elapses before the exposure • The AeroDR Generator Interface Unit's serial
starts. number is displayed in [Serial Number] under
* Note that S-SRM is not used in Japan. [XG BOX Setting].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • When manually entering the serial number, en-
ter the product code (4 digits) - product serial
number (5 digits).

109
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Serial number of the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit • [WS Mapping] and [Restricted AeroDR panel sending
is described on the sticker on side of the main body. ConsoleReady] are settings to prevent incorrect ex-
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read- posure by the user by linking the procedure No. (tech-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format. nique) selected on the operation panel of the X-ray
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • device to which modality (wall stand/table/cassette)
has the right to expose.
4 Set the following items of [WS Mapping]. However, the signal may not be able to transmit sepa-
rately to the XIF board depending on the specification
of the X-ray device. In such a case, the exposure
signal will be transmitted to all XIF boards connected
regardless of the procedure No. (technique) selected
on the operation panel of the X-ray device, so preven-
tion of incorrect exposure for each modality will not be
possible.
Setting item Settings There are some X-ray devices that can select to sepa-
WS1, 2, and 3 represent the first, sec- rate or not to separate depending on the procedure
[Wall Stand]
ond, and third layer of the XIF boards No. (technique), but it is recommended to setup the
in the AeroDR Generator Interface prevention of incorrect exposure. When the prevention
[Bucky Table] Unit, respectively.
of incorrect exposure is not setup due to the facility
Set up the relationship of which mo-
dality (wall stand/table/DR cassette) is environment, perform the installation after explaining
[DR Cassette]
assigned to each WS. the risk to the manager of the facility.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
* It is possible to enter settings for [WS4], but they will
not function.
O
OSetting of X-ray synchronization
This setting is not necessary if you do not perform X-
5 Set the following items of [Restricted ray synchronization.
AeroDR panel sending ConsoleReady].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The following steps are for configuring the [X-Ray
Sync1] setting. To set [X-Ray Sync2], repeat steps 1
to 4 after configuring [X-Ray Sync1].
• In ordinary cases, select [X-Ray Sync1]. Be sure to
set [X-Ray Sync1] and [X-Ray Sync2] only when con-
Setting items Settings necting to the X-ray generator in which you can set
Select whether enable or not for the the X-ray synchronization separately for Upright and
exposure control against the AeroDR Table.
Detector connected to the WS that is
• For the connection procedure, refer to "Connection
setup as DR cassette operation in [WS
Mapping]. specifications for exposure synchronization (XIF
Exposure control will not be performed if board)" of "AeroDR System Installation/Service Manu-
[Limitation
[No Control] is selected. al".
Type]
Only the AeroDR Detector selected in ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
the list can be exposed on that WS when
[Select WS enable to send] is selected.
The AeroDR Detector selected in the list 1 Select [Conduct Tube position adjustment
can not be exposed on that WS when and interlock of the collimation] in [XG
[Select WS disable to send] is selected. BOX Setting].
The names of the registered AeroDR
[AeroDR Detector Detectors are displayed.
1 - n] Select the AeroDR Detector to be con-
trolled.

110
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

2 Press [X-Ray Sync1]. Relationship between the Bit Assign information

(Bit) setting and LED/signal name on the AeroDR
Generator Interface Unit CIF board
The signals on the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit CIF board
are turned on and off by setting the Bit Assign information (Bit) of
tube position correction and collimation correction. Once these
are set up, the LED corresponding to the signal is lit or goes off.
The relationship between the Bit Assign information
(Bit) setting and LED/signal name on the AeroDR Gen-
erator Interface Unit CIF board is shown below.

Tube position correction

[Tube Position Correction] screen 1 2 3 4 5 6

PCO-UP PCO-LO SIZE1 SIZE2 SIZE3 SIZE4

Chapter 4
[Colimation Correction] screen Collimation correction Collimation correction
(vertical Bit) (horizontal Bit)

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6

:LED
:LED number/signal name
1
LED number/signal name are not marked on the board.

• The X-ray synchronization screen is displayed. Tube position correction Bit Assign information
(Bit) setting table
Combinations of the set Bit of tube position correction
3 Set the following items in the X-ray syn-
and LED/signal name to be lit are shown below.
chronization screen.
Bit setting LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6
value (PCO-UP) (PCO-LO) (SIZE1) (SIZE2) (SIZE3) (SIZE4)
[Tube Position Correction] screen
00
Setting item Settings 01 ○
Select the size, orientation, and posi-
[Coordination] tion of the X-ray tube position to be
02 ○
synchronized. 03 ○ ○
[Bit]
Input the Bit Assign information to be
sent to the X-ray device from 0 to 3F.
04 ○
05 ○ ○
[Colimation Correction] screen 06 ○ ○
Setting item Settings
07 ○ ○ ○
Select the size and orientation of the ra-
08 ○
[Coordination]
diation field aperture to be synchronized. 09 ○ ○
Input the Bit Assign information to be 0A ○ ○
[Bit] sent to the X-ray device among "00",
"02", "04", "08", "0F", "10" or "20".
0B ○ ○ ○
0C ○ ○

111
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

Bit setting LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 4 Press [OK].
value (PCO-UP) (PCO-LO) (SIZE1) (SIZE2) (SIZE3) (SIZE4)
[Tube Position Correction] screen
0D ○ ○ ○
0E ○ ○ ○
0F ○ ○ ○ ○
1* ○
2* ○
3* ○ ○
• When Bit setting values (01 - 3*) are set, LED 1 - 6 will be lit.
• To light LED 5 - 6, set in combination of "1*", "2*",
"3*" and "*1" - "*F".
(Example) Set as follows to light LED "1", "3", and "5" for
direction [Landscape], reading size [8X10],
[Colimation Correction] screen
and reading position [Bottom].

Collimation correction Bit Assign information (Bit) • The settings are saved and it takes you back to
setting table the [XG BOX Setting] screen.
Combinations of the set Bit of collimation correction
and LED/signal name to be lit are shown below.
[Vertical Bit]
Bit setting LED7 LED8 LED9 LED10 LED11 LED12
value (V1) (V2) (V3) (V4) (V5) (V6)
00
01 ○
02 ○
04 ○
08 ○
10 ○
20 ○
• When Bit setting values (01, 02, 04, 08, 10, 20) are
set, LED 7 - 12 will be lit.
[Horizontal Bit]
Bit setting LED13 LED14 LED15 LED16 LED17 LED18
value (H1) (H2) (H3) (H4) (H5) (H6)
00
01 ○
02 ○
04 ○
08 ○
10 ○
20 ○
• When Bit setting values (01, 02, 04, 08, 10, 20) are
set, LED 13 - 18 will be lit.

112
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Press [Upload].
4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting

Set up the AeroDR Detector after confirming its com-

munications by referencing "4.10.7 Confirmation of
AeroDR Detector communication".
Setting is not required if the default network setting of
the AeroDR is to be used.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Detector's serial number which was ac-
quired in "4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data reg-
istration" will be displayed in [Serial Number]. Confirm
that the serial number displayed is identical to the se-
rial number on the identification label(sticker) attached
to the AeroDR Detector before setting up.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable or the • The settings are uploaded to the AeroDR Detec-

Chapter 4
AeroDR UF Cable is connected to the tor.
AeroDR Interface Unit.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Confirm that the AeroDR detector to be • AeroDR Detector setting changes may take up to a
used is powered on. maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
• When the IP address with a different segment than
this device's IP is set, the "Processing" screen may
3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero- not disappear although settings are being uploaded to
DR I/F Cable or the AeroDR UF Cable. the AeroDR Detector. After waiting for 30 seconds or
more, press [Cancel] and perform ping from the Win-
4 Set the following items of [AeroDR Detec- dows command prompt and confirm that there is no
response from the IP address before the change.
tor Setting] according to the institution
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
environment.

Setting item Settings

The AeroDR Detector's serial number
[Serial which was acquired in "4.10.6 AeroDR
Number] Detector correction data registration"
will be displayed.
Input the IP address for the wired con-
[Wired IP Ad-
nection of the AeroDR Detector.
dress]
Default setting: 192.168.20.201
Input the IP address for the wireless
[Wireless IP
connection of the AeroDR Detector.
Address]
Default setting: 192.168.20.211
Input the default gateway of the Aero-
[Default Gate-
DR Detector.
way]
Default setting: 0.0.0.0
Input the subnet mask of the AeroDR
[Subnet
Detector.
Mask]
Default setting: 255.255.255.0

113
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.10.14 AeroDR 1012HQ

4.10.13 Saving of settings
Settings
When all settings of AeroDR SYSTEM are completed, Configure the following settings when using the
save the settings and close the AeroDR unit setting AeroDR 1012HQ.
screen.

1 Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting 1 Press the CS-7 icon.
screen.

• The settings will be registered in this device's

RM as local settings.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The warning message is displayed when the "Pro-
cessing" screen is closed by pressing [Cancel] during
an upload, but this does not indicate a problem.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Close the sub-menu screen.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

114
 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

3 Configure the following [Image Size Set-

ting].

Chapter 4
Setting item Settings
Select the reading im-
age size when using the
[10"x12" Read Image
AeroDR 1012HQ from [Ac-
Size at the time of using
cording to AeroDR Cas-
the AeroDR Cassette]
sette] and [According to
Regius Cassette].
Select the HOST output
[10"x12" HOST Output image size when using the
Image Size at the time AeroDR 1012HQ from [Ac-
of using the AeroDR cording to AeroDR Cas-
Cassette] sette] and [According to
Regius Cassette].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Be sure to select [According to AeroDR Cassette] for
the [10"x12" Read Image Size at the time of using the
AeroDR Cassette] setting, when using the AeroDR
1012HQ.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

• The settings are stored, and the screen is closed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

5 Close the sub-menu screen.

115
 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

Set the IP address of this device on the CS-7 setting

screen.
Setting is not required if the default IP address of this
device is to be used.

1 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The [Network Connections] screen is displayed.

3 Right-click [Local Area Connection] and

press [Properties].

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Press [Network Setting] on the sub-menu

screen.

• The [Local Area Connection Properties] screen

is displayed.

116
 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

4 Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/ 5 Select [Use the following IP address] and
IPv4)] and press [Properties]. set the following items.

Setting Item Settings

Enter the IP address in accordance

Chapter 4
[IP address] with the facility environment.
Default setting: 192.168.20.90
Enter the subnet mask of the selected
[Subnet
device.
mask]
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Enter the default gateway address.
[Default Entry is not necessary if there is no
gateway] gateway on the network.
Default setting: 0.0.0.0

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Enter the same value in [IP address] as the IP address
changed in "4.10.3 RM setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Press [OK].

• The [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)

Properties] screen is displayed.

117
4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

7 Press [OK].

8 Close the [Network Connections] screen.

9 Close the sub-menu screen.

118
 4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Setting

Set so that the time of this device is synchronized with 5 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
that of AeroDR access point. diate screen.

1 Close the service tool.

2 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Press [Reboot] on the intermediate

screen.

Chapter 4
6 Execute [C:\Konicaminolta\Console\Bin\
AccessPointTimeSyncSetting.exe] using
the explorer.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Make sure to press [Reboot] in the intermediate
screen before restarting the personal computer.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 After restarting the personal computer,

display the intermediate screen. • [AccessPointTimeSyncSetting] screen is dis-
played.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

119
4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Setting

7 Make sure that the IP address displayed 9 Press [Setup].

in [AccessPoint] is that of the AeroDR ac-
cess point.

8 In [CS-7], select the local area connection

IP address for this device.

• When the setting process is finished, the mes-

sage [Setup completed.] is displayed.

10 Press [OK].
• When operating the portable X-ray device,
select either the IP address for the local area
connection (wired LAN) or that for the wireless
network connection (internal wireless LAN).

120
 4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Setting

11 Press [Close].

12 Close the explorer.

Chapter 4

121
 4.13 Restart of this device

Restart this device to enable the current settings.

1 Restart this device.

• If this device is being started up, display the
intermediate screen and press [Reboot] on the
screen.
• If the Windows desktop is displayed, restart this
device from the Windows desktop.

2 Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit and the

AeroDR Detector.

122
 4.14 Change of network of this device/addition of AeroDR
Detector after completing the settings

4.14.1 When changing the network setting of this device after

completing the settings
Follow the following procesure to change the network setting of this device after completing the settings of this de-
vice and the AeroDR SYSTEM.
Do not perform this task if network settings of this device are not to be modified.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• It is required to change the IP address in [RM Setting] and upload the changed information to the AeroDR Detector before
changing the network setting of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Change the IP address in [RM Setting] to the IP address

1 4.10.3 RM setting of this device that is changed in step 4 in the flow.

Upload the changed IP address of [RM Setting] to

4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR the AeroDR Detector.

Chapter 4
2
Detector communication Upload to all AeroDR Detectors if multiple AeroDR
Detectors are used.

3 4.10.13 Saving of settings Save the changes in [RM Setting].

4.11 Setting of the IP address of

4 Change the network setting of this device.
this device

Restart this device and the AeroDR Detectors to which

5 4.13 Restart of this device the IP address of [RM Setting] has been uploaded.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For detailed procedure for each operation, refer to the respective sections in "Chapter 4 Installation Procedure for This De-
vice and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

123
4.14 Change of network of this device/addition of AeroDR Detector after completing the settings

4.14.2 When adding an AeroDR Detector

Follow the following procesure to perform an additional setup of the AeroDR Detector to add an AeroDR Detector to
be used in the same exposure room.
Do not perform this task if AeroDR Detector is not to be added.
Repeat the same setting process if there are multiple AeroDR Detectors.
Connect the AeroDR Detector to be added to the
1 4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM AeroDR I/F Cable or the AeroDR UF Cable and charge.

Is the network setting NO

of this device changed
from the default?

YES
Perform this if the network setting of this device is
changed from the default in "4.11 Setting of the IP
address of this device".
2 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device Restore the values for the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway to the default
(192.168.20.90/255.255.255.0/0.0.0.0).

Register the correction data for the AeroDR Detector

3 4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration
to be added.

Confirm the communication between the AeroDR

4 4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector communication Detector to be added and this device.

Does the IP address for the NO

AeroDR Detector need to be
changed?

YES
Perform this when changing the IP address of the
5 4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting AeroDR Detector to be added from the default.

Save the settings of the AeroDR Detector to be

6 4.10.13 Saving of settings added.

Is the network setting NO

of this device restored
to default?

YES Perform this when the network setting of this device is

restored to the default in the flow number 2.
Change the values of the IP address, subnet mask,
7 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device
and default gateway of this device to the values
before restoring to the default.

Restart this device and the AeroDR Detector to be

8 4.13 Restart of this device
added.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Affix identification labels (stickers) to the exterior of the AeroDR Detectors if multiple AeroDR Detectors are to be used. For
details, refer to "Addition of an AeroDR Detector" in the "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
• To add an AeroDR Detector to an existing roaming environment, go to "4.20 Roaming environment settings".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

124
 4.14 Change of network of this device/addition of AeroDR Detector after completing the settings

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For detailed procedure for each operation, refer to the respective sections in "Chapter 4 Installation Procedure for This De-
vice and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 4

125
 4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

4.15.1 Flow chart of AeroDR Detector analysis

Flow of the AeroDR Detector analysis is as following. The process time in the flow chart is a rough estimate.

Roam the Detector to CS-7

with SRM link

Place the AeroDR Detector on

the floor, etc., and make the
distance from the X-ray focus
(SID) 2m

Expose raw images under the

calibration condition of 0.1 mR,
1.0 mR and 3.0 mR.

FAIL
Carry out calibration. (first time)
Unevenness analysis
200 sec 60 sec

FAIL (first time) PASS

Expose raw images under the

calibration condition of 0.1 mR, Defect analysis
1.0 mR and 3.0 mR. 80 sec

PASS

Unevenness analysis FAIL (second time)

60 sec

PASS

Defect analysis FAIL (second time) Back up the complete set of

80 sec data for the analysis result

PASS

NO Handle the problem by referring

Existence of CS-7 with
AeroSync link to "Fixing Problems" in "AeroDR
SYSTEM Installation/Service
Manual".
YES

Roam the Detector to CS-7

with AeroSync link

Carry out the calibration on

this device that is linked with Carry out calibration.*
* The calibration is not necessary
when it has already been completed.
Aero Sync.

Complete AeroDR Detector

analysis

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When performing calibration with an Aero Sync-linked device, check whether the AeroDR Detector subject to the analysis is
Aero Sync-linked or not.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

126
 4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

4.15.2 Analysis of AeroDR

4 Press the device icon of AeroDR Detector.

Detector
Performs the analysis of the AeroDR Detector, and
setting and adjustment of exposure conditions.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Fully charge the AeroDR Detector before performing
the analysis of the AeroDR Detector.
• Start the operation after removing the additional filter
for dosage reduction on the X-ray tube, if there is one.
• Increase the distance of the X-ray focus (SID) as
much as possible to reduce the effect of the X-ray
intensity distribution.
Also, set the SID that allows the user to perform the
calibration of the AeroDR Detector in the same condi-
tion every 3 month.
• When performing an analysis of the AeroDR Detector
after performing the calibration of the AeroDR Detec-

Chapter 4
tor, make sure not to change the positional relationship
of the AeroDR Detector and the X-ray tube, including
the SID.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the monitor, this device,

AeroDR SYSTEM, and the X-ray device are
powered on.
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
2 Prepare for exposure with AeroDR detector.
• If AeroDR detector is inserted in the exposure
stage, it should be removed.
• Place the AeroDR Detector at a location that
makes the distance from X-ray focus (SID) 2 m.
(Make it as close to 2 m exceeding 1.5 m if it is
impossible to have 2 m.)
• Confirm that there are no obstacles such as
grids or markers between the X-ray tube and the
AeroDR Detector.
• Make sure that the exposure field exposes the
entire AeroDR detector.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When multiple AeroDR detectors are used, the opera-
tion can be performed in any exposure rooms as long
as the above conditions are met.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

3 Start the service tool.

127
4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

5 Press [Panel]. 8 Set the exposure condition of the calibra-

tion described in the following table.

Exposure condition of calibration

AeroDR 1417HQ/AeroDR 1717HQ
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID
0.032 3.2
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.018 1.8
is 1.5 m

AeroDR 1417S
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID
0.05 5.0
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.028 2.8
is 1.5 m

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• An additional filter is not used here.
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray de-
vices.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the
distance inverse square law.
(Example) When SID is 1.8 m, mAs value is
3.2x(1.8/2.0)2 = 2.6 mAs.
• The AeroDR Detector analysis screen is dis- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
played.
9 Press [Calibration conditions].
6 Select the AeroDR Detector to analyze.

• The message "Please take the exposure now." will be

displayed.
7 Press [Analyze].

128
 4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

10 Expose with the set exposure condition. 12 Attach an additional filter (1 mm thick
• Expose by aligning the perpendicular direction copper plate) to the X-ray collimator using
of the tube to the portrait orientation of AeroDR drafting tape.
Detector. The line of white projection of the
AeroDR Detector is located at the top.

Treat the protruding portion of

the white line as the top part.

1.5 - 2 m

Vertical direction of the tube

Vertical direction of Additional filter Drafting tape
the AeroDR Detector
(1 mm thick copper plate)

• When reading the image, the average signal value

is displayed in [Signal Value].
13 Set the exposure condition for 0.1 mR/

Chapter 4
0.9 μGy as described in the following
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • table.
• Align the longitudinal direction of the X-ray tube and
AeroDR Detector. Exposure condition for 0.1 mR/0.9 μGy
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
11 Check that [Signal Value] is within the filter [kV] [mA]
range of the average signal value. When SID is
0.016 1.6
2m Cu
80 100
When SID is 1 mm
0.01 1
1.5 m

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Make sure to attach an additional filter.
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray
devices.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the
distance inverse square law.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the average signal value is out of the range,
change the "mAs" of the exposure condition and re- 14 Press [0.1mR/0.9μGy].
peat steps 9 to 11. • The message "Expose" will be displayed.
• Repeat exposures by changing the conditions until the
average signal value becomes within the range. 15 Expose with the set exposure condition.
• When reading the image, the average signal
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • value is displayed in [Signal Value].

• Since the signal value is approximately proportional to

the dose, calculate and set mAs accordingly. 16 Check the average signal value. When the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • average signal value is out of the range,
change the "mAs" of the exposure condi-
tion and expose again.
• Repeat exposures by changing the conditions until the
average signal value becomes within the range.

129
4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

17 Set the exposure condition for 1.0 mR/ 22 Check the average signal value. When the
9.0 μGy as described in the following table. average signal value is out of the range,
change the "mAs" of the exposure condi-
Exposure condition for 1.0 mR/9.0 μGy tion and expose again.
Addi- Tube Tube • Repeat exposures by changing the conditions
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs until the average signal value becomes within
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA] the range.
When SID is
0.08 16
2m Cu
When SID is 1 mm
80 200
0.045 9
23 When the exposures of 4 types images are
1.5 m completed, press [Exposure completed].

IMPORTANT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• Keep the additional filter attached.
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray devices.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to dis-
tance inverse square law.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

18 Press [1.0mR/9.0μGy] to expose with the

set exposure conditions.
• When reading the image, the average signal
value is displayed in [Signal Value].

19 Check the average signal value. When the

average signal value is out of the range,
change the "mAs" of the exposure condi-
tion and expose again.
• Repeat exposures by changing the conditions
until the average signal value becomes within
the range.

20 Set the exposure condition for 3.0 mR/26

μGy as described in the following table.

Exposure condition for 3.0 mR/26 μGy

• Analysis result is displayed.
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA] 24 Confirm that [PASS] is displayed in the
When SID is analysis result.
0.25 50
2m Cu
80 200 • Perform the calibration following the procedure
When SID is 1 mm
1.5 m
0.14 28 in "4.15.3 Calibration of AeroDR Detector" when
[FAIL] is displayed as the analysis result for [Un-
eveness Analysis] or [Defect Analysis]. Perform
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • steps 3 - 24 again after performing the calibra-
• Keep the additional filter attached. tion. Replacement of the AeroDR Detector is
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray devices. necessary if [FAIL] is displayed again.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the • Backup the complete set of the data that is auto-
distance inverse square law. matically saved in the "C:\Konicaminolta\Console\
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Data\Work\ImageAnalyzer\<Panel ID + YYYYM-
MDDHHMMSS>" of this device and send it to the
21 Press [3.0mR/26μGy] to expose with the analysis department when [FAIL] is displayed as
set exposure conditions. the analysis result of the [Defect Analysis] even
• When reading the image, the average signal after performing the calibration.
value is displayed in [Signal Value].

130
 4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

25 Press [Close].
4.15.3 Calibration of AeroDR
• Check the analysis of the other AeroDR Detec-
tors with the same procedure. Detector
• When the analysis of AeroDR detector is com-
The calibration method for the AeroDR Detector is as
pleted, remove the additional filter from the col-
follows.
limator.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Start the service tool.

• When the analysis of the AeroDR Detector is per-

formed under roaming environment, always perform
2 Select the [User Tool] tab.
"4.15.3 Calibration of AeroDR Detector" after perform-
ing the analysis.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 4
• The user tool screen is displayed.

3 Press [Adjustment], and press [Calibration].

131
4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

HINT ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When all of preparations steps 5 to 7 are completed,
press [Skip to exposure] to display the step 8 screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Prepare the X-ray tube according to the

on-screen messages, and press [Next].

• The calibration tool screen is displayed.

4 Select the AeroDR Detector to be calibrat-

ed.

• The following message is displayed on the

screen. After finishing preparations according to
the messages, press [Next].
X-ray tube preparations
(1) Set the distance (SID) between the X-ray
tube and Aero­DR Detector referring to the
above [Exposure Parameters]. (If there is
no information, place it over 1.5m away, as
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • close to 2.0m as possible.)
• AeroDR Detectors displayed with red letters are in (2) Set collimator to cover the entire AeroDR
need of calibration (they have passed the calibration Detector.
deadline). (3) Ensure that there are no obstructions, such
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • as grids or markers, between the X-ray tubes
and the Aero DR Detector.
5 Prepare the AeroDR Detector according to
the on-screen messages, and press [Next]. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Expose after matching the vertical direction of the tube
to the vertical direction of the AeroDR Detector. The
protruding portion of the white line of the AeroDR De-
tector goes on top.

Treat the protruding portion of

the white line as the top part.

1.5 - 2 m

• The following message is displayed on the

screen. After finishing preparations according to Vertical direction of the tube
the messages, press [Next]. Vertical direction of
the AeroDR Detector
AeroDR Detector preparations
(1) Perform the offset calibration no less than 10
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
minutes after making an exposure.
(2) I f the AeroDR Detector is loaded on the
stand, remove the AeroDR Detector.

132
 4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

7 Prepare the exposure conditions accord- 8 The message "Please wait..." is displayed.
ing to the on-screen messages, and press
[Next].

• The following message is displayed on the

screen. After finishing preparations according to
the messages, press [Next].
Exposure conditions preparations
(1) Adjust the exposure parameters Tube volt-

Chapter 4
age, Tube current and Exposure time (or
mAs) according to the above [Exposure Pa-
rameters]. If there is no value in the [Expo-
sure Parameters], refer to following chart to
adjust the parameter.

Exposure conditions for calibration

• When the AeroDR Detector has been prepared,
AeroDR 1417HQ/AeroDR 1717HQ
the message "X-rays, please" is displayed.
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID
0.032 3.2
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.018 1.8
is 1.5 m

AeroDR 1417S
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID
0.05 5.0
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.028 2.8
is 1.5 m

IMPORTANT •• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• An additional filter is not used.
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray
devices.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the
distance inverse square law.
(Example) When SID is 1.8 m, mAs value is
3.2×(1.8/2.0)2 = 2.6 mAs.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

133
4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

9 Irradiate X-ray. 11 Enter the conditions that are used for the
calibration to [Exposure Parameters].
• Enter the tube voltage, tube current, exposure
time, exposure distance, and remarks.

• Perform X-ray exposure when the message "X-

rays, please" is displayed.
• The message "Remaining exposure times : n"
indicating the remaining number of exposures • The above competes the calibration.
is displayed on the screen. When the exposure
condition is appropriate, the following exposure
HINT ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
sequentially reduces the remaining number of
times by one. After the exposure, the message • After the calibration is completed, you can enter your
"AeroDR panel is not ready" is displayed. When comments about this calibration in [Exposure Param-
the AeroDR Detector has been prepared, the eters] if necessary.
message "X-rays, please" is displayed. • Such comments, which will be saved up to the time of
• When the conditions are not met, a warning the next calibration, may be useful when you carry out
message is displayed. Try exposure again after the next calibration.
checking the exposure conditions, looking for ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
obstacles (eg. grid, marker), and confirming the
size of the exposure field. 12 Press [Close].

10 Repeat to perform X-ray exposure.

• The calibration is completed when you have
repeated the specified number of X-ray expo-
sures.
• Depending on the situation, you may be re-
quested to repeat the exposure more than the
specified number of times. Follow the screen
message to complete the calibration.
• If the conditions are not ideal or a foreign ob-
jects such as a grid or marker is exposed, a
warning message is displayed. In such a case,
repeat the calibration again.

HINT •• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The displayed signal value is almost in propor-
tion to the actual amount of X-rays contacting the
AeroDR Detector. For example, when the signal
value is "8,000", setting the mAs value to 0.75 times
(6,000/8,000) can meet the optimal exposure condi-
tions.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

134
 4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

13 Expose another image with the AeroDR

Detector that shows an error in the analy-
sis results and analyze it.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When performing the analysis of the AeroDR Detector
continuously after the calibration of the AeroDR Detec-
tor, be careful not to change the positional relationship
between the AeroDR Detector and the X-ray tube.
Especially when the SID is small, the analysis result of
the AeroDR Detector may turn out [FAIL] if the position
is changed, so be careful.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operation method, refer to steps 3 - 25 of the
"4.15.2 Analysis of AeroDR Detector".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 4
14 Confirm that the analysis result is [PASS].
• If [FAIL] is displayed again, troubleshoot the
problem according to the instructions displayed
on the screen.

135
 4.16 Deployment to the installation location and connection
to the institution network

4.16.1 Deployment of Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

respective devices to • For attachment of the add-in Ethernet board, refer to

"14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board".
the installation locations ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Arrange the various devices at the installation loca-

tions.

1 Install this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, and pe-

ripheral devices in the installation location.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the installation of AeroDR SYSTEM, refer to
"AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4.16.2 Connecting to
institution network
Connect this device to the institution network.
Do not perform this task if not connecting with institu-
tion network.

1 Connect the Ethernet cable of the institution

network to the hub where this device and
the AeroDR SYSTEM are connected.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When using 2 network systems, AeroDR SYSTEM
should be connected to the hub of the local network.

This device (rear)

Hub (local network side)

Hub (institution network side)

Optional port Standard port

(Add-in Ethernet (built-in Ethernet)
board)

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

136
 4.17 Peripheral devices setting

Set the peripheral devices such as a printer, host, RIS, 5 Press [Next].
and X-ray device according to the institution environ-
ment.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For setting method for peripheral devices, refer to
"CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
User Tool Screen" and installation/service manuals for
the peripheral devices.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4.17.1 Preparation for setting

the DRYPRO 832
6 Select the language to use and press
When setting the DRYPRO 832, an installation of the [Next].
PrintLink5 (Built In) is required in advance.

Chapter 4
1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

7 Enter the serial number of the DRYPRO

832 to be connected in [Serial No.:].

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• It is not possible to proceed to the next screen if a se-
rial number other than "1 - 99999" is entered.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

8 Select [BuiltIN] for [Mode:] and press

[Next].

3 Insert the CS-7 DRIVER CD into the CD/

DVD drive.

4 Close the auto-play screen and run [D:\

PrintLink for DRYPRO\V2.00R06\DISK1\
setup.exe] stored in the CS-7 DRIVER CD
through Explorer.

137
4.17 Peripheral devices setting

9 Press [Install].

• Installation will start.

10 Select [Yes, I want to restart my computer

now.] and press [Finish].

11 If a message about restarting is displayed,

press [OK].
• This device will restart.

138
 4.18 Activation

Perform the device information registration of each de-

vice and activation of the authentication. The activation
procedure is different in case of online or offline.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Perform license activation within the following number
of days after importing the license.
–– In Japan: 60 days
–– Outside of Japan: 90 days
• Perform the activation again whenever a change is
made in the system structure.
• When performing activation of AeroDR Detectors in a
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
roaming environment, perform activation of all AeroDR
Detectors. 3 Press [Equipment Information].
• When performing activation of AeroDR Detectors in
a roaming environment, first perform activation of the
hybrid machines and afterward perform activation of

Chapter 4
the client machines. If the client machines have been
activated first, do the following.
–– If the device version is v1.07 or below, perform
activation of the hybrid machines and then perform
activation of the client machines again.
–– If the device version is v1.08 or above, only
perform activation of the hybrid machines.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The equipment information screen is displayed.

139
4.18 Activation

4 Read the barcode for the serial number of Device registration product list
each product comprising the system. Registration
Product name
method
It is acquired
automatically.
CS-7 In Japan, a
pharmaceutical
nameplate serial
number input at
CS-7 CS-7 Portable the time of manu-
hardware facture is loaded
automatically.
17 inch monitor Read from the
model name plate
21 inch monitor or external box of
the product.
DP-DVI conversion cable for Not used outside
21 inch monitor of Japan.
CS-7 STANDARD SOFTWARE
• To manually input, enter the "Product code (4 CS-7 HQ DETECTOR LI-
digits) - Product serial number (4 or 5 digits)". CENSE (MAX4)
CS-7 STD DETECTOR LI-
• For the products to register, refer to following CENSE (MAX4)
It is acquired
table. automatically.
CS-7 X-RAY GENERATOR
CONNECTION
CS-7 WIRELESS LAN CON-
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
NECTION
• To manually input the serial numbers of REGIUS Cas- It is acquired
CS-7 CR LOW THROUGHPUT
sette and REGIUS Plate, enter the "Product class automatically.
code (2 digits) - Size code (1 digit) - Lot code (4-digits) Not used in
CS-7 CR MED THROUGHPUT
- Serial number (3 digits)". Japan.
• Equipment registration is not required for the following CS-7 CR HI THROUGHPUT
products. (MAX16) It is acquired
–– DP-DVI conversion cable for 21-inch monitor CS-7 FOR SIGMA 25
automatically.
–– Sub monitor CS-7 FOR SIGMA 45
–– Magnetic card reader CS-7 FOR SIGMA 60
–– Add-in LAN card CS-7 CR STD PKG It is acquired
–– Multi-bar code reader automatically.
CS-7 Standard Package HQ
–– Bar code reader Not used in
–– PCM multi-bar code reader CS-7 Standard Package S Japan.
• It is necessary to install additional memory (2GB) to It is acquired
CS-7 electronic medical
License automatically.
use CR mammography, a high precision monitor, or a record system connection
Not used out-
print composer. license
side of Japan.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • CS-7 MWM/DETACHED CONNECT
It is acquired
CS-7 MPPS/DETACHED
automatically.
CONNECT
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
It is acquired
• It makes a beep when a duplicate serial number is read CS-7 RIS built-in connection automatically.
in or digits are incorrect. Perform the reading again. license Not used out-
• Depending on the product, the serial number is automati- side of Japan.
cally acquired during the installation and setting procedures. CS-7 DICOM STORAGE
• The equipment information screen will convert the OUTPUT (MAX4)
product code to the product name using a dedicated CS-7 DICOM PRINT (MAX2)
CS-7 MEDIA STORAGE
table when the serial number is entered. Therefore,
CS-7 EASY TAG KEY SETTING
the product name might not be displayed when a se- CS-7 DETAILED TAG KEY SETTING
rial number of the product including a product code CS-7 DETAILED IMAGE SETTING
that is not defined in the table is entered. However, the CS-7 DETAILED ANNOTATION It is acquired
activation will be performed normally and there will be CS-7 PORTABLE RF automatically.
no effect on the operation even for such case. CS-7 AEROSYNC
• When performing barcode registration, perform the CS-7 STITCHING
setting described in "21.1 Using bar code reader for CS-7 MultiStudy
REGIUS to register devices". CS-7 PDA Connection
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read- CS-7 AeroRemote QC
CS-7 DATA ANALYSIS
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
CS-7 SIMPLE CHECK QC
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

140
 4.18 Activation

Registration Registration
Product name Product name
method method
CS-7 CR Mammography Dummy AeroDR Portable RF It is acquired auto-
CS-7 STUDY SHARING AccessPoint matically.
CS-7 X-ray information link- Dummy AeroDR Portable RF XG Not used in Japan.
age for mammography Dummy AeroDR Portable UF It is acquired
CS-7 P-XG Connection AccessPoint automatically.
CS-7 MOTION/LUNG DETECT AeroDR Power Cable Read from the
CS-7 TUBE/GAUZE EN-
HANCEMENT AeroDR Collimator Cable Set model name
It is acquired plate or exter-
CS-7 STUDY COMBINE/MOVE automatically. AeroDR S-SRM Kit nal box of the
CS-7 AUTO IMAGE BACKUP product.
AeroDR S-SRM Cable Not used in
CS-7 HI-RES MONITOR AeroDR
SYSTEM AeroDR S-SRM Hand S/W Cable Japan.
CS-7 SPARE PANEL SERVICE
License It is acquired
CS-7 SCREENING FUNC AeroDR Stitching Unit
automatically.
CS-7 MEASUREMENT FUNC
AeroDR Stitching Unit Marker
CS-7 PRINT COMPOSER
AeroDR Stitching X-ray Auto- Read from the
CS-7 AFSSAPS TOOL
barrier Unit model name
It is acquired
CS-7 DIGITAL MAMMOGRA- automatically. AeroDR Stitching Mask plate or exter-
nal box of the
PHY Not used in AeroDR Stitching Unit Cable product.
Japan. AeroDR Stitching Unit Adjust-
CS-7 Lite It is acquired ment Adapter
CS-7 Pro automatically.

Chapter 4
Not used out-
CS-7 Pro Update
CS-7 Portable side of Japan. 5 Press [Install Completed].
Read from the
model name
Sub Monitor Adaptor plate or exter-
nal box of the
product.
Magnetic card reader Read from the
model name plate
or external box of
Option Add-in LAN card
the product.
Not used outside of
Multi-bar code reader Japan.
Read from the
model name
Bar code Reader plate or exter-
nal box of the
product. • Next procedure is different depending on if it is
REGIUS MODEL190 online or offline.
Read from the
REGIUS MODEL210 model name →For online
plate or exter- →Go to "When online"
REGIUS MODEL110 nal box of the →For offline
REGIUS
REGIUS MODEL110HQ product. →Go to "When offline"
REGIUS MOD-
REGIUS MODEL170 EL110HQ is not
used in Japan.
REGIUS Cassette Plate
AeroDR 1417S
AeroDR 1417HQ
AeroDR 1717HQ
AeroDR Interface Unit

AeroDR AeroDR Generator Interface Unit It is acquired

SYSTEM AeroDR Battery Charger automatically.

AeroDR Access Point

AeroDR I/F Cable
AeroDR UF Cable
AeroDR XG Cable

141
4.18 Activation

O
OWhen online O
OWhen offline

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 6 Press [Activation (For Offline)].

• Online activation can be performed with this device
that has the remote maintenance R2 installed. How-
ever, if this device cannot use DNS, open the HOSTS
file using Windows Notepad, etc. and add the follow-
ing definition under the localhost definition line.
–– "219.112.242.220 simsgateway.mi-
supportkonicaminolta.jp"
–– The file path for the HOSTS file is "C:\Windows\
System32\drivers\etc\hosts".

• The [Offline Activation] screen is displayed.

7 Press [Select Equipment Info File].

Position to be added

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6 Press [Activation].

• The devices displayed in the equipment infor-

mation list will be authenticated.
• The [Browse For Folder] screen is displayed.

142
 4.18 Activation

8 Select the output destination of the device 10 Press [OK].

registration file and press [OK].

11 Copy the device registration file to the

personal computer connectable to the In-
ternet, and register to SIMS/LMS.

12 Copy the activation key file acquired from

the SIMS/LMS onto this device.

13 Select the [Register Activation Key] tab.

Chapter 4
14 Press [Import Key].

9 Press [Encrypt].

• The file selection screen of Windows is dis-

played.

143
4.18 Activation

15 Select the activation key file and press [Open].

16 Press [Submit].

17 Press [OK].

• The devices displayed in the equipment infor-

mation list will be authenticated.

144
 4.19 Confirmation of the version of this device

Confirm the version of CS-7 application installed in this HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

device.
• The version of this device can also be checked at the
bottom right corner of the system startup screen.
1 Display the system monitor screen.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 4
• The system status screen is displayed.
• Confirm the version of this device.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Perform the version upgrade if the CS-7 application
installed on this device is not up to date.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

145
 4.20 Roaming environment settings

Set the roaming environment when multiple exposure rooms are set. Also perform the setting of the startup linkage
of this device as necessary.

4.20.1 Workflow to set roaming environment

The workflow for setting a roaming environment is as follows.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• There are 2 types of RM: RM hybrid machine and RM client machine. This manual defines them respectively as follows.
–– RM hybrid machine: this device where RM is set as a hybrid type
–– RM client machine: this device where RM is set as a client type
• There is one RM hybrid machine in a roaming environment. The others are set as RM client machines.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 4.20.2 Advance preparation Perform on all units of this device.

2 4.20.3 RM client machine settings Perform on all RM client machines.

3 4.20.4 Consolidation of exposure room information Perform on the RM hybrid machine.

4.20.5 Resetting of device information

Was the merge successful?

NG
Perform when there is a duplication of serial
number, sub device ID, and IP address/port
OK of the AeroDR SYSTEM related devices.

4.20.6 Synchronization of the RM cli-

4 Perform on all RM client machines.
ent machine

5 4.20.7 Restart of RM hybrid machines Perform on the RM hybrid machine.

6 4.20.8 Restart of RM client machine Perform on all RM client machines.

4.20.9 Checking the synchronization

7 Perform on all RM client machines.
state on the RM client machine

146
 4.20 Roaming environment settings

4.20.2 Advance preparation

The advance preparation for setting a roaming envi-

ronment is as follows.

1 Confirm that all units of this device are

connected to the institution network and
are ready for network communications.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Turn on all units of this device.

4 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

4.20.3 RM client machine
settings
Perform the RM client machine settings.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 4
• Do not start the service tool and user tool on the RM
hybrid machine while performing the setting on an RM
client machine.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that all units of this device are

powered on.

2 Start up the service tool on the RM client

machine.

3 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

147
4.20 Roaming environment settings

5 Set [Unique ID] for [Device Information

Setting].

• Set a different unique ID (2-24) for each RM cli-

ent machine.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set a different ID other than 1, as the unique ID for
each RM client machine. The unique ID for the RM
9 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.
hybrid machine will be 1.
• Up to 24 units of this device (including the unit of this
device that was set as an RM hybrid machine) can be
set within the same segment.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

• The settings are stored, and the screen is

closed.

7 Close the sub-menu screen.

8 Press the RM icon.

• The AeroDR unit setting screen is displayed.

148
 4.20 Roaming environment settings

10 Set the following items in [RM setting]. 14 Press [OK] in AeroDR unit setting screen.

Setting item Settings

[Mode] Set as [Client].
[IP Address
Enter the IP address of the RM hybrid
of RM hybrid
machine.
machine]
[IP Address
Enter the IP address of the RM client
of RM client
machine.
machine]

11 Connect AeroDR I/F Cable, AeroDR Bat-

tery Charger, or AeroDR UF Cable with the
AeroDR Detector to be roamed.

Chapter 4
12 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Detector
Setting].

15 Press [OK].

13 Press [Upload].

• Transfer of roaming information to the RM hy-

brid machine will start.
• The screen will close when the transfer is com-
pleted successfully.

• The modified setting information is uploaded to

the AeroDR Detector.

149
4.20 Roaming environment settings

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4.20.4 Consolidation of exposure

• Depending on the amount of setting information to be
room information
transferred or the network connection environment,
transfer may take about 1 minute. Consolidate the setting of each exposure room (setting
• When transfer fails due to the causes below, an error of each RM client machine) with the RM hybrid ma-
screen will be displayed. Perform steps 14 to 15 again chine.
after eliminating the causes.
Cause
There is a network con-
Corrective actions
1 Confirm that the RM hybrid machine is
nection problem between powered on.
Check the network status
the RM hybrid machine
again.
and an RM client ma-
chine.
2 Start the service tool on the RM hybrid
The RM hybrid machine Restart the RM hybrid
machine.
has not started normally. machine.
The service tool or user
Exit the service tool or 3 Press the RM icon.
tool is used on the RM
user tool.
hybrid machine.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

150
 4.20 Roaming environment settings

4 Press [Merge].

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If there is duplication in the exposure room information
which is to be integrated, such as in the serial numbers,
device sub-IDs, IP addresses, port numbers etc. of the
AeroDR SYSTEM related devices, the duplicated de-
vice information is displayed in the [Error information]
at the bottom section of the screen. Check the content,
delete the relevant device data from [Mergeable Data],
and then reset the device information.

Chapter 4
• The file merge screen is displayed.

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Display panel Display content
Display a list for setting informa-
tion of each RM client machine 6 Press [OK].
[Data On Server]
retained with the RM hybrid ma-
chine.
Display a list of setting information
[Mergeable Data]
sent from each client machine.

5 Select settings to be consolidated from

the list of [Mergeable Data], and press
[Merge].

• Recognize the RM client machine setting infor-

mation by [RoomID] and [CS-7 Console Device
ID].
• Difference in configuration information
before and after the merge is displayed.

151
4.20 Roaming environment settings

7 Check the difference in the configuration

information and press [OK].

• The setting of the selected RM client ma-

chine is consolidated.

9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 as many times as the

number of RM client machines.

10 Press [Close].

• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• You can check the difference in the configuration infor-
11 Close the sub-menu screen.
mation in the [Info after Merge] field.
–– "Add" is indicated for the added information and its
background turns blue.
12 Exit the service tool, and move to the sys-
–– "Modify" is indicated for the information that has
tem monitor screen.
been changed and its background turns green.
–– "Deleted" is indicated for the deleted information IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
and its background turns red. • When moving to the system monitor screen, a screen
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • prompting to restart is displayed. Do not perform re-
start, and continue the following operation while the
8 Press [OK]. screen is displayed.

• If you mistakenly performed restart, then continue with

the following operation while the initial screen is dis-
played after restart.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

152
 4.20 Roaming environment settings

4.20.5 Resetting of device information

There may be a duplication of the serial number, sub device ID, IP address or port number of the AeroDR SYSTEM
related devices when the merge fails in the "4.20.4 Consolidation of exposure room information".
Change the setting of the device information for the RM hybrid machine or the RM client machines.

O
OChanging the setting of the RM hybrid machine
Change the setting of the device information for the RM hybrid machine in accordance with the following flow.

4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit

1 setting screen

Confirm the serial number and IP address of the

2 4.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting AeroDR Access Point, and perform if it needs to be
changed.

4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR

3 Detector communication

Chapter 4
Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the
4 4.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting
AeroDR I/F Cable, and perform if it needs to be changed.

Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the AeroDR

5 4.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting
Battery Charger, and perform if it needs to be changed.

Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the

6 4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting
AeroDR UF Cable, and perform if it needs to be changed.

4.10.11 AeroDR Generator Interface Confirm the serial number and IP address of the AeroDR Gen-
7 Unit setting erator Interface Unit, and perform if it needs to be changed.

Confirm the IP address of the AeroDR Detector, and

8 4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting
perform if it needs to be changed.

9 4.10.13 Saving of settings

153
4.20 Roaming environment settings

O
OChanging the setting of the RM client machines
Change the setting of the device information for the RM client machines in accordance with the following flow.

4.20.6 Synchronization of the RM Start only the RM client machines that could not be
1 client machine merged.

4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit

2 setting screen

Confirm the serial number and IP address of the

3 4.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting AeroDR Access Point, and perform if it needs to be
changed.

4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR

4 Detector communication

4.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the
5
AeroDR I/F Cable, and perform if it needs to be changed.

4.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the AeroDR
6
Battery Charger, and perform if it needs to be changed.

4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the
7
AeroDR UF Cable, and perform if it needs to be changed.

4.10.11 AeroDR Generator Interface Confirm the serial number and IP address of the AeroDR Gen-
8 Unit setting erator Interface Unit, and perform if it needs to be changed.

4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting Confirm the IP address of the AeroDR Detector, and
9
perform if it needs to be changed.

10 4.10.13 Saving of settings

11 4.20.3 RM client machine settings Transfer the roaming information again to the RM
hybrid machine.

4.20.4 Consolidation of exposure

12 room information

154
 4.20 Roaming environment settings

4.20.6 Synchronization of the

3 Press [Device info sync] on the Sub Menu
screen.
RM client machine
Carry out synchronous processing of the roaming in-
formation on the RM client machine.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not start the service tool and user tool of the RM
hybrid machine while the setting is configured on the
RM client machine.
• If multiple RM client machines are used for processing
at the same time, you may not be able to successfully
obtain information.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Start the service tool of the RM client ma-

chine.

2 Press the RM icon.

Chapter 4
• The device information synchronization screen
is displayed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• After the device information synchronization screen is
displayed, acquire the roaming information from the
hybrid machine. It may take some time to acquire the
roaming information (30 seconds maximum).
• If multiple RM client machines are used for processing
at the same time, you may not be able to successfully
obtain information from a hybrid machine.
• If you were not able to successfully acquire the roam-
ing information, press [Reacquired] after confirming
the communication status.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

155
4.20 Roaming environment settings

4 Check the difference in the configuration 6 Press [OK].

information that existed before and after
the synchronization.

• The configuration information before and after

the synchronization are displayed. Check the
difference between them.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• You can check the difference in the configuration infor-
mation in the [Info after sync] field.
–– "Add" is indicated for the added information and its
background turns blue.
• The above completes the overwriting, eliminat-
–– "Modify" is indicated for the information that has
ing the difference.
been changed and its background turns green.
–– "Deleted" is indicated for the deleted information
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
and its background turns red.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Synchronization processing may take some time (30
seconds maximum).

5 Press [Sync]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

7 Press [Close].

• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

156
 4.20 Roaming environment settings

8 Press [OK].
4.20.8 Restart of RM client
machine
Restart all RM client machine.

1 Display the intermediate screen of every

RM client machine.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

9 Close the sub-menu screen. • For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
10 End the service tool.
2 Press [Reboot] on the intermediate
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • screen.
• To reflect the settings, end the service tool after the
synchronization has been completed. If you change
the settings without ending the service tool, the infor-

Chapter 4
mation may return to the state before the synchroniza-
tion. If you have changed the settings without ending
the service tool, you must repeat the device informa-
tion synchronization again.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4.20.7 Restart of RM hybrid

machines
Restart the RM hybrid machine.

1 Display the intermediate screen of the RM

4.20.9 Checking the
hybrid machine.
synchronization state on
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
the RM client machine
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis- Check the synchronization state on the RM client ma-
play the intermediate screen". chine.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Display the system monitor screen.

2 Press [Reboot] on the intermediate
screen.
2 Press the RM icon.

157
4.20 Roaming environment settings

4.20.10 Power on/off linkage

settings
When multiple units of this device are installed, they
can be started up together. Starting up 1 unit of this
device starts up the other units of this device at the
same time.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Perform the setting on this device that will turn the
power on/off.
3 Check the synchronization state. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• This device to perform the setting can be either RM
hybrid machine or RM client machine.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
• Make sure that the synchronization state of both ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
device information and AeroDR Detector correc-
tion information is indicated as [Synced].
2 Press [Setting] on the intermediate
screen.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Device information
–– When [Non connect]:
Check the communication state with the hybrid ma-
chine.
–– When [Non sync]:
There is a difference in the device information be-
tween the hybrid and client machines. Synchronize
the information after confirming the difference on
the device information synchronization screen.
• AeroDR Panel Correction Info
–– When [Non connect]:
Check the communication state with the hybrid ma-
chine.
–– When [In sync]:
Acquisition of the AeroDR Detector correction infor-
mation from the hybrid machine is underway. Wait
for some time (it may take a maximum of approxi-
mately 20 seconds for a single AeroDR Detector).
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

158
 4.20 Roaming environment settings

5 Enter the MAC address of each unit of this

device to be started up together in [PC1
MAC Address] - [PC8 MAC Address], re-
spectively.

• The [WOL(Wake ON LAN)Setting] screen is dis-

played.

3 Press [WakeOnLan ON/OFF].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• MAC address can be confirmed by executing [ipconfig
/all] in the Windows command prompt. The value dis-

Chapter 4
played in the [Physical Address] in the ipconfig screen
is the MAC address.

4 Select [PC1 WakeOn] - [PC8 WakeOn] to

designate the number of units of this de-
vice to be started up together. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Press [OK].

• Up to 8 CS-7s can be set.

159
 4.21 Optional installation and data migration

Perform the optional installation and the data migra-

tion.
Do not perform this task if optional installation and data
migration are not to be conducted.

4.21.1 Optional installation

1 Set up optional devices to be connected

to this device.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Depending on the option to be installed, installing
before this may increase efficiency in some cases.
Change the installation procedure according to the op-
tion to be installed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the optional installation, refer to "Chapter 14 Instal-
lation of Options".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4.21.2 Data migration

1 Transfer data such as Patient DB, Exam.

Tag, and overlay to this device.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the Exam. Tag and overlay data migration, refer
to "16.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this
device" and "16.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to
this device".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

160
 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

Store the setting data of this device. 3 Press [Backup/Restore], and press [Back-
up].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When multiple units of this device are installed, back
up the setting data for each one.
• Prepare external backup storage media and folders
for each unit of this device.
• Items set on the CS-7 setting screen for the service
tool such as the device's [Institution Name], [Institution
Address], [Telephone Number], [Department Name],
[Station AE Title], and [Console Name] cannot be
backed up or restored. It is necessary to record the
settings in a memo, etc., and then re-enter them on
the CS-7 setting screen after restoration.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Start the service tool.

Chapter 4
2 Select the [User Tool] tab.

• The backup screen is displayed.

4 Select [Setting].

• The user tool screen is displayed.

161
4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

5 Press [Browse].

7 Press [Execute].

• The [Browse For Folder] screen is displayed.

6 Specify the location to back up and press

[OK]. • A confirmation message is displayed.

8 Press [OK].

• The backup starts.

162
 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

9 Press [OK].

10 When the backup finishes, press [Close].

Chapter 4
• This returns to the user tool screen.

11 Write files backed up in the save folder to

external memory media, etc.

163
 4.23 Final operation check and delivery

Perform the final operation check and delivery.

4.23.2 Delivery
4.23.1 Exposure confirmation Deliver this device to the user.

Confirm that there is no problem with the operation by

1 Give instruction to the operators.
performing the set of exposure operation. • Provide a description of series of exposure ac-
tions.
1 Perform a series of exposures under the • Provide a description of user tool for administra-
operating conditions in the institution. tor of this device.

2 Confirm that there is no problem with the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

operation of any of the devices and ex- • Editing of Exam. Tag, etc., is performed by the admin-
posed images. istrator of this device; you should however provide op-
erators with a description of the method as needed. Be
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • sure to make the settings for adding AeroDR Detector
size to Exam. Tag when setting AeroDR 1717HQ or
• Always check the operating conditions in the institu-
AeroDR 1012HQ.
tion.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Before performing exposures, be sure to obtain per-
mission from institution management personnel.
• Take particular care in the following cases. 2 Clean up to complete the installation.
–– When an order is received from a Radiology • The installation of this device is now complete.
Information System (RIS).
–– When sending images to a server.
• Confirm that there is no abnormality, such as an over-
lap of the density patch, in the diagnostic image.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

164
 Chapter
5
Installation Procedure for This Device
and AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection)
This chapter describes the installation workflow, installation tasks,
and post-installation checks of this device and AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection).

165
 5.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR SYSTEM
(Aero Sync connection)

This section describes the installation procedure based on the connection example (Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/
AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/Aero Sync connection + AeroDR UF Cable/AeroDR
Battery Charger) as follows.

O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
Aero Sync connection + AeroDR UF Cable/AeroDR Battery Charger

Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
AeroDR UF Cable
X-ray Tube

X-ray device
AeroDR
I/F Cable AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR
Access Point

Power
source Hub

AeroDR
Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
AeroDR UF Cable X-ray device
Ethernet cable(PoE) operation panel
Ethernet cable
Serial/hardware connection
Grounding cable CS-7

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Confirm that if the following identification is in the AeroDR Detector that users can use in Aero Sync mode.
Identification
AeroDR Detector
Japan Overseas
AeroDR 1417HQ 1417HQ AeroSync 1417HQ
AeroDR 1717HQ 1717HQ AeroSync 1717HQ
AeroDR 1012HQ 1012HQ AeroSync 1012HQ

AeroDR P-11
(1417HQ AeroSync) Identification

• Users can not use Aero Sync Mode in the AeroDR Detector if it is AeroDR 1417S.
• Users cannot use Aero Sync mode in AeroDR 1417HQ or AeroDR 1717HQ if the first four digits of its Serial Number are
shown in the following table.
Serial Number that cannot be used
AeroDR Detector
Japan Overseas
AeroDR 1417HQ A20H A45Y
AeroDR 1717HQ A3VE A54T
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

166
 5.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR SYSTEM
(Aero Sync connection)

The installation operating process for this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection) is as follows.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there is only 1 exposure room, the task of flow number 18 is unnecessary.
• When there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the tasks from flow number 1 to 17 to set each exposure room, then per-
form the task of flow number 18.
• When the RIS/HOST and AeroDR SYSTEM use the same network segment, refer to "16.5 How to change the network set-
tings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4.3 Check of bundled items The workflow to install AeroDR SYSTEM
1
(Aero Sync connection)
1 7.3 Bundled items confirmation
2 4.4 Check of startup

3 4.5 Setting of touch panel 2 7.4 Installation of this device

4 4.6 Registration of license

3 7.5 Startup check
5 4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM

4 7.6 Connection and setting of the CS-7

6 4.8 System setting of this device

7 5.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices 7.7 Charging of the AeroDR Detector and
5

Chapter 5
confirmation of its wireless status
8 5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

9 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

10 4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Setting

11 4.13 Restart of this device

5.5 Change of network of this device/addition of

12
AeroDR Detector after completing the settings

13 5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector 6 7.8 Exposure test and AeroDR Detector analysis

4.16 Deployment to the installation location and 7.9 Placement in the installation locations
14 7
connection to the institution network

15 4.17 Peripheral devices setting

16 4.18 Activation

17 4.19 Confirmation of the version of this device

18 5.7 Roaming environment settings

19 4.21 Optional installation and data migration

20 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

21 5.8 Final operation check and delivery 8 7.10 Final operation check and handover

167
5.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection)

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection), refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

168
 5.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices

Perform the following in advance.

5.3.1 Activation of AeroDR
4.3 Check of bundled items SYSTEM related devices
Turn on the connection to the AeroDR SYSTEM re-
4.4 Check of startup lated devices to perform the settings.

4.5 Setting of touch panel

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4.6 Registration of license • Turn on the connection only for the devices to be in-
stalled.
4.7 Connection of AeroDR SYSTEM • The connection may be turned on already depending
on the devices. Turn off the connection for the devices
4.8 System setting of this device that will not be installed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Press the device icon.

• Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 5
• The AeroDR Access Point icon is used as an
example here to explain the procedure.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

169
5.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices

2 Select the connection check box. 4 Press the icon of the device that will be
set using the same procedure, then press
the connection checkbox of the sub-menu
screen.

3 Press [Close].
AeroDR I/F Cable icon

AeroDR Battery Charger icon

AeroDR UF Cable icon

• Connection is turned on and display of the device

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
icon will change.
• To install multiple AeroDR related devices, turn on the
connection of the device icons for the number of the
devices to be installed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• For the AeroDR Detector, set up the connection to this
device on the AeroDR unit setting screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

170
 5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5.4.1 Flow chart for setting up the network

Follow the following flow chart when setting up the network for this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM.
This example describes the setting procedure to configure all AeroDR SYSTEM related devices. There is no need to
set up devices that will not be installed.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting the network will be made with respect to each exposure room. If there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the same
settings for each exposure room.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

OODevice icon screen OOSub-menu screen

Press the RM icon.

5.4.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting screen

Press [Setting].

Chapter 5
OOAeroDR unit setting screen

5.4.3 RM setting

5.4.4 Exposure room setting

5.4.5 AeroDR Access Point setting

5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration

5.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector communication

5.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting

5.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting

5.4.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting

5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting

5.4.12 Saving of settings

171
5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5.4.2 Displaying the AeroDR

2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

unit setting screen

Display the AeroDR unit setting screen to setup the
AeroDR SYSTEM.

1 Press the RM icon.

• The AeroDR unit setting screen is displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Press [OK] to save the settings and close the screen.
• The name set up in [Exposure Room Name] of [Expo- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
sure Room Setting] will be used as the display name
for the RM icon.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

172
 5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5.4.3 RM setting 5.4.4 Exposure room setting

Set up the RM (Roaming Manager). Set up the sync mode and shutdown coordination with
the exposure room.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The RM is a system to perform management and 1 Set the following items in [Exposure
roaming of the AeroDR Detector. Room Setting].
• The RM manages the correspondence (registration)
between this device and AeroDR Detector and en-
ables the roaming (the change of the exposure room
to use the AeroDR Detector). It also manages the cor-
rection data of the respective AeroDR Detectors and
delivers it to this device at the roaming destination. Setting item Settings
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • The exposure room name is dis-
played.
[Exposure
1 Set the following items in [RM setting]. Room Name]
The name set in [Exposure Room
Name] in the CS-7 setting screen is
displayed.
Select the sync mode of this device
and the X-ray device of the exposure
[Sync Mode] room.
Select [XARM].
Default setting: XARM

Setting item Settings Select existence of shutdown coordi-

Chapter 5
nation.
Select [Client] or [Hybrid] for the RM When [ON] is selected, the termina-
[Mode] operation mode. [Shutdown
tion of this device causes the AeroDR
Default setting: Hybrid Coordination]
Detector assigned to the exposure
Change is not required if the default IP room to shut down.
address of this device is to be used. Default setting: [OFF]
If the IP address of this device is to be
[IP Address
changed in "4.11 Setting of the IP ad-
of RM hybrid
dress of this device", enter that value. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
machine]
Default setting: 192.168.20.90
Loop-back address (127.0.0.1) cannot • Do not change [Exposure Room Name].
be used. • Set up [Shutdown Coordination] in accordance with
[IP Address the operation status of the facility. It is necessary to
of RM client Setting is not performed here. turn on the power of the AeroDR Detector every time it
machine] is used since it will not link with startup.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change [Mode] from [Hybrid] here. Change this
setting only when multiple exposure rooms are setup
and it is necessary to setup the roaming environment.
For details, refer to "5.7 Roaming environment set-
tings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

173
5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5.4.5 AeroDR Access Point

setting
This is a required setting when the AeroDR Detector
is used wireless. Perform the setup of the AeroDR
Access Point first, and then the wireless connection
related setup on this device.
• The setting screen is displayed.
• Pressing an item in the menu tree on the left
1 Press [Moxa] in [Access Point Setting].
side of the screen will display the corresponding
setting item on the right part of the screen.
• When setting each item, press [Submit] on each
setting screen to apply the settings.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To enable the settings, step 19 and 20 need to be per-
formed.
• It will be time out and return to Login screen if there is
no input for 5 minutes in the setting screen, and login
will be required again. The contents of settings with
[Submit] pressed is stored even if it has timed out.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Press [Network Settings] under [Basic

Settings] and set up the network for the
following items.

• The setting tool will open in the Web browser

and the login screen will be displayed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When a popup message regarding Acrobat is dis-
Setting item Settings
played, choose [Not enable].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [IP configura- Select [Static].
tion] Default setting: Static

2 Input the user name and password on the

[IP address]
Set according to the institution envi-
ronment.
login screen, then press [Login]. Default setting: 192.168.20.241
• The default user name is "admin", and the pass- Set according to the institution envi-
word is "root". [Subnet mask] ronment.
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Set according to the institution envi-
[Gateway] ronment.
Default setting: 0.0.0.0

4 Press [Submit].

174
 5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Press [Operation Mode] under [Wireless 9 Set the frequency band, channel, and
Settings] and set the wireless operation SSID for the following items.
mode for the following items.

Setting item Settings

[Wireless en- Select [Enable]. Setting item Settings
able] Default setting: Disable Select [A].
[Operation Select [AP]. Default setting: A
[RF type]
mode] Default setting: AP Use only IEEE802.11a in the AeroDR
Access Point.
Set the channel following the results
6 Press [Submit]. [Available
channel list
of the preliminary survey.
When the channel is DFS, an asterisk
* indicates
(*) will appear for the channel.
7 Press [Basic Wireless Settings] of [WLAN] DFS channel]
Default setting: :36-5.18G
of [Wireless Settings].
Input the unique SSID within 31 alpha-
numeric characters according to the
[SSID]
institution environment.
8 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen. Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
[SSID broad- Select [Enable].
cast] Default setting: Enable

Chapter 5
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When installing the AeroDR Access Points in mul-
tiple exposure rooms, enter a unique [SSID] for each
exposure room regardless of settings of the roaming
environment.
(Example)
Exposure room 1: KMMG_AeroDR_1
Exposure room 2: KMMG_AeroDR_2
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

10 Press [Submit].

11 Press [WLAN Security Settings] of [WLAN]

of [Wireless Settings].

12 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen.

175
5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

13 Set the security for the following items. 17 Press the following message that is dis-
played on the upper right portion of the
Web browser window.

Setting item Settings

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Security Select [WPA2].
mode] Default setting: WPA2 • If you changed the settings, save the settings and
Select [Personal]. restart. The modified settings will not be applied if the
[WPA type] system is not restarted.
Default setting: Personal
[Encryption Select [AES]. • When changes have been made to the settings, a
method] Default setting: AES message will blink on the upper right portion of the
Input a passphrase with 37 or more screen. To save the setting and activate it, press this
alphanumeric characters. message.
[Passphrase]
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt4F9 ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19

18 Press [Save and Restart].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• We recommend that the passphrase be used without
changing the default setting. When changing the pass-
phrase, combine alphanumeric characters that are dif-
ficult to guess.
• When installing AeroDR Access Points in multiple ex-
posure rooms, enter the same [Passphrase] for each • The settings will be saved and the AeroDR Ac-
AeroDR Access Point. cess Point will restart.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Restart is completed when a "beeping" sound
rings after approximately 15 seconds.
14 Press [Submit].
19 Press [Close] on the browser to close the
15 Press [Advanced Wireless Settings] under browser window.
[WLAN] of [Wireless Settings] and set the
radio output for the following items. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the IP address with a different segment from the
IP address of this device is set, the browser window
may not be displayed correctly. However, the set-
tings will be performed normally. Press [Close] on the
browser.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Setting item Settings

[Transmis- Select [Full].
sion power] Default setting: Full
Select [Enable].
[WMM]
Default setting: Enable

16 Press [Submit].

176
 5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

20 Go back to the AeroDR unit setting screen

5.4.6 AeroDR Detector cor-
and set the following items in [Access
Point Setting]. rection data registration
Register the AeroDR Detector's correction data in this
device.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Information required for network settings, such as IP
address of the AeroDR Detector, is stored in the cor-
Setting item Settings rection data.
Input the AeroDR Access Point serial ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
number or read the bar code.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number]
the form of product code (4 digits) 1 Insert the media provided with AeroDR
-serial number (5 digits). Detector to the CD/DVD drive.
Input the AeroDR Access Point name
[Display
Name]
within 10 characters.
Default setting: Wireless A
2 Press [Add] in [Correction Data Setting].

Input the same [IP Address] as the

[IP Address] one in step 3.
Default setting: 192.168.20.241
Enter the same [SSID] as the one in
[SSID] step 9 within 32 ASCII characters.
Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
Enter the same [Passphrase] as the
one in step 13 within 64 ASCII charac-

Chapter 5
[Pass Phrase] ters.
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt4F9
ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• The [Browse For Folder] screen is displayed.

177
5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

3 Select the folder indicating the serial num-

5.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR
ber of the AeroDR detector, and press [OK].
Detector communication
Confirm the communication between this device and
AeroDR Detector.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not change the IP address for the AeroDR Detec-
tor here. Change the IP address of AeroDR Detector
in "5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Turn on the AeroDR Detector with the

correction data registered, and connect
to the AeroDR I/F Cable, AeroDR Battery
Charger, or AeroDR UF Cable.
• (Example) A20H-00001
2 Press [Download] in the [AeroDR Detector
Setting].

• Information of [Wired IP Address], [Wireless IP

Address], [Default Gateway] and [Subnet Mask]
are acquired.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The serial number of AeroDR Detector will be • If the serial numbers of the correction data CD used
registered and [Serial Number] of [AeroDR De- in "5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration"
tector Setting] will be updated. and the AeroDR Detector do not match, the "The se-
rial number of the AeroDR Detector does not match
the serial number of correction data. Please confirm
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
the combination of the AeroDR Detector and a CD re-
• Since the correction data is read from the CD, it may lated to this correction data." message is displayed. In
take a certain amount of time to add the correction this case, download again using the correct correction
data. data CD.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Remove the media provided with the Aero- 3 Set [Display Name].
DR Detector from the CD/DVD drive.

• Enter the AeroDR Detector name within 10 char-

acters.
• Change is not required if the default display
name of the AeroDR Detector is to be used.

178
 5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable
• [Display Name] is also used as the AeroDR Detector
setting
name in the application bar. Since only the first 3 char-
acters will be displayed in the application bar, assign a Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable.
name that is easy to recognize.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Upload]. • AeroDR detector to be used is necessary to set up

the AeroDR I/F Cable.
• When there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables, connect
and set up each cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable is con-

nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit.

2 Confirm that the AeroDR detector to be

used is powered on.

3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-

DR I/F Cable.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data

Chapter 5
registered in "5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
• The setting information is uploaded to the Aero-
registration".
DR Detector.
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device
before this operation, the device sub-ID may be dis-
played. When you press [Download] at the next step,
the device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable to be set
up is obtained.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Download] in [I/F Cable Setting].

• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-

played.

179
5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used, O

OWhen there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables
and press [OK].
1 Turn on the connection for the device icon
for the second AeroDR I/F Cable.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to "5.3 Activation of AeroDR
SYSTEM related devices".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable with the same

procedure as the first AeroDR I/F Cable.

• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable is

automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed
in the [Device Sub ID] of [I/F Cable Setting].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
sub-ID by this method.
• For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6 Set the following items in [I/F Cable Set-

ting].

Setting item Settings

Read the bar code and get the Serial
number of the AeroDR I/F Cable.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number]
the form of product code (4 digits)
-serial number (5 digits).
Input the I/F Cable name within 10
[Display
characters.
Name]
Default setting: IF Cable

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The serial number of the AeroDR I/F Cable is de-
scribed on the tag attached to it.
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

180
 5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger

4 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used,
and press [OK].
setting
Set up when using the AeroDR Battery Charger to reg-
ister and charge the AeroDR Detector.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• AeroDR Detector to be used is necessary to set up the
AeroDR Battery Charger for registering. The AeroDR De-
tector is not necessary to set up the AeroDR Battery Char-
ger just for charging, so steps 1 - 4 are not necessary.
• When there are multiple AeroDR Battery Chargers for
registering, connect and set up each device.
• Even if the AeroDR Battery Charger is used only for
charging, setting is still necessary for device registration.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR Detector to be

used is powered on. • The device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger
is automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed
in [Device Sub ID] of [AeroDR Battery Charger].
2 Insert the AeroDR Detector into the Aero-
DR Battery Charger.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or

Chapter 5
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
registered referencing "5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correc- not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
tion data registration". sub-ID by this method.
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device • For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
before this operation, the device sub-ID may be dis- plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
played. When you press [Download] at the next step, format.
the device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger to ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
be set up is obtained.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Set the following items in [AeroDR Battery
Charger].
3 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Battery
Charger].

Setting item Settings

Read the bar code and get the Serial
number of AeroDR Battery Charger.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number] the form of product code (4 digits)
-serial number (5 digits).
Input the Battery Charger name within
[Display
10 characters.
Name] Default setting: Cradle
Select [For Charging Only] or [For
Registration/Charging] for the Battery
[Type]
Charger type.
Default setting: For Registration/Charging

• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-

played.

181
5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set up of the dip switch on the AeroDR Battery Char- 5.4.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting
ger is required when [For Charging Only] is selected in
the [Type]. Refer to "Installation of the AeroDR Battery
Set the AeroDR UF Cable.
Charger for charging only" in the "AeroDR SYSTEM
Installation/Service Manual".
• The registration of the AeroDR Detector to a exposure IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
room will not be performed when [For Charging Only]
is selected for [Type] since notification to the RM is not • AeroDR Detector to be used is necessary to set up
performed when the AeroDR Detector is mounted on the AeroDR UF Cable.
the AeroDR Battery Charger. • When there are multiple AeroDR UF Cables, connect
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • and set up each cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger is de- 1 Confirm that the AeroDR UF Cable is con-
scribed on the sticker on side of the main body. nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit via
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read- AeroDR I/F Cable.
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Confirm that the AeroDR Detector to be
used is powered on.
O
OWhen there are multiple AeroDR Battery
Chargers
3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-
1 Turn on the connection for the device icon DR UF Cable.
for the second AeroDR Battery Charger.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data
registered in "5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
• For the operation, refer to "5.3 Activation of AeroDR
registration".
SYSTEM related devices".
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
before this operation, the device sub-ID may be dis-
played. When you press [Download] at the next step,
2 Set up the AeroDR Battery Charger with
the device sub-ID of the AeroDR UF Cable to be set
the same procedure as the first AeroDR
up is obtained.
Battery Charger. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Download] in [UF Cable Setting].

• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-

played.

182
 5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used, 6 Set the following items in [UF Cable Setting].
and press [OK].

Setting item Settings

Read the bar code and get the Serial
[Serial number of AeroDR UF Cable.
Number] When inputting manually, input it in the form of
product code (4 digits)-serial number (5 digits).
Input the AeroDR UF Cable name within
[Display
10 characters.
Name]
Default setting: Modality
Select [Wall Stand] or [Bucky Table] for
[Type] the type of AeroDR UF Cables.
Default setting: Wall Stand
When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, select the
• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR UF Cable is angle information to be set for each of the
automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed [Orienta- AeroDR UF Cable from [0], [90], [180], or [270].
in [Device Sub ID] of [UF Cable Setting]. tion] Default setting: 0
Setting is not required when using only 1
AeroDR UF Cable.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Select the orientation of the image on the
• The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or AeroDR Detector from [Standard] or [Up-

Chapter 5
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de- side down] when exposing the AeroDR
Detector in portrait orientation.
vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
Default setting: Standard
not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device [Image Ori-
Select [Standard] when the line of white
sub-ID by this method. entation]
projection of the AeroDR Detector is fac-
• For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup- ing toward up.
plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode Select [Upside down] when the line of
white projection of the AeroDR Detector is
format.
facing toward down.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Select the insertion direction of the AeroDR
Detector from [Right] or [Left] when exposing
the AeroDR Detector in landscape orientation.
[Insertion Default setting: Left
Opening] Select [Right] when the line of white projection
of the AeroDR Detector is facing toward right.
Select [Left] when the line of white projection of
the AeroDR Detector is facing toward left.
Select the operation status of the AeroDR
UF Cable from [Standard] or [UFC2].
[UFC Type] Default setting: Standard
If using 1 AeroDR UF Cable, select [Standard].
If using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, select [UFC2].

IMPORTANT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When exposing the AeroDR Detector in landscape ori-
entation, it may affect the result of automatic orienta-
tion determination process if [Insertion Opening] is not
setup correctly.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

183
5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3 Press [Download] in [UF Cable Setting],

and acquire the device sub ID for the sec-
• The serial number of the AeroDR UF Cable is de-
ond AeroDR UF Cable.
scribed on the tag attached to the cable.
• When using only 1 AeroDR UF Cable, setup [Image
Orientation] and [Insertion Opening] in accordance
with the status of exposure stage to be used, using
following patterns as a reference.
Direction of [Image [Insertion
AeroDR Detector Orientation] Opening]

Match with the

[Standard] setting for us-
ing the AeroDR Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Detector in • For the operation, refer to steps 4 - 5 of "5.4.10 Aero-
[Upside landscape ori-
down] DR UF Cable setting".
entation
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Match with
the setting [Right] 4 Set the following items in [UF Cable Set-
for using
ting] respectively.
the AeroDR
Detector in
portrait ori- [Left]
entation

• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-

er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Setting item Settings
• For the other setting examples when using only 1
Select the type of AeroDR UF Cable
AeroDR UF Cable, refer to "16.2.1 When using only from [Wall Stand] or [Bucky Table].
one AeroDR UF Cable". [Type] Default setting: Wall Stand
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Select the same type for both first and
second cables.
O
OWhen using 2 AeroDR UF Cables Select the angle information to be set
When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables for 1 exposure for the first and second AeroDR UF
Cables from [0], [90], [180], or [270].
stage, the setting is as follows. [Orientation]
Default setting: 0
Set to match the status of the expo-
1 Turn on the connection of the device icon sure stage to be used.
of the second AeroDR UF Cable. Select the orientation of the image on
AeroDR Detector from [Standard] or
[Upside down] when an exposure is
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [Image Orien- performed in the portrait orientation of
tation] AeroDR Detector.
• For the operation, refer to "5.3 Activation of AeroDR
Default setting: Standard
SYSTEM related devices". Select the same orientation for both
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • first and second cables.
Select the operation type of AeroDR
2 Connect the second AeroDR UF Cable to UF Cable from [Standard] or [UFC2].
the AeroDR Detector. [UFC Type] Default setting: Standard
Select [UFC2] for both first and sec-
ond cables.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The setting of [Insertion Opening] is not necessary
when using 2 AeroDR UF Cables.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

184
 5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set [Serial Number] and [Display Name] referring to 5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting
the operation of the first AeroDR UF Cable.
• When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, set [Orientation] Set up the AeroDR Detector after confirming its com-
and [Image Orientation] according to the status of ex- munications by referencing "5.4.7 Confirmation of
posure stage to be used with reference to the follow- AeroDR Detector communication".
ing patterns. Setting is not required if the default network setting of
AeroDR Detector [Image
the AeroDR is to be used.
[Orientation]
orientation Orientation]
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
First AeroDR UF
First Cable • The AeroDR Detector's serial number which was ac-
[0] quired in "5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data reg-
[Standard]
Second AeroDR istration" will be displayed in [Serial Number]. Confirm
UF Cable that the serial number displayed is identical to the se-
Second [90] rial number on the identification label(sticker) attached
to the AeroDR Detector before setting up.
First AeroDR UF
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
First Cable
[0]
Second Second AeroDR [Standard]
UF Cable
1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable or the
[270] AeroDR UF Cable is connected to the
AeroDR Interface Unit.
First First AeroDR UF
Cable
[0] [Upside
2 Confirm that the AeroDR detector to be
used is powered on.

Chapter 5
Second AeroDR down]
UF Cable
Second [90]
3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-
DR I/F Cable or the AeroDR UF Cable.
First First AeroDR UF
Cable

Second
[0] [Upside 4 Set the following items of [AeroDR Detec-
Second AeroDR down] tor Setting] according to the institution
UF Cable
[270]
environment.

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For other setting patterns when using 2 AeroDR UF
Cables, refer to "16.2.2 When using 2 AeroDR UF
Cables".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Setting item Settings
The AeroDR Detector's serial number
[Serial which was acquired in "5.4.6 AeroDR
Number] Detector correction data registration"
will be displayed.
Input the IP address for the wired con-
[Wired IP Ad-
nection of the AeroDR Detector.
dress]
Default setting: 192.168.20.201
Input the IP address for the wireless
[Wireless IP
connection of the AeroDR Detector.
Address]
Default setting: 192.168.20.211
Input the default gateway of the Aero-
[Default Gate-
DR Detector.
way]
Default setting: 0.0.0.0
Input the subnet mask of the AeroDR
[Subnet
Detector.
Mask]
Default setting: 255.255.255.0

185
5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Press [Upload].
5.4.12 Saving of settings

When all settings of AeroDR SYSTEM are completed,

save the settings and close the AeroDR unit setting
screen.

1 Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting

screen.

• The settings will be registered in this device's

RM as local settings.
• The settings are uploaded to the AeroDR Detec-
tor.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The warning message is displayed when the "Pro-
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • cessing" screen is closed by pressing [Cancel] during
• AeroDR Detector setting changes may take up to a an upload, but this does not indicate a problem.
maximum of 30 seconds to take effect. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the IP address with a different segment than
this device's IP is set, the "Processing" screen may 2 Close the sub-menu screen.
not disappear although settings are being uploaded to
the AeroDR Detector. After waiting for 30 seconds or
more, press [Cancel] and perform ping from the Win-
dows command prompt and confirm that there is no
response from the IP address before the change.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

186
 5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5.4.13 AeroDR 1012HQ

Settings

Configure the following settings when using the

AeroDR 1012HQ.

1 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

3 Configure the following [Image Size Set-

ting].

Setting item Settings

Select the reading im-
age size when using the
[10"x12" Read Image
AeroDR 1012HQ from
Size at the time of using
[According to Aero DR
the AeroDR Cassette]
cassette] and [According

Chapter 5
to Regius Cassette].
Select the HOST output
[10"x12" HOST Output image size when using
Image Size at the time the AeroDR 1012HQ from
of using the AeroDR [According to Aero DR
Cassette] cassette] and [According
to Regius Cassette].

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
• Be sure to select [According to AeroDR Cassette] for
the [10"x12" Read Image Size at the time of using the
2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. AeroDR Cassette] setting, when using the AeroDR
1012HQ.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

• The settings are stored, and the screen is closed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 Close the sub-menu screen.

187
5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.11 Setting of the IP address of this

device

4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync

Setting

4.13 Restart of this device

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device"
first.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

To next page

188
 5.5 Change of network of this device/addition of AeroDR De-
tector after completing the settings

5.5.1 When changing the network setting of this device after

completing the settings
Follow the following procesure to change the network setting of this device after completing the settings of this de-
vice and the AeroDR SYSTEM.
Do not perform this task if network settings of this device are not to be modified.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• It is required to change the IP address in [RM Setting] and upload the changed information to the AeroDR Detector before
changing the network setting of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Change the IP address in [RM Setting] to the IP address

1 5.4.3 RM setting
of this device that is changed in step 4 in the flow.

Upload the changed IP address of [RM Setting] to

5.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR the AeroDR Detector.
2
Detector communication Upload to all AeroDR Detectors if multiple AeroDR
Detectors are used.

3 5.4.12 Saving of settings

Save the changes in [RM Setting].

Chapter 5
4.11 Setting of the IP address of
4 Change the network setting of this device.
this device

Restart this device and the AeroDR Detectors to which

5 4.13 Restart of this device the IP address of [RM Setting] has been uploaded.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For detailed procedure for each operation, refer to the respective sections in "Chapter 4 Installation Procedure for This De-
vice and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)" and "Chapter 5 Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM
(Aero Sync connection)".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

189
5.5 Change of network of this device/addition of AeroDR Detector after completing the settings

5.5.2 When adding an AeroDR Detector

Follow the following procesure to perform an additional setup of the AeroDR Detector to add an AeroDR Detector to
be used in the same exposure room.
Do not perform this task if AeroDR Detector is not to be added.
Repeat the same setting process if there are multiple AeroDR Detectors.
Connect the AeroDR Detector to be added to the
1 4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM AeroDR I/F Cable or the AeroDR UF Cable and charge.

Is the network setting NO

of this device changed
from the default?

YES
Perform this if the network setting of this device is
changed from the default in "4.11 Setting of the IP
address of this device".
2 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device Restore the values for the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway to the default
(192.168.20.90/255.255.255.0/0.0.0.0).

Register the correction data for the AeroDR Detector

3 5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration
to be added.

Confirm the communication between the AeroDR

4 5.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector communication Detector to be added and this device.

Does the IP address for the NO

AeroDR Detector need to be
changed?

YES
Perform this when changing the IP address of the
5 5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting AeroDR Detector to be added from the default.

Save the settings of the AeroDR Detector to be

6 5.4.12 Saving of settings added.

Is the network setting NO

of this device restored
to default?

YES Perform this when the network setting of this device is

restored to the default in the flow number 2.
Change the values of the IP address, subnet mask,
7 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device
and default gateway of this device to the values
before restoring to the default.

4.13 Restart of this device Restart this device and the AeroDR Detector to be
8
added.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Affix identification labels (stickers) to the exterior of the AeroDR Detectors if multiple AeroDR Detectors are to be used. For
details, refer to "Addition of an AeroDR Detector" in the "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
• To add an AeroDR Detector to an existing roaming environment, go to "5.7 Roaming environment settings".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

190
 5.5 Change of network of this device/addition of AeroDR Detector after completing the settings

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For detailed procedure for each operation, refer to the respective sections in "Chapter 4 Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR
SYSTEM (SRM connection)" and "Chapter 5 Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection)".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 5

191
 5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

5.6.1 Flow chart of AeroDR Detector analysis

Flow of the AeroDR Detector analysis is as following. The process time in the flow chart is a rough estimate.

Roam the AeroDR Detector to

the device with AeroDR link

Place the AeroDR Detector on

the floor, etc., and make the
distance from the X-ray focus
(SID) 2m

Expose raw images under the

calibration condition of 0.1 mR,
1.0 mR and 3.0 mR.

FAIL
Carry out calibration. (first time)
Unevenness analysis
200 sec 60 sec

FAIL (first time) PASS

Expose raw images under the

calibration condition of 0.1 mR, Defect analysis
1.0 mR and 3.0 mR. 80 sec

PASS

Unevenness analysis FAIL (second time)

60 sec

PASS

Defect analysis FAIL (second time) Backup the complete set of data
80 sec for the analysis result

PASS

Handle the problem by referring

Existence of the device NO
to "Fixing Problems" in
with SRM or S-SRM link
"AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/
Service Manual".
YES

Roam the AeroDR Detector to

the device with SRM or S-SRM
link

Carry out the calibration on this

* The calibration is not necessary
device that is linked with SRM Carry out calibration.*
when it has already been completed.
or S-SRM.

Complete AeroDR Detector

analysis

192
 5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

5.6.2 Analysis of AeroDR

4 Press the device icon of AeroDR Detector.

Detector
Performs the analysis of the AeroDR Detector, and
setting and adjustment of exposure conditions.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Fully charge the AeroDR Detector before performing
the analysis of the AeroDR Detector.
• Start the operation after removing the additional filter
for dosage reduction on the X-ray tube, if there is one.
• Increase the distance of the X-ray focus (SID) as
much as possible to reduce the effect of the X-ray
intensity distribution.
Also, set the SID that allows the user to perform the
calibration of the AeroDR Detector in the same condi-
tion every 3 month.
• When performing an analysis of the AeroDR Detector
after performing the calibration of the AeroDR Detec-
tor, make sure not to change the positional relationship
of the AeroDR Detector and the X-ray tube, including
the SID.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 5
Confirm that the monitor, this device,
AeroDR SYSTEM, and the X-ray device are
powered on.
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
2 Prepare for exposure with AeroDR detector.
• If AeroDR detector is inserted in the exposure
stage, it should be removed.
• Place the AeroDR Detector at a location that
makes the distance from X-ray focus (SID) 2 m.
(Make it as close to 2 m exceeding 1.5 m if it is
impossible to have 2 m.)
• Confirm that there are no obstacles such as
grids or markers between the X-ray tube and the
AeroDR Detector.
• Make sure that the exposure field exposes the
entire AeroDR detector.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When multiple AeroDR detectors are used, the opera-
tion can be performed in any exposure rooms as long
as the above conditions are met.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

3 Start the service tool.

193
5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

5 Press [Panel]. 7 Press [Analyze].

8 Set the exposure condition of the calibra-

tion described in the following table.

Exposure condition of calibration

AeroDR 1417HQ/AeroDR 1717HQ
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID
0.032 3.2
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.018 1.8
is 1.5 m

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• An additional filter is not used here.
• The AeroDR Detector analysis screen is dis- • Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray
played. devices.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the
6 Select the AeroDR Detector to analyze. distance inverse square law.
(Example) When SID is 1.8 m, mAs value is
3.2x(1.8/2.0)2 = 2.6 mAs.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

9 Press [Calibration conditions].

• The message "Please take the exposure now." will be

displayed.

194
 5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

10 Expose with the set exposure condition. 12 Attach an additional filter (1 mm thick
• Expose by aligning the perpendicular direction copper plate) to the X-ray collimator using
of the tube to the portrait orientation of AeroDR drafting tape.
Detector. The line of white projection of the
AeroDR Detector is located at the top.

Treat the protruding portion of

the white line as the top part.

1.5 to 2 m

Vertical direction of the tube

Vertical direction of Additional filter Drafting tape
the AeroDR Detector
(1 mm thick copper plate)

• When reading the image, the average signal value

is displayed in [Signal Value].
13 Set the exposure condition for 0.1 mR/
0.9 μGy as described in the following
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • table.
• Align the longitudinal direction of the X-ray tube and
AeroDR Detector. Exposure condition for 0.1 mR/0.9 μGy
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Addi- Tube Tube

Chapter 5
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
11 Check that [Signal Value] is within the filter [kV] [mA]
range of the average signal value. When SID is
0.016 1.6
2m Cu
80 100
When SID is 1 mm
0.01 1
1.5 m

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Make sure to attach an additional filter.
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray
devices.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the
distance inverse square law.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the average signal value is out of the range,
change the "mAs" of the exposure condition and re- 14 Press [0.1mR/0.9μGy].
peat steps 9 to 11. • The message "Expose" will be displayed.
• Repeat exposures by changing the conditions until the
average signal value becomes within the range. 15 Expose with the set exposure condition.
• When reading the image, the average signal
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • value is displayed in [Signal Value].

• Since the signal value is approximately proportional to

the dose, calculate and set mAs accordingly. 16 Check the average signal value. When the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • average signal value is out of the range,
change the "mAs" of the exposure condi-
tion and expose again.
• Repeat exposures by changing the conditions until the
average signal value becomes within the range.

195
5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

17 Set the exposure condition for 1.0 mR/ 22 Check the average signal value. When the
9.0 μGy as described in the following table. average signal value is out of the range,
change the "mAs" of the exposure condi-
Exposure condition for 1.0 mR/9.0 μGy tion and expose again.
Addi- Tube Tube • Repeat exposures by changing the conditions
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs until the average signal value becomes within
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA] the range.
When SID is
0.08 16
2m Cu
When SID is 1 mm
80 200
0.045 9
23 When the exposures of 4 types images are
1.5 m completed, press [Exposure completed].

IMPORTANT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• Keep the additional filter attached.
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray devices.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to dis-
tance inverse square law.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

18 Press [1.0mR/9.0μGy] to expose with the

set exposure conditions.
• When reading the image, the average signal
value is displayed in [Signal Value].

19 Check the average signal value. When the

average signal value is out of the range,
change the "mAs" of the exposure condi-
tion and expose again.
• Repeat exposures by changing the conditions
until the average signal value becomes within
the range.

20 Set the exposure condition for 3.0 mR/26

μGy as described in the following table.

Exposure condition for 3.0 mR/26 μGy

• Analysis result is displayed.
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA] 24 Confirm that [PASS] is displayed in the
When SID is analysis result.
0.25 50
2m Cu
80 200 • Perform the calibration following the procedure
When SID is 1 mm
1.5 m
0.14 28 in "5.6.3 Calibration of AeroDR Detector" when
[FAIL] is displayed as the analysis result for [Un-
evenness Analysis] or [Defect Analysis]. Perform
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • steps 3 - 24 again after performing the calibra-
• Keep the additional filter attached. tion. Replacement of the AeroDR Detector is
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray devices. necessary if [FAIL] is displayed again.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the • Backup the complete set of the data that is auto-
distance inverse square law. matically saved in the "C:\Konicaminolta\Console\
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Data\Work\ImageAnalyzer\<Panel ID + YYYYM-
MDDHHMMSS>" of this device and send it to the
21 Press [3.0mR/26μGy] to expose with the analysis department when [FAIL] is displayed as
set exposure conditions. the analysis result of the [Defect Analysis] even
• When reading the image, the average signal after performing the calibration.
value is displayed in [Signal Value].

196
 5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

25 Press [Close].
5.6.3 Calibration of AeroDR
• Check the analysis of the other AeroDR Detec-
tors with the same procedure. Detector
• When the analysis of AeroDR detector is com-
The calibration method for the AeroDR Detector is as
pleted, remove the additional filter from the col-
follows.
limator.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Start the service tool.

• When the analysis of the AeroDR Detector is per-

formed under roaming environment, always perform
2 Select the [User Tool] tab.
"5.6.3 Calibration of AeroDR Detector" after perform-
ing the analysis.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 5
• The user tool screen is displayed.

3 Press [Adjustment], and press [Calibration].

197
5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

HINT ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When all of preparations steps 5 to 7 are completed,
press [Skip to exposure] to display the step 8 screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Prepare the X-ray tube according to the

on-screen messages, and press [Next].

• The calibration tool screen is displayed.

4 Select the AeroDR Detector to be calibrated.

• The following message is displayed on the

screen. After finishing preparations according to
the messages, press [Next].
X-ray tube preparations
(1) Set the distance (SID) between the X-ray
tube and Aero­DR Detector referring to the
above [Exposure Parameters]. (If there is
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • no information, place it over 1.5m away, as
• AeroDR Detectors displayed with red letters are in close to 2.0m as possible.)
need of calibration (they have passed the calibration (2) Set collimator to cover the entire AeroDR
deadline). Detector.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • (3) Ensure that there are no obstructions, such
as grids or markers, between the X-ray tubes
and the Aero DR Detector.
5 Prepare the AeroDR Detector according to
the on-screen messages, and press [Next].
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Expose after matching the vertical direction of the tube
to the vertical direction of the AeroDR Detector. The
protruding portion of the white line of the AeroDR De-
tector goes on top.

Treat the protruding portion of

the white line as the top part.

1.5 to 2 m

• The following message is displayed on the

screen. After finishing preparations according to
the messages, press [Next]. Vertical direction of the tube
AeroDR Detector preparations Vertical direction of
the AeroDR Detector
(1) Perform the offset calibration no less than 10
minutes after making an exposure.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(2) I f the AeroDR Detector is loaded on the
stand, remove the AeroDR Detector.

198
 5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

7 Prepare the exposure conditions accord- 8 The message "Please wait..." is displayed.
ing to the on-screen messages, and press
[Next].

• The following message is displayed on the

screen. After finishing preparations according to
the messages, press [Next].
Exposure conditions preparations
(1) Adjust the exposure parameters Tube volt-
age, Tube current and Exposure time (or
mAs) according to the above [Exposure Pa-
rameters]. If there is no value in the [Expo-
sure Parameters], refer to following chart to
adjust the parameter.

Chapter 5
Exposure conditions for calibration
• When the AeroDR Detector has been prepared,
AeroDR 1417HQ/AeroDR 1717HQ
the message "X-rays, please" is displayed.
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA] 9 Irradiate X-ray.
When SID
0.032 3.2
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.018 1.8
is 1.5 m

IMPORTANT •• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• An additional filter is not used.
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray
devices.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the
distance inverse square law.
(Example) When SID is 1.8 m, mAs value is
• Perform X-ray exposure when the message "X-
3.2×(1.8/2.0)2 = 2.6 mAs.
rays, please" is displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The message "Remaining exposure times : n"
indicating the remaining number of exposures
is displayed on the screen. When the exposure
condition is appropriate, the following exposure
sequentially reduces the remaining number of
times by one. After the exposure, the message
"AeroDR panel is not ready" is displayed. When
the AeroDR Detector has been prepared, the
message "X-rays, please" is displayed.
• When the conditions are not met, a warning
message is displayed. Try exposure again after
checking the exposure conditions, looking for
obstacles (eg. grid, marker), and confirming the
size of the exposure field.

199
5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

10 Repeat to perform X-ray exposure. 13 Expose another image with the AeroDR
• The calibration is completed when you have Detector that shows an error in the analy-
repeated the specified number of X-ray expo- sis results and analyze it.
sures.
• Depending on the situation, you may be re-
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
quested to repeat the exposure more than the
specified number of times. Follow the screen • When performing the analysis of the AeroDR Detector
message to complete the calibration. continuously after the calibration of the AeroDR Detec-
• If the conditions are not ideal or a foreign ob- tor, be careful not to change the positional relationship
jects such as a grid or marker is exposed, a between the AeroDR Detector and the X-ray tube.
warning message is displayed. In such a case, Especially when the SID is small, the analysis result of
repeat the calibration again. the AeroDR Detector may turn out [FAIL] if the position
is changed, so be careful.
HINT •• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The displayed signal value is almost in propor-

tion to the actual amount of X-rays contacting the Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
AeroDR Detector. For example, when the signal • For the operation method, refer to steps 3 - 25 of the
value is "8,000", setting the mAs value to 0.75 times "5.6.2 Analysis of AeroDR Detector".
(6,000/8,000) can meet the optimal exposure condi- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
tions.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 14 Confirm that the analysis result is [PASS].
• If [FAIL] is displayed again, troubleshoot the
11 Enter the conditions that are used for the problem according to the instructions displayed
calibration to [Exposure Parameters]. on the screen.
• Enter the tube voltage, tube current, exposure
time, exposure distance, and remarks.

4.16 Deployment to the installation

locations and connection to the
institution network

4.17 Peripheral devices setting

4.18 Activation

• The above competes the calibration. 4.19 Confirmation of the version of this
device
HINT •• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• After the calibration is completed, you can enter your
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
comments about this calibration in [Exposure Param-
• Refer to "4.16 Deployment to the installation location
eters] if necessary.
and connection to the institution network" first.
• Such comments, which will be saved up to the time of
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
the next calibration, may be useful when you carry out
the next calibration.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

12 Press [Close].
To next page

200
 5.7 Roaming environment settings

Set the roaming environment when multiple exposure rooms are set. Also perform the setting of the startup linkage
of this device as necessary.

5.7.1 Workflow to set roaming environment

The workflow for setting a roaming environment is as follows.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• There are 2 types of RM: RM hybrid machine and RM client machine. This manual defines them respectively as follows.
–– RM hybrid machine: this device where RM is set as a hybrid type
–– RM client machine: this device where RM is set as a client type
• There is one RM hybrid machine in a roaming environment. The others are set as RM client machines.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 5.7.2 Advance preparation Perform on all units of this device.

2 5.7.3 RM client machine settings Perform on all RM client machines.

Chapter 5
3 5.7.4 Consolidation of exposure room information Perform on the RM hybrid machine.

5.7.5 Resetting of device information

Was the merge successful?

NG
Perform when there is a duplication of serial
number, sub device ID, and IP address/port
OK of the AeroDR SYSTEM related devices.

4 5.7.6 Synchronization of the RM client machine Perform on all RM client machines.

5 5.7.7 Restart of RM hybrid machine Perform on the RM hybrid machine.

6 5.7.8 Restart of RM client machines Perform on all RM client machines.

5.7.9 Checking the synchronization

7 state on the RM client machine Perform on all RM client machines.

201
5.7 Roaming environment settings

5.7.2 Advance preparation

The advance preparation for setting a roaming envi-

ronment is as follows.

1 Confirm that all units of this device are

connected to the institution network and
are ready for network communications.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Turn on all units of this device.

4 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

5.7.3 RM client machine
settings
Perform the RM client machine settings.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not start the service tool and user tool on the RM
hybrid machine while performing the setting on an RM
client machine.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that all units of this device are

powered on.

2 Start up the service tool on the RM client

machine.

3 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

202
 5.7 Roaming environment settings

5 Set [Unique ID] for [Device Information

Setting].

• Set a different unique ID (2-24) for each RM cli-

ent machine.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set a different ID other than 1, as the unique ID for
each RM client machine. The unique ID for the RM
9 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.
hybrid machine will be 1.
• Up to 24 units of this device (including the unit of this
device that was set as an RM hybrid machine) can be
set within the same segment.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

Chapter 5
• The settings are stored, and the screen is
closed.

7 Close the sub-menu screen.

8 Press the RM icon.

• The AeroDR unit setting screen is displayed.

203
5.7 Roaming environment settings

10 Set the following items in [RM setting]. 14 Press [OK] in AeroDR unit setting screen.

Setting item Settings

[Mode] Set as [Client].
[IP Address
Enter the IP address of the RM hybrid
of RM hybrid
machine.
machine]
[IP Address
Enter the IP address of the RM client
of RM client
machine.
machine]

11 Connect AeroDR I/F Cable, AeroDR Bat-

tery Charger, or AeroDR UF Cable with the
AeroDR Detector to be roamed.

12 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Detector

Setting].
15 Press [OK].

13 Press [Upload].

• Transfer of roaming information to the RM hy-

brid machine will start.
• The screen will close when the transfer is com-
pleted successfully.

• The modified setting information is uploaded to

the AeroDR Detector.

204
 5.7 Roaming environment settings

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5.7.4 Consolidation of exposure

• Depending on the amount of setting information to be
room information
transferred or the network connection environment,
transfer may take about 1 minute. Consolidate the setting of each exposure room (setting
• When transfer fails due to the causes below, an error of each RM client machine) with the RM hybrid ma-
screen will be displayed. Perform steps 14 to 15 again chine.
after eliminating the causes.
Cause
There is a network con-
Corrective actions
1 Confirm that the RM hybrid machine is
nection problem between powered on.
Check the network status
the RM hybrid machine
again.
and an RM client ma-
chine.
2 Start the service tool on the RM hybrid
The RM hybrid machine Restart the RM hybrid
machine.
has not started normally. machine.
The service tool or user
Exit the service tool or 3 Press the RM icon.
tool is used on the RM
user tool.
hybrid machine.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Chapter 5

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

205
5.7 Roaming environment settings

4 Press [Merge].

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If there is duplication in the exposure room information
which is to be integrated, such as in the serial numbers,
device sub-IDs, IP addresses, port numbers etc. of the
AeroDR SYSTEM related devices, the duplicated de-
vice information is displayed in the [Error information]
at the bottom section of the screen. Check the content,
delete the relevant device data from [Mergeable Data],
and then reset the device information.

• The file merge screen is displayed.

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Display panel Display content
Display a list for setting informa-
tion of each RM client machine 6 Press [OK].
[Data On Server]
retained with the RM hybrid ma-
chine.
Display a list of setting information
[Mergeable Data]
sent from each client machine.

5 Select settings to be consolidated from

the list of [Mergeable Data], and press
[Merge].

• Recognize the RM client machine setting infor-

mation by [RoomID] and [CS-7 Console Device
ID].
• Difference in configuration information before
and after the merge is displayed.

206
 5.7 Roaming environment settings

7 Check the difference in the configuration

information and press [OK].

• The setting of the selected RM client machine is

consolidated.

9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 as many times as the

number of RM client machines.

10 Press [Close].

Chapter 5
• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• You can check the difference in the configuration infor- 11 Close the sub-menu screen.
mation in the [Info after Merge] field.
–– "Add" is indicated for the added information and its
background turns blue.
12 Exit the service tool, and move to the sys-
tem monitor screen.
–– "Modify" is indicated for the information that has
been changed and its background turns green.
–– "Deleted" is indicated for the deleted information IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
and its background turns red. • When moving to the system monitor screen, a screen
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • prompting to restart is displayed. Do not perform re-
start, and continue the following operation while the
8 Press [OK]. screen is displayed.

• If you mistakenly performed restart, then continue with

the following operation while the initial screen is dis-
played after restart.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

207
5.7 Roaming environment settings

5.7.5 Resetting of device information

There may be a duplication of the serial number, sub device ID, IP address or port number of the AeroDR SYSTEM
related devices when the merge fails in the "5.7.4 Consolidation of exposure room information".
Change the setting of the device information for the RM hybrid machine or the RM client machines.

O
OChanging the setting of the RM hybrid machine
Change the setting of the device information for the RM hybrid machine in accordance with the following flow.

5.4.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit

1 setting screen

Confirm the serial number and IP address of the

2 5.4.5 AeroDR Access Point setting AeroDR Access Point, and perform if it needs to be
changed.

5.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector

3 communication

Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the AeroDR

4 5.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting
I/F Cable, and perform if it needs to be changed.

Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the AeroDR

5 5.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting
Battery Charger, and perform if it needs to be changed.

Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the AeroDR

6 5.4.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting
UF Cable, and perform if it needs to be changed.

Confirm the IP address of the AeroDR Detector, and

7 5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting
perform if it needs to be changed.

8 5.4.12 Saving of settings

208
 5.7 Roaming environment settings

O
OChanging the setting of the RM client machines
Change the setting of the device information for the RM client machines in accordance with the following flow.

5.7.6 Synchronization of the RM client Start only the RM client machines that could not be
1
machine merged.

5.4.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit

2 setting screen

Confirm the serial number and IP address of the

3 5.4.5 AeroDR Access Point setting AeroDR Access Point, and perform if it needs to be
changed.

5.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR

4 Detector communication

5.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the AeroDR
5
I/F Cable, and perform if it needs to be changed.

5.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the AeroDR
6
Battery Charger, and perform if it needs to be changed.

5.4.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting Confirm the serial number and sub device ID of the AeroDR
7
UF Cable, and perform if it needs to be changed.

Chapter 5
5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting Confirm the IP address of the AeroDR Detector, and
8
perform if it needs to be changed.

9 5.4.12 Saving of settings

10 5.7.3 RM client machine settings Transfer the roaming information again to the RM
hybrid machine.

11 5.7.4 Consolidation of exposure room

information

209
5.7 Roaming environment settings

5.7.6 Synchronization of the

3 Press [Device info sync] on the Sub Menu
screen.
RM client machine
Carry out synchronous processing of the roaming in-
formation on the RM client machine.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not start the service tool and user tool of the RM
hybrid machine while the setting is configured on the
RM client machine.
• If multiple RM client machines are used for processing
at the same time, you may not be able to successfully
obtain information.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Start the service tool of the RM client ma-

chine.

2 Press the RM icon.

• The device information synchronization screen

is displayed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• After the device information synchronization screen is
displayed, acquire the roaming information from the
hybrid machine. It may take some time to acquire the
roaming information (30 seconds maximum).
• If multiple RM client machines are used for processing
at the same time, you may not be able to successfully
obtain information from a hybrid machine.
• If you were not able to successfully acquire the roam-
ing information, press [Reacquired] after confirming
the communication status.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

210
 5.7 Roaming environment settings

4 Check the difference in the configuration 6 Press [OK].

information that existed before and after
the synchronization.

• The configuration information before and after

the synchronization are displayed. Check the
difference between them.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• You can check the difference in the configuration infor-
mation in the [Info after sync] field.
–– "Add" is indicated for the added information and its
background turns blue.
• The above completes the overwriting, eliminat-
–– "Modify" is indicated for the information that has
ing the difference.

Chapter 5
been changed and its background turns green.
–– "Deleted" is indicated for the deleted information
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
and its background turns red.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Synchronization processing may take some time (30
seconds maximum).

5 Press [Sync]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

7 Press [Close].

• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

211
5.7 Roaming environment settings

8 Press [OK].
5.7.8 Restart of RM client
machines
Restart all the RM client machines.

1 Display the intermediate screen on all the

RM client machines.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

9 Close the sub-menu screen. • For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
10 End the service tool.
2 Press [Reboot] on the intermediate
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • screen.
• To reflect the settings, end the service tool after the
synchronization has been completed. If you change
the settings without ending the service tool, the infor-
mation may return to the state before the synchroniza-
tion. If you have changed the settings without ending
the service tool, you must repeat the device informa-
tion synchronization again.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

5.7.7 Restart of RM hybrid

machine
Restart the RM hybrid machine.

1 Display the intermediate screen on the RM

5.7.9 Checking the
hybrid machine.
synchronization state on
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
the RM client machine
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis- Check the synchronization state on the RM client ma-
play the intermediate screen". chine.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Display the system monitor screen.

2 Press [Reboot] on the intermediate
screen.
2 Press the RM icon.

212
 5.7 Roaming environment settings

5.7.10 Power on/off linkage

settings
When multiple units of this device are installed, they
can be started up together. Starting up 1 unit of this
device starts up the other units of this device at the
same time.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Perform the setting on this device that will turn the
power on/off.
3 Check the synchronization state. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• This device to perform the setting can be either RM
hybrid machine or RM client machine.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
• Make sure that the synchronization state of both ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 5
device information and AeroDR Detector correc-
tion information is indicated as [Synced]. 2 Press [Setting] on the intermediate
screen.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Device information
–– When [Non connect]:
Check the communication state with the hybrid ma-
chine.
–– When [Non sync]:
There is a difference in the device information be-
tween the hybrid and client machines. Synchronize
the information after confirming the difference on
the device information synchronization screen.
• AeroDR Panel Correction Info
–– When [Non connect]:
Check the communication state with the hybrid ma-
chine.
–– When [In sync]:
Acquisition of the AeroDR Detector correction infor-
mation from the hybrid machine is underway. Wait
for some time (it may take a maximum of approxi-
mately 20 seconds for a single AeroDR Detector).
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

213
5.7 Roaming environment settings

5 Enter the MAC address of each unit of this

device to be started up together in [PC1
MAC Address] - [PC8 MAC Address], re-
spectively.

• The [WOL(Wake ON LAN)Setting] screen is dis-

played.

3 Press [WakeOnLan ON/OFF].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• MAC address can be confirmed by executing [ipconfig
/all] in the Windows command prompt. The value dis-
played in the [Physical Address] in the ipconfig screen
is the MAC address.

4 Select [PC1 WakeOn] - [PC8 WakeOn] to

designate the number of units of this de-
vice to be started up together. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Press [OK].

• Up to 8 CS-7s can be set.

214
 5.7 Roaming environment settings

4.21 Optional installation and data

migration

4.22 Backup of the setting data of this

device

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.21 Optional installation and data migration"
first.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

To next page

Chapter 5

215
 5.8 Final operation check and delivery

Perform the final operation check and delivery.

5.8.2 Delivery
5.8.1 Exposure confirmation Deliver this device to the user.

Confirm that there is no problem with the operation by

1 Give instruction to the operators.
performing the set of exposure operation. • Provide a description of series of exposure ac-
tions.
1 Perform a series of exposures under the • Provide a description of user tool for administra-
operating conditions in the institution. tor of this device.

2 Confirm that there is no problem with the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

operation of any of the devices and ex- • Editing of Exam. Tag, etc., is performed by the admin-
posed images. istrator of this device; you should however provide op-
erators with a description of the method as needed. Be
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • sure to make the settings for adding AeroDR Detector
size to Exam. Tag when setting AeroDR 1717HQ or
• Always check the operating conditions in the institu-
AeroDR 1012HQ.
tion.
• When using this device in Aero Sync mode, explain
• Before performing exposures, be sure to obtain per-
the relationship between the exposure condition range
mission from institution management personnel.
and the X-ray sensitivity based on the result of the
• Take particular care in the following cases.
Aero Sync signal acquisition. And if it is requested ac-
–– When an order is received from a Radiology
cording to the user's case of usage, modify the X-ray
Information System (RIS).
detection level and Aero Sync button setting.
–– When sending images to a server.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Confirm that there is no abnormality, such as an over-
lap of the density patch, in the diagnostic image.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 2 Clean up to complete the installation.
• The installation of this device is now complete.

216
 Chapter
6
Installation Procedure for
This Device and REGIUS
This chapter describes the installation workflow, pre-installation checks,
installation tasks, and post installation checks of this device and REGIUS.

217
 6.1 The workflow to install this device and REGIUS

Installation operation flow of this device and REGIUS is as follows.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there are multiple units of this device (multiple exposure rooms), configure the units in the following order: Main unit
with the JM built in → backup unit with the JM built in → others. In this case, perform the operations for flow No. 17 on all
units of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 4.3 Check of bundled items

2 4.4 Check of startup

3 4.5 Setting of touch panel

4 4.6 Registration of license

5 6.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

6 6.3 System setting of this device

7 6.4 Activation of REGIUS icon

8 6.5 REGIUS setting

9 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

10 4.13 Restart of this device

6.6 Check and setting ad- 6.7 Check and setting ad-
11 justments of REGIUS justments of REGIUS
110/110HQ images 170/190/210 images

12 6.8 Connection of this device and REGIUS to the institution network

13 4.17 Peripheral devices setting

14 4.18 Activation

15 4.19 Confirmation of the version of this device

16 6.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS

17 6.10 REGIUS common environment setting

18 4.21 Optional installation and data migration

19 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

20 4.23 Final operation check and delivery

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation of the sections enclosed with the dotted line in above flow, refer to the respective sections of "Chapter 4
Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

218
 6.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

Perform the following beforehand.

6.2.2 Startup of devices
4.3 Check of bundled items
Turn on this device and REGIUS.
4.4 Check of startup

4.5 Setting of touch panel 1 Turn on the monitor, and then this device.

4.6 Registration of license 2 Turn on the power breaker of REGIUS.

3 Press the operation switch of REGIUS to

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • turn on the power.
• Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" first. • The initialization process will start. When com-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • pleted, "READY" is displayed in the message
display area.

6.2.1 Temporary connections

of devices
Temporarily connect this device and REGIUS.

1 Connect this device and REGIUS by

means of a hub or an Ethernet cable.

Chapter 6
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• At this stage, do not connect to the institution network.
• Be sure to perform settings of REGIUS on a 1-to-1 basis.
• When an optional add-in Ethernet board is installed in
this device, connect a hub or an Ethernet cable to the
standard port of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

219
 6.3 System setting of this device

Set the system of this device on the CS-7 setting

screen.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

4 Set the following items in [Institution In-

formation Setting].

Setting item Settings

[Institution Input the institution name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.
[Institution Input the institution address.
Address] Input within 1,024 characters.
[Telephone
Input the phone number.
Number]
[Department Input the department name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• For [Institution Name], [Institution Address], [Telephone
Number] and [Department Name], the values need to
3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.
be re-input because restoring [System] by restoring the
settings does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the license import is finished, the content of
license file will appear in [Institution Name], [Institution
Address], and [Telephone Number].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

220
 6.3 System setting of this device

5 Set the following items in [Device Informa- 6 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.
tion Setting].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Setting item Settings
Manufacturer name is displayed.
[Maker Name] Default setting: KONICA MINOLTA 7 Close the sub-menu screen.
This content cannot be changed.
Model name is displayed. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Model Name] Default setting: CS-7
This content cannot be changed. • For the other settings of the CS-7 setting screen, refer
to "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
[Serial Num- Serial number is displayed.
ber] This content cannot be changed. User Tool Screen".
[Station AE ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Input the station AE title.
Title]
[Console
Input the console name.
Name]
Input "1-255" as ID to specify this
device on the institution network.
[Unique ID] Change is not necessary if only 1 unit
of this device is installed.
Default setting: 1
Input the exposure room name within
[Exam Room
10 characters.
Name]
Default setting: CS-7#1
The current version of the application
of this device is displayed.

Chapter 6
Default setting: the version name of
the application installed when manu-
[Version] factured.
When the application is updated or the
version is upgraded, it is automatically
updated.
This content cannot be changed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When installing multiple units of this device, enter a
different [Unique ID] for each one starting from 1.
• For [Station AE Title], the values need to be re-input
because restoring [System] by restoring the settings
does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

221
 6.4 Activation of REGIUS icon

Turn on the connection to the target REGIUS to enable 3 Press [Close].

the configuration.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Icons for the number of purchased licenses are dis-
played. Turn on only the connection to the REGIUS to
be installed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Press the REGIUS icon.

• Connection is turned on and display of the RE-

GIUS icon will change.

4 Exit the service tool.

5 Restart this device.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Select the connection check box.

222
 6.5 REGIUS setting

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

• When there are multiple units of this device (mul-
tiple exposure rooms), configure the units in
the following order: Main unit with the JM built
in → backup unit with the JM built in → others.
"6.5.4 REGIUS setting" should be performed only us-
ing the first of this device (main JM built-in).
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6.5.1 Displaying the CR unit

setting screen
Display the CR unit setting screen to set up REGIUS.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the JM icon on the service tool

screen.

Chapter 6
• The CR unit setting screen is displayed.
• Next, set the items from the top of the screen in
order.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but the
setting screen remains displayed.
• Press [OK] to save the settings and close the screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

223
6.5 REGIUS setting

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6.5.2 Basic settings of REGIUS • [BarCodeRegistration] is the method to register the
correspondence of the CR cassette and the Exam.
Set the [Cassette Barcode Registration Method], the Tag using the barcode on the CR cassette. The use of
[Console HostName] and the [Console IP Address]. this registration method enables this device to receive
images from multiple REGIUS.

1 Set the following items in [Basic Settings]. • [AppointmentReadingTurn] is the method to register
the correspondence of the CR cassette and the Exam.
Tag when the CR cassette is loaded to the REGIUS.
This method can be selected only when this device
and REGIUS are connected as 1 to 1 and images are
received.
• [Console IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default
Gateway] will be blank when the add-in Ethernet board
is used. Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default
Setting item Settings gateway of the REGIUS connection on the console.
Select the cassette barcode registra- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Cassette tion method.
Barcode Select from [BarCodeRegistration]
Registration and [AppointmentReadingTurn].
Method] Default setting: AppointmentReading-
Turn
Input a console name (c_name) to
[Console
distinguish this device.
HostName]
Default setting: CS1-0001
Input IP address of this device to be
registered in REGIUS.
[Console IP Default setting: 192.168.20.90
Address] The set IP address is for registration
in REGIUS. The IP address of this
device is not changed.
Input subnet mask of this device to be
registered in REGIUS.
[Subnet Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Mask] The set subnet mask is for registration
in REGIUS. The subnet mask of this
device is not changed.
Input default gateway of this device to
be registered in REGIUS.
Default setting: None
[Default
The set default gateway is for registra-
Gateway]
tion in REGIUS. The default gateway
of this device is not changed.
The default gateway can be omitted.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In case of an n-to-m connection system, [BarCode
Registration] must be selected for [Cassette Barcode
Registration Method].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

224
 6.5 REGIUS setting

2 Set up the backup JM with [JM Settings]

6.5.3 JM setting as necessary.

Set JM (Job Manager).

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• JM is a PostgreSQL to mediate commands between
this device and REGIUS.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Set the main JM in [Job Manager Set-

tings].

Setting item Settings

Select when you are using a backup
[Device
JM.
Registration]
Default setting: OFF
Select to internally install the backup
JM in this device.
[Built-In] Default setting: OFF
This cannot be selected if the main JM
is internally installed.
Select to link shut down of the backup
JM to that of this device.
[Remote
Default setting: OFF
Shutdown]
Setting item Settings If the backup JM is internally installed
then this setting is fixed at "ON".
Select to internally install the main JM
[Built-In] in this device. Input the IP address of this device in
Default setting: ON which the backup JM is installed, if the
backup JM is not internally installed.
Select to link shut down of the main [IP Address] Default setting: 127.0.0.1

Chapter 6
JM to that of this device. If the backup JM is internally in-
[Remote
Default setting: ON stalled, then the IP address is fixed at
Shutdown]
If the main JM is internally installed "127.0.0.1".
then this setting is fixed at "ON".
Displays the backup JM host name.
Input the IP address of this device in [Backup JM
Default setting: JM1-0002
which the main JM is installed, if the Host Name]
Cannot be changed.
main JM is not internally installed.
[IP Address] Default setting: 127.0.0.1 Select when a JM built in of CS-3/5 is
If the main JM is internally installed [Use CS-3 JM] being used in the backup JM.
then the IP address is fixed at Default setting: OFF
"127.0.0.1".
Displays the main JM host name.
[Main JM
Default setting: JM1-0001
Host Name]
Cannot be changed.
Select when a JM built in of CS-3/5 is
[Use CS-3 JM] being used in the main JM.
Default setting: OFF

225
6.5 REGIUS setting

3 Set the port number in [CS-X Communica-

tion Setting] as required. 6.5.4 REGIUS setting

Set up REGIUS.

1 Set up [Reader IP Address] in [CR Cas-

sette Reader Settings].
Setting item Settings
Sets the port number to be used for
communicating changes in JM be-
[Port Number]
tween the consoles.
Default setting: 313133
• Input the IP address of REGIUS to be set up.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 2 Press [Download].

• When the CS-3/5 and this device are used in a mixed
environment, always set the port numbers of [System
Info.] → [CS-X Network] → [Communication Setting]
to be the same using the CS-3/5 service tool.
• When CS-3/5 and this device are used on the same • Information of the REGIUS is acquired and dis-
network without a mixed environment, set the port played in [CR Cassette Reader Settings].
numbers of [System Info.] → [CS-x Network] → [Com-
munication Setting] using the CS-3/5 service tool so
that it uses a different port number from this port num-
3 Confirm the acquired contents and set the
following items in [CR Cassette Reader
ber.
Settings] as necessary.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Setting item Settings

Select the type of REGIUS among
[REGIUS110], [REGIUS110HQ],
[Reader Type]
[REGIUS170/190], and [REGIUS210].
Default setting: REGIUS210
Input a REGIUS host name (r_name)
[Reader Host
to identify REGIUS.
Name]
Default setting: r170_0001
[Reader IP Ad- Input IP address of REGIUS.
dress] Default setting: 192.168.20.170
Input the REGIUS name to display on
[Reader the system monitor and device icon
Name] screen.
Default setting: r170_0001
Input the REGIUS serial number.
[Serial Num-
Input it as "Product code (4 digits) -
ber]
product serial number (5 digits)".
Select the REGIUS with startup and
shutdown synchronized to this device.
[Power Con-
Default setting: OFF
trol]
After registration, the saved status is
displayed on the JM.

226
 6.5 REGIUS setting

Setting item Settings 4 Press [Upload] for the set REGIUS.

Select the REGIUS with error notifica-
tion synchronized to this device.
[Error Notice] Default setting: OFF
After registration, the saved status is
displayed on the JM.
Setting this item to [ON] enables recep-
• Restart REGIUS.
tion of images resent from REGIUS.
Default setting: Differs depending on O
OWhen there are multiple REGIUS devices (n-
[Reader Type]. to-m connection)
[REGIUS 110]: ON (can
be changed)
[Image Retry]
[REGIUS 110HQ]: ON 1 Remove the REGIUS configured from the
(cannot be changed) hub, then connect another REGIUS to be
[REGIUS 170/190]: OFF
configured.
(cannot be changed)
[REGIUS 210]: ON
(cannot be changed) 2 Turn on the power breaker of REGIUS.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Press the operation switch of REGIUS to

turn on the power.
• The default setting to re-transfer images for REGIUS
• Initialization process will start. When completed,
110 varies depending on the version.
"READY" is displayed in the message display
–– Earlier than Ver.1.10: OFF
area.
–– Ver.1.10 or later: ON
• Press [Hosts] to display the edit screen for Hosts files
downloaded from REGIUS. 4 Set the IP address of REGIUS to be addi-
tionally set, and press [Download].

Chapter 6
5 Perform the same operation as the first
REGIUS.

–– Press [New] to add a new combination of host name

and IP address.
–– Press [Edit] to modify the registered Hosts files.
–– Press [Delete] to delete a registered Hosts file. To
close the Hosts file edit screen, press [X] on the top
right of the screen.
• [Basic Settings], [Job Manager Settings], and [CR
Cassette Reader Settings] of REGIUS set on the CR
unit setting screen are added automatically when up-
loading to REGIUS.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

227
6.5 REGIUS setting

6.5.5 Saving of settings

When all settings of REGIUS are completed, save the

settings and close the CR unit setting screen.

1 Press [OK] on the CR unit setting screen.

2 Close the sub-menu screen.

4.11 Setting of the IP address of this de-

vice

4.13 Restart of this device

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device"
first.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

To next page

228
 6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 110/110HQ images

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• When there are multiple units of this device (multiple • Use the largest size CR cassette on site for testing.
exposure rooms), confirm REGIUS images and adjust ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
settings using only the main unit with the JM built in.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4 Insert a CR cassette into REGIUS
110/110HQ.
• The images read from the CR cassette are dis-
6.6.1 Check of the image qual- played on the monitor.
ity of REGIUS 110/110HQ
Check the image quality and adjust the settings of RE- 5 Finish the exposure.
GIUS 110/110HQ.
6 Start the service tool.
1 Confirm that the monitor, this device, and
the REGIUS 110/110HQ are powered on. 7 Press the device icon of the REGIUS
110/110HQ to check the images.
2 For bar code registration, read the CR
cassette bar code with a bar code reader.
• For bar code registration, the CR cassette bar
code is displayed on the order.
• For reading order specification, press order to
display [#1].

3 Expose to get a solid image with a test CR

cassette.
• Expose in the following conditions.
- Voltage: 80 kV (fixed)

Chapter 6
- mAs value: 10 mAs
- Distance between plate and tube: approx. 2 m
• Expose while aligning the perpendicular direc-
tion of the tube to the vertical direction of the
CR cassette. The blue line of the CR cassette
comes below.

2m

Perpendicular • The sub-menu screen is displayed.

to the tube Vertical direction
Put blue line of the CR cassette
downward

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Align the longitudinal direction of the X-ray tube and
AeroDR Detector.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

229
6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 110/110HQ images

8 Press [Image]. 10 Select [IMG File (*.IMG)] in [Files of type].

11 Open the folder named after the date of

exposure in the [C:KonicaMinolta\Con-
sole\Data\Image] folder, select the latest
file in the folder, and press [Open].

• The file with the largest number is the latest.

• The image analysis screen is displayed.

9 Press [File] and select [Open].

• The solid image read by REGIUS is displayed.

230
 6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 110/110HQ images

12 Press [Display] and select [Density/con- 16 Enclose the entire image with a yellow
trast]. cross cursor.

• The contrast screen is displayed.

13 Press [Analysis] and select [Horizontal

Profile].

• The horizontal profile screen is displayed.

14 Adjust the slider on the contrast screen

so that the difference between [Black] and
[White] is about 400.

• The horizontal profile within the range enclosed

Chapter 6
with a cross cursor is displayed on the horizon-
tal profile screen.

17 Confirm that the horizontal profile is al-

most horizontal.
15 Adjust the [Center] slider to the position • If an image is not corrected properly, the hori-
where the unevenness of the image can zontal profile forms the shape of an arch.
be observed most clearly. Example: without proper correction

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When a large inclination and undulation in the hori-
zontal profile is observed, errors may have occurred in
REGIUS. For a solution, refer to REGIUS Installation/
Service Manual.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

231
6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 110/110HQ images

18 Press [File] and select [Exit].

6.6.2 Check of the pixel count
and the reading start posi-
tion of REGIUS 110/110HQ
Check the pixel count and the reading start position of
REGIUS 110/110HQ.

1 Read the CR cassette used for exposing a

solid image with REGIUS 110/110HQ.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 1-5 of "6.6.1 Check of
the image quality of REGIUS 110/110HQ".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Start the service tool.

• Check the read images of the other connected 3 Press the device icon for REGIUS
REGIUS with the same procedure. 110/110HQ, which checks the image, and
display the image analysis screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 7-8 of "6.6.1 Check of
the image quality of REGIUS 110/110HQ".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [File] and select [Open].

232
 6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 110/110HQ images

5 Select [IMG File (*.IMG)] in [Files of type]. 7 Select [Display] - [Display Size] - [1/1 Im-
age].

8 Read the X coordinates on the right and

6 Open the folder named after the date of left edges and the Y coordinates on the
exposure in the [C:KonicaMinolta\Con- upper and lower edges of the plate.
sole\Data\Image] folder, select the image
read in step 1, and press [Open].

• The file with the largest number is the latest.

Chapter 6
• The pixel count (the size of the fluorescent me-
dium) in the horizontal (main scanning) direction
of the image is measured.

9 Confirm that the pixel count read is within

the allowable range.
Horizontal direction Vertical direction
14" x 17" 2022 + 10 pixels 2460 + 12 pixels
14" x 14" 2022 + 10 pixels 2022 + 10 pixels

10 Select [Display] - [Display Size] - [1/1 Im-

age].

• The solid image read by REGIUS is displayed.

233
6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 110/110HQ images

11 Read the margins of the plate on the H_sync 13 Press [File] and select [Exit].
side (the left side of the image) and the top.

12 Confirm that the pixel count read is within

the allowable range.
Allowable range
H_sync side
33 ± 10 pixels
(left side of image)
Top margin 33 ± 10 pixels

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the pixel count is beyond the allowable range,
adjust the image size and position according to the
steps in "6.6.3 Adjustment of the settings of the image
size and position of REGIUS 110/110HQ".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

234
 6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 110/110HQ images

6.6.3 Adjustment of the settings

4 Correct the setting values for [H-Magnifi-
cation] and [V-Magnification] of [PLL (Im-
of the image size and posi- age size)].
tion of REGIUS 110/110HQ
When the pixel count exceeds the permissible range,
adjust the image size and position using "6.6.2 Check
of the pixel count and the reading start position of RE-
GIUS 110/110HQ".

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the device icon of the REGIUS

110/110HQ to adjust the settings of im-
ages. Measured pixel count Settings of H-Magnification
Put within the range by
More than 2022 ± 10 pixels
decreasing
3 Press [Device].
Put within the range by
Less than 2022 ± 10 pixels
increasing

Measured pixel count Settings of V-Magnification

More than 2460 ± 12 pixels Put within the range by
(2022 ± 10 for 14" x 14") decreasing
Less than 2460 ± 12 pixels Put within the range by
(2022 ± 10 for 14" x 14") increasing

• Rough estimation: By adding 20 to the horizon-

tal direction and 2 to the vertical direction, the
size of the fluorescent medium becomes 1 pixel
larger.

Chapter 6
Input the shift pixel count to be shifted in
[H-Shift] of [Image Position].

• The device parameter settings screen is dis-

• A positive number causes a right shift; a nega-
played.
tive number causes a left shift.

235
6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 110/110HQ images

6 Input the shift pixel count to be shifted in 8 Press [Exit].

[V-Shift] of [Image Position].

• A positive number causes an upward shift; a IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

negative number causes a downward shift. • About Jitter Offset and Jitter Correction
The Jitter Offset and Jitter Correction have the factory
7 Press [Send]. setting values; they are different in each optical unit.
When the replacement of optical units is conducted at
sites such as hospitals, set the Jitter Offset and Jitter
Correction attached to the optical units.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The corrected values are sent to REGIUS

110/110HQ.

236
 6.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 170/190/210 images

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 6.7.2 Check of the pixel count

• When there are multiple units of this device (multiple
and the reading start posi-
exposure rooms), confirm REGIUS images and adjust
settings using only the main unit with the JM built in.
tion of REGIUS 170/190/210
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Check the pixel count and the reading start position of
REGIUS 170/190/210.
6.7.1 Check of the image quality
of REGIUS 170/190/210 1 Read the CR cassette used for exposing a
solid image with REGIUS 170/190/210.
Check the image quality and adjust the settings of RE-
GIUS 170/190/210.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 1-5 of "6.6.1 Check of
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • the image quality of REGIUS 110/110HQ".
• For the operation, refer to "6.6.1 Check of the image ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
quality of REGIUS 110/110HQ".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 2 Start the service tool.

3 Press the device icon of the REGIUS

170/190/210 to check the images.

Chapter 6

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

237
6.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 170/190/210 images

4 Press [Image]. 6 Select [IMG File (*.IMG)] in [Files of type].

7 Open the folder named after the date of

exposure in the [C:KonicaMinolta\Con-
sole\Data\Image] folder, select the image
read in step 1, and press [Open].

• The file with the largest number is the latest.

• The image analysis screen is displayed.

5 Press [File] and select [Open].

• The solid image read by REGIUS is displayed.

238
 6.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 170/190/210 images

8 Select [Display] - [Display Size] - [1/1 Im- 12 Confirm that the margins of the plate are
age]. within the allowable range in the H_sync
side (the left side of an image).

9 Read the X coordinates on the right and

left edges and the Y coordinates on the
upper and lower edges of the plate.

• Check that the margins are 60-70 pixels.

13 Press [File] and select [Exit].

Chapter 6
• The pixel count (the size of the fluorescent me-
dium) in the horizontal (main scanning) direction
of the image is measured.

10 Confirm that the pixel count read is within

the allowable range.
• Check that pixel count is 4041-4056.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the pixel count is beyond the allowable range,
adjust the PLL value and the reading start position
according to the procedure in "6.7.3 Adjustment of
PLL value and the reading start position of REGIUS
170/190/210".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

11 Select [Display] - [Display Size] - [1/1 Im-

age].

239
6.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 170/190/210 images

6.7.3 Adjustment of PLL value

4 Correct the setting of [General (velocity
1.5x)] for "PLL".
and the reading start posi-
tion of REGIUS 170/190/210
When the pixel count exceeds the permissible range
in "6.7.2 Check of the pixel count and the reading
start position of REGIUS 170/190/210", adjust the PLL
value and the reading start position.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the device icon of the REGIUS

170/190/210 to adjust the settings of im- Measured pixel count PLL value setting

ages. More than 4056 pixels Decrease

Less than 4041 pixels Increase

3 Press [Device]. • The relation between the pixel count in the gen-
eral high-definition (87.5 μm) and the PLL value
is 1 pixel = PLL value x 1.3 (approximately).

5 Input the direction and distance to be

shifted in [Sign] and [Pixels (High)] of
[Reader Start Point].

• [Sign] + : M
 oves in the direction away from
H_sync.
[Sign] - : Moves in the direction toward H_sync.
• [Pixels (High)] :
Input the value of the pixel count to be
shifted.

• The device parameter settings screen is dis-

played.

240
 6.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 170/190/210 images

6 Press [Send].

• The corrected values are sent to REGIUS

170/190/210.

7 Press [Exit].

Chapter 6

241
 6.8 Connection of this device and REGIUS to the institution network

Install this device (in which settings have been IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

completed), REGIUS, and peripheral devices in
• When a network of two systems is used, connect the
the installation location and connect them to the
REGIUS and the unit of this device with the JM built in
institution's network hub.
to the local network hub.

1 Install this device, REGIUS, and peripheral Dedicated JM unit connection example
For 1 system
devices in the installation site. JM-only
CS-7 #1 CS-7 #2 CS-7
Printer
2 Connect this device to the institution's
network hub with an Ethernet cable.
Institution network
RIS/IDS
This device (rear) Host
REGIUS REGIUS REGIUS

For 2 systems
Hub (local network side) JM-only
CS-7 #1 CS-7 #2 CS-7
Printer

Hub (institution network side)

Local
network
Host
REGIUS REGIUS REGIUS

Optional port Standard port

(add-in Ethernet board) (built-in Ethernet) Institution network
RIS/IDS

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3 Connect REGIUS and the optional items
to the institution's network hub with an
Ethernet cables.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.17 Peripheral devices setting
• For how to install an additional Ethernet board, refer to
"14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board". 4.18 Activation
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.19 Confirmation of the version of this device
4 If there is a unit of this device used as a
dedicated JM, connect it to the institu-
tion's network hub using an Ethernet Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
cable.
• Refer to "4.17 Peripheral devices setting" first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

To next page

242
 6.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS

Store the setting data of REGIUS on this device. 3 Press [PCB].

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the device icon of the REGIUS

whose setting data you should back up.

• The REGIUS PCB screen is displayed.

4 Press [Create Reader PCB Data backup

on CS Side].

Chapter 6
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

• The setting data is sent from REGIUS to this de-

vice.

243
6.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS

5 Press [Exit].

• Make a backup of setting data for all REGIUS

devices with same procedure.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• It is not possible to press [Restore] - [Save the Reader
PCB data backed up at the CS side to Reader] when
this device has not backed up the setting data.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

244
 6.10 REGIUS common environment setting

When multiple units of this device are installed, the 5 Press the JM icon on the service tool
settings configured in "6.5 REGIUS setting" on the 1st screen.
unit of this device are shared between all units of this
device.

1 Close the service tool.

2 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Press [Reboot] on the intermediate

screen.

Chapter 6
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

4 Start the service tool.

245
6.10 REGIUS common environment setting

6 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. 8 Press [Download] on all the REGIUS.

• Information of the REGIUS is acquired and dis-

played on [CR Cassette Reader Settings].

9 Confirm the following items in all the

REGIUS.

• Enter any items that have not been set.

Setting item Settings

Select the type of REGIUS among
[REGIUS110], [REGIUS110HQ],
[Reader Type]
[REGIUS170/190], and [REGIUS210].
Default setting: REGIUS210
Input the REGIUS name to display on
[Reader Host the system monitor and device icon
Name] screen.
Default setting: r170_0001
Select the REGIUS with startup and
shutdown synchronized to this device.
[Power
Default setting: OFF
Control]
After registration, the saved status is
displayed on the JM.
Select the REGIUS with error notifica-
• The CR unit setting screen is displayed. tion synchronized to this device.
[Error Notice] Default setting: OFF
After registration, the saved status is
7 Confirm [Reader IP Address] of all the displayed on the JM.
REGIUS in [CR Cassette Reader Set- Setting this item to [ON] enables
tings]. reception of images resent from
REGIUS.
Default setting: Differs depending on
[Reader Type].
[REGIUS110]: ON (can
[Image Retry] be changed)
[REGIUS110HQ]: ON
(cannot be changed)
• Enter the IP address if it has not been set. [REGIUS170/190]: OFF
(cannot be changed)
[REGIUS210]: ON (can-
not be changed)

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The default setting to re-transfer images for REGIUS
110 varies depending on the version.
–– Earlier than Ver.1.10: OFF
–– Ver.1.10 or later: ON
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

246
 6.10 REGIUS common environment setting

10 Press [Upload] in all the REGIUS.

11 Press [OK] on the CR unit setting screen.

• Restart the REGIUS.

4.21 Optional installation and data

migration

4.22 Backup of the setting data of this

device

4.23 Final operation check and delivery

Chapter 6
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • •
• Refer to "4.21 Optional installation and data migration"
first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • •

247
248
 Chapter
7
The Mixed Installation Procedure
for This Device,
AeroDR SYSTEM and REGIUS
This chapter describes the workflow, pre-installation checks, installation tasks, and post-installation
checks for mixed installation of this device, the AeroDR SYSTEM, and REGIUS.

249
 7.1 The workflow to install this device, AeroDR SYSTEM and REGIUS

Installation operation flow of this device, the AeroDR SYSTEM and the REGIUS is as follows.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there is only 1 unit of this device (1 exposure room), the operations for flow Nos. 20 to 21 do not need to be per-
formed.
• The following are precautionary items for when there are multiple units of this device (multiple exposure rooms).
– Install this device in the following order: main JM built-in this device→backup JM built-in this device→others.
– Repeat the tasks from flow number 1 to 19 to set each unit of this device, and then perform the tasks from flow number 20 to 21.
– "6.5 REGIUS setting" for flow No. 9 should be performed using the 1st unit of this device only. The settings can be
imported for the 2nd and subsequent units of this device in "6.10 REGIUS common environment setting" for flow No. 21.
– Flow No. 15 should be performed using the 1st unit of this device only. It is not necessary to confirm REGIUS images and
adjust settings with the 2nd and subsequent units of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 4.3 Check of bundled items

2 4.4 Check of startup

3 4.5 Setting of touch panel

4 4.6 Registration of license

5 7.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

6 4.8 System setting of this device

7 7.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices and REGIUS icon

8 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

9 6.5 REGIUS setting

10 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

11 4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Setting

12 4.13 Restart of this device

13 4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

14 7.4 Connection of this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, and REGIUS to the institution network

6.6 Check and setting 6.7 Check and setting

15 adjustments of REGIUS adjustments of REGIUS
110/110HQ images 170/190/210 images

250
 7.1 The workflow to install this device, AeroDR SYSTEM and REGIUS

16 4.17 Peripheral devices setting

17 4.18 Activation

18 4.19 Confirmation of the version of this device

19 6.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS

20 4.20 Roaming environment settings

21 6.10 REGIUS common environment setting

22 4.21 Optional installation and data migration

23 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

24 4.23 Final operation check and delivery

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operations of the sections enclosed with the dotted line in above flow, refer to the respective sections of the
"Chapter 4 Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)" or "Chapter 6 Installation
Procedure for This Device and REGIUS".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 7

251
 7.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

Perform the following beforehand.

7.2.2 Startup of devices
4.3 Check of bundled items
Turn on this device, the AeroDR SYSTEM, and the
4.4 Check of startup
REGIUS.

4.5 Setting of touch panel

1 Turn on the monitor, and then this device.
4.6 Registration of license

2 Turn on the AeroDR SYSTEM.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" first. 3 Turn on the power breaker of REGIUS.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Press the operation switch of REGIUS to

turn on the power.
• The initialization process will start. When completed,
"READY" is displayed in the message display area.

7.2.1 Temporary connections

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
of devices
• Charges of the AeroDR Detector may be 0%, so
Make temporary connections of this device, the always turn on the power switch of the AeroDR
AeroDR SYSTEM and the REGIUS. Detector after connecting the AeroDR I/F Cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Connect this device and the hub to which

AeroDR SYSTEM is connected using an
Ethernet cable.

4.8 System setting of this device

2 Connect the REGIUS and the hub to which
AeroDR SYSTEM is connected using an
Ethernet cable.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.8 System setting of this device".
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• At this stage, do not connect to the institution network.
• If there are multiple AeroDR Detectors, connect them
1 by 1.
• Be sure to perform settings of REGIUS on 1-to-1
basis. To next page
• When an optional add-in Ethernet board is installed
in this device, connect a hub or a LAN cable to the
standard port of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

252
 7.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices and REGIUS icon

Turn on the connection to the AeroDR SYSTEM

related devices and the target REGIUS to perform the
settings.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Turn on the connection only for the devices to be
installed.
• The connection may be turned on already depending
on the devices. Turn off the connection for the devices
that will not be installed if they are turned on.
• Icons for the number of purchased licenses are
displayed. Turn on only the connection to the REGIUS
to be installed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices,
refer to "4.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related
devices".
• For the activation of REGIUS icon, refer to "6.4
Activation of REGIUS icon".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

6.5 REGIUS setting

4.11 S
 etting of the IP address of this

Chapter 7
device

4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync

Setting

4.13 Restart of this device

4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM" and "6.5
REGIUS setting" first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

To next page

253
 7.4 Connection of this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, and
REGIUS to the institution network

After completing the settings, install this device, the 5 If there is a unit of this device used as a
AeroDR SYSTEM, REGIUS, and peripheral devices dedicated JM, connect it to the institution's
in the installation location and connect them to the
institution's network hub. network hub using an Ethernet cable.

1 Install this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

REGIUS, and peripheral devices in the • When a network of two systems is used, connect the
installation location. REGIUS and the unit of this device with the JM built in
to the local network hub.
2 Connect this device to the network hub of
Dedicated JM unit connection example
the institution with an Ethernet cable. For 1 system
JM-only
CS-7 #1 CS-7 #2 CS-7
This device (rear)
Printer

Institution network
RIS/IDS
Host
REGIUS REGIUS REGIUS
Hub (local network side)

Hub (institution network side)

For 2 systems
JM-only
CS-7 #1 CS-7 #2 CS-7
Printer

Optional port Standard port

Local
(Add-in Ethernet (built-in Ethernet) network
board) Host
REGIUS REGIUS REGIUS

3 Connect AeroDR SYSTEM to the network

hub of the institution with an Ethernet cable.
Institution network
RIS/IDS
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When using 2 network systems, AeroDR SYSTEM
should be connected to the hub of the local network.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to install an additional Ethernet board, refer to
"14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Connect REGIUS and the optional items

to the institution's network hub using an
Ethernet cable.

254
 7.4 Connection of this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, and REGIUS to the institution network

6.6 Check and setting adjustments of

REGIUS 110/110HQ images
or
6.7 Check and setting adjustments of
REGIUS 170/190/210 images

4.17 Peripheral devices setting

4.18 Activation

4.19 Confirmation of the version of this

device

6.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS

4.20 Roaming environment settings

6.10 REGIUS common environment setting

4.21 Optional installation and data migration

4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

4.23 Final operation check and delivery

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGI-
US 110/110HQ images" and "4.17 Peripheral devices
setting" first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 7

255
256
 Chapter
8
Installation Procedure for
This Device and
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
This chapter describes the installation workflow, pre-installation checks,
installation tasks, and post installation checks of this device and
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.

257
 8.1 The workflow to install this device and REGIUS
SIGMA/SIGMA2
Installation operation flow of this device and REGIUS is as follows.

1 4.3 Check of bundled items

2 4.4 Check of startup

3 4.5 Setting of touch panel

4 4.6 Registration of license

5 8.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

6 8.3 System setting of this device

7 8.4 Activation of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 icon

8 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

9 8.5 Restart of this device

10 8.6 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 setting

11 8.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 images

12 8.8 Connection of this device to the institution network

13 4.17 Peripheral devices setting

14 4.18 Activation

15 4.19 Confirmation of the version of this device

16 8.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

17 4.21 Optional installation and data migration

18 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

19 4.23 Final operation check and delivery

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation of the sections enclosed with the dotted line in above flow, refer to the respective sections of "Chapter 4
Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

258
 8.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

Perform the following beforehand. 2 Connect this device to the temporary hub
with the Ethernet cable.
4.3 Check of bundled items
This device (rear)
4.4 Check of startup

4.5 Setting of touch panel

4.6 Registration of license

Temporary hub

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" first. Standard port
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • (built-in Ethernet)

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• At this point, do not yet connect to the institution net-
work.
• When an optional add-in Ethernet board has been
8.2.1 Temporary connections installed, connect the hub or the Ethernet cable to the

of devices device's standard port.

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Temporarily connect this device and REGIUS SIGMA/
SIGMA2.

1 Connect this device to REGIUS SIGMA/

SIGMA2 with a USB cable.

this device
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

Chapter 8

259
8.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

4 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

8.2.2 Startup of devices and then press [Control Panel].

Turn on this device and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.

1 Turn on the monitor, and then this device.

2 Turn on the power of REGIUS SIGMA/

SIGMA2.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• At this stage, as this device's cassette reader (REGIUS
SIGMA/SIGMA2) driver has not been installed, this
device's cassette reader (REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2)
is in the unconnected condition and the Error lamp is
on. Additionally, the Found New Hardware Wizard is
displayed.
• The Error lamp for the cassette reader (REGIUS
SIGMA/SIGMA2) goes out when the settings have
been completed for the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2. For 5 Press [Hardware and Sound].
the settings, refer to "8.6 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
setting".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Display the Windows taskbar.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to display the Windows taskbar, refer to
"16.10 Method to display Windows taskbar on the ser-
vice tool screen". 6 Press [Devices and Printers].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

260
 8.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

7 Double click [REGIUS SIGMA] in the [Un- 10 Press [Browse my computer for driver
specified] area. software].

11 Specify "C:\KonicaMinolta\USB_Driver"
and press [Next].
8 Select the [Hardware] tab and press [Prop-
erties].

12 Press [Install this driver software anyway].

9 Select [General] and press [Update Driv-

er].
• Once the driver has been installed, the comple-
tion screen is displayed. Chapter 8

13 Press [Close].

• The driver software update website is displayed.

261
8.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

14 Hide the Windows taskbar.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to display the Windows taskbar, refer to
"16.10 Method to display Windows taskbar on the ser-
vice tool screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

262
 8.3 System setting of this device

Set the system of this device on the CS-7 setting

screen.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

4 Set the following items in [Institution In-

formation Setting].

Setting item Settings

[Institution Input the institution name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.
[Institution Input the institution address.
Address] Input within 1,024 characters.
[Telephone
Input the phone number.
Number]
[Department Input the department name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
• For [Institution Name], [Institution Address], [Telephone
Number] and [Department Name], the values need to
3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. be re-input because restoring [System] by restoring the
settings does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Chapter 8

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the license import is finished, the content of
license file will appear in [Institution Name], [Institution
Address], and [Telephone Number].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

263
8.3 System setting of this device

5 Set the following items in [Device Informa- 6 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.
tion Setting].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Setting item Settings
Manufacturer name is displayed.
[Maker Name] Default setting: KONICA MINOLTA 7 Close the sub-menu screen.
This content cannot be changed.
Model name is displayed. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Model Name] Default setting: CS-7
This content cannot be changed. • For the other settings of the CS-7 setting screen, refer
to "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
[Serial Num- Serial number is displayed.
ber] This content cannot be changed. User Tool Screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Station AE
Input the station AE title.
Title]
[Console
Input the console name.
Name]
Input "1-255" as ID to specify this
device on the institution network.
[Unique ID] Change is not necessary if only 1 unit
of this device is installed.
Default setting: 1
Input the exposure room name within
[Exam Room
10 characters.
Name]
Default setting: CS-7#1
The current version of the application
of this device is displayed.
Default setting: the version name of
the application installed when manu-
[Version] factured.
When the application is updated or the
version is upgraded, it is automatically
updated.
This content cannot be changed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When installing multiple units of this device, enter a
different [Unique ID] for each one starting from 1.
• For [Station AE Title], the values need to be re-input
because restoring [System] by restoring the settings
does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

264
 8.4 Activation of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 icon

Turn on the connection to the target REGIUS SIGMA/ 3 Press [Close].

SIGMA2 to enable the configuration.

1 Press the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 icon.

• Connection is turned on and display of the

REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 icon will change.
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Select the connection check box.

4.11 Setting of the IP address of this de-

vice
Chapter 8

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device"
first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

To next page

265
 8.5 Restart of this device

Restart this device to enable the current settings.

1 Restart this device.

• If this device is being started up, display the
intermediate screen and press [Reboot] on the
screen.
• If the Windows desktop is displayed, restart this
device from the Windows desktop.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the following dialog is displayed after restarting
this device, press [Allow access].

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit and the

AeroDR Detector.

266
 8.6 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 setting

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

• When installing REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 in an envi-
ronment where REGIUS has been used, it is neces-
sary to initialize JM before performing this setting.
To initialize JM, display the Windows desktop from
the sub-menu screen, and run C:\KonicaMinolta\JM\
Administrator\jm_init.bat.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

8.6.1 Displaying the CR unit

setting screen
Display the CR unit setting screen to set up REGIUS
SIGMA/SIGMA2.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the JM icon on the service tool

screen.

• The CR unit setting screen is displayed.

• Next, set the items from the top of the screen in
order.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but the
setting screen remains displayed.
Chapter 8

• Press [OK] to save the settings and close the screen.

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

267
8.6 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 setting

8.6.2 Basic settings of REGIUS 8.6.3 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

SIGMA/SIGMA2 setting
Set the [Console IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and the Set up REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.
[Default Gateway].
1 Confirm the acquired contents and set the
1 Set the following items in [Basic Settings]. following items in [CR Cassette Reader
Settings] as necessary.

Setting item Settings

Setting item Settings
Select the type of REGIUS SIGMA/
Input IP address of this device to SIGMA2 among [REGIUS Σ] or
[Reader Type]
be registered in REGIUS SIGMA/ [REGIUS ΣⅡ].
SIGMA2. Default setting: [REGIUS Σ]
[Console IP
Default setting: 192.168.20.90
Address] Input the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
The set IP address is for registration
[Reader name to display on the system moni-
in REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2. The IP
Name] tor and device icon screen.
address of this device is not changed.
Default setting: r170_0001
Input subnet mask of this device to
Input the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
be registered in REGIUS SIGMA/
[Serial Num- serial number.
SIGMA2.
ber] Input it as "Product code (4 digits) -
[Subnet Default setting: 255.255.255.0
product serial number (5 digits)".
Mask] The set subnet mask is for registra-
tion in REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.
The subnet mask of this device is not
changed.
Input default gateway of this device
to be registered in REGIUS SIGMA/
SIGMA2.
Default setting: None
[Default
The set default gateway is for registra-
Gateway]
tion in REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2. The
default gateway of this device is not
changed.
The default gateway can be omitted.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• [Console IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default
Gateway] will be blank when the add-in Ethernet board
is used. Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway of the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 connection
on the console.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

268
 8.6 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 setting

8.6.4 Saving of settings

When all settings of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 are

completed, save the settings and close the CR unit
setting screen.

1 Press [OK] on the CR unit setting screen.

2 Close the sub-menu screen.

3 Restart this device.

• The cassette reader (REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2)
Error lamp goes out.

Chapter 8

269
 8.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS SIGMA/
SIGMA2 images

When the connected cassette reader is the REGIUS 2 Start the service tool.
SIGMA/SIGMA2, use the following procedure to mea-
sure the number of pixels for the main scanning direc-
3 Press the device icon of the REGIUS
tion and to change the image position and size when
SIGMA/SIGMA2 to check the images.
outside the reference value range.

8.7.1 Check of the pixel count and

the reading start position of
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
Using the cassette reader, read the CR cassette used
to take the solid image, and measure the number of
pixels in the main scanning direction.

It is possible to read images from the service tool. The

following is an explanation of the method for reading
images with the service tool. To read images using
the conventional method, refer to steps 1 through
5 of "6.6.1 Check of the image quality of REGIUS
110/110HQ", and, once read, continue from step 8 of
this section.

1 Expose a solid image using a test CR

cassette (half or full).
• Expose in the following conditions.
–– Voltage: 80kV (fixed)
–– mAs value: 10mAs
–– Distance between plate and tube: approx. 2m
• Expose while aligning the perpendicular direc-
tion of the tube to the vertical direction of the CR • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
cassette. Set so that the blue corner blocks on
the CR cassette are down.

Vertical
direction of
the CR
cassette

2m

Perpendicular
to the tube
Put blue corner block downward

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Align the longitudinal direction of the X-ray tube and
AeroDR Detector.
• Use the largest size CR cassette on site for testing.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

270
 8.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 images

4 Press [Device]. 6 Select [175μm] from [Resolution] and

press [Start].

7 Insert a CR cassette into REGIUS SIGMA/

SIGMA2.
• A message saying "Please remove cassette."
will appear.

8 Remove the CR cassette from REGIUS

SIGMA/SIGMA2.

9 Press [Image].
• [Read area setting] screen is displayed.

5 Press [ReadCassette].

Chapter 8

• [Settings for scanning] screen is displayed.

271
8.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 images

12 Select the image data read with the ser-

vice tool and press [Open].

• The image analysis screen is displayed.

• The confirmation screen is displayed.
10 Press [File] and select [Open]

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the reader number is "12345678901234", im-
ages are saved in locations like the one noted below.
C:\Konicaminolta\kim\Server\ReaderSetting\Prog\
Pegasus\\<board number>\Images\Image
* A board number would be "r170-0001_
000000000000001", etc.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The [Open] dialog is displayed.
13 Press [Yes].
11 Enter "*.img" for [File name] and press the
[Enter] key on the keyboard.

14 Display the contents of the folder for the

image data taken and saved with REGIUS
• The contents of the image data folder read and SIGMA/SIGMA2.
saved with REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 service
tool are displayed.

272
 8.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 images

15 Select the image data file header file and 18 Select [Display] - [Display Size] - [1/1 Image].
press [Open].

19 Read the size of the margin on the H_sync

side of the plate.

• The read image is displayed in the image analy-

sis screen.

16 Read the X coordinates on the right and

left edges and the Y coordinates on the
upper and lower edges of the plate.

20 Confirm that the read pixel count is within

the allowable range.
• Check that pixel count is 26 - 40.
• The H_sync side of the place differs, according
to the image read method, in the following ways.

• The pixel count (the size of the fluorescent me- Image Read Method H_sync side of the plate
dium) in the horizontal (main scanning) direction When read with the ser-
Left side of image
of the image is measured. vice tools
When read with this device Right side of image

17
Chapter 8

Confirm that the pixel count read is within

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
the allowable range.
• Horizontal direction: 2023 ± 5pixels • When the pixel count is beyond the allowable range,
• Vertical direction: 2460 ± 5pixels adjust the image size and position according to the
steps in "8.7.2 Adjustment of the settings of the image
size and position of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

273
8.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 images

21 Press [File] and select [Exit].

8.7.2 Adjustment of the settings of
the image size and position
of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
When the pixel count exceeds the permissible range,
adjust the image size and position using "8.7.1 Check
of the pixel count and the reading start position of RE-
GIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2".

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the device icon of the REGIUS

SIGMA/SIGMA2 to adjust the settings of
images.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

274
 8.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 images

3 Press [Device]. 4 Correct the setting values for [Horizontal

magnification ratio] and [Vertical magnifi-
cation ratio] of [Image size].

Measured pixel count Settings of H-Magnification

Put within the range by
More than 2028pixels
decreasing
Put within the range by
Less than 2018pixels
increasing

Measured pixel count Settings of V-Magnification

Put within the range by
More than 2565pixels
decreasing
Put within the range by
Less than 2455pixels
increasing

• [Read area setting] screen is displayed.

5 Input the shift pixel count to be shifted in
[Horizontal shift] of [Reader start posi-
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • tion].
• Read using 175μm when checking the number of im-
ages, image position and so on.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• A positive number causes a right shift; a nega-

tive number causes a left shift.
Chapter 8

275
8.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 images

6 Input the shift pixel count to be shifted in

[Vertical shift] of [Reader start position].

• A positive number causes an upward shift; a

negative number causes a downward shift.

7 Press [Send].

• The corrected values are sent to REGIUS

SIGMA/SIGMA2.

8 Press [Exit].

276
 8.8 Connection of this device to the institution network

Install this device (in which settings have been

completed), REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2, and peripheral 4.17 Peripheral devices setting
devices in the installation location and connect them to
the institution's network hub. 4.18 Activation

1 Install this device, REGIUS SIGMA/ 4.19 Confirmation of the version of this device
SIGMA2, and peripheral devices in the
installation site.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Connect this device to the institution's • Refer to "4.17 Peripheral devices setting" first.
network hub with an Ethernet cable. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

This device (rear)

To next page

Hub (local network side)

Hub (institution network side)

Optional port Standard port

(add-in Ethernet board) (built-in Ethernet)

3 Connect this device to REGIUS SIGMA/

SIGMA2 with a USB cable.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to install an additional Ethernet board, refer to
"14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Chapter 8

277
 8.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

Store the setting data of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 on

this device.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the device icon of the REGIUS

SIGMA/SIGMA2 whose setting data you
should back up. • [PBC] screen is displayed.

4 Press the [Reader→PC] to back up the

settings data to the device's designated
save location.

• The setting data is sent from REGIUS SIGMA/

SIGMA2 to this device.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Press the [Reader→Media] to specify the settings data
backup location.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Press [PCB].

–– The device's data, such as unnevenness calibration,

sensitivity correction data, XY points, and fixed
device magnification, is saved as backup data to
the specified location.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

278
 8.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

5 Press [Exit].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• It is not possible to press [PC→Reader] when this de-
vice has not backed up the setting data.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4.21 Optional installation and data

migration

4.22 Backup of the setting data of this

device

4.23 Final operation check and delivery

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.21 Optional installation and data migration"
first.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Chapter 8

279
280
 Chapter
9
The Mixed Installation
Procedure for This Device,
AeroDR SYSTEM and
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
This chapter describes the workflow, pre-installation checks, installation tasks, and post-installation
checks for mixed installation of this device, the AeroDR SYSTEM, and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.

281
 9.1 The workflow to install this device, AeroDR SYSTEM
and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

Installation operation flow of this device, the AeroDR SYSTEM and the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 is as follows.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there is only 1 unit of this device (1 exposure room), the operations for flow Nos. 20 to 21 do not need to be performed.
• When there are multiple devices (exam rooms), repeat the tasks from flow number 1 to 19 to set each unit of this device,
and then perform the tasks from flow number 20 to 21.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • •

1 4.3 Check of bundled items

16 4.17 Peripheral devices setting

2 4.4 Check of startup

17 4.18 Activation

3 4.5 Setting of touch panel

4.19 Confirmation of the version of this
18 device
4 4.6 Registration of license
8.9 Backup of the setting data of RE-
19 GIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
9.2 Temporary connections and startup
5 of devices
20 4.20 Roaming environment settings
6 4.8 System setting of this device
4.21 Optional installation and data mi-
21 gration
9.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM
7 related devices and REGIUS SIGMA/
SIGMA2 icon 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this
22 device
8 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM
23 4.23 Final operation check and delivery

9 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

10 8.6 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 setting

4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync

11 Setting

12 4.13 Restart of this device

13 4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

9.4 Connection of this device, AeroDR

14 SYSTEM, and REGIUS SIGMA/
SIGMA2 to the institution network

8.7 Check and setting adjustments of

15 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 images

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operations of the sections enclosed with the dotted line in above flow, refer to the respective sections of the "Chapter
4 Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)" or "Chapter 8 Installation Procedure for
This Device and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • •

282
 9.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

Perform the following beforehand.

9.2.2 Startup of devices
4.3 Check of bundled items
Turn on this device, the AeroDR SYSTEM, and the
4.4 Check of startup
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.

4.5 Setting of touch panel

1 Turn on the monitor, and then this device.
4.6 Registration of license

2 Turn on the AeroDR SYSTEM.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" first. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Charges of the AeroDR Detector may be 0%, so
always turn on the power switch of the AeroDR
Detector after connecting the AeroDR I/F Cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Turn on the power of REGIUS SIGMA/

9.2.1 Temporary connections SIGMA2.
of devices
Make temporary connections of this device, the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
AeroDR SYSTEM and the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2. • At this stage, as this device's cassette reader (REGIUS
SIGMA/SIGMA2) driver has not been installed, this
device's cassette reader (REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2)
1 Connect this device and the hub to which is in the unconnected condition and the Error lamp is
AeroDR SYSTEM is connected using an on. Additionally, the Found New Hardware Wizard is
Ethernet cable. displayed.
• The Error lamp for the cassette reader (REGIUS
SIGMA/SIGMA2) goes out when the settings have
2 Connect this device to REGIUS SIGMA/ been completed for the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2. For
SIGMA2 with a USB cable. the settings, refer to "8.6 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
setting".
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• At this stage, do not connect to the institution network.
• If there are multiple AeroDR Detectors, connect them 4 Display the Windows taskbar.
1 by 1.
• Be sure to perform settings of REGIUS SIGMA/
SIGMA2 on 1-to-1 basis. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When an optional add-in Ethernet board is installed • For how to display the Windows taskbar, refer to
in this device, connect a hub or a LAN cable to the "16.10 Method to display Windows taskbar on the ser-
standard port of this device. vice tool screen".
Chapter 9

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

283
9.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

5 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu, 8 Double click [REGIUS SIGMA] in the [Un-
and then press [Control Panel]. specified] area.

9 Select the [Hardware] tab and press [Prop-

erties].

6 Press [Hardware and Sound].

7 Press [Devices and Printers].

10 Select [General] and press [Update Driv-

er].

• The driver software update website is displayed.

284
 9.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

11 Press [Browse my computer for driver 15 Hide the Windows taskbar.

software].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For how to display the Windows taskbar, refer to
"16.10 Method to display Windows taskbar on the ser-
vice tool screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4.8 System setting of this device

12 Specify "C:\KonicaMinolta\usbdriver" and
press [Next].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.8 System setting of this device".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

To next page

13 Press [Install this driver software anyway].

• Once the driver has been installed, the comple-

tion screen is displayed.

14 Press [Close].
Chapter 9

285
 9.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices and
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 icon

Turn on the connection to the AeroDR SYSTEM

related devices and the target REGIUS SIGMA/
SIGMA2 to perform the settings.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Turn on the connection only for the devices to be
installed.
• The connection may be turned on already depending
on the devices. Turn off the connection for the devices
that will not be installed if they are turned on.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices,
refer to "4.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related
devices".
• For the activation of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 icon,
refer to "8.4 Activation of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
icon".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.11 S
 etting of the IP address of this
device

8.6 REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 setting

4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync

Setting

4.13 Restart of this device

4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM" and "8.6
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 setting" first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

To next page

286
 9.4 Connection of this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, and
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 to the institution network

After completing the settings, install this device, the

AeroDR SYSTEM, REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2, and
peripheral devices in the installation location and
connect them to the institution's network hub.
8.7 Check and setting adjustments of
1 Install this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 images
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2, and peripheral
devices in the installation location. 4.17 Peripheral devices setting

4.18 Activation
2 Connect this device to the network hub of
the institution with an Ethernet cable. 4.19 Confirmation of the version of this
device
This device (rear)
8.9 Backup of the setting data of
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

4.20 Roaming environment settings

4.21 Optional installation and data migration

Hub (local network side)
4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

Hub (institution network side)

4.23 Final operation check and delivery

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "8.7 Check and setting adjustments of
Optional port Standard port REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 images" and "4.17
(Add-in Ethernet (built-in Ethernet) Peripheral devices setting" first.
board) ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Connect AeroDR SYSTEM to the network

hub of the institution with an Ethernet cable.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When using 2 network systems, AeroDR SYSTEM
should be connected to the hub of the local network.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to install an additional Ethernet board, refer to
"14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Connect this device to REGIUS SIGMA/

SIGMA2 with a USB cable.
Chapter 9

287
288
 Chapter
10
Installation Procedure for This Device and
AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection)
This chapter describes the installation of this device and AeroDR Potable RF Unit (S-SRM connection).

* Not used in Japan.

289
 10.1 Connection example of this device and
AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection)

This section describes the installation procedure based on the connection example (Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/
AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/AeroDR Portable RF Unit/CS-7 Wired connection/S-
SRM (XIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger) as follows.

OO Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/

AeroDR Portable RF Unit/CS-7 Wired connection/S-SRM (XIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger)

AeroDR Detector registration side(exposure room side hub)

AeroDR Hub
I/F Cable

Power Hub
source AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Interface Unit

Portable X-ray device side

Hub

AeroDR Portable
RF Kit

AeroDR Detector
Access
Power
point
CS-7 Power

XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable
Portable X-ray device
Serial/hardware connection AeroDR Portable RF Unit

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To connect this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit using wireless connection, connect them using wired connection
first, and then modify the setting to wireless connection referring to "15.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this device".
In addition, after setting the wireless connection, refer to "4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Setting" and synchronize
the time of this device with that of the AeroDR access point.
• An exposure switch may be available on the AeroDR Portable RF Kit.
• Depending on the AeroDR Portable RF Unit, an ESC board may be installed instead of an XGIF board.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

290
 10.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
(S-SRM connection)

The installation operating process for this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection) is as follows.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection) is used at 1 place (exposure room, patient's room, etc.) for exposure,
flow number 19 is not necessary.
• If there are multiple units of this device, repeat the tasks from flow number 1 to 18 to set each exposure room, then perform
the tasks of flow number 19 to 23.
• For the operations of the sections enclosed with the dotted line in following flow, refer to the respective sections of "Chapter
4 Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)". Exchange the terms as following at that
time.
–– "this device" → "this device for portable"
–– "AeroDR Generator Interface Unit" → "AeroDR Portable RF Unit"
–– "AeroDR Access Point"→ "AeroDR Access Point built-in in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit"
• When the RIS/HOST and AeroDR SYSTEM use the same network segment, refer to "16.5 How to change the network set-
tings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection), refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Ser-
vice Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 10

291
10.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection)

The workflow to install AeroDR Portable

RF Unit (S-SRM connection)
1 10.3 Check of bundled items 1 8.4 Installation of respective devices

2 10.4 Check of startup 2 8.5 Temporary connection and startup checks

3 10.5 Hardware setting of this device

4 4.6 Registration of license

10.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR

5 Portable RF Unit

6 10.7 System setting of this device 3 8.6 Setting up the CS-7

7 10.8 Setting of user tool

10.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM

8 related devices

9 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.11 Setting of the IP address of this

10 device

11 4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Setting

8.7 Charging of the AeroDR Detector and
4
12 4.13 Restart of this device confirmation of its wireless status

13 10.11 Delay time setting 5 8.8 Delay time setting

8.9 Exposure test and AeroDR Detector

14 10.12 Analysis of AeroDR Detector 6 analysis

10.13 Deployment to the installation

15 locations and connection to the 7 8.10 Placement in the installation locations
institution network

16 4.17 Peripheral devices setting 8.11 Installation in Portable X-ray

8 diagnostic device
17 4.18 Activation

8.12 Connection of the Ethernet cable

18
4.19 Confirmation of the version of this 9 and the power cables
device

19 4.20 Roaming environment settings

20 10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

21 4.21 Optional installation and data migration

22 10.15 Network configuration for each area

4.22 Backup of the setting data of this

23 device

24 10.16 Final operation check and delivery 10 8.13 Final operation check and delivery

292
 10.3 Check of bundled items

After unpacking, confirm all components are included.

Name of product Quantity Remarks

Main body of this 1
device
Power cable 1
AC adapter 1
Battery pack 1
Other 1 set Digitizer pen, attached
documents, etc.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The components might be different depending on the
delivery time and the destination.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 10

293
 10.4 Check of startup

Before the actual connection, make sure that this de-

vice starts properly. 10.4.2 Check of startup

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Start up this device and check that the initial screen is
• When multiple units of this device are installed, attach displayed.
the accessories and confirm the startup of each device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Turn on this device.
• Start up messages are displayed sequentially.
10.4.1 Attachment of • Internal system initialization is performed while
the system start up screen is displayed.
accessories • Upon completion of initialization, the initial
Attach the accessories to this device. screen is displayed, and this device is ready for
operation.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • The initial screen

• For details, refer to the operation manual of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

O
OAttaching the accessories

1 If an accessory such as a digitizer pen

has been included, attach it to this device.

O
OAttachment of the battery pack

1 Flip over this device.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
2 Hold the battery pack so that it is directed
• The software version is displayed on the system
as shown in the figure, and insert the bat- startup screen. Initialization will be completed a few
tery pack in the direction indicated by the minutes after turning on the power.
arrow until it clicks. • A progress bar is displayed on the system startup screen,
indicating the status of the system initialization process.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not plug in the power cable before the completion of
all of the connections.
• The specifications of this device might be different de-
pending on the date of delivery and the destination.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

294
 10.5 Hardware setting of this device

10.5.1 Attachment of external

4 Connect this device and the external CD/
DVD drive with a USB cable.
CD/DVD drive • Driver is automatically installed.

A CD/DVD drive is required for setting or update dur-

ing the portable X-ray device operation. If a CD/DVD 5 Restart this device.
drive is not equipped on this device, attach an external
CD/DVD drive to this device with following procedure.
10.5.2 Adjusting the position
Recommended parts and conditions for of the touch panel
the external CD/DVD drive
Item Conditions Adjust the touch panel coordinates, if it is out of align-
OS Windows 7 compliant ment.
Language Support for the installed OS
USB USB2.0
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Drive The CD-ROM can be read.
Reading speed 16 speed or higher • For the Adjusting the position of the touch panel, refer
to "4.5.2 Adjusting the position of the touch panel".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• BUFFALO DVSM-PN58U2V is used as an example
here. The operation might be different depending on
the device used. For details, refer to the operation
manual of the device used.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.6 Registration of license
1 Make sure that this device is powered on.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Display the intermediate screen.
• Refer to "4.6 Registration of license".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
To next page
3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
diate screen. Chapter 10

295
 10.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR Portable RF Unit

10.6.1 Temporary connections of 10.6.2 Startup of respective

AeroDR Portable RF Unit devices
Make temporary connections of this device, AeroDR Turn on this device, the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and
Portable RF Unit and all peripheral devices. all peripheral devices.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Turn on this device.

• At this stage, do not connect to the institution network.
• If there are multiple AeroDR Detectors, connect them 2 Turn on the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and
1 by 1. all peripheral devices.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Connect the USB cable of the hub for por-
• Charges of the AeroDR Detector may be 0%, so al-
table X-ray device side to this device.
ways turn on the power switch of the AeroDR Detector
after charging.
2 Connect the Ethernet cable to be connect- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ed to the hub for portable X-ray device
side to this device.

3 Connect the Ethernet cable connected to

this device to the hub for the portable X-
ray device side.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the temporary connections of devices, refer to
"AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Connect the Ethernet cables (2 cables)

connected to the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
to the hub for the portable X-ray device.

5 Connect the Ethernet cable to be connect-

ed to the hub for the portable X-ray device
side to the hub for the AeroDR Detector
registration side.

6 Connect the Ethernet cable connected to

the hub for the AeroDR Detector registra-
tion side to the hub for the portable X-ray
device side.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When an optional USB wired LAN adapter is installed
in this device, connect a hub or an Ethernet cable to
the standard port of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

296
 10.7 System setting of this device

Set the system of this device on the CS-7 setting

screen.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

4 Set the following items in [Institution In-

formation Setting].

Setting item Settings

[Institution Input the institution name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.
[Institution Input the institution address.
Address] Input within 1,024 characters.
[Telephone
Input the phone number.
Number]
[Department Input the department name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
• For [Institution Name], [Institution Address], [Telephone
Number] and [Department Name], the values need to
3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. be re-input because restoring [System] by restoring the
settings does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the license import is finished, the content of
license file will appear in [Institution Name], [Institution
Address], and [Telephone Number].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Chapter 10

297
10.7 System setting of this device

5 Set the following items in [Device Informa- 6 Set the following item of [S-SRM X-ray Ex-
tion Setting]. posure sync setting].

Setting item Settings

Select the setting from among [CR
[S-SRM X-ray mode], [DR mode] and [Manual mode]
Exposure in [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync
sync mode] mode].
Setting item Settings Default setting: [CR mode]
Manufacturer name is displayed. [Display the
[Maker Name] Default setting: KONICA MINOLTA message that Select this if the message indicating
This content cannot be changed. the X-ray device is not synchronized
X-ray device is
Model name is displayed. appears while selecting the CR expo-
non-interlock
[Model Name] Default setting: CS-7 sure conditions in [Manual mode].
mode when
This content cannot be changed. This item cannot be selected in [CR
CR Exam is mode] or [DR mode].
[Serial Num- Serial number is displayed. selected]
ber] This content cannot be changed.
[Station AE
Input the station AE title. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Title]
[Console • To set the [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync mode] setting
Input the console name.
name] to [CR mode] or [DR mode], leave No. 3 of the ECB
Input "1-255" as ID to specify this board dip switch "SW2" of the AeroDR Generator In-
device on the institution network. terface Unit off.
[Unique ID] Change is not necessary if only 1 unit
of this device is installed. • To set the [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync mode] setting
Default setting: 1 to [Manual mode], switch on No. 3 of the ECB board
Input the exposure room name within dip switch "SW2" of the AeroDR Generator Interface
[Exam Room
10 characters. Unit.
Name]
Default setting: CS-7 #1 ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
The current version of the application
of this device is displayed.
Default setting: the version name of
7 Select [Enable Portable Mode] in [Portable
the application installed when manu- Setting].
[Version] factured.
When the application is updated or the
version is upgraded, it is automatically
updated.
This content cannot be changed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change the [Unique ID] from "1" here. Change
8 Set the following item in [Monitor Set-
tings].
this setting only when multiple exposure rooms are
setup and it is necessary to setup the roaming envi-
ronment. For details, refer to "4.20 Roaming environ-
ment settings".
• For [Station AE Title], the values need to be re-input
because restoring [System] by restoring the settings
does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Setting item Settings
Select from [Panasonic.CF-C1],
[Panasonic.CF-C2_b80], [Panasonic.
[Monitor] CF-C2_b100], [ADVANTECH.FPM-
5171] or [Poindus.VariPPC819].
Default setting: EIZO.FlexScanT1751
* [Poindus.VariPPC819] is not used in Japan.

298
 10.7 System setting of this device

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In normal circumstances, select [Panasonic.CF-C2_
b80]. When [Panasonic.CF-C2_b100] is selected,
explain to the user that since brightness is increased,
power consumption will also increase.
• When [Panasonic.CF-C2_b100] is selected, set the
monitor brightness to 100%.
• If using a 17" monitor using AeroDR Portable CS7 17D
Mount Kit G1, etc., select [ADVANTECH.FPM-5171].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

9 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

• The settings are stored, and the screen is

closed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

10 Close the sub-menu screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the other settings of the CS-7 setting screen, refer
to "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
User Tool Screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 10

299
 10.8 Setting of user tool

Perform necessary settings for the portable X-ray de-

vice operation on the user tool screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Setting is unnecessary unless directed by the user.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Select the [User Tool] tab.

• The screen setting tool screen is displayed.

3 Set the following item in [Focus move].

Setting item Settings

[Focus Naviga-
Select [Do not move].
tion Event]

4 Set the following item in [Control Panel].

• The user tool screen is displayed.

2 Press [Setting], and press [Screen Set- Setting item Settings

ting]. [Defaults
display panel
Select [QUICK].
on Selecting
Exposed Image]

300
 10.8 Setting of user tool

5 Press [OK] on the screen setting tool

screen.

• The settings are stored, and the screen is

closed.

Chapter 10

301
 10.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices

Turn on the connection to the AeroDR SYSTEM re- 2 Select the connection check box.
lated devices to perform the settings.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Turn on the connection only for the devices to be in-
stalled.
• The connection may be turned on already depending
on the devices. Turn off the connection for the devices
that will not be installed if it is turned on.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Press the device icon.

3 Press [Close].

• At this point, icon of the AeroDR Access Point

built-in in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit will be
explained as an example.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

• Connection is turned on and display of the device
icon will change.

302
 10.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices

4 Press the icon of the device that will be set us-

ing the same procedure, then press the con-
nection checkbox of the sub-menu screen.

AeroDR I/F Cable icon

AeroDR Battery Charger icon

AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To install multiple AeroDR related devices, turn on the
connection of the device icons for the number of the
devices to be installed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the AeroDR Detector, set up the connection to this
Chapter 10

device through the AeroDR unit setting screen.

• AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon is displayed in-
stead of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit icon during the
AeroDR portable RF Unit operation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

303
 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

10.10.1 Flow chart for setting up the network

Follow the following flow chart when setting up the network for this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM.
This example describes the setting procedure to configure all AeroDR SYSTEM related devices. There is no need to
set up devices that will not be installed.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting the network should be made with respect to each exposure room. If there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the
same settings for each exposure room.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

OODevice icon screen OOSub-menu screen

Press the RM icon.

10.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting screen

Press [Setting].

OOAeroDR unit setting screen

10.10.3 RM setting

10.10.4 Exposure room setting

10.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting

10.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration

10.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector communication

10.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting

10.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting

10.10.10 AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting

10.10.11 AeroDR Detector setting

10.10.12 Saving of settings

304
 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

10.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR

2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

unit setting screen

Display the AeroDR unit setting screen to setup the
AeroDR SYSTEM.

1 Press the RM icon.

• The AeroDR unit setting screen is displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Press [OK] to save the settings and close the screen.
• The displayed name for the RM icon is that set in [Ex- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
posure Room Name] in [Exposure Room Setting].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Chapter 10

305
10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

10.10.3 RM setting 10.10.4 Exposure room setting

Set up the RM (Roaming Manager). Set up the shot related method and stop coordination
with the exposure room.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• RM is a system to perform management and roaming 1 Set the following items in [Exposure
of the AeroDR Detector. Room Setting].
• RM manages the correspondence (registration) be-
tween this device and AeroDR Detectors and enables
the roaming (change of the exposure room where the
AeroDR Detector is used). It also manages the cor-
rection data of the respective AeroDR Detectors and
delivers it to this device at the roaming destination. Setting item Settings
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
The exposure room name is displayed.
[Exposure The name set in the [Exposure Room
1 Set the following items in [RM setting]. Room Name] Name] in the CS-7 setting screen is
displayed.
Select [SRM].
[Sync Mode]
Default setting: SRM
Select existence of stop coordination.
When [ON] is selected, the termina-
[Shutdown tion of this device causes the AeroDR
Coordination] Detector assigned to the exposure
Setting item Settings room to shut down.
Select [Client] or [Hybrid] for the RM Default setting: [OFF]
[Mode] operation mode.
Default setting: Hybrid
Change is not required if the default IP IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
address of this device is to be used. • Do not change [Exposure Room Name].
If the IP address of this device is to be
[IP Address • Select [SRM] as [Sync Mode], because S-SRM set-
changed in "4.11 Setting of the IP ad-
of RM hybrid tings are made on the ECB board in the AeroDR Por-
dress of this device", enter that value.
machine] table RF Unit.
Default setting: 192.168.20.90
Loop-back address (127.0.0.1) cannot • Set up [Shutdown Coordination] in accordance with
be used. the operation status of the facility. It is necessary to
[IP Address turn on the power of the AeroDR Detector every time it
of RM client Setting is not performed here. is used since it will not link with startup.
machine] ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change [Hybrid] for the [Mode] setting here.
Change this setting only when multiple exposure
rooms are setup and it is necessary to setup the roam-
ing environment. For details, refer to "4.20 Roaming
environment settings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

306
 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

10.10.5 AeroDR Access Point

setting
Set this device and the access point built-in in the
AeroDR Portable RF Unit. Perform the setup of the ac-
cess point built-in in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit first,
and then the wireless connection related setup on this
device. • The setting screen is displayed.
• Pressing an item in the menu tree on the left
side of the screen will display the corresponding
1 Press [Moxa] in [Access Point Setting].
setting items on the right part of the screen.
• After setting each item, press [Submit] on each
setting screen to apply the settings.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To enable the settings, steps 19 and 20 need to be
performed.
• It will be timed out and return to Login screen if there
is no input for 5 minutes in the setting screen, and
login will be required again. The contents of settings
for which [Submit] is pressed are stored even if it has
timed out.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Press [Network Settings] under [Basic

Settings] and set up the network for the
following items.
• The setting tool will open in a Web browser and
the login screen will be displayed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When a popup message regarding Acrobat is dis-
played, choose [Not enable]. Setting item Settings
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [IP configura- Select [Static].
tion] Default setting: Static
2 Input the user name and password on the Set according to the institution envi-
login screen, then press [Login]. [IP address] ronment.
Default setting: 192.168.20.241
• The default user name is "admin", and the pass-
word is "root". Set according to the institution envi-
[Subnet mask] ronment.
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Set according to the institution envi-
[Gateway] ronment.
Default setting: 0.0.0.0

4 Press [Submit].
Chapter 10

307
10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Press [Operation Mode] under [Wireless 9 Set the radio frequency band, channel,
Settings] and set the wireless operation and SSID with the following items.
mode with the following items.

Setting item Settings

[Wireless en- Select [Enable]. Setting item Settings
able] Default setting: Disable Select [A].
[Operation Select [AP]. Default setting: A
[RF type]
mode] Default setting: AP Use only IEEE802.11a for the AeroDR
Access Point.
Set the channel following the results
[Available
6 Press [Submit]. channel list
of the preliminary survey.
When the channel is DFS, an asterisk
* indicates
(*) will be displayed with the channel.
DFS channel]
Default setting: :36-5.18G
7 Press [Basic Wireless Settings] of [WLAN]
Input the unique SSID within 31 alpha-
of [Wireless Settings]. numeric characters according to the
[SSID]
institution environment.
Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
8 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen. [SSID broad- Select [Enable].
cast] Default setting: Enable

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When installing multiple AeroDR Portable RF Units,
enter a unique [SSID] for each AeroDR Portable RF
Unit to be installed regardless of settings of the roam-
ing environment.
(Example)
AeroDR Portable RF Unit 1: KMMG_AeroDR_1
AeroDR Portable RF Unit 2: KMMG_AeroDR_2
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

10 Press [Submit].

11 Press [WLAN Security Settings] of [WLAN]

of [Wireless Settings].

12 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen.

308
 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

13 Set the security with the following items. 17 Press the following message that is dis-
played on the upper right portion of the
Web browser window.

Setting item Settings

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Security Select [WPA2].
mode] Default setting: WPA2 • If you changed the settings, save the settings and
Select [Personal]. restart. The modified settings will not be applied if the
[WPA type] system is not restarted.
Default setting: Personal
[Encryption Select [AES]. • When changes have been made to the settings, a
method] Default setting: AES message will blink on the upper right portion of the
Input a passphrase with 37 or more screen. To save the setting and activate it, press this
alphanumeric characters. message.
[Passphrase]
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4F9ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19

18 Press [Save and Restart].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• We recommend that the passphrase be used without
changing the default setting. When changing the pass-
phrase, combine alphanumeric characters that are dif-
ficult to guess.
• When installing multiple AeroDR Portable RF Units,
enter the same passphrase for each AeroDR Access • The settings will be saved and the AeroDR Ac-
Point. cess Point will restart.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Restart is completed when a beeping sound
rings after approximately 15 seconds.
14 Press [Submit].
19 Press [Close] on the browser to close the
15 Press [Advanced Wireless Settings] under browser window.
[WLAN] of [Wireless Settings] and set the
radio output with the following items. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the IP address with a different segment from the
IP address of this device is set, the browser window
may not be correctly displayed. However, the set-
tings will be performed normally. Press [Close] on the
browser.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Setting item Settings

[Transmis- Select [Full].
sion power] Default setting: Full
Select [Enable].
[WMM]
Default setting: Enable

16 Press [Submit].
Chapter 10

309
10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

20 Go back to the AeroDR unit setting screen

10.10.6 AeroDR Detector cor-
and set the following items in [Access
Point Setting]. rection data registration
Register the AeroDR Detector's correction data in this
device.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Information required for network settings, such as IP
address of the AeroDR Detector, is stored in the cor-
Setting item Settings rection data.
Enter the AeroDR Portable RF Unit's ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
internal AeroDR access point serial
number.
[Serial - Japan: product code (4 digits: A6F9) 1 Insert the media provided with AeroDR
Number] — product serial number (5 digits) Detector to the CD/DVD drive.
- Other countries: product code (4 dig-
its: A5DW) — product serial number
(5 digits) 2 Press [Add] of [Correction Data Setting].
Enter the name of the AeroDR Access
[Display Point in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
Name] using 10 characters or less.
Default setting: Wireless A
Input the same [IP Address] as the
[IP Address] one in step 3.
Default setting: 192.168.20.241
Enter the same [SSID] as the one in
[SSID] step 9 within 32 ASCII characters.
Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
Enter the same [Passphrase] as the
one in step 13 within 64 ASCII charac-
[Pass Phrase] ters.
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt
4F9ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The serial number of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is
affixed to the main body of the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit.
• Enter the following product code.
–– Japan: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable RF
Access Point's "A6F9".
–– Other countries: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable
RF Access Point's "A5DW". • The [Browse For Folder] screen is displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

310
 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

3 Select the folder indicating the serial num-

10.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR
ber of the AeroDR detector, and press [OK].
Detector communication
Confirm the communication between this device and
AeroDR Detector.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not change the IP address for the AeroDR Detec-
tor here. Change the IP address of AeroDR Detector
in "10.10.11 AeroDR Detector setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Turn on the AeroDR Detector with the

correction data registered, and connect
to either the AeroDR I/F Cable or AeroDR
Battery Charger.
• (Example) A20H-00001
2 Press [Download] in the [AeroDR Detector
Setting].

• Information of [Wired IP Address], [Wireless IP

Address], [Default Gateway] and [Subnet Mask]
are acquired.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The serial number of AeroDR Detector will be • If the serial numbers of the correction data CD used in
registered and [Serial Number] of [AeroDR De- "10.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration"
tector Setting] will be updated. and the AeroDR Detector do not match, the "The serial
number of the AeroDR Detector does not match the

4 Remove the media provided with the serial number of correction data. Please confirm the
combination of the AeroDR Detector and a CD related
AeroDR Detector from the CD/DVD drive.
to this correction data." message is displayed. In this
case, download information again using the correct
correction data CD.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Set [Display Name].

Chapter 10

• Enter the AeroDR Detector name within 10 char-

acters.
• Change is not required if the default display
name of the AeroDR Detector is to be used.

311
10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
10.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable
• [Display Name] is also used as the AeroDR Detector
setting
name in the application bar. Since only the first 3 char-
acters will be displayed in the application bar, assign a Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable.
name that is easy to recognize.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Upload]. • AeroDR detector to be used is necessary to set up

the AeroDR I/F Cable.
• When there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables, connect
and set up each cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable is con-

nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit.

2 Confirm that the AeroDR detector to be

used is powered on.

3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-

DR I/F Cable.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data
registered in "10.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction
• The setting information is uploaded to the Aero-
data registration".
DR Detector.
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device
before this operation, the sub-ID of that device may
be displayed. When you press [Download] at the next
step, the device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable to be
set up is obtained.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Download] in [I/F Cable Setting].

• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is displayed.

312
 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used, O

OWhen there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables
and press [OK].
1 Turn on the connection for the device icon
for the second AeroDR I/F Cable.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to "10.9 Activation of AeroDR
SYSTEM related devices".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable with the same

procedure as the first AeroDR I/F Cable.

• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable is

automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed
in the [Device Sub ID] of [I/F Cable Setting].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
sub-ID by this method.
• For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6 Set the following items in [I/F Cable Setting].

Setting item Settings

Read the bar code and get the serial
number of the AeroDR I/F Cable.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number]
the form of product code (4 digits)
-serial number (5 digits).
Input the I/F Cable name within 10
[Display
characters.
Name]
Default setting: IF Cable

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The serial number of the AeroDR I/F Cable is de-
scribed on the tag attached to it.
Chapter 10

• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-

er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

313
10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

10.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger

4 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used,
and press [OK].
setting
Set up when using the AeroDR Battery Charger to reg-
ister and charge the AeroDR Detector.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• AeroDR Detector to be used is necessary to set up the
AeroDR Battery Charger for registering. The AeroDR
Detector is not necessary to set up the AeroDR Bat-
tery Charger just for charging, so steps 1 - 4 are not
necessary.
• If there are multiple AeroDR Battery Chargers for reg-
istering, connect and set up each device.
• Even if the AeroDR Battery Charger is used only for
charging, setting is still necessary for device registration.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR Detector to be • The device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Char-
used is powered on. ger is automatically retrieved, and it will be dis-
played in the [Device Sub ID] of [AeroDR Bat-
tery Charger].
2 Insert the AeroDR Detector into the Aero-
DR Battery Charger.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data
vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
registered in "10.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
data registration". sub-ID by this method.
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device • For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
before this operation, the sub-ID of that device may plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
format.
be displayed. When you press [Download] at the next
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
step, the device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger
to be set up is obtained.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Set the following items in [AeroDR Battery
Charger].
3 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Battery
Charger].

Setting item Settings

Read the bar code and get the serial
number of AeroDR Battery Charger.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number] the form of product code (4 digits)
-serial number (5 digits).
Input the Battery Charger name within
[Display
10 characters.
Name] Default setting: Cradle
Select [For Charging Only] or [For
Registration/Charging] for the Battery
[Type]
Charger type.
Default setting: For Registration/Charging

• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-

played.

314
 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 10.10.10 AeroDR Portable RF

• Set up of the dip switch on the AeroDR Battery Char-
ger is required when [For Charging Only] is selected
Unit setting
in [Type]. Refer to "Installation of the AeroDR Battery
Charger for charging only" in "AeroDR SYSTEM In-
Set up the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
stallation/Service Manual".
• If [For Charging Only] is selected as [Type], the Aero-
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DR Detector is not registered to an exposure room,
because no notification is sent to the RM when the • The setting for the AeroDR Portable RF Unit should be
AeroDR Detector is mounted on the AeroDR Battery performed in the setting screen of the AeroDR Gen-
Charger. erator Interface Unit.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Set the following items in [XG BOX Set-

• The serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger is ting].
described on the sticker on side of the main body.
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

O
OWhen there are multiple AeroDR Battery
Chargers

1 Turn on the connection for the device icon

for the second AeroDR Battery Charger. Setting item Settings
Input the AeroDR Portable RF Units
[Display
name within 10 characters.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Name]
Default setting: XG Box
• For the operation, refer to "10.9 Activation of AeroDR
Input the IP address of the AeroDR
SYSTEM related devices". [IP Address] Portable RF Units.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Default setting: 192.168.20.221
Input the address of the default gate-
2 Set up the AeroDR Battery Charger with [Default Gate- way.
way] Input is not required when no gateway
the same procedure as the first AeroDR
exists on the network.
Battery Charger.
Input the subnet mask of the selected
[Subnet
device.
Mask]
Default setting: 255.255.255.0

[WS] Select [Use WS1 Only].

The measured average value of delay

time from the time when the first stage
of the exposure switch is pressed to
the start of exposure, measured in
[Timer]
"10.11.1 Prep-Delay time measure-
ment", is displayed.
It is also possible to change the delay
time by manual input.
Chapter 10

315
10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

2 Press [Upload]. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• The serial number of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is
affixed to the main body of the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit.
• Enter the following product code.
–– Japan: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable RF XG's
"A6FC".
–– Other countries: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable
RF XG's "A5DX".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Set the following items of [WS Mapping].

Setting item Settings

• Settings will be uploaded to the AeroDR Por- [Wall Stand] Setting is not performed.
table RF Unit. [Bucky Table] Setting is not performed.
[DR Cassette] Assign DR cassette to the WS1.
IMPORTANT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting changes may take 5 Set the following items of [Restricted
up to a maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
AeroDR panel sending ConsoleReady].
• When the IP address with a different segment from
the IP address of this device is set, the "Processing"
screen may not disappear, although settings are be-
ing uploaded to the AeroDR Portable RF Unit. After
waiting for 30 seconds or more, press [Cancel] then
perform ping from the Windows command prompt and
confirm that there is no response from the IP address
before the change.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Setting items Settings
Set up the existence of the exposure
3 Input the serial number of the AeroDR control against the AeroDR Detector
Portable RF Unit (AeroDR Generator Inter- connected to the WS that is setup
as DR cassette operation in [WS
face Unit part). Mapping].
Exposure control will not be performed
if [No Control] is selected.
[Limitation
Only the AeroDR Detector selected in
Type]
the list can be used for exposure on
that WS when [Select WS enable to
send] is selected.
The AeroDR Detector selected in the
list can not be used for exposure on
that WS when [Select WS disable to
send] is selected.
The names of the registered AeroDR
• Enter the product code (4 digits) and product
[AeroDR Detector Detectors are displayed.
serial number (5 digits). 1~n] Select the AeroDR Detector to be con-
–– Product code for Japan: A6FC trolled.
–– Product code for other countries: A5DX

316
 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

Setting item Settings

10.10.11 AeroDR Detector setting The AeroDR Detector's serial num-
[Serial ber which was acquired in "10.10.6
Number] AeroDR Detector correction data
Set up the AeroDR Detector with communication con-
registration" will be displayed.
firmed in "10.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector
Input the IP address for the wired con-
communication". [Wired IP Ad-
nection of the AeroDR Detector.
Setting is not required if the default network setting of dress]
Default setting: 192.168.20.201
the AeroDR is to be used.
Input the IP address for the wireless
[Wireless IP
connection of the AeroDR Detector.
Address]
Default setting: 192.168.20.211
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Input the default gateway of the Aero-
• The AeroDR Detector's serial number which was ac- [Default Gate-
DR Detector.
quired in "10.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data way]
Default setting: 0.0.0.0
registration" will be displayed in [Serial Number].
Input the subnet mask of the AeroDR
Confirm that the serial number displayed is identical [Subnet
Detector.
to the serial number on the identification label(sticker) Mask]
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
attached to the AeroDR Detector before setting up.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Press [Upload].
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If connected to AeroDR Battery Charger only, replace
the word "AeroDR I/F Cable" with "AeroDR Battery
Charger" as you read.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable is con-

nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit.

2 Confirm that the AeroDR detector to be

used is powered on.

3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-

DR I/F Cable.

4 Set the following items of [AeroDR Detec-

tor Setting] according to the institution
environment.
• The settings are uploaded to the AeroDR Detec-
tor.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Detector setting changes may take up to a
maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
• When the IP address with a different segment from
the IP address of this device is set, the "Processing"
screen may not disappear, although settings are be-
ing uploaded to the AeroDR Detector. After waiting for
30 seconds or more, press [Cancel] and perform ping
from the Windows command prompt and confirm that
there is no response from the IP address before the
change.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Chapter 10

317
10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

10.10.13 AeroDR 1012HQ

10.10.12 Saving of settings
Settings
When all settings of AeroDR SYSTEM are completed,
Configure the following settings when using the
save the settings and close the AeroDR unit setting
screen. AeroDR 1012HQ.

1 Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting 1 Press the CS-7 icon.
screen.

• The settings will be registered in this device's

RM as local settings.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The warning message is displayed when the "Pro-
cessing" screen is closed by pressing [Cancel] during
an upload, but this does not indicate a problem.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Close the sub-menu screen.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

318
 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Close the sub-menu screen.

4.11 Setting of the IP address of this

device

4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync

Setting
• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.
4.13 Restart of this device

3 Configure the following [Image Size Set-

ting]. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device"
first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Setting item Settings

Select the reading im-
age size when using the
[10"x12" Read Image
AeroDR 1012HQ from To next page
Size at the time of using
[According to Aero DR
the AeroDR Cassette]
cassette] and [According
to Regius Cassette].
Select the HOST output
[10"x12" HOST Output image size when using
Image Size at the time the AeroDR 1012HQ from
of using the AeroDR [According to Aero DR
Cassette] cassette] and [According
to Regius Cassette].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Be sure to select [According to AeroDR Cassette] for
the [10"x12" Read Image Size at the time of using the
AeroDR Cassette] setting, when using the AeroDR
1012HQ.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

• The settings are stored, and the screen is closed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Chapter 10

319
 10.11 Delay time setting

The method of Prep-Delay time setting is as follows. 3 Press [Delay Measurement] on the sub-
menu screen.
10.11.1 Prep-Delay time
measurement
Measure the delay time (Prep-Delay time) from press-
ing the first stage of the exposure switch until the start
of exposure.

1 Connect the X-ray sensor connection jig to

the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the connection of the X-ray sensor connection jig,
refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manu-
al".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon.

• The delay time measurement screen is dis-

played.

4 Set the portable X-ray device to non-inter-

lock.

5 Set the exposure condition of the portable

X-ray device to a voltage of 80kVp and a
mAs value near 50mAs.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To enable a longer exposure time and make it easier
to check with the LED light on the jig, using a high
mAs value as a standard condition is recommended. It
does not present a problem if, due to conditions on the
portable X-ray device, measurements are performed
using a lower mAs value than the recommended
value.
• Since the tube current cannot be set separately for the
• The sub-menu screen is displayed. portable X-ray device, the mAs value is used as an
exposure condition.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

320
 10.11 Delay time setting

6 Press [Start] in [Prep-Delay Time Measure- 9 Press [End].

ment].

• Displays the first, second and third measure-

• The message "Prep-Delay Time is measuring. ment values and the first through third measure-
Please Press ExposureSW1●SW2 Simultane- ment averages.
ously and Expose. After the Exposure is re-
peated 3 times please press [End] button" is 10 Confirm the first through the third mea-
displayed. surement averages.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• If an error message is displayed when [Start] or • Confirm that there are no substantial differences in
[End] are pressed, check that the connection with the the measured values from first to third measurements.
AeroDR Portable RF Unit was made. Perform steps 6 through 9 again if the differences are
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • substantially large.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7 Press the first stage and second stage of
the exposure switch at the same time to 11 Press [Save].
perform the first exposure.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Release the exposure switch after the exposure sound
disappears.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

8 Repeat step 7 twice for a total exposure of

three times.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Wait for the rotor of the portable X-ray device to stop,
and then perform the next exposure.
• If exposure could not be completed, press [Cancel]
Chapter 10

and restart from step 6.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• A confirmation message is displayed.

321
10.11 Delay time setting

12 Press [Yes].

• Saves the measured delay time and displays it

in units of 0.1 sec on a [Timer] of [XG BOX Set-
ting] in the AeroDR unit setting screen. If you
want to manually change the delay time, do so
using the [Timer] of [XG BOX Setting] in the
AeroDR unit setting screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the changing of the delay time, refer to "10.10.10
AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

13 Press [Close].

• Remove the X-ray sensor connection jig from

the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.

322
 10.12 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

Perform the AeroDR Detector analysis.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Analyze the AeroDR Detector with the portable X-ray device during the portable X-ray device operation.
• When using both an X-ray device in a general exposure room and the portable X-ray device, analyze AeroDR Detector with
the X-ray device in the general exposure room with SRM or S-SRM link.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the analysis method of AeroDR Detector, refer to "4.15 Analysis of AeroDR Detector".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Roam the AeroDR Detector to

the device with SRM or S-SRM

Place the AeroDR Detector on

the floor, etc., and make the
distance from the X-ray focus
(SID) to 2m

Expose raw images under the

calibration condition of 0.1 mR,
1.0 mR and 3.0 mR.

FAIL
Carry out calibration. (first time)
Unevenness analysis
200 sec 60 sec

FAIL(first time) PASS

Expose raw images under the

calibration condition of 0.1 mR, Defect analysis
1.0 mR and 3.0 mR. 80 sec

PASS

Unevenness analysis FAIL(second time)

60 sec

PASS

Defect analysis FAIL(second time) Back up the complete set of

80 sec data for the analysis result

PASS

Handle the problem by referring

Existence of CS-7 NO
with Aero Sync link to "Fixing Problems" in "AeroDR
SYSTEM Installation/Service
Manual".
YES

Roam AeroDR Detector to CS-7

with Aero Sync link

Carry out the calibration on this * The calibration is not necessary

device that is linked with Aero Carry out calibration.* when it has already been completed.
Sync.

Complete AeroDR Detector

analysis

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When performing calibration with an Aero Sync-linked this device, check whether the AeroDR Detector subject to the analy-
sis is Aero Sync-linked or not.
Chapter 10

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

323
 10.13 Deployment to the installation locations and
connection to the institution network

10.13.1 Deployment of
respective devices to
the installation locations
Install the respective devices in the installation loca-
tion.

1 Install this device, AeroDR Portable RF

Unit, and peripheral devices in the instal-
lation location.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the deployment of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit,
refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manu-
al".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

10.13.2 Connection to the

institution network
Connect this device and the institution network.
Do not perform this task if not connecting with institu-
tion network.

1 Connect the Ethernet cable of the institu-

tion network to the hub that is connected
to this device and the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit.

4.17 Peripheral devices setting

4.18 Activation

4.19 Confirmation of the version of this device

4.20 Roaming environment settings

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.17 Peripheral devices setting" first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

To next page

324
 10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

Set this device and the channel of the AeroDR Access

Point built in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit. 10.14.1 Preset Channel Setting
This operation is not required when channel switching
of the AeroDR Access Point is not performed.

1 Start the service tool.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set the channel presets before setting the AeroDR Ac- 2 Press the AeroDR Access Point icon.
cess Point channel settings.
• It is necessary to set the channel preset settings be-
fore setting the AeroDR Access Point automatic set-
tings.
• If the tab is switched with the channel presets not set,
the following warning message is displayed.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The channel for the AeroDR Access Point can be set
either automatically or manually.
–– In the automatic setting of the AeroDR Access Point,
the system automatically surveys the signal in the
location where automatic selection can be executed
and selects an appropriate channel based on the
results to set the AeroDR Access Point accordingly.
When the system is operated in location where the
signal environment may change, an appropriate
channel can be selected in response to any change.
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
–– In the manual setting of the AeroDR Access Point,
the channels to be used are registered in advance,
and a channel is selected to set the AeroDR Access 3 Press [Channel Setting] in the sub-menu
Point during operation. screen.
This method is used when the channel to be used in
the operating location is fixed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Chapter 10

325
10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

Setting item Settings

Select a country name for the oper-
ating location. The channel presets
[Country]
usable in the selected country are dis-
played in the [Channel List].
Select the channel to use. A check-
mark is added to the selected channel.
When the channel is DFS, an asterisk
[Channel List] (*) is displayed in [DFS].
* When a preset is selected, chan-
nels other than DFS channels are all
selected in the displayed list.
• The AP Channel setting tool screen is displayed.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
4 Press the [Preset Channel] tab.
• In the channels of [Channel List], the code on the left
side of the hyphen indicates the channel and the code
on the right side of the hyphen indicates the frequency.
Example: In 36-5.18G, 36 is the channel and 5.18G is
the frequency.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Press [Save].

• The Preset Channel setting screen is displayed.

5 Set the following items.

• A confirmation message is displayed.

7 Press [OK].

326
 10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

8 Press [Close]. 3 Press [Channel Setting] in the sub-menu

screen.

10.14.2 AeroDR Access Point

auto setting

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the AeroDR Access Point icon.

• The AP Channel setting tool screen is displayed.

4 Press the [Auto Channel] tab.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

Chapter 10

• The Auto Channel setting screen is displayed.

327
10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

5 Set the following items. 7 Press [OK].

Setting item Settings 8 Press [Close].

Select a network of this device to survey
the signal. When there are several options,
[Survey Net- follow "15.3.1 Setting of the IP address
work Interface] of the built-in wireless LAN" to check the
name of the built-in wireless network and
select it.
Select a connection mode of this de-
vice and the AeroDR Access Point in
accordance with operating state.
[Wired]: This device and the AeroDR
[Connection
Access Point are connected by a
Mode]
wired connection
[Wireless]: This device and the
AeroDR Access Point are connected by 9 Confirm the [Auto CH] icon is displayed
a wireless connection on the system monitor screen - [Portable]
screen.
6 Press [Save].

• A confirmation message is displayed.

328
 10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

10.14.3 AeroDR Access Point

manual setting

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the AeroDR Access Point icon.

• The AP Channel setting tool screen is displayed.

4 Press the [ManualChannel] tab.

• The Manual Channel setting screen is displayed.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

5 Press [New].
3 Press [Channel Setting] in the sub-menu
screen.
Chapter 10

329
10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

7 Select a channel you want to use from

[Item], and press [>] to move the channel
to [Selected Item].

• A new Manual Channel setting screen is dis-

played.

6 Set the following items.

• When multiple channels are moved to [Selected
Item], the channel on the top of the list is prior to
others. To change the priority, select the channel
you want to change and press [Up] or [Down] to
change the list order.

Setting item Settings

Management number of the Access
[Setting No.] Point information is displayed.
This content cannot be changed.
[Access Point Input the Access Point information
Name] name.
Select the channel information set to 8 Press [Regist].
the AeroDR Access Point.
• TRUE: Channel information that is set
[Enabled]
• FALSE: Channel information that is
not set
Default setting: [FALSE]
Select the location to set Access Point
information.
[Location] Select from [Ward], [Floor], [X-Ray
room], or [Others].
Default setting: [Ward]
Select the serial number of the AeroDR
[AP S/N]
Access Point.
Select the radio frequency band of the
[Radio
Access Point information. Currently,
frequency
only [IEEE802.11a] can be selected.
band]
Default setting: [IEEE802.11a]

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If there are multiple Access Point information items,
make sure to select [TRUE] for the Access Point in-
formation that is the same as the channel set to the • A confirmation message is displayed.
AeroDR Access Point. Once [TRUE] is selected for
one, all other channel information items are changed
to [FALSE].
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

330
 10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

9 Press [OK]. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• Each item that is set will be displayed on the system
monitor screen - [Portable] screen.

(a)

(c)
(b)
(d)

(a) The AeroDR Access Point where [TRUE] is se-

lected in [Enabled] is displayed.
(b) The AeroDR Access Point where [FALSE] is se-
lected in [Enabled] is displayed.
(c) The location where the AeroDR Access Point select-
ed in [Type] is installed is displayed with an icon.
(d) The AeroDR Access Point name entered in [Ac-
cess Point Name] is displayed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The set AeroDR Access Point information is dis-
played.

10 Press [Close].

Chapter 10

331
10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

10.14.4 Addition of the AeroDR

3 Press [New].

Access Point information

Add the AeroDR Access Point information to be con-
nected with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.

1 Display the AP Channel setting tool

screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 1-3 of "10.14.3 Aero-
DR Access Point manual setting".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press the [ManualChannel] tab.

• A new Manual Channel setting screen is dis-

played.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Even in cases where there is AeroDR Access Point in-
formation whose settings have not been saved, if [New]
is pressed, contents in the process of setting will be
cleared, and the default settings are restored. Perform
the operation after saving the information setting that
is not saved.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Set the AeroDR Access Point.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The Manual Channel setting screen is displayed. • For the operation, refer to steps 5-10 of "10.14.3 Aero-
DR Access Point manual setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

332
 10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

10.14.5 Change of the AeroDR

Access Point information
Change the AeroDR Access Point information to be
connected with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.

1 Display the AP Channel setting tool

screen.
• The setting is displayed on [Selected Access
Point].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 1-3 of "10.14.3 Aero-
DR Access Point manual setting".
4 Input or select the items to be changed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press the [ManualChannel] tab.

5 Press [Regist].

• The Manual Channel setting screen is displayed.

3 Select the AeroDR Access Point whose

information you want to change.

• A message screen to confirm overwriting is dis-

played.
Chapter 10

333
10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

6 Press [OK].
10.14.6 Deletion of the AeroDR
Access Point information
Delete the AeroDR Access Point information to be con-
nected with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.

1 Display the AP Channel setting tool

screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 1-3 of "10.14.3
AeroDR Access Point manual setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Press the [ManualChannel] tab.

• The setting will be changed.

7 Press [Close].

• The Manual Channel setting screen is displayed.

3 Select the AeroDR Access Point that is to

be deleted.

334
 10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

4 Press [Delete]. 6 Press [Close].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The [Setting No.] of the deleted AeroDR access point
will be vacant.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• A message screen to confirm deleting is dis- 4.21 Optional installation and data
played. migration

5 Press [OK].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.21 Optional installation and data migra-
tion".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

To next page

• The AeroDR access point information is deleted.

Chapter 10

335
 10.15 Network configuration for each area

• When the network segment of the institution differs by individual floor, the area-specific networks can be set by fol-
lowing procedures.
Set the network settings of the network adapter to connect to the institution network, and the IP address of the con-
nected device (RIS/HOST).
• Set the area-specific network settings by the static IP address.
• The network adapter can be set for both wired/wireless.
• When the network segment of the institution is not divided, area-specific network switching is not required and this
operation is not needed.

Setting example for wireless connection

Institution
Access point (3) CS-7 area setting (3)
• Segment: 192.168.23.xxx • IP address: 192.168.23.90
Institution • SSID: AP3 • AE title: KM_CS7_U0003
3rd floor • SSID: AP3
• Other party's device (RIS/HOST)
- IP address: Other party's IP address on same segment
- AE title: Other party's AE title on same segment

RIS/HOST

Move to a different floor

Change CS-7 area

CS-7 area setting (2)

Access point (2) • IP address: 192.168.22.90
• Segment: 192.168.22.xxx • AE title: KM_CS7_U0002
Institution • SSID: AP2 • SSID: AP2
2nd floor • Other party's device (RIS/HOST)
- IP address: Other party's IP address on same segment
- AE title: Other party's AE title on same segment

RIS/HOST

Move to a different floor

Change CS-7 area

CS-7 area setting (1)

Access point (1) • IP address: 192.168.21.90
• Segment: 192.168.21.xxx • AE title: KM_CS7_U0001
Institution • SSID: AP1 • SSID: AP1
1st floor • Other party's device (RIS/HOST)
- IP address: Other party's IP address on same segment
- AE title: Other party's AE title on same segment

RIS/HOST

* There is no SSID setting for the CS-7 area setting when connecting via a wired connection.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This function can only be set when [Portable Setting] of the CS-7 setting screen is enabled.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

336
 10.15 Network configuration for each area

10.15.1 Creating a new area

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

4 Press [Add] of [Area setting].

• The area name can now be entered.

5 Enter an area name of 10 characters or

less.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

• A new area is created.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To create multiple areas, repeat steps 4 and 5.
• To change the area name, press [Edit] or right click on
the area name to switch to a state in which the area
name can be changed and change the name.
• When multiple areas are used, the display order of the
areas can be changed using [Up]/[Down].
Chapter 10

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

337
10.15 Network configuration for each area

10.15.2 Network configuration

3 Set the following items in [Unit].

for each area

1 Press [Setting] for the network adaptor to

be set.

Setting item Settings

The device to be configured is dis-
[Unit]
played.
Select to switch the network configu-
ration of the device to the configura-
tion shown here when the area is
changed.
• The setting screen is displayed. Do not use the same device as the
[switching
switching target for multiple network
target]
adaptors.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Do not set a device whose RIS ser-
• Give the network adapter an easy-to-recognize name vice class is [Detached] to a switching
so that you can easily select the adapter to be config- target.
The default setting is [OFF].
ured.
• You can modify the name of network adapters on the Enter the IP address of this device.
[IP address] Can only be set in devices for which
control panel of Windows.
[switching target] is [ON].
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
Enter the AE title for this device.
Enter the item with 16 or less charac-
2 Set the following items in [CS-7]. [AE title] ters.
Can only be set in devices for which
[switching target] is [ON].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The procedure for copying already-configured network
settings from an area into another area is as follows.
(a) Press [Copy] on the setting screen for the original
area.
Setting item Settings
[IP address] Enter the IP address of this device.
[Subnet (a)
Enter the subnet mask of this device.
mask]
Enter the default gateway address of
[Default gate- this device.
way] If there is no gateway on the network,
enter "0.0.0.0".
Enter the AE title of this device.
[AE title] Enter the item with 16 or less charac- (b) Select the copy destination area in the [Copy net-
ters. work configuration of for each area] dialog.
Enter the SSID of the wireless LAN (c) Press [Copy].
access point.
[SSID] Enter 32 or less characters.
* [SSID] is displayed only when the
wireless LAN adapter is used. (b)
(c)

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

338
 10.15 Network configuration for each area

4 Press [OK]. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• Pressing [Cancel] discards the entered content and
returns to the CS-7 setting screen.
• On completing the settings, [Network configuration
switching] of the configured network adaptor changes
from [Not configured] to [Configured].

• The setting state of the network adaptor and the set-

ting screen display button change according to the
state as follows.
Setting screen
display button

Setting state

Setting screen display button

[Setting]: Displays the setting screen. Displayed when
• The configuration is stored and the CS-7 setting the setting state is [Not configured] or [Configured in-
screen is displayed. completely].
• After selecting another area, set the network con- [Unsetting]: Temporarily deletes the completed net-
figuration for each area by repeating steps 1 to 4. working settings. Displayed when the setting state is
[Configured].
Setting state
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
[Not configured]: Displayed when no applicable network
• You should be aware that all the settings are cleared if adapters have been set for the area-specific network.
you press [Clear]. [Configured]: Displayed when the applicable network
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • adapters have been set correctly for the area-specific
network. Switching the area also switches the appli-
cable network adapter settings.
[Configured incompletely]: Displayed when the area-
specific network settings are being edited. The appli-
cable network adapter settings are not applied when
the area is switched.
• Pressing [Unsetting] will result in the settings being
[Configured incompletely], and the button will change
to [Setting]. Pressing the [Setting] button again will
display the setting screen, and allow the settings to be
edited.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

• The settings are stored and the screen is closed.

6 Close the sub-menu screen.

Chapter 10

339
10.15 Network configuration for each area

10.15.3 Initial area selection 10.15.4 Other settings

1 Restart this device. Deletion of the area for which settings have
been configured
2 Confirm that the device is connected to • To delete a configured area, select the area to be
the network. deleted in [Area setting] and press [Delete].
• You can connect the device to any network that
is set on the area selection screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When wired connection is used in the area where the
device is used, connect it with a hub.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Change of the configured settings for the

3 Press [>>] on the initial screen of this de-
area-specific network
vice, then press the area selection button
for which [AreaNotSet] is displayed. • To change the configured area-specific network
settings, press [Unsetting] for the network adaptor
that is to be changed. The [Configured] display will
change to [Configured incompletely], and [Unsetting]
will change to [Setting]. Press [Setting] and change
the settings.

4 Press the button of the area that is now

connected.

4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.22 Backup of the setting data of this de-
vice".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 Confirm that the name of the selected area

is displayed on the area selection button. To next page

340
 10.16 Final operation check and delivery

Perform the final operation check and delivery.

10.16.2 Delivery
10.16.1 Exposure confirmation Deliver this device to the user.

Confirm that there is no problem with the operation by

1 Give instruction to the operators.
performing the set of exposure operation. • Provide a description of series of exposure ac-
tions.
1 Perform a series of exposures under the • Provide a description of User tool for administra-
operating conditions in the institution. tor of this device.

2 Confirm that there is no problem with the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

operation of any of the devices and ex- • Editing of Exam. Tag, etc., is performed by the admin-
posed images. istrator of this device; you should however provide op-
erators with a description of the method as needed. Be
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • sure to make the settings for adding AeroDR Detector
size to Exam. Tag when setting AeroDR 1717HQ or
• Always check the operating conditions in the institu-
AeroDR 1012HQ.
tion.
• When it is required to change the wireless channel,
• Before performing exposures, be sure to obtain per-
describe the location to change the wireless.
mission from institution management personnel.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Take particular care in the following cases.
–– When an order is received from a Radiology
Information System (RIS). 2 Clean up to complete the installation.
–– When sending images to a server. • The installation of this device is now completed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 10

341
342
 Chapter
11
Installation Procedure for This
Device and AeroDR Portable
RF Unit (SRM connection)
This chapter describes the installation of this device and AeroDR Potable RF Unit (SRM connection).

343
 11.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR
Portable RF Unit (SRM connection)

This section describes the installation procedure based on the connection example (Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/
AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/AeroDR Portable RF Unit/CS-7 Wired Connection/
SRM (XGIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger) as follows.

OO Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/

AeroDR Portable RF Unit/CS-7 Wired Connection/SRM (XGIF board)/AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Detector registration side(exposure room side hub)

AeroDR Hub
I/F Cable

Power Hub
source AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Interface Unit

Portable X-ray device side

Hub

AeroDR Detector

Access
Power point
CS-7 Power

XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable
Portable X-ray device
Serial/hardware connection AeroDR Portable RF Unit

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To connect this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit using wireless connection, connect them using wired connection
first, and then modify the setting to wireless connection referring to "15.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this device".
In addition, after setting the wireless connection, refer to "4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Setting" and synchronize
the time of this device with that of the AeroDR access point.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

344
 11.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
(SRM connection)

The installation operating process for this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit (SRM connection) is as follows.

Chapter 11
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is used at 1 place (exposure room, patient's room, etc.) for exposure, flow number 18 is not
necessary.
• If there are multiple units of this device, repeat the tasks from flow number 1 to 17 to set each exposure room, then perform
the tasks of flow number 18 to 22.
• For the operation enclosed with the dotted line in the following flow chart, refer to the respective sections in the "Chapter 4
Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)" and "Chapter 10 Installation Procedure for
This Device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection)" Exchange the terms as following at that time.
–– "this device" → "this device for portable"
–– "AeroDR Generator Interface Unit" → "AeroDR Portable RF Unit"
–– "AeroDR Access Point"→ "AeroDR Access Point built-in in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit"
• When the RIS/HOST and AeroDR SYSTEM use the same network segment, refer to "16.5 How to change the network set-
tings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR Portable RF Unit (SRM connection), refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service
Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

345
11.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit (SRM connection)

The workflow to install AeroDR Portable

RF Unit (SRM connection)
1 10.3 Check of bundled items 1 9.4 Installation of respective devices

2 10.4 Check of startup 2 9.5 Temporary connection and startup checks

3 10.5 Hardware setting of this device

4 4.6 Registration of license

10.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR

5 Portable RF Unit

3 9.6 Setting up the CS-7

6 11.3 System setting of this device

7 10.8 Setting of user tool

4 9.7 Operation check using the EST
10.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM re-
8 lated devices

9 11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

10 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

11 4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Setting

9.8 Charging of the AeroDR Detector and
12 4.13 Restart of this device
5 confirmation of its wireless status

9.9 Exposure test and AeroDR Detector

13 10.12 Analysis of AeroDR Detector 6 analysis

10.13 Deployment to the installation

14 locations and connection to the 7 9.10 Placement in the installation locations
institution network

15 4.17 Peripheral devices setting 9.11 Installation in Portable X-ray

8 diagnostic device
16 4.18 Activation

9.12 Connection of the Ethernet cable

4.19 Confirmation of the version of this 9
17 device
and the power cables

18 4.20 Roaming environment settings

19 10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

20 4.21 Optional installation and data migration

21 10.15 Network configuration for each area

4.22 Backup of the setting data of this

22 device

23 10.16 Final operation check and delivery 10 9.13 Final operation check and delivery

346
 11.3 System setting of this device

Perform the following in advance.

Chapter 11
10.3 Check of bundled items

10.4 Check of startup

10.5 Hardware setting of this device

4.6 Registration of license

10.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR

Portable RF Unit • The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "10.3 Check of bundled items" first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

11.3.1 System setting for this

device
Set the system of this device on the CS-7 setting
screen.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

347
11.3 System setting of this device

4 Set the following items in [Institution In- 5 Set the following items in [Device Informa-
formation Setting]. tion Setting].

Setting item Settings

[Institution Input the institution name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.
[Institution Input the institution address. Setting item Settings
Address] Input within 1,024 characters. Manufacturer name is displayed.
[Telephone [Maker Name] Default setting: KONICA MINOLTA
Input the phone number. This content cannot be changed.
Number]
[Department Input the department name. Model name is displayed.
Name] Input within 64 characters. [Model Name] Default setting: CS-7
This content cannot be changed.
[Serial Num- Serial number is displayed.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ber] This content cannot be changed.

• For [Institution Name], [Institution Address], [Telephone [Station AE

Input the station AE title.
Title]
Number] and [Department Name], the values need to
[Console
be re-input because restoring [System] by restoring the Input the console name.
Name]
settings does not change those values to the ones of the
Input "1-255" as ID to specify this
backed up settings.
device on the institution network.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [Unique ID] Change is not necessary if only 1 unit
of this device is installed.
Default setting: 1
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Input the exposure room name within
• When the license import is finished, the content of [Exam Room
10 characters.
Name]
license file will appear in [Institution Name], [Institution Default setting: CS-7 #1
Address], and [Telephone Number]. The current version of the application
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • of this device is displayed.
Default setting: the version name of
the application installed when manu-
[Version] factured.
When the application is updated or the
version is upgraded, it is automatically
updated.
This content cannot be changed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not change the [Unique ID] from "1" here. Change
this setting only when multiple exposure rooms are
setup and it is necessary to setup the roaming envi-
ronment. For details, refer to "4.20 Roaming environ-
ment settings".
• For [Station AE Title], the values need to be re-input
because restoring [System] by restoring the settings
does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

348
 11.3 System setting of this device

6 Select [Enable Portable Mode] in [Portable 9 Close the sub-menu screen.

Setting].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 11
• For the other settings of the CS-7 setting screen, refer
to "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
User Tool Screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7 Set the following item in [Monitor Set-
tings].

10.8 Setting of user tool

10.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM

related devices
Setting item Settings
Select [Panasonic.CF-C1],
[Panasonic.CF-C2_b80], Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Panasonic.CF-C2_b100], • Refer to "10.8 Setting of user tool" first.
[Monitor]
[ADVANTECH.FPM-5171] or
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Poindus.VariPPC819].
Default setting: EIZO.FlexScanT1751
* [Poindus.VariPPC819] is not used in Japan.

To next page
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In normal circumstances, select [Panasonic.CF-C2_
b80]. When [Panasonic.CF-C2_b100] is selected,
explain to the user that since brightness is increased,
power consumption will also increase.
• When [Panasonic.CF-C2_b100] is selected, set the
monitor brightness to 100%.
• If using a 17" monitor using AeroDR Portable CS7 17D
Mount Kit G1, etc., select [ADVANTECH.FPM-5171].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

8 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

• The settings are stored, and the screen is

closed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

349
 11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

11.4.1 Flow chart for setting up the network

Follow the following flow chart when setting up the network for this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM.
This example describes the setting procedure to configure all AeroDR SYSTEM related devices. There is no need to
set up devices that will not be installed.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting the network should be made with respect to each exposure room. If there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the
same settings for each exposure room.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

OODevice icon screen OOSub-menu screen

Press the RM icon.

11.4.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting screen

Press [Setting].

OOAeroDR unit setting screen

11.4.3 RM setting

11.4.4 Exposure room setting

11.4.5 AeroDR Access Point setting

11.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration

11.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector communication

11.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting

11.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting

11.4.10 AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting

11.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting

11.4.12 Saving of settings

350
 11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

11.4.2 Displaying the AeroDR

2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

unit setting screen

Chapter 11
Display the AeroDR unit setting screen to setup the
AeroDR SYSTEM.

1 Press the RM icon.

• The AeroDR unit setting screen is displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Press [OK] to save the settings and close the screen.
• The displayed name for the RM icon is that set in [Ex- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
posure Room Name] in [Exposure Room Setting].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

351
11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

11.4.3 RM setting 11.4.4 Exposure room setting

Set up the RM (Roaming Manager). Set up the shot related method and stop coordination
with the exposure room.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• RM is a system to perform management and roaming 1 Set the following items in [Exposure
of the AeroDR Detector. Room Setting].
• RM manages the correspondence (registration) be-
tween this device and AeroDR Detectors and enables
the roaming (change of the exposure room where the
AeroDR Detector is used). It also manages the cor-
rection data of the respective AeroDR Detectors and
delivers it to this device at the roaming destination. Setting item Settings
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
The exposure room name is displayed.
[Exposure The name set in the [Exam Room
1 Set the following items in [RM setting]. Room Name] Name] in the CS-7 setting screen is
displayed.
Select [SRM].
[Sync Mode]
Default setting: SRM
Select existence of stop coordination.
When [ON] is selected, the termina-
[Shutdown tion of this device causes the AeroDR
Coordination] Detector assigned to the exposure
Setting item Settings room to shut down.
Select [Client] or [Hybrid] for the RM Default setting: [OFF]
[Mode] operation mode.
Default setting: Hybrid
Change is not required if the default IP IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
address of this device is to be used. • Do not change [Exposure Room Name].
If the IP address of this device is to be
[IP Address • Set up [Shutdown Coordination] in accordance with
changed in "4.11 Setting of the IP ad-
of RM hybrid the operation status of the facility. It is necessary to
dress of this device", enter that value.
machine] turn on the power of the AeroDR Detector every time it
Default setting: 192.168.20.90
Loop-back address (127.0.0.1) cannot is used since it will not link with startup.
be used. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[IP Address
of RM client Setting is not performed here.
machine]

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change [Hybrid] for the [Mode] setting here.
Change this setting only when multiple exposure
rooms are setup and it is necessary to setup the roam-
ing environment. For details, refer to "4.20 Roaming
environment settings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

352
 11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

11.4.5 AeroDR Access Point

setting

Chapter 11
Set this device and the access point built-in in the
AeroDR Portable RF Unit. Perform the setup of the ac-
cess point built-in in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit first,
and then the wireless connection related setup on this
device. • The setting screen is displayed.
• Pressing an item in the menu tree on the left
side of the screen will display the corresponding
1 Press [Moxa] in [Access Point Setting].
setting items on the right part of the screen.
• After setting each item, press [Submit] on each
setting screen to apply the settings.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To enable the settings, steps 19 and 20 need to be
performed.
• It will be timed out and return to Login screen if there
is no input for 5 minutes in the setting screen, and
login will be required again. The contents of settings
for which [Submit] is pressed are stored even if it has
timed out.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Press [Network Settings] under [Basic

Settings] and set up the network for the
following items.
• The setting tool will open in a Web browser and
the login screen will be displayed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When a popup message regarding Acrobat is dis-
played, choose [Not enable]. Setting item Settings
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [IP configura- Select [Static].
tion] Default setting: Static
2 Input the user name and password on the Set according to the institution envi-
login screen, then press [Login]. [IP address] ronment.
Default setting: 192.168.20.241
• The default user name is "admin", and the pass-
word is "root". Set according to the institution envi-
[Subnet mask] ronment.
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Set according to the institution envi-
[Gateway] ronment.
Default setting: 0.0.0.0

4 Press [Submit].

353
11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Press [Operation Mode] under [Wireless 9 Set the radio frequency band, channel,
Settings] and set the wireless operation and SSID with the following items.
mode with the following items.

Setting item Settings

[Wireless en- Select [Enable]. Setting item Settings
able] Default setting: Disable Select [A].
[Operation Select [AP]. Default setting: A
[RF type]
mode] Default setting: AP Use only IEEE802.11a for the AeroDR
Access Point.
Set the channel following the results
[Available
6 Press [Submit]. channel list
of the preliminary survey.
When the channel is DFS, an asterisk
* indicates
(*) will be displayed with the channel.
DFS channel]
Default setting: 36-5.18G
7 Press [Basic Wireless Settings] of [WLAN]
Input the unique SSID within 31 alpha-
of [Wireless Settings]. numeric characters according to the
[SSID]
institution environment.
Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
8 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen. [SSID broad- Select [Enable].
cast] Default setting: Enable

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When installing multiple AeroDR Portable RF Units,
enter a unique [SSID] for each AeroDR Portable RF
Unit to be installed regardless of settings of the roam-
ing environment.
(Example)
AeroDR Portable RF Unit 1: KMMG_AeroDR_1
AeroDR Portable RF Unit 2: KMMG_AeroDR_2
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

10 Press [Submit].

11 Press [WLAN Security Settings] of [WLAN]

of [Wireless Settings].

12 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen.

354
 11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

13 Set the security with the following items. 17 Press the following message that is dis-
played on the upper right portion of the
Web browser window.

Chapter 11
Setting item Settings
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Security Select [WPA2].
mode] Default setting: WPA2 • If you changed the settings, save the settings and
Select [Personal]. restart. The modified settings will not be applied if the
[WPA type] system is not restarted.
Default setting: Personal
[Encryption Select [AES]. • When changes have been made to the settings, a
method] Default setting: AES message will blink on the upper right portion of the
Input a passphrase with 37 or more screen. To save the setting and activate it, press this
alphanumeric characters. message.
[Passphrase]
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4F9ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19

18 Press [Save and Restart].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• We recommend that the passphrase be used without
changing the default setting. When changing the pass-
phrase, combine alphanumeric characters that are dif-
ficult to guess.
• When installing multiple AeroDR Portable RF Units,
enter the same passphrase for each AeroDR Access • The settings will be saved and the AeroDR Ac-
Point. cess Point will restart.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Restart is completed when a beeping sound
rings after approximately 15 seconds.
14 Press [Submit].
19 Press [Close] on the browser to close the
15 Press [Advanced Wireless Settings] under browser window.
[WLAN] of [Wireless Settings] and set the
radio output with the following items. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the IP address with a different segment from the
IP address of this device is set, the browser window
may not be correctly displayed. However, the set-
tings will be performed normally. Press [Close] on the
browser.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Setting item Settings

[Transmis- Select [Full].
sion power] Default setting: Full
Select [Enable].
[WMM]
Default setting: Enable

16 Press [Submit].

355
11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

20 Go back to the AeroDR unit setting screen

11.4.6 AeroDR Detector cor-
and set the following items in [Access
Point Setting]. rection data registration
Register the AeroDR Detector's correction data in this
device.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Information required for network settings, such as IP
address of the AeroDR Detector, is stored in the cor-
Setting item Settings rection data.
Enter the AeroDR Portable RF Unit's ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
internal AeroDR access point serial
number.
[Serial - Japan: product code (4 digits: A6F9) 1 Insert the media provided with AeroDR
Number] — product serial number (5 digits) Detector to the CD/DVD drive.
- Other countries: product code (4 dig-
its: A5DW) — product serial number
(5 digits) 2 Press [Add] of [Correction Data Setting].
Enter the name of the AeroDR Access
[Display Point in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
Name] using 10 characters or less.
Default setting: Wireless A
Input the same [IP address] as the
[IP Address] one in step 3.
Default setting: 192.168.20.241
Enter the same [SSID] as the one in
[SSID] step 9 within 32 ASCII characters.
Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
Enter the same [Passphrase] as the
one in step 13 within 64 ASCII charac-
[Pass Phrase] ters.
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt
4F9ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The serial number of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is
affixed to the main body of the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit.
• Enter the following product code.
–– Japan: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable RF
Access Point's "A6F9".
–– Other countries: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable
RF Access Point's "A5DW". • The [Browse For Folder] screen is displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

356
 11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

3 Select the folder indicating the serial num-

11.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR
ber of the AeroDR detector, and press [OK].
Detector communication

Chapter 11
Confirm the communication between this device and
AeroDR Detector.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not change the IP address for the AeroDR Detec-
tor here. Change the IP address of AeroDR Detector
in "11.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Turn on the AeroDR Detector with the correc-

tion data registered, and connect to either the
AeroDR I/F Cable or AeroDR Battery Charger.

• (Example) A20H-00001 2 Press [Download] in the [AeroDR Detector

Setting].

• Information of [Wired IP Address], [Wireless IP

Address], [Default Gateway] and [Subnet Mask]
are acquired.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the serial numbers of the correction data CD used in
• The serial number of AeroDR Detector will be "11.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration"
registered and [Serial Number] of [AeroDR De- and the AeroDR Detector do not match, the "The serial
tector Setting] will be updated. number of the AeroDR Detector does not match the
serial number of correction data. Please confirm the
4 Remove the media provided with the combination of the AeroDR Detector and a CD related
AeroDR Detector from the CD/DVD drive. to this correction data." message is displayed. In this
case, download information again using the correct
correction data CD.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Set [Display Name].

• Enter the AeroDR Detector name within 10 char-

acters.
• Change is not required if the default display
name of the AeroDR Detector is to be used.

357
11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
11.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable
• [Display Name] is also used as the AeroDR Detector
setting
name in the application bar. Since only the first 3 char-
acters will be displayed in the application bar, assign a Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable.
name that is easy to recognize.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Upload]. • AeroDR detector to be used is necessary to set up

the AeroDR I/F Cable.
• When there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables, connect
and set up each cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable is con-

nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit.

2 Confirm that the AeroDR detector to be

used is powered on.

3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-

DR I/F Cable.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data
registered in "11.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
• The setting information is uploaded to the Aero-
registration".
DR Detector.
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device
before this operation, the sub-ID of that device may
be displayed. When you press [Download] at the next
step, the device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable to be
set up is obtained.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Download] in [I/F Cable Setting].

• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is displayed.

358
 11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used, O

OWhen there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables
and press [OK].
1 Turn on the connection for the device icon

Chapter 11
for the second AeroDR I/F Cable.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to "10.9 Activation of AeroDR
SYSTEM related devices".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable with the same

procedure as the first AeroDR I/F Cable.

• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable is

automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed
in the [Device Sub ID] of [I/F Cable Setting].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
sub-ID by this method.
• For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6 Set the following items in [I/F Cable Setting].

Setting item Settings

Read the bar code and get the serial
number of the AeroDR I/F Cable.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number]
the form of product code (4 digits)
-serial number (5 digits).
Input the I/F Cable name within 10
[Display
characters.
Name]
Default setting: IF Cable

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The serial number of the AeroDR I/F Cable is de-
scribed on the tag attached to it.
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

359
11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

11.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger

4 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used,
and press [OK].
setting
Set up when using the AeroDR Battery Charger to reg-
ister and charge the AeroDR Detector.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• AeroDR Detector to be used is necessary to set up the
AeroDR Battery Charger for registering. The AeroDR
Detector is not necessary to set up the AeroDR Bat-
tery Charger just for charging, so steps 1 - 4 are not
necessary.
• If there are multiple AeroDR Battery Chargers for reg-
istering, connect and set up each device.
• Even if the AeroDR Battery Charger is used only for
charging, setting is still necessary for device registration.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR Detector to be • The device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Char-
used is powered on. ger is automatically retrieved, and it will be dis-
played in the [Device Sub ID] of [AeroDR Bat-
tery Charger].
2 Insert the AeroDR Detector into the Aero-
DR Battery Charger.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
registered in "11.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
registration". not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device sub-ID by this method.
before this operation, the sub-ID of that device may • For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
be displayed. When you press [Download] at the next plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
step, the device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger format.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
to be set up is obtained.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Set the following items in [AeroDR Battery
3 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Battery Charger].
Charger].

Setting item Settings

Read the bar code and get the serial
number of AeroDR Battery Charger.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number] the form of product code (4 digits)
-serial number (5 digits).
Input the Battery Charger name within
[Display
10 characters.
Name] Default setting: Cradle
Select [For Charging Only] or [For
Registration/Charging] for the Battery
[Type]
Charger type.
Default setting: For Registration/Charging

• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-

played.

360
 11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 11.4.10 AeroDR Portable RF

• Set up of the dip switch on the AeroDR Battery Char-
ger is required when [For Charging Only] is selected
Unit setting

Chapter 11
in [Type]. Refer to "Installation of the AeroDR Battery
Charger for charging only" in "AeroDR SYSTEM In-
Set up the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
stallation/Service Manual".
• If [For Charging Only] is selected as [Type], the Aero-
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DR Detector is not registered to an exposure room,
because no notification is sent to the RM when the • The setting for the AeroDR Portable RF Unit should be
AeroDR Detector is mounted on the AeroDR Battery performed in the setting screen of the AeroDR Gen-
Charger. erator Interface Unit.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Set the following items in [XG BOX Set-

• Serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger is de- ting].
scribed on the sticker on side of the main body.
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

OO When there are multiple AeroDR Battery

Chargers

1 Turn on the connection for the device icon

for the second AeroDR Battery Charger. Setting item Settings
Input the AeroDR Portable RF Units
[Display
name within 10 characters.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Name]
Default setting: XG Box
• For the operation, refer to "10.9 Activation of AeroDR Input the IP address of the AeroDR
SYSTEM related devices". [IP Address] Portable RF Units.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Default setting: 192.168.20.221
Input the address of the default gate-
2 Set up the AeroDR Battery Charger with [Default Gate- way.
way] Input is not required when no gateway
the same procedure as the first AeroDR exists on the network.
Battery Charger.
Input the subnet mask of the selected
[Subnet
device.
Mask]
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
[WS] Select [Use WS1 Only].

361
11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

2 Press [Upload]. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• The serial number of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is
affixed to the main body of the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit.
• Enter the following product code.
–– Japan: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable RF XG's
"A6FC".
–– Other countries: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable
RF XG's "A5DX".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Set the following items of [WS Mapping].

Setting item Settings

• Settings will be uploaded to the AeroDR Por- [Wall Stand] Setting is not performed.
table RF Unit. [Bucky Table] Setting is not performed.
[DR Cassette] Assign DR cassette to the WS1.

IMPORTANT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting changes may take 5 Set the following items of [Restricted
up to a maximum of 30 seconds to take effect. AeroDR panel sending ConsoleReady].
• When the IP address with a different segment from
the IP address of this device is set, the "Processing"
screen may not disappear although settings are be-
ing uploaded to the AeroDR Portable RF Unit. After
waiting for 30 seconds or more, press [Cancel] then
perform ping from the Windows command prompt and
confirm that there is no response from the IP address
before the change.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Setting items Settings
Set up the existence of the exposure
3 Input the serial number of the AeroDR control against the AeroDR Detector
connected to the WS that is setup
Portable RF Unit (AeroDR Generator Inter-
as DR cassette operation in [WS
face Unit part). Mapping].
Exposure control will not be performed
if [No Control] is selected.
[Limitation
Only the AeroDR Detector selected in
Type]
the list can be used for exposure on
that WS when [Select WS enable to
send] is selected.
The AeroDR Detector selected in the
list can not be used for exposure on
that WS when [Select WS disable to
send] is selected.
The names of the registered AeroDR
• Enter the product code (4 digits) and product [AeroDR Detector Detectors are displayed.
serial number (5 digits). 1~n] Select the AeroDR Detector to be con-
–– Product code for Japan: A6FC trolled.
–– Product code for other countries: A5DX

362
 11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

Setting item Settings

11.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting The AeroDR Detector's serial number
[Serial which was acquired in "11.4.6 AeroDR

Chapter 11
Set up the AeroDR Detector with communication con- Number] Detector correction data registration"
firmed in "11.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector will be displayed.
communication". [Wired IP Ad-
Input the IP address for the wired con-
Setting is not required if the default network setting of nection of the AeroDR Detector.
dress]
Default setting: 192.168.20.201
the AeroDR is to be used.
Input the IP address for the wireless
[Wireless IP
connection of the AeroDR Detector.
Address]
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Default setting: 192.168.20.211
• The AeroDR Detector's serial number which was ac- Input the default gateway of the Aero-
[Default Gate-
quired in "11.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data reg- DR Detector.
way]
istration" will be displayed in [Serial Number]. Confirm Default setting: 0.0.0.0
that the serial number displayed is identical to the se- Input the subnet mask of the AeroDR
[Subnet
rial number on the identification label(sticker) attached Detector.
Mask]
to the AeroDR Detector before setting up. Default setting: 255.255.255.0
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Press [Upload].

• If connected to AeroDR Battery Charger only, replace

the word "AeroDR I/F Cable" with "AeroDR Battery
Charger" as you read.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable is con-

nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit.

2 Confirm that the AeroDR detector to be

used is powered on.

3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-

DR I/F Cable.

4 Set the following items of [AeroDR Detec-

tor Setting] according to the institution
environment.
• The settings are uploaded to the AeroDR Detec-
tor.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Detector setting changes may take up to a
maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
• When the IP address with a different segment from
the IP address of this device is set, the "Processing"
screen may not disappear, although settings are be-
ing uploaded to the AeroDR Detector. After waiting for
30 seconds or more, press [Cancel] and perform ping
from the Windows command prompt and confirm that
there is no response from the IP address before the
change.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

363
11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

11.4.13 AeroDR 1012HQ

11.4.12 Saving of settings
Settings
When all settings of AeroDR SYSTEM are completed,
save the settings and close the AeroDR unit setting
Configure the following settings when using the
screen. AeroDR 1012HQ.

1 Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting 1 Press the CS-7 icon.
screen.

• The settings will be registered in this device's

RM as local settings.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The warning message is displayed when the "Pro-
cessing" screen is closed by pressing [Cancel] during
an upload, but this does not indicate a problem.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Close the sub-menu screen.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

364
 11.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.11 Setting of the IP address of this

device

Chapter 11
4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync
Setting

4.13 Restart of this device

10.12 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

10.13 Deployment to the installation

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed. locations and connection to the
institution network
3 Configure the following [Image Size Setting].
4.17 Peripheral devices setting

4.18 Activation

4.19 Confirmation of the version of this

Setting item Settings
device
Select the reading image
[10"x12" Read Image size when using the AeroDR
Size at the time of using 1012HQ from [According to
4.20 Roaming environment settings
the AeroDR Cassette] AeroDR Cassette] and [Ac-
cording to Regius Cassette]. 10.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access
Select the HOST output Point
[10"x12" HOST Output image size when using
Image Size at the time of the AeroDR 1012HQ from 4.21 Optional installation and data
using the AeroDR Cas- [According to AeroDR Cas- migration
sette] sette] and [According to
Regius Cassette].
10.15 Network configuration for each
area
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Be sure to select [According to AeroDR Cassette] for 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this
the [10"x12" Read Image Size at the time of using the device
AeroDR Cassette] setting, when using the AeroDR
1012HQ. 10.16 Final operation check and delivery
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

4 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device"
first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The settings are stored, and the screen is closed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

5 Close the sub-menu screen.

365
366
 Chapter
12
Installation Procedure for This
Device and AeroDR Portable UF Unit
This chapter describes the installation of this device and AeroDR Potable UF Unit.

367
 12.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR Por-
table UF Unit

This section describes the installation procedure based on the connection example (Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/
AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/AeroDR Portable UF Unit/CS-7 Wireless Connection/
Aero Sync/AeroDR Battery Charger) as follows.
OO Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/
AeroDR Portable UF Unit/CS-7 Wireless Connection/Aero Sync/AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR Detector registration side (exposure room side hub)

AeroDR Hub
I/F Cable

Power
Hub AeroDR Battery Charger
source

AeroDR Interface Unit

Access
Power
point
AeroDR Detector

CS-7

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable AeroDR Portable UF Unit
Serial/hardware connection

368
 12.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR Portable UF Unit

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Confirm that if the following identification is in the AeroDR Detector that users can use in Aero Sync mode.
Identification
AeroDR Detector
Japan Overseas
AeroDR 1417HQ 1417HQ AeroSync 1417HQ
AeroDR 1717HQ 1717HQ AeroSync 1717HQ
AeroDR 1012HQ 1012HQ AeroSync 1012HQ

Chapter 12
AeroDR P-11
(1417HQ AeroSync) Identification

• Users can not use Aero Sync Mode in the AeroDR Detector if it is AeroDR 1417S.
• Users cannot use Aero Sync mode in AeroDR 1417HQ or AeroDR 1717HQ if the first four digits of its Serial Number are
shown in the following table.
Serial Number that cannot be used
AeroDR Detector
Japan Overseas
AeroDR 1417HQ A20H A45Y
AeroDR 1717HQ A3VE A54T
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When installing the AeroDR Portable UF Unit, temporarily connect the AeroDR Portable UF Unit and the AeroDR Detector
registration side hub with the Ethernet cable.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

369
 12.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR Portable UF Unit

The installation operating process for this device and the AeroDR Portable UF Unit is as follows.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If an AeroDR Portable UF Unit is used at 1 place (exposure room, patient's room, etc.) for exposure, flow number 19 is not
necessary.
• If there are multiple units of this device, repeat the tasks from flow number 1 to 18 to set each exposure room, then perform
the task of flow number 19 to 23.
• For the operation of the section enclosed with the dotted line in following flow, refer to each section of the "Chapter 4 Installa-
tion Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)". Exchange the terms as following at that time.
–– "this device" → "this device for portable"
–– "AeroDR Access Point"→ "AeroDR Access Point built-in in the AeroDR Portable UF Unit"
• When the RIS/HOST and AeroDR SYSTEM use the same network segment, refer to "16.5 How to change the network set-
tings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR Portable UF Unit, refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

370
 12.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR Portable UF Unit

The workflow to install AeroDR Portable UF Unit

1 12.3 Check of bundled items 1 10.4 Installation of respective devices

2 12.4 Check of startup 2 10.5 Temporary connection and startup checks

3 12.5 Hardware setting of this device

4 4.6 Registration of license

Chapter 12
5 12.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR Portable UF Unit

6 12.7 System setting of this device 3 10.6 Setting up the CS-7

7 12.8 Setting of user tool 4 10.7 Removing the AeroDR Portable UF Unit

12.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM

8 related devices

9 12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

10 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

12.11 Setting of the wireless LAN with

11 the AeroDR Portable UF Unit
10.8 Charging of the AeroDR Detector and
5 confirmation of its wireless status
12 12.12 Removal of temporarily connected Ethernet cable

13 4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Setting

14 4.13 Restart of this device

10.9 Exposure test and AeroDR Detector

15 12.13 Analysis of AeroDR Detector 6 analysis

12.14 Deployment to the installation

10.10 Placement of respective devices in
16 locations and connection to the 7 the installation locations
institution network

17 4.17 Peripheral devices setting 10.11 Installation of the AeroDR Portable

8 Unit Mount Kit
18 4.18 Activation

19 4.19 Confirmation of the version of this device

20 4.20 Roaming environment settings

21 12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

22 4.21 Optional installation and data migration

23 12.16 Network configuration for each area

24 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

25 12.17 Final operation check and delivery 9 10.12 Final operation check and delivery

371
 12.3 Check of bundled items

After unpacking, confirm all components are included.

Name of product Quantity Remarks

Main body of this 1
device
Power cable 1
AC adapter 1
Battery pack 1
Other 1 set Digitizer pen, attached
documents, etc.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The components might be different depending on the
delivery time and the destination.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

372
 12.4 Check of startup

Before the actual connection, make sure that this de-

vice starts properly. 12.4.2 Check of startup
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Start up this device and check that the initial screen is
• When multiple units of this device are installed, attach displayed.
the accessories and confirm the startup of each device.

Chapter 12
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Turn on this device.
• Start up messages are displayed sequentially.
12.4.1 Attachment of • Internal system initialization is performed while
the system startup screen is displayed.
accessories
• Upon completion of initialization, the initial
Attach the accessories of this device. screen is displayed, and this device is ready for
operation.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • The initial screen

• For details, refer to the operation manual of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

O
OAttaching the accessories

1 If an accessory such as a digitizer pen

has been included, attach it to this device.

O
OAttachment of the battery pack

1 Flip over this device.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
2 Hold the battery pack so that it is directed
• The software version is displayed on the system
as shown in the figure, and insert the bat- startup screen. Initialization will be completed a few
tery pack in the direction indicated by the minutes after turning on the power.
arrow until it clicks. • A progress bar is displayed on the system startup screen,
indicating the status of the system initialization process.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Do not plug in the power cable before the completion of
all of the connections.
• The specifications of this device might be different de-
pending on the date of delivery and the destination.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

373
 12.5 Hardware setting of this device

12.5.1 Attachment of external

4 Connect this device and the external CD/
DVD drive with a USB cable.
CD/DVD drive • Driver is automatically installed.

A CD/DVD drive is required for setting or update dur-

ing the portable X-ray device operation. If a CD/DVD 5 Restart this device.
drive is not equipped on this device, attach an external
CD/DVD drive to this device with following procedure.
12.5.2 Adjusting the position
Recommended parts and conditions for of the touch panel
the external CD/DVD drive
Adjust the touch panel coordinates, if it is out of align-
Item Conditions ment.
OS Windows 7 compliant
Language Support for the installed OS
USB USB2.0 Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Drive The CD-ROM can be read. • For the Adjusting the position of the touch panel, refer
Reading speed 16 speed or higher to "4.5.2 Adjusting the position of the touch panel".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• BUFFALO DVSM-PN58U2V is used as an example
here. The operation might be different depending on
the device used. For details, refer to the operation
manual of the device used.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4.6 Registration of license

1 Make sure that this device is powered on.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Display the intermediate screen. • Refer to "4.6 Registration of license".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
To next page

3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

374
 12.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR Portable UF Unit

12.6.1 Temporary connections of 12.6.2 Startup of respective

AeroDR Portable UF Unit devices
Make temporary connections of this device, AeroDR Turn on this device, the AeroDR Portable UF Unit and
Portable UF Unit and all peripheral devices. all peripheral devices.

Chapter 12
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Turn on this device.
• At this stage, do not connect to the institution network.
• If there are multiple AeroDR Detectors, connect them 2 Turn on the AeroDR Portable UF Unit and
1 by 1. all peripheral devices.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Connect the respective Ethernet cables
• Charges of the AeroDR Detector may be 0%, so al-
connected to the AeroDR Interface Unit,
ways turn on the power switch of the AeroDR Detector
AeroDR Battery Charger and AeroDR Por- after charging.
table UF Unit to the hub for the AeroDR ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Detector registration side.

2 Connect the Ethernet cable to be con-

nected to the hub for the AeroDR Detector
registration side to this device.

3 Connect the Ethernet cable connected to

this device to the hub for the AeroDR De-
tector registration side.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When an optional USB wired LAN adapter is installed
in this device, connect a hub or an Ethernet cable to
the standard port of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the temporary connections of devices, refer to
"AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

375
 12.7 System setting of this device

Set the system of this device on the CS-7 setting

screen.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

4 Set the following items in [Institution In-

formation Setting].

Setting item Settings

[Institution Input the institution name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.
[Institution Input the institution address.
Address] Input within 1,024 characters.
[Telephone
Input the phone number.
Number]
[Department Input the department name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
• For [Institution Name], [Institution Address], [Telephone
Number] and [Department Name], the values need to
3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. be re-input because restoring [System] by restoring the
settings does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the license import is finished, the content of
license file will appear in [Institution Name], [Institution
Address], and [Telephone Number].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

376
 12.7 System setting of this device

5 Set the following items in [Device Informa- 6 Select [Enable Portable Mode] in [Portable
tion Setting]. Setting].

7 Set the following item in [Monitor Settings].

Chapter 12
Setting item Settings
Manufacturer name is displayed.
[Maker Name] Default setting: KONICA MINOLTA
This content cannot be changed.
Model name is displayed.
[Model Name] Default setting: CS-7
This content cannot be changed.
Setting item Settings
[Serial Num- Serial number is displayed.
Select from [Panasonic.CF-C1],
ber] This content cannot be changed.
[Panasonic.CF-C2_b80],
[Station AE [Monitor] [Panasonic.CF-C2_b100] or
Input the station AE title.
Title] [Poindus.VariPPC819].
[Console Default setting: EIZO.FlexScanT1751
Input the console name.
Name] * [Poindus.VariPPC819] is not used in Japan.
Input "1-255" as ID to specify this
device on the institution network.
[Unique ID] Change is not necessary when only 1
device is installed. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Default setting: 1 • In normal circumstances, select [Panasonic.CF-C2_
Input the exposure room name within b80]. When [Panasonic.CF-C2_b100] is selected,
[Exam Room
10 characters. explain to the user that since brightness is increased,
Name]
Default setting: CS-7 #1
power consumption will also increase.
The current version of the application • When [Panasonic.CF-C2_b100] is selected, set the
of this device is displayed.
Default setting: the version name of monitor brightness to 100%.
the application installed when manu- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Version] factured.
When the application is updated or the
version is upgraded, it is automatically 8 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.
updated.
This content cannot be changed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change the [Unique ID] from "1" here. Change • The settings are stored, and the screen is
this setting only when multiple exposure rooms are closed.
setup and it is necessary to setup the roaming envi-
ronment. For details, refer to "4.20 Roaming environ- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
ment settings".
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
• For [Station AE Title], the values need to be re-input
the setting screen remains displayed.
because restoring [System] by restoring the settings
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 9 Close the sub-menu screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the other settings of the CS-7 setting screen, refer
to "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
User Tool Screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

377
 12.8 Setting of user tool

Perform necessary settings during the portable X-ray

device operation on the user tool screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Setting is unnecessary unless directed by the user.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Select the [User Tool] tab.

• The screen setting tool screen is displayed.

3 Set the following items in [Focus move].

Setting item Settings

[Focus Naviga-
Select [Do not move].
tion Event]

4 Set the following items in [Control Panel].

• The user tool screen is displayed.

Setting item Settings
2 Press [Setting], and press [Screen Set- [Defaults
ting]. display panel
Select [QUICK].
on selecting
exposed image]

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If performing Aero Sync exposure, [Aero Sync] auto-
matically appears on the control panel before reading
images.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

378
 12.8 Setting of user tool

5 Press [OK] on the screen setting tool

screen.

• The settings are stored, and the screen is

Chapter 12
closed.

379
 12.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices

Turn on the connection to the AeroDR SYSTEM re- 2 Select the connection check box.
lated devices to perform the settings.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Turn on the connection only for the devices to be in-
stalled.
• The connection may be turned on already depending
on the devices. Turn off the connection for the devices
that will not be installed if it is turned on.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Press the device icon.

3 Press [Close].

• At this point, icon of the AeroDR Access Point

built-in in the AeroDR Portable UF Unit will be
explained as an example.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

• Connection is turned on and display of the device
icon will change.

380
 12.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices

4 Press the icon of the device that will be set us-

ing the same procedure, then press the con-
nection checkbox of the sub-menu screen.

Chapter 12
AeroDR I/F Cable icon

AeroDR Battery Charger icon

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To install multiple AeroDR SYSTEM related devices,
turn on the connection of the device icons for the num-
ber of the devices to be installed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the AeroDR Detector, set up the connection to this
device through the AeroDR unit setting screen.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

381
 12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

12.10.1 Flow chart for setting up the network

Follow the following flow chart when setting up the network for this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM.
This example describes the setting procedure to configure all AeroDR SYSTEM related devices. There is no need to
set up devices that will not be installed.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting the network will be made with respect to each exposure room. If there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the same
settings for each exposure room.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

OODevice icon screen OOSub-menu screen

Press the RM icon.

12.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting screen

Press [Setting].

OOAeroDR unit setting screen

12.10.3 RM setting

12.10.4 Exposure room setting

12.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting

12.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration

12.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector communication

12.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting

12.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting

12.10.10 AeroDR Detector setting

12.10.11 Saving of settings

382
 12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

12.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR
unit setting screen
Display the AeroDR unit setting screen to setup the
AeroDR SYSTEM.

1 Press the RM icon.

Chapter 12
• The AeroDR unit setting screen is displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The sub-menu screen is displayed. • When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Press [OK] to save the settings and close the screen.
• The displayed name for the RM icon is that set in [Ex- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
posure Room Name] in [Exposure Room Setting].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

383
12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

12.10.3 RM setting 12.10.4 Exposure room setting

Set up the RM (Roaming Manager). Set up the shot related method and stop coordination
with the exposure room.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• RM is a system to perform management and roaming 1 Set the following items in [Exposure
of the AeroDR Detector. Room Setting].
• RM manages the correspondence (registration) be-
tween this device and AeroDR Detector and enables
the roaming (the change of the exposure room to use
the AeroDR Detector). It also manages the correction
data of the respective AeroDR Detectors and delivers
it to this device at the roaming destination. Setting item Settings
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
The exposure room name is dis-
played.
1 Set the following items in [RM setting]. [Exposure
Room Name]
The name set in the [Exposure Room
Name] in the CS-7 setting screen is
displayed.
Select [XARM].
[Sync Mode]
Default setting: SRM
Select existence of stop coordination.
When [ON] is selected, the termina-
[Shutdown tion of this device causes the AeroDR
Setting item Settings Coordination] Detector assigned to the exposure
Select [Client] or [Hybrid] for the RM room to shut down.
[Mode] operation mode. Default setting: [OFF]
Default setting: Hybrid
Change is not required if the default IP
address of this device is to be used. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
If the IP address of this device is to be • Do not change [Exposure Room Name].
changed in "4.11 Setting of the IP ad-
[IP Address • Set up [Shutdown Coordination] in accordance with
dress of this device", enter that value.
of RM hybrid the operation status of the facility. It is necessary to
Default setting: 192.168.20.90
machine] turn on the power of the AeroDR Detector every time it
Loop-back address (127.0.0.1) cannot
be used. is used since it will not link with startup.
*The IP address of the wired LAN ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
adapter built into this device.
[IP Address
of RM client Setting is not performed here.
machine]

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change [Hybrid] for the [Mode] setting here.
Change this setting only when multiple exposure
rooms are setup and it is necessary to setup the roam-
ing environment. For details, refer to "4.20 Roaming
environment settings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

384
 12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

12.10.5 AeroDR Access Point

setting
Set this device and the access point built-in the Aero-
DR Portable UF Unit. Perform the setup of the access
point built-in the AeroDR Portable UF Unit first, and
then the wireless connection related setup on this de-
vice. • The setting screen is displayed.
• Pressing an item in the menu tree on the left

Chapter 12
side of the screen will display the corresponding
1 Press [Moxa] in [Access Point Setting].
setting item on the right part of the screen.
• When setting each item, press [Submit] on each
setting screen to apply the settings.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To enable the settings, step 19 and 20 need to be per-
formed.
• It will be timed out and return to Login screen if there
is no input for 5 minutes in the setting screen, and log-
in will be required again. The contents of settings with
[Submit] pressed is stored even if it has timed out.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Press [Network Settings] under [Basic

Settings] and set up the network for the
following items.

• The setting tool will open in the Web browser

and the login screen will be displayed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When a popup message regarding Acrobat is dis- Setting item Settings
played, choose [Not enable]. [IP configura- Select [Static].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • tion] Default setting: Static
Set according to the institution envi-
2 Input the user name and password on the [IP address] ronment.
Default setting: 192.168.20.241
login screen, then press [Login].
• The default user name is "admin", and the pass- Set according to the institution envi-
[Subnet mask] ronment.
word is "root".
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Set according to the institution envi-
[Gateway] ronment.
Default setting: 0.0.0.0

4 Press [Submit].

385
12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Press [Operation Mode] under [Wireless 9 Set the radio frequency band, channel,
Settings] and set the wireless operation and SSID for the following items.
mode for the following items.

Setting item Settings

[Wireless en- Select [Enable]. Setting item Settings
able] Default setting: Disable Select [A].
[Operation Select [AP]. Default setting: A
[RF type]
mode] Default setting: AP Use only IEEE802.11a in the AeroDR
Access Point.
Set the channel following the results
[Available
6 Press [Submit]. channel list
of the preliminary survey.
When the channel is DFS, an asterisk
* indicates
(*) is displayed with the channel.
DFS channel]
Default setting: 36-5.18G
7 Press [Basic Wireless Settings] of [WLAN]
Input the unique SSID within 31 alpha-
of [Wireless Settings]. numeric characters according to the
[SSID]
institution environment.
Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
8 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen. [SSID broad- Select [Enable].
cast] Default setting: Enable

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When installing the AeroDR Access Points in multiple
AeroDR Portable UF Units, enter a unique [SSID] for
each AeroDR Portable UF Unit to be installed regard-
less of settings of the roaming environment.
(Example)
AeroDR Portable UF Unit 1: KMMG_AeroDR_1
AeroDR Portable UF Unit 2: KMMG_AeroDR_2
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

10 Press [Submit].

11 Press [WLAN Security Settings] of [WLAN]

of [Wireless Settings].

12 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen.

386
 12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

13 Set the security with the following items. 17 Press the following message that is dis-
played on the upper right portion of the
Web browser window.

Setting item Settings

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Security Select [WPA2].

Chapter 12
mode] Default setting: WPA2 • If you changed the settings, save the settings and
Select [Personal]. restart. The modified settings will not be applied if the
[WPA type] system is not restarted.
Default setting: Personal
[Encryption Select [AES]. • When changes have been made to the settings, a
method] Default setting: AES message will blink on the upper right portion of the
Input a passphrase with 37 or more screen. To save the setting and activate it, press this
alphanumeric characters. message.
[Passphrase]
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4F9ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19

18 Press [Save and Restart].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• We recommend that the passphrase be used without
changing the default setting. When changing the pass-
phrase, combine alphanumeric characters that are dif-
ficult to guess.
• When installing multiple AeroDR Portable UF Units,
enter the same passphrase for each AeroDR Access • The settings will be saved and the AeroDR Ac-
Point. cess Point will restart.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Restart is completed when a beeping sound
rings after approximately 15 seconds.
14 Press [Submit].
19 Press [Close] on the browser to close the
15 Press [Advanced Wireless Settings] under browser window.
[WLAN] of [Wireless Settings] and set the
radio output with the following items. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the IP address with a different segment from the
IP address of this device is set, the browser window
may not be correctly displayed. However, the set-
tings will be performed normally. Press [Close] on the
browser.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Setting item Settings

[Transmis- Select [Full].
sion power] Default setting: Full
Select [Enable].
[WMM]
Default setting: Enable

16 Press [Submit].

387
12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

20 Go back to the AeroDR unit setting screen

12.10.6 AeroDR Detector cor-
and set the following items in [Access
Point Setting]. rection data registration
Register the AeroDR Detector's correction data in this
device.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Information required for network settings, such as IP
address of the AeroDR Detector, is stored in the cor-
Setting item Settings rection data.
Enter the serial number of the AeroDR ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Access Point on the inside of the
[Serial
AeroDR Portable UF Unit. Enter the
Number]
product code (4 digits: A5DY) - serial 1 Insert the media provided with AeroDR
number (5 digits). Detector to the CD/DVD drive.
Enter the name of the AeroDR Access
[Display
Point on the inside of the AeroDR
Portable UF Unit using 10 characters
2 Press [Add] of [Correction Data Setting].
Name]
or less.
Default setting: Wireless A
Input the same [IP address] as the
[IP Address] one in step 3.
Default setting: 192.168.20.241
Enter the same [SSID] as the one in
[SSID] step 9 within 32 ASCII characters.
Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
Enter the same [Passphrase] as the
one in step 13 within 64 ASCII charac-
[Pass Phrase] ters.
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt
4F9ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The serial number of the AeroDR Portable UF Unit is
affixed to the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.
• Enter "A5DY" of the Dummy AeroDR Portable UF
Access Point for the product code.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• The [Browse For Folder] screen is displayed.

388
 12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

3 Select the folder indicating the serial num-

12.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR
ber of the AeroDR detector, and press [OK].
Detector communication
Confirm the communication between this device and
AeroDR Detector.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not change the IP address for the AeroDR Detec-

Chapter 12
tor here. Change the IP address of AeroDR Detector
in "12.10.10 AeroDR Detector setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Turn on the AeroDR Detector with the

correction data registered, and connect
to either the AeroDR I/F Cable or AeroDR
Battery Charger.
• (Example) A20H-00001
2 Press [Download] in the [AeroDR Detector
Setting].

• Information of [Wired IP Address], [Wireless IP

Address], [Default Gateway] and [Subnet Mask]
are acquired.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The serial number of AeroDR Detector will be • If the serial numbers of the correction data CD used in
registered and [Serial Number] of [AeroDR De- "12.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration"
tector Setting] will be updated. and the AeroDR Detector do not match, the "The serial
number of the AeroDR Detector does not match the

4 Remove the media provided with the serial number of correction data. Please confirm the
combination of the AeroDR Detector and a CD related
AeroDR Detector from the CD/DVD drive.
to this correction data." message is displayed. In this
case, download information again using the correct
correction data CD.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Set [Display Name].

• Enter the AeroDR Detector name within 10 char-

acters.
• Change is not required if the default display
name of the AeroDR Detector is to be used.

389
12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
12.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable
• [Display Name] is also used as the AeroDR Detector
setting
name in the application bar. Since only the first 3 char-
acters will be displayed in the application bar, assign a Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable.
name that is easy to recognize.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Upload]. • AeroDR detector to be used is necessary to set up

the AeroDR I/F Cable.
• When there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables, connect
and set up each cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable is con-

nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit.

2 Confirm that the AeroDR detector to be

used is powered on.

3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-

DR I/F Cable.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data
registered in "12.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction
• The setting information is uploaded to the Aero-
data registration".
DR Detector.
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device
before this operation, the sub-ID of that device may
be displayed. When you press [Download] at the next
step, the device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable to be
set up is obtained.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Download] in [I/F Cable Setting].

• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is displayed.

390
 12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used, O

OWhen there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables
and press [OK].
1 Turn on the connection for the device icon
for the second AeroDR I/F Cable.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to "12.9 Activation of AeroDR
SYSTEM related devices".

Chapter 12
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable with the same

procedure as the first AeroDR I/F Cable.

• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable is

automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed
in the [Device Sub ID] of [I/F Cable Setting].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
sub-ID by this method.
• For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6 Set the following items in [I/F Cable Setting].

Setting item Settings

Read the bar code and get the Serial
number of the AeroDR I/F Cable.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number]
the form of product code (4 digits)
-serial number (5 digits).
Input the I/F Cable name within 10
[Display
characters.
Name]
Default setting: IF Cable

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The serial number of the AeroDR I/F Cable is de-
scribed on the tag attached to it.
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

391
12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

12.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger

4 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used,
and press [OK].
setting
Set up when using the AeroDR Battery Charger to reg-
ister and charge the AeroDR Detector.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• AeroDR Detector to be used is necessary to set up the
AeroDR Battery Charger for registering. The AeroDR
Detector is not necessary to set up the AeroDR Bat-
tery Charger just for charging, so steps 1 - 4 are not
necessary.
• When there are multiple AeroDR Battery Chargers for
registering, connect and set up each device.
• Even if the AeroDR Battery Charger is used only for
charging, setting is still necessary for device registration.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR Detector to be • The device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Char-
used is powered on. ger is automatically retrieved, and it will be dis-
played in the [Device Sub ID] of [AeroDR Bat-
tery Charger].
2 Insert the AeroDR Detector into the Aero-
DR Battery Charger.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or
• Insert the AeroDR Detector with correction data regis- read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
tered referencing the "12.10.6 AeroDR Detector cor- vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
rection data registration". not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device sub-ID by this method.
before this operation, the sub-ID of that device may • For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
be displayed. When you press [Download] at the next plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
step, the device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger format.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
to be set up is obtained.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Set the following items in [AeroDR Battery
3 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Battery Charger].
Charger].

Setting item Settings

Read the bar code and get the Serial
number of AeroDR Battery Charger.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number] the form of product code (4 digits)
-serial number (5 digits).
Input the Battery Charger name within
[Display
10 characters.
Name] Default setting: Battery Charger
Select [For Charging Only] or [For
Registration/Charging] for the Battery
[Type]
Charger type.
Default setting: For Registration/Charging

• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-

played.

392
 12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set up of the dip switch on the AeroDR Battery Char- 12.10.10 AeroDR Detector setting
ger is required when [For Charging Only] is selected
in the [Type]. Refer to the "Installation of the AeroDR Set up the AeroDR Detector with communication con-
Battery Charger for charging only" in the "AeroDR firmed referencing the "12.10.7 Confirmation of Aero-
SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
DR Detector communication".
• If [For Charging Only] is selected as [Type], the Aero-
Setting is not required if the default network setting of
DR Detector is not registered with an exposure room,
because no notification is sent to the RM when the
the AeroDR is to be used.

Chapter 12
AeroDR Detector is mounted on the AeroDR Battery
Charger. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Detector's serial number which was ac-
quired in "12.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • registration" will be displayed in [Serial Number].
• Serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger is de- Confirm that the serial number displayed is identical
scribed on the sticker on side of the main body. to the serial number on the identification label(sticker)
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read- attached to the AeroDR Detector before setting up.
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

O
OWhen there are multiple AeroDR Battery HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Chargers • If connected to AeroDR Battery Charger only, replace
the word "AeroDR I/F Cable" with "AeroDR Battery
1 Turn on the connection for the device icon Charger" as you read.

for the second AeroDR Battery Charger. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable is con-

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit.
• For the operation, refer to "12.9 Activation of AeroDR
SYSTEM related devices". 2 Confirm that the AeroDR detector to be
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • used is powered on.

2 Set up the AeroDR Battery Charger with 3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-
the same procedure as the first AeroDR DR I/F Cable.
Battery Charger.
4 Set the following items of [AeroDR Detec-
tor Setting] according to the institution
environment.

393
12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

Setting item Settings

The AeroDR Detector's serial num- 12.10.11 Saving of settings
[Serial ber which was acquired in "12.10.6
Number] AeroDR Detector correction data
When all settings of AeroDR SYSTEM are completed,
registration" will be displayed.
save the settings and close the AeroDR unit setting
Input the IP address for the wired con-
[Wired IP Ad- screen.
nection of the AeroDR Detector.
dress]
Default setting: 192.168.20.201
Input the IP address for the wireless
1 Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting
[Wireless IP
connection of the AeroDR Detector.
screen.
Address]
Default setting: 192.168.20.211
Input the default gateway of the Aero-
[Default Gate-
DR Detector.
way]
Default setting: 0.0.0.0
Input the subnet mask of the AeroDR
[Subnet
Detector.
Mask]
Default setting: 255.255.255.0

• The settings is registered in this device's RM as

5 Press [Upload]. local settings.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The warning message is displayed when the "Pro-
cessing" screen is closed by pressing [Cancel] during
an upload, but this does not indicate a problem.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Close the sub-menu screen.

• The settings are uploaded to the AeroDR Detector.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• AeroDR Detector setting changes may take up to a
maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
• When the IP address set for a segment is different
from the IP address of this device, the "Processing"
screen may not disappear, although settings are be-
ing uploaded to the AeroDR Detector. After waiting for
30 seconds or more, press [Cancel] and perform ping
from the Windows command prompt and confirm that
there is no response from the IP address before the
change.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

394
 12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

12.10.12 AeroDR 1012HQ

Settings

Configure the following settings when using the

AeroDR 1012HQ.

1 Press the CS-7 icon.

Chapter 12
• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

3 Configure the following [Image Size Set-

ting].

Setting item Settings

Select the reading im-
age size when using the
[10"x12" Read Image
AeroDR 1012HQ from
Size at the time of using
[According to Aero DR
the AeroDR Cassette]
cassette] and [According
to Regius Cassette].
Select the HOST output
[10"x12" HOST Output image size when using
Image Size at the time the AeroDR 1012HQ from
of using the AeroDR [According to Aero DR
Cassette] cassette] and [According
to Regius Cassette].

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
• Be sure to select [According to AeroDR Cassette] for
the [10"x12" Read Image Size at the time of using the
2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.
AeroDR Cassette] setting, when using the AeroDR
1012HQ.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

• The settings are stored, and the screen is closed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 Close the sub-menu screen.

395
12.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

4.11 Setting of the IP address of this

device

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

To next page

396
 12.11 Setting of the wireless LAN with the AeroDR
Portable UF Unit

Connect this device and the AeroDR Portable UF Unit

via the built-in wireless LAN.

12.11.1 Setting of the IP address

of the built-in wireless LAN

Chapter 12
The setting method of the IP address of the built-in
wireless LAN is as follows.

1 Press the CS-7 icon. • The [Network Connections] screen is displayed.

3 Right-click [Wireless Network Connection]

and press [Properties].

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Press [Network Setting] on the sub-menu

screen.

• The [Wireless Network Connection Properties]

screen is displayed.

397
12.11 Setting of the wireless LAN with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit

4 Press [Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/

IPv6)] to release the selection.

• The [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)

Properties] screen is displayed.

6 Select [Use the following IP address] and

set the following items.
5 Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/
IPv4)] and press [Properties].

Setting Item Settings

Enter the IP address in accordance
[IP address] with the facility environment.
Default setting: 192.168.20.120
Enter the subnet mask of the selected
[Subnet
device.
mask]
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Enter the default gateway address.
[Default Entry is not necessary if there is no
gateway] gateway on the network.
Default setting: 0.0.0.0

398
 12.11 Setting of the wireless LAN with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit

7 Press [OK].
12.11.2 Network setting of the
built-in wireless LAN
The network setting of the built-in wireless LAN is as
follows.

1 Press [Access Point] on the sub-menu

screen.

Chapter 12
8 Press [OK].

2 Press [Add].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If there are 2 wireless network adapters, press [Change
adapter] and select the network adapter to be set.

9 Close the [Network Connections] screen.

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

399
12.11 Setting of the wireless LAN with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit

3 Press [Manually create a network profile]. 5 Press [Next].

4 Set the following items.

6 Press [Close].

Setting item Setting detail

Enter the SSID of the access point to
connect.
• For connection with the AeroDR
[Network name] Portable UF Unit, enter the [SSID]
set in "12.10.5 AeroDR Access Point
setting".
Example: KMMG_AeroDR_1
Select the type of the security for the
access point to connect.
[Security type]
• For AeroDR Portable UF Unit, select
[WPA2-Personal].
Select the type of the encryption for the
[Encryption access point to connect.
• Set network adapter is displayed in the manage-
type] • For AeroDR Portable UF Unit, select
[AES]. ment screen of the wireless network.
Enter the security key for the SSID of
the access point to connect.
• For the AeroDR Portable UF Unit,
[Security Key] enter the [Passphrase] set in "12.10.5
AeroDR Access Point setting".
Example: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt4F9ODu96Xz
tI89u93ftEfrzXwe19
[Start this con-
nection auto- Select this.
matically]
[Connect even
if the network is Do not select this.
not broadcasting]

400
 12.11 Setting of the wireless LAN with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit

7 Close the wireless network management

screen.

Chapter 12
8 Close the sub-menu screen.

401
 12.12 Removal of temporarily connected Ethernet cable

1 Remove the Ethernet cable connected to

the AeroDR Portable UF Unit from the hub
for the AeroDR Detector registration side.

2 Remove the Ethernet cable connected to

the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.

3 Attach the Cable Cover to the AeroDR

Portable UF Unit.

4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync

Setting

4.13 Restart of this device

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Set-
ting".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

To next page

402
 12.13 Analysis of AeroDR Detector

Flow chart of the AerDR Detector analysis is as follows. The process time in the flow chart is a rough estimate.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Analyze the AeroDR Detector with the portable X-ray device during the portable X-ray device operation.
• When using both X-ray device in the general exposure room and the portable X-ray device, analyze the AeroDR Detector
with the X-ray device in the general exposure room with Aero Sync mode.

Chapter 12
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the analysis method of AeroDR Detector, refer to "5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Roam the AeroDR Detector to

the device with Aero Sync

Place the AeroDR Detector on

the floor, etc., and make the
distance from the X-ray focus
(SID) to 2m

Expose raw images under the

calibration condition of 0.1 mR,
1.0 mR and 3.0 mR.

FAIL
Carry out calibration. (first time)
Unevenness analysis
200 sec 60 sec

FAIL(first time) PASS

Expose raw images under the

calibration condition of 0.1 mR, Defect analysis
1.0 mR and 3.0 mR. 80 sec

PASS

Unevenness analysis FAIL(second time)

60 sec

PASS

Defect analysis FAIL(second time) Back up the complete set of

80 sec data for the analysis result

PASS

Handle the problem by referring

Existence of CS-7 with NO
to "Fixing Problems" in "AeroDR
SRM/S-SRM link SYSTEM Installation/Service
Manual".
YES

Roam the AeroDR Detector to

the device with SRM or S-SRM
link

Carry out the calibration on this * The calibration is not necessary

device that is linked with SRM Carry out calibration.* when it has already been completed.
or S-SRM.

Complete AeroDR Detector

analysis

403
 12.14 Deployment to the installation locations and con-
nection to the institution network

12.14.1 Deployment of
respective devices to
the installation locations
Install the respective devices in the installation loca-
tion.

1 Install this device, AeroDR Portable UF

Unit, and peripheral devices in the instal-
lation location.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the deployment of the AeroDR Portable UF Unit,
refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manu-
al".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

12.14.2 Connection to the

institution network
Connect this device and the institution network.
Do not perform this task if not connecting with institu-
tion network.

1 Connect the Ethernet cable of the institu-

tion network to the hub that is connected
to this device and the AeroDR Portable UF
Unit.

4.17 Peripheral devices setting

4.18 Activation

4.19 Confirmation of the version of this

device

4.20 Roaming environment settings

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.17 Peripheral devices setting" first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

To next page

404
 12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

Set this device and the channel of the AeroDR Access

Point built in the AeroDR Portable UF Unit. 12.15.1 Preset Channel Setting
This operation is not required when channel switching
of the AeroDR Access Point is not performed.

1 Start the service tool.

Chapter 12
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set the channel presets before setting the AeroDR Ac- 2 Press the AeroDR Access Point icon.
cess Point channel settings.
• It is necessary to set the channel preset settings be-
fore setting the AeroDR Access Point automatic set-
tings.
• If the tab is switched with the channel presets not set,
the following warning message is displayed.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The channel for the AeroDR Access Point can be set
either automatically or manually.
–– In the automatic setting of the AeroDR Access
Point, the system automatically surveys the signal
in the location where automatic selection can be
executed and selects an appropriate channel based
on the results to set the AeroDR Access Point ac-
cordingly.
When the system is operated in location where the
signal environment may change, an appropriate
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
channel can be selected in response to any change.
–– In the manual setting of the AeroDR Access Point,
the channels to be used are registered in advance, 3 Press [Channel Setting] in the sub-menu
and a channel is selected to set the AeroDR Access screen.
Point during operation.
This method is used when the channel to be used in
the operating location is fixed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

405
12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

Setting item Settings

Select a country name for the oper-
ating location. The channel presets
[Country]
usable in the selected country are dis-
played in the [Channel List].
Select the channel to use. A check-
mark is added to the selected channel.
When the channel is DFS, an asterisk
[Channel List] (*) is displayed in [DFS].
* When a preset is selected, chan-
nels other than DFS channels are all
selected in the displayed list.
• The AP Channel setting tool screen is displayed.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
4 Press the [Preset Channel] tab.
• In the channels of [Channel List], the code on the left
side of the hyphen indicates the channel and the code
on the right side of the hyphen indicates the frequency.
Example: In 36-5.18G, 36 is the channel and 5.18G is
the frequency.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Press [Save].

• The Preset Channel setting screen is displayed.

5 Set the following items.

• A confirmation message is displayed.

7 Press [OK].

406
 12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

8 Press [Close]. 3 Press [Channel Setting] in the sub-menu

screen.

Chapter 12
12.15.2 AeroDR Access Point
auto setting

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the AeroDR Access Point icon.

• The AP Channel setting tool screen is displayed.

4 Press the [Auto Channel] tab.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

• The Auto Channel setting screen is displayed.

407
12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

5 Set the following items. 7 Press [OK].

Setting item Settings 8 Press [Close].

Select a network of this device to survey
the signal. When there are several options,
[Survey Net- follow "12.11.1 Setting of the IP address
work Interface] of the built-in wireless LAN" to check the
name of the built-in wireless network and
select it.
Select a connection mode of this de-
vice and the AeroDR Access Point in
accordance with operating state.
[Wired]: This device and the AeroDR
[Connection
Access Point are connected by a
Mode]
wired connection
[Wireless]: This device and the
AeroDR Access Point are connected by 9 Confirm the [Auto CH] icon is displayed
a wireless connection on the system monitor screen - [Portable]
screen.
6 Press [Save].

• A confirmation message is displayed.

408
 12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

12.15.3 AeroDR Access Point

manual setting

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the AeroDR Access Point icon.

Chapter 12
• The AP Channel setting tool screen is displayed.

4 Press the [ManualChannel] tab.

• The Manual Channel setting screen is displayed.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

5 Press [New].
3 Press [Channel Setting] in the sub-menu
screen.

409
12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

7 Select a channel you want to use from

[Item], and press [>] to move the channel
to [Selected Item].

• A new Manual Channel setting screen is dis-

played.

6 Set the following items.

• When multiple channels are moved to [Selected
Item], the channel on the top of the list is prior to
others. To change the priority, select the channel
you want to change and press [Up] or [Down] to
change the list order.

Setting item Settings

Management number of the Access
[Setting No.] Point information is displayed.
This content cannot be changed.
[Access Point Input the Access Point information
Name] name.
Select the channel information set to 8 Press [Regist].
the AeroDR Access Point.
• TRUE: Channel information that is set
[Enabled]
• FALSE: Channel information that is
not set
Default setting: [FALSE]
Select the location to set Access Point
information.
[Location] Select from [Ward], [Floor], [X-Ray
room], or [Others].
Default setting: [Ward]
Select the serial number of the AeroDR
[AP S/N]
Access Point.
Select the radio frequency band of the
[Radio
Access Point information. Currently,
frequency
only [IEEE802.11a] can be selected.
band]
Default setting: [IEEE802.11a]

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If there are multiple Access Point information items,
make sure to select [TRUE] for the Access Point in-
formation that is the same as the channel set to the • A confirmation message is displayed.
AeroDR Access Point. Once [TRUE] is selected for
one, all other channel information items are changed
to [FALSE].
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

410
 12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

9 Press [OK]. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• Each item that is set will be displayed on the system
monitor screen - [Portable] screen.

(a)

(c)

Chapter 12
(b)
(d)

(a) The AeroDR Access Point where [TRUE] is se-

lected in [Enabled] is displayed.
(b) The AeroDR Access Point where [FALSE] is se-
lected in [Enabled] is displayed.
(c) The location where the AeroDR Access Point select-
ed in [Location] is installed is displayed with an icon.
(d) The AeroDR Access Point name entered in [Ac-
cess Point Name] is displayed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The set AeroDR Access Point information is dis-
played.

10 Press [Close].

411
12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

12.15.4 Addition of the AeroDR

3 Press [New].

Access Point information

Add the AeroDR Access Point information to be con-
nected with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.

1 Display the AP Channel setting tool

screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 1-3 of "12.15.3 Aero-
DR Access Point manual setting".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press the [ManualChannel] tab.

• A new Manual Channel setting screen is dis-

played.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Even in cases where there is AeroDR Access Point in-
formation whose settings have not been saved, if [New]
is pressed, contents in the process of setting will be
cleared, and the default settings are restored. Perform
the operation after saving the information setting that
is not saved.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Set the AeroDR Access Point.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The Manual Channel setting screen is displayed. • For the operation, refer to steps 5-10 of "12.15.3 Aero-
DR Access Point manual setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

412
 12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

12.15.5 Change of the AeroDR

Access Point information
Change the AeroDR Access Point information to be
connected with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.

1 Display the AP Channel setting tool

screen.

Chapter 12
• The setting is displayed on [Selected Access
Point].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 1-3 of "12.15.3 Aero-
DR Access Point manual setting".
4 Input or select the items to be changed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press the [ManualChannel] tab.

5 Press [Regist].

• The Manual Channel setting screen is displayed.

3 Select the AeroDR Access Point whose

information you want to change.

• A message screen to confirm overwriting is dis-

played.

413
12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

6 Press [OK].
12.15.6 Deletion of the AeroDR
Access Point information
Delete the AeroDR Access Point information to be con-
nected with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.

1 Display the AP Channel setting tool

screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 1-3 of "12.15.3
AeroDR Access Point manual setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Press the [ManualChannel] tab.

• The setting will be changed.

7 Press [Close].

• The Manual Channel setting screen is displayed.

3 Select the AeroDR Access Point that is to

be deleted.

414
 12.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point

4 Press [Delete]. 6 Press [Close].

Chapter 12
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The [Setting No.] of the deleted AeroDR Access Point
will be vacant.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• A message screen to confirm deleting is dis- 4.21 Optional installation and data
played. migration

5 Press [OK].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.21 Optional installation and data migra-
tion".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

To next page

• The AeroDR Access Point information is de-

leted.

415
 12.16 Network configuration for each area

• When the network segment of the institution differs by individual floor, the area-specific networks can be set by fol-
lowing procedures.
Set the network settings of the network adapter to connect to the institution network, and the IP address of the con-
nected device (RIS/HOST).
• Set the area-specific network settings by the static IP address.
• The network adapter can be set for both wired/wireless.
• When the network segment of the institution is not divided, area-specific network switching is not required and this
operation is not needed.

Setting example for wireless connection

Institution
Access point (3) CS-7 area setting (3)
• Segment: 192.168.23.xxx • IP address: 192.168.23.90
Institution • SSID: AP3 • AE title: KM_CS7_U0003
3rd floor • SSID: AP3
• Other party's device (RIS/HOST)
- IP address: Other party's IP address on same segment
- AE title: Other party's AE title on same segment

RIS/HOST

Move to a different floor

Change CS-7 area

CS-7 area setting (2)

Access point (2) • IP address: 192.168.22.90
• Segment: 192.168.22.xxx • AE title: KM_CS7_U0002
Institution • SSID: AP2 • SSID: AP2
2nd floor • Other party's device (RIS/HOST)
- IP address: Other party's IP address on same segment
- AE title: Other party's AE title on same segment

RIS/HOST

Move to a different floor

Change CS-7 area

CS-7 area setting (1)

Access point (1) • IP address: 192.168.21.90
• Segment: 192.168.21.xxx • AE title: KM_CS7_U0001
Institution • SSID: AP1 • SSID: AP1
1st floor • Other party's device (RIS/HOST)
- IP address: Other party's IP address on same segment
- AE title: Other party's AE title on same segment

RIS/HOST

* There is no SSID setting for the CS-7 area setting when connecting via a wired connection.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This function can only be set when [Portable Setting] of the CS-7 setting screen is enabled.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

416
 12.16 Network configuration for each area

12.16.1 Creating a new area

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

Chapter 12
• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

4 Press [Add] of [Area setting].

• The area name can now be entered.

5 Enter an area name of 10 characters or

less.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

• A new area is created.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To create multiple areas, repeat steps 4 and 5.
• To change the area name, press [Edit] or right click on
the area name to switch to a state in which the area
name can be changed and change the name.
• When multiple areas are used, the display order of the
areas can be changed using [Up]/[Down].

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

417
12.16 Network configuration for each area

12.16.2 Network configuration

3 Set the following items in [Unit].

for each area

1 Press [Setting] for the network adaptor to

be set.

Setting item Settings

The device to be configured is dis-
[Unit]
played.
Select to switch the network configu-
ration to the configuration shown here
when the area is changed.
Do not use the same device as the
• The setting screen is displayed. [switching switching target for multiple network
target] adaptors.
Do not set a device whose RIS ser-
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • vice class is [Detached] to a switching
• Give the network adapter an easy-to-recognize name target.
so that you can easily select the adapter to be config- The default setting is [OFF].
ured. Enter the IP address of this device.
• You can modify the name of network adapters on the [IP address] Can only be set in devices for which
[switching target] is [ON].
control panel of Windows.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Enter the AE title for this device.
Enter the item with 16 or less charac-
[AE title] ters.
2 Set the following items in [CS-7]. Can only be set in devices for which
[switching target] is [ON].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The procedure for copying already-configured network
settings from an area into another area is as follows.
(a) Press [Copy] on the setting screen for the original
area.

Setting item Settings

[IP address] Enter IP address of this device.
(a)
[Subnet
Enter the subnet mask of this device.
mask]
Enter the default gateway address of
[Default gate- this device.
way] If there is no gateway on the network,
enter "0.0.0.0".
Enter the AE title of this device. (b) Select the copy destination area in the [Copy net-
[AE title] Enter the item with 16 or less charac- work configuration of for each area] dialog.
ters.
(c) Press [Copy].
Enter the SSID of the wireless LAN
access point.
[SSID] Enter 32 or less characters.
* [SSID] is displayed only when the (b)
wireless LAN adapter is used.
(c)

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

418
 12.16 Network configuration for each area

4 Press [OK]. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• Pressing [Cancel] discards the entered content and
returns to the CS-7 setting screen.
• On completing the settings, [Network configuration
switching] of the configured network adaptor changes
from [Not configured] to [Configured].

Chapter 12
• The setting state of the network adaptor and the set-
ting screen display button change according to the
state as follows.
Setting screen
display button

Setting state

Setting screen display button

[Setting]: Displays the setting screen. Displayed when
• The configuration is stored and the CS-7 setting the setting state is [Not configured] or [Configured in-
screen is displayed. completely].
• After selecting another area, set the network con- [Unsetting]: Temporarily deletes the completed net-
figuration for each area by repeating steps 1 to 4. working settings. Displayed when the setting state is
[Configured].
Setting state
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
[Not configured]: Displayed when no applicable network
• You should be aware that all the settings are cleared if adapters have been set for the area-specific network.
you press [Clear]. [Configured]: Displayed when the applicable network
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • adapters have been set correctly for the area-specific
network. Switching the area also switches the appli-
cable network adapter settings.
[Configured incompletely]: Displayed when the area-
specific network settings are being edited. The appli-
cable network adapter settings are not applied when
the area is switched.
• Pressing [Unsetting] will result in the settings being
[Configured incompletely], and the button will change
to [Setting]. Pressing the [Setting] button again will
display the setting screen, and allow the settings to be
edited.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

• The settings are stored and the screen is closed.

6 Close the sub-menu screen.

419
12.16 Network configuration for each area

12.16.3 Initial area selection 12.16.4 Other settings

1 Restart this device. Deletion of the area for which settings have
been configured
2 Confirm that the device is connected to • To delete a configured area, select the area to be
the network. deleted in [Area setting] and press [Delete].
• You can connect the device to any network that
is set on the area selection screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When wired connection is used in the area where the
device is used, connect it with a hub.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Press [>>] on the initial screen of this de- Change of the configured settings for the
vice, then press the area selection button area-specific network
for which [AreaNotSet] is displayed. • To change the configured area-specific network
settings, press [Unsetting] for the network adaptor
that is to be changed. The [Configured] display will
change to [Configured incompletely], and [Unsetting]
will change to [Setting]. Press [Setting] and change
the settings.

4 Press the button of the area that is now

connected.

4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.22 Backup of the setting data of this de-
vice".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 Confirm that the name of the selected area

is displayed on the area selection button.
To next page

420
 12.17 Final operation check and delivery

Perform the final operation check and delivery.

12.17.2 Delivery
12.17.1 Exposure confirmation Deliver this device to the user.

Confirm that there is no problem with the operation by

1 Give instruction to the operators.

Chapter 12
performing the set of exposure operation. • Provide a description of series of exposure ac-
tions.
1 Perform a series of exposures under the • Provide a description of User tool for administra-
operating conditions in the institution. tor of this device.

2 Confirm that there is no problem with the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

operation of any of the devices and ex- • Editing of Exam. Tag, etc., is performed by the admin-
posed images. istrator of this device; you should however provide
operators with a description of the method as needed.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Particularly when you set AeroDR 1717HQ or AeroDR
1012HQ, be sure to add the AeroDR detector size set-
• Always check the operating conditions in the institu-
ting to the Exam. Tag.
tion.
• When it is required to change the wireless channel,
• Before performing exposures, be sure to obtain per-
describe the location to change the wireless.
mission from institution management personnel.
• When using this device in Aero Sync mode, explain
• Take particular care in the following cases.
the relationship between the exposure condition range
–– When an order is received from a Radiology Infor-
and the X-ray sensitivity based on the result of the
mation System (RIS).
Aero Sync signal acquisition. And if it is requested ac-
–– When sending images to a server.
cording to the user's case of usage, modify the X-ray
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
detection level and Aero Sync button setting.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Reconfirm the settings in this chapter if any problem
occurs.
2 Clean up to complete the installation.
• The installation of this device is now completed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

12.17.3 Chassis registration

preparation

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The manufacturer's user registration may be neces-
sary depending on which chassis is used. As a prepa-
ration, you should record the serial number of the
chassis.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For information on the registration method, refer to the
operation manual for the chassis.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

421
422
 Chapter
13
Installation Procedure for This
Device and AeroDR Stitching Unit
This chapter describes the installation of this device and AeroDR Stitching Unit.

423
 13.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR
Stitching Unit

This section describes the installation procedure based on the connection example (AeroDR Stitching Unit/AeroDR
Detector Wired Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/SRM (XIF board)) as follows.

O
OAeroDR Stitching Unit/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/AeroDR Interface Unit/SRM (XIF board)

Exposure room AeroDR

Stitching Unit

X-ray device
X-ray Tube

AeroDR
UF Cable Power Supply Unit AeroDR Stitching
AeroDR X-ray Auto Barrier Unit
I/F Cable

XIF
Power
source Hub
ECB

AeroDR Generator
AeroDR Interface Unit Interface Unit

Hub

Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
Ethernet cable(PoE) Ethernet-serial
Ethernet cable converter
AeroDR Stitching UT Cable
Grounding cable CS-7

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To use the AeroDR Stitching Unit, make wired connection with the AeroDR Detector.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

424
 13.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR
Stitching Unit

The installation operating process for this device and the AeroDR Stitching Unit is as follows. Confirm that the
AeroDR SYSTEM has already been installed before installing the AeroDR Stitching System.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To install the AeroDR Stitching Unit, the AeroDR Detector must have already been installed. Make sure to start the proce-
dure after installing AeroDR SYSTEM devices other than the AeroDR Stitching Unit.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The workflow to install the AeroDR Stitching Unit

1 13.3 Temporary connection of AeroDR Stitching System 1 3.4 Installation of respective devices

2 4.6 Registration of license 2 3.5 Installation of the AeroDR Stitching System

Chapter 13
3 3.6 Startup checks of respective devices

3 13.4 Activation of AeroDR Stitching System 4 3.7 Setting the CS-7

4 13.5 AeroDR Stitching System setting

5 13.6 Saving of settings

6 13.7 Setting of user tool

7 13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System 5 3.8 Checking the AeroDR Stitching System

6 3.9 SID adjustment

7 3.10 Illumination gain

8 3.11 Height detection

3.12 Correcting the exposure position

3.12.2 Measuring the picture top

position correction value

3.12.3 Measuring the picture center

9 position correction value

3.12.5 Measuring the picture lower

position correction value

3.12.7 Correction values confirmation

8 4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device

9 4.23 Final operation check and delivery 10 3.13 Final operation check and delivery

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation of the section enclosed with the dotted line in above flow, refer to each section of the "Chapter 4 Installation
Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)".
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR Stitching Unit, refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installation/Service Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

425
 13.3 Temporary connection of AeroDR Stitching System

Connect this device and the AeroDR Stitching System.

1 Make sure that this device is powered off.

2 Make temporary connection of AeroDR

Stitching System.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the temporary connection of AeroDR Stitching
System, refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installa-
tion/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Start AeroDR Stitching System, AeroDR

SYSTEM devices, and this device.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For turning the power on of the AeroDR Stitching Sys-
tem, refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installation/
Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4.6 Registration of license

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• This operation is not necessary if you also registered
the license of the AeroDR Stitching System when in-
stalling the AeroDR SYSTEM.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.6 Registration of license".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

To next page

426
 13.4 Activation of AeroDR Stitching System

Turn on the connection to the AeroDR Stitching Sys- 3 Press [Close].

tem to perform the settings.

1 Press the AeroDR stitching unit icon.

Chapter 13
• Connection is turned on and display of the device
icon will change.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Select the connection check box.

427
 13.5 AeroDR Stitching System setting

13.5.1 Adjustment of the

2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

AeroDR Stitching Unit

Set the AeroDR Stitching Unit of the AeroDR Stitching
System.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the IP address, the subnet mask or the gateway
address of this device is changed, restore the default
settings before starting the settings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to set the IP address of this device, refer to
"4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Press the AeroDR stitching unit icon.

• The AeroDR unit setting screen is displayed.

3 Set the following items of [Stitching Unit

Setting].

Setting item Settings

[Serial Num- Displays the serial number of the
ber] AeroDR Stitching Unit.
Input the name of the AeroDR
Stitching Unit. Input up to 10
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
characters.
[Display The display name set here is also
Name] used as the display name of the
AeroDR UF Cable in the AeroDR
Stitching Unit.
Default setting: "LongLength".
Input the IP address of the AeroDR
[IP Address] Stitching Unit.
Default setting: 192.168.20.231

428
 13.5 AeroDR Stitching System setting

Setting item Settings

13.5.2 Setting the AeroDR UF Cable
Input the default gateway of the
[Default Gate-
AeroDR Stitching Unit. in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
way]
Default setting: 0.0.0.0
Input the subnet mask of the AeroDR
Set the AeroDR UF cable included in the AeroDR
[Subnet Stitching Unit.
Stitching Unit.
Mask]
Default setting: 255.255.255.0

1 Confirm that power of the AeroDR Detec-

tor is on, and insert it into the AeroDR
4 Press [Upload].
Stitching Unit.

2 Press [Download] under [Stitching Unit

Cable Setting].

Chapter 13
• The settings are uploaded to the AeroDR Stitch-
ing Unit.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When setting the AeroDR Stitching Unit after restoring • The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-
the IP address of this device to its default value, per- played.
form the following operations.
* If the IP address of this device that suits the institu-
tion environment is the same as the default address,
3 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used,
this operation is not required.
and press [OK].
(1) Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen to
save the settings.
(2) Change the IP address of this device to an IP ad-
dress that suits the institution environment. For de-
tails, refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this
device".
(3) Restart this device.
• AeroDR Stitching Unit setting changes may take up to
a maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
• When the IP address set for a segment is different
from that of this device, the "Processing" screen may
not disappear although settings are being uploaded
to the AeroDR Stitching Unit. After waiting for 30 sec-
onds or more, press [Cancel], then perform ping from
the Windows command prompt and confirm that there
is no response from the IP address before the change.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR UF Cable in
the AeroDR Stitching Unit is automatically re-
trieved, and it will be displayed in [Device Sub
ID] of [Stitching Unit Cable Setting].

429
13.5 AeroDR Stitching System setting

4 Set the following items in [Stitching Unit

Cable Setting].

Setting item Settings

Input the serial number of the AeroDR
UF Cable in the AeroDR Stitching
[Serial Num-
Unit, or read the bar code.
ber]
Input in "product code (4 digits) - serial
number. (5 digits)".
Displays the name of the AeroDR UF
Cable in the AeroDR Stitching Unit.
[Display The name that was registered as [Dis-
Name] play Name] in [Stitching Unit Setting]
is displayed.
Default setting: LongLength
Select [Image Orientation].
If [Insertion Opening] is [Right], select
[Image Orien- [Standard].
tation] If [Insertion Opening] is [Left], select
[Upside down].
Default setting: Standard
Select the insertion direction of the
[Insertion
AeroDR Detector from [Left] or [Right].
Opening]
Default setting: Left

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To confirm the serial number of the AeroDR UF Cable
in the AeroDR Stitching Unit, remove the top cover
and check the seal located at the top left.
• When reading the serial number with a bar code
reader, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

5 Set the following items of [WS Mapping].

Setting item Settings

WS1, 2 and 3 respectively indicate
the first, second and third stages of
[Stitching the XIF or XGIF board in the AeroDR
Unit] Generator Interface Unit.
Sets correspondences with the WS
allocated to the AeroDR Stitching Unit.

* It is possible to enter settings for [WS4], but they will

not function.

430
 13.6 Saving of settings

When all settings of AeroDR Stitching System are

completed, save the settings and close the AeroDR
unit setting screen.

1 Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting

screen.

Chapter 13
• The settings will be registered in this device's
RM as local settings.

2 Close the sub-menu screen.

3 Restart this device.

431
 13.7 Setting of user tool

Perform necessary settings for the AeroDR Stitching

System operation on the user tool screen.

1 Select the [User Tool] tab.

• The Exam. Tag setting tool screen is displayed.

3 Press the [Property List] tab.

• The user tool screen is displayed.

2 Press [Setting], and press [Detailed].

• The [Property List] screen is displayed.

432
 13.7 Setting of user tool

4 Select [STITCHING] from [BodyPart].

5 Select [LongLength] from [Priority Modal-

ity].

Chapter 13
6 Press [OK] on the [Property List] screen.
• The settings are stored and the screen is closed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

433
 13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

Adjust the AeroDR Stitching System.

13.8.2 Adjusting SID
13.8.1 Checking the AeroDR
Stitching System Adjust SID according to the installation environment of
the facility.
Confirm the status of the AeroDR Stitching System.
1 Press the AeroDR stitching unit icon.
1 Confirm that power of the AeroDR Detec-
tor is on, and insert it into the AeroDR
Stitching Unit.

2 On the system monitor screen, confirm

that the AeroDR Stitching System and this
device are properly connected to each
other.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Confirm that this device is properly connected to the
AeroDR Stitching System.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

Normal Disconnected
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

434
 13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

2 Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu

screen. 13.8.3 Illumination gain

Measure illuminance with the AeroDR Stitching Sys-

tem and select the illuminance according to the result.

1 Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu

screen.

Chapter 13
• The AeroDR Stitching Unit Adjustment screen is
displayed.

3 Select a SID value.

• The AeroDR Stitching Unit Adjustment screen is

displayed.

• Select from [1500], [2000] or [2400]. 2 Select [2.00] for [Illumination gain].

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the setting value, refer to "AeroDR Stitching
System Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Press [Upload].
3 Press [Upload].

5 Press [Close] to close the AeroDR Stitch-

4 Press [Close] to close the AeroDR Stitch-
ing Unit Adjustment screen.
ing Unit Adjustment screen.

435
13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

5 Press [I/O Test] on the sub-menu screen. 8 Irradiate the irradiation field light of the X-
ray tube onto the slit plate, and measure
the light intensity of the irradiation field
light of the X-ray tube.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the measurement of the light intensity, refer to
"AeroDR Stitching System Installation/Service Manu-
al".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

9 While irradiating the irradiation field light

on the light detector, check the value
shown on the I/O test screen for [Barrier
Unit On a photon detection sensor] (0 to
1023), and record it as Value A (The AD
value when the light is detected).

• The I/O test screen is displayed.

6 Select the [Mask board Mid pos] and

press [Execute].
10 Press [Close] and the AeroDR Stitching
Unit Adjustment screen closes.

11 Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu

screen.

7 Confirm that the slit plate of the AeroDR

Stitching X-ray Auto Barrier Unit stops at
the middle position.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the stop position of the slit plate, refer to "AeroDR
Stitching System Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• The AeroDR Stitching Unit Adjustment screen is

displayed.

436
 13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

12 Check the gain value corresponding to 17 Press [Close] and the I/O test screen clos-
numerical value A and set [Illumination es.
gain].
18 Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu
screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For checking the gain value, refer to "AeroDR Stitch-
ing System Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 13
13 Press [Upload].
• The AeroDR Stitching Unit Adjustment screen is
displayed.

19 Check the gain value corresponding to

numerical value B and set the [Illumination
Gain].
14 Press [Close] and the AeroDR Stitching
Unit Adjustment screen closes.

15 Press [I/O Test] on the sub-menu screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For checking the gain value, refer to "AeroDR Stitch-
ing System Installation/Service Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

20 Press [Upload].

• The I/O test screen is displayed.

16 While irradiating the irradiation field light

on the light detector, check the value 21 Press [Close] and the AeroDR Stitching
shown on the I/O test screen for [Barrier Unit Adjustment screen closes.
Unit On a photon detection sensor] (0 to
1023), and record it as Value B (The AD 22 Irradiate the irradiation field light of the X-
value when the light is detected). ray tube onto the slit plate, and adjust the
X-ray tube so that the cross-shaped shad-
ow of the irradiation field light is centered
on the light detector.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For adjusting the X-ray tube, refer to "AeroDR Stitch-
ing System Installation/Service Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

437
13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

23 Press [I/O Test] on the sub-menu screen.

13.8.4 Threshold magnification
settings
If height detection and irradiation field detection cannot
be performed normally, change the setting of threshold
magnification. It can be set in the range from 0 to 500.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This setting is only to be executed when height detec-
tion and irradiation field detection cannot be performed
normally.
• The I/O test screen is displayed. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

24 While irradiating the irradiation field light 1 Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu
onto the light detector, check the numeri- screen.
cal value (from 0 to 1023) for [Barrier Unit
On a photon detection sensor] on the I/O
test screen and confirm that the value is
700 or less.

• The AeroDR Stitching Unit Adjustment screen is

25 Press [Close] and the I/O test screen clos-
displayed.
es.

2 Change the [Threshold magnification]

value to a value obtained by adding 50 to
the value before change.

• If the value before the change is made is "0",

the new value is "50".

3 Press [Upload].

4 Press [Close] and the AeroDR Stitching

Unit Adjustment screen closes.

5 Perform exposure and confirm that height

detection and irradiation field detection
can be performed out normally.

438
 13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

13.8.5 Initializing exposure 13.8.6 Measuring the picture top

position correction position correction value
value (when correcting Measure the picture top position correction value ac-
picture top position) cording to the following procedure.

Before measuring and inputting exposure po-

sition correction values, initialize the correc- Operations with this device
tion values.
1 Input an ID in the [Patient ID] column and
1 Input the correction value for the expo- press the [Perform] on the patient regis-
sure position. tration screen.

Chapter 13
Setting item Settings
[Picture top position correction value] 0
[Picture middle position correction
0
value]
[Picture lower position correction value] 50

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change any other settings than those shown 2 Press [SPECIAL] on the body part selec-
above. Altered settings may cause the exposure field tion screen.
to be improperly detected.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [Upload].

3 Press [Close] on the AeroDR Stitching

Unit Adjustment screen. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If page 1/2 appears, press the selector button to dis-
4 Press [Close] on the sub-menu screen. play page 2/2.

5 Press [Close] on the system monitor

screen.
• The patient registration screen or the list screen
appears.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

439
13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

3 Select the set keys in the order of [AP Measuring displacement between the
Middle] → [Ap Lower] in the [Tot. Spine] captured shot and irradiating light
and press the [Perform].

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Set radiation dose for exposure to 80kV-20.0mAs.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Select the [Tot. Spine Ap Lower] and

check that "Ready" appears in the expo-
sure screen.

4 Check that "Please detect radiation field"

appears on the exposure screen.

2 Press the exposure switch of the X-ray

device (to take the first shot).

3 After taking the first shot, select the [Tot.

Spine AP Middle] and check that "Ready"
appears on the exposure screen.

Operations with the AeroDR Stitching

System

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operation with the AeroDR Stitching System,
refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installation/Service
Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Press the exposure switch of the X-ray

device (to take the 2nd shot).

440
 13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

5 Press [Tot. Spine AP Middle] on the expo- 7 Press [ ].

sure screen, followed by the [Viewer].

Chapter 13
6 Check the ruler scale mark at the top edge
of the captured shot.
• Compare the scale marks of the exposure field
and captured shot, and record the difference as
the "picture top position correction value".

Scale mark
of captured
shot

Scale mark of expo-

sure field

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the confirmation procedure for the difference in the
scale between the exposure field and obtained image,
refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installation/Service
Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

441
13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

13.8.7 Measuring the picture

3 Select [Ap Lower] in the [Tot. Spine] and
press the [Perform].
center position
correction value
Measure the picture center position correction value
according to the following procedure.

Operations with this device

1 Input an ID in the [Patient ID] column and

press the [Perform] on the patient regis-
tration screen.

4 Check that "Please detect radiation field"

appears on the exposure screen.

2 Press [SPECIAL] on the body part selec-

tion screen.

Operations with the AeroDR Stitching

System

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation with the AeroDR Stitching System,
refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installation/Service
Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If page 1/2 appears, press the selector button to dis-
play page 2/2.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

442
 13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

Measuring displacement between the 4 Check the ruler scale mark at the top edge
captured shot and irradiating light of the captured shot.
• Compare the scale marks of the exposure field
and captured shot, and record the difference as
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
the "picture center position correction value".
• Set radiation dose for exposure to 80kV-20.0mAs.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Scale mark
1 Check that "Ready" appears in the expo- of captured
shot
sure screen.

Chapter 13
2 Press the exposure switch of the X-ray
device (to take the first shot). Scale mark of
exposure field
3 Press [AP Middle] on the exposure screen,
followed by the [Viewer].

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the confirmation procedure for the difference in the
scale between the exposure field and obtained image,
refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installation/Service
Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 Press [ ].

443
13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

13.8.8 Initializing exposure

position correction
value (when correcting
picture lower position) • The AeroDR Stitching Unit Adjustment screen is
Before measuring image displacement and inputting displayed.
exposure position correction values, initialize the cor-
rection values. 3 Input the correction values for the expo-
sure position.
1 Press the AeroDR stitching unit icon.

Setting item Settings

[Picture top position correction value] -50
[Picture middle position correction
0
value]
[Picture lower position correction value] 0

4 Press [Upload].

5 Press [Close] on the AeroDR Stitching

Unit Adjustment screen.

6 Press [Close] on the sub-menu screen.

7 Press [Close] on the system monitor

• The sub-menu screen is displayed. screen.
• The patient registration screen or the list screen
appears.
2 Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu
screen.

444
 13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

13.8.9 Measuring the

3 Select the set keys in the order of [AP
Middle] → [Ap Lower] in the [Tot. Spine]
picture lower position and press the [Perform].
correction value
Measure the picture lower position correction value ac-
cording to the following procedure.

Operations with this device

1 Input an ID in the [Patient ID] column and

press the [Perform] on the patient regis-
tration screen.

Chapter 13
4 Check that "Please detect radiation field"
appears on the exposure screen.

2 Press [SPECIAL] on the body part selec-

tion screen.

Operations with the AeroDR Stitching

System

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation with the AeroDR Stitching System,
refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installation/Service
Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If page 1/2 appears, press the selector button to dis-
play page 2/2.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

445
13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

Measuring displacement between the 6 Check the ruler scale mark at the bottom
captured shot and irradiating light edge of the captured shot.
• Compare the scale marks of the exposure field
and captured shot, and record the difference as
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • the "picture lower position correction value".
• Set radiation dose for exposure to 80kV-20.0mAs.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Check that "Ready" appears in the expo-

sure screen.

Scale mark
of captured
shot

2 Press the exposure switch of the X-ray

device (to take the first shot).

3 After taking the first shot, check that

"Ready" appears on the exposure screen.
Scale mark of
exposure field

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the confirmation procedure for the difference in the
scale between the exposure field and obtained image,
refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installation/Service
Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

7 Press [ ].
4 Press the exposure switch of the X-ray
device (to take the 2nd shot).

5 Press [AP Middle] on the exposure screen,

followed by the [Viewer].

446
 13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

13.8.10 Setting the correction

values
Set the measured displacement as correction value.
• The AeroDR Stitching Unit Adjustment screen is
1 Press the AeroDR stitching unit icon. displayed.

3 Enter the measured picture top position

correction value, picture middle position
correction value and picture lower posi-
tion correction value.

Chapter 13
Setting item Settings
[Picture top Enter a value in the range of -128 to
position cor- 127 for the correction value of the top
rection value] screen.
[Picture
Enter a value in the range of -128 to
middle posi-
127 for the correction value of the
tion correc-
middle screen.
tion value]
[Picture lower Enter a value in the range of -128 to
position cor- 127 for the correction value of the
rection value] lower screen.

4 Press [Upload].

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu

screen.

447
13.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System

13.8.11 Correction values

confirmation

1 Confirm the set correction values.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For confirmation of the correction value, refer to "Aero-
DR Stitching System Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4.22 Backup of the setting data of this

device

4.23 Final operation check and delivery

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Check with the institution about the transmission tim-
ing of exposure conditions when X-ray information is
linked, and change it if necessary. For details, refer to
"21.5 Exposure conditions transmission setting during
exposure of the stitching unit", or "X-ray device icon"
in "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
User Tool Screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If other AeroDR SYSTEM devices than the AeroDR
Stitching System have not been delivered, refer to
"4.23.2 Delivery" to complete the delivery operation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.22 Backup of the setting data of this de-
vice" first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

448
 Chapter
14
Installation of Options
This chapter describes the operations for installing options for this device.

449
 14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter
(SYSMEX RA TA-402X)

The Ethernet-serial converter is an adapter for con- 3 Confirm that LEDs of the Ethernet-serial
verting RS-232C and Ethernet communications. converter are in the following status:
Status
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4
• SYSMEX RA TA-402X is used only in Japan. Use
Flashing Flashing Off Off
MOXA Nport 5110A in other countries.
• The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japanese
• If the LED displays of the conversion box is dif-
model SYSMEX RA TA-402X is used as an example.
ferent from the above, there is a problem with
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • the hard disk. Refer to the operation manual of
the Ethernet-serial converter when troubleshoot-
Recommended parts and conditions for the ing.
Ethernet-serial converter
Item Conditions 4 Confirm that the mode switch (rotary
Number of switch) on the side of the Ethernet-serial
1 port
ports converter is set to "0".
Ethernet 100BASE-TX/ • If it is not "0", set it to "0".
Network terminal 10BASE-T
interface
Protocol IEEE 802.3
RJ-45 Category 5 or
14.1.2 Ethernet-serial converter
Connector
higher network settings
Electrical
specification
EIA-232C compliant Configure the network settings of the Ethernet-serial
Serial inter- converter. The settings are done on this device.
Number of
face 1 port
ports
Connector D-sub 9 pin 1 Close service tools and display the Win-
Environmental dows desktop screen.
Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C
condition
2 Copy the folder "C:\TA-402X\TARemote
SetupX" from the CS-7 DRIVER CD to the
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
desktop.
• The maximum length of the RS-232C cable is 15 m.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
3 Double click [TASetup.exe].

14.1.1 Start and check of the

Ethernet-serial converter
Start the Ethernet-serial converter and check the op-
erational status.

1 Connect the power cable to the Ethernet-

serial converter. • The [TA Remote Setup X] screen will be dis-
played.
2 Plug the power cable into an outlet.
• Start the Ethernet-serial converter.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• There is no power switch on the Ethernet-serial con-
verter. It can be powered on/off by plugging/unplug-
ging the power cable.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

450
 14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (SYSMEX RA TA-402X)

4 Select [Register new] from [Network] on

14.1.3 Change of the Ethernet-serial converter
the menu bar.
address and connection of this device
and the Ethernet-serial converter
Connect this device to the Ethernet-serial converter on
a local network.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Since the address cannot be changed on the Ether-
net-serial converter itself, change the address on the
local network environment.
• Set the appropriate address to prevent address con-
flicts between this device and the Ethernet-serial
converter. The default address of the Ethernet-serial
• The [Register a new network] screen will be dis-
converter is as follows.
played.
–– Address: 192.168.200.254
–– Subnet: 255.255.255.0
• Make sure to set the address of this device before set-

Chapter 14
ting the address of the Ethernet-serial converter.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

14.1.4 Searching for Ethernet-

serial converters
5 Set the following items.
Search for Ethernet-serial converters that are currently
operating within the network.

1 Select [Search] from [Manage TA] on the

menu bar of the [TA Remote Setup X]
screen.

Setting item Settings

Enter the network name to be man-
[Network name] aged by the Ethernet-serial converter.
Enter the default value [TA-100KR-X].
Enter the subnet mask of this device
[Subnet mask] that controls the Ethernet-serial con-
verter.
Enter the [Gateway address] when the
network of this device and the network
[Gateway ad-
of the Ethernet-serial converter are
dress]
different. If changes are unnecessary,
leave the settings to [2.2.2.2].

6 Press [OK].

• The Ethernet-serial converters that are currently

operating within the network will be displayed.

451
14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (SYSMEX RA TA-402X)

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The information acquired once from the search will be
displayed as is even if a search is performed again.
If you want to display only Ethernet-serial convert-
ers that are currently running, delete unnecessary
Ethernet-serial converter information and perform the
search again. To delete, select the Ethernet-serial con-
verter to be deleted and select [Delete] from [Manage
TA] on the menu bar.

• The [Change mode] screen will be displayed.

2 Select [Setup], then press [OK].

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

14.1.5 Change of the mode

Change the Ethernet-serial converter mode.

1 Select the Ethernet-serial converter that

is currently being set and select [Convert 3 Confirm that LEDs of the Ethernet-serial
mode] from [Manage TA] on the menu bar. converter are in the following status:
Status
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4
On Off Off Off

452
 14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (SYSMEX RA TA-402X)

2 Press [OK].
14.1.6 LAN and serial settings

Perform LAN and serial settings on the [Acquire set-

tings] screen.

1 Select the Ethernet-serial converter that

is currently being set and select [Acquire
settings] from [Manage TA] on the menu
bar.

Chapter 14
• The [Acquire TA-100KR Series settings] screen
will be displayed.

3 Set the following items.

• The [Acquire settings] screen will be displayed.

453
14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (SYSMEX RA TA-402X)

Setting item Settings 14.1.8 Changing the mode

LAN settings
[Local IP ad- Enter the IP address assigned to the
again
dress] Ethernet-serial converter.
Change the mode again to [Normal operation(Rotary
[Destination IP Enter the IP address of this device that
address] controls the Ethernet-serial converter. number 0)] in the [Change mode] screen.
[Subnet mask] Enter the subnet mask.

[Gateway ad-
Enter the gateway address that was set
in the [New network settings] screen.
1 Select the Ethernet-serial converter that
dress] If changes are unnecessary, leave the
is currently being set and select [Change
settings to [2.2.2.2]. mode] from [Manage TA] on the menu bar.
Serial settings • The [Change mode] screen will be displayed.
[Baud rate] Select [4800bps].
[Data length] Select [8 bit].
[Stop bit] Select [1 bit].
2 Select [Normal operation(Rotary number
[Parity] Select [Even]. 0)], then press [OK].
[Flow control] Select [None].
* Use default values for settings other than the
above. If the settings are different from the
screen shown above, edit the settings to match
the above screen.

4 Press [Send].

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The [Change mode] screen will be displayed with
[Normal operation(Rotary number 0)] selected even
during setup. However, make sure to press [OK] to ap-
ply the change.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Confirm that LEDs of the Ethernet-serial

14.1.7 Setting confirmation converter are in the following status:
Status
Check the IP address of the Ethernet-serial converter
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4
that was set in the [TA Remote Setup X] screen.
Flashing Flashing Off Off
• If the LED displays of the Ethernet-serial con-
verter is different from the above, redo the set-
tings.
• When there are multiple Ethernet-serial convert-
ers to be set, repeat the settings from "Change
of the mode" onwards.

14.1.9 Closing the TA remote

setup

1 Select [Exit application] from [File] on the

menu bar.
• TA remote setup will close.

454
 14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (SYSMEX RA TA-402X)

2 Double click [SETUP.EXE].

14.1.10 Other settings

When the network of this device differs from the net-

work of the Ethernet-serial converter, change the gate-
way address to the gateway address of the Ethernet-
serial converter on the following setting screen.

• The [RemoteCOM - InstallShield Wizard] screen

will be displayed.

3 Press [Next] and follow the instructions

displayed on the screen to install the Re-
moteCOM.

Chapter 14
• Then set RemoteCOM.

14.1.11 New RemoteCOM

registration
4 Restart this device.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Before starting the settings, connect the Ethernet-
serial converter to the LAN. • When restarting, refer to "4.13 Restart of this device".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Copy the folder "C:\TA-402X\RmtCom"

5 Double click RemoteCOM on the Windows
taskbar, or press RemoteCOM on the Win-
from the CS-7 DRIVER CD to the desktop.
dows Start menu to start RemoteCOM.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Make sure to start RemoteCOM only after completing
the TA remote setup.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The [RemoteCOM] screen will be displayed.

455
14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (SYSMEX RA TA-402X)

6 Select [New] from [Settings] on the menu 8 Press [OK].

bar.

9 When the Download complete screen ap-

pears, press [OK].

10 When the Restart screen appears, press

[Yes] to restart this device.
• When setting other COM ports, press [No] and
repeat the operation.
• The [New registration] screen will be displayed.

7 Set the following items.

Setting item Settings

Select the COM port number to be set.
* COM1 to COM3 cannot be used.
[COM port]
* If the selected COM port is already in
use, select a different COM port.
Enter the IP address of the Ethernet-
serial converter that was set in "14.1.2
[IP address]
Ethernet-serial converter network set-
tings".
[Also set the
TA-100KR Select [Also set the TA-100KR server
server at the at the same time].
same time]

456
 14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (SYSMEX RA TA-402X)

14.1.12 Change of RemoteCOM

4 Enter the IP address and press [OK].

settings

1 Start RemoteCOM.

2 Select the Ethernet-serial converters

whose settings will be changed from the
[RemoteCOM] screen list.

5 When the Download complete screen ap-

pears, press [OK].
3 Select [Update] from [Settings] on the
menu bar.
6 When the Restart screen appears, press
[Yes] to restart this device.

Chapter 14
• When changing the setting of other COM ports,
press [No] and repeat the operation.

• The [Update settings] screen will be displayed.

457
14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (SYSMEX RA TA-402X)

14.1.13 Confirmation of the

4 Select the Ethernet-serial converters
whose settings will be checked from the
RemoteCOM settings list and select [Acquire settings] from
Confirm that the RemoteCOM server software has [Manage TA] on the menu bar.
been downloaded to the Ethernet-serial converter.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Confirmation is done while RemoteCOM is running.
Start RemoteCOM if it has not been started yet.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Start TA remote setup.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the details on how to start TA remote setup, refer
to "14.1.2 Ethernet-serial converter network settings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Confirm that [TA-100KR] is selected from

[Network] on the menu bar.
• Select it if it has not been selected yet.

• The [Acquire settings] screen will be displayed.

5 Press [OK].

3 Select [Search] from [Manage TA] on the

menu bar, then search for Ethernet-serial
converters.
• Ethernet-serial converters will be displayed in a
list.

• The [Acquire TA-100KR Series settings] screen

will be displayed.

458
 14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (SYSMEX RA TA-402X)

6 Press [Setting screen] in [Startup program

name].

• The server software will be downloaded.

(6) Perform settings for "Setting confirmation"

8 Press [Cancel].

Chapter 14
• The [Startup program name settings] screen will
be displayed.
9 Press [Back].

7 Confirm that [RmtCom] is displayed in

[Startup program name 1].

• If [RmtCom] is not displayed, the server soft-

ware may not have been downloaded properly.
If this happens, redo the settings through the
following method: 10 Select [Exit application] from [File] on the
(1) Close TA remote setup. menu bar, then close TA remote setup.
(2) Start RemoteCom.
(3) Select the Ethernet-serial converters whose
settings will be changed from the [RemoteCOM] IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
screen list. • Do not close RemoteCOM. Restart if you accidentally
closed it.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

(4) Select [Update] from [Settings] on the menu

bar.
(5) Select [Also set the TA-100KR server at the
same time] on the [Update settings] screen
and press [OK].

459
14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (SYSMEX RA TA-402X)

14.1.14 Confirmation of
operation

1 Confirm that LEDs of the Ethernet-serial

converter are in the following status:
Status
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4
Flashing Flashing
(500 ms (500 ms Off Off
intervals) intervals)
* LED 1 and LED 2 do not flash simultaneously.
You might see them flashing simultaneously or
alternately depending on the timing, but both
cases are normal.

• If the LED displays of the conversion box is dif-

ferent from the above, redo the settings.

460
 14.2 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter
(MOXA Nport 5110A)

The Ethernet-serial converter is an adapter for con-

verting RS-232C and Ethernet communications. 14.2.2 Ethernet-serial
converter setting
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The MOXA Nport 5110A can only be used overseas.
1 Make sure that this device is turned on.
Use SYSMEX RA TA-402X in Japan.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Change the IP address of this device to
Recommended parts and conditions for the "192.168.127.90".
Ethernet-serial converter
Item Conditions Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Number of • Refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device"
1 port
ports for the change of the IP address of this device.
Ethernet 100BASE-TX/ ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Network terminal 10BASE-T
interface
Protocol IEEE 802.3 3 Display the intermediate screen.

Chapter 14
RJ-45 Category 5 or
Connector
higher
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Electrical
EIA-232C compliant • For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
specification
Serial play the intermediate screen".
Number of
interface 1 port ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ports
Connector D-sub 9 pin
Environmental 4 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C diate screen.
condition

14.2.1 Temporary connection of this

device and the Ethernet-serial
converter and the X-ray device
Connect this device to the Ethernet-serial converter
and the X-ray device on a local network.

Ethernet-serial
X-ray device
converter

Ethernet connection RS-232C connection

5 Start Internet Explorer, enter

"192.168.127.254" in the address bar, and
press the [Enter] key.
• The Ethernet-serial converter setting screen will
be displayed.

461
14.2 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (MOXA Nport 5110A)

6 Press [Quick Setup]. 9 Set the following items on [Serial Set-

tings], and press [Next].

• [Step 1/3] screen is displayed.

Setting item Settings

7 Set the following items on [Network Set- [Baud rate] Select [4800] bps.
tings], and press [Next]. [Date bits] Select [8] bits.
[Stop bits] Select [1] bit.
[Parity] Select [None].
[Interface] Select [RS-232].

• [Finish Settings] screen is displayed.

10 Check the setting items, and press [Save/

Restart].

Setting item Settings

Enter the IP address (192.168.20.xx)
[IP address] of the Ethernet-serial converter.
Example: 192.168.20.92
Enter the subnet mask of the Ethernet-
[Netmask] serial converter.
Example: 255.255.255.0
Enter any gateway address of the
[Gateway]
Ethernet-serial converter.

• [Step 2/3] screen is displayed. 11 Exit Internet Explorer.

8 Confirm that [Real COM] is selected, then HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

press [Next].
• Pressing [Home] on the setting screen will not return
• Select it if it has not been selected yet.
to the Home screen since the IP address of this device
has been changed.

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• [Step 3/3] screen is displayed.

462
 14.2 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (MOXA Nport 5110A)

12 Revert the IP address of this device to the 18 Specify the destination to place the short-
default IP address, "192.168.20.90". cut and press [Next].

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device"
for the change of the IP address of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

13 Insert the provided MOXA Software CD in

the CD/DVD drive.

14 Copy \Software\Windows\Npadm_Setup_
Ver1.14_Build_10050717.zip to your desktop
and extract the file.
19 Press [Install].
15 Double click Npadm_Setup_Ver1.14_ • Installation will start.
Build_10050717.exe.
• The setup screen will be displayed.

Chapter 14
16 Press [Next].

20 Check the setting items, and press [Next].

17 Set the installation destination and press

[Next].

463
14.2 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (MOXA Nport 5110A)

21 Press [Finish]. 24 Right-click on a cell and select [Add Tar-

get].

• [Add NPort] screen is displayed.

25 Select the detected Nport5110A and press

[OK].
• Nport Administrator Configuration will start.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When it does not start, press [Start] → [All Programs]
→ [Nport administration Suite] → [Nport administer] to
start it.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

22 Right-click on a cell and select [Broadcast

Search].

26 Right-click [NPort5150A] and select [COM

Settings].

• [COM Port Settings] screen is displayed.

• Nport5110A on the network will be detected.

23 Select [COM Mapping].

464
 14.2 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (MOXA Nport 5110A)

27 Select the [Basic Settings] tab and select 30 Press [Yes].

the COM Number to be used from [COM
Number].
• Select [COM2] here as an example.

31 Press [OK] to close the NPort administra-

tor configuration tool.

• Exit the setting tool.

28 32 Start up the service tool.

Chapter 14
Select the [Serial Parameters] tab, select
[4800] from [BaudRate], and press [OK].
33 Set the COM port number of the X-ray de-
vice to be connected.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Refer to "X-ray device icon" of "CS-7 Installation/Ser-
vice Manual for Service Tool/User Tool Screen" for the
setting of the X-ray devices according to manufactur-
ers/models.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

34 Confirm that the IP address for this device

is the default address, "192.168.20.90".

35 Restart this device and confirm that it is

properly communicating with the X-ray
29 Right-click [NPort5150A] and select [Apply device.
Change].

465
 14.3 Connection of this device and the hub for portable
X-ray device side

This option is for operating this device with a portable 3 Connect the Ethernet cable connected to
X-ray device. this device to the hub for the portable X-
To use this device with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit or ray device side.
AeroDR Portable UF Unit with wired LAN, connect this
device to the hub of the portable X-ray device.
Hub for portable X-ray device side

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• No setting is necessary for this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Connect the USB cable of the hub for por-

table X-ray device side to this device.
Ethernet cable connected to this device
Hub for portable
X-ray device side

This device USB cable

2 Connect the Ethernet cable to be connect-

ed to the hub for portable X-ray device
side to this device.

Ethernet cable

This device

466
 14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board

This option is for operating this device in an exposure 2 With the screws used in step 1, attach the
room. low profile bracket to the add-in Ethernet
board.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Be careful not to touch the terminal of the add-in
Ethernet board when installing it.
• Be sure to wear a wristband before the installation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If using a two system network, an add-in Ethernet
board is required.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Low profile bracket

14.4.1 Changing of the bracket

Chapter 14
A bracket that fits the expansion slot of this device is
to be used for an add-in Ethernet board. Change the
bracket if required.
As an example, the procedure to change a full height
bracket to a low profile bracket is shown as follows.

1 Remove 2 screws that fasten the add-in

Ethernet board and the full height bracket.

Full height bracket

467
14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board

14.4.2 Add-in Ethernet board

8 Remove the expansion slot cover.

installation
The procedure to install an add-in Ethernet board is as
follows.

1 Make sure that this device is powered off.

2 Unplug the power cable.

3 Unplug all cables from this device.

4 Remove the stand for vertical position, if

attached. 9 Install the add-in Ethernet board on the
PCI Express x16 slot.
5 Remove the cover lock, if attached.

6 Remove the cover.

1
2

PCI Express x16

10 Close the expansion slot latch.

7 Open the expansion slot latch.

11 Attach the cover.

12 Connect the cables of the monitor and the

optional items to this device.

13 Connect the power cable to this device.

14 Plug the power cable of this device into

the connector.

15 Turn on the monitor and this device in this

order.

16 Start this device.

• This completes the installation of add-in Ether-
net board. Next, perform the connection check
of add-in Ethernet board.

468
 14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board

14.4.3 Add-in Ethernet board

5 Confirm that [Intel(R) Gigabit CT Desktop
Adapter] is displayed in [network adapt-
connection check ers].
The method of checking the connection of add-in
Ethernet board is as follows.

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • This completes the installation of an add-in Eth-
ernet board. Next, perform the network setting
2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- of add-in Ethernet board.
diate screen.

Chapter 14
3 Press [start] on the Windows Start menu,
right-click [computer], and press [proper-
ties].

4 Press [device Manager].

469
14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board

14.4.4 Network setting of add-

in Ethernet board
The network setting of add-in Ethernet board is as fol-
lows.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The [Network Connections] screen is displayed.

4 Right-click [Local Area Connection 2] and

press [Properties].

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Press [Network Setting] on the sub-menu

screen.

• The [Local Area Connection 2 Properties]

screen is displayed.

470
 14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board

5 Press [Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/

IPv6)] to release the selection.

• The [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)

Properties] screen is displayed.

7 Select [Use the following IP address] and

set the following items.

Chapter 14
6 Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/
IPv4)] and press [Properties].

Setting Item Setting Contents

Enter the IP address in accordance
[IP address]
with the facility environment.
[Subnet Enter the subnet mask of the selected
mask] device.
Enter the default gateway address.
[Default
Entry is not necessary if there is no
gateway]
gateway on the network.

471
14.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board

8 Press [OK]. 11 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

9 Press [OK].

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

12 Press [OK].

• The settings are saved and the screen is closed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Change of the IP address is not reflected unless the
10 Close the [Network Connections] screen. CS-7 setting screen is opened and [OK] is pressed
when the IP address of this device is changed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

13 Close the sub-menu screen.

• When another optional item is to be attached,
shut down this device.

472
 14.5 Installing additional memory

This option is for operating this device in an exposure 7 Lift off the drive cage.
room.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The 2 GB (DDR3) memory made by Hewlett-Packard
is used as an example here. The installation proce-
dure may vary depending on the device used.
• Use gold-plated contacts for the additional memory.
There are gold-plated components in the memory con-
tacts of this device. This is to prevent oxidation and
corrosion that occurs with different metal contacts.
• Make sure to wear a wristband before the installation.
• Be careful not to touch the terminals of the additional
memory during installation.
8 Open the latches on both sides of the
• When removing memory, unplug the power cable and
memory socket and insert additional
wait for 30 seconds or more. Removing the memory
memory into the socket.
without waiting may cause damage to the memory and

Chapter 14
the system board.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3
1 Turn off the power of this device.
• Remove any media from the CD/DVD drive be-
fore turning the power off.

2 Unplug the power cable from the outlet.

1 2
3 Unplug all cables from this device.
1
4 Remove the stand for vertical position, if
attached.
Channel B Black
5 Remove the cover lock, if attached. (Label: DIMM1)

6 Remove the cover. Channel B White

(Label: DIMM2)

1 Channel A Black
(Label: DIMM3)
2

Channel A White
(Label: DIMM4)

473
14.5 Installing additional memory

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the mounted memory is 2 GB × 1, insert the addi-
tional memory into a socket of a different channel but
of the same color as the mounted memory. For ex-
ample, if the mounted memory is installed in the black
socket in Channel A, insert the additional memory into
the black socket in Channel B.
• If the mounted memory is 1 GB × 2, insert additional
memory with a combined capacity of 2 GB into the 2
available channel sockets.
• Install memory on black sockets before installing
memory on white sockets.
• When inserting additional memory into a socket,
match the additional memory's notches with the tabs
in the socket.
• As much as possible, the memory capacity in Channel
A should be the same as the capacity in Channel B.
• After inserting additional memory into a socket, make
sure that the additional memory is fixed in place and
that the latches on both sides of the socket are closed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

9 Return the drive cage to its original posi-

tion and attach the cover.

10 Connect the cables of the monitor and the

optional items to this device.

11 Connect the power cable to this device.

12 Plug the power cable of this device into

the connector.

13 Turn on the monitor and this device in this

order.

14 Start this device.

474
 14.6 Installation of the USB wired LAN adapter

This option is for operating this device with a portable 2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
X-ray diagnostic device. diate screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Operate after logging in with a service account.
• Make sure the application being used has completely
ended.
• Prepare an external CD/DVD drive.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Recommended parts and conditions for the

USB wired LAN adapter
Item Conditions
OS Windows 7 compliant
Language Support for the installed OS
USB USB 2.0
Communication

Chapter 14
100 Mbps
speed
3 Connect the external CD/DVD drive to this
device for portable.
Recommended parts and conditions for the
external CD/DVD drive
Item Conditions
4 Insert the driver CD-ROM provided with
OS Windows 7 compliant
the USB wired LAN adapter in the external
Language Support for the installed OS CD/DVD drive.
USB USB 2.0
Drive
Reading speed
The CD-ROM can be read.
16 speed or higher
5 Following the instructions on the screen,
install the USB wired LAN adapter driver.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• USB wired LAN adapter is required when 2 networks • For detailed procedure, refer to the operation manual
are used while using this device as a portable X-ray of the USB wired LAN adapter.
device. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Connect the USB wired LAN adapter to
14.6.1 Driver installation of this device for portable.
USB wired LAN adapter
7 Remove the driver CD-ROM from the CD/
The method of installing the USB wired LAN adapter DVD drive.
driver is as follows. • This completes the installation of the USB wired
LAN adapter driver. Next, perform the network
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • setting of the USB wired LAN adapter.
• Do not connect the USB wired LAN adapter to this de-
vice before installing the driver.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

475
14.6 Installation of the USB wired LAN adapter

14.6.2 Network setting of the

USB wired LAN adapter
Performs network setting for the USB wired LAN
adapter.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the network setting of the USB wired LAN adapter,
refer to "14.4.4 Network setting of add-in Ethernet
board".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

476
 14.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)

This option is for operating this device with a portable X-ray device.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Prepare the external CD/DVD drive.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Recommended condition of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)

Item Conditions
USB USB 2.0
Standard IEEE802.11n
Security WPA2-PSK(AES) compliant
Supports client functionality (functions as a child unit) and access point functionality (functions as a parent
unit).
Access method
When the access point (parent unit) is functioning, the system should be used without ICS (Internet Connec-
tion Sharing) settings.
Channel Must be able to specify channels 1 to 13.
OS Windows 7 compliant

Chapter 14
Recommended condition of the external CD/DVD drive
Item Conditions
OS Windows 7 compliant
Language Support for the installed OS
USB USB 2.0
Drive The CD-ROM can be read.
Reading speed 16 speed or higher

14.7.1 The workflow to install the wireless LAN adapter

The installation procedure for a wireless LAN adapter differs between a PDA wireless connection and other wireless
connection types.

O
OWhen connecting one wireless LAN adapter and connecting it to the access point of the institu-
tion (connect this device in child unit mode)

14.7.2 Installation of the wireless LAN

1 adapter driver

When using a Panasonic CF-C2, connect the wire-

less LAN adapter to the USB port on the back.
To the USB port of this device, connect a
2 wireless LAN adapter that connects the de-
vice to the access point of the institution.
Wireless LAN
adapter

CS-7
3 14.7.3 Connection of the wireless LAN adapter

4 14.7.4 Setting of the wireless LAN adapter

477
14.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)

O
OWhen connecting one wireless LAN adapter and connecting it to a PDA (connect this device in
AP mode)

14.7.2 Installation of the wireless LAN

1 adapter driver

When using a Panasonic CF-C2, connect the wire-

less LAN adapter to the USB port on the left side.
To the USB port of this device, connect
2 a wireless LAN adapter that connects
the device to the PDA.
Wireless LAN
adapter CS-7

3 14.7.3 Connection of the wireless LAN adapter

4 14.7.4 Setting of the wireless LAN adapter

O
OWhen connecting two wireless LAN adapters and connecting them to the PDA and the access
point of the institution (connect this device in both AP mode and child unit mode)

14.7.2 Installation of the wireless LAN

1 adapter driver

When using a Panasonic CF-C2, connect the wire-

less LAN adapter to the USB port on the left side.
To the USB port of this device, connect
2 a wireless LAN adapter that connects
the device to the PDA.
Wireless LAN
adapter CS-7

3 14.7.3 Connection of the wireless LAN adapter

4 14.17.2 Setting of this device

When using a Panasonic CF-C2, connect the wire-

less LAN adapter to the USB port on the back.
To the USB port of this device, connect a
5 wireless LAN adapter that connects the
device to the access point of the institution.
Wireless LAN
adapter

CS-7
6 14.7.3 Connection of the wireless LAN adapter

7 14.7.4 Setting of the wireless LAN adapter

478
 14.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 14.7.2 Installation of the wireless

• If you connect wireless LAN adapters to both of the
LAN adapter driver
USB ports located side by side, the communication
may slow down. The method of installing the wireless LAN adapter
• Do not connect wireless LAN adapters to both of the driver is as follows.
USB ports located side by side on the left side.
• Connect the wireless LAN adapter, which is connected
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
to the USB terminal located on the back side of the
Panasonic CF-C2, to the USB terminal on the right- • Do not connect the wireless LAN adapter before in-
hand side face of the Panasonic CF-C1. stalling the driver.
• Install the latest drivers for your wireless LAN adapter.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

CS-7
Wireless LAN 1 Display the intermediate screen.
adapter

• Depending on the model, the USB extension cable Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

may have to be connected.
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 14
2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
diate screen.

USB extension cable

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Connect the external CD/DVD drive to this

device.

4 Turn off the built-in wireless LAN function

of this device.

5 Insert the driver CD-ROM into the external

CD/DVD drive.
• Press [Yes] if the [User Account Control] screen
is displayed.

479
14.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)

6 Install the wireless LAN adapter driver ac-

14.7.3 Connection of the
cording to the screen instructions.
wireless LAN adapter
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Connect the wireless LAN adapter to this device.
• For procedure details, refer to the operation manual of
the wireless LAN adapter.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Confirm that Windows desktop is dis-
played.

7 Remove the driver CD-ROM from the ex-

ternal CD/DVD drive. 2 Connect the wireless LAN adapter to this
device.
• This completes the installation of the driver of
• The driver is automatically installed, and follow-
the wireless LAN adapter. Next, perform the
ing message is displayed once it is completed.
connection setting of the wireless LAN adapter.

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

3 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [Control Panel].

4 Press [View network status and tasks].

480
 14.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)

5 Press [Change adapter settings].

14.7.4 Setting of the wireless
LAN adapter
Connect this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
or AeroDR Portable UF Unit to the access point of your
institution (RIS/PACS, etc.) using the wireless LAN
adapter.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the setting method of the wireless LAN adapter,
6 Confirm that the connected wireless LAN refer to "15.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of
adapter is displayed. this device".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 14
• This completes the connection of the wireless
LAN adapter. Next, set the wireless LAN adapt-
er.

481
 14.8 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (card type)

This option is for operating this device with a portable 3 Connect the external CD/DVD drive to this
X-ray device. device.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4 Turn off the built-in wireless LAN function

• This option is not available if the device, such as Pan- of this device.
asonic CF-C2, does not have a PC card slot.
• The wireless LAN adapter (card type) cannot be con- 5 Insert the driver CD-ROM into the external
nected to the PDA. CD/DVD drive.
• Prepare an external CD/DVD drive. • When the user account control dialog appears,
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • press [Yes] or [Continue].

Recommended parts and conditions for the Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

wireless LAN adapter (card type)
• For procedure details, refer to the operation manual of
Item Conditions
the wireless LAN adapter.
Interface Card Bus ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
OS Windows 7 compliant
Standard IEEE802.11a/n compliant
Security WPA2-PSK (AES) compliant 6 Remove the CD-ROM from the CD/DVD
drive.
• This completes the installation of the driver of
14.8.1 Installation of the wireless the wireless LAN adapter. Next, perform the set-
LAN adapter driver ting of the wireless LAN adapter.

14.8.2 Setting of the wireless

1 Display the intermediate screen.
LAN adapter
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Connect this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis- or AeroDR Portable UF Unit to the access point of your
play the intermediate screen". institution (RIS/PACS, etc.) using the wireless LAN
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • adapter.

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

diate screen. • For the setting method of the wireless LAN adapter,
refer to "15.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of
this device".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

482
 14.9 Attaching of a high precision monitor

This option is for operating this device in an exposure 3 Connect the power cable to the high pre-
room. cision monitor.
The method of installation of the high definition monitor
is as follows. 4 Plug the power cable of the high precision
monitor into the outlet.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When using a high-resolution monitor, installation of 5 Plug the power cable of this device into
additional memory (2GB) is required. the outlet.
• The following description is an example. There is a • This completes the attaching of the high preci-
case where the installation and setting procedures sion monitor. Next, set the high precision monitor.
might differ from those of the optional items used. For
details, refer to the operation manual of the optional
items used.
• The option DP-DVI conversion cable (FH973AA) is
required for the following description.
• Apply the monitor LUT of the monitor used for check-
ing images as the LUT of the monitor used for check-

Chapter 14
ing images. For details on how to operate, refer to
"19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

14.9.1 Attaching of a high

precision monitor

1 Make sure that this device and the high

precision monitor are powered off and the
power cable of this device is unplugged.

2 Connect this device and the high preci-

sion monitor with a DVI cable and a DP-
DVI conversion connector.
This device (back)

Connector 2

DP-DVI conversion
connector

High precision monitor (back)

DVI cable

483
14.9 Attaching of a high precision monitor

14.9.2 High precision monitor

5 If "SWITCHING EDID" information is dis-
played, press the "-" (minus) button on
setting the back of the high-definition monitor,
move the cursor, and then select [Land-
scape + Portrait].
1 Turn on the power of the main monitor
and the high precision monitor.

2 Press and hold the "+" (plus) and "-"

(minus) buttons on the back of the high-
definition monitor at the same time.

High precision monitor (back)

+(plus)
button

-(minus)
6 Press and hold the "+" (plus) and "-"
(minus) buttons on the back of the high-
button
definition monitor at the same time for 2
High precision monitor (front) seconds or more.

7 Check that [(Fixed)] is displayed under

LED [Landscape + Portrait].

• The LED (green) on the front of the monitor

lights.

3 Check that the information is displayed.

8 Start this device.

9 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The value for "SERIAL" and other settings are
just examples.

4 Press and hold the "+" (plus) and "-"

(minus) buttons on the back of the high-
definition monitor at the same time for 2
seconds or more.

484
 14.9 Attaching of a high precision monitor

10 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- 13 Select [Monitor] from [Primary Display],
diate screen. and [Digital Display] from [Second Display].

14 Press [Apply].

15 Press [OK] on the confirmation screen.

11 Right-click the Windows desktop, and se-
lect [Graphics Properties].

Chapter 14
16 Rotate the liquid crystal panel of the high
precision monitor by 90 degrees to the
vertical position.

17 From [display] on the task tree, select

®
• The [Intel Graphics and Media Control Panel] [general Settings].
screen is displayed.

12 From [Display] on the task tree, select

[Multiple Displays].

18 Select [Digital Display] from [Display].

485
14.9 Attaching of a high precision monitor

19 Set [resolution], [color Depth], [refresh 23 Drag the monitor icon of [positioning] to
Rate], and [Rotation]. set the positioning as follows.
• Resolution: [1600x1200]
*.[ Resolution] is automatically set to the
optimal resolution, thus there is no need to
change this.
• Color depth: [32 Bit]
• Refresh rate: [60 Hz]
• Rotation: [Rotate To Normal]

High precision monitor

Main monitor
(touch panel
monitor)

Align the bottom

of the monitors
20 Press [Apply].

24 Press [apply].

21 Press [OK] on the confirmation screen.

25 Press [OK] on the confirmation screen.

22 Select [multiple Displays] from [Display]

on the task tree.
26 On the [Intel® Graphics and Media Control
Panel] screen, press [OK].

486
 14.9 Attaching of a high precision monitor

14.9.3 Setting the multi

4 Press [Hardware and Sound].

monitor environment
When you use multiple displays in a multi monitor en-
vironment, set the following.

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis- 5 Press [Tablet PC Settings].
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

Chapter 14
6 Select the display name of the main moni-
tor from [Display].

3 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [Control Panel].

487
14.9 Attaching of a high precision monitor

7 Press [Setup].

8 When the following screen is displayed on

the main monitor, touch the main monitor
screen.
• If the screen is displayed on the high precision
monitor screen, press [Enter] and touch the
main monitor screen.

9 Press [Esc] to end the setting.

• Next, if installing a sub monitor, please leave the
power on for this device.
• When another optional item is to be attached,
shut down this device.

488
 14.10 Attaching of the sub monitor

This option is for operating this device in an exposure 3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
room. diate screen.

IMPORTANT •• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• You must use monitors with the same resolution for
the main monitor and the sub monitor.
• For using touch panel operation, use the same model
of product for the main monitor and the sub monitor.
• Only touch-panel operation with the Nanao FlexScan
T1751 has been checked.
• Prepare an Ethernet cable of category 5e or above.
• In a sub monitor connection environment, turn off this
device's sleep, hibernate, and power-saving modes.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

14.10.1 Installation of the Sub

Chapter 14
Monitor Adaptor driver
4 Insert the cs-7 driver cd into the
The method of installing the Sub Monitor Adaptor driv- CD/DVD drive.
er is as follows.
5 Close the auto-play screen, and from
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Explorer, run [Autorun.exe] stored on the
• Install the driver using the distributed "CS-7 DRIVER CS-7 DRIVER CD.
CD". Do not use the installation CD bundled with the • Execute [Autorun.exe] which is stored in the
Sub Monitor Adaptor. folder for the housing.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Press [NetDA Manager installation].
1 Make sure that the main monitor and this
device are powered on.

2 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

7 Press [Next].

489
14.10 Attaching of the sub monitor

8 Press [Yes]. 12 Press [Restart].

• Next, install the DisplayLink driver.

9 Press [Start]. • Wait shortly until the DisplayLink driver installa-
tion screen appears.

13 Press [I Accept].

• Installation of the NetDA Manager will start.

10 Press [Install].

• Installation of the DisplayLink driver will start.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• It takes about 30 seconds to install. Do not do any op-
• Installation will start. erations during installation.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
11 Press [OK].
14 When the installation is completed, close
the menu screen of the Network Display
Adaptor Setup CD.

15 Eject the CS-7 DRIVER CD from the CD/

DVD drive.
• This completes the installation of the Sub Moni-
tor Adaptor driver. Next, perform the installation
of the sub monitor.

490
 14.10 Attaching of the sub monitor

14.10.2 Checking of the bundled 14.10.3 Attachment of the sub

items monitor
Check the Sub Monitor Adaptor's bundled items. The method of installation of the sub monitor is as fol-
lows.
Item name Quantity Remarks
SX-ND2000F Series
Sub Monitor Adaptor 1
NetDA-1 (made by Silex) 1 Check that the power to this device and
to connected equipment is turned off.
AC adapter 1
Network Display
Adapter Setup 1 2 Connect the AeroDR Interface Unit hub
CD (CD-ROM) and this device with an Ethernet cable.
(Ferrite core) (1)
Attached documents 1 set This device (rear)
AeroDR Interface
Unit hub

Chapter 14
• Please connect to the first port on the AeroDR
Interface Unit.

3 Attach the ferrite core to the Ethernet ca-

ble connecting the AeroDR Interface Unit
hub and the Sub Monitor Adaptor.

Ferrite core

• Attach the ferrite core on the AeroDR Interface

Unit side.
• Refer to the illustration, and attach the ferrite
core after turning the Ethernet cable around
once.

491
14.10 Attaching of the sub monitor

4 Connect the AeroDR Interface Unit hub 6 For using touch panel operation with the
and the Sub Monitor Adaptor with an Eth- sub monitor, connect the sub monitor
ernet cable. and the Sub Monitor Adaptor with a USB
cable.
AeroDR Interface
Unit hub USB terminal
Sub Monitor
Adaptor

Sub monitor

Sub Monitor
Adaptor

Ethernet terminal

7 If using a mouse or keyboard, connect a

USB mouse or USB keyboard to the Sub
Monitor Adaptor.

USB terminal
Sub Monitor
Adaptor

• Connect it to the AeroDR Interface Unit's port

No. 5 or port No. 7.

5 Connect the sub monitor and the Sub USB mouse

Monitor Adaptor with a signal cable (D-sub USB keyboard
15 pin).

Analog
input terminal IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Sub Monitor • One of the USB terminals is used for connection to the
Adaptor
sub monitor. The other USB terminal can only have
either a mouse or a keyboard connected to it.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Sub monitor

492
 14.10 Attaching of the sub monitor

8 Connect the power cable to the sub moni-

14.10.4 Setting the Sub Monitor
tor and the AC adapter to the Sub Monitor
Adaptor. Adaptor
The method of setting the Sub Monitor Adaptor is as
Power connecter
follows.
Sub Monitor
Adaptor
1 Turn the power on for the AeroDR Inter-
face Unit, main monitor, and this device.
• There is no power switch on the Sub Monitor
Sub monitor Adaptor.
• There is no set order for turning the power on.

AC adapter
2 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
Power cable
play the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 14
9 Plug the sub monitor power cable and the
3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
AC adapter of the Sub Monitor Adaptor diate screen.
into the wall outlet.
• This completes the connection of the sub moni-
tor. Next, perform setting of the Sub Monitor
Adaptor.

4 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [NetDA Manager] in [All
Programs].
• NetDA Manager starts up.

493
14.10 Attaching of the sub monitor

5 Double-click the sub monitor for which a 7 Press [Configure].

connection with this device is detected.

• A message confirming restarting will be dis-

played.
• The network setting screen is displayed.

8 Press [OK].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If installing multiple Sub Monitor Adaptors on a given
network, multiple devices are displayed. Configure
settings for one Sub Monitor Adaptor at a time.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6 Set the IP address.

• The Sub Monitor Adaptor will restart. It takes ap-
proximately 20 seconds to restart.

9 Select the Sub Monitor Adaptor to be con-

nected to this device, and press [Display
Properties].
• If there are multiple Sub Monitor Adaptors dis-
played, please distinguish them with the dis-
played IP addresses.
• Configure the settings in any way that matches
the institution environment settings.
• If a DHCP server is connected, the IP address
will be automatically registered.

494
 14.10 Attaching of the sub monitor

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Only configure automatic connection for the Sub Moni-
tor Adaptor being used. If there are multiple Sub Moni-
tor Adaptors on the same network, configuring the
same settings for multiple Sub Monitor Adaptors may
result in incorrect operation.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

12 Minimize the NetDA Manager, and restart

this device.

13 If the [Screen Resolution] screen is dis-

played after restarting, select [Landscape]
• The properties screen is displayed. from [Orientation], select [Duplicate these
displays] from [Multiple displays], and
10 Select [Automatically connect newly dis- press [OK].
covered NetDA devices].

Chapter 14
14 Turn on the power on the sub monitor,
and check that the displayed screen is the
same as the one on the main monitor.
• It takes about 1 minute for the display to appear
11 Press [Apply], and press [OK]. on the sub monitor.
• If installing other optional items, shut down this
device.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When this device starts up, it will automatically con-
nect to the sub monitor, and will display the same
screen on the sub monitor as the one on the main
monitor.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

495
14.10 Attaching of the sub monitor

14.10.5 Modification of the Sub

2 Press [View network status and tasks].

Monitor Adaptor IP address

After setting the initial IP address, if the IP address is
to be changed, reconfigure the IP address after revert-
ing the Sub Monitor Adaptor settings to their defaults.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to revert Sub Monitor Adaptor settings to their
defaults, refer to "17.13.4 To revert the Sub Monitor
Adaptor settings to their defaults".
• For how to reconfigure the IP address, refer to
"14.10.4 Setting the Sub Monitor Adaptor".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Press [Change adapter settings].

14.10.6 Additional Settings for

Using an Expansion
Ethernet Board
When you install an optional expansion Ethernet board
and restart this unit, a different network is recognized
and this device becomes unable to detect the Sub
Monitor Adaptor. Take the following steps.

1 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [Control Panel].

• [Network Connections] screen is displayed.

4 Right-click the expansion LAN card

[Intel(R) Gigabit CT Desktop Adapter] Lo-
cal Area Connection and press [Disable].

5 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [NetDA Manager] in [All
Programs].
• NetDA Manager starts up.

496
 14.10 Attaching of the sub monitor

6 Press [Refresh]. 9 Select the [Enable broadcast addresses]

checkbox, and enter the IP address of the
NetDA-1 device that you will use. (Example
192.168.20.50)

• The "NetDA-1" device that you set is detected.

7 Press [Options].

Chapter 14
10 Press [Add], and press [Apply].

• The option setting screen is displayed.

8 Select the [NetDA Search] tab.

497
14.10 Attaching of the sub monitor

11 Press [OK].

12 Minimize NetDA Manager.

13 Right-click the expansion LAN card

[Intel(R) Gigabit CT Desktop Adapter] Lo-
cal Area Connection in the [Network Con-
nections] screen, and press [Enable].

14 Restart this device, and confirm that

screens are displayed on the sub monitor.

498
 14.11 Attaching of a monitor for checking images

This option is for operating this device with a portable

X-ray device. 14.11.1 Attaching of a monitor
The method of attaching of a monitor for checking im- for checking images
ages is as follows.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The specifications of this device and the monitor might
• The monitor screen is positioned with a landscape ori-
be different depending on the date of delivery and the
entation.
destination.
• The following example describes the analog RGB con-
• Use the monitor for checking images that is used as a
nection.
monitor for normal exposure for this device.
• Use the following connection cables to connect the
• Check that the shape of the connector for the monitor
monitor to this device.
for checking images is of a shape that will enable it to
–– When the analog terminal is used for input of the connect with this device.
monitor and output of this device: A cable for the • Apply the monitor LUT of the monitor used for check-
analog RGB connection (analog signal input) ing images as the LUT of the monitor used for check-
–– When the HDMI terminal is used for input of the ing images. For details on how to operate, refer to
monitor and output of this device: HDMI cable "19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment".

Chapter 14
–– When the analog terminal is used for input of the ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
monitor and the HDMI terminal for output of this
device: A cable for the analog RGB connection 1 Make sure that this device for portable
(analog signal input) In this case, the HDMI-to-RGB and the monitor for checking images are
conversion adapter must be installed on this device. powered off.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Recommended parts and conditions for the 2 Make sure that the power cable of this de-
monitor for checking images vice for portable is unplugged.
Item Conditions
Connection Supports analog RGB connection 3 Connect the analog output terminal of this
OS Supports Windows 7 device for portable and the analog input
Monitor type TFT color monitor
terminal of the monitor for checking im-
8 bit color, supporting more than 16.77
Display color
million colors ages with a signal cable.
Supports 1280x800 or higher resolu-
Monitor resolu-
tions Monitor for checking images
tion
*Maximum: 1920x1200
16:10
Aspect ratio
*Any monitor with aspect ratio fixed mode
Analog input
terminal
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The monitor for checking images is a monitor
connected to check the images when this device is
used as a portable X-ray device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

This device for portable

Analog output terminal

4 Plug the power cables of this device for

portable and the monitor for checking im-
ages into the wall outlet.
• This completes the attaching of the monitor
for checking images. Next, set the monitor for
checking images.

499
14.11 Attaching of a monitor for checking images

14.11.2 Setting of a monitor for

6 Select [Show desktop only on 2] from
[Multiple displays].
checking images

1 Turn on the power of the monitor for

checking images.

2 Start this device for portable.

3 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis- 7 Press [OK].
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

8 Press [Keep changes].

5 Right-click the Windows desktop, and se-

lect [Screen resolution].

9 Check whether the screen is displayed on

the monitor for checking images normally.

500
 14.12 Installation of the monitor for checking images (via NetDA-1)

This option is for operating this device with a portable

X-ray device. 14.12.1 Installation of the
The installation method for the monitor for checking NetDA-1 driver
images via NetDA-1 is as follows.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Install the driver using the distributed "CS-7 DRIVER
• When installing a monitor other than the monitor of
CD". Do not use the installation CD bundled with the
this device and optional monitors, a NetDA-1 connec-
NetDA-1.
tions is required according to the pharmaceutical law.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The installation methods of monitors for checking im-
ages via NeDA-1 is for Japan only.
• The monitor screen is positioned with a landscape ori-
1 Make sure that this device is powered on.
entation.
• For the monitor cable, use an analog RGB connection 2 Display the intermediate screen.
(analog signal input) cable.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 14
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
Recommended criteria for monitors for
play the intermediate screen".
checking images
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Item Conditions
Connection Supports analog RGB connection 3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
OS Supports Windows 7
diate screen.
Monitor type TFT color monitor
8 bit color, supporting more than 16.77
Display color
million colors
Supports 1280x800 or higher resolu-
Monitor resolu-
tions
tion
* Maximum: 1920x1200
16:10
Aspect ratio *Any monitor with aspect ratio fixed
mode

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The monitor for checking images is a monitor
connected to check the images when this device is
used as a portable X-ray device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Insert the cs-7 driver cd into the

CD/DVD drive.

5 Close the auto-play screen, and from

Explorer, run [Autorun.exe] stored on the
CS-7 DRIVER CD.
• Execute [Autorun.exe] which is stored in the
casing-use folder.

501
14.12 Installation of the monitor for checking images (via NetDA-1)

6 Press [NetDA Manager installation]. 10 Press [Install].

• Installation will start.

11 Press [OK].

7 Press [Next].

12 Press [Restart].

8 Press [Yes].

• Next, install the DisplayLink driver.

• Wait shortly until the DisplayLink driver installa-
tion screen appears.

13 Press [I Accept].
9 Press [Start].

• Installation of the NetDA Manager will start.

• Installation of the DisplayLink driver will start.

502
 14.12 Installation of the monitor for checking images (via NetDA-1)

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 14.12.2 Checking of the bundled

• It takes about 30 seconds to install. Do not do any op-
items of the NetDA-1
erations during installation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Check the NetDA-1's bundled items.

14 When the installation is completed, close Item name Quantity Remarks

the menu screen of the Network Display SX-ND2000F Series

Sub Monitor Adaptor 1
NetDA-1 (made by Silex)
Adaptor Setup CD.
AC adapter 1
Network Display
15 Eject the CS-7 DRIVER CD from the CD/ Adapter Setup 1
DVD drive. CD (CD-ROM)
• This completes the installation of the NetDA-1 (Ferrite core) (1)
driver. Next, install the monitor for checking im-
Attached documents 1 set
ages via the NetDA-1.

Chapter 14

503
14.12 Installation of the monitor for checking images (via NetDA-1)

14.12.3 Attaching of the

4 Connect the monitor for checking images
and the NetDA-1 with a signal cable (D-sub
NetDA-1 and monitor for 15 pin).
checking images
Analog
The method of installation of the NetDA-1 and monitor input terminal
for checking images is as follows. NetDA-1

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• You can connect the NetDA-1 and monitor for check-
Monitor for
ing images either to the hub for institution side or to checking images
the hub for portable X-ray device side. Here an ex-
ample is described in which the hub for institution side
is used.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Check that the NetDA-1 and this device

are turned off.

2 Connect the hub for institution side and

this device with an Ethernet cable.

3 Connect the hub for institution side and 5 Connect the power cable to the monitor
the NetDA-1 with an Ethernet cable. for checking images and the AC adapter
to the NetDA-1.
Hub for institution
Power connecter
side
NetDA-1

Monitor for
checking images

AC adapter
NetDA-1

Ethernet terminal Power cable

6 Plug the power cable of the monitor for

checking images and the AC adapter of
the NetDA-1 into the wall outlet.
• This completes the connection of the NetDA-1
and monitor for checking images. Next, perform
setting of the NetDA-1.

504
 14.12 Installation of the monitor for checking images (via NetDA-1)

5 Double-click the NetDA-1 for which a con-

14.12.4 Setting the NetDA-1 nection with this device is detected.

The method of setting the NetDA-1 is as follows.

1 Turn on this device.

• There is no power switch on the NetDA-1.

2 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

Chapter 14
• The network setting screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If installing multiple NetDA-1s on a given network,
multiple devices are displayed. Configure settings for
one NetDA-1 at a time.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Set the IP address.

4 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [NetDA Manager] in [All
Programs].
• NetDA Manager starts up.

• Configure the settings in any way that matches

the institution environment settings.
• If a DHCP server is connected, the IP address
will be automatically registered.

505
14.12 Installation of the monitor for checking images (via NetDA-1)

7 Press [Configure]. 9 Select the NetDA-1 to be connected to this

device, and press [Display Properties].
• If there are multiple NetDA-1s displayed, please
distinguish them with the displayed IP addresses.

• A message confirming restarting will be dis-

played.

8 Press [OK].

• The properties screen is displayed.

• The NetDA-1 will restart. It takes approximately

10 Select [Automatically connect newly dis-
covered NetDA devices].
20 seconds to restart.

506
 14.12 Installation of the monitor for checking images (via NetDA-1)

11 Press [Apply], and press [OK].

14.12.5 Modification of the
NetDA-1 IP address
After setting the initial IP address, if the IP address is
to be changed, reconfigure the IP address after revert-
ing the NetDA-1 settings to their defaults.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For how to revert NetDA-1 settings to their defaults,
refer to "17.13.4 To revert the Sub Monitor Adaptor
settings to their defaults".
• For how to reconfigure the IP address, refer to
"14.10.4 Setting the Sub Monitor Adaptor".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Only configure automatic connection for the NetDA-1

Chapter 14
being used. If there are multiple NetDA-1s on the
same network, configuring the same settings for mul-
tiple NetDA-1s may result in incorrect operation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

507
14.12 Installation of the monitor for checking images (via NetDA-1)

14.12.6 Change of the display

4 Change 1 to 0 for the Win+P key setting
tag.
setting of the monitor for
checking images
Change the settings file so that the display switching
to the monitor for checking images can be performed
using shortcut keys (Windows key + [P] key).
Change to
<ON>0</ON>
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the Windows key is disabled, press the [Ctrl]
key + the [P] key.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Display the intermediate screen.

5 Save the file.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Press [Reboot] on the intermediate
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
screen.
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
7 After restarting, press the Windows key
2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- + [P] key on the keyboard and check that
diate screen. the following screen is displayed.

3 Open the "SysLorderOperationSetting.xml"

of "\Console\Config\System\SysLorder"
using Windows Notepad, etc.

508
 14.13 Installation of the FPM-5171G monitor

The FPM-5171G (17-inch touch panel) monitor is pro- 3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
vided as an option used when the portable X-ray de- diate screen.
vice is used.
* Not used in Japan.
The following instructions show how to install the FPM-
5171G (17-inch touch panel) monitor .

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• This example describes the connection to Panasonic
CF-C1.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

14.13.1 Installation of the touch

panel driver
The following instructions show how to install the driver

Chapter 14
for the 17-inch touch panel monitor.
4 Insert the installation CD provided with
the 17-inch touch panel monitor to the CD/
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
DVD drive.
• FPM-5171G is used as an example here. The setting
method may be different for the 17-inch touch panel
monitor that is used. For details, refer to the operation 5 From Windows Explorer, run [Touch-
manual of the 17-inch touch panel monitor that is Screen-DRV\ELO Touch Driver\Win-
used. dows Drivers\Windows XP-7-Vista
• Use the installation CD included in the package of the SW601379_TETouch_5.2.0\SW601379_
17-inch touch panel monitor to install the driver. TETouch_5.2.0.exe], which is included in
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • the installation CD provided with the 17-
inch touch panel monitor.
1 Confirm that this device and the monitor
are running.
6 Press [Unzip].

2 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

509
14.13 Installation of the FPM-5171G monitor

7 Select [Default] and press [Next]. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• If the error shown in the figure below appears, check
that the USB/RS232C selection switch on the back of
the touch panel monitor is set to USB, and then, press
[OK].
• If the USB/RS232C selection switch is not correctly
set, perform step 10 again.

8 Select the [Install USB Touchscreen Driv-

ers] checkbox, and press [Next].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

13 When the installation is completed, eject

the installation CD from the CD/DVD drive.

14 The [PenMount Control Panel] shortcut is

created on the Windows desktop and this
device will automatically restart.
• Restart manually if it does not automatically re-
start.

9 Following the instructions shown on the

screen, install the driver.

10 From Windows Explorer, run [TouchScreen-DRV\

TouchWare_20110121\setup.exe] included in
the installation CD provided with the 17-inch
touch panel monitor.

11 Following the instructions shown on the

screen, install the driver.

12 From Windows Explorer, run [TouchScreen-

DRV\PenMount Driver\Windows Drivers\
PenMount Windows Universal Driver
V2.2.0.283(Win7_32_64bit_WHQL)\setup.exe]
included in the installation CD provided with
the 17-inch touch panel monitor.

510
 14.13 Installation of the FPM-5171G monitor

14.13.2 Adjustment of touch

4 Select [PenMount 6000 USB] on the [De-
vice] tab, and press [Configure].
sensor
The following instructions show how to adjust the
touch sensor of the 17-inch touch panel monitor.
The adjustment performed here is temporary. Actual
adjustment is performed after installing the 17-inch
touch panel monitor to the portable X-ray device.

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Press [Standard Calibration] on the [Cali-
2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- brate] tab.
diate screen.

Chapter 14
3 Double-click on the [PenMount Control
Panel] shortcut on the Windows desktop.

• The touch sensor adjustment screen is dis-

played.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If the screen is in Japanese, delete [C:\Program Files\
PenMount Windows Universal Driver\LANG\JPN.lng]
to display the screen in English.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

511
14.13 Installation of the FPM-5171G monitor

6 Following the instructions shown on the

touch sensor adjustment screen, touch 14.13.3 Windows setup
and hold the target objects.
Set up Windows so that all operations can be per-
formed when this device is placed into the portable X-
ray device.

1. Disabling the touch sensor of this de-

vice's display
Disable the touch sensor of this device's display to re-
• The touch sensor adjustment completes when ceive operations performed on the 17-inch touch moni-
this touch operation has been repeated 5 times. tor only.

7 Press [OK] to end [PenMount Control Panel]. 1 Press the [USER] button at the lower right
of the LCD on this device to open [Dash-
board for CF-C1].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• [Dashboard for CF-C1] can also be opened by running
[C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Dboard\DBoard.exe].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Select [Pen Only] in [Screen input], and

press [Yes].

512
 14.13 Installation of the FPM-5171G monitor

2. Disabling the touch sensor of this de- 4 From [When I close the lid], choose [Do
vice's display nothing] for the two drop-down lists.

Set this device so that it will not shut down when its
cover is closed.

1 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [Control Panel].

5 Press [Save changes].

Chapter 14
3. Display screen settings of this device
2 Press [System and Security].
Set up Windows according to the maximum resolution
of the 17-inch touch panel monitor (1280 x 1024 pix-
els).

1 Right-click on the Windows desktop with

the mouse, and select [Screen resolution].

3 Press [Power Options].

513
14.13 Installation of the FPM-5171G monitor

2 Select [Show desktop only on 2] from 5 Select [1280 x 1024 (recommended)] from
[Multiple displays]. [Resolution].

3 Press [OK]. 6 Press [OK].

• You return to the desktop and only the 17-inch

touch panel monitor becomes active. 7 Shut down Windows and unlock the dis-
play rotation lock of the Panasonic CF-C1.
4 Right-click on the Windows desktop, and
select [Screen resolution].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When performing operation on the 17-inch touch mon-
itor, pressing and holding is equivalent to right clicking.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

514
 14.13 Installation of the FPM-5171G monitor

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 14.13.4 Final adjustment of the

• Confirm that [Primary Landscape] is selected in
touch sensor
[Default Angle in Tablet Mode] in [Display Rotation
Tool] before unlocking the display rotation lock. Perform the final adjustment of the touch sensor when
all settings necessary to use the 17-inch touch panel
monitor are complete, and the 17-inch touch panel
monitor, cables, AeroDR Portable RF Unit and so on
have been connected to the portable X-ray device.

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

8 Flip the Panasonic CF-C1 display.

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
diate screen.

Chapter 14
• This completes Windows setup. From now on,
this setting is enabled when starting this device.

3 Double-click on the [PenMount Control

Panel] shortcut on the Windows desktop.

515
14.13 Installation of the FPM-5171G monitor

4 Select [PenMount 6000 USB] on the [De- 6 Following the instructions shown on the
vice] tab, and press [Configure]. touch sensor adjustment screen, touch
and hold the target objects.

• The touch sensor adjustment completes when

this touch operation has been repeated 10
times. Then, you return to the desktop.

7 Press [OK] to end [PenMount Control Panel].

5 Press [Advanced Calibration] on the [Cali-
brate] tab.

• The touch sensor adjustment screen is dis-

played.

516
 14.14 Installation of magnetic card reader

This option is for operating this device in an exposure 1 Attach the magnetic card reader to the
room. bracket.

Bracket
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Magnetic card reader
• The magnetic card reader can only be used in Japan.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Fastening
14.14.1 Installation of magnetic screw
card reader
The method of installation of the magnetic card reader USB cable
is as follows.
The order of operations differs depending on whether
the magnetic card reader is installed on the right side • Connect the small connector (RJ-45 connector)
or left side of the monitor. to the magnetic card reader.

Chapter 14
Place the monitor face down flat on a desk
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
or table and remove the monitor stand.
• Confirm that this device is powered off before perform-
ing the installation. Monitor (rear)
• Be sure to use the provided screws for the installation. Screws Screws
Using screws that are too long may damage the moni-
tor.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Installing on the right side of the monitor

Screws Screws
Monitor stand

• Remove the 4 screws.

517
14.14 Installation of magnetic card reader

3 Place the bracket on the rear of the moni- 6 Connect the USB cable to the rear of this
tor, and align the bracket slots with the 4 device.
monitor attachment holes.

Monitor 7 Plug this device and the monitor power

Attachment holes cables into an outlet.
Attachment
• This completes the installation of the magnetic
holes
card reader. Next, perform the connection check
of the magnetic card reader.

Installing on the left side of the monitor

Slot

Attachment holes
Bracket

• Align the monitor attachment holes with the right

ends of the bracket slots.

4 Place the monitor stand on the bracket

and affix it with the 4 provided screws.

Monitor
Fastening screws
1 Attach the magnetic card reader to the
bracket.

Magnetic card reader

Fastening
screw

Bracket USB cable

Fastening screws Fastening screws
Monitor stand

Bracket
5 Connect the cables to the monitor.
• Connect the small connector (RJ-45 connector)
to the magnetic card reader.

518
 14.14 Installation of magnetic card reader

2 Place the monitor face down flat on a desk 5 Place the monitor stand on the bracket
or table and remove the monitor stand. and affix it with the 4 provided screws.

Monitor (rear) Monitor

Screws Screws Fastening screws

Bracket

Screws Screws Fastening screws Fastening screws

Monitor stand Monitor stand

6 Connect the USB cable to the rear of this

Chapter 14
3 Connect the cables to the monitor.
device.

7 Plug this device and the monitor power

cables into an outlet.
• This completes the installation of the magnetic
card reader. Next, perform the connection check
of the magnetic card reader.

4 Place the bracket on the rear of the moni-

tor, and align the bracket slots with the 4
monitor attachment holes.

Monitor
Attachment holes
Attachment
holes

Slot

Attachment holes
Bracket

• Align the monitor attachment holes with the left

ends of the bracket slots.

519
14.14 Installation of magnetic card reader

14.14.2 Magnetic card reader

5 Confirm that [USB Card Reader] is dis-
played in [Device].
connection check
The method of checking the connection of the mag-
netic card-reader is as follows.

1 Turn on this device.

2 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen". • When another optional item is to be attached,
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • shut down this device.

3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

4 Press [start] on the Windows Start menu,

and press [devices and Printers].

520
 14.15 Installation of bar code readers

This option is for operating this device in an exposure 4 Hook the bottom of the neck on the ped-
room. estal tab, and secure it with the 2 screws
and 2 washers provided.
14.15.1 Installation of a single
Tab
bar code reader
Neck
The method of installation of a single bar code reader
is as follows. Washer Pedestal
Fastening
screw
1 Make sure that this device is powered off.

2 Connect the provided USB cable to the

single bar code reader.
• Connect it with the smaller connector (RJ-45
connector).
5 Put the single bar code reader on the

Chapter 14
Single bar code reader holder of the dedicated stand.

Single bar code reader

USB cable
RJ-45 connector

Holder

3 Pass the stand neck of the dedicated

stand through the pedestal from the bot-
tom.

6 Connect the USB cable to the rear of this

device.

7 Adjust the holder to the angle for reading

Neck easily.
Pedestal • When another optional item is to be attached,
shut down this device.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When adding the bar code settings other than Code
128, refer to "21.2 How to add a bar code setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

521
14.15 Installation of bar code readers

O
OMounting on a desk or a wall
14.15.2 Installation of a multi- Multi-bar code reader can be mounted on a desk or a
bar code reader wall. For the mounting location, consult the institution
manager in advance.
The method of installation of a multi-bar code reader is
as follows.
1 With the 3 provided wood screws, mount
the mounting plate on a desk or a wall.
1 Make sure that this device is powered off. • Check the direction of laser irradiation.

Wood screw
2 Connect the provided USB cable to the
multi-bar code reader. Mounting plate
• Connect it with the smaller connector (RJ-45
connector).

Multi-bar code reader

Direction of laser irradiation

USB cable

2 With the 4 provided countersunk screws,

RJ-45 connector fix the base plate to the bottom of multi-
bar code reader.

Multi-bar code reader

Countersunk screw
3 Connect the USB cable to the rear of this
device.

4 Adjust the angle for reading easily.

• When another optional item is to be attached,
shut down this device.
Base plate

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When adding the bar code settings other than Code
128, refer to "21.2 How to add a bar code setting".
3 Place the multi-bar code reader over the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • mounting plate, and turn it 90° in a coun-
terclockwise direction.

90°

522
 14.16 Installation of the Bluetooth bar code reader

This option is for operating this device with a portable IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

X-ray device.
• If connection is disconnected when the unit is taken
The setting method of the Bluetooth bar code reader is
outside of the Bluetooth communication range, press
as follows.
[▲] on the left side of the Bluetooth bar code reader
to establish the connection again. Once connection is
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • established, the message "HID Connected" appears
• Koamtac KDC200i is used as an example here. The set- on the screen.
ting method may be different for the Bluetooth bar code • When Bluetooth connection is cut off, a beep sound
reader that is used. For details, refer to the operation occurs and the message "HID Disconnected" appears
manual of the Bluetooth bar code reader that is used. on the screen.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • Flatten the portion on which barcode is printed, when
reading a patient bar code. The optimum distance
Recommended part and condition for the Blue- between a bar code and the reader is about 5 to 10 cm.
tooth bar code reader ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Item Conditions
Bluetooth stan- Ver. 2.0 or later 14.16.2 Charging of the Bluetooth
dard Class 2 or higher

Chapter 14
Laser standard Class 1 bar code reader
Supported
HID The charging method of the Bluetooth bar code reader
profile
Matching func- is as follows.
3 times or more
tionality
Line break set-
ting
Yes 1 Remove the cover at the bottom of the
Codebar (NW-7), Code39, Code128,
Bluetooth bar code reader, and connect
JAN/EAN, ITF, etc. the supplied USB cable to the USB termi-
Code set
* Must be able to read code used in nal.
the institution.
• Connect the smaller connector (ultra mini USB
connector) to the Bluetooth bar code reader.
14.16.1 Basic operation of the
Bluetooth bar code reader 2 Connect the supplied USB cable to the
USB terminal of this device.
The basic operation of the Bluetooth bar code reader • Connect the larger connector (A-type USB con-
is as follows. nector) to this device.
• Two LEDs at the front of the Bluetooth bar code
reader will light up in orange while charging.
1 Use [ ], [▲] and [▼] at the main body of
It will light up in green once the charging is com-
the Bluetooth bar code reader.
pleted. It will light up in red when the charge is
• Select the display items with [▲] and [▼].
low.
• Confirm the display items with [ ].
• Rough estimate of charging time is approxi-
mately 2 hours.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Power on this device to charge it from this device.
• Prepare the USB charger AC adapter to charge it from
the outlet.
• The estimated battery life is 300 times of charging.
However, it depends on how you use it.
• To replace the battery, ask the vendor of the Bluetooth
bard code reader in use.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[ ] [▲] [▼]

523
14.16 Installation of the Bluetooth bar code reader

14.16.3 Turning on the power of the 14.16.5 Setting of the HID

Bluetooth bar code reader connection
The operation method to turn on the power of the The setting method of the HID connection is as fol-
Bluetooth bar code reader is as follows. lows.

1 Press [ ]. 1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.

• The Bluetooth bar code reader is powered on
and emits a laser.

14.16.4 Turning off the power of the

Bluetooth bar code reader
The operation method to turn off the power of the Blue-
tooth bar code reader is as follows.

1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.

• The initial setting screen is displayed on the
Bluetooth bar code reader. [▲] [▼]

2 Select and confirm [BT Service]. • The initial setting screen is displayed on the
Bluetooth bar code reader.
3 Select and confirm [Power].
2 Select and confirm [BT Config].
4 Select [Disabled], and select and confirm
[Save & Exit] at the bottom of the screen. 3 Select and confirm [ConnectDevice].

5 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit 4 Select [HID normal], and select and confirm
Menu]. [Save & Exit] at the bottom of the screen.
• Bluetooth communication is disconnected, and
the Bluetooth bar code reader will be powered 5 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit
off five minutes later. Menu].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• W h e n t h i s d e v i c e i s p o w e r e d o ff , B l u e t o o t h
communication is disconnected and the Bluetooth bar
code reader will also be powered off five minutes later.
• To establish Bluetooth connection again, press [▲]
on the left side of the Bluetooth bar code reader.
Once connection is established, the message "HID
Connected" appears on the screen.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

524
 14.16 Installation of the Bluetooth bar code reader

14.16.6 Setting of the Bluetooth

5 Press [New Connection].

connection
The setting method of the Bluetooth connection is as
follows.

1 Turn on this device.

2 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- 6 Press [▲] and [▼] on the Bluetooth bar
code reader simultaneously.
diate screen.
• The initial setting screen is displayed.

Chapter 14
7 Select and confirm [BT Service].

8 Select and confirm [Pairing].

9 Select [Custom Mode] and press [Next].

4 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [All Programs] - [Bluetooth]
- [Bluetooth Setting].

10 Select [KDC200[XXXXXX]] and press

[Next].

• [Bluetooth Settings] screen is displayed.

• [XXXXXX] is the serial number.

525
14.16 Installation of the Bluetooth bar code reader

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 13 Press [Yes].

• If [KDC200[XXXXXX]] is not displayed, press
[Refresh].

14 Press [Next].

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

11 Select [Human Interface Device] and press

[Next].

15 Press [Finish].

12 Press [OK].

• [Bluetooth Manager] screen is displayed in this

device when this device and the Bluetooth bar
code reader are paired.

• Connection will be completed and the Bluetooth

bar code reader will be displayed in the [Blue-
tooth Settings] screen.

526
 14.16 Installation of the Bluetooth bar code reader

14.16.7 Setting of multiple 14.16.8 Setting of the data

reading of bar codes format
The setting method of the multiple reading of bar The setting method of the data format is as follows.
codes is as follows.
1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.
1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously. • The initial setting screen is displayed on the
• The initial setting screen is displayed on the Bluetooth bar code reader.
Bluetooth bar code reader.
2 Select and confirm [Data Process].
2 Select and confirm [Scan Options].
3 Select and confirm [Terminator].
3 Select and confirm [Sec. Level].
4 Select [CR], and select and confirm [Save &
4 Select and confirm [3 Level] by pressing Exit] at the bottom of the screen.
[▲] or [▼].
5 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit
5 Select and confirm [Save & Exit]. Menu].

Chapter 14
6 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Menu]. • This setting reduces the number of enter addition after
reading a bar code from two to one.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Bar code read errors can be prevented by configuring
settings so that bar codes are read and referenced 3
times.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

527
14.16 Installation of the Bluetooth bar code reader

14.16.9 Setting of the read time- 14.16.11 Setting of the minimum

out time number of digits for
The setting method of the read time-out time is as fol-
bar codes
lows. The following describes how to set the minimum num-
ber of digits for bar codes.
1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.
• The initial setting screen is displayed on the 1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.
Bluetooth bar code reader. • The initial setting screen is displayed on the
Bluetooth bar code reader.
2 Select and confirm [Scan Options].
2 Select and confirm [Scan Options].
3 Select and confirm [Timeout].
3 Select and confirm [Min.length].
4 Select and confirm [5 second(s)] by press-
ing [▲] or [▼]. 4 Press [▲] or [▼] to select the minimum
number of digits, and confirm it.
5 Select and confirm [Save & Exit]. • The default setting is 2 digits.

6 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit 5 Select and confirm [Save & Exit].
Menu].
6 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit
14.16.10 Setting of the NW7 Menu].
start/stop code
14.16.12 Selection and setting of
The following describes how to set the NW7 start/stop
code.
the bar code to be used
It is necessary to read a bar code to make this setting. The selection method of the code set to be used is as
To read a bar code, print this page and use the printed follows.
bar code.
By the default setting, the bar code reader adds start/
stop code when reading a NW7 (CODABAR) bar code.
1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.
• The initial setting screen is displayed on the
Change the setting so that it will not be added.
Bluetooth bar code reader.

1 Read the barcode as follows.

2 Select and confirm [SetBarcodes].
Do not add the NW7 start/stop code.
3 Select and confirm the code set to be
used.
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• You can deselect all other code sets, but not the one
2 Read a NW7 (CODABAR) bar code and
you are using.
check that no start/stop code is added to
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
the beginning or ending of the code.

4 Select and confirm [Save & Exit].

528
 14.16 Installation of the Bluetooth bar code reader

5 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit

14.16.13 Setting of the date of
Menu].
bar code reader
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • The setting method of the date of the bar code reader
• The default code set of KDC200i is as follows. is as follows.
Top
Sub Menu Options Default
Menu 1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.
Enabled/ • The initial setting screen is displayed on the
EAN13 Enable
Disabled
Bluetooth bar code reader.
Enabled/
EAN8 Enable
Disabled
UPCA
Enabled/
Enable
2 Select and confirm [Systemconfig].
Disabled
Enabled/
UPCE
Disabled
Enable 3 Select and confirm [Date/Time].
Enabled/
CODE39 Enable
Disabled 4 Select and confirm the date and time by
Enabled/
ITF14 Enable pressing [▲] or [▼].
Disabled
Enabled/
CODE128 Enable
Disabled 5 Select and confirm [Save & Exit].

Chapter 14
Enabled/
I2of5 Enable
Disabled
Set Enabled/ 6 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit
CODABAR Enable
Barcodes Disabled Menu].
Enabled/
GS1-128 Enable
Disabled
CODE93
Enabled/
Enable
14.16.14 Initialization of bar
Disabled
Enabled/
code reader
CODE35 Enable
Disabled
The initializing method of the bar code reader is as fol-
Enabled/
BooklandEAN Disable lows.
Disabled
Enabled/
EAN13withAddon Disable
Disabled 1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.
Enabled/ • The initial setting screen is displayed on the
EAN8withAddon Disable
Disabled
Bluetooth bar code reader.
Enabled/
UPCAwithAddon Disable
Disabled
UPCEwithAddon
Enabled/
Disable 2 Select and confirm [Systemconfig].
Disabled
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • 3 Select and confirm [Fac.Default].

4 Select and confirm [Yes&Exit].

5 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit

Menu].

529
14.16 Installation of the Bluetooth bar code reader

14.16.16 Clearing Data Storage

14.16.15 Memory Data Deletion
Settings
The method for deleting memory data is described be- The method for clearing data storage settings is as fol-
low. lows.

1 Press [UP button] and [down button] si- 1 Press [up button] and [down] simultane-
multaneously. ously.
• The initial setting screen is displayed on the • The initial setting screen is displayed on the
Bluetooth bar code reader. Bluetooth bar code reader.

2 Select and confirm [Systemconfig]. 2 Select and confirm [Data process].

3 Select and confirm [Reset Memory]. 3 Select and confirm [Wedge/store].

4 Select and confirm [Memory]. 4 Select and confirm [Wedge only].

5 Select and confirm [Yes&Exit].

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the data storage settings are cleared, you will
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • no longer be able to refer to the read bar code history.
• When reading the next bar code, the same settings In cases where it is necessary to save data or refer to
can be used if steps 1 through 5 have been per- the history, when "Buffer Full" is displayed, repeat the
formed. procedures in "14.16.15 Memory Data Deletion" with-
out clearing the data save settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When reading the next bar code, the same settings
Memory data deletion can be used if steps 1 through 4 have been per-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • formed.

Scan data is not saved to KDC200.

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

530
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

This option is for operating this device with a portable

X-ray device. 14.17.1 Basic operation of the
The setting method of the PDA Type1 is as follows. PDA Type1
The basic operation of the PDA Type1 is as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• PDA Type1 cannot be connected using the built-in Name of the PDA Type1 sections
wireless LAN of this device. Use the wireless LAN
adapter provided as an option. For information on how
to install the wireless LAN adapter, refer to "14.7 In- Power switch
stallation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)".
• Apple iPod touch fourth or fifth generation is used as
an example here. There is a case where the setting Toolbar
procedure differs from those of the version used.
• When using iPod touch 4G, do not update the operat-
ing system to iOS 6 or later.
• When using an iPod touch 5G, use iOS 5.x or 6.1 or
later. As 6.0.1 is not supported, update the iPod be-

Chapter 14
Home screen
yond version 6.0.1 as necessary.
• Prepare the personal computer for maintenance.
Icon
• Prepare an environment where a personal computer
used for maintenance can connect to the internet.
• Only 1 unit of PDA Type1 can be connected to this
specific device at a time.
• When using the AeroDR access point (MOXA AWK- Home button
5222), the PDA type must be compatible with the
wireless LAN standard (IEEE802.11a). Dock connector
• When using Corega WLUSB300NS, since the IP
address is fixed at "192.168.100.1", confirm that the
device's internal wireless LAN and the internal wired Startup and shutdown of the PDA Type1
LAN IP addresses are not "192.168.100.1".
• The Corega WLUSB300NS can only be used in
O
OStarting up the PDA Type1
Japan.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA
Type1 until the Apple logo is displayed.
• The Home screen is displayed after a while.

O
OShutting down the PDA Type1

1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA

Type1 until a red slider is displayed.
• Red slider is displayed after a while.

2 Drag the red slider.

• Power of the PDA Type1 is turned off.

531
14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

Charge of the PDA Type1 O

OWhen charging using the USB power adapter
The charging method of the PDA Type1 is as follows.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
O
OWhen charging by connecting with this • USB power adapter is optional.
device ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the power of this device is 1 Connect the supplied Dock Connector to
turned on. USB Cable to the PDA Type1.

2 Connect this device and the PDA Type1 2 Connect the Dock Connector to USB Ca-
with the supplied Dock Connector to USB ble to the USB power adapter.
Cable.
3 Plug the USB power adapter into the out-
let.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not turn the power of this device off until the charg-
ing is completed. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Charging is completed when the battery icon displayed
on the tool bar of the PDA Type1 changes to charged
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • mark.
• Charging is completed when the battery icon displayed
on the tool bar of the PDA Type1 changes to charged Charging Charged
mark.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Charging Charged

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

532
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

2 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

14.17.2 Setting of this device and then press [Control Panel].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Before proceeding to this setting, check the combi-
nation of the wireless LAN adapter for PDA and the
wireless LAN adapter to be connected to the access
points of the institution (such as RIS, PACS, etch.) by
referring to the table below.
Base unit AeroDR
Logitec
(for PDA) Corega Access
LAN-
WLUSB Point
W150N
Handset 300NS (MOXA
U2BK
(for institution) AWK-5222)
Buffalo
○ ○ ○
WLP-CB-AG300
IO-DATA
×* ○ ○
WHG-AGDN/CB
IO-DATA

Chapter 14
×* ○ ○
WFG-AGDN/US-X
Logitec
○ ×* ○ 3 Press [View network status and tasks].
LAN-W150N U2BK
*T hey cannot be used simultaneously since the same
driver is used.
• Prepare an external CD/DVD drive in order to install
the driver for the wireless LAN adapter.
• Be sure to uninstall the drivers for the wireless LAN
adapters that are not used.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Setting of IP address for wireless LAN adapter

Set the IP address for the wireless LAN adapter.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4 Press [Change adapter settings].

• Make settings after performing the following opera-
tions.
–– Install the wireless LAN adapter driver.
–– Connect the wireless LAN adapter.
• For the installation of the wireless LAN adapter, refer
to "14.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB
type)".
• When using the AeroDR access point (MOXA AWK-
5222), wireless LAN adapters cannot be added.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that Windows desktop is dis-

played.

533
14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

6 S e l e c t [ I n t e r n e t P r o t o c o l Ve r s i o n 4
(TCP/IPv4)] and press [Properties].

• [Network Connections] screen is displayed.

5 Right-click the wireless LAN adapter added

for the PDA Type1, and select [Properties].

• [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Proper-

ties] screen is displayed.

7 Select [Use the following IP address], and

select following items.

• Properties screen for the wireless network con-

nection is displayed.

534
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

When Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used 9 Press [Close].

Setting item Settings

[IP address] Enter "192.168.20.190".
[Subnet mask] Enter "255.255.255.0".
[Default gate-
Nothing needs to be entered.
way]

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The values for [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Default
gateway] given here are fixed. Values cannot be
changed to other than those given above.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

When Corega WLUSB300NS is used

Setting item Setting contents

[IP address] "192.168.100.1" is automatically set.
[Subnet mask] "255.255.255.0" is automatically set.

Chapter 14
[Default gate-
way]
Entry is not necessary for this.
10 Close [Network Connections] screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Here, the values of [IP address], [Subnet mask] and
[Default gateway] are fixed. They cannot be changed
to other values.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

8 Press [OK].

535
14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

Connection setting with the PDA Type1 Security Settings

Configure the connection between the wireless LAN
Setting item Security setting
adapter and the PDA Type 1.
[Authentication
Select [WPA2-PSK].
method]
1 From the Windows desktop, open the driv- [Encryption] Select [AES].
er software for the wireless LAN adapter
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
that will be used.
• In the security setting, set the following item depend-
ing on the model to be used.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • –– When Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used
• For the wireless LAN adapter installation process, re-
fer to the operation manual of each product. Setting item Setting contents
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Enter the pass phrase. Enter the pass
phrase using one-byte alphabet char-
[WPA-PSK] acters and numbers. The entry is case
2 Set the following items. * Network key sensitive.
In ordinary cases, "165gf1JS" is en-
tered.
AP mode connection setting

Setting item Setting contents –– When Corega WLUSB300NS is used

Select the channel to be used from 1, 6, or 11.
[Channel] Setting item Setting contents
Default setting: 1
Use eight to 63 one-byte alphabet
[WPA-PSK]
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • characters and numbers for the entry.
* Network key
(Example: konicaminolta)
• In the AP mode connection setting, set the following
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
items depending on the model to be used.
–– When Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used
Setting of PDAs with the service tool (1)
Setting item Setting contents
Press [Use MAC address] to set the Perform the setting of the PDA Type1 with the service
[SSID] wireless LAN adapter MAC address for tool.
SSID.
Select this.
[No transfer be- When two or more wireless handsets 1 Start the service tool.
tween wireless are connected, this setting does not
clients] approve data transfer between wireless
handsets via the wireless LAN adapter.
2 Press the CS-7 icon.
Cancel the selection.
[Allow BW 40
This sets 11n (Draft) for the channel
MHz]
width.
Set the antenna power.
[Send power]
Select [25%].

–– When Corega WLUSB300NS is used

Setting item Setting contents

Enter any network name using up to 32
[SSID] one-byte characters. (Example: CS7_
PDA_1)
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

536
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

5 Confirm that [Use PDA installation URL] is

selected.

6 Set the following items in [Common Set-

ting].
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Press [PDA] on the sub-menu screen.

Setting item Settings

Set the login linkage mode. To enable the
[Login Mode] login linkage, select [Login linkage ON].
Default: [Login linkage OFF]

Chapter 14
Select this to enable automatic device
[Automatic rec- identification.
ognition of PDA Set this [ON] when using both iPod
models] and iPad.
Default: [OFF]
When [Automatic recognition of PDA
models] is set [OFF], set the terminal
[PDA Model
model to be used.
Setting]
Select [iPod].
Default: [iPod]

7 Set [Access Point IP Address].

• The PDA setting screen is displayed.

• When using Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK, enter
4 Select [Use PDA]. "192.168.20.190".
• When using Corega WLUSB300NS, enter
"192.168.100.1".
• When using the AeroDR Access Point (MOXA
AWK-5222) with a wireless connection, enter
the IP address for the device’s internal wireless
LAN. The default is "192.168.20.120". If the IP
address has been changed by the institution,
enter that instead.
• When using the AeroDR Access Point (MOXA
AWK-5222) with a wired connection, enter the
IP address for the devices internal wired LAN.
The default is "192.168.20.120". If the IP ad-
dress has been changed by the institution, enter
that instead.

537
14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

8 Press [OK] on the PDA setting screen.

14.17.3 Setting of maintenance
personal computer

Installation of the iTunes

Install the iTunes into the maintenance personal com-
• The settings are stored, and the screen is puter.
closed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
9 Close the sub-menu screen.
• The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japanese
version of iTunes is used as an example.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • When installing iTunes, the default device setting is
• For the other settings on the PDA setting screen, refer set to synchronize with the connected PDA Type1, so
to "PDA setting" of "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual the relationship of the PC for maintenance and the
for Service Tool/User Tool Screen". PDA Type1 will be 1:1. When using a different PC for
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
maintenance, configure settings again.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Download the [iTunesSetup.exe] to the

maintenance personal computer from
the Apple site (http://www.apple.com/jp/
itunes/download/).

2 Double-click the downloaded [iTunesSet-

up.exe].
• Press [Run] if the [Security Warning] screen is
displayed.

3 Press [Next].

538
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

4 Clear the selection in the [Add iTunes Initialization of the PDA Type1
shortcut to my desktop], [Use iTunes as
The initializing method of the PDA Type1 is as follows.
the default player for audio files], and [Au-
tomatically update iTunes and other Apple
software], and press [Install]. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japanese
version of iTunes is used as an example.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu

of the maintenance personal computer,
and then press [iTunes] - [iTunes] in [All
Programs].
• iTunes will start.

2 Connect the PDA Type1 and the mainte-

• Installation of the iTunes starts. nance personal computer with the sup-
plied Dock Connector to USB Cable.
5 Press [Finish].

Chapter 14
• PDA Type1 will be automatically initialized.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6 Press [Agree]. • If the below screen appears when connecting the sec-
ond or a subsequent PDA Type1, select [Set as a new
iPod] and press [Continue].

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• iTunes will start and the [iTunes Tutorials]
screen is displayed.

7 Shut down iTunes and close the [iTunes

Tutorials] screen.

539
14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

3 Input the PDA Type1 name, and press

14.17.4 Setting of the PDA
[Complete].
Type1

Setting for the initial startup

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The screens are shown in Japanese as a Japanese
PDA Type1 (iPod) is used as an example.
• Enter "<the name of this device to which you ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
connect it> iPod".
(Example) "CS7-12345 iPod" 1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA
• If the following message is displayed, press [No] Type1.
to close the screen.
2 Flick the bottom of the screen from left to
right.

4 Exit iTunes when the following message

appears at top of the screen.

5 Remove the PDA Type1 from the mainte-

nance computer.

3 Tap [Turn Location Services off], and then

tap [Next].

540
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

4 Tap [OK].

• A screen showing the conditions of use appears

after a while.

5 Tap [Next].
7 Tap [Agree].

Chapter 14
6 Tap [Continue].

8 Tap [Agree].

541
14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

9 Tap [Do not send], and then tap [Next]. Confirming the PDA Type1 version
Confirm the PDA Type1 version.

1 Tap [Settings] in the Home screen of the

PDA Type1.


10 Tap [Use iPod touch].

2 Tap [General].

• The Home screen is displayed.

542
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

3 Tap [About]. Locking of screen rotation to portrait

1 Press the Home button on the PDA Type1

twice continuously.

4 Make sure that the [Version] is 5.0.1 or

above.
2 Flick the bottom of the screen from left to

Chapter 14
right, and tap the lock rotation icon  .
• Orientation of the screen will be locked to por-
trait and lock rotation icon is displayed in the
Home screen of the PDA Type1.

Canceling of Auto-Lock

1 Tap the [Settings] in the Home screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Perform a version upgrade if the PDA Type1 version is
older than 5.0.1. For the operation method, refer to the
operation manual of PDA Type1.
• When using iPod touch 4G, do not update the operat-
ing system to iOS 6 or later.
• When using an iPod touch 5G, use iOS 5.x or 6.1 or
later. As 6.0.1 is not supported, update the iPod be-
yond version 6.0.1 as necessary.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

543
14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

2 Tap [General]. Setting of the Wi-Fi of the PDA Type1

The setting method of the Wi-Fi of the PDA Type1 is as fol-
lows.

1 Make sure that the wireless LAN adapter

is connected to this device.

2 Start this device.

3 Tap [Settings] in the Home screen of the

PDA Type1.

3 Tap [Auto-Lock].

4 Tap [Wi-Fi].

4 Tap [Never].

5 Press Home button.

544
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

5 Turn [ON] the [Wi-Fi]. 8 Set the following items in [IP Address].

When Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used

6 Tap [ ] of the access point to connect
from the list of wireless network. Setting item Setting contents
[IP Address] Enter "192.168.20.191".

Chapter 14
[Subnet Mask] Enter "255.255.255.0".
[Router] Enter "192.168.20.190".
[DNS] Enter "192.168.20.190".
[Search Domains] Enter "workgroup".
Password 165gf1JS

When Corega WLUSB300NS is used

Setting item Setting contents
[IP Address] Enter "192.168.100.2".
[Subnet Mask] Enter "255.255.255.0".
[Router] Enter "192.168.100.1".
[DNS] Enter "192.168.100.1".
[Search Domains] Enter "workgroup".
Password konicaminolta
7 Tap [Static].
When AeroDR Access Point (MOXA AWK-
5222) is used
Setting item Setting contents
[IP Address] Enter "192.168.20.121".
[Subnet Mask] Enter "255.255.255.0".
[Router] Enter "192.168.20.120".
[DNS] Enter "192.168.20.120".
[Search Domains] Enter "workgroup".
165gf1JSsw90Gt4F9ODu96Xzt-
Password
l89u93ftEfrzXwe19
*[IP address] varies depending on the institution.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When using the AeroDR access point (MOXA AWK-
5222), the PDA type must be compatible with the wire-
less LAN standard (IEEE802.11a).
• When using iOS 6.1 or higher, enter [DNS] or [Search
Domains]. When using iOS 5.x, it is not necessary to
enter anything.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

545
14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

9 Tap [Wi-Fi Networks].

• Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the tool bar.

• If the [Ask to Join Networks] is set to [ON], turn
it [OFF].
10 Tap the access point to connect from the
list of wireless network.
12 Press Home button.

Setting of access control

The setting method of the access control is as follows.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Some screens are shown in Japanese since the Japa-
nese models Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK and Corega
WLUSB300NS are used as examples.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Tap [Settings] in the Home screen of the

PDA Type1 to connect.

11 Enter the password, and tap [Join].

• Enter "165gf1JS" as the password.

546
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

2 Tap [General]. O
OWhen Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used

6 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [All Programs] – [Logitec]
– [Client Utility].
• Logitec software AP utility starts up.

7 Select [Access Control] tab and then se-

lect [Allow All] from access policy.

3 Tap [About].

Chapter 14
8 Enter "MAC address" that is confirmed in
step 4 in [MAC Address] and then press
[Add].

4 Confirm [Wi-Fi Address] in the information

screen.

• (Example) If the PDA Type1 Wi-Fi address is

"A6:B5:C4:D3:E2:F1", enter "A6B5C4D3E2F1"
as the MAC address. Enter letters in uppercase,
and do not enter the " : ".

5 Confirm the Windows desktop of this de-

vice is displayed.
• The following order will vary depending on the
type of wireless LAN adapter in use.

547
14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

O
OWhen Corega WLUSB300NS is used

6 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then select [Wireless Client Utility]
from [All Programs].
• Wireless Client Utility starts up.

7 Select [Access Point Mode] from [Menu].

8 Select [Security] tab.

• "MAC address" is displayed in the access list.

9 Press [Apply].

9 Press [MAC address filtering settings].

10 Close the [Logitec software AP utility]

screen.

10 Select [Enable] for [Filtering Mechanism].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To register several units of PDA, repeat steps 8 and 9.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

548
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

11 Enter the "MAC address" that was con- Creation of the CS-7 icon
firmed in step 4 in [MAC Address] and
Create a CS-7 icon in the Home screen of the PDA
then press [Add]. Type1.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Some screens are shown in Japanese as a Japanese
PDA Type1 (iPod) is used as an example.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Make sure that this device is powered on.

2 Tap [Safari] in the Home screen of the

PDA Type1.

12 Confirm that the entered "MAC address"

Chapter 14
is displayed in [Access List] and press
[Apply].

• Safari will start.

• Tap [Done] when the Bookmarks screen is dis-
played.

3 Set the URL.

13 Close Wireless Client Utility.

• When Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used, enter

"http://192.168.20.190/login/index.html".
• When Corega WLUSB300NS is used, enter
"http://192.168.100.1/login/index.html".

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To register several PDA units, repeat steps 11 through
12.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

549
14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 6 Enter "CS-7" and tap [Add].

• For the switching method of the character input, refer
to the operation manual of PDA Type1 .
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Tap the Menu button.

7 Tap [OK].

5 Tap [Add to Home Screen].

• CS-7 icon is added to the Home screen.

550
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

Setting of PDAs with the service tool (2)

Perform the setting of the PDA Type1 with the service
tool.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon. • The PDA setting screen is displayed.

4 Deselect [Use PDA installation URL].

5 Press [OK] on the PDA setting screen.

Chapter 14
• The settings are stored, and the screen is
closed.

6 Close the sub-menu screen.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Press [PDA] on the sub-menu screen.

551
14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

Confirmation of starting of this device on

the PDA Type1 14.17.5 Other settings
Confirm if this device is starting on the PDA Type1.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Settings for the birthdate display format

• Some screens are shown in Japanese as a Japanese When you select a preset that includes a birthdate
PDA Type1 (iPod) is used as an example. from the displayed items in the list screen or exposure
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • screen, the format of the birthdate that is displayed
can be changed as follows.
1 Make sure that this device is powered on.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Tap [CS-7] in the Home screen of the PDA
• The PDA Type1's birthdate display format does not
Type1. change in relation to the [Date Formatting] setting of
this device.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The default birthdate display format is "YYYY-MM-
DD".
• By performing these steps, birthdates can be dis-
played in a format different from that configured in this
device's [Date Formatting] setting.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How
to display the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

• The login screen is displayed on the PDA Type1.

3 Open "C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\
System\Platform\System\PluginSetting\
ImageAcquisitionDomainExtender\" with
Explorer.

552
 14.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

4 Using Notepad, etc., in Windows, open the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

preset file selected in [List Screen/Expo- • Back up the selected preset file before editing the pre-
sure Screen Display Items Setting] in the set values.
service tools' PDA setting. • There are at most 2 parts in which the preset values
• Open any of the following files. must be edited.
–– Preset D setting file: ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_D.xml
–– Preset E setting file:
PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_E.xml
6 Restart this device.
–– Preset F setting file:
PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_F.xml 7 Select the preset with the altered display
format with [List Screen/Exposure Screen
Display Items Setting] in the service tools'
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
PDA setting.
• When [Japanese] is set for [Language Setting], the
birthdate for Preset D is not displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 14
• For preset content, refer to "Setting of PDAs" of "CS-7
Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/User Tool
Screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

5 Change the "DA000" string inside the file

to the preset value of the display format
you want to use, and save the file.
• Display format preset values are as follows.

Display format Preset value

M-D-YYYY DA001
MM-DD-YYYY DA002
D-M-YYYY DA003
DD-MM-YYYY DA004

Edit area

553
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

This option is for operating this device with a portable

X-ray device. 14.18.1 Basic operation of the
The setting method of the PDA Type2 is as follows. PDA Type2
The basic operation of the PDA Type2 is as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• PDA Type2 cannot be connected using the built-in Name of the PDA Type2 sections
wireless LAN of this device. Use the wireless LAN
adapter provided as an option. For information on how
Power switch
to install the wireless LAN adapter, refer to "14.7 In-
stallation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)".
Toolbar
• Apple iPad third generation is used as an example
here. There is a case where the setting procedure dif-
fers from those of the version used.
• Prepare the personal computer for maintenance.
• Prepare an environment where a personal computer Home screen
used for maintenance can connect to the internet.
• Only 1 unit of PDA Type1 can be connected to this
specific device at a time. Icon
• When using Corega WLUSB300NS, since the IP
address is fixed at "192.168.100.1", confirm that the
device's internal wireless LAN and the internal wired
LAN IP addresses are not "192.168.100.n".
• The Corega WLUSB300NS can only be used in
Japan. Home button
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Dock connector

Startup and shutdown of the PDA Type2

O
OStarting up the PDA Type2

1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA

Type2 until the Apple logo is displayed.
• The Home screen is displayed after a while.

O
OShutting down the PDA Type2

1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA

Type2 until a red slider is displayed.
• Red slider is displayed after a while.

2 Drag the red slider.

• Power of the PDA Type2 is turned off.

554
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

Charge of the PDA Type2 O

OWhen charging using the USB power adapter
The charging method of the PDA Type2 is as follows.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
O
OWhen charging by connecting with this de- • USB power adapter is optional.
vice ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Confirm that the power of this device is 1 Connect the supplied Dock Connector to
turned on. USB Cable to the PDA Type2.

2 Connect this device and the PDA Type2 2 Connect the Dock Connector to USB Ca-
with the supplied Dock Connector to USB ble to the USB power adapter.
Cable.
3 Plug the USB power adapter into the out-
let.

Chapter 14
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not turn the power of this device off until the charg-
ing is completed. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Charging is completed when the battery icon displayed
on the tool bar of the PDA Type2 changes to charged
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • mark.
• Charging is completed when the battery icon displayed
on the tool bar of the PDA Type2 changes to charged Charging Charged

mark.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Charging Charged

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

555
14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

2 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

14.18.2 Setting of this device and then press [Control Panel].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Before proceeding to this setting, check the combi-
nation of the wireless LAN adapter for PDA and the
wireless LAN adapter to be connected to the access
points of the institution (such as RIS, PACS, etch.) by
referring to the table below.
Base unit AeroDR
Logitec
(for PDA) Corega Access
LAN-
WLUSB Point
W150N
Handset 300NS (MOXA
U2BK
(for institution) AWK-5222)
Buffalo
○ ○ ○
WLP-CB-AG300
IO-DATA
×* ○ ○
WHG-AGDN/CB
IO-DATA
×* ○ ○
WFG-AGDN/US-X
Logitec
○ ×* ○ 3 Press [View network status and tasks].
LAN-W150N U2BK
*T hey cannot be used simultaneously since the same
driver is used.
• Prepare an external CD/DVD drive in order to install
the driver for the wireless LAN adapter.
• Be sure to uninstall the drivers for the wireless LAN
adapters that are not used.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Setting of IP address for wireless LAN adapter

Set the IP address for the wireless LAN adapter.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4 Press [Change adapter settings].

• Make settings after performing the following opera-
tions.
–– Install the wireless LAN adapter driver.
–– Connect the wireless LAN adapter.
• For the installation of the wireless LAN adapter, refer
to "14.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB
type)".
• When using the AeroDR access point (MOXA AWK-
5222), wireless LAN adapters cannot be added.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Confirm that Windows desktop is dis-

played.

556
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

6 S e l e c t [ I n t e r n e t P r o t o c o l Ve r s i o n 4
(TCP/IPv4)] and press [Properties].

• [Network Connections] screen is displayed.

5 Right-click the wireless LAN adapter added

for the PDA Type2, and select [Properties].

Chapter 14
• [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Proper-
ties] screen is displayed.

7 Select [Use the following IP address], and

set following items.

• Properties screen for the wireless network con-

nection is displayed.

557
14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

When Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used 9 Press [Close].

Setting item Setting contents

[IP address] Enter "192.168.20.190".
[Subnet mask] Enter "255.255.255.0".
[Default gate-
Nothing needs to be entered.
way]

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The values for [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Default
gateway] given here are fixed. Values cannot be
changed to other than those given above.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

When Corega WLUSB300NS is used

Setting item Setting contents

[IP address] "192.168.100.1" is automatically set.
[Subnet mask] "255.255.255.0" is automatically set.
[Default gate-
way]
Entry is not necessary for this.
10 Close [Network Connections] screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Here, the values of [IP address], [Subnet mask] and
[Default gateway] are fixed. You cannot change the
above value into another one.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

8 Press [OK].

558
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

Connection setting with the PDA Type2 Security Setting

Configure the connection between the wireless LAN
Setting item Security setting
adapter and the PDA Type 2.
[Authentication
Select [WPA2-PSK].
method]
1 From the Windows desktop, open the driv- [Encryption] Select [AES].
er software for the wireless LAN adapter
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
that will be used.
• In the security setting, set the following item depend-
ing on the model to be used.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • –– When Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used
• For the wireless LAN adapter installation process, re-
fer to the operation manual of each product. Setting item Settings contents
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Enter the pass phrase. Enter the pass
phrase using one-byte alphabet char-
[WPA-PSK] acters and numbers. The entry is case
2 Set the following items. * Network key sensitive.
In ordinary cases, "165gf1JS" is en-
tered.
AP mode connection setting
–– When Corega WLUSB300NS is used
Setting item Settings contents

Chapter 14
Select the channel to be used from 1, 6, or 11. Setting item Setting contents
[Channel]
Default setting: 1 Use eight to 63 one-byte alphabet
[WPA-PSK]
characters and numbers for the entry.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • * Network key
(Example: konicaminolta)
• In the AP mode connection setting, set the following ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
items depending on the model to be used.
–– When Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used
Setting of PDAs with the service tool (1)
Setting item Setting contents
Perform the setting of the PDA Type1 with the service tool.
Press [Use MAC address] to set the
[SSID] wireless LAN adapter MAC address for
SSID. 1 Start the service tool.
Select this.
[No transfer be- When two or more wireless handsets 2 Press the CS-7 icon.
tween wireless are connected, this setting does not
clients] approve data transfer between wireless
handsets via the wireless LAN adapter.
Cancel the selection.
[Allow BW 40
This sets 11n (Draft) for the channel
MHz]
width.
Set the antenna power.
[Send power]
Select [25%].

–– When Corega WLUSB300NS is used

Setting item Setting contents

Enter any network name using up to 32
[SSID] one-byte characters. (Example: CS7_
PDA_2)
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

559
14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

6 Set the following items in [Common Set-

ting].

Setting item Settings

Set the login linkage mode. To enable
the login linkage, select [Login linkage
[Login Mode]
ON].
• The sub-menu screen is displayed. Default: [Login linkage OFF]
Select this to enable automatic device
3 Press [PDA] on the sub-menu screen. [Automatic identification.
recognition of Set this [ON] when using both iPod
PDA models] and iPad.
Default: [OFF]
When [Automatic recognition of PDA
models] is set [OFF], set the terminal
[PDA Model
model to be used.
Setting]
Select [iPad].
Default: [iPod]

7 Set [Access Point IP Address].

• When using Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK, enter

"192.168.20.190".
• When using Corega WLUSB300NS, enter
"192.168.100.1".
• When using the AeroDR Access Point (MOXA
AWK-5222) with a wireless connection, enter
the IP address for the device’s internal wireless
LAN. The default is "192.168.20.120". If the IP
address has been changed by the institution,
• The PDA setting screen is displayed. enter that instead.
• When using the AeroDR Access Point (MOXA
4 Select [Use PDA]. AWK-5222) with a wired connection, enter the
IP address for the devices internal wired LAN.
The default is "192.168.20.120". If the IP ad-
dress has been changed by the institution, enter
that instead.

5 Confirm that [Use PDA installation URL] is

selected.

560
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

8 Press [OK] on the PDA setting screen.

14.18.3 Setting of maintenance
personal computer

Installation of the iTunes

Install the iTunes into the maintenance personal com-
• The settings are stored, and the screen is closed. puter.

9 Close the sub-menu screen.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japanese
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • version of iTunes is used as an example.
• For the other settings on the PDA setting screen, refer • When installing iTunes, the default device setting is
to "PDA setting" of "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual set to synchronize with the connected PDA Type2, so
for Service Tool/User Tool Screen" the relationship of the PC for maintenance and the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • PDA Type2 will be 1:1. When using a different PC for
maintenance, configure settings again.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 14
1 Download the [iTunesSetup.exe] to the
maintenance personal computer from
the Apple site (http://www.apple.com/jp/
itunes/download/).

2 Double-click the downloaded [iTunes

Setup.exe].
• Press [Run] if the [Security Warning] screen is
displayed.

3 Press [Next].

561
14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

4 Clear the selection in the [Add iTunes Initialization of the PDA Type2
shortcut to my desktop], [Use iTunes as
The initializing method of the PDA Type2 is as follows.
the default player for audio files], and [Au-
tomatically update iTunes and other Apple
software], and press [Install]. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japanese
version of iTunes is used as an example.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu

of the maintenance personal computer,
and then press [iTunes] - [iTunes] in [All
Programs].
• iTunes will start.

2 Connect the PDA Type2 and the mainte-

• Installation of the iTunes starts. nance personal computer with the sup-
plied Dock Connector to USB Cable.
5 Press [Finish].

• PDA Type2 will be automatically initialized.

6 Press [Agree]. • Check [Agree] in the software license agree-
ment.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If the below screen appears when connecting the sec-
ond or a subsequent PDA Type2, select [Set as a new
iPad] and press [Continue].

• iTunes will start and the [iTunes Tutorials]

screen is displayed.

7 Shut down iTunes and close the [iTunes

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Tutorials] screen.

562
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

3 Input the PDA Type2 name, and press

14.18.4 Setting of the PDA
[Complete].
Type2

Setting for the initial startup

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The screens are shown in Japanese as a Japanese
PDA Type2 (iPad) is used as an example.
• Enter "<the name of this device to which you ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
connect it> iPad".
(Example) "CS7-12345 iPad" 1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA
• If the following message is displayed, press [No] Type2.
to close the screen.
2 Flick the bottom of the screen from left to
right.

Chapter 14
4 Exit iTunes when the following message
appears at top of the screen.

5 Remove the PDA Type2 from the mainte-

nance computer.

3 Set the country and region.

4 Tap [Turn Location Services off], and then

tap [Next].

563
14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

5 Tap [OK].

• A screen showing the conditions of use appears

after a while.

6 Tap [Next].
8 Tap [Agree].

7 Tap [Continue].

9 Tap [Agree].

564
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

10 Tap [Use Audio imput], and then tap [Next].

• The Home screen is displayed.

11 Tap [Do not send], and then tap [Next]. Confirming the PDA Type2 version
Confirm the PDA Type2 version.

Chapter 14
1 Tap [Settings] in the Home screen of the
PDA Type2.

12 Tap [Use iPad].

2 Tap [General].

565
14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

3 Tap [About]. Locking of screen rotation to portrait

1 Press the Home button on the PDA Type2

twice continuously.

4 Make sure that the [Version] is 5.0.1 or

above.
2 Flick the bottom of the screen from left to
right, and tap the lock rotation icon  .
• Orientation of the screen will be locked to por-
trait and lock rotation icon is displayed in the
Home screen of the PDA Type2.

Canceling of Auto-Lock

1 Tap the [Settings] in the Home screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Perform a version upgrade if the PDA Type2 version is
older than 5.0.1. For the operation method, refer to the
operation manual of PDA Type2 .
• Use iOS 5.x or 6.1 or later. As 6.0.1 is not supported,
update the iPod beyond version 6.0.1 as necessary.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

566
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

2 Tap [General]. Fixing the screen operation

1 Tap [Setting] on the home screen.

3 Set [Auto-Lock] to [Never].

Chapter 14
2 Tap [General].

4 Press Home button.

3 Set [Multitask Gesture] to [OFF].

4 Press the home button.

567
14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

Setting of the Wi-Fi of the PDA Type2 5 Turn [ON] the [Wi-Fi].
The setting method of the Wi-Fi of the PDA Type2 is as fol-
lows.

1 Make sure that the wireless LAN adapter

is connected to this device.

2 Start this device.

3 Tap [Settings] in the Home screen of the

PDA Type2.

6 Tap [ ] of the access point to connect

from the list of wireless network.

4 Tap [Wi-Fi].

7 Tap [Static].

568
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

8 Set the following items in [IP Address]. 9 Tap [Wi-Fi Networks].

When Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used

10 Tap the access point to connect from the
Setting item Setting contents list of wireless network.
[IP Address] Enter "192.168.20.191".

Chapter 14
[Subnet Mask] Enter "255.255.255.0".
[Router] Enter "192.168.20.190".
[DNS] Enter "192.168.20.190".
[Search Domains] Enter "workgroup".
Password 165gf1JS

When Corega WLUSB300NS is used

Setting item Setting contents
[IP Address] Enter "192.168.100.2".
[Subnet Mask] Enter "255.255.255.0".
[Router] Enter "192.168.100.1".
[DNS] Enter "192.168.100.1".
[Search Domains] Enter "workgroup".
Password konicaminolta
11 Enter the password, and tap [Join].

When AeroDR Access Point (MOXA AWK-

5222) is used
Setting item Setting contents
[IP Address] Enter "192.168.20.121".
[Subnet Mask] Enter "255.255.255.0".
[Router] Enter "192.168.20.120".
[DNS] Enter "192.168.20.120".
[Search Domains] Enter "workgroup".
165gf1JSsw90Gt4F9ODu96Xzt-
Password
l89u93ftEfrzXwe19
*[IP address] varies depending on the institution.

• Enter "165gf1JS" as the password.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When using iOS 6.1 or higher, enter [DNS] or [Search
Domains]. When using iOS 5.x, it is not necessary to
enter anything.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

569
14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

2 Tap [General].

• Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the tool bar.

12 Press Home button. 3 Tap [About].

Setting of access control

The setting method of the access control is as follows.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Some screens are shown in Japanese since the Japa-
nese models Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK and Corega
WLUSB300NS are used as examples.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Tap [Settings] in the Home screen of the

PDA Type2 to connect.

4 Confirm [Wi-Fi Address] in the information

screen.

5 Confirm the Windows desktop of this de-

vice is displayed.
• The following order will vary depending on the
type of wireless LAN adapter in use.

570
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

O
OWhen Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used

6 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [All Programs] – [Logitec]
– [Client Utility].
• Logitec software AP utility starts up.

7 Select [Access Control] tab and then se-

lect [Allow All] from access policy.

• "MAC address" is displayed in the access list.

9 Press [Adapt].

Chapter 14
8 Enter "MAC address" that is confirmed in
step 4 in [MAC Address] and then press
[Add].

10 Close the [Logitec software AP utility]

screen.

• (Example) If the PDA Type2 Wi-Fi address is

"A6:B5:C4:D3:E2:F1", enter "A6B5C4D3E2F1"
as the MAC address. Enter letters in uppercase,
and do not enter the " : ".

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To register several units of PDA, repeat step 8 and 9.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

571
14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

O
OWhen Corega WLUSB300NS is used 11 Enter the "MAC address" that was con-
firmed in step 4 in [MAC Address] and
6 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu, then press [Add].
and then select [Wireless Client Utility]
from [All Programs].
• Wireless Client Utility starts up.

7 Select [Access Point Mode] from [Menu].

8 Select [Security] tab.

12 Confirm that the entered "MAC address"

is displayed in [Access List] and press
[Apply].
9 Press [MAC address filtering settings].

10 Select [Enable] for [Filtering Mechanism].

13 Close Wireless Client Utility.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To register several PDA units, repeat steps 11 through
12.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

572
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

Creation of the CS-7 icon Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Create a CS-7 icon in the Home screen of the PDA • For the switching method of the character input, refer
Type2. to the operation manual of PDA Type2 .
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Tap [OK].
• Some screens are shown in Japanese as a Japanese
PDA Type2 (iPad) is used as an example.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Make sure that this device is powered on.

2 Tap [Safari] in the Home screen of the

PDA Type2.

Chapter 14
5 Tap the Menu button.

• Safari will start.

• Tap [Done] when the Bookmarks screen is dis-
played.

3 Set the URL.

6 Tap [Add to Home Screen].

• When Logitec LAN-W150N U2BK is used, enter

"http://192.168.20.190/login/index.html".
• When Corega WLUSB300NS is used, enter
"http://192.168.100.1/login/index.html".

573
14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

7 Enter "CS-7" and tap [Add]. Setting of PDAs with the service tool (2)
Perform the setting of the PDA Type2 with the service
tool.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• CS-7 icon is added to the Home screen. • The sub-menu screen is displayed.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Press [PDA] on the sub-menu screen.

• If a message about rearranging the icons is displayed,
press [OK].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

574
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

Confirmation of starting of this device on

the PDA Type2
Confirm if this device is starting on the PDA Type2.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Some screens are shown in Japanese as a Japanese
• The PDA setting screen is displayed.
PDA Type2 (iPad) is used as an example.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Deselect [Use PDA installation URL].
1 Make sure that this device is powered on.

2 Tap [CS-7] in the Home screen of the PDA

Type2.

5 Press [OK] on the PDA setting screen.

Chapter 14
• The settings are stored, and the screen is
closed.

6 Close the sub-menu screen.

• The login screen is displayed on the PDA Type2.

575
14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

4 Using Notepad, etc., in Windows, open the

14.18.5 Other settings preset file selected in [List Screen/Expo-
sure Screen Display Items Setting] in the
service tools' PDA setting.
• Open any of the following files.
Settings for the birthdate display format
–– Preset D setting file:
When you select a preset that includes a birthdate PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_D.xml
from the displayed items in the list screen or exposure –– Preset E setting file:
screen, the format of the birthdate that is displayed PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_E.xml
can be changed as follows. –– Preset F setting file:
PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_F.xml

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The PDA Type2's birthdate display format does not HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
change in relation to the [Date Formatting] setting of • When [Japanese] is set for [Language Setting], the
this device. birthdate for Preset D is not displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• For preset content, refer to "Setting of PDAs" of "CS-7
• The default birthdate display format is "YYYY-MM-
Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/User Tool
DD".
Screen".
• By performing these steps, birthdates can be dis-
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
played in a format different from that configured in this
device's [Date Formatting] setting.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5 Change the "DA000" string inside the file
to the preset value of the display format
1 Display the intermediate screen. you want to use, and save the file.
• Display format preset values are as follows.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Display format Preset value

• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How M-D-YYYY DA001
to display the intermediate screen". MM-DD-YYYY DA002
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • D-M-YYYY DA003
DD-MM-YYYY DA004
2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
diate screen.

Edit area

3 Open "C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\
System\Platform\System\PluginSetting\
ImageAcquisitionDomainExtender\" with
Explorer.

576
 14.18 Installation of the PDA Type2

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Back up the selected preset file before editing the pre-
set values.
• There are at most 2 parts in which the preset values
must be edited.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6 Restart this device.

7 Select the preset with the altered display

format with [List Screen/Exposure Screen
Display Items Setting] in the service tools'
PDA setting.

Chapter 14

577
 14.19 UPS installation

This option is for operating this device in an exposure 5 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,
room. and then press [Control Panel].

1 Connect the UPS to this device using a

USB cable.

2 Turn on this device and the UPS in this or-

der.

3 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

6 Press [System and Security].

7 Press [Power Options].

578
 14.19 UPS installation

8 Confirm that [High performance] is se- Setting item Settings

lected in [Select a power plan] then press [Low battery
Confirm [On battery: 50%].
[Change plan settings]. level]
[Critical battery
Confirm [On battery: 10%].
level]
[Critical battery
Confirm [On battery: Shutdown].
action]
[Low battery
Confirm [On battery: On].
notification]
[Low battery
Confirm [On battery: Do nothing].
action]

11 Press [+] beside [Hard disk] and set [On

9 Press [Change advanced power settings]. battery (Minutes)] to [0].

Chapter 14
10 Press [+] beside [Battery] and check the
following items in order.
12 Press [Apply].

13 Press [OK].

579
14.19 UPS installation

14 From the [On battery] menu of [Turn off

the display], select [5 minutes], then press
[Save changes].

15 Close the screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the power supply drops or there is a power out-
age, the UPS will make a beeping sound, then the
battery will start operating. When the beeping sound is
heard, please tell the user to turn off this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the power supply switches to UPS due to a power
failure, you will see an icon on the taskbar.
• You can check the operational status of the battery by
pressing the icon.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

580
 Chapter
15
Installation of Function
System Options
This chapter describes the operation for installation of function system options
for this device.

581
 15.1 Setting of the S-SRM

This option is for operating this device in an exposure

room.
When installing S-SRM, follow the procedures below. 15.1.2 Exposure room setting
* S-SRM is not used in Japan.
Set the sync mode of this device with the X-ray device
of the exposure room.
15.1.1 S-SRM installation
1 Turn on the AeroDR Interface Unit or
The method of installation of the S-SRM is as follows. AeroDR Interface Unit2, monitor, and this
device.
1 Install the S-SRM KIT in the AeroDR Inter-
face Unit2 or the AeroDR Generator Inter- 2 Start the service tool.
face Unit, and the X-ray device.
3 Press the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • icon.
• Set the dip switches on the ECB board to S-SRM.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the S-SRM installation, refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM
Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Connect the X-ray sensor connection jig

to AeroDR Interface Unit2 or the AeroDR
Generator Interface Unit.
• This completes the S-SRM installation. Next, set
the exposure room.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the connection of the X-ray sensor connection jig,
refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manu-
al".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

582
 15.1 Setting of the S-SRM

4 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. 6 Press [OK].

• Returns to the sub-menu screen.

• This completes the exposure room setting. Next,
measure the delay time.

Chapter 15
• The AeroDR unit setting screen is displayed.

5 Select [SRM] in [Sync Mode] in [Exposure

Room Setting].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Select [SRM] as [Sync Mode], because S-SRM set-
tings are made on the ECB board in the AeroDR Gen-
erator Interface Unit.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

583
15.1 Setting of the S-SRM

15.1.3 Prep-Delay time

4 Press [Start] in [Prep-Delay Time Measure-
ment].
measurement
Measure the delay time (Prep-Delay time) from press-
ing the first stage of the exposure switch until the start
of exposure.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Perform the measurement of delay time between "4.14
Change of network of this device/addition of AeroDR
Detector after completing the settings" and "4.15 Anal-
ysis of AeroDR Detector".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Press [Delay Measurement] on the sub-

menu screen.

• The message "Prep-Delay Time is measuring.

Please Press ExposureSW1●SW2 Simultane-
ously and Expose. After the Exposure is re-
peated 3 times please press [End] button." is
displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If an error message is displayed when [Start] or
[End] are pushed, check that the connection with the
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit was made.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 Press the first stage and second stage of

the exposure switch at the same time to
perform the first exposure.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Release the exposure switch after the exposure sound
disappears.
• The delay time measurement screen is dis- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
played.
6 Repeat step 5 twice for a total exposure of
three times.
2 Set the X-ray device to non-interlock.

3 Set the exposure condition of the X-ray IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

device to a voltage of 80kVp and a current • Wait for the rotor of the X-ray device to stop, and then
of 100mA or higher. perform the next exposure.
• If exposure could not be completed, press [Cancel]
and restart from step 4.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

584
 15.1 Setting of the S-SRM

7 Press [End]. 10 Press [Yes].

• Saves the measured delay time and displays it

in units of 0.1 sec on a [Timer] of [XG BOX Set-
ting] in the AeroDR unit setting screen. If you
want to manually change the delay time, do so
using the [Timer] of [XG BOX Setting] in the
AeroDR unit setting screen.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When changing from the S-SRM link to the SRM link,
reset the [Timer] of [XG BOX Setting] on the AeroDR
unit setting screen to "0" msec.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Displays the first, second and third measure-
ment values and the first through third measure-
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ment averages.
• For the changing of the delay time, refer to "4.10.11
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit setting".
8

Chapter 15
Confirm the first through the third mea- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
surement averages.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 11 Press [Close].

• Confirm that there are no substantial differences in
the measured values from first to third measurements.
Perform steps 4 through 7 again if the differences are
substantially large.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

9 Press [Save].

• This completes the Prep-Delay time measure-

ments. When the moving grid is connected to
the X-ray device, measure the following Bucky-
Delay time. When the moving grid is not con-
nected to the X-ray device, remove the X-ray
sensor connection jig from AeroDR Generator
Interface Unit.

• A confirmation message is displayed.

585
15.1 Setting of the S-SRM

15.1.4 Bucky-Delay time

6 Press the second stage of the exposure
switch to perform the first exposure in 5
measurement seconds later after pressing the first stage
When the moving grid is connected to the X-ray de- of the exposure switch.
vice, measure the delay time (Bucky-Delay time) from
pressing the second stage of the exposure switch until 7 Repeat step 5 twice for a total exposure of
the start of exposure. three times.
If the moving grid is not connected to the X-ray device,
this setting is not necessary. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the first stage of the exposure switch was pressed
1 Load the AeroDR Detector into the expo- then the second stage of the exposure switch was
sure stage as necessary. pressed within 5 seconds, press [Cancel] and restart
from step 5.
2 Display the delay time measurement ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
screen.
8 Press [End].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operations, refer to step 1 of "15.1.3 Prep-
Delay time measurement".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Select the exposure with the moving gird

on the X-ray device.

4 Set the exposure condition of the X-ray

device to a voltage of 80kVp and a current
of 100mA or higher.

5 Press [Start] in [Bucky-Delay Time Mea-

surement].

• Displays the first, second and third measure-

ment values and the first through third measure-
ment averages.

9 Confirm the first through the third mea-

surement averages.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Confirm that there are no substantial differences in the
measured values from the first to the third measure-
ments. Perform steps 5 through 8 again if the differ-
ences are substantially large.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The message "Bucky-Delay Time is measuring.

Please Press ExposureSW1 for 5 seconds and
then press SW2 Expose. After the Exposure is
repeated 3 times please press [End] button." is
displayed.

586
 15.1 Setting of the S-SRM

10 Confirm that the measurement average is

15.1.5 X-ray exposure sync
within 300 msec.
setting
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Set the X-ray exposure sync.
• If the measurement average is higher than 300 msec,
use an exposure time of less than [This charge stor- 1 Start the service tool.
age time - measurement average] msec and explain
this exposure time to the users.
(Ex.)If this charge storage time is 1 sec (default)
2 Press the CS-7 icon.
and the measurement average is 350 msec, the
max. exposure time will be
1000 msec-350 msec = 650 msec or less.
• The AeroDR System allows a max. exposure time of
700 msec. However, when the measurement average
of the Bucky-Delay time is 300 msec or higher, the
user needs to reduce the max. exposure time used.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the Bucky-Delay measurement average is 300 msec
or higher, then the message "Please explain to the
user to set the max exposure time as [(1000-Bucky-
Delay measurement average)] ms." will appear.
• If you measure the Bucky-Delay time once, when the

Chapter 15
next delay time measurement screen is displayed,
the measurement results of the previous Bucky-Delay
time will be displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

11 Press [Close].

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

• Remove the X-ray sensor connection jig from

the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit.

587
15.1 Setting of the S-SRM

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

4 Set the following item of [S-SRM X-ray Ex-

posure sync setting].

Setting item Settings

Select the setting from among [CR
[S-SRM X-ray
mode], [DR mode] and [Manual mode]
Exposure
in [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync mode].
sync mode]
Default setting: [CR mode]
[Display the
message that Select this if the message indicating
the X-ray device is not synchronized
X-ray device is
appears while selecting the CR expo-
non-interlock
sure conditions in [Manual mode].
mode when
This item cannot be selected in [CR
CR Exam is mode] or [DR mode]
selected]

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To set the [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync mode] setting
to [CR mode] or [DR mode], leave No. 3 of the ECB
board dip switch "SW2" of the AeroDR Generator In-
terface Unit off.
• To set the [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync mode] setting
to [Manual mode], switch on No. 3 of the ECB board
dip switch "SW2" of the AeroDR Generator Interface
Unit.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

5 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

• The settings are stored, and the screen is closed.

6 Close the sub-menu screen.

588
 15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

15.2.1 Overview of X-ray information linkage function

This option is for operating this device in an exposure room.

The setting of X-ray information linkage enables this device to transmit the preset of X-ray exposure conditions (kV,
mA, mAs, etc.) to X-ray devices before exposures.

O
OX-ray device connection example

Exposure room

CS-7

Hub

Ethernet-serial converter
"TA-402X" (recommended)

XIF/
XGIF
Power
source Hub ECB

Chapter 15
AeroDR Interface Unit AeroDR Generator
Interface Unit

AeroDR Detector

AeroDR Detector

X-ray Tube
X-ray device

Ethernet cable (PoE)

Ethernet cable
RS-232C/hardware connection

• It is required to set X-ray devices and the X-ray exposure conditions to transmit to them respectively in order to
perform the X-ray information linkage.
–– Perform the setting of X-ray devices with the service tool.
–– Perform the setting of X-ray exposure conditions with the user tool.
• Connect this device and X-ray devices via Ethernet or RS-232C. In case of an RS-232C connection, be sure to
prepare the recommended Ethernet-serial converter.

589
15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

O
OList of link parameters for each manufacturer
The parameters that link with each manufacturer are as follows.

General purpose X-ray device

Name
Arcoma CPI POSKOM SEDECAL emd
(Communication DICOM tag
(Ethernet) (RS232C) (Ethernet) (RS232C) (RS232C)
method)
AeroDR Generator AeroDR Generator AeroDR Generator
Cable connection AeroDR Interface Unit X-ray device
Interface Unit Interface Unit Interface Unit

Cable used LAN cable Serial crossover cable LAN cable Serial crossover cable Serial straight cable

Conneciton cable con-

nector type*1
D-Sub9pin female D-Sub9pin female D-Sub9pin male

Anatomical (APR)

Bucky(WS) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0018,
kV
0060 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0018,
mA
1151 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0018.
msec
1150 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0018,
mAs
1152 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Focus ○ ○ ▲*2 ▲*2 ○
AEC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Film Screen ○ ○ ○ ○
Density ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Body Size ○ ○
Grid ○
Filter ○
SID ○
Centering ○
0018,
Detector Angle
1510 ○
0018,
Collimator
1602-4 ○
0040,
Entrace Dose(mGy)
8302
Image Area 0018,
Dose(dGycm2) 115E ○
Heat Tube ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
*1 Connection cable and connectors are shown in their V&V condition. Depending on where the products are used, they may be
different, so it is necessary to coordinate with the corresponding manufacturer in advance of installation.
*2 Cannot be changed from the device.
*3 It is necessary to obtain a D-Sub9pin-to-D-Sub25pin adapter separately.
*4 Since this uses a specialty cable instead of a consumer cable, it is necessary to obtain one from the maker (DRGEM).
*5 Only for the GW-PC model.

590
 15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

Name
iba DAP TOSHIBA SHIMADZU HITACHI DRGEM
(Communication DICOM tag
(Ethernet) (RS232C) (RS232C) (RS232C) (RS232)
method)
AeroDR Generator AeroDR Generator AeroDR Generator
Cable connection X-ray device
Interface Unit Interface Unit Interface Unit
DRGEM specialty
Cable used LAN cable Serial crossover cable Serial crossover cable Serial crossover cable
cable

Conneciton cable con-

nector type*1
*4
D-Sub9pin female D-Sub25pin male*3 D-Sub9pin female

Anatomical (APR) ○ ○ ○
Bucky(WS) ○ ○ ○ ○
0018,
kV
0060 ○ ○ ○ ○
0018,
mA
1151 ○ ○ ○ ○
0018.
msec
1150 ○ ○ ○ ○
0018,
mAs
1152 ○ ○
Focus ○ ○ ○ ▲*2
AEC ○ ○ ○ ○
Film Screen ○ ○ ○ ○
Density ○ ○ ○ ○
Body Size ○

Chapter 15
Grid

Filter

SID

Centering

0018,
Detector Angle
1510
0018,
Collimator
1602-4
0040,
Entrace Dose(mGy)
8302
▲*5 ○
Image Area 0018,
Dose(dGycm2) 115E ○ ▲*5 ○
Heat Tube ○
*1 Connection cable and connectors are shown in their V&V condition. Depending on where the products are used, they may be
different, so it is necessary to coordinate with the corresponding manufacturer in advance of installation.
*2 Cannot be changed from the device.
*3 It is necessary to obtain a D-Sub9pin-to-D-Sub25pin adapter separately.
*4 Since this uses a specialty cable instead of a consumer cable, it is necessary to obtain one from the maker (DRGEM).
*5 Only for the GW-PC model.

591
15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

X-ray device for mammography

Name (Communica- TOSHIBA SHIMADZU HITACHI GE SIEMENS TOYO MEDIC Livingston
DICOM tag
tion method) (RS232C) (RS232C) (RS232C) (Ethernet) (RS232C) (RS232C) (RS232C)
Bucky(WS) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
mA ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
msec ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
mAs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Focus ○ ○ ○ ○
AEC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensitivity ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Density ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SID(cm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Grid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Magnification ratio ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Entrace Dose(mGy) ○ ○ ○ ○
Image Area
Dose(dGycm2) ○ ○ ○ ○
Anode material ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Filter material ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Compressed breast
thickness (mm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Compressing force (N) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Exposure support arm
angle ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Exposing direction ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

592
 15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

15.2.2 Workflow for setting X-ray information linkage

15.2.3 Confirmation of X-ray information Confirm the manufacturer and model name of an
1 linkage environment X-ray device.

In case of RS-232C connection, install the driver of

2 15.2.4 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter
the Ethernet-serial converter to this device.
* Only used in Japan

Perform the setting of an X-ray device with the ser-

3 15.2.5 X-ray device setting
vice tool.

Perform the setting of X-ray exposure conditions with

4 15.2.6 X-ray exposure conditions setting
the user tool.

5 15.2.7 Exposure confirmation Confirm that exposure can be performed correctly.

Chapter 15

593
15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

15.2.3 Confirmation of X-ray

15.2.5 X-ray device setting
information linkage
environment Perform the setting of an X-ray device with the service
Confirm the environment related to X-ray information tool.
linkage.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Manufacturer/model name of an X-ray device • 1 general X-ray device and 1 mammography X-ray de-
• Whether if the X-ray device connection test is com- vice can be connected to this device at the same time.
pleted • The setting items of an X-ray device differ depending
• Method for X-ray information linkage (anatomical on the selected manufacturer and model.
designation or direct exposure condition designation) ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connection method (Ethernet or RS-232C connection)
1 Start the service tool.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In the X-ray information linkage, it is necessary to de- 2 Press the X-ray device icon.
cide beforehand whether the values of X-ray exposure
conditions are generated at this device or at X-ray de-
vices. Be sure to coordinate it preliminarily with users
and X-ray device manufacturers.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

15.2.4 Installation of Ethernet-

serial converter
If the X-ray device is made by CPI, emd, TOSHIBA,
HITACHI, SHIMADZU, SIEMENS, PHILIPS, TOYO
MEDIC or GE, install the conversion box driver recom-
mended by the manufacturer in this device.
* It is used only in Japan.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the installation of the Ethernet-serial converter,
refer to "14.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter
(SYSMEX RA TA-402X)".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When performing the linkage with a general X-ray de-
vice, press the X-ray device icon of CH1.

CH1 CH2
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

594
 15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

3 Select a connection check box. 5 Set the X-ray device.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting contents differ according to manufacturer/
model connected.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

4 Press [Setting]. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• For setting contents, refer to "X-ray device icon" of the
"CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
User Tool Screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Press [OK].

Chapter 15

• The X-ray device setting screen is displayed.

595
15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

15.2.6 X-ray exposure

3 Press [Setting] and press [Detailed].

conditions setting
Set the X-ray exposure conditions with the user tool.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Confirm that the X-ray exposure conditions are cor-
rectly set by transmitting them to the X-ray device.
Wrong settings cause erroneous exposures.
• There is a case that some X-ray devices might ig-
nore the transmitted values without notifying errors or
alarms when the invalid data is transmitted. Provide
the explanation to users that X-ray device console
should be checked for sure before exposures during
operation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Start up the service tool.

2 Select the [User Tool] tab.

• The Exam. Tag setting tool screen is displayed.

4 Select [Property List] tab, and select [Ex-

amTag Master] in [Selection Master/Sub-
Master].

5 Select [X-Ray CH] on the [User Master]

list.

• The user tool screen is displayed.

596
 15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

6 Select the exposure condition CH that

links to the group of the exposure condi-
tion master.

• The X-ray exposure condition setting screen is

displayed.
Exposure
Settings
Condition CH
OFF Does not link to the X-ray information. 8 Set exposure conditions.

Links X-ray information for

CH1
(XRay 1) set with the service tool.

Links X-ray information for

CH2
(XRay 2) set with the service tool.
Regards the value set with the ex-
posure condition sub master as the
Default exposure result.
* Not necessary to be linked with the
X-ray information.

Chapter 15
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • There are 2 methods to set exposure conditions.
• For the operation to copy ExamTag, refer to "CS-7 –– Anatomical (ARPCode) designation: Manages the
User Tool Operation Manual". tables containing the actual values such as kV, mA,
• When you set the anatomical code, refer to "CS-7 and ms at X-ray device and this device specifies and
transmits the table number for each Exam. Tag.
User Tool Operation Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • –– Direct exposure condition designation: Man-
ages kV, mA, ms, etc. for each Exam. Tag at
this device, and transmits them to an X-ray
7 Double-click an item displayed in [User device directly.
Master].
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Decide the exposure condition setting method in coor-
dination with the institution or an X-ray device manu-
facturer.
• The ranges of exposure condition setting values (kV,
mA, ms, mAs, AEC, etc.) are determined for each
manufacturer. The available setting items vary accord-
ing to the manufacturer and model selected in the X-ray
device setting screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

597
15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

9 Press [OK]. 12 Double-click the field where nothing is

displayed under [X-Ray CH] to set.

13 Select an exposure condition to edit and

[X-Ray Exposure Condition].

(2)
(1)

• Returns to the Exam. Tag setting tool screen.

14 Double-click the field where nothing is
10 Select [ExamTag Master] in [Selection displayed under [X-Ray Exposure Condi-
Master/Sub-Master]. tion].

11 Select an exposure condition to edit and

[X-Ray CH].

(2)
(1)

598
 15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

16 Press [OK].

• The sub-master selection dialog is displayed.

15 Select the set exposure condition sub-

master.

Chapter 15

• Select a sub-master by double click.

599
15.2 X-ray information linkage setting

15.2.7 Exposure confirmation

Perform a series of exposure operation to check they

are free from errors.

1 Perform a series of exposures under the

operating conditions in the institution.

2 Confirm that there is no problem with the

operation of any of the devices and the
acquired images.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Always check the operating conditions in the institu-
tion.
• Before performing exposures, be sure to obtain per-
mission from the institution.
• Take particular care in the following cases.
–– When an order is received from a Radiology Infor-
mation System (RIS).
–– When transmitting images to a server.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

600
 15.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this device

This option is for operating this device with a portable 3 Press [Network Setting] on the sub-menu
X-ray device. screen.
Connect this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
or AeroDR Portable UF Unit to the access point of your
institution (RIS/PACS, etc.) via the built-in wireless
LAN.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• PDAs cannot be connected using the built-in wireless
LAN of this device. Use the wireless LAN adapter pro-
vided as an option.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

15.3.1 Setting of the IP address

of the built-in wireless LAN
The setting method of the IP address of the built-in
wireless LAN is as follows.

1 Start the service tool.

Chapter 15
2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The [Network Connections] screen is displayed.

4 Right-click [Local Area Connection 2] and

press [Properties].

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

601
15.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this device

6 Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/

IPv4)] and press [Properties].

• The [Wireless Network Connection Properties]

screen is displayed.

5 Press [Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/

IPv6)] to release the selection.

• The [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)

Properties] screen is displayed.

602
 15.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this device

7 Select [Use the following IP address] and 9 Press [OK].

set the following items.

Setting item Settings

Input an IP address according to the

[IP address]
institution environment. 10 Close the [Network Connections] screen.

[Subnet Enter the subnet mask of the se-

mask] lected device.

Enter the default gateway address.

[Default

Chapter 15
Entry is not necessary if there is no
gateway]
gateway on the network.

8 Press [OK].

603
15.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this device

15.3.2 Network setting of the

3 Press [Manually create a network profile].

built-in wireless LAN

The network setting of the built-in wireless LAN is as
follows.

1 Press [Access Point] on the sub-menu

screen.

4 Set the following items.

2 Press [Add].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If there are 2 wireless network adapters, press [Change
adapter] and select the network adapter to be set.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

604
 15.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this device

Setting item Settings 5 Press [Next].

Enter the SSID of the access point to
connect.
• For connection with the AeroDR
Portable RF Unit, enter the [SSID]
set in "10.10.5 AeroDR Access Point
setting".
Example: KMMG_AeroDR_1
[Network name] • For connection with the AeroDR
Portable UF Unit, enter the [SSID]
set in "12.10.5 AeroDR Access Point
setting".
Example: KMMG_AeroDR_1
• For connection with the access point
of the institution, enter the SSID
matching the environment.
Select the type of the security for the 6 Press [Close].
access point to connect.
• For AeroDR Portable RF Unit or
AeroDR Portable UF Unit, select
[Security type]
[WPA2-Personal].
• For the access point of the institution,
select the security matching the
environment.
Select the type of the encryption for the
access point to connect.
• For AeroDR Portable RF Unit or
[Encryption AeroDR Portable UF Unit, select
type] [AES].

Chapter 15
• For the access point of the institution,
select the encryption type matching
the environment.
Enter the security key for the SSID of
the access point to connect.
• For the AeroDR Portable RF Unit,
enter the [Passphrase] set in "10.10.5
AeroDR Access Point setting".
Example: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt4F9ODu96Xz
tI89u93ftEfrzXwe19
[Security Key] • For the AeroDR Portable UF Unit,
enter the [Passphrase] set in "12.10.5
AeroDR Access Point setting".
Example: 165gf1JSsw9 Gt4F9ODu96Xz
tI89u93ftEfrzXwe19
• For the access point of the institution,
enter the security key matching the
environment. • Set network adapter is displayed in the manage-
[Start this con- ment screen of the wireless network.
nection auto- Select this.
matically]
[Connect even Select this if the access point to con-
if the network is nect is set not to notify the SSID (ESS-
not broadcasting] ID stealth function is enabled).

605
15.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this device

7 Close the wireless network management

screen.

• When another optional item is to be attached,

shut down this device.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Repeat same procedure if there are multiple access
points.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

8 Close the sub-menu screen.

606
 15.4 Setting of the remote maintenance

The method of setting the remote maintenance is as 3 Press [Remote Maintenance].

follows.

1 Display the intermediate screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Collection of installation information with GET1 should
be performed after installation is completed. If the in-
formation is collected before installation is completed,
then the serial numbers and information of connected
devices are not collected.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [Setting] on the intermediate

screen.

Chapter 15
• The [Remote Maintenance] screen is displayed.

4 Select [RemoteMaintenance Execute].

5 Press [OK].

• The [Wake On Lan Setting] screen is displayed.

607
 15.5 Web electronic medical records settings

Function that enables electronic medical records to be 5 Press [Hardware and Sound].
used via Internet Explorer if this device employs a por-
table X-ray device.
This is not an option.

1 Turn on this device.

2 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 6 Press [Tablet PC Settings].

3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

7 Select the [Buttons] tab.

4 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and press [Control Panel].

608
 15.5 Web electronic medical records settings

8 Select [Rotation] and press [Change]. 10 Press the input area of [Keys], then press
[Alt] and [Tab] on the keyboard.

9 Press the selected area of [Press], then

select [Press a key or key combination].

11 Press the selected area of [Press and

hold], then select [Open the home page].

Chapter 15

609
15.5 Web electronic medical records settings

12 Press [OK]. 15 Press [×].

16 Start Internet Explorer, and select [Internet

options] from the [Tools] menu.

13 Press [OK].

17 Enter the URL to start in [Home page] us-

ing the keyboard and press [OK].

14 Press [×].
18 Press [×].

610
 15.6 Setting of examination sharing

Examination sharing is an option where examinations

can be shared and managed through the network by
multiple units of this device.

15.6.1 System setting of the

examination sharing
The system setting of the examination sharing is as
follows.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

4 Set the following item of [Study Sharing].

Chapter 15
Setting item Settings
Registers the terminal information of
this device which shares the exami-
nation, ([Nick Name], [IP Address],
[Host Name]). For the addition of new
[Terminal info]
terminal information, press [Add] on
the bottom of [Terminal info] column.
Press [Delete] to delete the terminal
information, press [Edit] to change.
By selecting this, the send button and
cancel button are displayed on the list
[Enable Study screen. Furthermore, a Study Sharing
Sharing tab and a Pending Reason tab on the list
on the list screen can be added (when these tabs
screen] on the list screen are attempted to be
added, [Display] must be selected for the
screen settings).
• The sub-menu screen is displayed. [Pattern of
Select the type of the pending button
buttons on
and finish button to be displayed on
the exposure
3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. screen]
the exposure screen.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Register the IP addresses of all units of this device
sharing examinations, including this device, in
[Terminal info].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the detail of setting items of [Study Sharing], refer
to " Study Sharing of CS-7 setting" of "CS-7 Installa-
tion/Service Manual for Service Tool/User Tool Screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

611
15.6 Setting of examination sharing

15.6.2 Screen setting of the

examination sharing
The screen setting of the examination sharing is as fol-
lows.

1 Select the [User Tool] tab.

• The screen setting tool screen is displayed.

3 Set the following item of [Study Sharing setting].

Setting item Settings

[Display The pending reason detail dialog is
pending reason
displayed when selected.
detail dialog]

[Destination When the pending reason detail dia-

terminal in log is set not to be shown, select the
case of not destination terminal. Select a terminal
displaying the from among the terminals entered in
pending reason [Terminal info] of "15.6.1 System set-
detail dialog] ting of the examination sharing".
[Pending reason When the pending reason detail dia-
in case of not log is set not to be shown, select the
• The user tool screen is displayed. displaying the pending reason. Select a pending rea-
pending reason son from among the pending reasons
detail dialog] set in the pending reason column.
2 Press [Setting], and press [Screen Set-
Registers the pending reason to use.
ting]. Pending reason
Registers the pending reason from [Sys-
([System
tem defined pending reason] which was
defined
defined by the manufacturer, or [User
pending
defined pending reason] which was
reason],
defined by the user, and add the reason
[User defined
to [Pending reason display item]. Use
pending
[Add] on the bottom of display column
reason],
to add a new reason to [User defined
[Pending
pending reason]. Use [Delete] to delete
reason display
an added pending reason, and use [Edit]
item])
to change a reason.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When [Pattern of buttons on the exposure screen] is
set to [Complete/Suspend(not sharing)] in " Study
Sharing" of "CS-7 setting" of "CS-7 Installation/Ser-
vice Manual for Service Tool/User Tool Screen", the
setting items of [Display pending reason detail dialog],
[Destination terminal in case of not displaying the
pending reason detail dialog], and [Pending reason
in case of not displaying the pending reason detail
dialog] of [Study Sharing setting] are not displayed.
• Register the same items in all units of this device sharing
the examination in [Pending reason display item].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

612
 15.6 Setting of examination sharing

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5 Press [OK] on the screen setting tool

• For the detail of setting items of [Study Sharing
screen.
setting], refer to " Study Sharing setting" of "Screen
setting" of "User Tool Operation Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

4 Set the following item of [Remote] and

[Reason for Pending] in [Display Item Set-
• The settings are stored, and the screen is
ting of each tab of List Screen].
closed.

Setting item Settings

When selected, the [Study Sharing]
[Display] or [Reason for Pending] tabs can be
displayed.

Chapter 15
[Tab Display Enter the display name of [Reason for
Name] Pending] tab on the list screen.
Select the pending reason of the
examination to be displayed in the
[Reason for Pending] tab. Select a
[Search pending reason among the pending
Target reasons set in the pending reason col-
Pending umn in step 3. Pending examinations
Reason] which are pending and which have the
same pending reason as that selected
one, are displayed in the [Reason for
Pending] tab.
Select the item to be displayed on the
[Search
filtered items on the top of the tab on
Items]
the list screen.
Select the item to display on the col-
[List Items]
umn of the list screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If [Enable Study Sharing on the list screen] in " Study
Sharing" of "CS-7 setting" of "CS-7 Installation/Service
Manual for Service Tool/User Tool Screen" is not
selected, each setting item of [Remote] and [Reason
for Pending] will not be displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the detail of setting items of [Remote], refer to "
Examination reception screen" of "[Screen Setting]"
of "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
User Tool Screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

613
 15.7 CR mammogram settings

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• It is necessary to install additional memory (2GB) to use CR mammography.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

15.7.1 The workflow to set the CR mammogram

O
OWhen not migrating a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device

15.7.2 Registration of the mammogram

1 exposure condition key Register the mammogram exposure condition key.

16.3.5 Adjustment of the mammogram Adjust the output position of the exposure condition
2 exposure condition key key.

O
OWhen migrating a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device

Convert the CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to a usable format

1 16.3.3 Converting the Exam. Tag
for this device.

16.3.4 Reflecting the Exam. Tag to this

2 device
Reflect the converted Exam. Tag to this device.

16.3.5 Adjustment of the mammogram Adjust the output position of the exposure condition
3 exposure condition key key.

614
 15.7 CR mammogram settings

15.7.2 Registration of the

mammogram exposure
condition key

1 Start up the service tool.

2 Select the [User Tool] tab.

• The Exam. Tag setting tool screen is displayed.

4 Select [MAMMOGRAM] from [BodyPart].

Chapter 15
5 Select the Exam. Tag to be used from the
[Maker master] list.

• The user tool screen is displayed.

3 Press [Setting] and press [Detailed].

615
15.7 CR mammogram settings

6 Press [>]. 9 Select the button that you changed the

name of in step 8.

10 Press [User master].

• The Exam. Tag selected in step 5 is copied to

the [Maker master] list.

7 Press the [Screen Customization] tab. 11 Select [MAMMOGRAM] from [BodyPart].

8 In the Body part display area, right-click

the button to change its name to enable
editing, and input the button name.

• The Exam. Tag copied in step 6 is displayed in

the [User Master] list.

616
 15.7 CR mammogram settings

12 Drag and drop the Exam. Tag from the 14 Press [OK].
[User Master] list to the Set key display
area.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For information on how to operate the Exam. Tag set-
ting tool screen, refer to "CS-7 User Tool Operation
Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 15
• The Exam. Tag name is displayed in the Set
key display area. Change the Group or Set key
name, if necessary.

13 Press [OK].

• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

617
618
 Chapter
16
Other Installation Procedures
This chapter describes the other installation procedures.

619
 16.1 Aero Sync signal acquisition

The procedure for the Aero Sync signal acquisition is Execution procedure
as follows.

16.1.1 Execution procedure 1 Set the exposure conditions to 50kV and

50mAs for the X-ray device.
for Aero Sync signal
acquisition IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the mAs value cannot be set to 50mAs, set it to the
nearest value. If the maximum mAs is lower than 50
Advance preparation
mAs, set it to the maximum.
• If the tube current can be set, set it to 100 mA. If the
tube current cannot be set to 100mA, set it to the
1 Confirm that AeroDR Detector subject to
nearest value. If the maximum mA is lower than 100
the Aero Sync signal acquisition is regis-
mA, set it to the maximum.
tered in this device. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Confirm that [Sync Mode] is set to [XARM]

2 Open the service tool screen.
for [Exposure Room].

3 Press the icon of AeroDR Detector.

3 Place the Detector at a location that
makes the distance from the X-ray focus
(SID) 1 m.

4 Arrange AeroDR Detector and X-ray tube

as shown in the picture bellow.

Perpendicular
to the tube

The line of white

projection

Portrait orientation
of AeroDR Detector

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Align the longitudinal direction of the X-ray tube and
AeroDR Detector. • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

5 Confirm that the exposure field covers the

whole AeroDR Detector.

620
 16.1 Aero Sync signal acquisition

4 Press [AeroSync signal acquisition] on 7 Enter [Tube voltage], [mAs Value], and
the sub-menu screen. [SID].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The sensitivity cannot be entered.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

8 Press [Execute] following the message

displayed on the screen.

• The Aero Sync signal acquisition screen is dis-

Chapter 16
played.

5 Select AeroDR Detector subject to the

Aero Sync signal acquisition.

• A confirmation message is displayed.

9 Press the first stage of the exposure

switch and press [OK].

6 Set [X-Ray Exposure] to [Exposure].

621
16.1 Aero Sync signal acquisition

10 Press the second stage of the exposure IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

switch while the progress bar is in the • Judge the measurement result from the graph. The
frame of [X-Ray Exposure]. rising edge of the graph must be within the area be-
tween the red lines as shown in the figure below.

Graph display range

Signal start area

• If there is any problem with the measurement result,

• When the completion screen is displayed, press press [Delete] and obtain the signal again from step 8.
[OK]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

11 Press [Save].

• The detection result is displayed with a graph. • The measurement data (Four Aero Sync sig-
nal images and the exposure condition file) is
stored.

• When the completion screen is displayed, press

[OK].

622
 16.1 Aero Sync signal acquisition

12 Change the exposure conditions (by in- 17 Display the intermediate screen.
creasing the voltage of the X-ray device)
and repeat steps 7 through 11 to obtain Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
the data up to 120kV.
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For devices that cannot output a voltage of 120kV, ob-
tain the data up to its maximum voltage. 18 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • diate screen.

13 After acquiring all the data, press […] to

determine the output destination of the
measurement data.

14 Press [Export] to export the measurement

data.

• The measurement data is exported.

19 Copy the measurement data stored in the
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • storage folder into the maintenance PC.
• Check the volume of the data before exporting it.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Chapter 16
• Measurement data is saved in a folder that is auto-
15 When the completion screen is displayed, matically created within the output directory that you
press [OK]. specify in step 13.
• The names of the automatically created folder and
measurement file are in the following format.
–– Folder name: XXkV_YYYYMMDDhhmmss
–– File name: XRaySurvey_FPDID_YYYYMMDD
hhmmss_FrameNN.raw, ExpCondition_XXkV.txt
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

20 Perform a characteristic analysis of the X-

ray device.
16 Press [Close] to quit the tool.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If you set [Sync Mode] in step 2 to [XARM] in "Ad-
vance preparation", revert to the original setting before
shutting down.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

623
 16.2 Setting example for AeroDR UF Cable connection position

16.2.1 When using only one AeroDR UF Cable

Setting examples of the AeroDR UF Cable connection position when using only one AeroDR UF Cable are as follows.

Combination of AeroDR Detector direction and

Images displayed in this device
AeroDR UF Cable connection position
[UF Cable Setting] When exposing using When exposing using
AeroDR Detector is in AeroDR Detector is in
AeroDR Detector in AeroDR Detector in
portrait orientation landscape orientation
portrait orientation landscape orientation*

[Insertion Opening]: right

[Image orientation]: facing
When the line of forward
When the line of white projection is [UFC Type]: Standard
white projection on the right
is above
Flip mark

[Insertion Opening]: left

[Image orientation]: facing
When the line of forward
white projection is [UFC Type]: Standard
on the left
Flip mark

[Insertion Opening]: right

[Image orientation]: facing
When the line of reverse Flip mark
white projection is [UFC Type]: Standard
on the right
Flip mark

When the line of

white projection
is below [Insertion Opening]: left
[Image orientation]: facing
When the line of reverse
white projection is [UFC Type]: Standard
on the left
Flip mark
*On the condition that the automatic orientation determination process is enabled.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Examples of displayed images are for when the flip mark is set in the same orientation as shown in the table. (The flip mark is dis-
played in the exposure conditions display area of the exposure screen. For details, refer to "CS-7 Operation Manual".)
• [Orientation] cannot be set when using only one AeroDR UF Cable.
• When exposing the AeroDR Detector in landscape orientation, it may affect the result of automatic orientation determination
process if the [Insertion Opening] is not set up correctly.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the setting of the AeroDR UF Cable, refer to "4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

624
 16.2 Setting example for AeroDR UF Cable connection position

16.2.2 When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables

Setting examples for using 2 AeroDR UF Cables on 1 exposure stage are shown below.
Setting differs depending on the connection position of the first and second AeroDR UF Cables. In this section, the
examples with the following conditions are explained.

• AeroDR Detector is in portrait orientation: Use the first AeroDR UF Cable.

• AeroDR Detector is in landscape orientation: Use the second AeroDR UF Cable.

Combination of AeroDR Detector direction and

Images displayed in this device
AeroDR UF Cable connection position
[UF Cable Setting] When exposing using When exposing using
AeroDR Detector is in AeroDR Detector is in
AeroDR Detector in AeroDR Detector in
portrait orientation landscape orientation
portrait orientation landscape orientation*
When the line of white When the line of white
projection is above projection is on the right
[Orientation]: First: 0
Second: 90
[Image orientation]:
facing forward
[UFC Type]: UFC2

Second First Second First Flip mark

When the line of white Second Second
projection is above [Orientation]: First: 0
Second:
270
[Image orientation]:
facing forward Flip mark
[UFC Type]: UFC2
When the line of white
First projection is on the left First Flip mark

Chapter 16
First First

[Orientation]: First: 180

Second: 90
[Image orientation]:
facing forward
[UFC Type]: UFC2
When the line of white When the line of white
Second projection is below Second projection is on the right Flip mark
First Second First Second

[Orientation]: First: 180

Second: 270
[Image orientation]:
facing forward Flip mark
[UFC Type]: UFC2
When the line of white When the line of white
projection is below projection is on the left Flip mark

625
16.2 Setting example for AeroDR UF Cable connection position

Combination of AeroDR Detector direction and

Images displayed in this device
AeroDR UF Cable connection position
[UF Cable Setting] When exposing using When exposing using
AeroDR Detector is in AeroDR Detector is in
AeroDR Detector in AeroDR Detector in
portrait orientation landscape orientation
portrait orientation landscape orientation*
When the line of white When the line of white
projection is above projection is on the right
[Orientation]: First: 180
Second: 270
[Image orientation]:
facing reverse
[UFC Type]: UFC2

Second First Second First Flip mark

When the line of white Second Second
projection is above
[Orientation]: First: 180
Second: 90
[Image orientation]:
facing reverse Flip mark
[UFC Type]: UFC2
When the line of white
First projection is on the left First Flip mark
First First

[Orientation]: First: 0
Second: 270
[Image orientation]:
facing reverse
[UFC Type]: UFC2
When the line of white When the line of white
Second projection is below Second projection is on the right Flip mark
First Second First Second

[Orientation]: First: 0
Second: 90
[Image orientation]:
facing reverse Flip mark
[UFC Type]: UFC2
When the line of white When the line of white
projection is below projection is on the left Flip mark

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Examples of displayed images are for when the flip mark is set in the same orientation as shown in the table. (The flip mark is dis-
played in the exposure conditions display area of the exposure screen. For details, refer to "CS-7 Operation Manual".)
• For [Type], select the same type for both the first and second AeroDR UF Cables.
• Do not set [Insertion Opening] when using 2 AeroDR UF Cables.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the setting of the AeroDR UF Cable, refer to "4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

626
 16.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device

The CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag can be converted to a usable format for this device by using the Exam. Tag migration tool
"Cs7Converter".

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The CS-2 Exam. Tag cannot be migrated.
• Migratable versions are: CS-1 V2.32R04 and CS-3/5 V3.02R02 or later. Settings data of an earlier version may not be cor-
rectly converted due to compatibility problems.
• Use a Exam. Tag migration tool only when requested by a customer who already installed CS-1/3/5 at the institution and
wants to make the Exam. Tag of this device the same as the CS-1/3/5.
• There are restrictions to the Exam. Tag that can be migrated by using the Exam. Tag migration tool. Use a Exam. Tag editing
tool to edit the Exam. Tag that cannot be migrated.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Whether or not to
Exam. Tag Restrictions and Remarks
migrate
Only one Exam. Tag among the cassette, wall stand, or table for the
Exposure conditions (Exp) 
reader can be migrated.
Only the image process parameter in use by the Exam. Tag to be
Image process parameter (lpp) 
migrated can be migrated.
Exposure conditions (Epm) 
Position conditions (Ppm) 
Contrast medium agent (Cnt) ○
Filter material (Fmt) ○
Grid material (Gmt) ○
Laterality (Ltr) ○
Orientation (Om)  The default value of this device is applied.
○

Chapter 16
Part (Bdy)
Host output conditions (Hst) ○
Printer output conditions (Prt) ○
Use the overlay migration tool "OverlayConverter" to perform a
Overlay (Ovr)  migration of the overlay. For operating details, refer to "16.4 How to
migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this device".
Only the set key of the reader selected by Favorite and the Exam. Tag
Set key (ExpSet.xml) 
can be migrated.
RIS code conversion table Only the conversion table for the reader selected by the Exam. Tag

(RisMwm2ExpDicom.ini) can be migrated.

○: Migratable : Migratable with restrictions : Not migratable

• Only one Exam. Tag among the cassette, wall stand, or table is migratable for exposure conditions (Exp). Basically select the cas-
sette at the institution where cassettes are used. A user at an institution where multiple readers are used should use a Exam. Tag
editing tool to set the Exam. Tag keys of readers not selected.
• Automatic migration by Exam. Tag migration tool is difficult for exposure conditions (Epm) and positions conditions (Ppm) because
complete information for CS-1/3/5 does not exist. For such information, conduct a hearing with the customer about exposure con-
ditions, and use the Exam. Tag editing tool to register as sub-master and link to the master.

627
16.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device

16.3.1 Installing MSXML 16.3.2 Preparations before

4.0SP3 converting
MSXML 4.0 must be installed on the computer for Obtain the following files from the migration source
maintenance in order to use the Exam. Tag migration CS-1/3/5 and the migration destination unit of this de-
tool for a migration. Follow the procedure below to in- vice before using the Exam. Tag migration tool.
stall MSXML 4.0SP3. • Files to obtain from the migration source CS-1/3/5:
Exam. Tag, image process parameter and all system
settings
1 Double-click on [msxml.msi] in the "\MSX-
• File to obtain from the migration destination unit of
ML4SP3\English" folder.
this device: Exam. Tag manufacturer master

1 Backup the settings data of the migration

source CS-1/3/5 to the computer for main-
tenance.

2 Create an Exp folder and decompress the

Exp.lzh file in the folder.
• The setup screen is displayed.

2 Follow the messages to install MSXML.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• MSXML 4.0SP3 may already have been installed on
some computers to be used for maintenance.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Create an Ipp folder and decompress the

Ipp.lzh file in the folder.

628
 16.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device

4 Create a System folder and decompress

16.3.3 Converting the Exam.
the HostInf.lzh file, Overlay.lzh file, Print-
erInf.lzh file, RisInf.lzh file and SystemInf. Tag
lzh file in the folder. Convert the Exam. Tag to CS-7 format.

1 Double-click on Cs7Converter.exe in the

[Cs7Converter] folder.

2 Set the following items for the Exam. Tag

migration tool.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Some decompression software will automatically cre-
ate a folder and decompress the data in the folder. In
this case, move the decompressed data manually to
the specified folder.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

5 Copy the "C:\Konicaminolta\Console\Con-

Chapter 16
fig\ExpMaster.CS3" folder of the migration
destination unit of this device to the com-
puter for maintenance.

Setting item Setting details

Set the console type of the migration
[Console]
source.
[CS-1/3 Ver. Select for CS-1/3 version V2.20R00 or
>=V220R00 or later or CS-5 because RIS code con-
CS-5] version table formats differ with version.
[18x24cm/
24x30cm/
Select when in use.
24x30Mcm
Cassette]
[15x30cm
Select when in use.
Cassette]
Drag and drop the Exp folder obtained
[Exp Folder] from CS-1/3/5.
Or press [...] to select.
Drag and drop the Ipp folder obtained
[Ipp Folder] from CS-1/3/5.
Or press [...] to select.
Drag and drop the System folder ob-
[System Folder] tained from CS-1/3/5.
Or press [...] to select.

629
16.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device

Setting item Setting details 6 Select the migration source output device
Drag and drop the ExpMaster folder for image processing ON/OFF.
[ExpMaster
obtained from this device.
Folder]
Or press [...] to select.
Drag and drop a folder in which files
[Output Folder] converted to CS-7 format are saved.
Or press [...] to select.

3 Press [Next].

• In this device, image processing ON/OFF uses

common settings for all output devices.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
4 Select only one type of reader to migrate. • Overlay information for an output device selected in
image processing is output to the base.txt file, direc-
Marker file, and lateMarker file used by the overlay
migration tool.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

7 Press [Next].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Only one Exam. Tag among the cassette, wall stand,
or table migratable for exposure conditions (Exp). Ba-
sically select the cassette at the institution where cas-
settes are used. A user at an institution where multiple
readers are used should use a Exam. Tag editing tool
to set the Exam. Tag of readers not selected.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 8 Select a processing method for the case
the Exam. Tag of a reader which is not
converted to Favorite is included.
5 Press [Next].

• Make the setting if the Exam. Tag of a reader

not migrated to the favorite tab on a set key is
included when two or more types of readers are
used.

630
 16.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• If the Exam. Tag migration tool is used in an institu- • Institutions where multiple readers are mixed should
tion using multiple readers, confirm whether all Exam. use a RIS code mapping tool of this device to confirm
Tags are included. If any of the Exam. Tag is missing, whether all RIS codes are included and add when in-
use the Exam. Tag editing tool of this device to add it. sufficient.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
11 Press [Next].
• In Default, the set key name will remain but an Exam.
Tag not to be targetted for migration will be deleted.
• [As for the Exam. Tag for the unconverted Reader,
leave it after converting to the Exam. Tag for the con-
verted Reader with the branch number 00.] can be
selected to automatically associate with the Exam. Tag
after migration, but if a user was creating Exam. Tag
with a branch number, all keys will be associated as
default Exam. Tags.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

9 Press [Next].
12 Press [Convert].

Chapter 16
• Conversion will start.
10 Select a processing method if the Exam.
Tag of a reader not to be migrated to the
RIS code conversion table is included. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The Exam Tag for any functions that do not support
this device at this time is set not to be migrated by the
default setting. Do not cancel the selection of this key
until this device supports these functions.

• Make the setting if the Exam. Tag of a reader

not to be migrated to the RIS code conversion
table is included when two or more types of
readers are used. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In Default setting, the RIS code is kept but the Exam.
Tag ID targetted for mapping will be deleted.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

631
16.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device

13 The following screen is displayed when

16.3.4 Reflecting the Exam.
conversion completes successfully.
Tag to this device
Reflect the Exam. Tag converted for this device to this
device.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Always perform the following procedure to replace the
folders instead of overwriting the folders for the Exam.
Tag. If overwrite is used, unnecessary data will remain
in this device.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Shut down this device to display the Win-

dows desktop screen.

2 Perform a back-up of the "C:\Konicaminol-

ta\Console\Config\ExpMaster.CS3" folder.
• The following folders and files are created in the
output folder. 3 Delete the following 13 folders in the "C:\
Konicaminolta\Console\Config\ExpMaster.
Storage folder CS3" folder.
for CS-7 Bdy
Exam. Tag files Cnt
Overlay Epm
information files Exp
Fmt
Gmt
Hst
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Ipp
• In some cases, the setting values of the Exam. Tag Ltr
defined in CS-1/3/5 may not be used in this device. Orn
If such tag setting values exists in conversion source Ovr
data during a conversion, the Exam. Tag migration tool Ppm
forcibly sets the default value and outputs information Prt
to the ConvLog.csv file. Check the ConvLog.csv file
after the conversion and use the Exam. Tag editing
tool to correct the settings if a problem exists.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

632
 16.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device

4 Copy the following 13 folders created by

16.3.5 Adjustment of the
the Exam. Tag migration tool in the "...\
Console\Config\ExpMaster.CS3" folder mammogram exposure
to the "C:\Konicaminolta\Console\Config\ condition key
ExpMaster.CS3" folder.
When the mammogram exposure condition key is
Bdy
transferred from a CS-3/5, the output position setting is
Cnt
not always converted correctly. In such cases, set the
Epm
exposure condition key and appropriately adjust the
Exp
output position by the following procedure.
Fmt
Gmt
Hst 1 Start up the service tool.
Ipp
Ltr 2 Select the [User Tool] tab.
Orn
Ovr
Ppm
Prt

5 Perform a back-up of the RisMwm2ExpDi-

com.ini file in the "C:\Konicaminolta\Con-
sole\Data\" folder.

6 Copy the RisMwm2ExpDicom.ini file cre-

ated by the Exam. Tag migration tool in
the "..\Console\Data" folder to the "C:\
Konicaminolta\Console\Data" folder.

7 Restart this device.

Chapter 16
• The migrated Exam. Tag can be used after re-
start.

• The user tool screen is displayed.

633
16.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device

3 Press [Setting] and press [Detailed]. 6 Check the sub-master of [HOST] and
[PRINTER].

7 Select [HOST] from [Selection Master/Sub-

Master].

8 Adjust [Trimming Position] of the sub-

master of the [HOST Output] checked in
step 6.
• The Exam. Tag setting tool screen is displayed.

4 Select the [Property List] tab.

9 Adjust [Output Position] of the sub-master

of the [HOST Output] checked at step 6.

5 Select [ExamTag Master] from [Selection

Master/Sub-Master] and [MAMMOGRAM]
from [BodyPart].

634
 16.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device

10 Select [PRINTER Output Sub-Master] from

[Selection Master/Sub-Master].

11 Adjust [Trimming Position] of the sub-

master of the [PRINTER] checked in step 6.

12 Adjust [Output Position] of the sub-master

of the [PRINTER] checked at step 6.

Chapter 16
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The trimming position and output position will differ de-
pending on whether the mammogram exposure condi-
tion is set to the left or right. Generally [Right-Center]
is set for right side exposure condition and [Left-Center]
is set for left side exposure condition. However, per-
form settings after checking the installation environ-
ment.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

635
 16.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this device

Overlay migration tool "OverlayConverter" can be used

to convert a CS-1/3/5 overlay to a format for this de- 16.4.1 Creating an overlay
vice. exposure deviation
information file
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Use overlay migration tool "OverlayConverter" to cre-
• Excel is required for the migration. ate overlay exposure deviation information.
• Part of the screen is shown in Japanese as a Japa- The overlay information files (base.txt, direcMarker.txt,
nese Excel file has been used as an example. and lateMarker.txt) created in "16.3.3 Converting the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Exam. Tag" are necessary to create overlay exposure
deviation information.

1 Start OverlayConverter from Explorer.

• The OverlayConverter screen is displayed.

2 Select the folder containing the overlay

information files (base.txt, direcMarker.txt,
and lateMarker.txt).

3 Specify a name for the Excel file to be the

output destination of the overlay informa-
tion. An Excel file of the specified name is
created.

636
 16.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this device

4 Select the following item to abbreviate the

16.4.2 Importing an Exam. Tag
stamp for the host output.
to an excel file
Use ExpMaker to import the CS-7 Exam. Tag created
in "16.3.3 Converting the Exam. Tag" to an Excel file.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For details about ExpMaker, see readme.html in Exp-
Maker.
5 Press [Execute]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Start CreateDICOMFile.exe from Explorer.

• Creation of an overlay exposure deviation infor-

mation file will start.
• When the process completes successfully, • The ExpMaker screen is displayed.
"Conversion was completed" will be displayed.

2 Select the [IMPORT (Exp->Excel)] tab.

6 Confirm that the overlay exposure devia-
tion information file with the Excel file
name specified in step 3 was created.
• Two sheets labeled [(ExpOverlay)] and [Ovr] are
created in the Excel file.
[(ExpOverlay)] sheet

Chapter 16
3 Select the "...\Console\Config\ExpMaster.
CS3" folder containing the CS-7 Exam.
Tag.

This sheet is for confirmation purposes and lists

support of the created overlay and the Exam. Tag.
[Ovr] sheet

This sheet lists the overlay sub-master value to be

created. The sheet is in ExpMaker format.

637
16.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this device

4 Specify a name for the Excel file to be the 7 Confirm that Excel file with the Excel file
output destination of the CS-7 Exam. Tag. name specified in step 4 was created.
An Excel file with the specified name is
created.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5 Press [Select All] to select all masters and • For sheet content details, see the ExpMaker operation
sub-masters for output. manual.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Press [Create Excel File].

• Import of the CS-7 Exam. Tag to the Excel file

will start.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The import process will take several minutes. The
message "Now in progress" is displayed during import.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

638
 16.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this device

16.4.3 Integrating an Exam. Tag 2 Delete the [Ovr] sheet of the CS-7 Exam.
Tag file and copy the [Ovr] sheet of the
file and overlay exposure overlay exposure deviation information
deviation information file file to the CS-7 Exam. Tag file.
Use Excel editing operations to integrate the content CS-7 Exam. Tag file
of an overlay exposure deviation information file cre-
ated in "16.4.1 Creating an overlay exposure deviation
information file" and a CS-7 Exam. Tag file created in
"16.4.2 Importing an Exam. Tag to an excel file". (1) Delete

1 Open the CS-7 Exam. Tag file and the

overlay exposure deviation information
file in Excel.
Overlay exposure deviation
CS-7 Exam. Tag file
information file
(2) Copy

Overlay exposure deviation

information file 3 Copy the data column of the [ExpOverlay]
sheet in the overlay exposure deviation
information file to the data column of the
[Exp] sheet in the CS-7 Exam. Tag file to
link the Exam. Tag master and the overlay

Chapter 16
sub-master according to the Table.
[ExpOverlay] sheet of
[Exp] sheet of the
the overlay exposure
CS-7 Exam. Tag file
deviation information file
Data Data
Copy
Data column column column
Data column
definition definition
(0031,1020)> HOST1
OverlayHostID
(0031,1136) Overlay
(0031,1021)> HOST2
OverlayHostID
(0031,1136) Overlay HOST1–4
(0031,1022)> HOST3 Overlay
OverlayHostID
(0031,1136) Overlay
(0031,1023)> HOST4
OverlayHostID
(0031,1136) Overlay
(0031,1028)> PRINTER OverlayPrint- PRINTER
(0031,1136) Overlay erID Overlay

639
16.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this device

• The following is an example of how to link an

Exam. Tag master (HOST1) and an overlay sub- 16.4.4 Creating an Exam. Tag
master. for this device
[Exp] sheet of the CS-7 Exam. Tag file Use ExpMaker to export the content of the Excel file
integrated in "16.4.3 Integrating an Exam. Tag file and
overlay exposure deviation information file" as a CS-7
Exam. Tag.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For details about ExpMaker, see readme.html in Exp-
Maker.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Copy only 1 Start CreateDICOMFile.exe from Explorer.

the data
column

[ExpOverlay] sheet of the overlay

exposure deviation information file

• The ExpMaker screen is displayed.

2 Select the [EXPORT(Excel->Exp)] tab.

• Use the same procedure to link an Exam. Tag

master (HOST1–4 or PRINTER) and an overlay
sub-master.
3 Specify the Excel file integrated in "16.4.3
Integrating an Exam. Tag file and overlay
4 When edit is complete, save the CS-7 exposure deviation information file".
Exam. Tag file.

640
 16.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this device

4 Specify a name for the destination folder 7 Confirm that a folder with the same name
of the CS-7 Exam. Tag output. as the Excel file specified in "16.4.3 In-
tegrating an Exam. Tag file and overlay
exposure deviation information file" was
created in the folder that was specified in
step 4, and that the CS-7 Exam. Tag is in
this folder.
Ex.)

5 Press [Select All] to select all masters and

sub-masters for output.

Exam. Tag
6 Press [Create Exp Files]. Storage folder

Chapter 16
• Export of the CS-7 Exam. Tag will start.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The export process will take several minutes. The
message "Now in progress" will be displayed during
export.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

641
16.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this device

16.4.5 Reflecting Exam. Tag to

this device
Reflect the Exam. Tag converted for this device to this
device.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Always perform the following procedure to replace the
folders instead of overwriting the folders for the Exam.
Tag. If overwrite is used, unnecessary data will remain
in this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Shut down this device to display the Win-

dows desktop screen.

2 Perform a backup of the "C:\Konicaminol-

ta\Console\Config\ExpMaster CS3" folder.

3 Delete the folder with the same name as

the folder in the OutputFile folder cre-
ated in "16.4.4 Creating an Exam. Tag for
this device" from the folder in the "C:\
Konicaminolta\Console\Config\ExpMaster
CS3" folder.

4 Copy all folders in the OutputFile folder

created in "16.4.4 Creating an Exam. Tag
for this device" to the "C:\Konicaminolta\
Console\Config\ExpMaster CS3" folder.

5 Restart this device.

• The migrated Exam. Tag can be used after re-
start.

642
 16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is
using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

When the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM is used in RIS/HOST, a communication error might occur.
In the network environment corresponding to the following conditions in "IMPORTANT", change the network settings
according to the procedures in this section.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The environment in which tasks of this section are necessary is as follows.
(1) 2 or more wireless LAN adapters are connected in the same segment
(2) 2 or more wired LAN adapters are connected in the same segment
(3) The wireless LAN adapter and wired LAN adapter are connected in the same segment and it is necessary to give priority
to the wireless LAN adapter (when the wired LAN adapter of the same segment which is not connected to the Detector is
connected, etc.)
(4) The default gateway for 2 or more LAN adapters from (1) to (3) is configured and the RIS/HOST of the connecting device
is not associated with any LAN adapter segment
(5) A LAN adapter that is separate from the LAN adapter in the same segment as the RIS/HOST IP address is used, and a
connection is made to the RIS/HOST via a gateway
* An interface in the same segment is used; therefore, routing configuration is necessary.
• When the external wireless LAN adapter is used for wireless PDA connections, this operation is not needed because the IP
address will be fixed.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This section describes this device for portable is assumed to be used as a portable and for the exposure room.
• This device for portable's LAN adapters are defined by type as follows:
Built-in wireless LAN adapter: The standard built-in wireless LAN adapter of this device for portable
Built-in wired LAN adapter: The standard built-in wired LAN adapter of this device for portable
External wireless LAN adapter: The external wireless LAN adapter of this device for portable (USB or card type) (optional)
External wired LAN adapter: The external wired LAN adapter of this device for portable (optional)

Chapter 16
• Perform the tasks outlined in this section after installing the External wired LAN adapter and External Wireless LAN adapter,
and restarting Windows twice with all External LAN adapters connected.
Performing this operation immediately after installation of the external LAN adapter may result in the interface number used
in this section changing after Windows reboots. The interface number may also change after installing the external LAN
adapter even after completing this operation, so be sure to perform this operation after installing and connecting all LAN
adapters being used. Performing this operation before installing and connecting the adapters will require this operation to be
performed again.
• LAN adapters are connected to the network in the following order.
(1) A LAN adapter for which routing settings have been specified (the setting configured here)
(2) A LAN adapter in the same segment as the connected device's segment
(3) A LAN adapter for which a gateway has been configured
(4) Order based on type (internal wired LAN adapter -> external wired LAN adapter -> internal wireless LAN adapter ->
external wireless LAN adapter)
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

643
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

16.5.1 Examples of network environments in which setting changes are necessary

Examples of network environments in which setting changes are necessary are as follows. The following (Ex. 1) is
explained in steps from "16.5.2 Table used for the setting".

OO (Ex. 1) 2 or more LAN adapters are connected in the same segment

AeroDR Portable UF Unit

IP address: 192.168.20.241
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Built-in wireless LAN adapter

IP address: 192.168.20.101
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Facility hub

Facility access
point RIS
IP address: 192.168.20.55
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Built-in wired LAN adapter

IP address: 192.168.20.90
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

External wireless LAN adapter

IP address: 192.168.20.123
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
AeroDR Detector
IP address (when using wired connection): 192.168.20.201 HOST
IP address (when using wireless connection): 192.168.20.211 IP address: 192.168.20.56
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Wired LAN connection

Wireless LAN connection

IP address and subnet mask of this device's LAN adapter

IP address and subnet mask of the connected device

644
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

OO (Ex. 2) A default gateway is configured for 2 or more LAN adapters

AeroDR Detector
IP address (when using wired connection): 192.168.20.201
IP address (when using wireless connection): 192.168.20.211
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Facility router

Hub

Facility access RIS

point IP address: 192.168.100.55
Hub Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

AeroDR Portable RF Unit

IP address: 192.168.20.56
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Built-in wired LAN adapter

IP address: 192.168.20.90 RIS
External wireless LAN adapter
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 IP address: 192.168.100.55
IP address: 192.168.30.123
Gtaeway: 192.168.20.1 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Gtaeway: 192.168.30.1

Chapter 16

645
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

OO (Ex. 3) A LAN adapter that is separate from the LAN adapter in the same segment as the RIS/
HOST IP address is used, and a connection is made

AeroDR Portable RF Unit Facility router

IP address: 192.168.20.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Facility access RIS

point IP address: 192.168.20.55
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Built-in wired LAN adapter

IP address: 192.168.20.90
External wireless LAN adapter
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
IP address: 192.168.30.123
Gtaeway: 192.168.20.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Gtaeway: 192.168.30.1
RIS
IP address: 192.168.20.55
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

AeroDR Detector
IP address (when using wired connection): 192.168.20.201
IP address (when using wireless connection): 192.168.20.211
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

646
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

16.5.2 Table used for the setting

Use the following two tables for the setting.

Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information

IP address
LAN adapter type of Set- MAC address
Connected device Gateway Interface number
this device for portable tings (Physical address)
Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST
Built-in wireless LAN • AeroDR Portable UF Unit
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device
• RIS/HOST
• AeroDR Portable RF/UF Unit
Built-in wired LAN • AeroDR Battery Charger (wired
adapter connection)
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device
External wireless LAN • RIS/HOST
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
(USB or card type) • No connected device
• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
adapter • No connected device

Table 2 - Setting list - IP address list

AeroDR SYSTEM and IP Communication in- Interface
Connection destination Gateway
RIS/HOST address terface IP address number
AeroDR Detector 1 (wired) AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection)
AeroDR Detector 1 (wireless) AeroDR Portable UF Unit
AeroDR Detector 2 (wired) AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection)

Chapter 16
AeroDR Detector 2 (wireless) AeroDR Portable UF Unit
AeroDR Detector 3 (wired) AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection)
AeroDR Detector 3 (wireless) AeroDR Portable UF Unit
AeroDR Detector 4 (wired) AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection)
AeroDR Detector 4 (wireless) AeroDR Portable UF Unit
AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR Portable RF Unit
RIS-IN1 RIS/HOST
RIS-IN2 RIS/HOST
RIS-OUT1 RIS/HOST
RIS-OUT2 RIS/HOST
Host1 RIS/HOST
Host2 RIS/HOST
Host3 RIS/HOST
Host4 RIS/HOST
Host5 RIS/HOST
Printer1 RIS/HOST
Printer2 RIS/HOST
Printer3 RIS/HOST
Electronic medical record RIS/HOST
RM hybrid device* This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
Study-sharing unit of this
This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
device

* When setting an RM client unit of this device, set an RM hybrid unit of this device.

647
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

16.5.3 Checking interface information

Check the interface information and list necessary information in "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information".

Checking connected devices

Check the connected device of the LAN adapter used in this device for portable.
Check each connected device of the LAN adapter used in this device for portable and encircle the corresponding
connected device in "Connected device" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information".

Ex. 
IP address
LAN adapter type of Set- MAC address
Connected device Gateway Interface number
this device for portable tings (Physical address)
Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST
Built-in wireless LAN • AeroDR Portable UF Unit
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device

• RIS/HOST
• AeroDR Portable RF/UF Unit
Built-in wired LAN • AeroDR Battery Charger (wired
adapter connection)
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device

External wireless LAN • RIS/HOST

adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
(USB or card type) • No connected device

• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
adapter
• No connected device

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In cases the "IP address", "Gateway", and "Subnet mask" of each LAN adapter can be confirmed, write down the information
here.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

648
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

Checking the connection pattern

Select the corresponding pattern from "1" to "7" of the following table based on the connected device information.

Example: Pattern "1" corresponds to the connection example

Connected device LAN adapter type of
this device used in LAN adapter type
Pattern AeroDR Portable
RIS/HOST (1) RIS/HOST (2) the AeroDR Detector that requires settings
RF/UF Unit connection
• External wireless
Built-in wireless LAN External wireless LAN Built-in wired LAN LAN adapter
1 None
adapter adapter adapter • Built-in wireless LAN
adapter
• External wired LAN
Built-in wireless LAN External wired LAN Built-in wired LAN adapter
2 None
adapter adapter adapter • Built-in wireless LAN
adapter
Built-in wireless LAN Built-in wired LAN (Built-in wired LAN • Built-in wireless LAN
3 None
adapter adapter adapter) adapter
• Built-in wired LAN
adapter
Built-in wireless LAN Built-in wired LAN External wireless LAN (Built-in wired LAN • External wireless
4
adapter adapter adapter adapter) LAN adapter
• Built-in wireless LAN
adapter
Built-in wired LAN Built-in wireless LAN (Built-in wired LAN • Built-in wireless LAN
5 None
adapter adapter adapter) adapter
• External wired LAN
Built-in wired LAN External wired LAN (Built-in wired LAN adapter
6 None
adapter adapter adapter) • Built-in wired LAN
adapter
• Built-in wireless LAN
adapter

Chapter 16
Built-in wired LAN Built-in wireless LAN External wired LAN (Built-in wired LAN • External wired LAN
7
adapter adapter adapter adapter) adapter
• Built-in wired LAN
adapter

Confirmation of LAN adapter to be set

The LAN adapter listed in "LAN adapter type that requires settings" of the corresponding pattern will be set.
Put a ○
on items that require setting in "Settings" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information", and put an X on
unnecessary items.
Ex. 
IP address
LAN adapter type of MAC address
Connected device Settings Gateway Interface number
this device for portable (Physical address)
Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST
Built-in wireless LAN
adapter
•
•
AeroDR Portable UF Unit
This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○
• No connected device
• RIS/HOST
• AeroDR Portable RF/UF Unit
Built-in wired LAN
• AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection) 
adapter
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device
External wireless LAN • RIS/HOST
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○
(USB or card type) • No connected device
• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) 
adapter
• No connected device

649
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

16.5.4 Acquiring an interface number

Acquire an interface number from the Windows command prompt.

Displaying the Windows desktop

Press [Windows Desktop] on the intermediate screen.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For displaying the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to display the intermediate screen".
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.6 Functions of the intermediate screen".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Starting the command prompt

Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu, and then press [All Programs] ⇒ [Accessories] ⇒ [Command Prompt].

Executing ipconfig/all
Execute "ipconfig/all" from the command prompt.
In the next screen, copy the IP address, subnet mask, and MAC address (physical address) of the LAN adapter you
put the ○
in "Settings" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information" into the "IP address", "Subnet mask", and
"MAC address (Physical address)" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information".

Ex.


Copy this to "MAC address

(Physical address)" of the ex-
External ternal wireless LAN adapter
wireless
LAN adapter Copy these to "IP address",
information "Gateway", and "Subnet
mask" of the external wireless
LAN adapter

Copy this to "MAC address

(Physical address)" of the
Built-in wire-
built-in wireless LAN adapter
less LAN
adapter
Copy these to "IP address",
information
"Gateway", and "Subnet
mask" of the built-in wireless
LAN adapter

Built-in wired
LAN adapter
information
* This does not cor-
respond to the con-
nection example.

650
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

Ex. 
IP address
LAN adapter type of MAC address
Connected device Settings Gateway Interface number
this device for portable (Physical address)
Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST 192.168.20.101
Built-in wireless LAN • AeroDR Portable UF Unit
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○ 08-11-96-72-59-20
• No connected device 255.255.255.0
• RIS/HOST
• AeroDR Portable RF/UF Unit
Built-in wired LAN
• AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection) 
adapter
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device

External wireless LAN • RIS/HOST 192.168.20.123

00-01-8E-1F-C2-
adapter
(USB or card type)
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device
○ 9E
255.255.255.0

• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) 
adapter
• No connected device

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In cases the "IP address" and "subnet mask" of LAN adapter are written in advance, write down "MAC address (physical
address)" based on the "IP address" and "subnet mask".
• If "Default Gateway" is configured for the interface network setting, write the gateway IP address.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 16

651
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

Executing route print

Execute "route print" from the command prompt.
In the next screen, search for the interface number of the LAN adapter to be set based on the MAC address (physical
address) of the LAN adapter you put a ○
on in "Settings" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information", and enter it
in "Interface number" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information".

Ex.

Interface
number



By the MAC address (physical address), it can be found out that the exter-
nal wireless LAN adapter is on the upper side and the built-in wireless LAN
adapter is on the lower side. The corresponding interface numbers are:
• External wireless LAN adapter interface number: 20
• Built-in wireless LAN adapter interface number: 12

Enter in the table

Ex. 
IP address
LAN adapter type of MAC address
Connected device Settings Gateway Interface number
this device for portable (Physical address)
Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST 192.168.20.101
Built-in wireless LAN • AeroDR Portable UF Unit
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○ 08-11-96-72-59-20 12
• No connected device 255.255.255.0
• RIS/HOST
• AeroDR Portable RF/UF Unit
Built-in wired LAN
• AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection) 
adapter
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device

External wireless LAN • RIS/HOST 192.168.20.123

00-01-8E-1F-C2-
adapter
(USB or card type)
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device
○ 9E
20
255.255.255.0

• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) 
adapter
• No connected device

652
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

16.5.5 Confirming the IP address of the AeroDR SYSTEM and RIS/

HOST to be used
Survey the institution information, and write down IP address of AeroDR SYSTEM and RIS/HOST, on "Table 2- Set-
ting list – IP address list" .

Example: For the connection example

AeroDR SYSTEM and Communication in- Interface
Connection destination IP address Gateway
RIS/HOST terface IP address number
AeroDR Detector 1 AeroDR Battery Charger (wired con-
192.168.20.201
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 1
AeroDR Portable UF Unit 192.168.20.211
(wireless)
AeroDR Detector 2 AeroDR Battery Charger (wired con-
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 2
AeroDR Portable UF Unit
(wireless)
AeroDR Detector 3 AeroDR Battery Charger (wired con-
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 3
AeroDR Portable UF Unit
(wireless)
AeroDR Detector 4 AeroDR Battery Charger (wired con-
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 4
AeroDR Portable UF Unit
(wireless)
AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR Portable RF Unit —
RIS-IN1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55
RIS-IN2 RIS/HOST
RIS-OUT1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55
RIS-OUT2 RIS/HOST

Chapter 16
Host1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.56
Host2 RIS/HOST
Host3 RIS/HOST
Host4 RIS/HOST
Host5 RIS/HOST —
Printer1 RIS/HOST —
Printer2 RIS/HOST —
Printer3 RIS/HOST —
Electronic medical record RIS/HOST
RM hybrid device* This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
Study-sharing this device This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)

* When setting an RM client unit of this device, set an RM hybrid unit of this device.

653
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

Copy the IP address, subnet mask, and interface number of the "Connected device" of the LAN adapter you put a
○ in "Settings" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information" into the "Communication interface IP address" and
"Interface number" of "Table 2 - Setting list - IP address list". If the segments differ for the connected device's IP ad-
dress and the communication interface's IP address, copy the address from "Gateway" in "Table 1 - Setting list - In-
terface information".

Ex. 
IP address
LAN adapter type of MAC address
Connected device Settings Gateway Interface number
this device for portable (Physical address)
Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST 192.168.20.101
Built-in wireless LAN • AeroDR Portable UF Unit
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○ 08-11-96-72-59-20 12
• No connected device 255.255.255.0
• RIS/HOST
• AeroDR Portable RF/UF Unit
Built-in wired LAN
• AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection) 
adapter
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device
External wireless LAN • RIS/HOST 192.168.20.123
00-01-8E-1F-C2-
adapter
(USB or card type)
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device
○ 9E
20
255.255.255.0
• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) 
adapter
• No connected device

Copy to the table below

AeroDR SYSTEM and Communication Interface

Connection destination IP address Gateway
RIS/HOST interface IP address number
AeroDR Detector 1 (wired) AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection) 192.168.20.201
AeroDR Detector 1 (wireless) AeroDR Portable UF Unit 192.168.20.211 192.168.20.101 12
AeroDR Detector 2 (wired) AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection)
AeroDR Detector 2 (wireless) AeroDR Portable UF Unit
AeroDR Detector 3 (wired) AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection)
AeroDR Detector 3 (wireless) AeroDR Portable UF Unit
AeroDR Detector 4 (wired) AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection)
AeroDR Detector 4 (wireless) AeroDR Portable UF Unit
AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR Portable RF Unit —
RIS-IN1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55 192.168.20.123 20
RIS-IN2 RIS/HOST —
RIS-OUT1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55 192.168.20.123 20
RIS-OUT2 RIS/HOST —
Host1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.56 192.168.20.123 20
Host2 RIS/HOST — —
Host3 RIS/HOST — —
Host4 RIS/HOST — —
Host5 RIS/HOST — — —
Printer1 RIS/HOST — — —
Printer2 RIS/HOST — — —
Printer3 RIS/HOST — — —
Electronic medical record RIS/HOST
RM hybrid device* This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
Study-sharing this device This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)

* When setting an RM client unit of this device, set an RM hybrid unit of this device.

654
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

16.5.6 Setting routing information

Executing route –p add

For the AeroDR SYSTEM and RIS/HOST with the "IP address" and "Interface number" listed in "Table 2 - Setting list
- IP address list", execute the following command to set routing information.
"route -p add [IP address] 0.0.0.0 IF [Interface number]"
If the segments differ for "IP address" and "Communication interface IP address" in "Table 2 - Setting list - IP address
list", configure the value of "Gateway" for the next command. If the segment is the same, configure "0.0.0.0".
"route -p add [IP address] [Gateway] IF [Interface number]"

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there are multiple interface numbers, execute the command by interface number.
• For items with the same IP address, the command need not be executed more than once.
• For command arguments, execute route from the command prompt and read the displayed description.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Ex.
AeroDR SYSTEM and Communication in- Interface
Connection destination IP address Gateway
RIS/HOST terface IP address number
AeroDR Detector 1 AeroDR Battery Charger (wired con-
192.168.20.201
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 1 (wire-
AeroDR Portable UF Unit 192.168.20.211 192.168.20.101 12
less)
AeroDR Detector 2 AeroDR Battery Charger (wired con-
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 2 (wire-
AeroDR Portable UF Unit
less)
AeroDR Detector 3 AeroDR Battery Charger (wired con-

Chapter 16
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 3 (wire-
AeroDR Portable UF Unit
less)
AeroDR Detector 4 AeroDR Battery Charger (wired con-
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 4 (wire-
AeroDR Portable UF Unit
less)
AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR Portable RF Unit —
RIS-IN1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55 192.168.20.123 20
RIS-IN2 RIS/HOST —
RIS-OUT1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55 192.168.20.123 20
RIS-OUT2 RIS/HOST —
Host1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.56 192.168.20.123 20
Host2 RIS/HOST — —
Host3 RIS/HOST — —
Host4 RIS/HOST — —
Host5 RIS/HOST — — —
Printer1 RIS/HOST — — —
Printer2 RIS/HOST — — —
Printer3 RIS/HOST — — —
Electronic medical record RIS/HOST
RM hybrid device* This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
Study-sharing this device This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)

* When setting an RM client unit of this device, set an RM hybrid unit of this device.

655
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

Set the routing information for the AeroDR SYSTEM and RIS/HOST of the parts boxed in red.

Ex.

Gateway
IP address Interface number

Executing route print

Execute the route print command and confirm that routing is correctly set. If "Gateway" is configured, the value of
"On-link" in the "Gateway" column is the configured gateway's address.

Example: For the connection example

Added routing
information

Added routing
information

656
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

16.5.7 Confirming the setting details

Restart Windows and confirm the settings are correct.

Restarting Windows
Restart Windows.

Displaying the Windows desktop

Press [Windows Desktop] on the intermediate screen.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For displaying the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to display the intermediate screen".
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.6 Functions of the intermediate screen".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Confirming the setting details

Execute the route print command from the command prompt and confirm that routing is correctly set.
When adding routing settings, repeat the procedure in "16.5.6 Setting routing information".
When an unnecessary routing is set by mistake, delete the unnecessary routing information.

Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "16.5.8 Deleting unnecessary routing information" for deleting unnecessary routing information.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 16

657
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

16.5.8 Deleting unnecessary routing information

When unnecessary routing information was registered by mistake, delete it through the following procedure.

Executing route print

Execute the route print command to display the routing information.

Ex.

Routing information
registered incorrectly

From "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information", it can be found out that the interface number of the LAN adapter
corresponding to the IP address "192.168.20.101" of "Interface" of the routing information is "12". 
Portable device IP address MAC address Interface
Connected device Settings
LAN adapter type Subnet mask (Physical address) number
• RIS/HOST 192.168.20.101
Built-in wireless LAN
adapter
•
•
AeroDR Portable UF Unit
This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○ 255.255.255.0
08-11-96-72-59-20 12
• No connected device
• RIS/HOST
• AeroDR Portable RF/UF Unit
Built-in wired LAN
• AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection) 
adapter
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device
External wireless LAN • RIS/HOST 192.168.20.123
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○ 255.255.255.0
00-01-8E-1F-C2-
9E
20
(USB or card type) • No connected device
• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) 
adapter
• No connected device

658
16.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM

Executing deletion
Use the IP address of the [Network Destination] acquired from the routing information, and the "Interface number" in
"Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information" to execute the following command.
"route –p delete [IP address] 0.0.0.0 IF [Interface number]"

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For command arguments, execute route from the command prompt and read the displayed description.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Confirming deletion
Execute the route print command, and confirm that the routing information has been deleted.

Ex.


Chapter 16
Confirm deletion

659
 16.6 Multilingual environment settings

The setting method for a multilingual environment is as (2) W

 hen ASCII is used in the first element and
follows. local phonogram are used in the third element
* Multilingual environment settings are not required in The first element of DICOM communication is trans-
Japan. ferred to the single region of this device and the single
region is transmitted in the first element.
The third element is transferred to the phonogram re-
16.6.1 Basic method of language- gion of this device and the phonogram region is trans-
specific environment building mitted in the third element.

DICOM Internal data of

Languages having ASCII characters and ASCII communication this device
and language-specific characters (Latin) First element Single
This applies to ASCII, Latin 1 (Western Europe), Latin Second element Ideogram
2 (Central Europe), Latin 3 (South Europe), Latin 4
Third element Phonogram
(North Europe), Latin 5 (Turkish).
DICOM communication uses only a first element (1
byte region) and transfer is performed in the single re- Languages having multibyte characters
gion of this device.
This applies to Chinese, Korean and Japanese.
DICOM Internal data of The first element of DICOM communication is trans-
communication this device ferred to the single region of this device, the second
element to the ideogram region and the third element
First element Single
to the phonogram region.
Second element Ideogram

Third element Phonogram DICOM Internal data of

communication this device
First element Single
Languages having phonogram which are
separate to ASCII Second element Ideogram

Third element Phonogram

This applies to Cyrillic, Greek, Arabian, Hebrew and
Thai.
ASCII is transferred to the single region of this device
and a character string of one of the above languages
to the phonogram region.
The setting for DICOM communication differs in the
following 2 cases.

(1) When a local phonogram is used in the first

element
The first element of DICOM communication is trans-
ferred to the phonogram region of this device and the
phonogram region is transmitted as the first element.

DICOM Internal data of

communication this device
First element Single

Second element Ideogram

Third element Phonogram

660
 16.6 Multilingual environment settings

3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

16.6.2 Multilingual output setting

Make the multilingual output setting using the service

tool.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the icon of the device to be set.

• The HOST is used as an example here.

• The host setting screen is displayed.

4 Select a language from [Character Set]

with reference to the HINT table.

Chapter 16
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

661
16.6 Multilingual environment settings

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5 Press [OK] on the host setting screen.

• Setting name/language associations
6 Close the sub-menu screen.
Setting Specified char-
Supported language(s)
name acter group
ASCII English
French, Italian, German,
Latin1 ISO_IR 100 Spanish, Portuguese,
Finnish
Latin2 ISO_IR 101 Czech, Polish
Latin3 ISO_IR 109 (Esperanto)
Latin4 ISO_IR 110 Lithuanian
Turkish
ISO_IR 148 Turkish
(Latin5)
Cyrillic
(Phono)
ISO_IR 144 Russian
Cyrillic
(Single)
Greek
(Phono)
ISO_IR 126 Greek
Greek
(Single)
Arabic
(Phono)
ISO_IR 127 Arabic
Arabic
(Single)
Hebrew
(Phono)
ISO_IR 138 Hebrew
Hebrew
(Single)
Thai
(Phono)
ISO_IR 166 Thai
Thai
(Single)
ISO 2022 IR
Korean Korean
149
Chinese Chinese (simplified), Chi-
GB18030
(GB18030) nese (traditional)
Chinese (simplified), Chi-
Unicode nese (traditional), Korean,
ISO_IR 192 Japanese, others
Unicode Russian, Greek, Arabic,
(Single) Hebrew

–– Where an entry includes the term "(Single)",

reception and transmission is performed with a
phonetic characters, such as Japanese half-width
kana, entered in the first element of the DICOM
communication. In this case this device handles the
language as phonetic characters.
–– Where an entry includes the term "(Phono)",
reception and transmission is performed with ASCII
entered in the first element, and phonetic characters
entered in the third element of the DICOM
communication. When this device is connected
to an RIS/HOST using Russian, Greek, Arabic,
Hebrew, or Thai, check whether the local language
is entered in the first element or the third element
before performing the setting.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

662
 16.6 Multilingual environment settings

16.6.3 Setting of patient registration HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

screen and property area • The phonetic characters for Chinese are pinyin and the
phonetic characters for Korean are hangul.
For Russian, Greek, Arabic, Hebrew, Thai, Chinese ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(simplified), Chinese (traditional) and Korean, set the
language on the patient registration screen and in the 4 Press [OK] on [Screen Setting].
property area using the user tool.
5 Close the sub-menu screen.
1 Start the user tool.

2 Press [Screen Setting].

• [Screen Setting] is displayed.

OO For Russian, Greek, Arabic, Hebrew and

Thai

3 Add [PatientName(Phonetic)] to [Visible

Items] in both [PatientRegistrationScreen]

Chapter 16
and [PatientPropertyArea].

OO For Chinese (simplified), Chinese (tradi-

tional) and Korean

3 Add [PatientName(Phonetic)] and

[PatientName(Multi-byte)] to [Visible
Items] in both [PatientRegistrationScreen]
and [PatientPropertyArea].

663
16.6 Multilingual environment settings

16.6.4 Visibility setting of input

items of the user tool
For Russian, Greek, Arabic, Hebrew, Thai, Chinese
(simplified), Chinese (traditional) and Korean, use the
CS-7 setting screen to set the language of the patient
DB and operator name editing screen.

1 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

3 Set [Name input items] in [Visibility set-

ting of input items of the User tool].

• For Russian, Greek, Arabic, Hebrew and Thai

Set [Phonetic] to [ON] and [Multi-byte] to [OFF].
• For Japanese, Chinese (simplified), Chinese
(traditional) and Korean
Set [Phonetic] and [Multi-byte] to [ON].
• For other languages
Set [Phonetic] and [Multi-byte] to [OFF].

4 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.

5 Close the sub-menu screen.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

664
 16.7 Method for adding the AeroDR SYSTEM not containing the
AeroDR Detector to the existing AeroDR SYSTEM environment

Normally, the AeroDR Detector is required when setting an additional AeroDR SYSTEM to register the AeroDR Bat-
tery Charger etc. If the AeroDR SYSTEM which does not contain the AeroDR Detector is added, it needs to be in-
stalled using the AeroDR Detector of the existing AeroDR SYSTEM.

16.7.1 Configuration example

Procedures are described based on the following configuration example.

Exposure room #A Exposure room #B

For portable
CS-7#C
AeroDR AeroDR
RM client machine
Detector#A Detector#B

No
Add AeroDR
Detector

CS-7#A CS-7#B
RM hybrid machine RM client machine

OOExisting AeroDR SYSTEM

• Exposure room #A
–– This device: RM hybrid machine, unique ID is 1
–– 1 AeroDR Detector: Described as "AeroDR Detector#A" here.
• Exposure room #B
–– This device: RM client machine, unique ID is 2
–– 1 AeroDR Detector: Described as "AeroDR Detector#B" here.

Chapter 16
• Roaming environment has been established with exposure room #A and exposure room #B

OOAdditional AeroDR SYSTEM

• Portable unit of this device: RM client machine, unique ID is 3
• AeroDR Battery Charger: 1 unit
• AeroDR Portable RF Unit: 1 unit

665
16.7 Method for adding the AeroDR SYSTEM not containing the AeroDR Detector to the existing AeroDR SYSTEM environment

16.7.2 Installation procedure (When the device sub ID cannot be

entered)
The installation overview is as follows:
(1) To use an existing AeroDR Detector with an additional AeroDR SYSTEM installation, temporarily set and tempo-
rarily merge with the additional unit of this device.
In this example, registration of the serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger and setting change of the Aero-
DR Generator Interface Unit are performed with CS-7#C, and temporary merging is performed.
(2) Delete registration of the AeroDR Detector used in (1) using the existing unit of this device.
In this example, delete the registration of AeroDR Detector#A.
(3) Formally merge the additional unit of this device.
In this example, read the sub device ID of the additional AeroDR Battery Charger using AeroDR Detector#A, and
formally merge using CS-7#A

The installation procedure is as follows:

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Descriptions surrounded by < > in the table below indicate the status of this device.
• Descriptions written in red in the table below indicate operations different from the normal settings. Please pay extra attention.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Proce-
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C
dure
1 Check the startup of CS-7#C.
2 Install the license, and shut down CS-7#C.
3 Start CS-7#C, AeroDR Battery Charger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
after temporarily connecting them with the local network.
4 Start the service tool, and set [Unique ID] of CS-7#C to [3] with the CS-7
setting tool.
5 Select the connection check box on each sub-menu screen of AeroDR
Access Point, AeroDR Battery Charger, and AeroDR Generator Interface
Unit to enable the devices.
6 Start the AeroDR setting tool on the RM sub-menu screen.
7 In the RM setting, set [Mode] to [Hybrid], and [IP address] to the IP
address of CS-7#C.
8 Set the exposure room setting according to the institution environment.
<Normal workflow in <Normal workflow in
9 progress> progress> Set the access point setting according to the institution environment.
10 Registration of AeroDR Detector correction data, and AeroDR Detector
communication confirmation (download/upload) are not performed.
11 Set the serial number in the AeroDR Battery Charger setting.
Do not press [Download].
12 Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit setting according to the
institution environment, and press [Upload].
13 The AeroDR Detector setting (IP address change and upload) is not
performed.
14 Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen, and exit from the AeroDR
setting tool.
15 Press [Network Setting] on the sub-menu screen of this device, and
change the IP address of CS-7#C.
16 Restart CS-7#C, and start the service tool.

666
16.7 Method for adding the AeroDR SYSTEM not containing the AeroDR Detector to the existing AeroDR SYSTEM environment

Proce-
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C
dure
17 Press [Delay Measurement] on the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
sub-menu screen, and measure Delay on the setting screen.
*This setting is unnecessary within Japan.
*This operation is required only at institutions where S-SRM link is used.
18 Shut down CS-7#C, and connect to the institution network.
19 <Normal workflow in Start CS-7#C, and start the AeroDR setting tool in the service tool.
progress>
20 In the RM setting, change [Mode] to [Client], and [IP address] to the IP
address of CS-7#A, then press [OK].
21 When the setting data transmission confirmation dialog is displayed,
press [OK].
22 Wait until the in processing dialog disappears.
23 Start the service tool,
and press [Merge]
on the RM sub-menu
screen to start the
merge tool.
<Service tool screen>
24 Select CS-7#C
data from the list of
[Mergeable Data], and
press [Merge].
25 Close the service tool.
26 Start the device information synchronization tool on the sub-menu
<Normal workflow in screen of the RM.
progress>
27 <Must be on a screen Check the information before and after the synchronization, and press
other than the service [Sync].
28 tool> After the synchronization has been completed, end the device
information synchronization tool.
29 Restart CS-7#C.
30 Delete the registration
of AeroDR Detector#A <Must be on a screen other than the service tool>
on the system monitor.

Chapter 16
31 Start the AeroDR setting tool in the service tool.
Check that correction data for AeroDR Detector#A and AeroDR
Detector#B is displayed in [Correction Data Setting].
32 Insert AeroDR Detector#A into the AeroDR Battery Charger, and press
[Download] and [Upload] without changing any settings in the AeroDR
Detector setting.
33 <Must be on a screen Press [Download] in the AeroDR Battery Charger setting.
other than the service
34 When the Detector selection dialog is displayed, select AeroDR
tool>
Detector#A and press [OK].
The device sub-ID is displayed.
35 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR setting tool.
36 When the setting data transmission confirmation dialog is displayed,
press [OK].
37 Wait until the in processing dialog disappears.

667
16.7 Method for adding the AeroDR SYSTEM not containing the AeroDR Detector to the existing AeroDR SYSTEM environment

Proce-
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C
dure
38 Start the service tool,
and press [Merge]
on the RM sub-menu
screen to start the
merge tool.
39 Select CS-7#C <Service tool screen>
data from the list of
[Mergeable Data], and
press [Merge]. <Normal workflow in
40 Exit the service tool, progress>
and restart CS-7#A.
41 Start the device information synchronization tool on the sub-menu
screen of the RM.
42 Check the information before and after the synchronization, and press
[Sync].
43 After the synchronization has been completed, end the device
information synchronization tool.
44 Start the device Restart CS-7#C.
information
synchronization tool
on the sub-menu
screen of the RM.
45 Check the information Check the synchronization state on the RM information screen of the
<Must be on a screen before and after the system monitor.
other than the service synchronization, and
tool> press [Sync].
46 After the
synchronization has
been completed,
end the device
information
synchronization tool.
47 Restart CS-7#B.
48 Check the
synchronization
state on the RM
information screen of
the system monitor.

668
 16.7 Method for adding the AeroDR SYSTEM not containing the AeroDR Detector to the existing AeroDR SYSTEM environment

16.7.3 Installation procedure (When the device sub ID can be entered)

When the device sub ID can be entered manually or using a barcode, temporary setting is not required for the
AeroDR Detector.

The installation procedure is as follows:

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Before starting the procedure, disconnect the connections to the institution network.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Descriptions surrounded by < > in the table below indicate the status of this device.
• Descriptions written in red in the table below indicate operations different from the normal settings. Please pay extra attention.
• When reading device sub IDs with a bar code reader, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
• When 3 or more devices are installed in an existing AeroDR SYSTEM, restart devices that have [Mode] set to [Client] in the
RM settings of the service tool one device at a time.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Procedure CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C

1 Check the startup of CS-7#C.
2 Install the license, and shut down CS-7#C.
Start CS-7#C, AeroDR Battery Charger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
3
after temporarily connecting them with the local network.
Start the service tool, and set [Unique ID] of CS-7#C to [3] with the
4
CS-7 setting tool.
Select the connection check box on each sub-menu screen of AeroDR
5 Access Point, AeroDR Battery Charger, and AeroDR Generator Inter-
face Unit to enable the devices.
6 Start the AeroDR setting tool on the RM sub-menu screen.
In the RM setting, set [Mode] to [Hybrid], and [IP Address of RM hybrid

Chapter 16
7
machine] to the IP address of CS-7#C.
8 Set the exposure room setting according to the institution environment.
<Normal work-
9 <Normal workflow in Set the access point setting according to the institution environment.
flow in prog-
progress> Enter the serial number and device sub ID manually or using barcodes
10 ress>
in the AeroDR Battery Charger setting.
Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit setting according to the insti-
11
tution environment, and press [Upload].
Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen, and exit from the
12
AeroDR setting tool.
Press [Network Setting] on the sub-menu screen of this device, and
13
change the IP address of CS-7#C.
14 Restart CS-7#C, and start the service tool.
Press [Delay Measurement] on the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
sub-menu screen, and measure Delay on the setting screen.
15 * This setting is unnecessary within Japan.
* This operation is required only at institutions where S-SRM link is
used.

669
16.7 Method for adding the AeroDR SYSTEM not containing the AeroDR Detector to the existing AeroDR SYSTEM environment

Procedure CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C

Shut down CS-7#C, and connect to the institution network.
16
Press [OK] when the RM setting change dialog is displayed.
17 Start CS-7#C, and start the AeroDR setting tool in the service tool.
<Normal workflow in In the RM setting, change [Mode] to [Client], and [IP Address of RM
18
progress> hybrid machine] to the IP address of CS-7#A, then press [OK].
When the setting data transmission confirmation dialog is displayed,
19
press [OK].
20 Wait until the in processing dialog disappears.
Start up the service tool
and press [Merge] on the
21
RM sub menu screen to <Normal work-
activate the merge tool. flow in prog-
Select CS-7#C data from ress> <Service tool screen>
22 the list of [Mergeable
Data], and press [Merge].
Exit the service tool, and
23
restart CS-7#A.
Start the device information synchronization tool on the sub-menu
24
screen of the RM.
Check the information before and after the synchronization, and press
25
[Sync].
After the synchronization has been completed, end the device informa-
26
tion synchronization tool.
Start the device
information
synchronization
27 Restart CS-7#C.
tool on the sub-
menu screen of
the RM.
Check the infor-
mation before
and after the Check the synchronization state on the RM information screen of the
28 <Must be on a screen
synchroniza- system monitor.
other than the service
tion, and press
tool>
[Sync].
After the syn-
chronization has
been complet-
29 ed, end the de-
vice information
synchronization
tool.
30 Restart CS-7#B.
Check the
synchroniza-
tion state on the
31
RM information
screen of the
system monitor.

670
 16.8 Installation method when there are fewer AeroDR
Detectors than units of this device

When there are fewer AeroDR Detectors than units of this device, all units of this device must be installed with 1
AeroDR Detector.

16.8.1 Configuration example

Procedures are described based on the following configuration example.

AeroDR Detector

Exposure room #A Exposure room #B Exposure room #C

CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C

RM hybrid machine RM client machine RM client machine

Chapter 16

671
16.8 Installation method when there are fewer AeroDR Detectors than units of this device

16.8.2 Installation procedure (When the device sub ID cannot be

entered)
The installation overview is as follows:
(1) Change the IP address of the AeroDR Detector using only one RM client machine.
Here, change the IP address of the AeroDR Detector using CS-7#C.
(2) Delete the AeroDR Detector correction data with units of this device that do not change the IP address of the
AeroDR Detector.
Here, delete the correction data of the AeroDR Detector IP address with CS-7#A and CS-7#B.
(3) Merge the RM client machine using the RM hybrid machine.
Here, merge CS-7#B and CS-7#C using CS-7#A.

The installation procedure is as follows:

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Descriptions surrounded by < > in the table below indicate the status of this device.
• Descriptions written in red in the table below indicate operations different from the normal settings. Please pay extra attention.
• Procedures 1 to 22 can be set to any timing with each unit of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Proce-
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C
dure
1 Check the startup of CS-7#A. Check the startup of CS-7#B. Check the startup of CS-7#C.
2 Install the license, and shut down CS-7#A. Install the license, and shut down CS-7#B. Install the license, and shut down CS-7#C.
Start CS-7#A, AeroDR Battery Char- Start CS-7#B, AeroDR Battery Char- Start CS-7#C, AeroDR Battery Char-
ger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit ger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit ger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
3
after temporarily connecting them with after temporarily connecting them with after temporarily connecting them with
the local network. the local network. the local network.
Start the service tool, and set [Unique ID] Start the service tool, and set [Unique ID] Start the service tool, and set [Unique ID]
4
of CS-7#A to [1] with the CS-7 setting tool. of CS-7#B to [2] with the CS-7 setting tool. of CS-7#C to [3] with the CS-7 setting tool.
Select the connection check box on Select the connection check box on Select the connection check box on
each sub-menu screen of AeroDR Ac- each sub-menu screen of AeroDR Ac- each sub-menu screen of AeroDR Ac-
5 cess Point, AeroDR Battery Charger, cess Point, AeroDR Battery Charger, cess Point, AeroDR Battery Charger,
and AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
to enable the devices. to enable the devices. to enable the devices.
Start the AeroDR setting tool on the Start the AeroDR setting tool on the Start the AeroDR setting tool on the
6
RM sub-menu screen. RM sub-menu screen. RM sub-menu screen.
In the RM setting, set [Mode] to In the RM setting, set [Mode] to In the RM setting, set [Mode] to
7 [Hybrid], and [IP address] to the IP ad- [Hybrid], and [IP address] to the IP ad- [Hybrid], and [IP address] to the IP ad-
dress of CS-7#A. dress of CS-7#B. dress of CS-7#C.
Set the exposure room setting accord- Set the exposure room setting accord- Set the exposure room setting accord-
8
ing to the institution environment. ing to the institution environment. ing to the institution environment.
Set the access point setting according Set the access point setting according Set the access point setting according
9
to the institution environment. to the institution environment. to the institution environment.
Insert the media that comes with the Insert the media that comes with the Insert the media that comes with the
AeroDR Detector into the CD/DVD AeroDR Detector into the CD/DVD AeroDR Detector into the CD/DVD
10
drive, and register the AeroDR Detec- drive, and register the AeroDR Detec- drive, and register the AeroDR Detec-
tor correction data. tor correction data. tor correction data.
Press [Download] and [Upload] in Press [Download] and [Upload] in Press [Download] and [Upload] in
11
[AeroDR Detector Setting]. [AeroDR Detector Setting]. [AeroDR Detector Setting].
Input the serial number in the AeroDR Input the serial number in the AeroDR Input the serial number in the AeroDR
Battery Charger setting, and when the Battery Charger setting, and when the Battery Charger setting, and when the
12 Detector selection dialog is displayed, Detector selection dialog is displayed, Detector selection dialog is displayed,
press [OK]. press [OK]. press [OK].
The device sub-ID is displayed. The device sub-ID is displayed. The device sub-ID is displayed.
Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Set the AeroDR Generator Interface
13 Unit setting according to the institution Unit setting according to the institution Unit setting according to the institution
environment, and press [Upload]. environment, and press [Upload]. environment, and press [Upload].
The AeroDR Detector setting (IP The AeroDR Detector setting (IP
address change and upload) is not address change and upload) is not
Change the IP address with [AeroDR
14 performed. performed.
Detector Setting], and press [Upload].
Select the AeroDR Detector in [Correc- Select the AeroDR Detector in [Correc-
tion Data Setting], and press [Delete]. tion Data Setting], and press [Delete].

672
 16.8 Installation method when there are fewer AeroDR Detectors than units of this device

Proce-
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C
dure
Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting
15 screen, and exit from the AeroDR set- screen, and exit from the AeroDR set- screen, and exit from the AeroDR set-
ting tool. ting tool. ting tool.
Press [Network Setting] on the sub- Press [Network Setting] on the sub- Press [Network Setting] on the sub-
16 menu screen of this device, and menu screen of this device, and change menu screen of this device, and
change the IP address of CS-7#A. the IP address of CS-7#B. change the IP address of CS-7#C.
Restart CS-7#A, and start the service Restart CS-7#B, and start the service Restart CS-7#C, and start the service
17
tool. tool. tool.
Press [Delay Measurement] on the Press [Delay Measurement] on the Press [Delay Measurement] on the
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub- AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub- AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub-
menu screen, and measure Delay on menu screen, and measure Delay on menu screen, and measure Delay on
the setting screen. the setting screen. the setting screen.
18
* This setting is unnecessary within * This setting is unnecessary within * This setting is unnecessary within
Japan. Japan. Japan.
* This operation is required only at in- * This operation is required only at insti- * This operation is required only at in-
stitutions where S-SRM link is used. tutions where S-SRM link is used. stitutions where S-SRM link is used.
Shut down CS-7#A, and connect to the Shut down CS-7#B, and connect to the
19 Analyze the AeroDR Detector.
institution network. institution network.
20 Start CS-7#A. Perform calibration.
Start CS-7#B, and start the AeroDR Shut down CS-7#C, and connect to
21
setting tool in the service tool. the institution network.
In the RM setting, change [Mode] to
Start CS-7#C, and start the AeroDR
22 [Client], and [IP address] to the IP ad-
setting tool in the service tool.
dress of CS-7#A.
In the RM setting, change [Mode] to
Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR setting
23 [Client], and [IP address] to the IP ad-
tool.
dress of CS-7#A.
<Must be on a screen other than the When the setting data transmission Without changing any settings in the
24 service tool> confirmation dialog is displayed, press AeroDR Detector setting, press [Down-
[OK]. load] and [Upload].
Wait until the in processing dialog dis- Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR setting
25
appears. tool.
When the setting data transmission
26 confirmation dialog is displayed, press

Chapter 16
[OK].
Wait until the in processing dialog
27
disappears.
Start the service tool, and press
28 [Merge] on the RM sub-menu screen <Service tool screen>
to start the merge tool.
Select CS-7#B data from the list of
29 <Service tool screen>
[Mergeable Data], and press [Merge].
Select CS-7#C data from the list of
30
[Mergeable Data], and press [Merge].
31 Exit the service tool, and restart CS-7#A.

673
16.8 Installation method when there are fewer AeroDR Detectors than units of this device

Proce-
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C
dure
Start the device information synchroni-
32 zation tool on the sub-menu screen of
the RM.
Check the information before and after
33 <Service tool screen>
the synchronization, and press [Sync].
After the synchronization has been
34 completed, end the device information
synchronization tool.
Start the device information synchroni-
35 Restart CS-7#B. zation tool on the sub-menu screen of
<Must be on a screen other than the the RM.
service tool>
Check the synchronization state on the
Check the information before and after
36 RM information screen of the system
the synchronization, and press [Sync].
monitor.
After the synchronization has been
37 completed, end the device information
synchronization tool.
38 Restart CS-7#C.
Check the synchronization state on the
39 RM information screen of the system
monitor.

674
 16.8 Installation method when there are fewer AeroDR Detectors than units of this device

16.8.3 Installation procedure (When the device sub ID can be entered)

The installation overview is as follows:

(1) Perform registration and setting configuration of an AeroDR Detector with only 1 unit of this device.
Here, perform registration and setting configuration of the AeroDR Detector using CS-7#C.
(2) Configure settings of the AeroDR Battery Charger's device sub ID by manual input or by barcode input.
(3) Merge the RM client machine using the RM hybrid machine.
Here, merge CS-7#B and CS-7#C using CS-7#A.

The installation procedure is as follows:

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Descriptions surrounded by < > in the table below indicate the status of this device.
• Descriptions written in red in the table below indicate operations different from the normal settings. Please pay extra attention.
• Procedures 1 to 22 can be set to any timing with each unit of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Proce-
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C
dure
1 Check the startup of CS-7#A. Check the startup of CS-7#B. Check the startup of CS-7#C.
Install the license, and shut down CS- Install the license, and shut down CS- Install the license, and shut down CS-
2
7#A. 7#B. 7#C.
Start CS-7#A, AeroDR Battery Char- Start CS-7#B, AeroDR Battery Char- Start CS-7#C, AeroDR Battery Char-
ger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit ger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit ger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
3
after temporarily connecting them with after temporarily connecting them with after temporarily connecting them with
the local network. the local network. the local network.
Start the service tool, and set [Unique Start the service tool, and set [Unique Start the service tool, and set [Unique
4 ID] of CS-7#A to [1] with the CS-7 set- ID] of CS-7#B to [2] with the CS-7 set- ID] of CS-7#C to [3] with the CS-7 set-
ting tool. ting tool. ting tool.
Select the connection check box on Select the connection check box on Select the connection check box on

Chapter 16
each sub-menu screen of AeroDR Ac- each sub-menu screen of AeroDR Ac- each sub-menu screen of AeroDR Ac-
5 cess Point, AeroDR Battery Charger, cess Point, AeroDR Battery Charger, cess Point, AeroDR Battery Charger,
and AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
to enable the devices. to enable the devices. to enable the devices.
Start the AeroDR setting tool on the Start the AeroDR setting tool on the Start the AeroDR setting tool on the
6
RM sub-menu screen. RM sub-menu screen. RM sub-menu screen.
In the RM setting, set [Mode] to [Hy- In the RM setting, set [Mode] to [Hy- In the RM setting, set [Mode] to [Hy-
7 brid], and [IP Address of RM hybrid brid], and [IP Address of RM hybrid brid], and [IP Address of RM hybrid
machine] to the IP address of CS-7#A. machine] to the IP address of CS-7#B. machine] to the IP address of CS-7#C.
Set the exposure room setting accord- Set the exposure room setting accord- Set the exposure room setting accord-
8
ing to the institution environment. ing to the institution environment. ing to the institution environment.
Set the access point setting according Set the access point setting according Set the access point setting according
9
to the institution environment. to the institution environment. to the institution environment.
Insert the media that comes with the
Do not register the correction data of Do not register the correction data of AeroDR Detector into the CD/DVD
10
the AeroDR Detector. the AeroDR Detector. drive, and register the AeroDR Detec-
tor correction data.
Press [Upload] and [Download] in
11
[AeroDR Detector Setting].
Enter the serial number and device Enter the serial number and device Enter the serial number and device
12 sub ID manually or using barcodes in sub ID manually or using barcodes in sub ID manually or using barcodes in
the AeroDR Battery Charger setting. the AeroDR Battery Charger setting. the AeroDR Battery Charger setting.
Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Set the AeroDR Generator Interface
13 Unit setting according to the institution Unit setting according to the institution Unit setting according to the institution
environment, and press [Upload]. environment, and press [Upload]. environment, and press [Upload].
Change the IP address with [AeroDR
14
Detector Setting], and press [Upload].
Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting
15 screen, and exit from the AeroDR set- screen, and exit from the AeroDR set- screen, and exit from the AeroDR set-
ting tool. ting tool. ting tool.

675
16.8 Installation method when there are fewer AeroDR Detectors than units of this device

Proce-
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C
dure
Press [Network Setting] on the sub- Press [Network Setting] on the sub- Press [Network Setting] on the sub-
16 menu screen of this device, and menu screen of this device, and change menu screen of this device, and
change the IP address of CS-7#A. the IP address of CS-7#B. change the IP address of CS-7#C.
Restart CS-7#A, and start the service Restart CS-7#B, and start the service Restart CS-7#C, and start the service
17
tool. tool. tool.
Press [Delay Measurement] on the Press [Delay Measurement] on the Press [Delay Measurement] on the
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub- AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub- AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub-
menu screen, and measure Delay on menu screen, and measure Delay on menu screen, and measure Delay on
the setting screen. the setting screen. the setting screen.
18
* This setting is unnecessary within * This setting is unnecessary within * This setting is unnecessary within
Japan. Japan. Japan.
* This operation is required only at in- * This operation is required only at insti- * This operation is required only at in-
stitutions where S-SRM link is used. tutions where S-SRM link is used. stitutions where S-SRM link is used.
Shut down CS-7#A, and connect to the Shut down CS-7#B, and connect to the
19 Analyze the AeroDR Detector.
institution network. institution network.
20 Start CS-7#A. Perform calibration.
Start CS-7#B, and start the AeroDR Shut down CS-7#C, and connect to
21
setting tool in the service tool. the institution network.
In the RM setting, change [Mode] to
Start CS-7#C, and start the AeroDR
22 [Client], and [IP address] to the IP ad-
setting tool in the service tool.
dress of CS-7#A.
In the RM setting, change [Mode] to
Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR setting
23 [Client], and [IP address] to the IP ad-
tool.
dress of CS-7#A.
<Must be on a screen other than the When the setting data transmission Without changing any settings in the
24 service tool> confirmation dialog is displayed, press AeroDR Detector setting, press [Down-
[OK]. load] and [Upload].
Wait until the in processing dialog dis- Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR setting
25
appears. tool.
When the setting data transmission
26 confirmation dialog is displayed, press
[OK].
Wait until the in processing dialog
27
disappears.
Start the service tool, and press
28 [Merge] on the RM sub-menu screen
to start the merge tool. <Service tool screen>
Select CS-7#B data from the list of
29
[Mergeable Data], and press [Merge]. <Service tool screen>
Select CS-7#C data from the list of
30
[Mergeable Data], and press [Merge].
Exit the service tool, and restart CS-
31
7#A.

676
 16.8 Installation method when there are fewer AeroDR Detectors than units of this device

Proce-
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C
dure
Start the device information synchroni-
32 zation tool on the sub-menu screen of
the RM.
Check the information before and after
33 <Service tool screen>
the synchronization, and press [Sync].
After the synchronization has been
34 completed, end the device information
synchronization tool.
Start the device information synchroni-
35 Restart CS-7#B. zation tool on the sub-menu screen of
<Must be on a screen other than the the RM.
service tool>
Check the synchronization state on the
Check the information before and after
36 RM information screen of the system
the synchronization, and press [Sync].
monitor.
After the synchronization has been
37 completed, end the device information
synchronization tool.
38 Restart CS-7#C.
Check the synchronization state on the
39 RM information screen of the system
monitor.

Chapter 16

677
 16.9 Settings for REGIUS common environment in CS-3/5
and this device mixed environment

This is a setting method for the case where the exist-

ing CS-3/5 is replaced with this device or this device is
added in an environment where CS-3/5 and REGIUS
are installed.
4.3 Check of bundled items
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.4 Check of startup
• When using REGIUS in an environment where CS-3/5
and this device are mixed, update CS-3/5 version to 4.5 Setting of touch panel
version V3.02R02 or higher.
• When using REGIUS in an environment where CS-3/5 4.6 Registration of license
and this device are mixed, set the periodic replace-
ment notification function to off in CS-3/5. These func- 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device
tions cannot be used at the same time.
• When CS-3/5 and this device are used on the same 6.3 System setting of this device
network without a mixed environment, set the port
numbers of this device using [CS-X Communication 6.4 Activation of REGIUS icon
Setting] of [JM Settings] and the port numbers of [Sys-
tem Info.] → [My Network] → [Communication Setting]
using the CS-3/5 service tool so that they use different
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
port numbers.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" and "6.3 Sys-
tem setting of this device" first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
16.9.1 Settings for REGIUS
common environment in
CS-3/5 and this device
mixed environment

1 Shut down all CS-3/5 which are to be re- 3 Connect all additional units of this device
placed with this device and disconnect to the network.
from the institution network.
Configure the following settings for all additional units
of this device.
2 Update any CS-3/5 not to be replaced to a
version of V3.02R02 or higher.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to update the version, refer to the Installation/
Service Manual of CS-3 and CS-5.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 6.5 REGIUS setting

Configure the following settings for all additional units

of this device. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "6.5 REGIUS setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

678
 16.9 Settings for REGIUS common environment in CS-3/5 and this device mixed environment

4 Delete the information associated with the 5 When the deletion of the information for
replaced CS-3/5 from the Hosts file in RE- all of the replaced CS-3/5 has finished,
GIUS using one of this device. press [×] to close the screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 6 To delete the CS-3/5 information remain-

• For the method of deletion, refer to "6.5.4 REGIUS ing in the [relations] table, move the cur-
setting". sor over the relevant line and press the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [Delete] key.
• The next procedure to perform differs depending
on whether this device or CS-3/5 is used for the
main JM or backup JM.
7 Press [Yes] on the deletion screen.
→When this device is used
→Main JM or backup JM is this device 8 When the deletion of the information for
→When CS-3/5 is used all of the replaced CS-3/5 has finished,
→Main JM or backup JM is CS-3/5 press [×] to close the screen.

O
OMain JM or backup JM is CS-7 9 Press [×] on the [PostgreSQL access]
screen to close the JM database.
1 Add the information of the existing CS-3/5
to the [c_status] table and the [relations] 10 Press and hold down all the REGIUS op-
table of the JM database of this device. eration switches for 5 seconds to turn off
REGIUS.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the method of addition, refer to "JM edit" of "CS-7 11 Restart all of CS-3/5 and this device.
Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/User Tool
Screen" and "Set Up of JM Data Base" of the Installa-
12 Press all of the REGIUS operation switch-
tion/Service Manual of CS-3. es to turn on REGIUS.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Configure the following settings for all additional units
O JM or backup JM is CS-3/5

Chapter 16
OMain
of this device.
Delete all of the replaced CS-3/5 information from the [c_
status] table and the [relations] table of the JM database
of CS-3/5 with following procedure.

1 Display the intermediate screen from CS-3/5.

2 Start the service tool, select the [Adjust- 4.17 Peripheral devices setting
ment] tab and press [Configure] of [Data-
base]. 4.18 Activation

4.19 Confirmation of the version of this

3 To delete the CS-3/5 information remain- device
ing in the [c_status] table, move the cur-
sor over the relevant line and press the 4.21 Optional installation and data migration
[Delete] key.
4.22 Backup of the setting data of this device
4 Press [Yes] on the deletion screen.
4.23 Final operation check and delivery

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.17 Peripheral devices setting" first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

679
16.9 Settings for REGIUS common environment in CS-3/5 and this device mixed environment

Perform the following settings in CS-7#1 and CS-7#2.

16.9.2 Installation example

The following describes an installation procedure for

an example in which CS-3#1 and CS-3#3 are replaced
by this device in a system which has already been in-
stalled. 4.3 Check of bundled items
CS-7#1 CS-7#2 CS-7#3 4.4 Check of startup
Main JM Backup JM
4.5 Setting of touch panel

4.6 Registration of license

4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device

6.3 System setting of this device

6.4 Activation of REGIUS icon

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" and "6.3 Sys-
tem setting of this device" first.
REGIUS 190 REGIUS 210
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
The names of existing equipment and newly added
units of this device, the host names on the JM and IP
addresses are as follows.

Equipment Host name

IP address Remarks
name on JM
Main JM,
CS-3#1 CS3-0001 192.168.20.90 replacement 3 Connect CS-7#1 and CS-7#2 to the institu-
target tion network.
CS-3#2 CS3-0002 192.168.20.91 Backup JM

CS-3#3 CS3-0003 192.168.20.92

Replacement
target
4 Perform the following settings in CS-7#1.
(1) Start the service tool.
There is power (2) Press the JM icon on the service tool screen.
linkage with all CSs, (3) Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.
REGIUS
r190-0001 192.168.20.170 and error notifica-
190
tion can be received
–– The CR unit setting screen is displayed.
from all of them (4) Select [BarCodeRegistration] from [Cassette
There is power
Barcode Registration Method] in [Basic Set-
linkage with all CSs, tings]
REGIUS
r210-0001 192.168.20.171 and error notifica- (5) Enter "CS7-0001" in the [Console Host Name].
210
tion can be received (6) Set the following items in [JM Settings].
from all of them –– Set [Built-In] to ON in the Main JM settings.
New addition, –– Set [Device Registration] to ON in the Backup
CS-7#1 CS7-0001 192.168.20.90 replace with
JM settings.
CS-3#1
–– Enter "192.168.20.91" in [IP Address] of the
New addition,
Backup JM settings.
CS-7#2 CS7-0002 192.168.20.92 replace with
CS-3#3 –– Set [Use CS-3 JM] to ON in the Backup JM
settings.

1 Shut down CS-3#1 and CS-3#3 and dis-

connect from institution network.

2 Update CS-3#2 to V3.02R02.

680
 16.9 Settings for REGIUS common environment in CS-3/5 and this device mixed environment

(7) Set the following items in the [CR Cassette (7) Set the following items in the [CR Cassette
Reader Settings] of the first device. Reader Settings] of the first device.
–– Enter "192.168.20.170" in [Reader IP Address] –– Enter "192.168.20.170" in [Reader IP Address]
of the first device. of the first device.
–– Press [Download] of the first device. –– Press [Download] of the first device.
–– Select [REGIUS170/190] in [Reader Type] of –– Select [REGIUS170/190] in [Reader Type] of
the first device. the first device.
–– Enter "r190-0001" in [Reader Host Name] of –– Enter "r190-0001" in [Reader Host Name] of
the first device. the first device.
–– Set [Power Control] of the first device to ON. –– Set [Power Control] of the first device to ON.
–– Set [Error Notice] of the first device to ON. –– Set [Error Notice] of the first device to ON.
–– Press [Hosts] in the reader of the first device, –– Press [Upload] of the first device.
select the line where the [Host Name] is CS3- (8) Set the following items in the [CR Cassette
0001 and press [Delete]. Reader Settings] of the second device.
–– In the same way, select the line where the –– Enter "192.168.20.171" in [Reader IP Address]
[Host Name] is CS3-0002 and press [Delete]. of the second device.
–– Press [×] on the Hosts screen to close. –– Press [Download] of the second device.
–– Press [Upload] of the first device. –– Select [REGIUS210] in [Reader Type] of the
(8) Set the following items in the [CR Cassette second device.
Reader Settings] of the second device. –– Enter "r210-0001" in [Reader Host Name] of
–– Enter "192.168.20.171" in [Reader IP Address] the second device.
of the second device. –– Select [Power Control] of the second device.
–– Press [Download] of the second device. –– Select [Error Notice] of the second device.
–– Select [REGIUS210] in [Reader Type] of the –– Press [Upload] of the second device.
second device.
–– Enter "r210-0001" in [Reader Host Name] of
the second device.
6 Press [OK] on the CR unit setting screen
to close the screen.
–– Set [Power Control] of the second device to
ON.
–– Set [Error Notice] of the second device to ON. 7 Start up the service tool of CS-7#1.
–– Press [Upload] of the second device.

Chapter 16
(9) Press [OK] on the CR unit setting screen to 8 Press the JM icon on the service tool
close the screen. screen.

5 Perform the following settings in CS-7#2. 9 Press [DB] on the sub-menu screen.
(1) Start the service tool. • [PostgreSQL Access] screen is displayed.
(2) Press the JM icon on the service tool screen.
(3) Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.
10 Press [kddm_jm] in the tree.
–– The CR unit setting screen is displayed.
(4) Select [Bar Code Registration] from [Cassette
Barbados Registration Method] in [Basic Set-
tings]
(5) Enter "CS7-0002" in the [Console Host Name].
(6) Set the following items in [JM Settings].
–– Set [Built-In] to OFF in the Main JM settings.
–– Set [Device Registration] to ON in the Backup
JM settings.
–– Enter "192.168.20.91" in [IP Address] of the
Backup JM settings.
–– Set [Use CS-3 JM] to ON in the Backup JM
settings.

681
16.9 Settings for REGIUS common environment in CS-3/5 and this device mixed environment

11 Double click the [c_status] table. 15 On the [public.relations] screen, add the
CS-3#2, REGIUS 190 and REGIUS 210 in-
formation as described below and then
press [Reload].

• The [public.c_status] screen is displayed.

12 On the [public.c_status] screen, add the

CS-3#2 information as follows and press
[Reload].
16 Check the entered content and then press
[×].
• The [public.relations] screen closes and the dis-
play returns to the [PostgreSQL Access] screen.

17 Press [×] on the [PostgreSQL Access]

screen.

18 Display the intermediate screen from CS-

3/5.
13 Check the entered content and then press
[×].
• The [public.c_status] screen closes and the dis-
19 Start the service tool, select the [Adjust-
ment] tab and press [Configure] of [Data-
play returns to the [PostgreSQL Access] screen.
base].

14 Double click the [relations] table.

• The [public.relations] screen is displayed. • The [PostgreSQL access] screen is displayed.

682
 16.9 Settings for REGIUS common environment in CS-3/5 and this device mixed environment

20 Double click the [c_status] table. 24 Double click [relations].

• The [c_status] screen is displayed. • The [relations] screen is displayed.

21 To delete the CS-3#1 and CS-3#3 infor- 25 To delete the CS-3#1 and CS-3#3 infor-
mation remaining in the [c_status] table, mation remaining in the [relations] table,
move the cursor over the relevant lines move the cursor over the relevant lines
and press the [Delete] key. and press the [Delete] key.

Chapter 16
22 Press [Yes] on the deletion screen. 26 Press [Yes] on the deletion screen.

23 When the deletion of the information for 27 When the deletion of the information for
all of the replaced CS-3/5 has finished, all of the replaced CS-3/5 has finished,
press [×] to close the screen. press [×] to close the screen.
• The [PostgreSQL access] screen is displayed.
28 Press [×] on the [PostgreSQL access]
screen to close the JM database.

683
16.9 Settings for REGIUS common environment in CS-3/5 and this device mixed environment

29 Press and hold down the REGIUS 190 and

REGIUS 210 operation switches for 5 sec-
onds to turn off the REGIUS power.

30 Restart CS-3#2, CS-7#1 and CS-7#2.

31 Press the REGIUS 190 and REGIUS 210

operation switches to turn on the REGIUS
power.

4.17 Peripheral devices setting

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.17 Peripheral devices setting".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

684
 16.10 Method to display Windows taskbar on the service
tool screen

The following describes how to display the Windows 4 Press [Taskbar Hide] to set to OFF.
taskbar on the service tool screen. • It is set to ON (hide taskbar) by default.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the Windows taskbar is turned on, the Windows
key is also enabled.
• If this device is forced to shutdown via the Task
Manager due to freezing or other issues, the Windows
taskbar will remain hidden. To redisplay the taskbar,
start Explorer from the Recycle Bin at the top left of the
desktop screen, and run [C:\Konicaminolta\Console\Bin\
BackProcess\SysLoader\Taskbar\Show_taskbar.exe].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Display the intermediate screen. 5 Press [OK].

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How
to display the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [Setting] on the intermediate

screen.

Chapter 16
6 Restart this device.

3 Press [OS Control Setting].

• The [OS Control Setting] screen is displayed.

685
 16.11 Access control of external storage devices

The procedure for access control of an external stor- 4 Confirm that the [Removable Disks: Deny
age devices is as follows. write access] is set to [Enabled].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When you back up data in an external device by using
the user tool of this device, do not perform these set-
tings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Press [Start] on the start menu of Win-

dows, then press [Search for programs
and files] to search gpedit.msc.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
2 Select [Computer Configuration], [Admin-
• If you connect an external device and try to copy the
istrative Templates], [System], [Removable
data stored in this device, the following dialog " Access
Storage Access], then [Removable Disks:
to the subject folder is refused." will be displayed.
Deny write access] on the [Local Group ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Policy Editor] screen.

3 Select [Enabled] in the [Removable Disks:

Deny write access] dialog, then press
[OK].

686
 16.12 Editing the output-to-media tag

The following describes the procedure to edit the tag 4 Open the following file from Windows
output to media and the tag of the image that is output Notepad.
to media in the real-time backup. • MediaSopClassConvUserDefaul.xml

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The following editing tasks are available. • Back up the file before editing the tag.
–– Adding an empty tag or fixed value tag ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
–– Moving or copying an existing tag
–– Deleting an existing tag
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Add the line of the data tag to the class
tag, edit contents of the tag, and save the
file.
16.12.1 Tag editing method
<?xml version=”1.0” encoding=”utf-8”?>
<table>
<class uid=”default”>
<data tag=”[Tag]” kind=”[Processing Type]”>[Tag Value]</data>
1 Display the intermediate screen. </class>
</table>

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Add a line and edit tag contents

• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How
to display the intermediate screen". IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • When characters other than the ASCII characters are
specified, select "UTF-8" for the character code before

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- saving the file.

diate screen. • When saving the file in "UTF-8" using Windows Note-
pad, select "Save As" from "File" and select "File type
(T)" = "All files (*.*) and "Character code (E)" = "UTF-

Chapter 16
8" to overwrite and save the file with the same file
name.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Set the following contents in the data tag. For details,
refer to "16.12.2 Tag editing format".

Item Setting contents

Tag Set the tag number to be
operated.
Operation Type Set the type of operation.
new: Adds a tag.
move: Moves a tag.
3 Open "C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\ copy: Copies a tag.
System\DICOMGW\" with Explorer. delete: Deletes a tag.
Tag Value Set the value of the tag.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Restart this device.

687
16.12 Editing the output-to-media tag

Deleting a tag
16.12.2 Tag editing format When deleting a tag, set the number of the tag to be
deleted in Step 5 of "16.12.1 Tag editing method".
• When deleting the patient comment (0010,4000), set
Adding a tag it according to the following procedure.

When adding a tag, set the number and value of the <data tag=”0010,4000” kind=”delete”></data>
tag to be added in Step 5 of "16.12.1 Tag editing meth-
od". Operation Type
• When adding the value "Patient Comments" to the Tag number to delete
patient comment (0010,4000), set it according to the
following procedure.

<data tag=”0010,4000” kind=”new”>Patient Comments</data>

Tag Value
Operation Type
Tag number to create

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When an existing tag number is specified, the value is
overwritten.
• When adding an empty tag, do not specify the tag
value.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Moving or copying a tag

When moving or copying a tag, set the tag number of
Move/Source tag and Move/Destination tag in Step 5
of "16.12.1 Tag editing method".
• When moving the patient ID (0010,0020) to another
patient ID (0010,1000), set it according to the follow-
ing procedure.

<data tag=”0010,1000” kind=”move”>0010,0020</data>

Source tag number

Operation Type
Destination tag number

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When a tag is moved, the source tag is deleted.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• When copying a patient ID (0010,0020) to another
patient ID (0010,1000), set it according to the follow-
ing procedure.

<data tag=”0010,1000” kind=”copy”>0010,0020</data>

Tag number to copy

Operation Type
Tag number to copy to

688
 16.13 Set Display Method for Media Output Status

The method for displaying the Media Output Status

icon on the List Screen [Order List] tab is as follows.

1 Start Service Tool.

2 Select the [User Tool] tab.

• The screen setting tool screen is displayed.

4 Select [Order List] in [Display Item Setting

of each tab of List Screen].

5 Select [Media Output Status] from [Hid-

den Items] in [List Items], and then press

Chapter 16
[ ].

• The user tool screen is displayed.

3 Press [Setting] and then [Screen Setting].

689
16.13 Set Display Method for Media Output Status

7 Press [OK] on the screen setting tool

screen.

• [Media Output Status] moves to [Visible Items].

6 Select [Media Output Status] in [Visible

Items], and press [ ] to move it to the
• The settings are stored, and the screen is
first position.
closed.

8 Restart the device.

• The icon showing that output to media is fin-
ished appears in the List Screen [Order List] tab.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The display position of the items in the list screen can
be changed with [ ] and [ ].
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

690
 16.14 Method for not displaying the REGIUS SIGMA/
SIGMA2 Progress Information dialog

The following describes the method for not displaying

the Progress Information dialog displayed while the
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 is processing.

1 Display the Windows taskbar.

2 Right click the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

icon on the taskbar and select [Display
Progress].

3 Hide the Windows taskbar.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The menu item displayed after right clicking the REGI-
US SIGMA/SIGMA2 icon on the taskbar is as follows.

Menu Item Contents

Switches the Display Progress

Chapter 16
ON/OFF. When a checkmark is
displayed to the left of the item
name, display is ON.
Display Progress
When this device is performing a
process and display is set to ON,
the progress information dialog is
displayed.

(Example) Progress information dialog

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to display the Windows taskbar, refer to
"16.10 Method to display Windows taskbar on the
service tool screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

691
692
 Chapter
17
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes corrective actions in the event a problem occurs.

693
 17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

This section describes the AeroDR Detector replacement procedure.

Here the existing AeroDR Detector shall be referred to as "Panel A", and the AeroDR Detector for replacement shall
be referred to as "Panel B".

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This procedure applies to versions of this device beginning with V1.02R03. In the case of version V1.02R02 and ear-
lier, you must upgrade the version before performing the procedure.
• If AeroDR Detector auto update has been set in advance for this device, you must cancel the auto update setting be-
fore performing the procedure. If the setting is not canceled, the update process will start when the AeroDR Detector
data is loaded. You should be aware that, in the environment where the AeroDR Detector is inserted on an exposure
stage or AeroDR Battery Charger, it may be difficult to find the AeroDR Detector LED, which prevents you from dis-
cerning the processing status of the AeroDR Detector.
• If using the factory-set IP address (192.168.20.201/192.168.20.211), turn the set AeroDR Detector's power off before
performing the procedure.
• The factory-set IP address is the same for all AeroDR Detectors. If there is more than one AeroDR Detector to be re-
placed, turn on each AeroDR Detector one at a time and set to avoid duplicating IP addresses.
• Deletion operation for AeroDR Detectors (correction data) is valid only for AeroDR Detector registered for exposure
room of this device being operated or those for which exposure room has not been registered.
• If the IP address of the AeroDR Detector is unknown, refer to "Recovery to the default status" in the "AeroDR SYS-
TEM Installation/Service Manual" to initialize the IP address before performing operation.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

694
 17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

17.1.1 AeroDR Detector replacement flow

The AeroDR Detector replacement procedure differs according to the installation environment of this device (the
number of units of this device, roaming environment, operation environment). The replacement flow according to pat-
tern is as follows.

O
OAeroDR Detector replacement in environment with RM hybrid machine only
Replacement procedure for case where this device is a single RM hybrid machine and roaming environment has not
been set.
For the detailed procedure, refer to "17.1.2 AeroDR Detector replacement in environment with RM hybrid machine
only".

1 Startup of the service tool

2 Initialization of network settings of this device

Cancellation of registration of Panel A registered

3 to exposure room of this device

4 Deletion of correction data for Panel A

5 Restart of this device

6 Panel B connection

7 Startup of the service tool

If there are more than one
Panel B, repeat steps 6 to 10.
(*In the case of 5 or more pan-
8 Panel B correction data registration els, the RM hybrid machine
must be rebooted.)

9 Panel B communications check and setting

Chapter 17
10 Saving settings

11 Reset of network settings of this device

12 Restart of this device, AeroDR Interface Unit and Panel B

Confirmation of the AeroDR Detector B version

13 and update of the firmware

695
17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

O
OAeroDR Detector replacement in roaming environment for single RM hybrid machine with RM
client machine turned off
The replacement procedure for when multiple units of this device are used in a roaming environment and an RM cli-
ent machine is temporarily turned off during the replacement procedure is as follows.
For the detailed procedure, refer to "17.1.3 AeroDR Detector replacement in roaming environment for single RM hy-
brid machine with RM client machine turned off".

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Step 1 of the procedure is not required if the AeroDR Detector to be replaced has not been registered for the expo-
sure room of the RM client machine.
• Step 5 of the procedure is not required if the AeroDR Detector to be replaced is not registered to the exposure room
of the RM hybrid machine.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

<RM hybrid machine> <RM client machine>

Cancellation of registration of AeroDR Detector A

1 registered to exposure room of RM client machine

2 Quitting all RM client machines

3 Startup of RM hybrid machine service tool

4 Initialization of RM hybrid machine network settings

Cancellation of registration of AeroDR Detector A

5 registered to exposure room of RM hybrid machine

6 Deletion of correction data for AeroDR Detector A

7 Restart of the RM hybrid machine

Connection of AeroDR Detector B to

8 RM hybrid machine

Quit in progress
9 Startup of RM hybrid machine service tool
If there are more than one AeroDR
Detector B, repeat steps 8 to 12.
10 AeroDR Detector B correction data registration
(* In the case of 5 or more AeroDR
Detectors, the RM hybrid machine must
be rebooted.)
11 AeroDR Detector B communications check and setting

12 Saving settings

13 Resetting of RM hybrid machine network settings

14 Restart of the RM hybrid machine

15 Startup of all RM client machines

Startup of all RM client machines

16 service tool

Deletion of correction data for AeroDR Detector A on

17 all the RM client machines
Displays screen other than service tool

Synchronization with all RM client machines

18 (on a single machine basis)

19 Restart of all RM client machines

Checking the synchronization state of

20 all RM client machines

Confirmation of the AeroDR Detector B version and

21 update of the firmware
To normal workflow

696
 17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

O
OAeroDR Detector replacement for RM hybrid machine with RM client machine running
The replacement procedure for when multiple units of this device are used in a roaming environment and an RM cli-
ent machine is running during the replacement procedure is as follows.
For the detailed procedure, refer to "17.1.4 AeroDR Detector replacement in roaming environment for RM hybrid ma-
chine with RM client machine running".

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Because the RM client machine must be temporarily turned off during the replacement procedure, the impact on in-
stitution operation must be taken into account.
• Do not conduct AeroDR Detector analysis and calibration for all exposure rooms during the replacement procedure.
• Roaming of the AeroDR Detector is not available when the replacement procedure is being carried out.
• Step 1 of the procedure is not required if there is no AeroDR Detector to be replaced for the exposure room of the
RM client machine.
• Step 5 of the procedure is not required if the AeroDR Detector to be replaced is not registered to the exposure room
of the RM hybrid machine.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

<RM hybrid machine> <RM client machine>

Cancellation of registration of AeroDR Detector A

1 registered to exposure room of RM client machine
2 Quitting the RM hybrid machine

3 Startup of RM hybrid machine service tool

4 Initialization of RM hybrid machine network settings

Cancellation of registration of AeroDR Detector A

5 registered to exposure room of RM hybrid machine

6 Deletion of correction data for AeroDR Detector A

7 Restart of the RM hybrid machine

8 Connection of Panel B to RM hybrid machine

Normal workflow in progress

9 Startup of RM hybrid machine service tool

If there are more than one AeroDR

Chapter 17
10 AeroDR Detector B correction data registration Detector B, repeat steps 8 to 12.
(* In the case of 5 or more AeroDR De-
tectors, this device must be rebooted.)

11 AeroDR Detector B communications check and setting

12 Saving settings

13 Resetting of RM hybrid machine network settings

14 Restart of the RM hybrid machine

15 Startup of all RM client machines service tool

Deletion of correction data for AeroDR Detector A on

16 all the RM client machines

Displays screen other than service tool Synchronization with all RM client machines
17 (on a single machine basis)

18 Restart of all RM client machines

Checking the synchronization state of

19 all RM client machines

Confirmation of the AeroDR Detector B version and

20 update of the firmware To normal workflow

697
17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

O
OMeasures in case where deleted AeroDR Detector correction data is restored
In some cases, deleted correction data may be restored by mistake if replacing an AeroDR Detector in a roaming en-
vironment. Although it does not affect operation, you can delete correction data by the following procedure.
For the detailed procedure, refer to "17.1.5 Measures in case where deleted AeroDR Detector correction data is restored".


<RM hybrid machine> <RM client machine>

1 Startup of the RM hybrid machine service tool

Deletion of all unnecessary

2 AeroDR Detector correction data Startup of all RM client machines
3 service tool

Deletion of all unnecessary

4 AeroDR Detectors correction data
Service tool launch in progress

Quitting all RM client machines

5 service tool

6 Quitting the RM hybrid machine service tool To normal workflow

698
 17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

Deletion of correction data for AeroDR

17.1.2 AeroDR Detector replace- Detector A
ment in environment with
RM hybrid machine only
1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.
The AeroDR Detector replacement procedure for the
case this device is a single RM hybrid machine and Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
roaming environment has not been set is as follows.
• For the AeroDR unit setting screen display method,
refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
Startup of the service tool screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Start up the service tool of this device.
2 Select the serial number of AeroDR Detec-
tor A on the AeroDR Detector list of [Cor-
Initialization of network settings of this device
rection Data Setting] and press [Delete].
• If there are more than one AeroDR Detector A, de-
1 Change the network settings of this de- lete all correction data.
vice to the default settings on the [Network
Connections] screen.

• Displays the deletion confirmation screen.

• The network default settings are as follows. 3 Press [OK].

–– IP address: 192.168.20.90

Chapter 17
–– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
–– Default gateway: None

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the setting method, refer to "4.11 Setting of the
IP address of this device".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Cancellation of registration of the AeroDR

Detector A registered for use in the expo-
sure room this device is operated in

1 Press the AeroDR Detector A icon of the

[Network status] tab on the system moni-
tor screen, and press [Unregister]. • The AeroDR Detector A to be deleted will be
grayed out.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the AeroDR Detector to be replaced is not 4 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR unit setting
registered to the exposure room of this device, this screen.
operation is not necessary.
•• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

699
17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

Restart of this device 3 Press [Upload] of AeroDR Detector B on the Aero-

DR Detector list of [AeroDR Detector Setting].
1 Quit the user tool, and restart this device.

AeroDR Detector B connection

1 Connect AeroDR Detector B to either the

AeroDR I/F Cable, AeroDR Battery Char-
ger or AeroDR UF Cable.
• The set institution information is uploaded to Aero-
DR Detector B.
Startup of the service tool

Saving settings
1 Start up the service tool of this device.

AeroDR Detector B correction data regis- 1 Press [OK] of the AeroDR unit setting
tration screen to save the settings.

1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• If there are more than one AeroDR Detector B, repeat
the process from "AeroDR Detector B connection" to
2 Register AeroDR Detector B correction
"Saving settings" for each AeroDR Detector.
data.
• Be sure to register one AeroDR Detector B at a time.
• Up to 4 AeroDR Detector Bs can be registered at a time.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • If there are more than 4 AeroDR Detector Bs, restart
• For the correction data registration method, refer to this device after registering the fourth. Then use the
"4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registra- exposure room registration release function to release a
tion". given AeroDR Detector B, and repeat the procedure from
•• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • "AeroDR Detector B connection" to "Saving settings".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
AeroDR Detector B communications check
and setting Reset of network settings of this device

1 Press [Download] of AeroDR Detector B on 1 Reset the network settings of this device
the AeroDR Detector list of [AeroDR Detec- to the settings used by the institution.
tor Setting].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the setting method, refer to "4.11 Setting of the
IP address of this device".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Restart of this device, AeroDR Interface

Unit and AeroDR Detector B
• AeroDR Detector B data is downloaded to this de-
vice.
1 Quit the service tool, and restart this device,
AeroDR Interface Unit and AeroDR Detector B.
2 Change the settings of [AeroDR Detector
Setting] to Institution information. Confirmation of the AeroDR Detector B ver-
sion and update of the firmware

1 Confirm the version of AeroDR Detector B

with the AeroDR Detector log and update
the firmware if necessary.

700
 17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

17.1.3 AeroDR Detector replacement

in roaming environment for
single RM hybrid machine with
RM client machine turned off
Replacement procedure for the case multiple units of this
device used in a roaming environment and RM client ma-
chine turned off during the replacement procedure is as
follows.

Cancellation of registration of AeroDR

Detector A registered to exposure room of
RM client machine
• The network default settings are as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • –– IP address: 192.168.20.90
• This procedure is not required if the AeroDR Detec- –– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
tor to be replaced has not been registered for the –– Default gateway: None
exposure room of the RM client machine.
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Press the AeroDR Detector A icon of the • For the setting method, refer to "4.11 Setting of the
[Network Status] tab of the system moni- IP address of this device".
tor and press [Unregister]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Quitting all RM client machines Cancellation of registration of AeroDR De-

tector A registered for use in the exposure
room the RM hybrid machine is operated in
1 Quit all RM client machines.
1 Press the AeroDR Detector A icon of the
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [Network status] tab on the system moni-
• Absolutely DO NOT subsequently start any RM tor screen, and press [Unregister].
client machine during "Startup of RM hybrid
machine service tool" through "Resetting of RM
hybrid machine network settings".
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • If the AeroDR Detector to be replaced is not

Chapter 17
registered to the exposure room of the RM hybrid
Startup of RM hybrid machine service tool machine, this operation is not necessary.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Start up the RM hybrid machine service

Deletion of correction data for AeroDR De-
tool.
tector A

Initialization of RM hybrid machine network

settings
1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Change the network settings of RM hybrid • For the AeroDR unit setting screen display method,
machine to the default settings on the refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
[Network Connections] screen. screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

701
17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

2 Select the serial number of AeroDR Detec- Connection of AeroDR Detector B to RM

tor A on the AeroDR Detector list of [Cor- hybrid machine
rection Data Setting] and press [Delete].
1 Connect AeroDR Detector B to either the
AeroDR I/F Cable, AeroDR Battery Char-
ger or AeroDR UF Cable.

Startup of the RM hybrid machine service tool

1 Start up the RM hybrid machine service

tool.

AeroDR Detector B correction data regis-

tration

1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.

• Displays the deletion confirmation screen.

2 Register AeroDR Detector B correction
data.
3 Press [OK].

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the correction data registration method, refer to
"4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registra-
tion".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

AeroDR Detector B communications check

and setting

1 Press [Download] of AeroDR Detector B

on the AeroDR Detector list of [AeroDR
Detector Setting].

• The AeroDR Detector A to be deleted will be

grayed out.

4 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR unit setting

screen.

• AeroDR Detector B data is downloaded to RM hy-

Restart of the RM hybrid machine
brid machine.

1 Quit the RM hybrid machine service tool. 2 Change the settings of [AeroDR Detector
Setting] to Institution information.
2 Restart the RM hybrid machine.

702
 17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

3 Press [Upload] of AeroDR Detector B on Restart of the RM hybrid machine

the AeroDR Detector list of [AeroDR De-
tector Setting]. 1 Quit the RM hybrid machine service tool.

2 Restart the RM hybrid machine.

Startup of all RM client machines

1 Start up all RM client machines.

• The set institution information is uploaded to Aero-
DR Detector B. Startup of all RM client machines service tool

Saving settings 1 Start up all RM client machine service

tools.
1 Press [OK] of the AeroDR unit setting
screen to save the settings. Deletion of correction data for AeroDR De-
tector A on all the RM client machines
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If there is more than one AeroDR Detector B, re-
1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.
peat the process from "Connection of AeroDR De-
tector B to RM hybrid machine" to "Saving settings" Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
for each AeroDR Detector. • For the AeroDR unit setting screen display method,
• Be sure to register one AeroDR Detector B at a refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
time. screen".
• Up to 4 AeroDR Detector Bs can be registered at a ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
time. If there is more than 4 AeroDR Detector Bs,
after registering the fourth, restart this device, and
after releasing any AeroDR Detector B with the 2 Select the serial number of AeroDR Detec-
exposure room registration release function, repeat tor A on the AeroDR Detector list of [Cor-
"Connection of AeroDR Detector B to RM hybrid rection Data Setting] and press [Delete].
machine" to "Saving settings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 17
Resetting of RM hybrid machine network
settings

1 Reset the network settings of the RM hy-

brid machine to settings used by the insti-
tution.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the setting method, refer to "4.11 Setting of the
IP address of this device".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• Displays the deletion confirmation screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Subsequently allow the service tool of the RM
hybrid machine to remain launched for the RM cli-
ent machine from "Boot all RM client machines" to
"Quit all RM client machines".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

703
17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

3 Press [OK]. Checking the synchronization state of all

RM client machines

1 Check the synchronization state on the

RM information screen of the system
monitor in the RM client machine.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the synchronization procedure on the device
information synchronization screen, refer to "4.20.9
Checking the synchronization state on the RM cli-
ent machine".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Confirmation of the AeroDR Detector B ver-

• The AeroDR Detector A to be deleted will be sion and update of the firmware
grayed out.

1 Confirm the version of AeroDR Detector

4 Press [OK] to exit from the AeroDR unit
B with the AeroDR Detector log of the RM
setting screen.
hybrid machine and update the firmware if
necessary.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the setting data transmission confirmation mes- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
sage is displayed, press [Cancel].
• AeroDR Detector B version can also be confirmed
•• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
on the AeroDR Detector firmware update screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Synchronization with all RM client machines
(on a single machine basis)

1 Synchronization is carried out on the de-

vice information synchronization screen
of the RM client machine.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the synchronization procedure on the device
information synchronization screen, refer to "4.20.6
Synchronization of the RM client machine".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If multiple RM client machines are used for process-
ing at the same time, you may not be able to suc-
cessfully obtain information from a hybrid machine.
•• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Restart of all RM client machines

1 Restart the RM client machine.

704
 17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

Initialization of RM hybrid machine network

17.1.4 AeroDR Detector replace- settings
ment in roaming environment
for RM hybrid machine with 1 Change network settings of RM hybrid
RM client machine running machine to the default settings on the
[Network Connections] screen.
The replacement procedure for when multiple units of
this device are used in a roaming environment and an
RM client machine is temporarily turned off during the
replacement procedure is as follows.

Cancellation of registration of AeroDR De-

tector A registered to exposure room of RM
client machine

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• This procedure is not required if the AeroDR Detec-
tor to be replaced has not been registered for the
exposure room of the RM client machine.
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Press the AeroDR Detector A icon of the • The network default settings are as follows.
[Network Status] tab of the system moni- –– IP address: 192.168.20.90
tor and press [Unregister]. –– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
–– Default gateway: None
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Subsequently, an RM client machine can perform Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
workflows other than the following, even while an • For the setting method, refer to "4.11 Setting of the
RM hybrid machine performing the procedure from IP address of this device".
"Disconnecting from other exposure room network ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
of AeroDR SYSTEM in exposure room of RM hybrid
machine" to "Restart of the RM hybrid machine, Cancellation of registration of AeroDR De-
AeroDR Interface Unit and AeroDR Detector B". tector A registered for use in the exposure
–– AeroDR Detector analysis and calibration room the RM hybrid machine is operated in
–– AeroDR Detector roaming and movement between

Chapter 17
devices
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Press the AeroDR Detector A icon of the
[Network status] tab on the system moni-
tor screen, and press [Unregister].
Quitting the RM hybrid machine

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 End the RM hybrid machine.
• If the AeroDR Detector to be replaced is not
registered to the exposure room of the RM hybrid
Startup of the RM hybrid machine service
machine, this operation is not necessary.
tool ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Start up the RM hybrid machine. Deletion of correction data for AeroDR De-
tector A
2 Start up the RM hybrid machine service
tool. 1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the AeroDR unit setting screen display method,
refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

705
17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

2 Select the serial number of AeroDR De- Connection of AeroDR Detector B to RM

tector A from the AeroDR Detector list of hybrid machine
[Correction Data Setting] and press [De-
lete]. 1 Connect AeroDR Detector B to either the
AeroDR I/F Cable, AeroDR Battery Char-
ger or AeroDR UF Cable.

Startup of the RM hybrid machine service tool

1 Start up the RM hybrid machine service tool.

AeroDR Detector B correction data registration

1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.

2 Register AeroDR Detector B correction data.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Displays the deletion confirmation screen. • For the correction data registration method, refer to
"4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration".
3 Press [OK]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

AeroDR Detector B communications check

and setting

1 Press [Download] of AeroDR Detector B

of the AeroDR Detector list of [AeroDR
Detector Setting].

• The AeroDR Detector A to be deleted will be • AeroDR Detector B data is downloaded to RM hy-
grayed out. brid machine.

4 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR unit setting 2 Change the settings of [AeroDR Detector
screen. Setting] to Institution information.

Restart of the RM hybrid machine 3 Press [Upload] of AeroDR Detector B of

the AeroDR Detector list of [AeroDR De-
1 End the RM hybrid machine service tool. tector Setting].

2 Restart the RM hybrid machine.

• The set institution information is uploaded to Aero-

DR Detector B.

706
 17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

Saving settings Deletion of correction data for AeroDR De-

tector A on all the RM client machines
1 Press [OK] of the AeroDR unit setting
screen to save the settings. 1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• If there is more than one AeroDR Detector B, repeat • For the AeroDR unit setting screen display method,
the process from "Connection of AeroDR Detector refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
B to RM hybrid machine" to "Saving settings" for screen".
each AeroDR Detector. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Be sure to register one AeroDR Detector B at a
time.
• Up to 4 AeroDR Detector Bs can be registered at a
2 Select the serial number of AeroDR Detec-
tor A on the AeroDR Detector list of [Cor-
time. If there is more than 4 AeroDR Detector Bs,
rection Data Setting] and press [Delete].
after registering the fourth, restart this device, and
after releasing any AeroDR Detector B with the
exposure room registration release function, repeat
"Connection of AeroDR Detector B to RM hybrid
machine" to "Saving settings".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Resetting of RM hybrid machine network

settings

1 Reset the network settings of the RM

hybrid machine to settings used by the
institution.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Displays the deletion confirmation screen.
• For the setting method, refer to "4.11 Setting of the
IP address of this device".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
3 Press [OK].
Restart of the RM hybrid machine

Chapter 17
1 Quit the RM hybrid machine service tool.

2 Restart the RM hybrid machine.

Startup of all RM client machines service tool

1 Start up all RM client machine service

tools.

• The AeroDR Detector A to be deleted will be

grayed out.

4 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR unit setting

screen.

707
17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Confirmation of the AeroDR Detector B ver-

sion and update of the firmware
• If the setting data transmission confirmation mes-
sage is displayed, press [Cancel].
•• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • 1 Confirm the version of AeroDR Detector
B with the AeroDR Detector log of the RM
Synchronization with all RM client machines hybrid machine and update the firmware if
(on a single machine basis) necessary.

1 Synchronization is carried out on the de-

vice information synchronization screen
of the RM client machine.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the synchronization procedure on the device
information synchronization screen, refer to "4.20.6
Synchronization of the RM client machine".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If multiple RM client machines are used for process-
ing at the same time, you may not be able to suc-
cessfully obtain information from a hybrid machine.
•• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Restart of all RM client machines

1 Restart the RM client machine.

Checking the synchronization state of all

RM client machines

1 Check the synchronization state on the

RM information screen of the system
monitor in the RM client machine.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the synchronization procedure on the device
information synchronization screen, refer to "4.20.9
Checking the synchronization state on the RM cli-
ent machine".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Connecting to other exposure room net-

work of AeroDR SYSTEM in exposure room
of RM hybrid machine

1 Connect network of AeroDR SYSTEM in

exposure room of RM hybrid machine to
networks of other exposure rooms.

708
 17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

17.1.5 Measures in case where

deleted AeroDR Detector
correction data is restored
If deleted correction data is restored by mistake when
replacing an AeroDR Detector in a roaming environ-
ment, it can be deleted by the following procedure. • Displays the deletion confirmation screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Press [OK].

• While the RM hybrid machine is performing the
procedure from "RM hybrid machine service tool
launch" to "deletion of all unnecessary AeroDR
Detector correction data", the RM client machine can
perform other workflows than the following operations.
–– AeroDR Detector analysis and calibration
–– AeroDR Detector roaming and movement between
devices
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

Startup of the RM hybrid machine service tool

1 Start up the RM hybrid machine service

tool.
• The AeroDR Detector to be deleted will be grayed out.
Deletion of all unnecessary AeroDR Detec-
tor correction data
4 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR unit setting
screen.
1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen of
the RM hybrid machine.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Next, conduct tasks from "Startup of all RM client
• For the AeroDR unit setting screen display method, machines service tool" through "Quitting all RM cli-
refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting ent machines service tool" with the RM client ma-
screen". chine. During this time, keep the service tool of RM

Chapter 17
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • hybrid machine logged in.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Select the unnecessary serial number
from the AeroDR Detector list of [Correc- Startup of all RM client machines service tool
tion Data Setting] and press [Delete].
1 Start up all RM client machine service
tools.

709
17.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector

Deletion of all unnecessary AeroDR Detec- 4 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR unit setting
tor correction data screen.

1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen of IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

the RM client machine. • If the setting data transmission confirmation mes-
sage is displayed, press [Cancel].
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the AeroDR unit setting screen display method, Quitting all RM client machines service tool
refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
screen".
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 End all RM client machines service tool.

Quitting the RM hybrid machine service tool

2 Select the unnecessary serial number
from the AeroDR Detector list of [Correc-
tion Data Setting] and press [Delete].
1 End the RM hybrid machine service tool.

• Displays the deletion confirmation screen.

3 Press [OK].

• The AeroDR Detector to be deleted will be grayed

out.

710
 17.2 Change of roaming environment

17.2.1 Changing the settings of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices after

change of roaming environment
After change of the roaming environment, the required changes in settings of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices are
as follows.

Setting of AeroDR Detector

• Change the settings of the AeroDR Detector (changes/additions).
• We recommend that setting changes of the AeroDR Detector (changes/additions) be performed with the RM hybrid
machine. Performing the task with the RM hybrid machine can improve efficiency because the status becomes
equivalent to after merge.
• After changing the setting, perform synchronization on the RM client machine, and restart the RM client machine
and the RM hybrid machine.
* The settings can also be changed with the RM client machine, but merge is required when performed.

Setting other than AeroDR Detector (RM hybrid machine)

• It is not necessary to perform merge after setting changes on the RM hybrid machine.
• After changing the setting, perform synchronization on the RM client machine, and restart the RM client machine
and the RM hybrid machine.
• In the same way as "Setting of AeroDR Detector", when the task is performed with the RM hybrid machine, the sta-
tus after change becomes equivalent to after merge.

Setting other than AeroDR Detector (RM client machine)

• On the RM client machine, setting data needs to be reintegrated using the merge tool after setting changes.
• After merging, perform synchronization on the RM client machine, and restart the RM client machine and the RM
hybrid machine.

Replacement of this device with alternative machine

• Change the version of this device of the alternative machine to match the existing environment.
• Change the IP address of the alternative machine to the IP address of the existing machine.
• Restore the settings of the existing machine backed up in advance.

Chapter 17
* Perform the same operation when installing the existing machine back after repair.

Replacement of this device with alternative machine other than this device
• When replacing this device with a machine other than this device, perform addition of the machine instead of
changing the settings.
• When installing the existing machine back after repair, delete the settings of the unnecessary alternative machine.
• After deleting or adding an AeroDR Detector on the RM hybrid machine, it is necessary to perform synchronization
on the RM client machine, and restart the RM client machine and the RM hybrid machine.
• After deleting or adding an AeroDR Detector on the RM hybrid machine, it is necessary to implement the merge
process, perform synchronization on the RM client machine, and restart the RM client machine and the RM hybrid
machine.
* It is more efficient than changing the existing settings for the alternative machine and restoring the previous set-
tings after repair.
* Setting changes are required when the number of machines exceeds the upper limit of the registration machines
on the service tool.

711
17.2 Change of roaming environment

17.2.2 Method for transferring hybrid functions to another unit of this

device
Perform the following settings when transferring the RM hybrid machine functions to another unit of this device in the
existing environment.

Configuration example
Procedures are described based on the following configuration example.

Exposure room #A Exposure room #B Exposure room #C

AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR

Detector#A Detector#B Detector#C

CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C

RM hybrid machine RM client machine RM client machine
↓ ↓
RM client machine RM hybrid machine

Transfer hybrid functions from CS-7#A to CS-7#B

Installation procedure
The installation overview is as follows:
(1) Change the existing RM hybrid machine to be a client.
In this example, change CS-7#A to be a client.
(2) Change the existing RM client machine to be a hybrid.
In this example, change CS-7#B to be a hybrid.
(3) Change the RM setting of the existing RM client machine.
(4) Change the settings of all AeroDR Detectors.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Since the data changed with this setting does not include the merge data, merge is not required.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Proce-
CS-7#A/#C CS-7#B
dure
Start the service tool, and start the AeroDR setting tool on Start the service tool, and start the AeroDR setting tool on
1
the RM sub-menu screen. the RM sub-menu screen.
In the RM setting, set [Mode] to [Client], and [IP address] In the RM setting, set [Mode] to [Hybrid], and [IP address] to
2
to the IP address of CS-7#B. the IP address of CS-7#B.
In [AeroDR Detector Setting], press [Download] and [Up-
In [AeroDR Detector Setting], press [Download] and [Upload]
3 load] for the AeroDR Detectors registered in CS-7#A and
for the AeroDR Detector registered in CS-7#B.
CS-7#C.
Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen, and exit Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen, and exit from
4
from the AeroDR setting tool. the AeroDR setting tool.
When the setting data transmission confirmation dialog is
5 Restart CS-7#B.
displayed, press [Cancel].
6 Restart CS-7#A and CS-7#C.

712
 17.2 Change of roaming environment

17.2.3 Releasing roaming environment

All units of this device in a roaming environment retain the same information. For this reason, the following settings
are required when releasing part of the roaming environment of the existing environment.

Configuration example
The procedure is described below with an example of changing from the roaming environment for CS-7#A, CS-7#B,
CS-7#C, and CS-7#D to that for CS-7#A and CS-7#B and that for CS-7#C and CS-7#D.

Before change
Existing roaming configuration

Exposure room #A Exposure room #B Exposure room #C Exposure room #D

AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR

Detector#A Detector#B Detector#C Detector#D

CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C CS-7#D

RM hybrid machine RM client machine RM client machine RM client machine

After change
New roaming configuration #A New roaming configuration #B

Exposure room #A Exposure room #B Exposure room #C Exposure room #D

AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR

Detector#A Detector#B Detector#C Detector#D

CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C CS-7#D

RM hybrid machine RM client machine RM hybrid machine RM client machine

Installation procedure

Chapter 17
The installation overview is as follows:
(1) On the existing RM hybrid machine, delete the information of the exposure room and AeroDR Detector to be re-
moved from the roaming environment.
(2) On the RM hybrid machine in the new roaming environment, delete the unnecessary exposure room and AeroDR
Detector information.
(3) Register any 1 unit of this device to remove from the roaming environment as an RM hybrid machine.
(4) Change the settings of the AeroDR Detector used by this device removed from the roaming environment.

713
17.2 Change of roaming environment

The installation procedure is as follows:

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Descriptions surrounded by < > in the table below indicate the status of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Proce-
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C CS-7#D
dure
1 Cancel the registration of AeroDR Detectors #A, #B, #C and #D registered for use the exposure room.
Start up the service tool and Start up the service tool and Start up the service tool and
press [Merge] on the RM sub activate the AeroDR setting activate the AeroDR setting
2
menu screen to activate the tool on the RM sub menu tool on the RM sub menu
merge tool. screen. screen.
In the RM setting, set [Mode] In the RM setting, set [Mode]
Select the information about
to [Hybrid], and [IP Address of to [Client], and [IP Address of
3 the exposure rooms C and D <Normal workflow in
RM hybrid machine] to the IP RM hybrid machine] to the IP
then press [Delete]. progress>
address of CS-7#C. address of CS-7#C.
Select the serial numbers
Start up the AeroDR setting Press [Merge] on the RM sub of AeroDR Detector#A and
4 tool on the RM sub menu menu screen to activate the AeroDR Detector#B in [Correc-
screen. merge tool. tion Data Setting], and press
[Delete].
Select the serial numbers Start up the service
In [AeroDR Detector Setting],
of AeroDR Detector#C and tool and activate the Select the information about
press [Download] and [Upload]
5 AeroDR Detector#D in [Correc- AeroDR setting tool the exposure rooms A and B,
for the AeroDR Detector regis-
tion Data Setting], and press on the RM sub menu then press [Delete].
tered in CS-7#D.
[Delete]. screen.
Select the serial
numbers of AeroDR
Detector#C and Start up the AeroDR setting
Exit the service tool, and re-
6 AeroDR Detector#D tool on the RM sub menu
start CS-7#A.
in [Correction Data screen.
Setting], and press
[Delete].
Start the device infor-
Select the serial numbers
mation synchroniza-
of AeroDR Detector#A and
tion tool by pressing
7 AeroDR Detector#B in [Correc-
[Device info sync] on
tion Data Setting], and press <Service tool>
the sub-menu screen
[Delete].
of the RM.
Check the information In [AeroDR Detector Setting],
before and after the press [Download] and [Upload]
8
synchronization, and for the AeroDR Detector regis-
press [Sync]. tered in CS-7#C.
After the synchroniza-
tion has been com-
Exit the service tool, and re-
9 pleted, end the device
start CS-7#C.
<Normal workflow in progress> information synchro-
nization tool.
Start the device information
synchronization tool by press-
10 Restart CS-7#B.
ing [Device info sync] on the
sub-menu screen of the RM.
Check the information before
11 and after the synchronization,
<Normal workflow in progress> and press [Sync].

<Normal workflow in After the synchronization has

progress> been completed, end the de-
12
vice information synchroniza-
tion tool.
13 Restart CS-7#D.

714
 17.3 Method for deleting AeroDR Detector settings

The deletion method for the AeroDR Detector settings is as follows.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Descriptions surrounded by < > in the table below indicate the status of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Proce-
RM hybrid machine RM client machine
dure
In this device that has an AeroDR Detector to be deleted, press the icon of the applicable AeroDR Detector on the [Network
1
status] tab on the system monitor screen, and press [Unregister].
2 Start up the service tool.
3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen of RM icon.
Select the serial number of unnecessary AeroDR Detector <Normal workflow in progress>
4
in [Correction Data Setting], and press [Delete].
Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen to exit from
5
the AeroDR setting tool.
6 Start up the service tool.
7 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen of RM icon.
Select the serial number of unnecessary AeroDR Detector
8
in [Correction Data Setting], and press [Delete].
<During service tool login>
9 Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen.
When the setting data transmission confirmation dialog is
10
displayed, press [Cancel].
11 Close the service tool.
12 Close the service tool. Restart this device.
13 Restart this device. <Normal workflow in progress>

Chapter 17

715
 17.4 Measures in case where AeroDR Detector is not
properly displayed on this device

When connecting the AeroDR Detector to the AeroDR I/F Cable or when moving to another exposure room, if its icon
is not displayed on the application bar or icons do not switch, then the following might be the cause.
• Connections between each unit of this device (RM) and the AeroDR Detector are not established.
• The RM setting set on the AeroDR Detector is wrong.
• The device-sub ID of the set AeroDR Detector is wrong.
In those cases, handle the problem following the chart below.

17.4.1 Handling chart

Is the LED display of No Refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service

AeroDR Detector normal? Manual" for understanding and handling the situation.

Yes

Run ping with each unit of this device and

AeroDR Detector

No Check the power and connection status of each

Is there a response?
device.

Yes

After running diagnosis of

AeroDR Detector with a diagnosis tool, is there Yes
Correct the wrong setting.
a difference in the settings of this device
and AeroDR Detector?

No

Open the FpdManage.csv file, and reconnect

the AeroDR Detector to the AeroDR I/F Cable

The settings and the operation of RM itself are normal.

Yes
Is the FpdManege.csv file If the problem recurs after restart, back up the
updated? environment and contact the development
department.

No • For the confirmation method of FpdManege.

csv, refer to "17.4.2 FpdManege.csv file
confirmation method".
(1) Login to the service tool with the RM hybrid
machine. • After handling the problem, restore the previous setting.
(2) Open the RmConfig.xml file, and change • For the confirmation method of debug window, refer to
<StartMode> to HT. "17.4.3 RM debug window confirmation method".
(3) Log out from the service tool.

RM is not started.
No If the problem recurs after restart, back up the
Is the debug window displayed?
environment and contact the development
department.

Yes

Reconnect the AeroDR Detector to the

AeroDR I/F Cable

No The RM IP address setting of the AeroDR Detec-

Is data displayed in the tor might be wrong.
debug window? Check the setting again.

Yes

The registered AeroDR Detector and the con-

Is DeviceID Error Yes nected detector do not agree.
displayed? Check the setting and the serial number of the
AeroDR Detector.

No

The device-sub ID of the connected device

Is DeviceSubID Error Yes (AeroDR I/F Cable etc.) is not registered.
displayed? Check the device-sub ID setting of the connected
device.

If the problem recurs after restart, back up the

environment and contact the development
department.

716
 17.4 Measures in case where AeroDR Detector is not properly displayed on this device

Confirmation method of debug content is as follows.

17.4.2 FpdManege.csv file con-
firmation method O
ONormal display when RM is started (when
this device is started or logging off from
AeroDR Detector location information is registered in a the service tool)
FpdManege.csv file.

1 Using Windows Notepad etc., open [C:\ (1)

KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\System\ (2)
(3)
RmFiles\FpdManege.csv].
(1) T
 ime when an AeroDR Detector is connected and
2 Confirm the location information of the the serial number of the AeroDR Detector
detector. (2) Device-sub ID of device to which AeroDR Detec-
tor is connected
(1) (2) (3) (3) SSID of the exposure room where the AeroDR
DEVICE01 1 1 1 A20P-99991 Detector is registered
DEVICE02 1 1 1 A20P-99992
* Nothing is displayed in the following cases.
(1) Serial number of AeroDR Detector –– This device is not connected to the AeroDR Detec-
(2) Exposure room ID tor.
(3) Serial number of device to which AeroDR Detec- –– The RM IP address within the AeroDR Detector
tor is connected is not set correctly.

OO Display when an AeroDR Detector which is

not registered in the system is connected.
17.4.3 RM debug window con-
firmation method

1 Using Windows Notepad etc., open [C:\ (1)

KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\System\
RmFiles\RmConfig.xml]. (1) DeviceID Error is displayed.

OO Display when an AeroDR Detector is con-

2 In the file, change "<StartMode>H</Start nected to a device not registered in the
Mode>" to "<StartMode>HT</Start system

Chapter 17
Mode>", and save the file.

3 When RM is started (when starting this de-

vice or logging off from the service tool), (1)
the screen below is displayed.
(1) DeviceSubID Error is displayed.

717
 17.5 If the RM setting data is corrupted

Perform the following when RM setting data is dam-

aged. 17.5.2 If there are multiple units of this
device, and the RM setting data of
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • the RM client machine is corrupted
• An RM hybrid machine is this device with [RM set- Perform the following when the RM setting data of the
ting] set to [Hybrid].
RM client machine is corrupted.
• An RM client machine is this device with [RM set-
ting] set to [Client].
•• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • 1 Display the intermediate screens on all
units of this device.

17.5.1 For 1 unit of this device Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
Perform the following if there is a single unit of this de-
display the intermediate screen".
vice. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Use the backup data created when set- 2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
tings were completed, and restore the RM diate screen.
setting data.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For restoration of system information, refer to
"19.4.2 System information restoring".
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Copy the [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\

Config\System\RmFiles] folder on the RM
hybrid machine to an external storage me-
dia, etc.

4 Replace the corrupted setting data in the

[C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\System\
RmFiles] folder in the RM client machine
with the folder copied in step 3.

5 Change <StartMode>H</StartMode>
of [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\
System\RmFiles\RmConfig.xml] to
<StartMode>C</StartMode>.

718
 17.5 If the RM setting data is corrupted

6 Restart all units of this device.

17.5.3 If there are multiple units of this
device, and the RM setting data of
7 Check that all AeroDR Detectors are func- the RM hybrid machine is corrupted
tioning normally, including roaming, expo-
sure functions, and so forth. Perform the following when the RM setting data of the
RM hybrid machine is corrupted.

1 Display the intermediate screens on all

units of this device.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
display the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

Chapter 17
3 Copy the [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Con-
fig\System\RmFiles] folder on the RM cli-
ent machine to an external storage media,
etc.

4 Replace the corrupted setting data in the

[C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\System\
RmFiles] folder in the RM hybrid machine
with the folder copied in step 3.

5 Change <StartMode>C</StartMode>
of [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\
System\RmFiles\RmConfig.xml] to
<StartMode>H</StartMode>.

719
17.5 If the RM setting data is corrupted

6 Restart all units of this device.

7 Disconnect all AeroDR Detectors, and

then reconnect them.

8 Check whether the RM operates normally.

720
 17.6 Device Log

The logs of the devices are recorded in the hard disk

of this device. The recorded logs can be confirmed and
collected.

17.6.1 Confirmation of the log

Confirm the logs recorded in this device as follows.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The log viewer screen is displayed.

4 Press [Setting].

Chapter 17

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Press [Log].

• The setting screen is displayed.

721
17.6 Device Log

5 Set conditions for the logs to display, and HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

press [OK].
• If the times for this device and connected periph-
eral devices do not match, then there may be a
disparity between contents of the displayed log
and the time. In this case, input an adjustment time
into [Module filter setting] in the setting screen, and
press [OK].
• The log of activity before the time of this device
synchronized with the one of the AeroDR Detector
and the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit cannot
be displayed. View the log file directly to see the
log of activity before the times synchronized.
–– AeroDR Detector log file: C:\KonicaMinolta\
Console\Data\log\DrCassette\yyyymmdd_
<AeroDR Detector serial number>.txt
–– AeroDR Generator Interface Unit log file: C:\
KonicaMinolta\Console\Data\log\AgiBox\
yyyymmdd_< AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
serial number>.txt
The times synchronize when the communications
of this device and the AeroDR Detector and Aero-
• The following conditions can be set. DR Generator Interface Unit start.
–– Display period •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
–– Event filter
–– Module filter

6 Logs meeting the conditions are dis-

played in [Log Data].

722
 17.6 Device Log

3 Press [Backup/Restore], and press [Back-

17.6.2 Log collection up].

Collect the logs recorded in this device as follows.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Pressing [Delete examination personal information]
does not delete personal information contained in
logs.
• The reader logs for the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
cannot be collected using this procedure. It is
necessary to acquire the reader logs using the
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 icon's reader log func-
tion.
•• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

1 Start the service tool.

2 Select the [User Tool] tab.

• The backup screen is displayed.

4 Select [Log].

Chapter 17

5 Press [Browse] and choose where to store

the collected logs.
• The user tool screen is displayed.

723
17.6 Device Log

6 To collect logs on a specific date or pe-

riod, select [Specify Duration].

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

9 Press [OK].

7 Press on the calendar icon and set the

date or period on the displayed calendar.
• Collecting of logs will start.

10 Press [OK].

• Press on the calendar icon to select the start date

and the end date.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
11 When log collection is completed, press
• Collecting the logs on the date before and after an [Close].
error is useful for error analysis.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

8 Press [Execute].

• This returns to the user tool screen.

12 Write the log files collected in the save

folder to external memory media, etc.

724
 17.7 AeroDR Detector Log

The logs of the AeroDR Detector are recorded in the

hard disk of this device. The recorded logs can be col-
lected and confirmed.

17.7.1 Log collection

Collect the logs of the AeroDR Detector recorded in

this device as follows.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Detector registered in the exposure
room is the only AeroDR Detector from which logs • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
can be collected.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
5 Press [Log] on the sub-menu screen.

1 Display the system monitor screen, and

register an AeroDR Detector from which
logs will be collected in the exposure
room.

2 Turn on the AeroDR Detector from which

logs will be collected.

3 Start the service tool.

4 Press the AeroDR Detector device icon.

Chapter 17

• The AeroDR Detector log screen is displayed.

725
17.7 AeroDR Detector Log

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 8 Press [Close].

• The AeroDR Detector log screen shows the serial
number and name of the AeroDR Detector regis-
tered in the exposure room.
• To get logs of an AeroDR Detector not registered in
the exposure room, close the service tools, register
the AeroDR Detector from which you want to get
logs on the system monitor screen, and then dis-
play the AeroDR Detector log screen again.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

6 Press [Log Acquisition] of the AeroDR De-

tector from which you want to get logs.

• Displays a message indicating that log acquisition

was successful.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The log will be saved in "C:\KonicaMinolta\Con-
sole\Data\Log\DrCassetteIf ".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

7 Press [OK].

726
 17.7 AeroDR Detector Log

17.7.2 Confirmation of the log

Confirm the logs of the AeroDR Detector recorded in

this device as follows.

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
display the intermediate screen".
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

3 Open [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Data\
Log\DrCassetteIf] with Explorer.

Chapter 17
Open a text file in the folder with Notepad.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Log files are saved with the name "<Serial number
of AeroDR Detector>.txt".
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

727
 17.8 Log of AeroDR Access Point

The log of AeroDR Access Point (including the access 4 Press [Log] on the sub-menu screen.
point in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit/AeroDR Portable
UF Unit) is recorded on the hard disk of this device.
The recorded logs can be collected and confirmed.

17.8.1 Log collection

Collect the logs of the AeroDR AccessPoint recorded

in this device as follows.

1 Make sure that power to AeroDR Access

Point is turned on.

2 Start the service tool.

3 Press the AeroDR AccessPoint icon.

• The AeroDR AccessPoint log screen is displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If you press the AeroDR Detector icon, the same
screen is also displayed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

728
 17.8 Log of AeroDR Access Point

5 Press [Log Acquisition] of [Access Point

Log]. 17.8.2 Confirmation of the log

Confirm the logs of the AeroDR AccessPoint recorded

in this device as follows.

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
• Displays a message indicating that log acquisition display the intermediate screen".
was successful. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

• The log will be saved in "C:\KonicaMinolta\Con- diate screen.
sole\Data\Log\AccessPoint ".
•• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

6 Press [OK].

7 Press [Close].

3 Open [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Data\
Log\AccessPoint] with Explorer.

Chapter 17
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Collection of the log from the AeroDR access point is 4 Open a text file in the folder with Notepad.
executed automatically every day at the time set in
[Scheduled Time of Log Collection]. In [Scheduled Time
of Log Collection], specify the time when both AeroDR HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Access Point and this device are being started. • Log files are saved with the name "APSystemLog_
• The following describes the procedure to set yyyymmdd.txt".
[Scheduled Time of Log Collection]. • You can also check the log on the log viewer
(1) Enter the time to be set in [Scheduled Time of screen.
Log Collection]. •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(2) Press the [Setting] button.
• When changing [Scheduled Time of Log Collection],
be sure to press [Setting] after entering the time.
The time you entered is not reflected as a modifica-
tion until you press the button. Your entry is reflected
several seconds after [Setting] is pressed.
• If this device is not active at the specified time, the
log will be collected when the next log collection is
executed while this device is active.
• AeroDR access point logs are currently not able to
be automatically obtained.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

729
 17.9 Radio wave strength monitoring tool

This tool allows you to check the radio wave strength

between this device and the AeroDR Detector by dis-
playing the information as graphs.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the device icon on the AeroDR de-

tector.

• The radio wave strength monitoring tool screen is

displayed.

4 Select the date to be displayed in the

graph from [Date].

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Press [Radio wave strength].

• The graph is displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If you change the selection in [Date], reloading of
the log is started. Reloading may take a long time.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

730
 17.9 Radio wave strength monitoring tool

5 Select the points to be displayed on the

graph and check the log.

• You can specify the points to be displayed on the

graph by using [Image number], [Time] and the
scroll bar.
• You can also select the items to be displayed on
the graph from [Panel] or [Options].
• [Scale] allows you to modify the scale displayed on
the graph.
• Move your mouse pointer over a marker ( mark
representing the intersection of polygonal lines) to
display detailed information such as date and sta-
tus in [Detail Information].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If you change the selection in [Scale], the graph is
refreshed. Refeshing may take a long time.
• If you select a shorter time from [Scale], a longer
time will be required for the graph to be refreshed.
[3sec] takes the longest time.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

6 After the check is finished, press [Close].

Chapter 17

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the detailed functions of the radio wave recep-
tion monitoring tool, refer to "CS-7 Installation/Ser-
vice Manual for Service Tool/User Tool Screen".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

731
 17.10 Collection of images

The procedure for collecting images is as follows. 3 Press [Backup/Restore], and press [Backup].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Images are backed up together with the examina-
tion data.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

1 Start the service tool.

2 Select the [User Tool] tab.

• The backup screen is displayed.

4 Select [Study(Studies not completed can-

not be restored.)].

• The user tool screen is displayed.

• A list of studies which can be collected are dis-

played in [Study List].

732
 17.10 Collection of images

5 Press [Browse] and choose where to store 9 Select the studies to collect from the
the collected images. [Study List].

10 Press [Execute].
6 To collect images taken on a specific date
or period, select [Specify Duration].

7 Press on the calendar icon and set the

date or period when the image was taken
on the displayed calendar.

Chapter 17
• A confirmation screen is displayed.

11 Press [OK].

• Press on the calendar icon to select the start date

and the end date.
• Collecting of images will start.

8 Press [Protect Personal Information] as

needed.
• Personal information of the patient is deleted from
the image.

733
17.10 Collection of images

12 Press [OK].

13 When image collection is completed,

press [Close].

• This returns to the user tool screen.

14 Write the image files collected in the save

folder to external memory media, etc.

734
 17.11 Analysis of false detection of a panel, etc.

This section describes the procedure for analyzing 3 Press [AeroSync signal acquisition] on
false detection of panels, etc. the sub-menu screen.

17.11.1 Procedure for analyzing false

detection of a panel, etc.

Advance preparation

1 Confirm that AeroDR Detector subject to

analysis of false detection is registered in
this device.

2 Confirm that [Sync Mode] is set to [XARM]

for [Exposure Room].

3 Arrange AeroDR Detector to reproduce the

exposure environment where the problem,
such as false detection, occurred.

Execution procedure

1 Open the service tool screen.

2 Press the device icon of AeroDR Detector.

• The Aero Sync signal acquisition screen is dis-

played.

4 Select AeroDR Detector subject to expo-

sure.

Chapter 17

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

735
17.11 Analysis of false detection of a panel, etc.

5 Set [X-ray Exposure] to [No Exposure].

• Do not enter [Conditions].

• The measured result is displayed.

6 Press [Execute].
9 Press [Save].

• The measurement data (Four Aero Sync signal im-

ages and the exposure condition file) is stored.

• A confirmation message is displayed.

7 Press [OK].
• When the completion screen is displayed, press
[OK].

10 After the completion of exposure, press

[…] to determine the output destination of
the measurement data.

8 Wait until the Aero Sync signal acquisi-

tion finishes, then press [OK] when the 11 Press [Export] to export the measurement
completion screen is displayed. data.

• The measurement data is exported.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Check the volume of the data before exporting it.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

736
 17.11 Analysis of false detection of a panel, etc.

12 When the completion message is dis- 16 Backup the complete set of the data that
played, press [OK]. is automatically stored in the storage fold-
er of this device, and send it to the analy-
sis department.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Measurement data is saved in a folder that is au-
tomatically created within the output directory that
you specify in step 10. The names of the automati-
cally created folder and measurement file are in the
following format.
13 Press [Close] to quit the tool.
–– Folder name: NoExposure
–– File name: XRaySurvey_FPDID_YYYYMMDD
hhmmss_FrameNN.raw
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If you set [Sync Mode] in step 2 to [XARM] in
"Advance preparation", revert to the original setting
before shutting down.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

14 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
display the intermediate screen".
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

15 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

Chapter 17

737
 17.12 Linkage problem between this device and REGIUS

Perform the following when a problem occurs with the 3 Press [DB].
linkage between this device and REGIUS.

17.12.1 When unable to connect

with REGIUS
If unable to connect with REGIUS, check and edit the
JM database.

O
OStart-up of the JM edit screen

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the JM icon.

• The JM edit screen is displayed.

O
OConfirmation of the device host name

1 Double-click [c_status] on the JM edit

screen.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

• The c_status screen is displayed.

738
 17.12 Linkage problem between this device and REGIUS

2 Confirm that the host name set in [Console O

OConfirmation of the REGIUS host name
Host Name] of [CR unit Setting] is cor-
rectly displayed in [c_name]. 1 Double-click [r_status] on the JM edit
screen.

3 If the host name is incorrect, select the

host name displayed in [c_name] and in-
put the correct host name.

4 Press [Reload].

O
OConfirmation of image re-transfer settings

1 Confirm the [img_ack] value of the c_sta-

tus screen.
• The r_status screen is displayed.

2 Confirm that the host name set in [Reader

Host Name] of [CR Unit Setting] is cor-
rectly displayed in [r_name].
• Confirm that the value corresponds to the REGIUS
set in [Reader Type] of [CR Unit Setting].

REGIUS "img_ack" value

When using REGIUS 110
(earlier than Ver.1.10) or 0
REGIUS 170/190
When not using REGIUS 110

Chapter 17
(Ver.1.10 or later) nor 1
REGIUS 170/190 3 If the host name is incorrect, select the
host name displayed in [r_name] and in-
put the correct host name.
2 If the [img_ack] value is incorrect, select
the numerical value of [img_ack] and in-
put the correct value.
4 Press [Reload].

5 Press [Close].
3 Press [Close]. • This closes the r_status screen and returns to the
• This closes the c_status screen and returns to the
JM edit screen.
JM edit screen.

739
17.12 Linkage problem between this device and REGIUS

O
OConfirmation of the cassette barcode regis- 5 Press [Queries] on the JM edit screen.
tration method

1 Double-click [sys_config] on the JM edit

screen.

6 Move the cursor to the right window, right-

click to display a menu and select [New]
from the menu.

• The sys_config screen is displayed.

2 Confirm the [reg_type] value.

• Confirm that the value corresponds to the registra-

tion method set in [Cassette Barcode Registration
Method] of [CR Unit Setting].

Cassette barcode registration • The [Query builder] screen opens.

[reg_type] value
method
Barcode registration 0
Reading order specification 1
7 Input "update sys_config set reg_type=0
where reg_type=1" in the [Query builder]
screen and press [Execute query].

3 If the [reg_type] value is incorrect, select

the numerical value of [reg_type] and in-
put the correct value.

4 Press [Close].
• This closes the sys_config screen and returns to
the JM edit screen.

• [sys_config] is edited.

740
 17.12 Linkage problem between this device and REGIUS

8 Close the JM edit screen. 3 Confirm the host names in [c_name] and
[r_name].

9 Check whether the connection to REGIUS

can be established normally.

17.12.2 If the power control and error noti- • If the startup and shutdown synchronization was
fication of REGIUS is not activated set by [Power Control] of [CR unit setting], confirm
whether the host names of this device and RE-
If the power control and error notification of REGIUS
GIUS are correctly displayed in [c_name] and [r_
are not operating correctly, check and edit the JM da-
name].
tabase.

1 Display the JM edit screen. 4 If the host name is incorrect, select the
host name displayed in [c_name] or [r_
name], and input the correct host name.

5 Confirm the [alert] value.

• If the error notification synchronization has been

set by [Notify Error] of [CR Unit Setting], confirm
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
whether the numerical value of [alert] is [1] (error
• For the operation, refer to "JM edit screen" of
notification on).
"CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
User Tool Screen".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • 6 If the numerical value is incorrect, select
the [alert] number and input "1".
2 Double-click [relations] on the JM edit
screen.
7 Press [Close].
• This closes the relations screen and returns to the

Chapter 17
JM edit screen.

8 Exit the JM edit screen.

9 Confirm that the power control and error

notification of REGIUS are operating cor-
rectly.

• The relations screen is displayed.

741
 17.13 If a fault occurs with the sub monitor

17.13.1 If the screen goes black or 17.13.2 If the screen is dis-

freezes after disconnect- played vertically
ing the Ethernet cable Perform the following when the sub monitor screen is
Perform the following when the sub monitor screen is displayed vertically.
black and freezes.

1 Display the intermediate screen.

1 Remove the Sub Monitor Adaptor's AC
adapter from the wall outlet, and then re- Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
insert it. • For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
• The Sub Monitor Adaptor will restart. display the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Check whether the screen is displayed

normally. 2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
diate screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the above procedure does not solve the problem,
restart this device.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the screen turns black, the following procedure
can be used to solve the problem.
(1) Press [Ctrl] key + [Alt] key + [Delete] key on the
keyboard.
(2) Press [Cancel], close the displayed screen and
refresh the screen.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Right-click the Windows desktop, and se-

lect [Screen resolution].

742
 17.13 If a fault occurs with the sub monitor

4 Select [Landscape] from [Orientation],

17.13.3 If the screen is not displayed
and press [Apply].
on the sub monitor at the
time of starting this device
The mirror setting may be turned off. Enable the mirror
setting using the following procedure.

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
display the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5 Press [Keep changes].
2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
diate screen.

6 Select [Duplicate these displays] from

[Multiple displays], and press [Apply].

3 Right-click the Windows desktop, and se-

Chapter 17
lect [Screen resolution].

7 Press [OK].

8 Check whether the screen is displayed

normally.

743
17.13 If a fault occurs with the sub monitor

4 Select [Duplicate these displays] from

17.13.4 To revert the Sub Monitor Adap-
[Multiple displays].
tor settings to their defaults
When it is necessary to return the Sub Monitor Adaptor
to default settings, initialize the Sub Monitor Adaptor.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the Sub Monitor Adaptor is initialized, the
settings will return to the following default values.
Setting Item Default values
DHCP ON
IP address 0.0.0.0
Subnet mask 0.0.0.0
5 Check whether the driver is correctly in- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
stalled.

1 Remove the Sub Monitor Adaptor's AC

6 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu, adapter from the wall outlet.
and then press [NetDA Manager] within
[All Programs].
2 While pressing [RESET] on the Sub Moni-
tor Adaptor, insert the AC adapter into the
7 Check whether the Sub Monitor Adaptor's wall outlet.
IP address is correctly configured, and
whether the Sub Monitor Adaptor is con- RESET
nected. Sub Monitor
Adaptor

3 Check that the sub monitor's [STATUS]

lamp is lit, and then release [RESET].
• The Sub Monitor Adaptor is initialized.

• If the IP address setting or the connection status is

not correct, configure the Sub Monitor Adaptor set-
ting again.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the procedure, refer to "14.10.4 Setting the Sub
Monitor Adaptor".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

8 Check whether the screen is displayed

normally.

744
 17.14 Adjusting the print area of the requested image
dimensions (Using third party printers)

Requested image dimensions are used when a con- 1 Close the service tools.
nection is made to third party printers. Also, if the
stamp is set to ON, a stamp is written on the image 2 Display the intermediate screen.
through this device and sent to the printer as a single
image.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Stamp • For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
display the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3 Press [Windows Desktop].

In this case, the dimensions of the image sent may be

trimmed to the size based on the DRYPRO793 setting
data, depending on the film used. So when the print
area of DRYPRO793 and a third party printer is greatly
deviated, the image may be output in the following
condition.

Stamp
Position
Gap

4 Prepare the setting file.

• C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\System\Platform\
System\PluginSetting\ImagerOutputDataAccessor\
_ print1.xml ... Setting file for Printer 1
Stamp Cut
_ print2.xml ... Setting file for Printer 2
_ print3.xml ... Setting file for Printer 3

Chapter 17

In such cases, adjust the print area in the following

procedure.

745
17.14 Adjusting the print area of the requested image dimensions (Using third party printers)

5 Back up the setting files.

6 Open the setting files using Windows

Notepad, etc.

7 Change the setting values.

Do not change
this setting value

Adjust the hori-

zontal dimension
of the film by units
of 0.1 mm.

Adjust the vertical

dimension of the
film by units of
0.1 mm.

8 Save the setting files.

9 Restart this device.

746
 17.15 Acquiring setting values of each device

If there are differences in the setting values of the 4 Confirm the setting values.
AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
(AeroDR Portable RF Unit), and AeroDR Stitching Setting Item Settings
Unit, and the setting values registered in this device for
[Serial Num- The serial number of the selected
these units, the system will not operate properly. In this ber] AeroDR Detector is displayed.
case, please use the following method to display a list
of the setting values in each device and those in this The display name of the selected
[Display Name]
device, check for differences, and correct the setting AeroDR Detector is displayed.
values as required. [Parameter] The setting items are displayed.
[Default The default values of the setting items
value(Range)] are displayed.
17.15.1 Acquiring AeroDR Detec-
[Parameters Setting values registered in this device
tor setting values set in CS-7] are displayed.
[Parameters The setting values in the AeroDR
1 Start the service tool. set in panel] Detector are displayed.
[Hints for If there are difference in the [Param-
changing the eters set in CS-7] and the [Parameters
2 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen. setting param-
eters]
set in panel], a setting correction
procedure will be displayed as a hint.

3 In the AeroDR Detector list of [AeroDR

Detector Setting], press [Diagnose] on the
AeroDR Detector from which the setting
5 After checking, press [Close] to close the
screen.
values will be acquired.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Make the necessary corrections with reference to
[Hints for changing the setting parameters].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 17

• The setting values are displayed in a list.

747
17.15 Acquiring setting values of each device

17.15.2 Acquiring the setting 17.15.3 Acquiring the setting val-

values for the AeroDR ues for the AeroDR access
Generator Interface Unit point
(AeroDR Portable RF Unit)
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Start the service tool.
• If the AeroDR access point has been changed or
reinstalled, the AeroDR access point time sync set-
2 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen. ting needs to be specified again.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3 Press [Diagnose] on the [XG BOX Setting]
screen.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• For the AeroDR access point time sync setting,
refer to "4.12 AeroDR Access Point Time Sync Set-
ting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The setting values are displayed in a list. 17.15.4 Acquiring the setting
values for the AeroDR
Stitching Unit

1 Start the service tool.

2 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.

4 Confirm the setting values.
Setting Item Settings 3 Press [Diagnose] on the [Stitching Unit
The serial number of the selected Setting] screen.
[Serial Num-
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit is
ber]
displayed.
The display name of the selected
[Display Name] AeroDR Generator Interface Unit is
displayed.
[Parameter] The setting items are displayed.
[Default The default values of the setting items
value(Range)] are displayed. • The setting values are displayed in a list.
[Parameters Setting values registered in this device
set in CS-7] are displayed.
[Param set in The setting values in the AeroDR Gen-
XG-BOX] erator Interface Unit are displayed.
[Hints for If there are differences in the [Param-
changing the eters set in CS-7] and the [Param
setting param- set in XG-BOX], a setting correction
eters] procedure will be displayed as a hint.

5 After checking, press [Close] to close the

screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Make the necessary corrections with reference to
[Hints for changing the setting parameters].
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

748
 17.15 Acquiring setting values of each device

4 Confirm the setting values.

Setting Item Settings
[Serial Num- The serial number of the selected
ber] AeroDR Stitching Unit is displayed.

The display name of the selected

[Display Name]
AeroDR Stitching Unit is displayed.

[Parameter] The setting items are displayed.

[Default The default values of the setting items
value(Range)] are displayed.
[Parameters Setting values registered in this device
set in CS-7] are displayed.
[Param set in The setting values in the AeroDR
Stitchin' unit] Stitching Unit are displayed.
[Hints for If there are differences in the [Param-
changing the eters set in CS-7] and the [Param set
setting param- in Stitchin' unit], a setting correction
eters] procedure will be displayed as a hint.

5 After checking, press [Close] to close the

screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Make the necessary corrections with reference to
[Hints for changing the setting parameters].
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 17

749
 17.16 Trouble caused by multiple use of wireless LAN adapter

When two wireless LAN adapters are installed on this

device and wireless LAN adapter (main) is connected
to a PDA, if the wireless LAN adapter (main) is discon-
nected, the wireless LAN adapter (extension) will be
mistakenly recognized as the wireless LAN adapter
(main), and a normal connection will no longer be pos-
sible. In this case, please perform the following recov-
ery procedure.

Built-in wireless
LAN adapter

Access point of
the institution
Example of display dur- Example of display when
ing normal operation an error has occurred

CS-7

2 Right-click [Logitec Client Utility] in the

task tray and select [Change to Client
Wireless LAN adapter Wireless LAN adapter Mode].
(main) (extension)

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• This procedure is only effective in Japan.
• The Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK is used as the
wireless LAN adapter as an example here. The
setting method may be different for the wireless
LAN adapter that is used. For details, refer to the
operation manual of the wireless LAN adapter that
is used.
• The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japa-
nese model Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK is used as
an example.
•• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • 3 Attach the wireless LAN adapter (main) to
the USB port on the left side of this device.
1 Press the wireless LAN icon in the task
tray and check the network connection in- 4 Disconnect the wireless LAN adapter (ex-
formation. tension).
• The [Select a Wireless LAN card] screen is dis-
played.

• The network connection information will be dis-

5 Press [OK] on the [Select a Wireless LAN
card] screen.
played. If an error has occurred, the connection
destination of the wireless LAN adapter(extension)
will be displayed as "SoftAP-5E" etc..

750
 17.16 Trouble caused by multiple use of wireless LAN adapter

6 Right-click [Client Utility] in the task tray

and select [Change to AP Mode].

• The [ICS Select WAN Adapter] screen is displayed.

7 Press [×] on the [ICS Select WAN Adapter]

screen.

• The [Logitec Software AP Utility] screen is dis-

played.

8 Press [Adopt] on the [Logitec Software AP

Utility] screen and then press [×].

Chapter 17

9 Install the wireless LAN adapter (handset)

into the USB port on the back of this de-
vice.

751
 17.17 How to migrate data when replacing the device housing

When replacing the hard disk or computer housings, 4 Double-click "C:\konicaminolta\JM\jm_

use the following procedures to migrate data on this backup_all.bat".
device without using backup tools or restore tools. • The command prompt is displayed.

17.17.1 Operation using re- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

placement source • When the processing has finished, the command
prompt will disappear and the following file will be
created in "C:\Konicaminolta\JM\backup".
1 Check and take a note of [Institution –– c_startus.tar
Name], [Institution Address], [Telephone –– exchange_parts_tbl.tar
Number], [Department Name], [Station AE –– kddm_jm.tar
Title] and [Console Name] of this device –– r_status.tar
set on the CS-7 setting screen. –– r_version.tar
–– relations.tar
–– sys_config.tar
2 Display the intermediate screen. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5 Copy each of the following folders directly

• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to under "C:\Konicaminolta\" to an external
display the intermediate screen". HDD or the like.
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Console
• CS-3\Env\Data\Correct
• JM\backup
3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
diate screen.

752
 17.17 How to migrate data when replacing the device housing

17.17.2 Operation using re-

6 Delete the following folder directly under
"C:\Konicaminolta\Console", and copy
placement destination each of the folders from directly under
"C:\Konicaminolta\Console.org".
• Config\System\LMS
1 Newly install this device of the same ver-
• Config\System\Platform\System\Platform\
sion as the replacement source.
InstitutionInformation
• Config\System\Platform\System\Platform\License
2 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
7 Restart the replacement destination unit
of this device.
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
display the intermediate screen".
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 8 Open the CR unit setting screen and press
[OK] to close the screen.

3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen. 9 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
display the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

10 Import the license.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the import of the license, refer to "4.6 Registra-
tion of license".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

11 Restart the replacement destination unit

of this device.
4 Change the name of "C:\Konicaminolta\
Console" to "Console.org".

Chapter 17
12 Double-click "C:\konicaminolta\JM\jm_
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • restore_all.bat" and restore the content of
the JM.
• If a message such as "Since this file or folder is
• The command prompt is displayed.
open with other program, the operation cannot be
completed." is displayed, and folder name cannot
be changed, close Rmif.exe using the Task Man- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
ager and then change the folder name. • When the processing has finished, the command
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • prompt will disappear.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 Copy the following folders, which are

backed up on the replacement source, to 13 Restart the replacement destination unit
directly under "C:\Konicaminolta\". of this device.
• Console
• CS-3\Env\Data\Correct
• JM\backup

753
17.17 How to migrate data when replacing the device housing

14 Open the setting screen of this device and

input [Institution Name], [Institution Ad-
dress], [Telephone Number], [Department
Name], [Station AE Title] and [Console
Name] of the replacement source.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• [Institution Name], [Institution Address] and [Tele-
phone Number] will be imported from the license
registration details when importing the license.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

15 Open the equipment information screen

and perform activation.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the activation, refer to "4.18 Activation".
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

754
 17.18 Collecting images for analysis

The method for collecting the images for analysis with- IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
out using the backup tool is as follows.
• When there are multiple examination dates, copy
all the folders of the relevant examination dates.
1 From the examination list screen, make a • If there is only a small number of images, it does
note of the examination date of the exami- not present a problem to make a full copy of "C:\
nation including the image you want to Konicaminolta\Data".
• If there are a large number of images, check which
back up.
image files belong to the examination and contact
the destination of the request for analysis.
2 Display the intermediate screen. • Send the backup data created by backing up the
DB and log with a backup tool to ask for the analy-
sis.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
display the intermediate screen".
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

Chapter 17
4 Copy each of the following folders directly
under "C:\Konicaminolta\Data" to an ex-
ternal HDD or the like.
• DB
• AutoProc\<ExaminationDate(YYYYMMDD)>
• Display\<ExaminationDate(YYYYMMDD)>
• Header\<ExaminationDate(YYYYMMDD)>
• Image\<ExaminationDate(YYYYMMDD)>
• PastImage\<ExaminationDate(YYYYMMDD)>

755
 17.19 How to reset passwords

The procedure for resetting a service tool password 2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
and user tool password is as follows. diate screen.

O
OHow to reset the service tool password

1 Shut down this device.

2 Start up this device and press F8 key on

the keyboard before the Windows logo ap-
pears.

3 Select Safe mode after the detailed boot

option screen appears.
• When Windows has started without displaying the
detailed boot option screen, retry from step 1.

4 When Windows 7 starts in Safe mode, ex-

3 Execute [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Bin\
ecute [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Bin\Tool\
Tool\PWReset\pw_reset_u.bat] from the
PWReset\pw_reset_m.bat].
desktop of Windows.

5 When the window appears and a message

4 When the window appears and a message
"Do you want to reset maintenance pass-
"Do you want to reset UserTool pass-
word? (Y/N)" appears, enter [Y].
word? (Y/N)" appears, enter [Y].

6 Restart this device.

5 Restart this device.
O
OHow to reset the user tool password

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to
display the intermediate screen".
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

756
 17.20 AeroDR Stitching Unit Version Upgrade Failure Recovery

If the AeroDR Stitching Unit fails to upgrade the ver-

sion of its system firmware, perform recovery accord-
ing to the following procedure.

1 Start the service tool.

• The Update AeroDR stitching system firmware
screen is displayed.
2 Press the AeroDR stitching unit icon.

4 Press [File import] and then select the

firmware upgrade file.

5 After selecting the firmware upgrade file,

turn on the power switch of the AeroDR
Stitching Unit's power supply unit.

6 Press [Update].

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Press the [Update] button immediately after the
AeroDR stitching unit is activated. If you do not

Chapter 17
press the button immediately, communication with
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
the AeroDR stitching unit will be cut off. In this
case, repeat the above Steps 5 and 6.
3 Press [Firmware Update] on the sub-menu ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
screen.

757
 17.21 RIS/HOST communication error failure support

If a communication error with RIS/HOST occurs during

the portable X-ray device operation, set the following.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If any of the following apply, this setting is unneces-
sary.
–– If routing settings are set up through "16.5 How to
change the network settings when the RIS/HOST
is using the same network segment as the AeroDR
SYSTEM".
–– If RIS/HOST is connected to multiple LAN adapt-
ers (having places within the institution where RIS/
HOST is connected to wired and wireless LAN
adapters).
–– If the "10.15 Network configuration for each area"
setting is being performed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

1 Perform steps 1 to 5 of the procedure

"10.15.1 Creating a new area" to create a
new area.

2 Perform steps 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 of the pro-

cedure "10.15.2 Network configuration for
each area" to configure settings.

3 Perform steps 1 to 5 of the procedure

"10.15.3 Initial area selection" to configure
settings.

758
 Chapter
18
Error Code
This chapter describes the error codes and countermeasures.

759
 18.1 Types of error codes and recognition methods

18.1.1 Types of error codes

Error messages are all displayed in a dialog box. The types and description of error messages are as follows.

Types Description
Communication errors An error has been caused in communications.
Software errors An error has been caused in this device.
AeroDR Detector errors An error has been caused in the AeroDR Detector.
AeroDR Interface Unit2 errors An error has been caused in the AeroDR Interface Unit2.
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit errors An error has been caused in the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit.
AeroDR Portable RF Unit errors An error has been caused in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
AeroDR Stitching System errors An error has been caused in the AeroDR Stitching System.
REGIUS errors An error has been caused in the REGIUS series.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• There is no error code for the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

760
 18.1 Types of error codes and recognition methods

18.1.2 Recognition method for error codes

The initial letters have been decided for each type of error code. When an error message has been displayed, identify
the type of error in accordance with the flow and check the error description and the countermeasures in each item.

Error code

"C2" is displayed as Check "18.2.1 Communication

the initial letters of the errors" and perform the coun-
error code. termeasures.

"C3" through "C7" are Check "18.2.2 Software errors"

displayed as the initial and perform the countermea-
letters of the error code. sures.

"F" is displayed as Check "18.2.3 AeroDR Detec-

Check the initial letters of the error code.

the initial letter of the tor errors" and perform the

error code. countermeasures.

Check "18.2.4 AeroDR Interface

The AeroDR Interface Unit2 is
Unit2 errors" and perform the
used.
countermeasures.

"G" is displayed as Check "18.2.5 AeroDR Genera-

The AeroDR Generator Interface
the initial letter of the tor Interface Unit errors" and
Unit is used.
error code. perform the countermeasures.

Check "18.2.6 AeroDR Portable

The AeroDR Portable RF Unit is
RF Unit errors" and take the in-
used.
dicated corrective action.

"S" is displayed as Check "18.2.7 AeroDR Stitch-

the initial letter of the ing System errors" and per-
error code. form the countermeasures.

A numerical value,
Check "18.2.8 REGIUS series
"CAS", "SIG", etc. is
Chapter 18

errors" and perform the coun-

displayed at the bigin-
termeasures.
ning of the error code.

761
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

If the following error codes appear, take the respective countermeasures.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• After performing countermeasures, if the problem does not go away, collect the error environment data and logs to
ask for the analysis.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The "*" at the tail of the error code are indicating a character from 0 to 9 or from A to Z.
• For the operation of AeroDR SYSTEM and REGIUS series, refer to the respective operation manuals or installation/
service manuals.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

18.2.1 Communication errors

Error codes starting with "C2" are indicating communication errors.

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

(1) Pause the examination and restart
Exposure conditions command the X-ray device.
C21522 X-ray system error detected.
sending for X-ray system failed. (2) After restarting, perform the study
again from the beginning.
C21523 X-Ray device initializing, Please wait. X-ray device communication error Check the X-ray device status.
X-ray system connection error.
C21524 X-ray system connection error Check the network status.
Check the network.
Parameter setting to the X-ray system Check the exposure conditions set on
C21526 Setting error
error. this device.
C21527 The X-ray system interlock failed.
C21528 The X-ray system inter unlock failed.
Failed to send the X-ray system buzzer X-ray device communication error Check the X-ray device status.
C21529
sound (success).
Failed to send the X-ray system buzzer
C21530
sound (failure).
C21541 X-ray system error detected. Device error
Restart the X-ray device and this
Internal error occurred in X-ray commu- device.
C21559 Internal error
nication process.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
C27300 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit. Connection error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
C27301 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit. Perform error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
C27302 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit. Termination error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
C27303 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit. Exposure preparation error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
C27304 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit. Log collection error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
C27305 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit. Log level setting error
Please check the network connection.

762
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
Image transfer completed notifica-
C27306 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit.
tion error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
C27307 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit. Command transfer error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Timeout
C27308 error occurred in AeroDR Stitching Unit. Command transfer timeout
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
Communication information set-
C27309 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit.
tings error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
Communication information acqui-
C27310 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit.
sition error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
C27311 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit. Settings value settings error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
C27312 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit. Settings value acquisition error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
C27313 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit. IO test error
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Commu-
Communication between Stitching
nication with AeroDR Stitching Unit has
C27314 Unit and this device interrupted
failed.
(exposure state)
Please check the network connection.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Commu- Communication between Stitching
C27315 nication with AeroDR Stitching Unit has Unit and this device interrupted
failed. (idling state)
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Failed to
Version information acquisition
C27316 connect AeroDR Stitching Unit.
error
Please check the network connection.
C27600 Initialization error Existence check of the AJS failed
C27601
Initialization error Connection to the Sanyo failed
C27602
Creation of built-in socket server
C27603 Initialization error
failed
Restart of built-in socket server
C27604 Initialization error
failed
C27605 Health check error
Existence check of the AJS failed
Chapter 18
C27606 Scheduled check error
C27607
Scheduled check error Connection to the Sanyo failed
C27608 (1) Restart.
Error in study completed notification to Command sending to the AJS (2) Please check the connection set-
C27618 tings.
RIS failed
Error in study completed notification to Command sending process to the
C27619
RIS AJS failed
C27620 Patient search error Connection to the Sanyo failed
C27621 Patient search error Sending to the Sanyo failed
C27622 Patient search error Reception of error from the Sanyo
C27623
C27624 Patient search error Sending to the Sanyo failed
C27625
Disconnection of communication
C27626 Patient search error
to the Sanyo failed

Continued on the next page

763
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

C27628 Folder check error Folder is not found
C27629 Folder check error Creating a file failed
C27630 Folder check error Writing in a file failed
C27631 Folder check error Closing a file failed
C27632 Folder check error Opening a file failed
C27633 Folder check error Reading a file failed
C27634 Folder check error Closing a file failed
C27635 Folder check error Changing a file name failed
C27636 Folder check error Deleting a file failed
Connecting to a network folder (1) Restart.
C27637 Folder check error
failed (2) Please check the connection set-
tings.
Creating a file in a network folder
C27638 Folder check error
failed
Deleting a file in a network folder
C27639 Folder check error
failed
Disconnecting a network folder
C27640 Folder check error
failed
C27641 Folder check error FTP connection failed
Storing a file on the FTP connec-
C27642 Folder check error
tion destination failed
Updating a file on the FTP con-
C27643 Folder check error
nection destination failed
Communication error occurred in RIS-
C2770* OUT communication. Communication error
Check the communication destination.
Communication error occurred in RIS-
C27730 OUT communication. N-CREATE communication failed
Check the communication destination.
Communication error occurred in RIS-
C27731 OUT communication. N-SET communication failed Check the network status.
Check the communication destination.
Communication error occurred in RIS-
C27740 IN communication. Check the communi- C-FIND communication failed
cation destination.
Communication error occurred in RIS-
C27741 IN communication. D-FIND communication failed
Check the communication destination.

764
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

18.2.2 Software errors

Error codes starting with "C3" through "C7" are indicating software errors.

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

C35500 Failed to initialize. Initialization error Restart this device.
There was an error with reading the set- Reconfirm the MWM settings and
C35501 Setting reading error
ting file. store them again.
(1) Please check the connection desti-
nation.
C35502 A time-out occurred. Timeout error
(2) Please check the connection set-
tings.
(1) Check the destination connection,
Error occurred in the DICOM com- the network status, and connection
C35503 A socket error occurred.
munication settings.
(2) Restart the device.
C35504 [MWM] Channel mismatch occurred
Collect the error environment data and
C35520 Failed to initialize. Initialization error
logs, and request for analysis.
Reconfirm the connection settings
There was an error with reading the set-
C35521 Setting reading error for the higher system and store them
ting file.
again.
(1) Please check the connection desti-
Detach result notification response
C35522 A time-out occurred. nation.
time-out
(2) Check the settings.
Collect the error environment data and
C35540 Failed to initialize. Initialization error
logs, and request for analysis.
Reconfirm the connection settings
There was an error with reading the set-
C35541 Setting reading error for the higher system and store them
ting file.
again.
(1) Please check the connection desti-
nation.
C35542 A time-out occurred. Time-out
(2) Please check the connection set-
tings.
C35543 [Detached] Channel mismatch occurred
C35560 [Rgw] Failed to initialize.
[Rgw] There was an error with reading
C35561
the setting file.
C35562 [Rgw] A time-out occurred.
Check the network equipment and
C35563 [Rgw]Socket error has occurred. communication cable connection sta-
tus.
Chapter 18

[Rgw] Exceeded the maximum number

C35564
of strings obtained.
At PrintComposer process, execution PrintComposer subprocess start-
C36020
error occurred. up errors
At PrimtComposer process, Fatal error
C36021 occurred. Contact a service representa- PrintComposer errors Check the PrintComposer setting.
tive.
At PrimtComposer process, processing PrintComposer processing time
C36022
is timeout. exceeded
[AeroDR Detector name] Connecting Check the connection status of
C37001
detector AeroDR Detector and communication
AeroDR Detector connection error
[AeroDR Detector name] disconnection cables, including the internal connec-
C37002 tions of the device.
error

Continued on the next page

765
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

C37003 Error Exposure sequence start error Check the network equipment and
Exposure sequence completion communication cable connection sta-
C37004 Error tus.
error
Error relating to the setting re-
[AeroDR Detector name] Disconnected Check the connection status of
C37005 quest to AeroDR Detector before
energy saving not set. AeroDR Detector and communication
the detection of its disconnection
cables, including the internal connec-
[AeroDR Detector name] wireless for- Network connection not estab- tions of the device.
C37006
bidden error lished
(1) Check the connection status of the
[AeroDR Detector name] versionup er-
AeroDR Detector and communica-
ror
Network error or disconnection tion cables, including the internal
C37007 Version upgrade failed.
while updating connections of the device.
Check the connection and restart the
(2) Restart the device and the AeroDR
AeroDR cassette.
Detector.
(1) Check the connection status of the
[AeroDR Detector name] calibration er-
AeroDR Detector and communica-
ror Network error or disconnection
C37008 tion cables, including the internal
Calibration failed. while transferring images
connections of the device.
Check the connection and retry.
(2) Restart the calibration tool.
There are images unreceived to the
AeroDR.
Do not turn off the power of AeroDR.
Return AeroDR detector to previous (1) Check the network equipment and
connection state(Wired/Wireless). In the communication cable connection
Network error or disconnection
C37009 case of wireless connection, the electric status.
while transferring images
wave state has deteriorated. (2) Press [OK], and wait until image re-
Please check an electric wave state acquisition is complete.
by the AeroDR icon at the upper right
of a screen, and wait until connection
returns.
[AeroDR Detector name] Correction
processing error Unexpected error occurred in the
C37010 Restart this device and retake.
Correction processing error. process of correcting images
Restart the CS-7 and retake.
[AeroDR Detector name] Additional
C37012 Panel registration failure
registration error
[AeroDR Detector name] Registration Panel registration cancellation
C37013
cancelation error failure
Check the network equipment and
[AeroDR Detector name] Set panel data
C37014 Panel data settings failure communication cable connection sta-
error
tus.
[AeroDR Detector name] Get panel data
C37015 Panel data acquisition failure
error
[AeroDR Detector name] Attribute infor-
C37017 Attribute information error
mation error.
[AeroDR Detector name] Error in image
file creation.
C37018 Image file creation error
Please contact the service representa-
tion.
Check the network equipment and
[AeroDR Detector name] Exposure
C37019 Exposure permission failure communication cable connection sta-
Permission Setting Error
tus.
Check the connection status of
[AeroDR Detector name] Version name Version information acquisition AeroDR Detector and communication
C37021
retrieve error error cables, including the internal connec-
tions of the device.
(1) Check that the selected firmware
[AeroDR Detector name] Firmware file is correct.
C37022 import error Firmware file abnormality (2) Check that the selected firmware
Verify that the firmware file is correct. file and target device for the update
are correct.

766
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Detector name] versionup er-
ror Check that the selected firmware file is
C37023 Firmware file read failure
Firmware load error. correct.
Please import the firmware file again.
[AeroDR Detector name] versionup er-
ror
AeroDR Panel is not wired connection.
Connect the AeroDR I/F cable or the
C37024 Please connect the I/F cable or UF Version upgrade error
AeroDR UF cable.
cable to the AeroDR panel.
(Wait about 10 seconds, please press
the Update button.)
[AeroDR Detector name]Exposure Check the Sync Mode and the inter-
C37025 AeroDR Sync Mode errors
Mode Setting Error gration time of the AeroDR Detector.
Exposure field setting error. (1) Check the connection status of net-
Communication error in exposure
C37054 Check the network connection and work devices and communication
field setting command sending
touch this exposure condition. cables including internal connec-
Communication error. tions of the devices.
Communication error in Console- (2) When [Ready] is displayed, press
C37055 Check the network connection and
Ready sending the exposure condition.
touch this exposure condition.
(1) Check the connection status of net-
work devices and communication
Version up failed.
cables including internal connec-
Check the connection and restart the Network error or disconnection
C37056 tions of the devices.
AeroDR Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface while updating
(2) Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit/
Unit2.
AeroDR Interface Unit2, and the
device.
Failed to set the Setting data.
C37058 Setting value error of the AGI
Please check network connection and Execute the operation again.
C37059 device
retry.
Check the connection status of
Exposure sync setting error. Communication error in X-ray
network devices and communication
C37060 Check the network connection and synchronization setting command
cables including internal connections
touch this exposure condition. sending
of the devices.
Unable to retrieve the version name of Check the connection status of the
the firm ware. Version information acquisition AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and
C37062
Make sure that the device is connected error communication cables, including the
to the network. internal connections of the device.
(1) Check that the selected firmware
file is correct.
Firmware import failed.
C37063 Firmware file abnormality (2) Check that the selected firmware
Verify that the firmware file is correct.
file and target device for the update
are correct.
The AeroDR Detector and AeroDR
Network connection between AeroDR
Generator Interface Unit/AeroDR
and AeroDR XG BOX/AeroDR Interface
Interface Unit2 communications status
Chapter 18

C37064 Unit2 may not be good.

is poor.
Check the network connection and take
Check the network status and then try
exposure once again.
performing the exposure again.
Up to four AeroDR Detectors can be
registered to one exposure room. A
5th AeroDR Detector can not be regis- Exceeded number of possible
C37102 fifth AeroDR Detector cannot be regis-
tered. registrations
tered because four panels are already
registered.
Installation and settings of AeroDR
C37103 Unknown AeroDR Detector. Install and set AeroDR Detector.
Detector not completed

Continued on the next page

767
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

Installation and settings of AeroDR
C37104 Unknown exposure device. Install and set an exposure device.
Detector not completed
RM management table error.
C37105 RM management table damaged Restore the setting data of RM.
Contact a service representative.
Version discrepancy between
Version up does not match. Update the version of AeroDR Detec-
C37106 AeroDR Detector and RM (this
Contact a service representative. tor or this device.
device)
RM management table error.
C37107 RM management table damaged Restore the setting data of RM.
Contact a service representative.
RM management table error.
C37108 Disconnection of a network cable (1) Check the network status.
Contact a service representative.
in synchronization or RM server (2) Check the status of this device set
RM management table error. down up for the RM hybrid and restart.
C37109
Check the network connection.
Check the network equipment and
An error occurred when canceling regis-
C37111 Registration deletion error communication cable connection sta-
tration of the AeroDR panel.
tus.
If this is the Hybrid PC, import roaming
When distributing the merge data, con-
settings in each of the Client PC's in
tinue operation on the same screen
C37115 roaming group and reboot this PC. Merge warning message
without restarting.
If this is the Client PC, check roaming
In any other case, restart the device.
settings and reboot.
The license of the panel you tried to
(1) Acquire an AeroDR Detector
register does not exist or the number of
license.
C37116 licenses is insufficient. Obtain a license License error
(2) Register AeroDR Detectors without
or register the panel for the number of
exceeding the number of licenses.
licenses obtained.
Error occured in transfer RM setting.
C37117 Please check the network connection RM sending error Check the network status.
and retry.
Configuration error in CS-7 setting. There is a mistake in the client set-
C37118 RM setting error
Please confirm the setting and retry. tings. Reconfirm the setting details.
Non-activated AeroDR detector is Activate the AeroDR Detector in ques-
C37119 Activation errors
found. tion.
[LongLenIF] Initialization failed.
C37150 Initialization error
Contact a service representative.
Restart the device.
[LongLenIF] Termination failed.
C37151 Termination error
Contact a service representative.
(1) Check the connection status of the
AeroDR Stitching Unit and com-
munication cables, including the
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Version
Network error or disconnection internal connections of the device.
C37152 upgrade failed. Check the connection
while updating (2) Follow the corresponding proce-
and restart the AeroDR Stitching Unit.
dure for when the AeroDR Stitch-
ing Unit version upgrade fails, and
perform the update again.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Radiation
Irradiating light off during expo-
C37153 field detection Failed.
sure field detection
Radiation field light got off.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Radiation
Exposure field is out of possible
C37154 field detection Failed.
exposure range (out of range)
Radiation field is out of range. Check the irradiating light and expo-
Exposure field is out of possible sure range, and perform exposure
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Radiation
C37155 exposure range (insufficient field detection again.
field detection Failed.
range)
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Radiation Exposure field detection failed due
C37156
field detection Failed. to cross mark mismatch
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Radiation Exposure field detection failed due
C37157
field detection Failed. to other causes

768
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

(1) Check that the selected firmware
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name] Firmware
file is correct.
import error.
C37158 Firmware file abnormality (2) Check that the selected firmware
Verify that the version of this file is cor-
file and target device for the update
rect.
are correct.
C3730*
C3731* Initialization error Initialization error (1) Please check the connection sta-
C3732* tus.
C37300 Termination status Termination error (2) Restart the device.
C3733* (3) Check the higher system settings.
Conversion error Conversion error
C3734*
Internal error occurred in DICOM com-
C37350 Collect the error environment data and
munication. Internal error
C37351 logs, and request for analysis.
Contact a service representative.
Failed to get DICOM communication
C37352 setting. Please confirm communication Check the registration of the device.
setting.
Failed in communication. Please con-
Failed in communication with the Collect the error environment data and
C37353 firm communication setting and server
connection destination logs, and request for analysis.
is working.
Failed in A-ASSOCIATE. Please confirm
Failed in service confirmation of
C37354 communication setting and server is
the connection destination
working. Confirm the settings of this device and
Rejected from server in A-ASSOCIATE the connection destination.
Not allowed by the connection
C37355 due to invalid setting. Please confirm
destination
communication setting.
Internal error occurred in DICOM com-
C37356 munication. Internal error
Contact a service representative. Collect the error environment data and
logs, and request for analysis.
It failed in the communication of re- Failed in the confirmation when
C37357
lease. the communication is completed
Communication denied by the Check whether there is no error at the
C37358 A-ABORT was received.
connection destination connection destination.
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT
C37360 - Collect the error environment data and
communication. Incorrect Detach request queue
C37362 logs, and request for analysis.
Contact a service representative.
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT
C37363 communication. Fewer setting information Reconfirm the RIS-OUT settings.
Contact a service representative.
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT (1) Please check the connection desti-
C37364 communication. Failed in data sending nation.
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the RIS-OUT settings.
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT
Chapter 18

C37365 communication. Incorrect Detach request queue

Contact a service representative. Collect the error environment data and
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT logs, and request for analysis.
C37366 communication. Failed in sending data setting
Contact a service representative.
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT (1) Please check the connection desti-
C37367 communication. Failed in data sending nation.
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the RIS-OUT settings.
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT
C37368
communication. Incorrect Detach request queue
C37369
Contact a service representative. Collect the error environment data and
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT logs, and request for analysis.
C37370 communication. Failed in sending data setting
Contact a service representative.

Continued on the next page

769
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT (1) Please check the connection desti-
C37371 communication. Failed in data sending nation.
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the RIS-OUT settings.
C37400 -
Conversion error Conversion error
C37402
C37403 -
C37409
C3741* Health check error Health check error
C37420
C37421
C37422 -
Scheduled check error Scheduled check error
C37430
C37431 -
(1) Please check the connection sta-
C37438 Termination error Termination error
tus.
C3744*
(2) Restart the device.
C37454 - (3) Check the higher system settings.
Study performing error Study performing error
C37456
C37457 -
C37459
Error in study completed notification to Error in study completed notifica-
C3746*
RIS tion to RIS
C37470 -
C37472
C37473 -
C37479
Patient search error Patient search error
C3748*
C37495
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT
C37600 communication. Incorrect MPPS request queue
Contact a service representative. Collect the error environment data and
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT logs, and request for analysis.
C37601 communication. Fewer setting information
Contact a service representative.
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT (1) Please check the connection desti-
C37602 communication. Failed in data sending nation.
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the RIS-OUT settings.
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT
C37603 communication. Incorrect MPPS request queue
Contact a service representative. Collect the error environment data and
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT logs, and request for analysis.
C37604 communication. Fewer setting information
Contact a service representative.
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT (1) Please check the connection desti-
C37605 communication. Failed in data sending nation.
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the RIS-OUT settings.
Internal error occurred in RIS-IN com-
C37610 munication. Incorrect MPPS request queue
Contact a service representative. Collect the error environment data and
Internal error occurred in RIS-IN com- logs, and request for analysis.
C37611 munication. Fewer setting information
Contact a service representative.
Internal error occurred in RIS-IN com-
C37612 munication. Creating an empty tag failed Check the empty tag setting file.
Contact a service representative.

770
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

Internal error occurred in RIS-IN com- (1) Please check the connection desti-
C37613 munication. Failed in data sending nation.
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the settings.
[MWM] MWM C-FIND request aborted
C37614 because it exceeded the maximum
number of search responses.
Internal error occurred in HOST com- (1) Please check the connection desti-
C37662 munication. Failed in data sending nation.
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the host settings.
[Detached] RIS-OUT A-ASSOCIATE
Check the communication settings of
C37680 request is rejected. Please check com-
the device and the server.
munication setting.
[MPPS] RIS-OUT A-ASSOCIATE re-
C37680 quest is rejected. Please check commu-
nication setting.
[MWM] RIS-IN A-ASSOCIATE request
C37680 is rejected. Please check communica-
tion setting. Check the communication settings of
[Detached] RIS-OUT communication the device and the server.
C37681 received transient reject for A-ASSOCI-
ATE request.
[MPPS] RIS-OUT communication
C37681 received transient reject for A-ASSOCI-
ATE request.
[MWM] RIS-IN communication received
Check the communication settings of
C37681 transient reject for A-ASSOCIATE re-
the device and the server.
quest.
If only the specified study is not out-
putted, there may be a problem with
the data. Collect the data and logs,
[EMR IMAGE] Failed to create informa-
and request for analysis.
C37681 tion data. Please Re-Output. If you don't
If all studies are not outputted, there
solve, please service call.
may be a problem with the settings.
Reconfirm the settings and save them
again.
(1) Please check the connection desti-
C37698 Unknown error is happened. Internal error nation.
(2) Check the host settings.
(1) Check the storage media.
C37699 [Patient ID] Real Time backup Failed Real Time errors (2) Check the setting of Real Time
backup.
At PrintComposer process, internal er-
C3772* PrintComposer processing errors Check the PrintComposer setting.
ror occurred.
Chapter 18
Check the system monitor and if there
is no output data, redo the output
Data creation for DICOM commu-
C40001 Failed to create queue file. operation. If the error persists, restart
nications failed
the device, and perform the output
operation again.

Continued on the next page

771
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

Data creation for DICOM commu- (1) Restart the device.
C40002 Failed to queue.
nications failed (2) Redo settings and output.
Failed to read Exam. Tag. Please con- The exposure conditions master
C40004
firm the Exam. Tag. file may be damaged.
Either the exposed images or the
header file of the images sched-
C40005 Corrupted Exam. Tag is Found.
uled for exposure in the target
study may be damaged.
Either the exposed images or the
header file of the images sched-
Check the Exam. Tags on the device
Corrupted Exam. Tag has been recov- uled for exposure in the target
C40006 screen, and change the Exam. Tags
ered. study were damaged, and were
on the Body part selection screen.
repaired using the exposure con-
ditions master file.
Registration of exposure conditions
Reselect Exam. Tag. in Body part selec- Registration of exposure condi- failed.
C40007
tion screen tions failed. Register the exposure conditions from
the body part selection screen again.
The study is currently being processed
Study is busy. Reopen study after few The data saving process may not so the study cannot be performed.
C40008
seconds. be complete. Wait for a while before performing a
study.
The Channel is inactive. (Service No:[0], The DICOM communications
C50001
Channel No:[1]) channel may be off or not set. If the settings are off after checking
The service and channel to get settings The DICOM communications the system monitor, turn the settings
C50002 are invalid. (Service No:[0], Channel channel may be off, not set, or on.
No:[1]) may be set but disabled.
Image processing conditions are set
A header file of the exposed im-
Loaded default parameter for image to default values because they are
C60001 ages in the target study may be
processing. Confirm parameters. incorrect. Check the image processing
damaged.
conditions after exposure.
The RIS code and exposure con-
RIS Code mapping file not found.
C70001 ditions conversion table files may
Please call service representitive.
be defective or damaged.
Unable to register this Exam. Tag due Applicable modality and exposure
to no available modalities. condition modality settings avail- Check the set modality using the
C80001
Please confirm modalities of the Exam. able for use (registered) with this Exam. Tag setting tool.
Tag. device may be inconsistent.
Order number of shot is abnormal.
There is a possibility that the operations Abnormality found in the sched-
of order has not been reflected. uled exposures. Check the registered exposure condi-
C90001
Before you start exposing, make sure Operation on the exposure condi- tions before starting exposure.
you have registered the exposing condi- tions may have no effect.
tions.
Order number of shot is abnormal. It is
greater than [0]. Cannot perform exposure that ex-
There is a possibility that the operations Performable exposure conditions ceeds the maximum. Check the
C90002 of order has not been reflected. may have exceeded the maxi- registered exposure conditions, and
Before you start exposing, make sure mum. perform exposure within the number of
you have registered the exposing condi- registered cases.
tions.
The Image Count for this patient has
Cannot perform the study as the image
C90003 exceeded the upper limit. No more
count exceeds the limit [0].
studies can be started.

772
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

18.2.3 AeroDR Detector errors

Error codes starting with "F" are indicating AeroDR Detector errors.

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F0100* Internal device has malfunctioned. EEPROM Write error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F0101* Internal device has malfunctioned. EEPROM Read error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F0200* Internal device has malfunctioned. Flash reading size error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F0201* Internal device has malfunctioned. Flash Write error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] version update
F0202* error
Flash Read error
F0203* It has failed to update the version.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
FPGA active signal on wait time-
F0300* Internal device has malfunctioned.
out
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] version update
error
F0400* FPGA write driver error
It has failed to update the version.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0900* Device generation error Replace the AeroDR Detector.
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0901* Device startup error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0902* Protocol stack registration error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0907* SDIO driver initialization error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0916* BSS filter setting error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily Priority connection channel setting
F0917*
wireless status became worse. error
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily Disconnection timeout setting er-
F0918*
wireless status became worse. ror
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0919* Error report mask setting
Chapter 18

wireless status became worse.

[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily Management frame reception filter
F0920*
wireless status became worse. setting error
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0921* SSID setting error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0922* Transmission output setting error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily After cutoff fixed frequency scan
F0923*
wireless status became worse. setting error

Continued on the next page

773
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0924* Transmission rate setting error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily Roaming prohibit mode setting
F0925*
wireless status became worse. error
Connection destination AeroDR
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0927* Access Point MAC address acqui-
wireless status became worse.
sition error
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0928* SSID acquisition error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily Transmission output acquisition
F0929*
wireless status became worse. error
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0930* Destination acquisition error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily Statistics information acquisition
F0931*
wireless status became worse. error
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily Module MAC address acquisition
F0933*
wireless status became worse. error
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0934* Transmission error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily WPA disconnection event wait
F0938*
wireless status became worse. timeout error
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0939* Wireless LAN module error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F0940* WLAN driver error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
FPGA reset completion interrup-
F0H00* Internal device has malfunctioned. Replace the AeroDR Detector.
tion missing
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
FPGA reading completion inter-
F0H01* Internal device has malfunctioned.
ruption missing
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
FPGA startup completion interrup-
F0H02* Internal device has malfunctioned.
tion missing
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
FPGA reading completion inter-
F0H03* Internal device has malfunctioned.
ruption notification incorrect
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
No X-ray exposure allow notice
F0H04* Internal device has malfunctioned.
interruption from FPGA
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error No X-ray exposure detection no-
F0H05* Internal device has malfunctioned. tice interruption from FPGA (when
Contact a service representative. X-ray standby timeout occurred)
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
Incorrect notification of reset
F0H06* Internal device has malfunctioned.
completion interruption from FPGA
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
Error of the X-ray exposure allow
F0H07* Internal device has malfunctioned.
notification interruption from FPGA
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
Error of the X-ray detection notifi-
F0H08* Internal device has malfunctioned.
cation interruption from FPGA
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
No FPGA reset cancel completion
F0H09* Internal device has malfunctioned.
interruption
Contact a service representative.

774
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F0H10* Internal device has malfunctioned. No FPGA reset stop interruption
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] power source
error
F0I00* Internal charging start error
There is a fault in the power source unit.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] power source
error
F0I01* Internal charging stop error
There is a fault in the power source unit.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] power source
Internal charging start, stop,
error
F0I02* potential difference error (during
There is a fault in the power source unit.
power off)
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] power source
Internal charging start, stop,
error
F0I03* potential difference error (during
There is a fault in the power source unit.
power on)
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error
Internal CC charging, excessive
There is a degradation or fault in the
F0I04* voltage rise error (during power
capacitor.
off)
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error
Internal CC charging, insufficient
There is a degradation or fault in the
F0I05* voltage rise error (during power
capacitor.
off)
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Internal CC charging, excessive Replace the AeroDR Detector.
F0I06* There is a fault in the capacitor. voltage rise error (during power
Contact a service representative. on)
[AeroDR Detector name] There is a Internal CC charging, insufficient
F0I07* degradation in the capacitor. Contact a voltage rise error (during power
service representative. on)
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Excessive power consumption at
F0I08* There is a degradation in the capacitor. exposure error (during internal CC
Contact a service representative. charging)
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Excessive power consumption at
F0I09* There is a degradation in the capacitor. exposure error (during internal CV
Contact a service representative. charging)
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Excessive power consumption at
F0I10* There is a degradation in the capacitor. exposure error (during charging
Contact a service representative. stop)
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Excessive power consumption
F0I11* There is a degradation in the capacitor. during power off error (during
Contact a service representative. charging stop)
Chapter 18

[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Excessive power consumption

F0I12* There is a degradation in the capacitor. during sensor off error (during
Contact a service representative. charging stop)
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Excessive power consumption
F0I13* There is a degradation in the capacitor. during sensor on error (during
Contact a service representative. charging stop)
[AeroDR Detector name] power source
error High voltage error (during internal
F0I16*
There is a fault in the power source unit. charging)
Contact a service representative.
AeroDR Battery Charger error
There is a fault in the AeroDR Battery High voltage error (during external Replace the AeroDR Battery Charger/
F0I17*
Charger. charging) AeroDR Battery Charger2.
Contact a service representative.

Continued on the next page

775
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Detector name] Power source
error
Replace the AeroDR Detector or
There is a fault in the Battery Charger High voltage error (during charg-
F0I18* AeroDR Battery Charger/AeroDR
or the power source unit of the [AeroDR ing stop)
Battery Charger2.
Detector name].
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] power source
error
F0I19* Low voltage error
There is a fault in the power source unit.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error
Lithium ion capacitor overheat
F0I24* There is a degradation in the capacitor.
detection (during internal charging)
Contact a service representative. Replace the AeroDR Detector.
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error
Lithium ion capacitor overheat
F0I25* There is a degradation in the capacitor.
detection (during external charging)
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error
Over-voltage protection status
F0I27* There is a degradation in the capacitor.
detection (during internal charging)
Contact a service representative.
AeroDR Battery Charger error
There is a fault in the AeroDR Battery Over-voltage protection status de- Replace the AeroDR Battery Charger/
F0I28*
Charger. tection (during external charging) AeroDR Battery Charger2.
Contact a service representative.
F0I34* 1-Wire bus error
F0I35* [AeroDR Detector name] cable connec- 1-Wire ReadROM error
tion error
F0I36* 1-Wire PIO_w error Reconnect the wired cable.
There is a cable connection error.
F0I37* Please reconnect. 1-Wire PIO_r error
F0I38* 1-Wire bus signal level error
[AeroDR Detector name] power source
error Power source computer Flash
F0I39*
There is a fault in the power source unit. writing error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F0J11* Internal device has malfunctioned. Config data check sum error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F0P01* Internal device has malfunctioned. Flash Write error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
Power source computer request
F2E01* Internal device has malfunctioned.
error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] version update
error Replace the AeroDR Detector.
F2E17* Timeout error
It has failed to update the version.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F3205* Internal device has malfunctioned. Flash driver initialization error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F3500* Internal device has malfunctioned. GPIO driver initialization error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
Channel start error (when DMA
F3600* Internal device has malfunctioned.
increment)
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
Channel transfer setting error
F3601* Internal device has malfunctioned.
(when DMA increment)
Contact a service representative.

776
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
DMA transfer end callback func-
F3604* Internal device has malfunctioned.
tion registration error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F3605* Internal device has malfunctioned. SDMA driver uninitialized error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F3606* Internal device has malfunctioned. SDMA driver initialization error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F3700* Internal device has malfunctioned. SPI driver initialization error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F3800* Reception error frame open error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F3801* Reception buffer setting error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] wired LAN er-
Failed to open the driver due to
ror
F3802* operation error of PrCONNECT/
Wired LAN has malfunctioned.
Pro
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] wired LAN er-
Failed to perform initial setting of
ror
F3803* net structure due to operation er-
Wired LAN has malfunctioned.
ror of PrCONNECT/Pro
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] wired LAN er-
Failed to perform initial setting of
ror
F3804* net structure due to operation er-
Wired LAN has malfunctioned.
ror of KSZ8851 driver
Contact a service representative.
Replace the AeroDR Detector.
Wireless LAN driver initialization
error: Initialization for middleware
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily common environment required
F3909*
wireless status became worse. for operation of MatrixQuestW-
LAN/Atheros6002 drivers (K_
HEAP_INIT) failed
Wireless LAN driver initialization
error: Initialization for middleware
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily common environment required
F3910*
wireless status became worse. for operation of MatrixQuestW-
LAN/Atheros6002 drivers (K_INT_
INIT) failed
Wireless LAN driver initialization
error: Initialization for middleware
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily common environment required
F3911*
wireless status became worse. for operation of MatrixQuestW-
LAN/Atheros6002 drivers (K_
TASK_INIT) failed
Chapter 18

Wireless LAN driver initialization

error: Initialization for middleware
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily common environment required
F3912*
wireless status became worse. for operation of MatrixQuestW-
LAN/Atheros6002 drivers (K_
SEM_INIT) failed
Wireless LAN driver initialization
error: Initialization for middleware
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily common environment required for
F3913*
wireless status became worse. operation of MatrixQuestWLAN/
Atheros6002 drivers (K_MSG-
BUF_INIT) failed

Continued on the next page

777
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

Wireless LAN driver initialization
error: Initialization for middleware
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily common environment required for
F3914*
wireless status became worse. operation of MatrixQuestWLAN/
Atheros6002 drivers (K_WDOG_
INIT) failed
Wireless LAN driver initialization
error: Initialization for middleware
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily common environment required for
F3915*
wireless status became worse. operation of MatrixQuestWLAN/
Atheros6002 drivers (K_IO_INIT)
failed
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily WLAN module enabled/disabled
F3926*
wireless status became worse. setting error
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F3935* WPA connection initialization error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F3936* WPA connection error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily
F3937* WPA disconnection error
wireless status became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
PrCONNECT/Pro initialization er-
F3C00* Internal device has malfunctioned. Replace the AeroDR Detector.
ror
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
Reception packet to PrCONNECT/
F3C11* Internal device has malfunctioned.
Pro setting error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F3C12* Internal device has malfunctioned. Socket error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily Encryption setting acquisition er-
F3J00*
wireless status became worse. ror
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
Power Firmware version informa-
F3L27* Internal device has malfunctioned.
tion error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
Log management task initializa-
F3P00* Internal device has malfunctioned.
tion error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F3Y00* Internal device has malfunctioned. CPU exception error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F3Z02* Internal device has malfunctioned. Service call error
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Detector name] power switch Release the power switch of the
push error The power switch of the AeroDR AeroDR Detector.
F4I32* Power switch of the AeroDR Detector is Detector is pressed and held for When the power switch is not
held pressed. 30 seconds or more. depressed, the switch might be
Release the power switch. broken. Replace the AeroDR Detector.
[AeroDR Detector name] Selection Release the selection switch of the
switch push error The selection switch of the AeroDR Detector.
F4I33* The selection switch on AeroDR Detec- AeroDR Detector is pressed and When the selection switch is not
tor is continually pressed. held for 30 seconds or more. depressed, the switch might be
Release the selection switch. broken. Replace the AeroDR Detector.

778
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

18.2.4 AeroDR Interface Unit2 errors

Error codes starting with "G" are indicating AeroDR Interface Unit2 errors.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The same error codes are used for the AeroDR Interface Unit2, AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and the AeroDR
Portable RF Unit.
• The following is an example with an XIF board/ESC board installed. If an XGIF board is installed, replace "XIF board"/
"ESC board" with "XGIF board".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

Program update cannot be started
Version up failed.
G0600X due to the ECB board CPU's flash
Contact a service representative.
memory rewrite protection.
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit /
AeroDR Interface Unit2, and CS-7. Clearing process of the ECB
G0601X
If the error cannot be released, contact board flash memory failed.
a service representative.
Restart the device and the AeroDR
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit / Interface Unit2.
AeroDR Interface Unit2, and CS-7. Write process of the ECB board
G0602X
If the error cannot be released, contact flash memory failed.
a service representative.
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit /
Error detected in the CRC check
AeroDR Interface Unit2, and CS-7.
G06030 of the ECB board CPU firmware,
If the error cannot be released, contact
System section.
a service representative.
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] startup
error At startup, switch 1 input of XIF1
G2010S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch.
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] startup
error At startup, switch 2 input of XIF1
G2011S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch.
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] startup
error At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2012S
There is a startup error. exposure) input of XIF1 is on.
Contact a service representative. Check the connection between the
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] startup X-ray device and the AeroDR Interface
error At startup, switch 1 input of XIF2 Unit2.
G2020S
There is a startup error. is on. Replace the XIF board.
Chapter 18
Release the exposure switch. Check if any errors have occurred with
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] startup the X-ray device.
error At startup, switch 2 input of XIF2
G2021S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch.
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] startup
error At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2022S
There is a startup error. exposure) input of XIF2 is on.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] startup
error At startup, switch 1 input of XIF3
G2030S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch.

Continued on the next page

779
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] startup
error At startup, switch 2 input of XIF3
G2031S
There is a startup error. is on.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] startup
error At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2032S
There is a startup error. exposure) input of XIF3 is on.
Contact a service representative. Check the connection between the
X-ray device and the AeroDR Interface
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo- Unit2.
sure error MAINGATE signal on (during Replace the XIF board.
There is a X-ray device exposure link exposure) was detected before Check if any errors have occurred with
G22000
error. KM-Ready signal on (exposure the X-ray device.
Restart the X-ray device and AeroDR interlock release).
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2.
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo- MAINGATE signal did not go off
sure error before the time set to timer2 (180
G2201U There is a X-ray device exposure link seconds) elapsed after MAIN-
error. GATE signal of the X-ray device
Contact a service representative. went on.
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo- X-ray on/off setting request (un-
sure error lock) command was received from
Replace the ECB board.
There is an internal device error or a the AeroDR Detector before a
Check the communication route be-
G2300U communication error. ConsoleReady setting command
tween the AeroDR Interface Unit2 and
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR was received from this device and
AeroDR Detector.
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2 before the exposure switch 2 was
and CS-7. pressed.
X-ray on/off setting request (un-
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo-
lock) command was not received
sure error
from AeroDR Detector before the
There is an internal device error or a
time set to timer3 (10 seconds)
G2301U communication error.
elapsed after a ConsoleReady
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR
setting command was received
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2
from this device and the exposure Check the communication route be-
and CS-7. tween the AeroDR Interface Unit2 and
switch 2 was pressed.
AeroDR Detector.
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo-
X-ray on/off setting request (lock) Replace the ECB board.
sure error
command was not received from
There is an internal device error or a
the AeroDR Detector before the
G2302U communication error.
time set to timer3 (10 seconds)
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR
elapsed after exposure was com-
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2
pleted.
and CS-7.
Since the AeroDR Detector started
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo- accumulating image data, the
sure error X-ray on/off setting request (un- Check the communication route be-
G2303U Exposure link failed, X-rays are not lock) command was not received tween the AeroDR Interface Unit2 and
exposed. from the AeroDR Detector before AeroDR Detector.
Please take exposure once again. the time set to timer6 (500ms)
elapsed.
Exposure completion was not
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo-
detected before the time set to
sure error
timer4 (15 seconds) elapsed after
G2500U There is an internal device error. Replace the ECB board.
the X-ray on/off setting request
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit/
(unlock) command was received
AeroDR Interface Unit2.
from the AeroDR Detector.

780
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo- The state does not return to the
sure error initial state (all XIF input signals go
G2501U There is an internal device error or a off) before the time set to timer2
communication error. (180 seconds) elapsed after the
Contact a service representative. exposure switch 1 was released.
The exposure switch 2 was not
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo-
released before the time set to
sure error Check the connection between the
G4100U timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
Exposure switch is not released. X-ray device and the AeroDR Interface
after the exposure switch 1 was
Release the exposure switch. Unit2.
pressed.
Replace the XIF board.
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo- The exposure switch 2 was not Check if any errors have occured with
sure error released before the time set to the X-ray device.
G4101U
Exposure switch is not released. timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
Release the exposure switch. after exposure was completed.
The exposure switch 1 was not
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo-
released before the time set to
sure error
G4102U timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
Exposure switch is not released.
after the exposure switch 2 was
Release the exposure switch.
released.
After the AeroDR Detector started Check user operations.
[AeroDR Interface Unit2 name] expo-
accumulating image data, the ex- Check the communication route be-
sure error
posure switch was released when tween the AeroDR Interface Unit2 and
G4103U Exposure link failed, X-rays are not
the XrayOn/Off setting request AeroDR Detector.
exposed.
(unlock) command was received Check if any errors have occured with
Please take exposure once again.
from the AeroDR Detector. the X-ray device.

Chapter 18

781
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

18.2.5 AeroDR Generator Interface Unit errors

Error codes starting with "G" are indicating AeroDR Generator Interface Unit errors.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The same error codes are used for the AeroDR Interface Unit2, AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and the AeroDR
Portable RF Unit.
• The following is an example with an XIF board/ESC board installed. If an XGIF board is installed, replace "XIF board"/
"ESC board" with "XGIF board".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

Program update cannot be started
Version up failed.
G0600X due to the ECB board CPU's flash
Contact a service representative.
memory rewrite protection.
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit /
AeroDR Interface Unit2, and CS-7. Clearing process of the ECB
G0601X
If the error cannot be released, contact board flash memory failed.
a service representative. Restart the device, the AeroDR Inter-
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit / face Unit, and the AeroDR Interface
AeroDR Interface Unit2, and CS-7. Write process of the ECB board Uni2.
G0602X
If the error cannot be released, contact flash memory failed.
a service representative.
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit /
Error detected in the CRC check
AeroDR Interface Unit2, and CS-7.
G06030 of the ECB board CPU firmware,
If the error cannot be released, contact
System section.
a service representative.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
name] startup error At startup, switch 1 input of XIF1
G2010S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
name] startup error At startup, switch 2 input of XIF1
G2011S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
name] startup error At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2012S
There is a startup error. exposure) input of XIF1 is on.
Contact a service representative. Check the connection between the X-
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit ray device and the AeroDR Generator
name] startup error At startup, switch 1 input of XIF2 Interface Unit.
G2020S
There is a startup error. is on. Replace the XIF board.
Release the exposure switch. Check if any errors have occured with
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit the X-ray device.
name] startup error At startup, switch 2 input of XIF2
G2021S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
name] startup error At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2022S
There is a startup error. exposure) input of XIF2 is on.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
name] startup error At startup, switch 1 input of XIF3
G2030S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch.

782
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
name] startup error At startup, switch 2 input of XIF3
G2031S
There is a startup error. is on.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
name] startup error At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2032S
There is a startup error. exposure) input of XIF3 is on.
Contact a service representative. Check the connection between the X-
ray device and the AeroDR Generator
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit Interface Unit.
name] exposure error MAINGATE signal on (during Replace the XIF board.
There is a X-ray device exposure link exposure) was detected before Check if any errors have occured with
G22000
error. KM-Ready signal on (exposure the X-ray device.
Restart the X-ray device and AeroDR interlock release).
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit MAINGATE signal did not go off
name] exposure error before the time set to timer2 (180
G2201U There is a X-ray device exposure link seconds) elapsed after MAIN-
error. GATE signal of the X-ray device
Contact a service representative. went on.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit X-ray on/off setting request (un-
name] exposure error lock) command was received from
Replace the ECB board.
There is an internal device error or a the AeroDR Detector before a
Check the communication route be-
G2300U communication error. ConsoleReady setting command
tween the AeroDR Generator Interface
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR was received from this device and
Unit and AeroDR Detector.
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2 before the exposure switch 2 was
and CS-7. pressed.
X-ray on/off setting request (un-
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
lock) command was not received
name] exposure error
from AeroDR Detector before the
There is an internal device error or a
time set to timer3 (10 seconds)
G2301U communication error.
elapsed after a ConsoleReady
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR
setting command was received
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2
from this device and the exposure Check the communication route be-
and CS-7. tween the AeroDR Generator Interface
switch 2 was pressed.
Unit and AeroDR Detector.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
X-ray on/off setting request (lock) Replace the ECB board.
name] exposure error
command was not received from
There is an internal device error or a
the AeroDR Detector before the
G2302U communication error.
time set to timer3 (10 seconds)
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR
elapsed after exposure was com-
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2
pleted.
and CS-7.
Since the AeroDR Detector started
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit accumulating image data, the
name] exposure error XrayOn/Off setting request (un- Check the communication route be-
G2303U Exposure link failed, X-rays are not lock) command was not received tween the AeroDR Generator Interface
exposed. from the AeroDR Detector before Unit and AeroDR Detector.
Chapter 18

Please take exposure once again. the time set to timer6(500ms)

elapsed.
Exposure completion was not
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
detected before the time set to
name] exposure error
timer4 (15 seconds) elapsed after
G2500U There is an internal device error. Replace the ECB board.
the X-ray on/off setting request
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit/
(unlock) command was received
AeroDR Interface Unit2.
from the AeroDR Detector.

Continued on the next page

783
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit The state does not return to the
name] exposure error initial state (all XIF input signals go
G2501U There is an internal device error or a off) before the time set to timer2
communication error. (180 seconds) elapsed after the
Contact a service representative. exposure switch 1 was released.
The exposure switch 2 was not
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
released before the time set to
name] exposure error Check the connection between the X-
G4100U timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
Exposure switch is not released. ray device and the AeroDR Generator
after the exposure switch 1 was
Release the exposure switch. Interface Unit.
pressed.
Replace the XIF board.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit The exposure switch 2 was not Check if any errors have occurred with
name] exposure error released before the time set to the X-ray device.
G4101U
Exposure switch is not released. timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
Release the exposure switch. after exposure was completed.
The exposure switch 1 was not
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
released before the time set to
name] exposure error
G4102U timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
Exposure switch is not released.
after the exposure switch 2 was
Release the exposure switch.
released.
After the AeroDR Detector started Check user operations.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
accumulating image data, the ex- Check the communication route be-
name] exposure error
posure switch was released when tween the AeroDR Generator Interface
G4103U Exposure link failed, X-rays are not
the XrayOn/Off setting request Unit and AeroDR Detector.
exposed.
(unlock) command was received Check if any errors have occurred with
Please take exposure once again.
from the AeroDR Detector. the X-ray device.

784
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

18.2.6 AeroDR Portable RF Unit errors

Error codes starting with "G" are indicating AeroDR Portable RF Unit errors.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The same error codes are used for the AeroDR Interface Unit2, AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and the AeroDR
Portable RF Unit.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

Program update cannot be started
Version up failed.
G0600X due to the ECB board CPU's flash
Contact a service representative.
memory rewrite protection.
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit /
AeroDR Interface Unit2, and CS-7. Clearing process of the ECB
G0601X
If the error cannot be released, contact board flash memory failed.
a service representative.
Restart the device and the AeroDR
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit / Portable RF Unit.
AeroDR Interface Unit2, and CS-7. Write process of the ECB board
G0602X
If the error cannot be released, contact flash memory failed.
a service representative.
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit /
Error detected in the CRC check
AeroDR Interface Unit2, and CS-7.
G06030 of the ECB board CPU firmware,
If the error cannot be released, contact
System section.
a service representative.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name]
startup error At startup, SW1 input of XGIF1 is
G2010S
There is a startup error. on.
Release the exposure switch.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name]
startup error At startup, SW2 input of XGIF1 is Replace the exposure switch or the
G2011S
There is a startup error. on. XGIF board.
Release the exposure switch.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name]
startup error At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2012S
There is a startup error. exposure) input of XGIF1 is on.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name]
startup error At startup, switch 1 input of XGIF2
G2020S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name]
Chapter 18
startup error At startup, switch 2 input of XGIF2
G2021S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch. Check the connection between the
ECB board and the XGIF board.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] Replace the ECB board.
startup error At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2022S
There is a startup error. exposure) input of XGIF2 is on.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name]
startup error At startup, switch 1 input of XGIF3
G2030S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch.

Continued on the next page

785
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name]
startup error At startup, switch 2 input of XGIF3
G2031S
There is a startup error. is on.
Release the exposure switch. Check the connection between the
ECB board and the XGIF board.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] Replace the ECB board.
startup error At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2032S
There is a startup error. exposure) input of XGIF3 is on.
Contact a service representative.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo-
sure error MAINGATE signal on (during
There is an X-ray device exposure link exposure) was detected before
G22000
error. KM-Ready signal on (exposure
Restart the X-ray device and AeroDR interlock release).
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2. Replace the ECB board.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo- MAINGATE signal did not go off
sure error before the time set to timer2 (180
G2201U There is an X-ray device exposure link seconds) elapsed after MAIN-
error. GATE signal of the portable X-ray
Contact a service representative. device went on.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo- X-ray on/off setting request (un-
sure error lock) command was received from
Replace the ECB board.
There is an internal device error or a the AeroDR Detector before a
Check the communication route
G2300U communication error. ConsoleReady setting command
between the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR was received from this device and
and AeroDR Detector.
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2 before the exposure switch 2 was
and CS-7. pressed.
X-ray on/off setting request (un-
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo-
lock) command was not received
sure error
from AeroDR Detector before the
There is an internal device error or a
time set to timer3 (10 seconds)
G2301U communication error.
elapsed after a ConsoleReady
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR
setting command was received
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2
from this device and the exposure Check the communication route
and CS-7. between the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
switch 2 was pressed.
and AeroDR Detector.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo-
X-ray on/off setting request (lock) Replace the ECB board.
sure error
command was not received from
There is an internal device error or a
the AeroDR Detector before the
G2302U communication error.
time set to timer3 (10 seconds)
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR
elapsed after exposure was com-
Interface Unit/AeroDR Interface Unit2
pleted.
and CS-7.
Since the AeroDR Detector started
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo- accumulating image data, the
sure error XrayOn/Off setting request (un- Check the communication route
G2303U Exposure link failed, X-rays are not lock) command was not received between the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
exposed. from the AeroDR Detector before and AeroDR Detector.
Please take exposure once again. the time set to timer6(500ms)
elapsed.
Exposure completion was not
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo-
detected before the time set to
sure error
timer4 (15 seconds) elapsed after
G2500U There is an internal device error. Replace the ECB board.
the X-ray on/off setting request
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit/
(unlock) command was received
AeroDR Interface Unit2.
from the AeroDR Detector.

786
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

The state does not return to the
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo-
initial state (all XGIF input sig-
sure error
nals go off) before the time set
G2501U There is an internal device error or a
to timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
communication error.
after the exposure switch 1 was
Contact a service representative.
released.
The exposure switch 2 was not
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo-
released before the time set to Check the connection between the
sure error
G4100U timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed portable X-ray device and the AeroDR
Exposure switch is not released.
after the exposure switch 1 was Portable RF Unit. Replace the XGIF
Release the exposure switch.
pressed. board.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo- The exposure switch 2 was not Check if any errors have occurred with
sure error released before the time set to the portable X-ray device.
G4101U
Exposure switch is not released. timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
Release the exposure switch. after exposure was completed.
The exposure switch 1 was not
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo-
released before the time set to
sure error
G4102U timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
Exposure switch is not released.
after the exposure switch 2 was
Release the exposure switch.
released.
After the AeroDR Detector started Check user operations.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] expo-
accumulating image data, the ex- Check the communication route
sure error
posure switch was released when between the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
G4103U Exposure link failed, X-rays are not
the XrayOn/Off setting request and AeroDR Detector.
exposed.
(unlock) command was received Check if any errors have occurred with
Please take exposure once again.
from the AeroDR Detector. the portable X-ray device.

Chapter 18

787
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

18.2.7 AeroDR Stitching System errors

Error codes starting with "S" are indicating AeroDR Stitching System errors.

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

A communication error has been
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error detected in EEPROM on the
S00010
Contact a service representative. AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto-
barrier Unit.
A flash writing error has been
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error
S00020 detected in the AeroDR Stitching (1) Check that there is no foreign mat-
Contact a service representative.
X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit ter on the MCB board of the AeroDR
A flash deletion error has been Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error
S00030 detected in the AeroDR Stitching (2) Check the movement after remov-
Contact a service representative.
X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit ing foreign matter.
A flash verification error has been (3) Replace the MCB board.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error
S00040 detected in the AeroDR Stitching
Contact a service representative.
X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
A CPLD writing error has been
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error
S00100 detected in the AeroDR Stitching
Contact a service representative.
X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error (1) Check for connector disconnection,
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching An encoder pulse error has been wiring breakage, cog wheel damage,
S00110 unit. Please confirm the auto barrier unit detected in the AeroDR Stitching cog wheel warping, and check the
movement area before switch the power X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit movement of the drive motor. If prob-
to ON. lems are found, replace the offending
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error parts.
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching An encoder position loss error (2) Replace the encoder.
S00120 unit. Please confirm the auto barrier unit has been detected in the AeroDR (3) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
movement area before switch the power Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
to ON. Unit.
(1) Check that there is no foreign mat-
ter on the MCB board of the AeroDR
A CPU clock stop error has been
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
S00130 detected in the AeroDR Stitching
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the movement after remov-
X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
ing foreign matter.
(3) Replace the MCB board.
(1) Check for connector disconnection,
wiring breakage, cog wheel dam-
age, cog wheel warping, and check
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error
An encoder interrupt input error the movement of the drive motor.
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching
has been detected in the AeroDR If problems are found, replace the
S00140 unit. Please confirm the auto barrier unit
Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit offending parts.
movement area before switch the power
(2) Replace the encoder.
to ON.
(3) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.

788
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder reset error has been (1) Using the I/O test screen of this
S00200 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- detected in the AeroDR Stitching device, check the function of bottom
ing unit. X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit limit sensor.
(2) Check for connector disconnection,
wiring breakage, cog wheel dam-
age, cog wheel warping, and check
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error
A bottom limit position sensing the movement of the drive motor
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching
timeout error has been detected in in the stated order. If problems are
S00210 unit. Please confirm the auto barrier unit
the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto- found, replace the offending parts.
movement area before switch the power
barrier Unit (3) Replace the encoder.
to ON.
(4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check for connector discon-
nection, wiring breakage, cog wheel
damage, cog wheel warping, and
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error
An encoder position sensing foreign matter trapped in the moving
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching
timeout error has been detected in parts. If problems are found, replace
S00220 unit. Please confirm the auto barrier unit
the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto- the offending parts.
movement area before switch the power
barrier Unit (2) Replace the drive motor.
to ON.
(3) Replace the encoder.
(4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check the function of bottom
limit sensor.
(2) Check for foreign matter in the sen-
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er-
A limit sensor error has been sor portion, connector disconnection,
ror
S00230 detected in the AeroDR Stitching and wiring breakage in this order. If
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch-
X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit problems are found replace the of-
ing unit.
fending parts.
(3) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check the function of bottom
limit sensor.
(2) Check for connector disconnection,
wiring breakage, foreign matter
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error
trapped in moving parts, cog wheel
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching A rise timeout error has been
damage, and cog wheel warping
S00240 unit. Please confirm the auto barrier unit detected in the AeroDR Stitching
in the stated order. If problems are
movement area before switch the power X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
found, replace the offending parts.
to ON.
(3) Replace the drive motor.
(4) Replace the encoder.
(5) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
Chapter 18
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder zero position error (1) Check for cog wheel damage, cog
S00250 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- has been detected in the AeroDR wheel warping, foreign matter trapped
ing unit. Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit in moving parts, moving part breakage,
brake slippage, and brake dragging. If
problems are found, replace the offend-
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er- An upper limit position accession ing parts.
ror error has been detected in the (2) Replace the brake portion.
S00260
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto- (3) Replace the drive motor.
ing unit. barrier Unit (4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
(1) Check that there is no foreign mat-
ter on the MCB board of the AeroDR
A potentiometer communication Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error error has been detected in the (2) Check the movement after remov-
S00400
Contact a service representative. AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto- ing foreign matter.
barrier Unit (3) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.

Continued on the next page

789
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

(1) Check for cog wheel damage, cog
wheel warping, foreign matter trapped
in moving parts, moving part breakage,
brake slippage, and brake dragging. If
An upper limit timing encoder
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error problems are found, replace the offend-
value error has been detected in
S00420 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- ing parts.
the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto-
ing unit. (2) Replace the brake portion.
barrier Unit
(3) Replace the drive motor.
(4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check the function of the
contact sensor.
(2) Check for disconnection of the
A wire breakage in the lower limit
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er- connectors and wiring breakage.
contact sensor has been detected
S00510 ror If problems are found, replace the
in the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray
Contact a service representative. offending parts.
Auto-barrier Unit
(3) Replace the contact sensor.
(4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
(1) Check that there is no foreign mat-
ter on the MCB board of the AeroDR
A board fault in the lower limit con- Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er-
tact sensor has been detected in (2) Check the movement after remov-
S00530 ror
the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto- ing foreign matter.
Contact a service representative.
barrier Unit (3) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
A communication error has been
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error
S00810 detected in the EEPROM of the
Contact a service representative.
AeroDR Stitching Unit
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error A flash writing error has been de- (1) Check that there is no foreign mat-
S00820 ter on the MCB board of the AeroDR
Contact a service representative. tected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
Stitching Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error A flash deletion error has been de-
S00830 (2) Check the movement after remov-
Contact a service representative. tected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
ing foreign matter.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error A flash verification error has been (3) Replace the MCB board in the
S00840
Contact a service representative. detected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit AeroDR Stitching Unit.
A CPLD writing error has been
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error
S00900 detected in the AeroDR Stitching
Contact a service representative.
Unit
An encoder pulse error has been (1) Using the maintenance PC and
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error
S00910 detected in the AeroDR Stitching visually, check for connector dis-
Contact a service representative.
Unit connection, wiring breakage, cog
wheel damage, cog wheel warping,
and check the movement of the
An encoder position loss error drive motor. If problems are found,
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error
S00920 has been detected in the AeroDR replace the offending parts.
Contact a service representative.
Stitching Unit (2) Replace the encoder.
(3) Replace the MCB board in the
AeroDR Stitching Unit.
(1) Check that there is no foreign mat-
ter on the MCB board of the AeroDR
A CPU clock stop error has been Stitching Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error
S00930 detected in the AeroDR Stitching (2) Check the movement after remov-
Contact a service representative.
Unit ing foreign matter.
(3) Replace the MCB board in the
AeroDR Stitching Unit.
(1) Using the maintenance PC and
visually, check for connector dis-
connection, wiring breakage, cog
wheel damage, cog wheel warping,
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder interrupt input error
and check the movement of the
S00940 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- has been detected in the AeroDR
drive motor. If problems are found,
ing unit. Stitching Unit
replace the offending parts.
(2) Replace the encoder.
(3) Replace the MCB board in the
AeroDR Stitching Unit.

790
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

(1) Check for cog wheel damage,
cog wheel warping, foreign matter
trapped in moving parts, moving
part breakage, brake slippage, and
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder reset error has been
brake dragging. If problems are
S00A00 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- detected in the AeroDR Stitching
found, replace the offending parts.
ing unit. Unit
(2) Replace the brake portion.
(3) Replace the drive motor.
(4) Replace the MCB board in the
AeroDR Stitching Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error A lower limit position sensing time-
S00A10 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- out error has been detected in the
ing unit. AeroDR Stitching Unit (1) Check for connector disconnec-
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder position sensing time- tion, cog wheel damage, cog wheel
S00A20 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- out error has been detected in the warping, and foreign matter trapped
ing unit. AeroDR Stitching Unit in moving parts. If problems are
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er- found, replace the offending parts.
ror A limit sensor error has been de- (2) Replace the drive motor.
S00A30
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- tected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit (3) Replace the encoder.
ing unit. (4) Replace the MCB board in the
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error AeroDR Stitching Unit.
A rise timeout error has been de-
S00A40 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch-
tected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
ing unit.
(1) Check for cog wheel damage,
cog wheel warping, foreign matter
trapped in moving parts, moving
part breakage, brake slippage, and
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder zero position error
brake dragging. If problems are
S00A50 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- has been detected in the AeroDR
found, replace the offending parts.
ing unit. Stitching Unit
(2) Replace the brake portion.
(3) Replace the drive motor.
(4) Replace the MCB board in the
AeroDR Stitching Unit.
(1) Using the maintenance tool, check
for connector disconnection, cog
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er- wheel damage, and cog wheel
An upper limit position reach error
ror warping, and check the movement
S00A60 has been detected in the AeroDR
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- of the drive motor. If problems are
Stitching Unit
ing unit. found, replace the offending parts.
(2) Replace the MCB board in the
AeroDR Stitching Unit.
(1) Check for cog wheel damage, cog
wheel warping, foreign matter trapped
in moving parts, and brake dragging.
If problems are found, replace the of-
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An upper limit position sensing
fending parts.
S00C90 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- error has been detected in the
(2) Replace the drive motor.
ing unit. AeroDR Stitching Unit
(3) Replace the encoder.
(4) Replace the brake portion.
(5) Replace the MCB board in the
Chapter 18

AeroDR Stitching Unit.

(1) Close the side cover and cancel the
error.
(2) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check the function of the
interlock switch.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Side Cover
(3) Check for disconnection of the con-
Open A cover open error has been de-
S00CA0 nectors, wiring breakage and defor-
Please close the AeroDR stitching unit tected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
mation of the side cover. If problems
cover and press RESET switch.
are found, replace the offending
parts.
(4) Replace the interlock switch.
(5) Replace the MCB board in the
AeroDR Stitching Unit.

Continued on the next page

791
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

(1) Close the side cover and cancel the
error.
(2) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check the function of the
AeroDR Detector sensor.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Panel Error
An AeroDR Detector jam has been (3) Check for disconnection of the
Properly set the grid inside AeroDR
S00CB0 detected in the AeroDR Stitching connectors and wiring breakage.
stitching unit, close the over and press
Unit If problems are found, replace the
the RESET switch.
offending parts.
(4) Replace the AeroDR Detector sen-
sor.
(5) Replace the MCB board in the
AeroDR Stitching Unit.
(1) Close the side cover and cancel the
error.
(2) Using the I/O test screen of this de-
vice, check the sensing of the grid
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Grid Error sensor.
Properly set the grid inside AeroDR A grid jam has been detected in (3) Check for disconnection of the
S00CC0
stitching unit, close the over and press the AeroDR Stitching Unit connectors and wiring breakage.
the RESET switch. If problems are found, replace the
offending parts.
(4) Replace the grid sensor.
(5) Replace the MCB board in the
AeroDR Stitching Unit.
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check the function of the
internal lid sensor.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Panel Error (2) Check for disconnection of the
An internal lid jam in the AeroDR
Properly close the inner cover of AeroDR connectors and wiring breakage.
S00CD0 Detector holder has been detected
stitching unit and switch the power OFF/ If problems are found, replace the
in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
ON. offending parts.
(3) Replace the internal lid sensor.
(4) Replace the MCB board in the
AeroDR Stitching Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal
connection error
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching A 422 communication flow error
S20060 unit. has been detected in the AeroDR
Please confirm the connectivity of Power Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
box and auto barrier unit before switch-
ing the power to ON.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal
connection error
(1) Check for breakage in the relay
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching A 422 communication error has
cables, disconnection of the con-
S20070 unit. been detected in the AeroDR
nectors and wiring breakage in the
Please confirm the connectivity of Power Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
unit. If problems are found, replace
box and auto barrier unit before switch-
the offending parts.
ing the power to ON.
(2) Replace the MCB board in the
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal
AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto-bar-
Error
A 422 communication flow error rier Unit and the MCB board in the
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching
S20860 has been detected in the AeroDR AeroDR Stitching Unit.
unit. Please confirm the connectivity of
Stitching Unit
Power box and Stitiching unit before
switching the power to ON.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal
Error
A 422 communication error has
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching
S20870 been detected in the AeroDR
unit. Please confirm the connectivity of
Stitching Unit
Power box and Stitiching unit before
switching the power to ON.

792
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Network
Error
A network connection error has
S20C50 Please confirm the network of AeroDR
been detected (1) Check for connector disconnection.
stitching unit and CS-7, switch on the
(2) Check the network connection
power OFF/ON of AeroDR stitching unit.
equipment and the network cables.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Network
(3) Replace the MCB board in the
Error
A network connection error has AeroDR Stitching Unit.
S20C60 Please confirm the network of AeroDR
been detected
stitching unit and CS-7, press the
AeroDR Stitching unit RESET switch.
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this de-
vice, shine light on the SENS board
and check the A/D value.
(2) Since there is a possibility that the
intensity of the exposure field lamp
has changed, change the intensity
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Height
setting.
detection (out of range)
A stitching height detection failure (3) Check for connector disconnecting,
S30460 Please press the AeroDR Stitching unit
(out of range) has been detected the wiring breakage, and contami-
RESET switch. Repeat the height detec-
nation of the light receiving surface
tion.
of the SENS board. If problems are
found, replace the offending parts.
(4) Replace the SENS board.
(5) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal
Error An error of the number of image Collect the error environment data and
S30470
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- specification has been detected logs to ask for analysis.
ing unit.
(1) Check that there is no foreign mat-
ter on the MCB board of the AeroDR
Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error A potentiometer setting value error (2) Check the movement after remov-
S30540
Contact a service representative. has been detected ing foreign matter.
(3) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal
A mechcon task request state error
Error
S307D0 has been detected in the AeroDR
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch-
Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit.
ing unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal
A status transition task state error
Error
S307E0 has been detected in the AeroDR
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch-
Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit.
ing unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal
An OS API error has been detect-
Error
S307F0 ed in the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch-
Auto-barrier Unit. Collect the error environment data and
ing unit.
Chapter 18
logs to ask for analysis.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal A mechcon task request state error
S30FD0 Error has been detected in the AeroDR
Contact a service representative. Stitching Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal
A status transition task state error
Error
S30FE0 has been detected in the AeroDR
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch-
Stitching Unit.
ing unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal
Error An OS API error has been detected
S30FF0
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
ing unit.

Continued on the next page

793
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Height (1) Using the I/O test screen of this de-
detection failed (lamp is off) vice, shine light on the SENS board
A stitching height detection failure
S40430 Please press the AeroDR Stitching unit and check the A/D value.
(lamp off) has been detected
RESET switch. Repeat the height detec- (2) Since there is a possibility that the
tion. intensity of the exposure field lamp
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Height has changed, change the intensity
detection failed(cross mark mismatch) setting.
A stitching height detection failure (3) Check for connector disconnecting,
S40440 Please press the AeroDR Stitching unit
(cross overlay) has been detected the wiring breakage, and contami-
RESET switch. Repeat the height detec-
tion. nation of the light receiving surface
of the SENS board. If problems are
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Height found, replace the offending parts.
detection failed(other reason)
A stitching height detection failure (4) Replace the SENS board.
S40450 Please press the AeroDR Stitching unit (5) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
(other) has been detected
RESET switch. Repeat the height detec- DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
tion. Unit.
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check the function of the
contact sensor.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Obstacle in (2) Check whether the contact sensor
the movement is not being pressed as a result of
S40480 Obstacle detected in the AeroDR Stitch- Contact sensing has been detected deformation of the metal plate etc.
ing unit movement. Please press the If problems are found, replace the
RESET switch. offending parts.
(3) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check the sensing of Set
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Switch Er-
switch on the OPB board.
ror
(2) Check for cable breakage. If prob-
AeorDR stitching unit switch is in
A start time height detection switch lems are found, replace the offend-
S40490 pressed state.
ON error has been detected ing parts.
Confirm the switch not pressed state and
(3) Replace the OPB board.
switch the power OFF/ON of AeroDR
(4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
stitching unit.
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check the sensing of the Im-
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Switch Er-
age Area switch on the OPB board.
ror
(2) Check for cable breakage. If prob-
AeorDR stitching unit switch is in
A start time exposure switch ON lems are found, replace the offend-
S404A0 pressed state.
error has been detected ing parts.
Confirm the switch not pressed state and
(3) Replace the OPB board.
switch the power OFF/ON of AeroDR
(4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
stitching unit.
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this de-
vice, check the sensing of the Reset
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Switch Er-
switch on the OPB board.
ror
(2) Check for cable breakage. If prob-
AeorDR stitching unit switch is in
A start time reset switch ON error lems are found, replace the offend-
S404B0 pressed state.
has been detected ing parts.
Confirm the switch not pressed state and
(3) Replace the OPB board.
switch the power OFF/ON of AeroDR
(4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
stitching unit.
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check the sensing of the
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Emergency emergency stop switch.
Stop (2) Check for cable breakage. If prob-
An error of pressing down the
AeroDR stitching unit emergency stop lems are found, replace the offend-
S404D0 emergency stop switch has been
switch is ON. ing parts.
detected
Release the emergency stop and press (3) Replace the emergency stop switch.
the RESET switch. (4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.

794
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

(1) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check the function of the
contact sensor.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Obstacle in
(2) Check for cable breakage. If prob-
the movement
Contact lower sensing has been lems are found, replace the offend-
S404F0 Obstacle detected in the AeroDR Stitch-
detected ing parts.
ing unit movement. Please press the
(3) Replace the contact sensor.
RESET switch.
(4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.

Chapter 18

795
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

18.2.8 REGIUS series errors

Error codes starting with a numerical value, "CAS", "SIG", etc. are indicating REGIUS series errors.

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

Remove the CR cassettes from the slot, and check
CASIN2 Barcode scanning Error
the barcode labels for any dirt or peeling.
CASIN3 Incorrect barcode Re-select Exam. Tags with the device.
Remove the CR cassettes from the slot, and re-
CASIN4 Cassette Jam(feeds 2 cases simultaneously)
insert the CR cassettes one at a time.
Remove the CR cassettes from the slot, and register
CASIN5 Unregistered Job
them with the device before re-inserting them.
Remove the lately inserted CR cassettes, and wait
CASIN6 Cassette Jam(feeds 2 case contiguously) for the slot's blue indicator to light up before re-
inserting them.
CASIN7 Cassette Jam(feeds 2 case contiguously)
A cassette that is not supported by the device is
inserted.
CASINB Unsupported Cassette is inserted
The device does not support cleaning cassettes
(optical cleaners, insertion rollers).
Failed to take the plate out of the cassette. Open upper door Removing the plate from the cassette failed. Open
CASINE
and remove cassette. the top door and remove the cassette.
The cassette cannot be processed as the internal
Cannot start cassette process because of overheating. Open humidity is too high. After opening the top door and
CASINF
upper door and remove cassette Try it again after a while. removing the cassette, wait a while before inserting
a cassette.
The insertion of the cassette is not correct. Insert
CASINI Cassette insertion is not proper enough. Push it moreover.
the cassette correctly.
CASINJ Cleaning of a roller is required. Clean the rollers.
Remove the CR cassettes that have accumulated
CASOUT8 Discharge stack is full in the ejection container, and check that the ejection
container shutter is closed.
Close the ejection container shutter, and restart the
CASOUT9 Discharge door opens
transport operation.
Close the front door.
When a CR Cassette is left inside the device, after
pulling the Transport Unit to the front and removing
DOOR1 Opened front door is detected the CR Cassette, check that there are no CR Cas-
settes in the device (in the front plate, back plate,
or plate), return the Transport Unit to the back, and
then close the front door.
LAMPA Erase-lamp A turns off
LAMPC Fluorescent-tube turns off
LAMPD Erase lamp life expired.
Erase lamp life had exceeded. Please call service to get lamp The Erasure Lamp need to be replaced.
LAMPG
changed.
LASER1 Laser Error
POLI1 Polygon PLL Error
SIG1 Uses Default Shading Coefficient
SIG2 Uses Default QRV Table
SIG3 Uses Default Shading Coefficient / QRV Table
The setting file may have not been updated. Check
0001 Error occurred while copying setting files
the saved settings, and perform the update again.

796
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

04001
HP1 Sensor NG (Transport Unit)
04002
04011 -
HP2 Sensor NG (Transport Unit)
04015
04020 Alignment Sensor NG (Start)
04021 Alignment Sensor NG (Feeder)
04022 Alignment Sensor NG (Adhesion)
04023 Alignment Sensor NG (Shelter)
04024 Alignment Sensor NG (Discharge)
04025 Alignment Sensor NG
04026 Alignment Left-side Sensor NG (Initialize)
04027 Alignment Right-side Sensor NG (Initialize)
04030 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (Start)
04031 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (Feeder)
04032 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (Adhesion)
04033 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (Shelter)
04034 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (Before Elevating)
04035 Lock HP Sensor NG
04036 Elevator HP Sensor NG
04037 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (After Elevating) (1) Restart the REGIUS series.
04041 Feeder's Shutter Opening Sensor NG (2) If the error persists after restarting, restart the
device and the REGIUS series.
04042 Feeder's Shutter Closing Sensor NG
If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
04043 Feeder's Shutter Opening Sensor NG "Installation/Service Manual".
04044 Feeder's Shutter Closing Sensor NG
04045 Cassette Back Plate Sensor NG
04046 Backboard's Warp Detective Sensor NG
04047 Backboard's Adhesion Detective Sensor NG
04048 Ejection Shutter Close Sensor NG
04051 Discharge's Door Closing Sensor NG
04061 Slow Scan HP Sensor NG
04062 Backboard's Adhesion Detective Sensor NG
04063 Backboard's Warp Detective Sensor NG
04064 V-Sync Sensor NG
04065 -
Backboard's Adhesion Detective Sensor NG
04070
04071 Feeder's Central Detective Sensor NG
Chapter 18

04072 Feeder's Left Detective Sensor NG

04073 Cassette Back Plate Sensor NG (Initialize)
04074 Backboard's Warp Detective Sensor NG (Initialize)
04075 Backboard's Adhesion Detective Sensor NG (Initialize)
04076 24V Power NG (Usually)
04077 24V Power NG (Door Close)

Continued on the next page

797
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

04081 Erase-lamp's Current Detective Sensor 1 NG
04082 Erase-lamp's Current Detective Sensor 2 NG
04091 Front Door Opening Sensor NG
04101 Slow Scan Motor NG
04102 Transport Unit Motor NG
04103 Elevator Motor NG
04104 Alignment Motor NG
04105 Feeder's Shutter Open/Close Timeout
04106 Lock Timeout
04107 Load Motor NG
04150 Lock Initial Processing
04151 Feeder's Shutter Initial Processing
04152 Elevator Initial Processing
04153 Alignment Initial Processing
04154 Transport Unit Initial Processing
04155 Slow Scan Initial Processing
04156 Transfer Action 1 Starting NG
04157 Transfer Action 2 Starting NG
04158 Feeder's Discharge Action Starting NG
04159 Discharge Action Starting NG
04160 Feeder's Shutter Opening NG
04161 Feeder's Shutter Closing NG
04162 Lock Starting NG (1) Restart the REGIUS series.
04163 Cassette Falling Detective Time NG (2) If the error persists after restarting, restart the
device and the REGIUS series.
04164 No Notice of Permission on Erase-lamp ON If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
04165 No Notice of Permission on Erase-lamp OFF "Installation/Service Manual".
04167 Load Motor Initial Processing
04200 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Initialize)
04201 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Ready)
04202 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Detect Barcode)
04203 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (High-voltage ON)
04204 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Laser ON)
04205 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Cancel Barcode)
04206 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Processing)
04207 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Pause)
04208 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Open Front Door)
04209 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Close Front Door)
04210 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Error)
04211 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Standby)
04212 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Transporting of Erase Mode)
04213 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Power off after Ready)
04214 Registration OK Receiving Timeout
04215 GetStatus Receiving Error (Laser ON)
04216 GoBackward Receiving Timeout
04217 Laser ON without Sending High-voltage ON (1)
04218 Laser ON without Sending High-voltage ON (2)
04219 Invalid Command
04221 StartSubScan Receiving Timeout

798
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

04900 Cassette Exists (Elevator)
04901 Cassette Exists (Alignment)
04902 Cassette Exists (Open Door of Discharge)
04903 Cassette Exists (Backboard Adhesion)
04904 Turn Off Erase-lamps (2)
04905 SCB Communication Error
04906 Warped Cassette [%s] (1) Restart the REGIUS series.
04907 Cassette Opening Error [%s] (2) If the error persists after restarting, restart the
device and the REGIUS series.
04908 Falling Cassette [%s] If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
04909 Cassette Gap Detection (Back plate magnetize) [%s] "Installation/Service Manual".
04910 Cassette Gap Detection (Cassette peeling) [%s]
04914 Opening Extraction (Initialize)
04917 Feeder's Shutter Opening NG (Unlock)
04918 FAN Disconnection NG 1
04920 FAN Disconnection NG 3
04921 Erase-lamp NG
JM Error. Please call service. Or change to Backup JM if it ex-
05001 When there is a backup JM, switch the JM.
ists.
Check that the JM in the backup destination is run-
05002 JM Switching Error
ning, and switch the JM again.
ExchangeParts DB
05003 Check that the JM is running, and restart the device.
Initialization Error
05004 JM switched. JM switching was completed successfully.
JM switching was completed successfully.
05005 Please restart Regius
Restart all CR cassette readers.
05006 JM Error. Please call service. Or change to Primary JM Switch from the backup JM to the primary JM.
06000 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06001 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP)
06002 Justifier HP sensor NG (Cassette Fixed position)
06003 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Fixed position)
06004 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Support Position)
06005 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Fixed position -2)
06006 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)
06007 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2)
06008 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP -3)
(1) Restart the REGIUS series.
06009 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP -3) (2) If the error persists after restarting, restart the
Chapter 18
06010 Justifier HP sensor NG (Cassette Support Position) device and the REGIUS series.
06011 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Support Position -2) If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
"Installation/Service Manual".
06015 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06016 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP)
06017 Justifier HP sensor NG (Cassette Fixed position)
06018 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Fixed position)
06019 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Support Position)
06020 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Fixed position -2)
06021 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)
06022 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2)
06023 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP -3)

Continued on the next page

799
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

06024 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP -3)
06025 Justifier HP sensor NG (Cassette Support Position)
06026 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Support Position -2)
06030 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06031 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP)
06032 Justifier HP sensor NG (Cassette Fixed position)
06033 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Fixed position)
06034 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Support Position)
06035 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Fixed position -2)
06036 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)
06037 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2)
06038 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP -3)
06039 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP -3)
06040 Justifier HP sensor NG (Cassette Support Position)
06041 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Support Position -2)
06050 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06051 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP)
06052 Receiver HP sensor NG (Position 1)
06053 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 1)
06054 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 2)
06055 Elevator Motor Control NG (Slight descent at Position 2)
06056 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 1 -2)
06057 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)
(1) Restart the REGIUS series.
06058 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2) (2) If the error persists after restarting, restart the
06059 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP -3) device and the REGIUS series.
06060 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP -3) If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
"Installation/Service Manual".
06061 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to Position 2)
06062 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 2 -2)
06065 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06066 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP)
06067 Receiver HP sensor NG (Position 1)
06068 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 1)
06069 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 2)
06070 Elevator Motor Control NG (Slight descent at Position 2)
06071 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 1 -2)
06072 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)
06073 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2)
06074 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP -3)
06075 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP -3)
06076 Receiver HP sensor NG (Position 2)
06077 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 2 -2)
06080 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06081 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP)
06082 Receiver HP sensor NG (Position 1)
06083 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 1)
06084 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 2)
06085 Elevator Motor Control NG (Slight descent at Position 2)
06086 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 1 -2)
06087 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)

800
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

06088 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2)
06089 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP -3)
06090 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP -3)
06091 Receiver HP sensor NG (Position 2)
06092 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 2 -2)
06100 Transporter Sensor NG (Reading Position)
06101 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position)
06102 Transporter Sensor NG (Move to HP)
06103 Transporter HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06104 Transporter Motor Control NG (Move to HP)
06105 Transporter HP sensor NG (Pressing Position)
06106 Transporter Motor Control NG (Pressing Position)
06107 Transporter Sensor NG (Reading Position 2)
06108 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position 2)
06109 Transporter Sensor NG (Pressing Position 2)
06110 Transporter Motor Control NG (Pressing Position 2)
06111 Transporter Motor Control NG (HP Passing Position)
06112 Transporter HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)
06113 Transporter Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2)
06115 Transporter Sensor NG (Reading Position)
06116 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position)
06117 Transporter Sensor NG (Move to HP)
06118 Transporter HP sensor NG (Move to HP) (1) Restart the REGIUS series.
06119 Transporter Motor Control NG (Move to HP) (2) If the error persists after restarting, restart the
device and the REGIUS series.
06120 Transporter HP sensor NG (Pressing Position) If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
06121 Transporter Motor Control NG (Pressing Position) "Installation/Service Manual".
06122 Transporter Sensor NG (Reading Position -2)
06123 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position -2)
06124 Transporter Sensor NG (Pressing Position -2)
06125 Transporter Motor Control NG (Pressing Position -2)
06126 Transporter Motor Control NG (HP Passing Position)
06127 Transporter HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)
06128 Transporter Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2)
06130 Transporter Sensor NG (Reading Position)
06131 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position)
Chapter 18
06132 Transporter Sensor NG (Move to HP)
06133 Transporter HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06134 Transporter Motor Control NG (Move to HP)
06135 Transporter HP sensor NG (Pressing Position)
06136 Transporter Motor Control NG (Pressing Position)
06137 Transporter Sensor NG (Reading Position -2)
06138 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position -2)
06139 Transporter Sensor NG (Pressing Position -2)
06140 Transporter Motor Control NG (Pressing Position -2)
06141 Transporter Motor Control NG (HP Passing Position)
06142 Transporter HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)
06143 Transporter Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2)
06150 Encoder Initializing NG

Continued on the next page

801
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

06151 Subscan Motor Control NG (Mechanical HP)
06152 Subscan Motor Control NG (Reading Completion Position)
06153 Subscan Motor Control NG (Mechanical HP -2)
06165 Encoder Initializing NG
06166 Subscan Motor Control NG (Mechanical HP)
06167 Subscan Motor Control NG (Reading Completion Position)
06168 Subscan Motor Control NG (Mechanical HP -2)
06180 Encoder Initializing NG
06181 Subscan Motor Control NG (Mechanical HP)
06182 Subscan Motor Control NG (Reading Completion Position)
06183 Subscan Motor Control NG (Mechanical HP -2)
06200 Open Insertion Shutter NG
06201 Close Insertion Shutter NG
06215 Open Insertion Shutter NG
06216 Close Insertion Shutter NG
06230 Open Insertion Shutter NG
06231 Close Insertion Shutter NG
06250 Motor Lock Release NG (Initialize)
06251 Motor Lock Release NG (Lock)
06252 Motor Lock Release NG (Release)
06265 Motor Lock Release NG (Initialize)
06266 Motor Lock Release NG (Lock)
06267 Motor Lock Release NG (Release)
(1) Restart the REGIUS series.
06280 Motor Lock Release NG (Initiale) (2) If the error persists after restarting, restart the
06281 Motor Lock Release NG (Lock) device and the REGIUS series.
06282 Motor Lock Release NG (Release) If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
"Installation/Service Manual".
06300 Justifier Sensor NG (Fixed Action)
06301 Justifier Sensor NG (Fixed)
06302 Cassette Exists(Sensor Justifier)
06303 Cassette Exists (Sensor Justifier)
06315 Justifier Sensor NG (Fixed Action)
06316 Justifier Sensor NG (Fixed)
06318 Cassette Exists (Sensor Justifier)
06330 Justifier Sensor NG (Fixed Action)
06331 Justifier Sensor NG (Fixed)
06333 Cassette Exists (Sensor Justifier)
06350 Receiver Sensor NG (Feeder)
06351 Receiver Sensor NG (Send)
06352 Receiver Sensor NG (Discharge)
06353 Receiver Sensor NG (Removed)
06354 Cassette Exists (Receiver)
06355 Cassette Exists (Receiver)
06365 Receiver Sensor NG (Feeder)
06366 Receiver Sensor NG (Send)
06367 Receiver Sensor NG (Discharge)
06368 Receiver Sensor NG (Removed)
06370 Cassette Exists (Receiver)
06380 Receiver Sensor NG (Feeder)
06381 Receiver Sensor NG (Send)

802
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

06382 Receiver Sensor NG (Discharge)
06383 Receiver Sensor NG (Removed)
06385 Cassette Exists (Receiver)
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (Before moving to Reading
06400
Position)
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (Reading Position is Stop-
06401
ping)
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (After moving to Pressing
06402
Position)
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (Before moving to Reading
06415
Position)
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (Reading Position is Stop-
06416
ping)
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (After moving to Pressing
06417
Position)
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (Before moving to Reading
06430
Position
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (Reading Position is Stop-
06431
ping)
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (After moving to Pressing
06432
Position)
Peel Sensor Plate (Reading or Erasing). Please refrain from
06450
using the cassette.
06451 Peel Sensor NG (Non-operation)
06452 Peel Sensor NG (Start)
(1) Restart the REGIUS series.
06453 Peel Sensor NG (Initialize) (2) If the error persists after restarting, restart the
06465 Peel Sensor Plate (Reading or Erasing) device and the REGIUS series.
If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
06466 Peel Sensor NG (Non-operation)
"Installation/Service Manual".
06468 Peel Sensor NG (Initialize)
06480 Peel Sensor Plate (Reading or Erasing)
06481 Peel Sensor NG (Non-operation)
06483 Peel Sensor NG (Initialize)
06500 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Initialize)
06501 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Load)
06502 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Discharge)
06503 Back Plate Cassette detection
06504 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Discharge -2)
06515 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Initialize)
Chapter 18

06516 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Load)

06517 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Discharge)
06518 Back Plate Cassette detection
06519 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Discharge -2)
06530 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Initialize)
06531 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Load)
06532 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Discharge)
06533 Back Plate Cassette detection
06534 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Discharge -2)
06550 Polygon Rotation NG
06551 Not receiving Reading Completion signal
06552 2 Erase lamps turn off (Start)

Continued on the next page

803
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

2 Erase lamps turn off (Erase). Cassette Erase is incomplete.
06553
Please retry.
06554 1 Erase lamp turns off (Start)
06567 2 Erase lamps turn off (Start)
06568 2 Erase lamps turn off (Erase)
06569 1 Erase lamp turns off (Start)
06582 2 Erase lamps turn off (Start)
06584 1 Erase lamp turns off (Start)
06600 Cooler fan's digital power supply disconnected
06650 FPGA Error (Event Driver Access failed) (1) Restart the REGIUS series.
06651 FPGA Error (Fail to access MDU) (2) If the error persists after restarting, restart the
device and the REGIUS series.
06652 FPGA Error (Fail to access LMC) If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
06653 FPGA Error (I/O Control failed) "Installation/Service Manual".
06654 FPGA Error (Fail to open Image Driver)
06655 FPGA Error (Fail to access PMU)
06668
FPGA Error (I/O Control failed)
06683
06750
Reception desk board opening and shutting position sensor
06765
NG
06780
06751
06766 Reception desk board HP location sensor NG
06785
Initialization failed. Cassette is set in the reader. Please open
07000
the door and remove the Cassette and Plate.
07001 Initialization failed. Plate still might be inside the reader.
07002 Please open the door and check inside. (1) Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
(2) Delete the image on the removed plate using the
07003 - Initialization failed. Cassette is set in the reader. Please open Erase mode.
07005 the door and remove the Cassette and Plate.
Initialization failed. Plate still might be inside the reader.
07006
Please open the door and check inside.
07007 - Initialization failed. Sensor Error was detected during initializa- Open and close the top door. Perform initialization
07016 tion. of the device again. Check if the error reoccurs.
Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please (1) Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07017 open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- (2) Delete the image on the removed plate using the
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. Erase mode.
07018 Initialization failed. Sensor Error was detected during initializa- Open and close the top door. Perform initialization
07019 tion. of the device again. Check if the error reoccurs.
Initialization failed. Cassette was detected. Please open the
07020 Open the top door and remove the cassette.
top door and remove the Cassette.
Initialization failed. Sensor Error was detected during initializa- Open and close the top door. Perform initialization
07021
tion. of the device again. Check if the error reoccurs.
07022 Single unit operation error.
07023 Initialization failed. Sensor Error was detected during initializa-
07024 tion.
Remove the cassette and perform the image read-
07100 -
Error was detected during Cassette insertion. ing operation again.
07106
(The plate image on the cassette can be read again.)

804
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please While processing the cassette, error was detected.
07107 open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- Open the door, remove the cassette/plate, and
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. erase the cassette using the Erase mode.
Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please (1) Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07108
open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- (2) Delete the image on the removed plate using the
07109
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. Erase mode.
Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
(1) When there is not a plate inside the device or in-
Cassette might not contain the plate. Please open the door side the cassette, check that the correct cassette
07110
and remove the cassette. Confirm the plate is in the cassette. has been inserted.
(2) Delete the image on the plate using the Erase
mode when the plate is inside the device.
Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please (1) Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07111 -
open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- (2) Delete the image on the removed plate using the
07117
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. Erase mode.
Critical error has occurred while processing the cassette. Remove the plate and cassette.
07118 Please contact service. Please open the top door and remove After this error occurs, even if the power is turned
the Cassette. And open the back door and remove the Plate. OFF and ON, the device error will not be cleared.
Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please (1) Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07119 -
open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- (2) Delete the image on the removed plate using the
07124
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. Erase mode.
(1) After opening the top door, remove the plate and
Critical error has occurred while processing the cassette. cassette.
07125 Please contact service. Please open the top door and remove (2) After this error occurs, even if the power is
the Cassette. And open the back door and remove the Plate. turned OFF and ON, the device error will not be
cleared.
Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please (1) Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07126 -
open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- (2) Delete the image on the removed plate using the
07129
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. Erase mode.
Remove the cassette.
Cassette Size error was detected during cassette insertion.
07130 Check the cassette size and confirm that the cas-
Please confirm whether the cassette size is supported.
sette is compatible with the device.
Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please (1) Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07131 -
open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- (2) Delete the image on the removed plate using the
07135
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. Erase mode.
(1) Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
Cassette size and the Plate size might not match. Please
(2) Confirm that the cassette and place size match.
open the door and remove the Cassette. Confirm the size of
07136 (3) Load the removed plate with a cassette of the
the cassette and plate. Erase the cassette in ERASE MODE
matching size, and erase the image using the
before using the cassette again.
Erase mode.
07137 Single unit operation error.
Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please (1) Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07138
open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- (2) Delete the image on the removed plate using the
07139
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. Erase mode.
Chapter 18

Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please While processing the cassette, and error was de-
07140 -
open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- tected. Open the door, remove the cassette/plate,
07142
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. and erase the cassette using the Erase mode.
Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please (1) Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07143 -
open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- (2) Delete the image on the removed plate using the
07152
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. Erase mode.
Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please While processing the cassette, and error was de-
07153 open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- tected. Open the door, remove the cassette/plate,
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. and erase the cassette using the Erase mode.

Continued on the next page

805
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

Error was detected while processing the cassette. Please While processing the cassette, and error was de-
open the door and remove the Cassette and Plate. After re- tected. Open the door, remove the cassette/plate,
07154
moval, erase the cassette in ERASE MODE. Moreover, please and erase the cassette using the Erase mode. Also,
clean a roller. clean the rollers.
07200 -
07224
Single unit operation error.
07300 -
07354
07400 - Initialization failed. Reader error was detected during initializa- Open and close the top door. Perform initialization
07409 tion. of the device again. Check if the error reoccurs.
An error was detected in the device when erasing
the image.
07410 (1) As the image reading is complete, wait for the
Erasure error was detected.
07411 image transfer to finish.
(2) After confirming that the transfer is complete,
remove the cassette.
07412 -
Reader error was detected. Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07414
Initialization failed. Reader error was detected during initializa- Open and close the top door. Perform initialization
07415
tion. of the device again. Check if the error reoccurs.
07416 -
Reader error was detected. Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07419
Initialization failed. Reader error was detected during initializa- Open and close the top door. Perform initialization
07420
tion. of the device again. Check if the error reoccurs.
07421
Reader error was detected. Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07422
07600 -
Single unit operation error.
07622
07650
Reader error was detected.
07651
07700 Initialization failed. Reader error was detected during initializa- Open and close the top door. Perform initialization
07701 tion. of the device again. Check if the error reoccurs.
07710 - After this error occurs, even if the power is turned
Detected Memory error.
07746 OFF and ON, the device error will not be cleared.
07747 -
Detected Data error.
07749
An error was detected in the transferred data.
07750 - (1) Check the transmitted data and the communica-
Detected Data error.
07759 tion cable.
(2) Afterward, power the device OFF and ON.
An error was detected in the cassette size param-
07800 Parameters which cannot be processed in the Reader Settings
eter.
07801 are specified
Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
07802 Reader error was detected. Remove the cassette and plate from the device.
Exam. Tags which cannot be processed by the
Parameters which cannot be processed in the Reader Settings
07803 device have been indicated. Recheck the study con-
are specified
ditions.
07810 Top door open Close the top door.
07811 Back door open Close the back door.

806
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

07812 Left side door open Close the left door.
The insertion of the cassette is not correct. Insert
07820 Cassette insertion is not proper enough. Push it moreover.
the cassette correctly.
Failed to take the plate out of the cassette.  Open upper door Removing the plate from the cassette failed. Open
07821
and remove cassette. the top door and remove the cassette.
The cassette cannot be processed as the internal
Cannot start cassette process because of overheating. Open temperature is too high.
07822
upper door and remove cassette. Try it again after a while. After opening the top door and removing the cas-
sette, wait a while before inserting a cassette.
Erase lamp life had exceeded. Please call service to get lamp
07823 The Erasure Lamp need to be replaced.
changed.
Service call. Program data of reader corrupted. Need to re-
07999
cover the program.
10000 Memory Error
11000 Hardware Error
12000 Msg Receiving Timeout (High Voltage ON)
12001 Msg Receiving Timeout (Laser ON) Restart this device and the REGIUS series.
If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
12002 Msg Receiving Timeout (Mech. Ready) "Installation/Service Manual".
12003 Msg Receiving Timeout (Mech. Standby)
12010 Serial communication Error (Mech. Resend Overflow)
12011 Serial communication Error (Mech. CRC error Overflow)
12012 Serial communication Error (Mech. Overrun)
12013 Serial communication Error (Mech. Timeout)
12020 Msg Error (Mech. illegal Msg)
12200 Msg Receiving Timeout (Net Initialize)
12201 Msg Receiving Timeout (Net Ready)
12202 Msg Receiving Timeout (Put Shading)
12203 Msg Receiving Timeout (Status Check)
12204 Msg Receiving Timeout (Barcode Seek)
12205 Msg Receiving Timeout (Net Command)
12206 Msg Receiving Timeout (Reader End)
12207 Msg Receiving Timeout (Put Qrv)
12208 Msg Receiving Timeout (Put Config)
12209 Msg Receiving Timeout (Put Information)
(1) Restart the REGIUS series.
12210 Serial communication Error (Net Resend Overflow) (2) If the error persists after restarting, restart the
12211 Serial communication Error (Net CRC error Overflow) device and the REGIUS series.
12212 Serial communication Error (Net Overrun) If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
"Installation/Service Manual".
Chapter 18

12213 Serial communication Error (Net Timeout)

12220 Msg Error (Net illegal Msg)
13000 Optical Unit Error (H_Sync)
13001 Optical Unit Error (Polygon ID)
13003 Optical Unit Error (Polygon Stability)
13005 Optical Unit Error (Laser Intensity)
13030 SCB Control Error (DMA transfer)
13031 SCB Control Error (SCOM communication)
14000 Signal Proc Error (Gain Overflow)
14001 Signal Proc Error (Gain Underflow)
14002 Signal Proc Error (Offset Overflow)
14003 Signal Proc Error (Offset Underflow)
14010 Signal Proc Error (QRV Overflow)

Continued on the next page

807
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

14011 Signal Proc Error (QRV Underflow)
14012 Signal Proc Error (QRV No Convergency)
14013 Signal Proc Error (Shading No Data)
14014 Signal Proc Error (QRV No Data)
15000 Signal Proc Error (Initialization Failure)
22101 Serial Communication Error (N1 Counter Over)
22103 Serial Communication Error (N3 Counter Over)
22104 Serial Communication Error (N4 Counter Over)
23000 Program Error (Main Control)
23100 Program Error (Sequence Control)
23200 Program Error (Data File Size)
23900 Program Error (Firmware Update)
24000 Network Error (JM Connection) (1) Restart the REGIUS series.
24500 Network Error (JM Configuration) (2) If the error persists after restarting, restart the
device and the REGIUS series.
25000 Network Error (Non-Timeout) If the error persists, refer to the REGIUS series
25100 Network Error (Timeout:in General Communication) "Installation/Service Manual".
25110 Network Error (Rejection:in General Communication)
25200 Network Error (Timeout:in Image Transmission)
25210 Network Error (Timeout:after Image Scanning)
25300 Network Error (Timeout/Rejection:in Image Transmission)
25500 Network Error (Destination:Not Found)
26000 Operation Error (Invalid Job)
26010 Operation Error (Invalid Job Parameter)
26100 Operation Error (Modeless Job)
26200 Operation Error (Invalid Console)
26300 Operation Error (Reader Busy)
26900 Operation Error (PowerOFF under Job Execution)
26999 Operation Error (Not-Supported Command)
The reader's power was cut while reading, and the
Reader is not in the status of sending image. Image transmis-
27000 image data was lost.
sion failed.
Perform the exposure again and reread the image.
USB was disconnected while calibration. Re-try maintenance
27001
command.
Maintenance operation failed as USB was disconnected dur-
27002
ing its operation. Re-try maintenance command.
Service call. Version of program doesn't correspond. Need to
27010
update program.
This message is displayed when one reader con-
nects to a reader which is transferring image data.
(1) When the reader connection has changed
Reconnect to the device processing the read-
ing of the original image. With the return to the
correct connection condition, transfer will be
performed again. (However, this only occurs
when the device and the reader's processes
This reader is in process. Connect to the former PC. To termi-
27100 are continued. If they are powered OFF or the
nate process, turn off the reader. The image will be deleted.
process is stopped, the data transfer will not be
performed.)
(2) When the device was restarted while processing
an image reading
The image data will not be transferred. Remove
the plate and cassette and power the reader
OFF and ON. Delete the image on the removed
plate using the Erase mode.

808
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

Reconnect to the original reader performing the
processing. With the return to the correct connec-
tion condition, transfer will be performed again.
(However, this only occurs when the device and
the reader's processes are continued. If they are
powered OFF or the process is stopped, the data
The reader was switched. To complete image reading, connect
27101 transfer will not be performed.)
to the former reader.
If a connection with the original reader cannot be
established, restart the device. The image data can-
not be transferred again. Also, remove the plate and
cassette and power the reader OFF and ON. Delete
the image on the removed plate using the Erase
mode.
The message will be displayed if multiple readers
are connected to one system.
Readers which have not been detected by the de-
Another reader is working in the system. This reader is unus- vice cannot be used.
27105
able now. Stop another reader if you want to use this reader. To used a connected reader , after unplugging all
reader USB cables, connect only the reader to be
used. (When unplugging readers, confirm that the
readers are not performing any processes. )
USB was disconnected during image transmission. Connect Confirm that the USB cable is connected. After con-
27110
USB. Image transmission will start after connection. necting, continue the transfer of image data.
Communication error has occurred with PRINTER communi- Failed to acquire printer information. Restart the
27750
cation. Check the communication destination. printer and reacquire printer information.
27751 - Communication error has occurred with PRINTER communi- Communication with the printer failed.
27759 cation .Check the communication destination Output again.
27770 Internal error occurred in HOST communication. Check the HOST sending failed.
27771 communication destination. Check the HOST status, and output again.
There is not enough free space in the media. Check
35940 Space Not Enough the media's free space, and adjust the study to be
outputted.
35941 Media Write Error
35942 Writing to the media failed.
Media Write Error
35943 Check the media status, and output again.
JPEG creation failed.
35944 Media Write Error
Output again.
35945 Time Out Error
An error occurred in the printer's ejection magazine.
36200 BAD RECEIVE MGZ
Check the printer status.
An error occurred in the printer's supply magazine.
36201 BAD SUPPLY MGZ
Check the printer status.
The printer is in the process of calibration. Wait for
36202 CALIBRATING
Chapter 18
the calibration to finish, and output again.
An error occurred in the printer's calibration. Check
36203 CALIBRATION ERR
the printer status.
A problem occurred with the developer machine's
36204 CHECK CHEMISTRY
chemicals. Check the developer machine.
A problem occurred with the sorter. Check the
36205 CHECK SORTER
sorter.
The developer fluid level is empty. Replenish the
36206 CHEMICALS EMPTY
developer machine's chemicals.
The developer fluid level is low. Replenish the de-
36207 CHEMICALS LOW
veloper machine's chemicals.
The printer's cover, drawer, or door is open.
36208 COVER OPEN
Check the printer status.

Continued on the next page

809
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

The printer is not operational due to a setting error.
36209 ELEC CONFIG ERR
Check the printer settings.
The imager is not operational due to a problem with
36210 ELEC DOWN electronic hardware.
Check the imager.
The printer is not operational due to a software er-
36211 ELEC SW ERROR ror.
Check the printer status.
There is no more 8×10 film.
36212 EMPTY 8X10
Set the film.
There is no more 8×10 blue film.
36213 EMPTY 8X10 BLUE
Set the film.
There is no more 8×10 clear film.
36214 EMPTY 8X10 CLR
Set the film.
There is no more 8×10 paper.
36215 EMPTY 8X10 PAPR
Set the paper.
There is no more 10×12 film.
36216 EMPTY 10X12
Set the film.
There is no more 10×12 blue film.
36217 EMPTY 10X12 BLUE
Set the film.
There is no more 10×12 clear film.
36218 EMPTY 10X12 CLR
Set the film.
There is no more 10×12 paper.
36219 EMPTY 10X12 PAPR
Set the paper.
There is no more 10×14 film.
36220 EMPTY 10X14
Set the film.
There is no more 10×14 blue film.
36221 EMPTY 10X14 BLUE
Set the film.
There is no more 10×14 clear film.
36222 EMPTY 10X14 CLR
Set the film.
There is no more 10×14 paper.
36223 EMPTY 10X14 PAPR
Set the paper.
There is no more 11×14 film.
36224 EMPTY 11X14
Set the film.
There is no more 11×14 blue film.
36225 EMPTY 11X14 BLUE
Set the film.
There is no more 11×14 clear film.
36226 EMPTY 11X14 CLR
Set the film.
There is no more 11×14 paper.
36227 EMPTY 11X14 PAPR
Set the paper.
There is no more 14×14 film.
36228 EMPTY 14X14
Set the film.
There is no more 14×14 blue film.
36229 EMPTY 14X14 BLUE
Set the film.
There is no more 14×14 clear film.
36230 EMPTY 14X14 CLR
Set the film.
There is no more 14×14 paper.
36231 EMPTY 14X14 PAPR
Set the paper.
There is no more 14×17 film.
36232 EMPTY 14X17
Set the film.
There is no more 14×17 blue film.
36233 EMPTY 14X17 BLUE
Set the film.
There is no more 14×17 clear film.
36234 EMPTY 14X17 CLR
Set the film.

810
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

There is no more 14×17 paper.
36235 EMPTY 14X17 PAPR
Set the paper.
There is no more 24×24 film.
36236 EMPTY 24X24
Set the film.
There is no more 24×24 blue film.
36237 EMPTY 24X24 BLUE
Set the film.
There is no more 24×24 clear film.
36238 EMPTY 24X24 CLR
Set the film.
There is no more 24×24 paper.
36239 EMPTY 24X24 PAPR
Set the paper.
There is no more 24×30 film.
36240 EMPTY 24X30
Set the film.
There is no more 24×30 blue film.
36241 EMPTY 24X30 BLUE
Set the film.
There is no more 24×30 clear film.
36242 EMPTY 24X30 CLR
Set the film.
There is no more 24×30 paper.
36243 EMPTY 24X30 PAPR
Set the paper.
There is no more A4 paper.
36244 EMPTY A4 PAPR
Set the paper.
There are no more A4 transparencies.
36245 EMPTY A4 TRANS
Set the transparencies.
A problem of unknown cause occurred with the
36246 EXPOSURE FAILURE exposure unit.
Check the printer.
A film jam occurred in the printer.
36247 FILM JAM
Check the printer.
A film feed-related error occurred.
36248 FILM TRANSP ERR
Check the printer.
36249 FINISHER EMPTY The finisher is empty. Check the finisher.
36250 FINISHER ERROR An error occurred in the finisher. Check the finisher.
36251 FINISHER LOW The finisher's supply is low. Check the finisher.
Low supply on 8×10 film.
36252 LOW 8X10
Set the film.
Low supply on 8×10 blue film.
36253 LOW 8X10 BLUE
Set the film.
Low supply on 8×10 clear film.
36254 LOW 8X10 CLR
Set the film.
Low supply on 8×10 paper.
36255 LOW 8X10 PAPR
Set the paper.
Low supply on 10×12 film.
Chapter 18

36256 LOW 10X12

Set the film.
Low supply on 10×12 blue film.
36257 LOW 10X12 BLUE
Set the film.
Low supply on 10×12 clear film.
36258 LOW 10X12 CLR
Set the film.
Low supply on 10×12 paper.
36259 LOW 10X12 PAPR
Set the paper.
Low supply on 10×14 film.
36260 LOW 10X14
Set the film.
Low supply on 10×14 blue film.
36261 LOW 10X14 BLUE
Set the film.

Continued on the next page

811
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

Low supply on 10×14 clear film.
36262 LOW 10X14 CLR
Set the film.
Low supply on 10×14 paper.
36263 LOW 10X14 PAPR
Set the paper.
Low supply on 11×14 film.
36264 LOW 11X14
Set the film.
Low supply on 11×14 blue film.
36265 LOW 11X14 BLUE
Set the film.
Low supply on 11×14 clear film.
36266 LOW 11X14 CLR
Set the film.
Low supply on 11×14 paper.
36267 LOW 11X14 PAPR
Set the paper.
Low supply on 14×14 film.
36268 LOW 14X14
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×14 blue film.
36269 LOW 14X14 BLUE
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×14 clear film.
36270 LOW 14X14 CLR
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×14 paper.
36271 LOW 14X14 PAPR
Set the paper.
Low supply on 14×17 film.
36272 LOW 14X17
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×17 blue film.
36273 LOW 14X17 BLUE
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×17 clear film.
36274 LOW 14X17 CLR
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×17 paper.
36275 LOW 14X17 PAPR
Set the paper.
Low supply on 24×24 film.
36276 LOW 24X24
Set the film.
Low supply on 24×24 blue film.
36277 LOW 24X24 BLUE
Set the film.
Low supply on 24×24 clear film.
36278 LOW 24X24 CLR
Set the film.
Low supply on 24×24 paper.
36279 LOW 24X24 PAPR
Set the paper.
Low supply on 24×30 film.
36280 LOW 24X30
Set the film.
Low supply on 24×30 blue film.
36281 LOW 24X30 BLUE
Set the film.
Low supply on 24×30 clear film.
36282 LOW 24X30 CLR
Set the film.
Low supply on 24×30 paper.
36283 LOW 24X30 PAPR
Set the paper.
Low supply on A4 paper.
36284 LOW A4 PAPR
Set the paper.
Low supply on A4 transparencies.
36285 LOW A4 TRANS
Set the transparencies.
The printer's discharge magazine cannot be used.
36286 NO RECEIVE MGZ
Check the printer.
The printer does not have a ribbon cartridge. Check
36287 NO RIBBON
the printer.
36288 NO SUPPLY MGZ There is no supply magazine. Check the printer.
36289 CHECK PRINTER The printer could not be prepared. Check the printer.
The developer machine cannot be used. Check the
36290 CHECK PROC
developer machine.

812
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

The printer cannot be used due to an unspecified
36291 PRINTER DOWN
reason. Check the printer.
The printer cannot be used because it is currently
36292 PRINTER BUSY
processing. Output once the printer can be used.
The printer cannot be used because the printer
36293 PRINT BUFF FULL buffer is full. Output again once the printer can be
used.
The printer is not ready because it is still warming
36294 PRINTER INIT
up, etc. Output once the printer is prepared.
The printer is offline. Output after the printer is on-
36295 PRINTER OFFLINE
line.
The developer machine cannot be used. Check the
36296 PROC DOWN
developer machine.
The developer machine cannot be used as it is cur-
36297 PROC INIT rently being initialized. Output once the printer can
be used.
The developer machine's liquid waste tank is nearly
36298 PROC OVERFLOW FL
full. Empty the liquid waste tank chemicals.
The developer machine's liquid waste tank is full.
36299 PROC OVERFLOW HI
Empty the liquid waste tank chemicals.
36300 QUEUED The printer job is pending in the job queue.
36301 RECEIVER FULL The discharge magazine is full. Check the printer.
The requested film magazine has been inserted, but
36302 REQ MED NOT INST
it is unusable. Check the printer.
The requested film cannot be used with this printer.
36303 REQ MED NOT AVAI
Check the selected film.
An error occurred with the printer's ribbon cartridge.
36304 RIBBON ERROR
Check the printer.
36305 SUPPLY EMPTY The supply magazine is empty. Check the printer.
Low supply in the supply magazine. Check the
36306 SUPPLY LOW
printer.
An undefined error occurred.
36307 UNKNOWN
Output again.
There is no more 8×10 DR film.
36308 EMPTY 8X10 DR
Set the film.
There is no more 8×10 DR blue film.
36309 EMPTY 8X10 DR B
Set the film.
There is no more 8×10 DR clear film.
36310 EMPTY 8X10 DR C
Set the film.
There is no more 10×12 DR film.
36311 EMPTY 10X12 DR
Set the film.
Chapter 18

There is no more 10×12 DR blue film.

36312 EMPTY 10X12 DR B
Set the film.
There is no more 10×12 DR clear film.
36313 EMPTY 10X12 DR C
Set the film.
There is no more 11×14 DR film.
36314 EMPTY 11X14 DR
Set the film.
There is no more 11×14 DR blue film.
36315 EMPTY 11X14 DR B
Set the film.
There is no more 11×14 DR clear film.
36316 EMPTY 11X14 DR C
Set the film.
There is no more 14×14 DR film.
36317 EMPTY 14X14 DR
Set the film.

Continued on the next page

813
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

There is no more 14×14 DR blue film.
36318 EMPTY 14X14 DR B
Set the film.
There is no more 14×14 DR clear film.
36319 EMPTY 14X14 DR C
Set the film.
There is no more 14×17 DR film.
36320 EMPTY 14X17 DR
Set the film.
There is no more 14×17 DR blue film.
36321 EMPTY 14X17 DR B
Set the film.
There is no more 14×17 DR clear film.
36322 EMPTY 14X17 DR C
Set the film.
There is no more 24×24 DR film.
36323 EMPTY 24X24 DR
Set the film.
There is no more 24×24 DR blue film.
36324 EMPTY 24X24 DR B
Set the film.
There is no more 24×24 DR clear film.
36325 EMPTY 24X24 DR C
Set the film.
There is no more 24×30 DR film.
36326 EMPTY 24X30 DR
Set the film.
There is no more 24×30 DR blue film.
36327 EMPTY 24X30 DR B
Set the film.
There is no more 24×30 DR clear film.
36328 EMPTY 24X30 DR C
Set the film.
Low supply on 8×10 DR film.
36329 LOW 8X10 DR
Set the film.
Low supply on 8×10 DR blue film.
36330 LOW 8X10 DR B
Set the film.
Low supply on 8×10 DR clear film.
36331 LOW 8X10 DR C
Set the film.
Low supply on 10×12 DR film.
36332 LOW 10X12 DR
Set the film.
Low supply on 10×12 DR blue film.
36333 LOW 10X12 DR B
Set the film.
Low supply on 10×12 DR clear film.
36334 LOW 10X12 DR C
Set the film.
Low supply on 11×14 DR film.
36335 LOW 11X14 DR
Set the film.
Low supply on 11×14 DR blue film.
36336 LOW 11X14 DR B
Set the film.
Low supply on 11×14 DR clear film.
36337 LOW 11X14 DR C
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×14 DR film.
36338 LOW 14X14 DR
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×14 DR blue film.
36339 LOW 14X14 DR B
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×14 DR clear film.
36340 LOW 14X14 DR C
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×17 DR film.
36341 LOW 14X17 DR
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×17 DR blue film.
36342 LOW 14X17 DR B
Set the film.
Low supply on 14×17 DR clear film.
36343 LOW 14X17 DR C
Set the film.
Low supply on 24×24 DR film.
36344 LOW 24X24 DR
Set the film.
Low supply on 24×24 DR blue film.
36345 LOW 24X24 DR B
Set the film.

814
 18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

Low supply on 24×24 DR clear film.
36346 LOW 24X24 DR C
Set the film.
Low supply on 24×30 DR film.
36347 LOW 24X30 DR
Set the film.
Low supply on 24×30 DR blue film.
36348 LOW 24X30 DR B
Set the film.
Low supply on 24×30 DR clear film.
36349 LOW 24X30 DR C
Set the film.
37350 Internal error occurred in DICOM communication. Contact a
37351 service representative.
Internal error occurred in DICOM communication. Contact a Failed to get DICOM communication settings.
37352
service representative. Check the communication settings.
Internal error occurred in DICOM communication. Contact a Connection failed.
37353
service representative. Check the communication settings or the server.
37354 - Internal error occurred in DICOM communication. Contact a Communications failed.
37356 service representative. Check the host or network.
Internal error occurred in DICOM communication. Contact a Communications shutdown processing failed.
37357
service representative. Check if sending is complete.
Internal error occurred in DICOM communication. Contact a Communications were paused by the host.
37358
service representative. Check the host.
37390 -
Media Write Error
37392
37620 Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a
37621 service representative.
Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a Failed to acquire imager information.
37622
service representative. Restart the imager and check it again.
37623 Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a
37624 service representative.
Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a Communication with the imager failed.
37625
service representative. Try performing output again.
37626 Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a
37627 service representative.
Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a Communication with the imager failed.
37628
service representative. Try performing output again.
37629 Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a
37630 service representative.
Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a Communication with the imager failed.
37631
service representative. Try performing output again.
37632 -
37635 Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a
37640 service representative.
Chapter 18

37641
Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a Communication with the imager failed.
37642
service representative. Try performing output again.
37643 Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a
37644 service representative.
Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a Communication with the imager failed.
37645
service representative. Try performing output again.
37646 Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a
37647 service representative.

Continued on the next page

815
18.2 Error codes and countermeasures

Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a Communication with the imager failed.
37648
service representative. Try performing output again.
37649 Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a
37650 service representative.
Internal error occurred in PRINTER communication. Contact a Communication with the imager failed.
37651
service representative. Try performing output again.
37670 - Internal error occurred in HOST communication. Contact a
37672 service representative.
Internal error occurred in HOST communication. Contact a Host communications failed.
37673
service representative. Check server or network.
37674 Internal error occurred in HOST communication. Contact a
37675 service representative.
Internal error occurred in HOST communication. Contact a Host communications failed.
37676
service representative. Check server or network.
HOST A-ASSOCIATE is rejected. Please check communica- Connection request for communication with the host
37680
tion setting. was denied. Check the communication settings.
Connection request for communication with the
PRINT A-ASSOCIATE is rejected. Please check communica-
37680 imager was denied. Check the communication set-
tion setting.
tings.
Connection request for communication with the host
37681 HOST A-ASSOCIATE is rejected transient.
was temporarily denied. Check the host.
Connection request for communication with the
37681 PRINT A-ASSOCIATE is rejected transient.
imager was temporarily denied. Check the imager.
Reading order is not selected. In order to perform image
After pressing [OK] and closing the dialog, set the
50000A retrieval, click on [OK] button to close this dialog, and then
reading sequence.
select reading order
Reading order is not selected. To eject the cassette, click on (1) Press [Eject] to remove the cassette.
50000B [Eject] button. In order to perform image retrieval, click on [OK] (2) After pressing [OK] and closing the dialog, set
button to close this dialog, and then select reading order. the reading sequence.
50001A Required to re-erase since imaging plate was exposed very As a large amount of X-rays were used during expo-
50001AB much. sure, deletion needs to be performed again.
Check the console network connection and the CR
An error occurred during image reading.
cassette reader network connection. After restarting
90001 Check the network.
the CR Cassette reader, read the CR Cassette with
Restart the reader.
which exposure performed again.
Image reception is not completed. Check the console network connection and the CR
90002
Check the network. cassette reader network connection.
To enable mammography function, JM setting has been
90003 Restart all CR readers connected to this device.
changed. Please restart the CR reader connecting to this CS-7
CR Process Initialization failed. Please Restart the console or
99999 Restart the device.
call service.

816
 Chapter
19
Maintenance
This section describes the maintenance and inspection items
for ensuring the optimum use of this device.

817
 19.1 Maintenance and inspection items

This chapter describes the inspections and cleaning. Maintenance task Maintenance interval
Number of the connections of
When performing periodic
UF Cable in the AeroDR Stitch-
maintenance
19.1.1 Maintenance and in- ing Unit
spection interval Number of the connections of
When performing periodic
AeroDR Battery Charger spring
maintenance
connector
O
OMaintenance items performed by the user
Number of the XIF or XGIF ex- When performing periodic
Maintenance task Maintenance interval posures maintenance
Check operation of cooling fan Weekly Number of switch exposures
When performing periodic
when installing S-SRM
Check built-in clock time Weekly maintenance
* S-SRM is not used in Japan
Clean operation unit display Weekly Number of switch exposures
When performing periodic
Clean keyboard Monthly when using the AeroDR Por-
maintenance
table RF Unit.
Clean mouse Monthly
When a new version is
Upgrading of REGIUS
offered
O
OMaintenance items handled by a service engineer Upgrading of REGIUS SIGMA/ When a new version is
SIGMA2 offered
Maintenance items for this device Unevenness calibration When an error occurs

Maintenance task Maintenance interval Sensitivity calibration When an error occurs

Every 5 years, or 20,000 Upgrading of Sub Monitor Adap- When a new version is
Replacement of the hard disk tor firmware offered
hours of operation
System backup Every 6 months When replacing device or
Deletion of device information
discontinuing use
Defragmentation of the hard disk Once a year
When replacing a RE-
When a new version is GIUS halogen lamp,
Upgrading of this device Reset of the counter/duration of
offered REGIUS plate or AeroDR
use
Generator Interface Unit
Adjustment of the position of the
When an error occurs XIF or XGIF board
touch panel
When performing periodic
Uninstallation of the touch panel driver When an error occurs Number of exposures
maintenance
Monitor brightness adjustment When an error occurs
Confirming the number of days When performing peri-
the computer has been operating odic maintenance
Number of days the computer's
battery has been operating when When performing peri-
operating with a portable X-ray odic maintenance
device

Maintenance items for all devices

Maintenance task Maintenance interval
When a new version is
Upgrading of AeroDR Detector
offered
Upgrading of AeroDR Genera- When a new version is
tor Interface Unit offered
Upgrading of AeroDR Portable When a new version is
RF Unit offered
Calibration Every 3 months
AeroDR Detector analysis
(unevenness analysis, defect When an error occurs
analysis)
Number of the connections of When performing periodic
AeroDR I/F Cable maintenance
Number of the connections of When performing periodic
AeroDR UF Cable maintenance

818
 19.1 Maintenance and inspection items

19.1.2 Confirmation and

cleaning
Check and clean the following items daily.

OO Check operation of the cooling fan

Check that the cooling fan has not stopped, and is not
making abnormal sounds (rattling). Periodically clean
the cooling fan exhaust outlet with a vacuum cleaner.

OO Check built-in clock time

Check and correct the built-in clock time with user
tools. Check periodically.

OO Clean the operation unit display

The operation unit display requires periodic cleaning.
At that time, be careful of the following points.
• Wipe with a soft cloth.
• Do not use a chemical cloth or wet cloth.
• Do not spray water or other liquids directly onto
the display.

OO Clean the keyboard

Check that the power for the whole system includ-
ing this device and all peripheral devices is turned off
(power lamp is out), then wipe the surface of the key-
board with a dry cloth.

OO Clean the mouse

In order for the optical mouse to function properly,
the internal optical sensor must be able to properly
measure the direction and amount of movement. To
prevent the sensor from getting dirty, use in a low-dust
environment, and clean periodically with a dry cloth.

Chapter 19

819
 19.2 Replacement of the hard disk

The procedure for replacing the hard disk is as follows. 8 Lift off the power supply device.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The HP 8100 Elite is used as an example here. The
installation process may differ depending on the de-
vice you use.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Turn off the power of this device.

• Remove any media from the CD/DVD drive be-
fore shutting off power.

• The hard disk is under the power supply device.

2 Remove the power cable from the wall
outlet.
9 Remove the power and data cables from
the hard disk.
3 Remove all cables from this device.

4 Remove the upright stand if attached.

10 Remove the hard disk.

5 Remove the cover lock, if attached.

6 Remove the cover.

1
1
2
2

11 Remove the fastening screws from the

old hard disk, and attach them to the new
hard disk.

7 Lift off the drive cage.

820
 19.2 Replacement of the hard disk

12 Attach the hard disk.

13 Connect the power and data cables to the

hard disk.

14 Replace the drive cage to its original posi-

tion, and attach the cover.

15 Check whether this device starts normally.

Chapter 19

821
 19.3 Defragmentation of the hard disk

The procedure for defragging the hard disk is as fol- 4 Right-click the hard disk to perform the
lows. defragmentation, and press [Properties].

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

5 Select the [Tools] tab, and press [Defragment now...].

3 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [Computer].

6 Press [Defragment disk].

• Defragmentation is started. Please wait until completed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Depending on the use environment, it may take from
several minutes to a few hours to complete.
• Process speed of this device may be slower during
the defragmentation.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

822
 19.4 System information backup and restoring

Please back up the system information of this device

on a regular basis. In the event of malfunction, the sys- 19.4.2 System information
tem can be restored. It is also useful for error analysis restoring
in the event of an error.
Back up the system information; when the system in-
formation is corrupted, it can be restored.
19.4.1 System information Moreover, the system information can be used for an-
backup other unit of this device.

Be sure to back up the system information of this device in

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
case of system failure.
• Unique information of this device, such as the host
name and IP address, will have the same setting when
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • restored, so it cannot be connected to the same net-
• For the system information backup, refer to "4.22 work. First disconnect from the network and reset the
Backup of the setting data of this device". unique information of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Please do not restore the license file to another unit
of this device. The restored unit of this device will not
start.
• Items set on the CS-7 setting screen for the service
tool such as the device's [Institution Name], [Institution
Address], [Telephone Number], [Department Name],
[Station AE Title], and [Console Name] cannot be
backed up or restored. It is necessary to record the
settings in a memo, etc., and then re-enter them on
the CS-7 setting screen after restoration.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.
Chapter 19

823
19.4 System information backup and restoring

3 Create a restore folder on the Windows

desktop to copy the system information
files already backed up.

4 Restart this device.

5 Start the service tool.

6 Select the [User Tool] tab.

• The restore screen is displayed.

8 Press [Browse], and then specify the

folder to restore.

9 Select [Setting].

• The user tool screen is displayed.

7 Press [Backup/Restore], then press [Restore].

• Multiple [Options] cannot be selected at the

same time.
• The data that can be restored is displayed in the
list.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To restore the study data including images, select
[Study]. To restore the patient database, select [DB].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

824
 19.4 System information backup and restoring

10 Select the data to restore from the list. 13 Press [OK].

14 Press [Close].
11 Press [Execute].

• Returns to the user tool screen.

15 Exit the user tool, and restart this device.

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

12 Press [OK].
Chapter 19

• The restore operation starts.

825
 19.5 Upgrading of AeroDR SYSTEM

The procedure for upgrading the AeroDR SYSTEM is 2 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the
as follows. AeroDR I/F Cable.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• Before updating, confirm that the device to be updated • It is all right to connect the AeroDR Detector to the
is correctly connected and that power is on. AeroDR UF Cable, or to insert it into the AeroDR Bat-
• Be sure to upgrade the version of this device before tery Charger.
upgrading AeroDR SYSTEM. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• While upgrading, pay attention to the following.
–– Do not operate this device. 3 Start the service tool.
–– Do not turn off this device, the AeroDR Interface
Unit, the AeroDR Detector or the AeroDR Stitching
4 Press the device icon of AeroDR Detector.
Unit.
–– Do not remove the Ethernet cable of this device,
the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit or the AeroDR
Stitching Unit.
–– Do not remove the AeroDR I/F Cables or AeroDR
UF Cables connected to the AeroDR Detector.
• It is necessary to set the same firmware file to all de-
vices when in a roaming environment.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

19.5.1 Upgrading of AeroDR

Detector
The procedure for upgrading the AeroDR Detector is
as follows.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Detector can be connected only using
a wired connection. Connect it using the AeroDR I/F
Cable.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Insert the CD for updating to the latest

version into the CD/DVD drive.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When this device is used with the portable X-ray de- • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
vice, connect an external CD/DVD drive and insert the
update CD for the latest version.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• If an auto-play screen appears, press [Cancel]
to close the screen.

826
 19.5 Upgrading of AeroDR SYSTEM

5 Press [Firmware Update]. 8 Press [Update] on the AeroDR Detector

that is to be updated.

• During the update, [Progress] is displayed in

[Device Ver.].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If the version is not displayed, press [Retrieve ver-
sion].
• Update is not necessary if [Device Ver.] and [Updated
Ver.] agree.
Only when [Device Ver.] and [Updated Ver.] do not
agree, [Device Ver.] is displayed in red and [Update]
becomes available.
• The display message [Updating. Please wait for a mo-
ment.] may be shown for a while.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The firmware update screen is displayed.
9 Press [OK] on the confirmation screen.
6 Press [File import].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The time required for upgrading and the operation dur-
ing upgrading are as follows.

Equipment Time
Operation
name required
During update
Approx.
Busy/error LED (orange):
15 min-
AeroDR Fast flashing
utes at
Detector Update completed
the maxi-
Status LED (green): Slow
mum
flashing

• When downgrading the firmware, press [Update] to

• The [Select firmware file] screen is displayed. display the following screen. To execute the down-
Chapter 19

grade, press [OK].

7 Select the firmware file, and press [Open].

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

827
19.5 Upgrading of AeroDR SYSTEM

10 Press [OK].
19.5.2 Upgrading of AeroDR
• Confirm that the [Device Ver.] and [Updated
Ver.] match. Generator Interface Unit
The procedure for upgrading the AeroDR Generator
11 Press [Close]. Interface Unit is as follows.

12 Eject the update CD from the CD/DVD 1 Insert the CD for updating to the latest
drive. version into the CD/DVD drive.
• If an auto-play screen appears, press [Cancel]
to close the screen.

2 Start the service tool.

3 Press the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit

icon.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

828
 19.5 Upgrading of AeroDR SYSTEM

4 Press [Firmware Update] on the sub-menu 7 Press [Update].

screen.

• During the update, [Progress] is displayed in

[Device Ver.].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If the version is not displayed, press [Retrieve ver-
sion].
• Update is not necessary if [Device Ver.] and [Updated
Ver.] agree.
Only when [Device Ver.] and [Updated Ver.] do not
agree, [Device Ver.] is displayed in red and [Update]
becomes available.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

8 Press [OK] on the confirmation screen.

• The firmware update screen is displayed.

5 Press [File import].

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The time required for upgrading and the operation dur-
ing upgrading are as follows.

Equipment Time
Operation
name required
During update
Status LED (green):
AeroDR Flashing
Generator Approx. 3 Busy/error LED (orange):
Interface minutes Flashing (for several
Unit seconds)
Update completed
Status LED (green): Lit
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

9 Press [OK].
• Confirm that the [Device Ver.] and [Updated
Chapter 19

• The [Select firmware file] screen is displayed. Ver.] match.

6 Select the firmware file, and press [Open]. 10 Press [Close].

11 Eject the update CD from the CD/DVD

drive.

829
19.5 Upgrading of AeroDR SYSTEM

19.5.3 Upgrading of AeroDR

Portable RF Unit
The procedure for upgrading the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit is as follows.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When using a wireless connection between this device
and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit, check the charge
condition of this device and the AeroDR Portable
RF Unit. Recharge them to a sufficient level before
performing operations. Also, be sure to perform op-
erations with favorable signal strength between this
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
• Prepare an external CD/DVD drive.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is operating, the
1 Connect an external CD/DVD drive to this AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon will appear in
device for portable. place of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit icon.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Insert the CD for updating to the latest

version into the CD/DVD drive. 5 Press [Firmware Update] on the sub-menu
• If an auto-play screen appears, press [Cancel] screen.
to close the screen.

3 Start the service tool.

4 Press the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit

icon.

• The firmware update screen is displayed.

830
 19.5 Upgrading of AeroDR SYSTEM

6 Press [File import]. 9 Press [OK] on the confirmation screen.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
are wirelessly connected, the version update may take
some time.
• There is no LED to indicate on the AeroDR Portable
RF Unit to indicate that an update is in progress.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

10 Press [OK].
• Confirm that the [Device Ver.] and [Updated
• The [Select firmware file] screen is displayed. Ver.] match.

7 Select the firmware file, and press [Open]. 11 Press [Close].

8 Press [Update]. 12 Eject the update CD from the external CD/

DVD drive.

• During the update, [Progress] is displayed in

[Device Ver.].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the version is not displayed, press [Retrieve ver-
sion].
• Update is not necessary if [Device Ver.] and [Updated
Ver.] agree.
Only when [Device Ver.] and [Updated Ver.] do not
agree, [Device Ver.] is displayed in red and [Update]
becomes available.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Chapter 19

831
19.5 Upgrading of AeroDR SYSTEM

19.5.4 Upgrading of AeroDR

4 Press [Firmware Update] on the sub-menu
screen.
Stitching System
The procedure for upgrading the AeroDR Stitching
System is as follows.

1 Insert the CD for updating to the latest

version into the CD/DVD drive.
• If an auto-play screen appears, press [Cancel]
to close the screen.

2 Start the service tool.

3 Press the AeroDR stitching unit icon.

• The firmware update screen is displayed.

5 Press [File import].

• The [Select firmware file] screen is displayed.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

6 Select the firmware file, and press [Open].

832
 19.5 Upgrading of AeroDR SYSTEM

7 Press [Update].

• During the update, [Progress] is displayed in

[Device Ver.].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the version is not displayed, press [Retrieve ver-
sion].
• Update is not necessary if [Device Ver.] and [Updated
Ver.] agree.
Only when [Device Ver.] and [Updated Ver.] do not
agree, [Device Ver.] is displayed in red and [Update]
becomes available.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

8 Press [OK] on the confirmation screen.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The time required for upgrading and the operation dur-
ing upgrading are as follows.

Equipment Time
Operation
name required
During upgrade
Busy/error LED (orange) of
AeroDR Stitching Unit and
AeroDR AeroDR Stitching X-ray
Approx. 8
Stitching Auto-barrier Unit: Flashing
minutes
Unit Upgrade completed
Ready LED (green) of
AeroDR Stitching X-ray
Auto-barrier Unit: Lit
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

9 Press [OK].
Chapter 19

• Confirm that the [Device Ver.] and [Updated

Ver.] match.

10 Press [Close].

11 Eject the update CD from the CD/DVD

drive.

833
 19.6 Upgrading of REGIUS

The procedure for upgrading REGIUS is as follows.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• While upgrading, pay attention to the following.
― Do not operate this device.
― Do not turn off REGIUS.
• When upgrading cannot be performed and the
REGIUS cannot be started, one of the following tasks
is necessary.
― Replace MCB2/MCB, SCB2/SCB of REGIUS.
― Replace the CF card, and upgrade the MCB2/MCB
version. • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
• If upgrading REGIUS in n-to-m connection, do not per-
form any other operations. 5 Press [Install].
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 Restart all devices connected to the same

system.
• Shut off the power in the following order.
All units of this device→REGIUS→The unit of
this device with the JM
• Turn on the power in the following order.
The unit of this device with the JM →All units of
this device→REGIUS

2 Insert the CD-ROM with the installation

file of the newer version of REGIUS into
the CD/DVD drive.

3 Start the service tool.

4 Press the device icon of REGIUS to be up-

graded.
• The select install files screen is displayed.

834
 19.6 Upgrading of REGIUS

6 Press [...] (Browse). 8 Press [OK].

• "Program installing" is displayed.

• The screen will close and return to the sub-
menu screen once the installation is completed.

9 Press [Update].

• The file selection screen of Windows is dis-

played.

7 Select the installation file for the newer

version of REGIUS, and press [Open].

• The file name of the selected installation file is • The change reader program selection screen is
displayed in [File Name]. displayed.
• The file name of the installation file for REGIUS
is "CcuProgx.xxRxxTxx.lzh".
• "x" will differ for each version.
Chapter 19

835
19.6 Upgrading of REGIUS

10 Select the program with most current 13 After restarting REGIUS, confirm that
version, and press [OK]. "READY" is displayed on the LCD of
REGIUS.
• Upgrade all REGIUS devices using the same
procedure.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Confirm the current version of the program operating
in REGIUS by viewing [Version] in [Status/Setting dis-
play field] on the sub-menu screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• When the program update is complete, a confir-

mation screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Never turn off REGIUS.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

11 Press [Yes].

• Returns to the sub-menu screen.

12 Exit the service tool, and restart the up-

graded REGIUS.

836
 19.7 Upgrading of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

The procedure for upgrading REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 4 Press the device icon of REGIUS SIGMA/
is as follows. SIGMA2 to be upgraded.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• While upgrading, pay attention to the following.
–– Do not operate this device.
–– Do not turn off REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.
• When upgrading cannot be performed and the
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 cannot be started, one of
the following tasks is necessary.
–– Replace MCB2/MCB, SCB2/SCB of REGIUS
SIGMA/SIGMA2.
–– Replace the CF card, and upgrade the MCB2/MCB
version.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Restart all devices connected to the same

system.
• Shut off the power in the following order.
This device→REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2
• Turn on the power in the following order.
This device→REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

2 Insert the CD-ROM with the installation file

of the newer version of REGIUS SIGMA/
SIGMA2 into the CD/DVD drive.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Start the service tool.

Chapter 19

837
19.7 Upgrading of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

5 Press [Install]. 7 Select the installation file for the newer

version of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2, and
press [Open].

• The select install files screen is displayed.

• The file name of the selected installation file is
displayed in [Filename].
6 Press [...] (Browse).

8 Press [Start].

• "Program installing" is displayed.

• The screen will close and return to the sub-
menu screen once the installation is completed.

• The file selection screen of Windows is dis-

played.

838
 19.7 Upgrading of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

9 Press [Update]. 10 Select the program with most current

version, and press [Reader Update].

• The change program selection screen is dis-

played. • When the program update is complete, a confir-
mation screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Never turn off REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 19

839
19.7 Upgrading of REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

11 Press [OK].

• Returns to the sub-menu screen.

12 Exit the service tool, and restart the up-

graded REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.

13 After restarting REGIUS or REGIUS

SIGMA/SIGMA2, check the following.
• The Ready lamp for the REGIUS SIGMA/
SIGMA2 lights up.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• While using REGIUS, confirm the current version of
the program in operation by checking [Version] in
[Status/Setting display field] on the sub-menu screen.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

840
 19.8 Upgrading of Sub Monitor Adaptor firmware

The procedure for upgrading the Sub Monitor Adaptor 4 Select the Sub Monitor Adaptor to
is as follows. upgrade the version, and press [display
Web page].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The following method is an example. The operation
might be different depending on the Sub Monitor
Adaptor you use. For details, refer to the operation
manual of the Sub Monitor Adaptor you use.
• After upgrading firmware, the Sub Monitor Adaptor
returns to its default settings. Be sure to reset the IP
address after upgrading is completed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Press [firm update] in the left panel.
1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.
6 Enter the user name and password, and
press [OK].
• User name: root
• Password: By default, not set

7 Press [Browse], and specify the firmware

update file saved in this device.

3 Press [Start] on the Windows Start

menu, and press [NetDA Manager] in [All
Programs].
Chapter 19

841
19.8 Upgrading of Sub Monitor Adaptor firmware

8 Press [update].

• Firmware update starts.

• The Sub Monitor Adaptor is restarted when the
update is completed.

9 Check that the version in the lower left of

the screen is the new version.

10 Set the IP address of the Sub Monitor

Adaptor.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• After upgrading the firmware, the Sub Monitor Adaptor
returns to its default settings. Be sure to reset the IP
address after upgrading is completed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the setting of the IP address of the Sub Monitor
Adaptor, refer to "14.10.4 Setting the Sub Monitor
Adaptor".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

842
 19.9 Maintenance of AeroDR Detector

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When several different [Sync Mode] are set in [Expo-
sure Room Setting] for the device for which roaming
environment has been set, perform calibration in each
link system.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

19.9.1 Calibration of AeroDR

Detector
Every 3 months, acquire multiple exposed images and
perform calibration.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the calibration of AeroDR Detector, refer to "CS-7
User Tool Operation Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Chapter 19

843
 19.10 Maintenance of REGIUS and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

19.10.1 Unevenness calibration

Conduct REGIUS or REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 un-

evenness calibration for the following cases. 2m
• When REGIUS or REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 optical
components are replaced
• When unevenness of newly implemented plate ver- Perpendicular
sion (PV) and plate version of the one currently be- to tube Vertical direction
ing calibrated are in a different group Put blue line
downward
• For the plate type, PV, and unevenness group, refer
to the following.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Plate types for regular PV Unevenness • Put the blue corner block of the CR cassette on the
exposure group bottom when using the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.
RP-3S 00 ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
RP-3T 00
RP-3L 00 2 Start the service tool.
S1
RP-4S 03
RP-4T 03
3 Press the device icon of the REGIUS or
the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 to be calibrat-
RP-4L 03
ed.
• Conduct unevenness calibration on the plate to be
used if unevenness is highly visible. Unevenness
may be improved.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Use the largest CR cassette size on site for uneven-
ness calibration. Correction data will not be applied
for larger size CR cassettes than the ones used in
unevenness calibration.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

1 Expose a solid image with the calibration

CR cassette.
• Exposure conditions are as follows.
– Voltage: 80 kV (Fixed)
– mAs: 10-20 mAs (Average 1,500-3,000 step dose)
– Distance between plate and tube: More than 2
m recommended
• Expose while aligning the perpendicular direc-
tion of the tube with the vertical direction of the
CR cassette. The blue line of the CR cassette
will be at the bottom.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

844
 19.10 Maintenance of REGIUS and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

4 Press [Uneven. Cal.]. 5 Select a resolution for the calibration from

[Resolution].

REGIUS Resolution
REGIUS 110/110HQ [175µm(Regular Normal)]
REGIUS 170/190/210 [175µm(Regular Normal)]
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 [175µm(Regular Normal)]

6 For barcode registration, read the barcode

on the CR cassette with a bar code reader.
• The barcode value will be displayed on [Barcode
Registration].
• For reading order specification, barcode reading
is not necessary.

• The unevenness calibration screen is displayed.

7 Press [Execute].

• "Calibrating unevenness" will be displayed.

Chapter 19

845
19.10 Maintenance of REGIUS and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

8 Insert the CR cassette to REGIUS or HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2. • For REGIUS 110/110HQ, conduct unevenness calibra-
• After unevenness calibration, result of the cali-
tion of regular CR cassettes both in [87.5μm(Regular
bration will appear in the [Calibration result]
High)] and [175μm(Regular Normal)] resolutions.
field.
• For REGIUS 170/190/210, the order of unevenness
calibration of [175μm(Regular Normal)] and [87.5μm
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • (General High/Mammo Standard)] can be reversed.
• For REGIUS 110/110HQ and REGIUS SIGMA/ ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
SIGMA2, calibration will not start until the ejected CR
cassette is removed after reading the image in the CR
cassette.
• Check that [OK] is displayed in the [Calibration result]
field.
• While performing the unevenness calibration, remov-
ing a USB device (such as USB memory) from the
Unitea PC may cause an error to occur and the cali-
bration to stop. While performing calibration, do not
remove any USB devices (such as USB memory).
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

9 Referring to steps 5 through 8, perform

the calibration with the following
resolutions and check the unevenness
calibration results.
REGIUS Resolution
REGIUS 110/110HQ [87.5μm(Regular High)]
[87.5μm(Regular High/
REGIUS 170/190/210
Mammo Standard)]
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 [87.5μm(Regular High)]

10 Press [Exit].

• The result of the unevenness calibration will be

stored in the unevenness calibration data table
of this device.

846
 19.10 Maintenance of REGIUS and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
19.10.2 Sensitivity calibration • Perform the exposure dose measurement in advance
with the dosage meter.
Conduct the sensitivity calibration of REGIUS or Set the tube voltage (80kV), distance (2m, or when
REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 for the following cases. not possible, as far as possible), and mAs (according
• When condition of the X-ray device was changed to the facility standards) to the same as the X-ray set-
• When correcting the sensitivity difference by REGIUS tings values used when the solid image was exposed,
or REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 and then adjust the mAs value so that it falls within the
• When correcting the sensitivity difference by plate range of 8-12mR.
type Also, when measuring the dosage, use the average of
• When the newly implemented plate version (PV) and the values of three or more measurements.
the plate version currently under the sensitivity cali- * mAs value = tube current (mA) × seconds(s)
bration are different ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• For the plate type and PV, refer to the following.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Plate types for regular • Put the blue corner block of the CR cassette on the
PV
exposure
bottom when using the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.
RP-3S 00 ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
RP-3T 00
RP-3L 00 2 Start the service tool.
RP-4S 03
RP-4T 03 3 Press the device icon of the REGIUS or
RP-4L 03 the REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 to be calibrat-
ed.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Conduct the sensitivity calibration within 5 minutes
after X-ray exposure (Insert a CR cassette to REGIUS
or REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2 within 5 minutes).
• Use the largest CR cassette size on site for sensitivity
calibration.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Expose a solid image with the calibration

CR cassette.
• Exposure conditions are as follows.
– Voltage: 80 kV (Fixed)
– Exposure dose: 10 mR ± 2
– Grid: None
• Expose while aligning the perpendicular direc-
tion of the tube with the vertical direction of the
CR cassette. The blue line of the CR cassette
will be at the bottom.
Chapter 19

2m

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

Perpendicular
to tube Vertical direction
Put blue line
downward

847
19.10 Maintenance of REGIUS and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

4 Press [Sensitivity Cal.]. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• When [Auto] is selected, the calibration data of [Regular
Normal] will be automatically generated using [Regular
High] calibration data (Calibration is completed in 1 ex-
posure).
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 For REGIUS 110/110HQ, enter "0.94" in

[Sensitive].

7 Enter the dose exposed in [Exposure

Dose].
• For REGIUS 210, make sure [Sensitive] is
"0.94".
• The sensitivity calibration screen is displayed.

5 Select [Automatic calculation from high

resolution data] in [Resolution].
• For REGIUS110/110HQ, select [175µm(Regular
Normal)].
• For REGIUS 170/190/210, select [87.5μm
(Regular High)] and [175µm(Regular Normal)].
• For REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2, turn on [Auto].

8 For barcode registration, read the barcode

on the CR cassette with a bar code reader.
• The barcode value will be displayed on [Barcode
Registration].
• For reading order specification, barcode reading
is not necessary.

848
 19.10 Maintenance of REGIUS and REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2

9 Press [Execute].

• "Calibrating sensitive" will appear.

10 Insert the CR cassette to REGIUS or

REGIUS SIGMA/SIGMA2.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For REGIUS 110/110HQ and REGIUS SIGMA/
SIGMA2, calibration will not start until the ejected CR
cassette is removed after reading the image in the CR
cassette.
• While performing the sensitivity calibration, removing
a USB device (such as USB memory) from the Unitea
PC may cause an error to occur and the calibration to
stop. While performing calibration, do not remove any
USB devices (such as USB memory).
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• After sensitivity calibration, the result of the

calibration will appear in the [Calibration result]
field.

11 Press [Exit].

Chapter 19

• The result of the sensitivity calibration will be

stored in the sensitivity calibration data table of
this device.

849
 19.11 Adjustment of the position of the touch panel

When there is a discrepancy in the touch panel coordi-

nates, adjust the position of the touch panel.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the calibration of the touch panel, refer to "4.5.2
Adjusting the position of the touch panel".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

850
 19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment

19.12.1 Work flow of monitor 19.12.2 Brightness adjustment

brightness adjustment for Chroma5
The work flow of monitor brightness adjustment is as The procedure for adjusting brightness for Chroma5 is
follows. as follows.
Chroma5 can be used for the measurement device.
O
OInstallation of Chroma5 driver
Start
Install the driver when conducting a gradation test with
Chroma5.
1. Connecting measurement instrument

1 Connect Chroma5 to this device.

2. Gradation testing If the gradation
testing fails even
after conducting
calibration twice, 2 Insert the CS-7 DRIVER CD into the CD/
Failed confirm the testing
Result procedures and the DVD drive.
instrument
OK connection. • If an auto-play screen appears, press [Cancel]
3. Calibration
and close the screen.

2. Gradation testing
3 Display the intermediate screen.

Failed Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Result
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
OK
play the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
End

4 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

Chapter 19

851
19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment

5 Right-click [Computer] on the Windows

Start menu, and press [Manage].

6 Select [Device Manager] from the left side 9 Press [Next].

of the screen, right click [Calibrator], and
press [Update Driver Software].

7 Press [Browse my computer for driver

software].
10 Press [Install].

8 Press [Browse] to select the following 11 Press [Close] when the installation is
folder that contains the driver, and press completed.
[OK]. • This completes the installation of the Chroma5
• "D:\CalibTool\SensorUSBDrivers\Chroma5" driver. Next, perform the gradation test with
Choroma5.

852
 19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment

O
OGradation test with Chroma5 4 Press [LCD].
The gradation test with Chroma5 is as follows.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Wait at least 30 minutes after turning on the monitor
before carrying out the gradation test.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Connect Chroma5 to this device.

2 Start the service tool.

3 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The LCD calibration screen is displayed.

• The sub-menu screen is displayed. Chapter 19

853
19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 7 Press [Grayscale Test].

• When first starting, a "LUT for this monitor does not
exist. Do you want to apply default LUT settings?"
message is displayed. In this case, set the following.

(1) Select [Yes].

(2) Select [Maker] and [Model Number] and enter

[Serial Number] of the monitors.

• The gradation test screen is displayed.

(3) Press [Save].

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8 Place Chroma5 within the square box in
the center of the gradation test screen.
5 Press [Config] and [Photometer], and se-
lect [Chroma5].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If you select other colorimeters than the one to be
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
used, a message will be displayed at the measure-
• Slightly tilt the monitor before placing Chroma5.
ment and measurement cannot be completed.
If the monitor stays straight, the sensor may not con-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
tact closely to the monitor, which may lead to low ac-
curacy.
6 If multiple monitors are connected, press
• Make sure fluorescent light and outside light do not
[Config] and [Monitor] and select a moni-
reflect directly on the monitor.
tor to be gradation-tested. • Make sure that the monitor is not dirty.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

854
 19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment

9 Press [Start]. 3 Press [Calibration].

• Measurement will start and the result will be dis-
played in approximately 1 minute.

10 Confirm the determination result.

• When [OK] is displayed in [Judgement Result],
the monitor brightness adjustment is completed.
Press [Safely Remove Hardware] at the bottom
right of the Windows screen to remove Chroma5
from the USB port according to the safely re-
move hardware procedure.
• When [NG] is displayed in [Judgement Result],
calibration is required.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For calibration, refer to "Calibration with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

O
OCalibration with Chroma5
If the gradation test result is NG, perform calibration
using Chroma5.

1 Make sure that Chroma5 is connected to

this device.

2 Display the LCD calibration screen. • The calibration screen is displayed.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4 Place Chroma5 within the square box in

• For the procedure, refer to steps 2 to 4 in "Gradation the center of the calibration screen.
test with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation process, refer to step 8 in "Grada-
tion test with Chroma5".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 Press [Start].
• Measurement will start and the result will be dis-
played in a few minutes.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Never press [Detail Setting] on the calibration screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6 Conduct the gradation test again.

Chapter 19

• When [OK] is displayed in [Judgement Result],

the monitor brightness adjustment is completed.
Press [Safely Remove Hardware] at the bottom
right of the Windows screen to remove Chroma5
from the USB port according to the safely
remove hardware procedure.
• When [NG] is displayed in [Judgment Result],
carry out calibrate again.

855
19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
19.12.3 Display of history • Perform the following from the [History] screen.
–– History display by measurement type, computer and
The procedure for displaying the calibration history is monitor
as follows. –– Graph display of measurement results
–– Reference to the temporal change of maximum

1 Display the LCD calibration screen. brightness (It can be referenced only when a spe-
cific monitor is extracted and displayed.)
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the procedure, refer to steps 2-4 in "Gradation test
with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [History].

• The [History] screen is displayed.

856
 19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment

19.12.4 Application of LUT to

3 Press [View] for calibration to create LUT.

the monitor
You can create LUT from results of calibrations per-
formed in the past, and apply it to the monitor.

1 Display the LCD calibration screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the procedure, refer to steps 2-4 in "Gradation test
with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [History].

• The [Calibration Result] screen is displayed.

4 Press [File], and press [Apply this LUT to

the monitor.].

Chapter 19

• The [History] screen is displayed.

857
19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment

19.12.5 Setting of environmen-

4 Press [Save].

tal information
The procedure for editing the environmental informa-
tion is as follows.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Environmental information refers to items such as "In-
stitution Name" and "Person in charge" etc. displayed
in the gradation test results and calibration results.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Display the LCD calibration screen.

• The environmental information is changed.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the procedure, refer to steps 2-4 in "Gradation test
with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [Config], and press [Information].

• The [Information] screen is displayed.

3 Edit the items displayed on the right of

the screen.

• Depending on the items selected on the left of

the screen, items displayed on the right of the
screen will change.

858
 19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment

19.12.6 Setting to disable display HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

gradation correction • If you enter the "Serial Number", the serial number of
the display will be displayed on the calibration results
The procedure for setting to disable display gradation screen and measurement results screen for the grada-
correction is as follows. tion test. When a display is replaced, etc., the serial
number allows you to identify the display.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If monitor display gradation correction setting is dis-
4 Select [Apply linear LUT] and press [Save].
abled, the LUT information reflected on the monitor is
disabled and the monitor can be returned to the pre-
correction setting.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Display the LCD calibration screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the procedure, refer to steps 2-4 in "Gradation test
with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [Config], and select [Monitor Installa-

tion/Monitor Exchange] from [Maintenance].

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When [Apply linear LUT] is selected, the linear LUT is
applied and displayed according to the properties of
the original display.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The [Monitor Setting] screen is displayed.

Chapter 19

3 Select [Maker] and [Model Number] and

enter [Serial Number] of the monitors to
disable their display gradation correc-
tions.
• The input of [Serial Number] is arbitrary.

859
19.12 Monitor brightness adjustment

5 Press [OK].

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

6 Press [OK].

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

7 Press [Yes] to delete the history and [No]

to retain it.

860
 19.13 Deletion of the device information

The procedure for deleting the device information is as

follows.

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The equipment information screen is displayed.

4 Select the device whose registration in-

formation is to be deleted from the equip-
ment information list.

5 Press [Delete].

• The sub-menu screen is displayed.

3 Press [Equipment Information]. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Remove the check from the connection checkbox in
the sub-menu screen before deleting information on
AeroDR SYSTEM-related devices.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Chapter 19

861
 19.14 Reset/change/deletion of the counter

Use the following procedure to reset the frequency of 2 Press [Warranty Component] tab.
use and usage start date after periodic replacement of
parts such as the REGIUS CR cassette plate, REGIUS
CR cassette reader and AeroDR Generator Interface
Unit or after periodic maintenance is conducted. You
can also change and remove them.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The following procedure is that when the automatic
login function is on. When the automatic login function
is off, [Edit] in step 3 is not displayed; therefore you
have to re-log in in Maintenance mode. When you log
in in Maintenance mode, password entry in step 4 is
omitted.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Press [Edit].

1 Press [System] to display the system

monitor screen.

4 Enter the password and press [OK].

• The system monitor screen is displayed.

862
 19.14 Reset/change/deletion of the counter

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If editing or deletion of the REGIUS Cassette, REGI-
US Plate, or REGIUS reader maintenance information
fails, information on whether the main JM or backup
JM processing failed is displayed in the error mes-
sage.
• If editing or deletion via the backup JM fails, only
maintenance information of the main JM is updated;
after the backup JM is restored, perform editing or de-
letion again.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The edit screen is displayed.

7 Press [End].
5 Select the device whose counter is to be
reset, changed, or deleted on the equip-
ment information list, and select the item
to edit.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If you read the REGIUS cassette and REGIUS plate
again using the REGIUS reader and restart the device,
the maintenance information of the REGIUS cassette,
6 Edit the counter. REGIUS plate, and REGIUS reader is displayed.
• If the JM used for this device has been switched to the
backup JM and you update the REGIUS Cassette or
REGIUS Plate maintenance information, make sure to
confirm the maintenance information in the main JM.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Press [Reset] to reset the counter.

• To change the value of the counter, enter the
intended value using numerical keypads, then
press [Apply].
Chapter 19

• To delete the replacement unit from the list,

press [Delete].

863
19.14 Reset/change/deletion of the counter

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The devices displayed in the equipment information list and items that are possible to edit are as follows.

Update Reset op- Delete op-

No. Device name Item
operation eration eration
Number of times the connector has been re-
1 AeroDR I/F Cable moved and connected
AeroDR Battery Charger Number of times the connector has been re-
2 (for charging/registration) moved and connected
Not possible Not possible
AeroDR Battery Charger Number of times the connector has been re-
3 (for charging only) moved and connected
Number of times the connector has been re-
4 AeroDR UF Cable moved and connected
5 Number of times WS1 SW1 has been switched
6 Number of times WS1 SW2 has been switched
Number of times WS1 XRayOK has been
7 switched
Number of times WS1 XRayON has been
8 switched
9 Number of times WS2 SW1 has been switched
Not possible
10 Number of times WS2 SW2 has been switched
AeroDR Generator Inter- Number of times WS2 XRayOK has been
11 face Unit switched
Number of times WS2 XRayON has been
12 switched
13 Number of times WS3 SW1 has been switched
14 Number of times WS3 SW2 has been switched
Number of times WS3 XRayOK has been
15 switched
Possible Possible
Number of times WS3 XRayON has been
16 switched
17 Number of times the erase-lamp has been used
18 CR cassette reader Number of days the grease has been used
Number of days the transport rollers have been
19 used
20 Number of days the image plate has been used
CR cassette Number of days the cassette cover has been Possible
21 used
22 Number of days this device has been used
23 Number of days the HDD has been used
24 Number of days the monitor has been used
This device Not possible
Number of days this device's battery has been
25 used while in portable operation
Number of days the AeroDR Portable Unit battery
26 has been used

• You can change the counter values of items for which update operation is "Possible" by using the numerical keypad and the
[Apply] button.
• You can reset the counter of items for which reset operation is "Possible" by pressing the [Reset] button.
• You can delete a device name for which delete operation is "Possible" from the equipment information list by pressing the
[Delete] button.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

864
 19.15 Uninstallation of the touch panel driver

The procedure for uninstalling the touch panel driver is 3 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,
as follows. and press [Control Panel].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The following description is an example. The operation
might be different depending on the monitor used. For
details, refer to the operation manual of the monitor
used.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Display the intermediate screen.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.8.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.

4 Press [Uninstall a program].

5 Select [NextWindow 3000 Drivers], and

press [Uninstall].

Chapter 19

865
19.15 Uninstallation of the touch panel driver

6 Press [Yes].

7 Exit [Control Panel], and restart this de-

vice.

866
 Chapter
20
Specifications
This chapter describes the specifications of this device.

867
 20.1 Specifications

20.1.1 Software specifications

Item Description
Product name DIRECT DIGITIZER CS-7
• MDD: Class II a, Rule10
Product classification
FDA: 510 (k) Class II
EN60601-1-4:1996+A1:1999, EN60601-1-6:2007
Harmonized standards
EN62366:2008, EN 980:2008, EN 1041:2008
(for MDD)
EN ISO 14971:2009, EN62304:2006
Remarks (for MDD) CE marking, indicating conformity with the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC
DICOM Storage SCU
DICOM Basic Grayscale Print Management SCU
DICOM support
DICOM Modality Worklist Management SCU
DICOM Modality Performed Procedure Step SCU
Auto-gradation process
Frequency processing (F process)
Equalization processing (E process)
Image processing Hybrid processing (HF process - HE process)
Hybrid smoothing process (HS process)
Grid removal process
Automatic exposure field recognition process
Sampling pitch 175 μm, 87.5 μm (REGIUS series only)
1) AeroDR Detector
2) REGIUS MODEL 170, REGIUS MODEL 190, REGIUS MODEL 210, REGIUS MODEL 110,
Readable devices
REGIUS MODEL 110S, REGIUS MODEL 110HQ
3) REGIUS SIGMA, REGIUS SIGMA2
Host: max 4 ch
Image output
Printer: max 2 ch
1) Application : CS-7 application software
2) OS : Windows 7 Professional 32-bit-------SOUP
3) Middleware : .NET framework 4.0---------------------SOUP
Software components Microsoft JET (Access)-----------------SOUP
Postgre SQL-------------------------------SOUP
4) Driver : CD-R/DVD-R writing library-----------SOUP
* OS is installed in PC. It is not included in CS-7 product.
1) Order registration/Order cooperation
The order registration method of CS-7 can be selected according to the connection environment of
the facility.
2) Exam. Tag
Select the Exam. Tag to select the optimal reading condition, image-processing condition, and output
Software main functions condition for each body part.
3) Image reading
4) Linkage with X-ray equipment
Linkage of exposure between X-ray equipment, Digital Radiography, and CS-7.
5) Image processing
6) Image sending to printer/PACS/image storage media

868
 20.1 Specifications

20.1.2 Hardware specifications

Item Description
CPU Intel Core i3 processor 2.93 GHz or higher
Memory Standard 2 GB
OS Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (32-bit)
Hard disk 250 GB or more
CD/DVD super multi drive or higher
Optical drive
(CD/DVD read, write enabled)
PCI slot 2 empty slots or more (PCIx1, PCI-Express)
Ethernet 10base-T/100base-TX/1000base-T
Input/output port
USB: 6 ports or more *
Keyboard Full size keyboard
Mouse Optical wheel mouse (USB)
Sound Audio function available
Power requirements AC 90 V-264 V (Single phase 50/60 Hz)
Power consumption 46 W
Standard (for MDD) Conforms to the standards that the CE marking requires.
Control unit power cable
Operation unit (monitor) power cable
Major accessories Connector cable between control unit and operation unit (monitor)
Keyboard
Mouse
Temperature Humidity
10 to 35°C 35 10 to 90% RH 90%RH
During operation
(0 m to 3,048 m (ensure no water con-
Recommended storage in maximum altitude) densation) 10%RH

and usage environment

conditions Temperature Humidity
–30 to 60°C 10 to 90% RH 90%RH
In storage
(0 m to 9,144 m (ensure no water con-
in maximum altitude) -30
densation) 10%RH

* Required for mouse, keyboard, and touch panel.

IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• These product specifications may change for improvement without prior notice.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Chapter 20

869
20.1 Specifications

20.1.3 Hardware specifications (during the portable X-ray device operation)

Item Description
CPU Intel Core i5-2520M vPro processor 2.50 GHz or higher
Memory Standard 4 GB
OS Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (32 bit)
Hard disk 250 GB or more
Ethernet: 10base-T/100base-TX/1000base-T
Input/output port
USB: 3 ports or more
Keyboard PC built-in keyboard
Monitor 12.1 inches or above, 1280×800 or above
Sound Audio function available
Power requirements AC100V-240V (50/60Hz)
Power consumption Max. about 60 W
Standard (for MDD) Conforms to the standards that the CE marking requires.
Major accessories Power cable
Temperature Humidity
35
30 to 80% RH 80%RH
During operation
5 to 35°C (ensure no water con-
Recommended storage 5 densation) 30%RH

and usage environment

conditions Temperature Humidity
50 30 to 80% RH 80%RH
In storage
–20 to 50°C (ensure no water con-
-20
densation) 30%RH

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• These product specifications may change for improvement without prior notice.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

870
 20.1 Specifications

20.1.4 Optional products

Category Product name

LCD monitor 17 inch high field of vision LCD multi-touch monitor
21 inch color LCD monitor
High precision monitor
DP-DVI conversion cable
CS multi-bar code reader
Bar code Reader CS bar code reader 3
Bluetooth bar code reader (during the portable X-ray device operation)
Magnetic card reader CS magnetic card reader
Add-in Ethernet board
Add-in LAN
Wireless LAN adapter (during the portable X-ray device operation)
Additional memory Additional memory module
Sub monitor Network display adaptor NetDA-1

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the specifications of the monitor and options of this device, refer to the operation manual of each product.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Chapter 20

871
872
 Chapter
21
Appendix
This chapter describes additional materials.

873
 3. Disable Code 39

100101

21.1 Using bar code reader for REGIUS to register

10 Page 1 of 2
100101

devices 4. Disable Code 93

eywell
10 Configuration Bar Codes Page 1 of 2
an the codes in the numbered order.
We recommend using a bar code reader to register 4. Disable Code 93
4. Disable Code 93
the serial numbers of the AeroDR SYSTEM related de-
eywell
10
Program Configuration
Mode Bar Codes
vices, etc. for efficient operation and the prevention of
Page 1 2ofof2 5
6. Disable Interleaved
an the codes in the numbered order. 100102
input errors.
When using the bar code reader exclusive for REGIUS,
eywell
10
Program Mode use the following
Configuration Barprocedures
Codes to change the settings. Page 1 2ofof2 5
6. Disable Interleaved
You willorder.
an the codes in the numbered need to scan the bar codes. Please print the 100102
appropriate pages to ensure proper operation. 5. Disable Codabar
100105
5. Disable Codabar
eywell Configuration Bar Codes
10
Program Mode Page 1 2ofof2 5
6. Disable Interleaved
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
an the codes in the numbered order.

• Once registration is completed, make sure to change 100105

5. Disable Codabar
eywell Configuration Bar Codes
Program Mode
lan
Low
the bar code reader settings back to the exclusive 6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
theSpeed
codesUSB
in theDefaults
numberedsettings
order. for REGIUS. 7. Disable UPC/EAN
100104
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 100105
6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
Program Mode 6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
21.1.1
l Low Speed USB Defaults
Procedure to change the 7. Disable UPC/EAN
MetroSet 3.2.0.38
100104
Copyright 2010, Honeywell Internationa

bar code reader settings 100105

100106

The 12/10/2010
l Low Speed USB Defaults procedure for changing the settings is as follows. 7. Disable UPC/EAN
MetroSet 3.2.0.38 Page 2010,
Copyright 1 of 2 Honeywell Internationa
100105
100106
1 Scan the bar code below.
l Low Speed USB Defaults12/10/2010
7. Disable UPC/EAN
7. Disable UPC/EAN
e Code 39 Honeywell Configuration Bar Codes
2. All Defaults
8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes
Page 1 of 2
Please scan the codes in the numbered order.
100106

l Low Speed USB Defaults12/10/2010 7. Disable UPC/EAN

e Code 39 Honeywell Configuration Bar Codes
1. Enter Program Mode Page 1 of 2
8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes 6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
Please scan the codes in the numbered order.
100106
105517
8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes
e Code 39 2 Honeywell
Scan
1. Enter the
Program Configuration
following
Mode Barfrom
bar codes in order Codes
1 8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes 6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
to 15.
Please scan the codes in the numbered order.
100106
999999 105517 100105
1. Enter Program Mode
e Code 39 1. Enter Program Mode 8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes 6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
e Code 93 9. User Defined Code 128 Code ID

999999 105517 100105

e Code 39 9.
8. User Defined
Use User Code
Code IDs 128 Code ID
as Suffixes
e Code 93 2. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults 9. User Defined Code 128 Code ID 7. Disable UPC/EAN

999999 105517 100105

8061130
2. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults
e Code 93 2. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults 9. User Defined Code 128 Code ID 7. Disable UPC/EAN

105517
999941 8061130 100106

e Code 93 2. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults 10. Japanese

9. User Keyboard
Defined Code 128 Code ID 7. Disable UPC/EAN
e Codabar 10. Japanese Keyboard

999941 8061130 100106

e Code 93 3. Disable Code 39 9. User Defined Code 128 Code ID

e Codabar 3. Disable Code 39 10. Japanese Keyboard 8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes

999941 8061130 100106

4162100

e Codabar 3. Disable Code 39 10. Japanese Keyboard 8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes

3.2.0.38 Copyright 2010, Honeywell International, Inc. 8061130

konika.mst
100101 4162100 105517

e Codabar 3. Disable Code 39 10. Japanese Keyboard 8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes

3.2.0.38 100101 Copyright 2010, Honeywell International, Inc. konika.mst 105517

4162100
874
e Codabar 10. Japanese Keyboard
4. Disable Code 93 9. User Defined Code 128 Code ID

3.2.0.38 100101 Copyright 2010, Honeywell International, Inc. konika.mst 105517

4162100
 116602

Honeywell Configuration Bar Codes

12/10/2010
11. Disable Line Feed Page 2 of 2
Please scan the codes in the numbered order.
116602

Honeywell Configuration Bar 21.1 Using

11. Disable Line Feed
12. Disable Carriage Return
Codes bar code reader for REGIUS to register devices
Please scan the codes in the numbered order.
116602
11. Disable Line Feed
11. Disable Line Feed
12. Disable Carriage Return
21.1.2 Procedure to reset the bar
code reader settings to
REGIUS read-only settings
116602

Chapter 21
116603

12. Disable Carriage Return

The procedure for restoring the setting to REGIUS
116602 read-only is as follows.
116603
12. Disable Carriage Return
12. Disable Carriage Return
13. No Beep
1 Scan the bar code below.
116603
2. All Defaults
12. Disable Carriage Return
13. No Beep

116603
318505
13. No Beep
13. No Beep

116603
318505 2 Scan the following bar codes in order
from 1 to 23.
13. No Beep
14. Same Symbol Timeout
1. Enter Program Mode
318505

14. Same
13. No BeepSymbol Timeout
14. Same Symbol Timeout

318505
7189400

14. Same Symbol Timeout 2. All Defaults

318505
7189400

15. Exit Program

14. Same Mode
Symbol Timeout
15. Exit Program Mode

7189400 3. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults

14. Same Symbol Timeout
15. Exit Program Mode

7189400
999999

15. Exit Program Mode

4. Configuration Code 1
3 Check 3.2.0.38
7189400
MetroSet
999999 whetherthe bar code reader can
Copyright beHoneywell International, Inc.
2010, konika.mst

used for registering the devices.

15. Exit Program Mode

MetroSet 3.2.0.38 Copyright 2010, Honeywell International, Inc. konika.mst

999999

15. Exit Program Mode

5. Configuration Code 2
MetroSet 3.2.0.38 Copyright 2010, Honeywell International, Inc. konika.mst
999999

MetroSet 3.2.0.38 Copyright 2010, Honeywell International, Inc. konika.mst

999999

6. Configuration Code 3

MetroSet 3.2.0.38 Copyright 2010, Honeywell International, Inc. konika.mst

875
21.1 Using bar code reader for REGIUS to register devices

7. Configuration Code 4 16. Configuration Code 13

8. Configuration Code 5 17. Configuration Code 14

9. Configuration Code 6 18. Configuration Code 15

10. Configuration Code 7 19. Configuration Code 16

11. Configuration Code 8 20. Configuration Code 17

12. Configuration Code 9 21. Enable Manual Activation Mode

13. Configuration Code 10 22. No Beep

14. Configuration Code 11 23. Exit Program Mode

15. Configuration Code 12

3 Check whether the bar code of a CR
cassette can be read with the bar code
reader.

876
 21.2 How to add a bar code setting

A bar code setting can be added to the CS-7 bar code reader so that bar codes other than Code 128 can be read.

Chapter 21
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This setting is effective only on the CS-7 bar code reader. It cannot be set on other bar code readers.
• Read the bar codes on each setting sheet in numerical order. If the procedure fails, return the setting to default with "Setting
sheet (3) (default setting)", and try the setting again.
• Sounds will be output when setting sheets are read, but all sounds are not the same.
• Code 128 cannot be read and added.
• For Code 128, bar codes other than 14-digit bar codes cannot be read.
• The enter addition setting cannot be set for Code 128.
• No sound is output when reading a user-specified bar code.
• After the setting is done, perform reading check with the bar code (such as CR cassette) of the device to be used.
• Use setting sheets by printing them out.
• When using the patient list search function of CS-1/2/3, you must add "Enter".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

877
21.2 How to add a bar code setting

21.2.1 Work flow

The work flow is as follows.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If you make a mistake during the setting operation, start from the beginning again.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Start

Perform
"Setting sheet (3)
(default setting)"

Add Perform Add Perform No. 1-1 of

Add enter? "Setting sheet (1) Add NW-7 setting? "21.2.3 Additional
(enter addition setting)" bar code list"

Do not add
Do not add

Add Perform No. 2-1 of

Add Code 39 setting? "21.2.3 Additional
bar code list"
Do not add

Add Perform No. 3-1 of

Add UPC/EAN setting? "21.2.3 Additional
bar code list"
Do not add

Add Perform No. 4-1 of Perform "Setting

Add ITF setting? "21.2.3 Additional sheet (2) (ITF reading
bar code list" digit number setting)"

Do not add

Add Perform "Setting

Add 1 digit setting? sheet (4) (minimum
reading digit setting)"

End

878
 21.2 How to add a bar code setting

21.2.2 Added bar code reading operation check

Chapter 21
Check whether the added bar code can be read successfully.

O
OReading operation check with this device
Read bar codes of the device used on site, and check whether they can be read successfully.
• If the setting is [Do not add enter], then read bar codes by placing the cursor on the [Patient ID] screen. This is
successful if the number displayed on the [Patient ID] screen is the same as the bar code number.
• If the setting is [Add enter], then check with the scheduled examination search function. Temporarily register
a bar code number to be read by this device to a patient ID in advance, place the cursor on the [Patient ID]
screen, and read the bar code. This is successful if the number displayed on the [Patient ID] screen is the same
as the bar code number.

O
O[Do not add enter] setting check
Because the [Do not add enter] setting cannot be checked with CS-7, check the setting with Windows Notepad.
• Open Windows Notepad, and read a bar code. If the setting is [Do not add enter] and there is no linefeed after
the bar code number is displayed on Notepad, then this is successful.
• Set the input method of Notepad to single-byte input before checking.

21.2.3 Additional bar code list

Bar codes that can be added are as follows.

No. Item Details Set bar code

Enables reading of NW-7.
• When adding enter to data, perform "Setting sheet (1) (enter
NW-7
addition setting)".
1-1 permission
• To change the minimum reading digit number, perform "Setting
setting
sheet (4) (minimum reading digit setting)" after reading this bar
code. Permission

Enables reading of Code 39.

• When adding enter to data, perform "Setting sheet (1) (enter
Code 39
addition setting)".
2-1 permission
• To change the minimum reading digit number, perform "Setting
setting
sheet (4) (minimum reading digit setting)" after reading this bar
code. Permission

Enables reading of JAN/EAN-8, JAN/EAN-13, UPC-A, and UPC-E.

UPC/EAN • When adding enter to data, perform "Setting sheet (1) (enter
3-1 permission addition setting)".
setting
Permission
Enables reading of ITF.
• For ITF, always perform "Setting sheet (2) (ITF reading digit
setting)" after reading this bar code.
ITF
4-1 • When adding enter to data, perform "Setting sheet (1) (enter
Read permission
addition setting)" after reading this bar code. Permission
• To change the minimum reading digit number, perform "Setting sheet
(4) (minimum reading digit setting)" after reading this bar code.

879
21.2 How to add a bar code setting

O
O"Setting sheet (1) (enter addition setting)" 11. Configuration Code 8
To add enter to data, read all of the following bar codes
from 1 in order.

1. Enter Program Mode

12. Configuration Code 9

2. All Defaults
13. Configuration Code 10

3. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults

14. Configuration Code 11

4. Configuration Code 1
15. Configuration Code 12

5. Configuration Code 2
16. Configuration Code 13

6. Configuration Code 3
17. Configuration Code 14

7. Configuration Code 4
18. Configuration Code 15

8. Configuration Code 5
19. Configuration Code 16

9. Configuration Code 6
20. Configuration Code 17

10. Configuration Code 7 21. Configuration Code 18

880
 21.2 How to add a bar code setting

22. Configuration Code 19 33. Configuration Code 30

Chapter 21
23. Configuration Code 20 34. Configuration Code 31

24. Configuration Code 21 35. Configuration Code 32

25. Configuration Code 22 36. Configuration Code 33

26. Configuration Code 23 37. Configuration Code 34

27. Configuration Code 24 38. Enable Manual Activation Mode

28. Configuration Code 25 39. No Beep

29. Configuration Code 26 40. Exit Program Mode

30. Configuration Code 27

O
O"Setting sheet (2) (ITF reading digit setting)"
For ITF, cancellation of significant digits occurs fre-
quently unless reading digits are fixed, therefore set
the number of digits.

31. Configuration Code 28

1 Read the bar code for starting the setting.

32. Configuration Code 29

881
21.2 How to add a bar code setting

2 Read the bar code of ITF reading digit O

O"Setting sheet (3) (default setting)"
setting #1. To return the settings to their defaults, read all of the
following bar codes from 1 in order.

1. Enter Program Mode

3 Set the number of digits to read. Refer to

the following digit number setting table 2. All Defaults
and read Code Byte bar codes.

(Example) when setting to 14 digits

[1st], [2nd], and [3rd] for [14 digits] in the table
are [0], [1], and [4], therefore, read Code Byte bar 3. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults
codes in the order of [0] → [1] → [4].
Digit number 1st 2nd 3rd
6 digits 0 0 6
8 digits 0 0 8
4. Configuration Code 1
10 digits 0 1 0
12 digits 0 1 2
14 digits 0 1 4
16 digits 0 1 6
5. Configuration Code 2
Code Byte bar codes

6. Configuration Code 3

7. Configuration Code 4

8. Configuration Code 5

9. Configuration Code 6

4 Read the bar code to complete the setting.

10. Configuration Code 7

882
 21.2 How to add a bar code setting

11. Configuration Code 8 22. No Beep

Chapter 21
12. Configuration Code 9 23. Exit Program Mode

13. Configuration Code 10

O
O"Setting sheet (4) (minimum reading digit
setting)"
The minimum reading digits of NW-7, Code 39, and
ITF are 3 digits by default. When using a bar code for
14. Configuration Code 11 1-digit or 2-digit patient ID, set the minimum reading
digit to [1 digit] with this setting sheet.
Read all of the following bar codes from 1 in order.
* UPC/EAN are fixed to 8 or 13 digits. Thus this set-
ting cannot be applied to these.

15. Configuration Code 12

1. Setting start

16. Configuration Code 13

2. Enable Control Set #1

17. Configuration Code 14

18. Configuration Code 15

3. Minimum Symbol Length

19. Configuration Code 16

4. 0

20. Configuration Code 17

21. Enable Manual Activation Mode

883
21.2 How to add a bar code setting

5. 0

6. 1

7. Setting completion

884
 21.3 Precautions for network connections

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chapter 21
• Replace the following terms depending on the device performing the task.
—— "this device" → "the portable device"
—— "AeroDR Access Point" → "AeroDR Portable RF Unit built-in AeroDR Access Point", or "AeroDR Portable UF Unit built-in
AeroDR Access Point"
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

21.3.1 Network connections for this device

Subnet
The subnet indicates the same address system. It indicates the range of IP addresses capable of direct communica-
tion via hubs and AeroDR Access Point.

• When the subnet is "192.168.100.xx/24", the range of IP addresses capable of direct communication becomes
"192.168.100.1" to "192.168.100.254".
• When the subnet is "10.xx.xx.xx/8", the range of IP addresses capable of direct communication becomes "10.1.1.1"
to "10.254.254.254".
• When connecting to a terminal in a different address system, it is necessary to connect via router.

Router
Hub
192.168.100.1
192.168.200.1
AeroDR Detector

PACS
(Host)
192.168.200.10
CS-7 CS-7
AeroDR Battery Charger
192.168.100.10 192.168.100.12
192.168.100.11

192.168.100.xx/24 address system

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The AeroDR SYSTEM cannot be used between different subnets. It is necessary to set up the IP address of this device and
the AeroDR SYSTEM (including AeroDR Battery Charger) within the same subnet.
• When this device is used in plural number, RM client machines between different subnets cannot be connected to RM hybrid
machines. Configure RM client machines to connect to RM hybrid machines within the same subnet.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

885
21.3 Precautions for network connections

Network port usable with this device

O
OBasic configuration
• This device has 1 wireless LAN connection port and 1 wired LAN connection port built-in. The wired LAN port and
wireless LAN port built into this device are used to connect with the AeroDR SYSTEM.
• When connecting to PDA, use 1 optional wireless LAN adapter. When connecting to other devices, either the op-
tional wireless LAN adapter or the USB wired LAN adapter can be used.

$HUR'5%DWWHU\&KDUJHU

 $HUR'5
6<67(0 $HUR'5
ZLUHG/$1 $FFHVV
 $HUR'56<67(0 3RLQW $HUR'5,QWHUIDFH8QLW
+XE EXLOWLQZLUHOHVV/$1

$HUR'5'HWHFWRU
&6
86%ZLUHG
/$1DGDSWHU

 $GGLQ/$1WR
 3'$DGGLQ
FRQQHFWWRWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ
(LWKHUZLUHGFRQQHFWLRQ :LUHOHVV :LUHOHVV ZLUHOHVV/$1
RUZLUHOHVVFRQQHFWLRQ /$1DGDSWHU /$1DGDSWHU
3'$

O
OWhen the IP address of the institution is set in the AeroDR SYSTEM
When the IP address of the institution is set in the AeroDR SYSTEM, the wired LAN of the AeroDR SYSTEM can be
connected to the LAN of the institution.

$HUR'5%DWWHU\&KDUJHU

$HUR'5
 $HUR'56<67(0 $FFHVV
 $HUR'56<67(0 3RLQW $HUR'5,QWHUIDFH8QLW
,QVWLWXWLRQ ZLUHG/$1
/$1 EXLOWLQZLUHOHVV/$1
+XE

$HUR'5'HWHFWRU
&6

 %XLOWLQZLUHOHVV
 3'$DGGLQ
/$1WRFRQQHFW
WRWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ :LUHOHVV :LUHOHVV ZLUHOHVV/$1
/$1DGDSWHU /$1DGDSWHU
3'$

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Different IP addresses are assigned when the institution is connected from the AeroDR SYSTEM wired LAN (2), and
when connected from the add-in wireless LAN (4) for connecting to the institution. When connecting to RIS/HOST in this
environment, check with the RIS/HOST manufacturer whether it is possible to set different addresses for the same AE title.
For details, refer to "Support for different addresses for the same AE title".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

886
 21.3 Precautions for network connections

O
OWhen connecting AeroDR SYSTEM with wired LAN
When connecting AeroDR SYSTEM with wired LAN, the built-in wireless LAN in this device can connect to the ac-
cess point of the institution.

Chapter 21
AeroDR Battery Charger

AeroDR
(1)AeroDR SYSTEM Access
wired LAN Point AeroDR Interface Unit
Institution
LAN
Hub Hub

AeroDR Detector
CS-7

(2)Add-in wireless LAN to connect

to the institution

(3)PDA add-in
Wireless wireless LAN
LAN adapter
PDA

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When connecting AeroDR SYSTEM with wired LAN, it is necessary to move this device, the AeroDR Interface Unit and the
hub together. It is also necessary to connect the AeroDR Battery Charger with a different hub from this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Setting of network address

O
OSetting of network address
It is necessary to set different IP addresses to their respective network ports.
They cannot connect to the network unless the IP addresses are set.

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Regarding the setting of DHCP within the institution, operation cannot be guaranteed because it cannot be checked with the
RIS/PACS connection.
• When both wired and wireless institution LAN are on the same subnet, they can be assigned the same subnet with their re-
spective settings. However, the IP addresses will be different.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

O
ORestrictions on network address changes
• Network address changes can only be made from the service tools.
• Users cannot change network addresses.
• When making rounds between different subnets, network connection is not possible.

887
21.3 Precautions for network connections

Connection to RIS/PACS from ward LAN

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the LAN of a ward (rounds location) is not connected to RIS/PACS, connection to RIS/PACS from the ward is not pos-
sible. Connect by returning to a location where it is possible to connect to RIS/PACS.
• When the LAN that can connect to the ward (rounds location) is not a dedicated RIS/PACS (radiology) LAN, sometimes
large image data cannot be transmitted due to the regulation of the institution. Check with the institution beforehand.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

O
OWhen this device and RIS/PACS are on different subnets
• When this device and RIS/PACS are on different subnets, they must be connected to LAN via router.
• When a default router is not registered for RIS/PACS, it cannot receive responses. Check that a default router is
registered for RIS/PACS.

192.168.200.1/24 Router 192.168.10.1/24

CS-7 PACS
(Host)

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Perform a ping from the connection point with the Windows command prompt. If a response is returned, a default router has
been registered.
• If a default router is not registered, communication with devices connected to the router is not possible.
• When the router is changed, it might involve costs with the RIS/PACS manufacturer.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

O
OOpening the connection port of the router
From the viewpoint of security, the router is sometimes set so that communication is not possible except on allowed
ports. When a port used for PACS (Storage)/RIS (MWM/MPPS) is closed, request the hospital network administrator
to open the port.

O
OSupport for different addresses for the same AE title
When connecting from this device using multiple network ports, connect to RIS/PACS as different IP addresses with the
same AE title. In that event, the following cases apply. Check if support is possible with the RIS/PACS manufacturer.
• Different IPs for the same AE title are not permitted because IP + AE title check is performed (connection from in-
stitution's LAN is not permitted).
• Different IPs for the same AE title can be registered separately although IP + AE title check is performed (connection
is charged separately).
• Only IP is checked. Multiple registration is possible (connection is charged separately).
• Connection is possible without a problem because IP is not checked (connection may be charged separately de-
pending on the policy of the manufacturer).

:DUG/$1 5,63$&6/$1
5RXWHU


$FFHVV
SRLQWRIWKH
LQVWLWXWLRQ

3$&6
  +RVW
.0B&6B8 .0B&6B8

&6 &6

888
 21.3 Precautions for network connections

21.3.2 Subnet configuration within the institution

Chapter 21
Whole institution is on the same network

O
OWired LAN connection
When connecting with a wired LAN, use the same port as within the radiology department to connect to RIS/PACS.

O
OWireless LAN connection
When connecting with a wireless LAN, connection is made with an IP address different from the wired LAN connec-
tion. It requires RIS/PACS support for different IPs for the same AE title. For details, refer to "Support for different ad-
dresses for the same AE title".

[[[[[[ [[[[[[

)

$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ

)

$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ
5RXWHU
)

[[[[[[
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ
5DGLRORJ\
) 
3$&6
+RVW
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connection via wireless LAN requires the setting to connect this device with a static IP address. Consult with the institution
network administrator.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

889
21.3 Precautions for network connections

LAN within the institution (wired/wireless) is on the same network

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Regarding the wired LAN, LAN for RIS/PACS is sometimes wired at the location of the portable X-ray device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

O
OConnecting with both wired LAN and wireless LAN
• Wired LAN needs to be set on the same subnet as the AeroDR SYSTEM. Acquire the IP address for AeroDR SYS-
TEM beforehand.
• Different IP addresses need to be set for wired LAN and wireless LAN. It also requires RIS/PACS support for differ-
ent IPs for the same AE title. For details, refer to "Support for different addresses for the same AE title".

[[ [[

)

$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ

)

$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ
5RXWHU
)

[[
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ
5DGLRORJ\
)  
3$&6
+RVW
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ

IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connection via wireless LAN requires the setting to connect this device with a static IP address. Consult with the institution
network administrator.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

890
 21.3 Precautions for network connections

O
OConnecting with wired LAN on the same subnet as the radiology (RIS/PACS)
If wired LAN on the same subnet as the radiology (RIS/PACS) is wired on each floor of the ward, connection to RIS/
PACS using the radiology LAN is possible even on different subnets.

Chapter 21
 B
[[ [[ [[

)

$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ

)

$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ
5RXWHU
)

$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ
5DGLRORJ\
) 
3$&6
+RVW
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ

891
21.3 Precautions for network connections

Wireless LAN is on the same network

O
OInstitution LAN is divided into multiple subnets
If institution LAN for wired LAN is divided into multiple subnets, network connection is not possible.

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the network of the radiology department is wired in the "nurse station" or "treatment room" on each floor, connection
with RIS/PACS may be possible by connecting to the network port. For available network, contact the institution network
administrator. For details, refer to "LAN within the institution (wired/wireless) is on the same network".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

O
OWireless LAN connection
Connection via wireless LAN uses a different IP address from the wired LAN, and requires RIS/PACS support for dif-
ferent IPs for the same AE title.

[[

)

[[
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ

)

[[
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ
5RXWHU
)

[[ [[
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ
5DGLRORJ\
) 
3$&6
[[ +RVW
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ

892
 21.3 Precautions for network connections

Network for wired LAN/wireless LAN differs on each floor

If institution LAN is divided into multiple subnets for both wired LAN and wireless LAN, connection to the institution
LAN is not possible.

Chapter 21
) [[

[[
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ

) [[

[[
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ

[[ 5RXWHU
)

[[
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ [[

) [[ 5DGLRORJ\

3$&6
[[ +RVW
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the network of the radiology department is wired in the "nurse station" or "treatment room" on each floor, connection with
RIS/PACS may be possible by connecting to the network port. For available network, contact the institution network adminis-
trator. For details, refer to "LAN within the institution (wired/wireless) is on the same network".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

893
 21.4 Study deletion

The procedure for deleting unnecessary studies from

the study list is as follows.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In the study list display area, only deletable studies
are displayed.
• Studies in the output summary (queue) and guarded
studies are not displayed.
• Studies deleted using the study deletion tool cannot
be restored.
• Even if a study is deleted using the study deletion • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
tool, the study data will be kept in a state which does
not appear in the study list. The study data is deleted
by the automatic deletion function when this device is 3 Press [Study Deletion].
shut down.
• To delete a study for which IN PROGRESS has been
output to the RIS in institutions operating MWM-
MPPS, suspend and delete the study on the RIS side.
If this is not done and the system is set to update
the study list using MWM in particular, the deleted
studies will be reacquired. For the reacquired studies,
the message "Study is Already Performed in Another
Console." will be displayed and it will not be possible
to begin the study. Also, although it will be possible to
delete the study in the study list screen, message of
"Unknown error is happened" will appear.
• In institutions where study sharing is in operation, do
not acquire studies from other terminals during a study
deletion operation. Note also that if a study is deleted
during transmission, the study may still be transmitted.
In this case, start the study deletion tool on the
terminal which requested acquisition of the study and
delete the study from the terminal.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Start the service tool.

2 Press the CS-7 icon.

• The study deletion screen is displayed.

894
 21.4 Study deletion

4 Select the study to delete and press 7 Press [Close].

[Delete].

Chapter 21
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 8 Close the sub-menu screen.
• You can select multiple studies with holding down the
[Shift] key on the keyboard.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

5 Press [OK] on the deletion confirmation

screen.

6 Press [OK] on the completion confirmation

screen.

895
 21.5 Exposure conditions transmission setting during ex-
posure of the stitching unit

When X-ray information is linked, you can change the transmission timing of the exposure conditions that are used
for exposure of the stitching unit.

The following lists the setup items.

O
OAuto
As is the case during the general exposure, the exposure conditions are transmitted on a selected order basis. This
mode assumes that the exposure conditions are not changed when the stitching unit is exposed.

CS-7 X-ray exposure device AeroDR stitching unit

Operators
1. Perform

AP Middle Referencing

2. Send Exposure.Condition

3. Confirm the exposure field

Transition to AP Lower

4. Send Exposure.Condition

5. Exposure

5.1 Exposure result

Transition to AP Middle

6. Send Exposure.Condition

7. Exposure

8. Exposure result

896
 21.5 Exposure conditions transmission setting during exposure of the stitching unit

O
OSemiAuto
After the exposure field has been determined on the AeroDR stitching unit, the exposure conditions are transmitted
only once. This mode assumes that the exposure conditions are changed after the exposure field has been deter-
mined.

Chapter 21
CS-7 X-ray exposure device AeroDR stitching unit
Operators
1. Perform

AP Middle Referencing

2. Send Exposure.Condition

3. Confirm the exposure field

Transition to AP Lower

4. Send Exposure.Condition

5.Exposure

5.1 Exposure result

Transition to AP Middle

6. Exposure

7. Exposure result

897
21.5 Exposure conditions transmission setting during exposure of the stitching unit

O
OStandard
Only the exposure conditions of the first order are transmitted. This mode assumes that the exposure conditions are
changed before the exposure field is determined.

Operators CS-7 X-ray exposure device AeroDR stitching unit

1. Perform

AP Middle Referencing

2. Send Exposure.Condition

3. Confirm the exposure field

Transition to AP Lower

4. Exposure

4.1 Exposure result

Transition to AP Middle

5. Exposure

6. Exposure result

898
 21.5 Exposure conditions transmission setting during exposure of the stitching unit

O
OManual
This mode does not transmit the exposure conditions. This mode assumes that the exposure conditions are manually
adjusted.

Chapter 21
CS-7 X-ray exposure device AeroDR stitching unit
Operators
1. Perform

AP Middle Referencing

2. Confirm the exposure field

Transition to AP Lower

3. Exposure

3.1 Exposure result

Transition to AP Middle

4. Exposure

5. Exposure result

The following shows the exposure conditions transmission timing table of each setup item.

Before exposure field is Reception of

Mode First exposure Second exposure
determined radiation result
Auto Transmission takes place Transmission takes place Transmission takes place Reception available
Transmission does not take
SemiAuto Transmission takes place Transmission takes place Reception available
place
Transmission does not take Transmission does not take
Standard Transmission takes place Reception available
place place
Transmission does not take Transmission does not take Transmission does not take
Manual Reception available
place place place
* "Transmission does not take place" means that the mode takes over the previous exposure conditions.

899
900
Revision History

901
Revision history

Version Date Reason for changes

A 2011-04-08 • New release
B 2011-05-20 • Addition of error codes, etc.
C 2011-06-24 • Addition of CR unit setting, etc.
D 2011-10-14 • Addition of AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting, etc.
E 2011-12-13 • Addition of AeroDR Portable UF Unit setting, etc.
F 2012-02-17 • Addition of the AeroDR Stitching Unit setting, etc.
G 2012-05-07 • Addition of V1.06 functions, error correction, changes of chapter com-
position, etc.
H 2012-11-02 • Addition of V1.07 functions, separation of the chapter of service tool
and user tool screen
I 2013-03-01 • Addition of V1.08 functions
01 2013-04-01 • Change of the company name
02 2013-07-25 • Addition of V1.09 functions

902
A47FJA01EN02
20130725CT